Escolar Documentos
Profissional Documentos
Cultura Documentos
op kers
Class 11 T
By E ran culty
-JE Fa r
IIT enior emie .
S fP r es
o titut
Ins
PHYSICS
FOR JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
SECOND
EDITION
Exhaustive Theory
(Now Revised)
Formula Sheet
9000+ Problems
based on latest JEE pattern
1. INTRODUCTION
Physics is an experimental science and experiments require measurement of physical quantities. Measuring a
physical quantity involves comparing the quantity with a reference standard called the unit of the quantity. Some
physical quantities are taken as base quantities and other quantities are expressed in terms of the base quantities
called derived quantities. This forms a system of base quantities and their units. Without performing proper
measurements we cannot describe the physical phenomena quantitatively.
2. UNITS
To measure a physical quantity we need some standard unit of that quantity. The measurement of the quantity
is mentioned in two parts, the first part gives magnitude and the second part gives the name of the unit. Thus,
suppose I say that length of this wire is 5 meters. The numeric part 5 says that it is 5 times of the unit of length and
the second part meter says that unit chosen here is meter.
There are also two supplementary units used as radian (rad) for plane angle and steradian (sr) for solid angle.
The above mentioned International System of Units (SI) is now extensively used in scientific measurements.
However, the following practical units of length are also conveniently used and are expressed in terms of SI system
of units.
10−6 m
(a) Micron is a small unit for measurement of length. 1 micron =1 µm =
(b) Angstrom is a unit of length in which the size of an atom is measured and is used in atomic physics.
1 Angstrom=1Å=10–10 m.
(c) Light year is a unit of distance travelled by light in 1 year free space and is used in astrophysics.
1 Light year = 3 × 108 m / s × 365 × 24 × 60 × 60
= 9.5 × 1015 meters
(d) Fermi is a unit of distance in which the size of a nucleus is measured. 1 Fermi = 10−15 m
(e) Atomic mass unit: It is a unit of mass equal to 1/12th of mass of carbon-12 atom.
1 atomic mass unit ≅ 1.67×10-27 kg
Note: There are only seven fundamental units. Apart from these, there are two supplementary units—plane angle
(radian) and solid angle (steradian). By using these units, all other units can be derived. However, we need to know
the fact that both radian and steradian have no dimensions.
3. DIMENSIONS
All the physical quantities of interest can be derived from the base quantities. Thus, when a quantity is expressed
in terms of the base quantities, it is written as a product of different powers of the base quantities. Further, the
exponent of a base quantity that enters into the expression is called the dimension of the quantity in that base. To
make it clear, consider the physical quantity ”force.” As we shall learn later, force is equal to mass times acceleration.
We know that acceleration is change in velocity divided by time interval but velocity is length divided by time
interval. Thus,
Velocity Length / Time
=Mass × Length × ( Time )
−2
Force =
Mass × Acceleration =
Mass × Mass ×
=
Time Time
Thus, the dimensions of force are 1 in mass, 1 in length and –2 in time. The dimensions in all other base quantities
are zero. Note, however, that in this type of calculation, the magnitudes are not considered. This is because only
equality of the type of quantity is what that matters. Thus, change in velocity, average velocity, or final velocity all
are equivalent in this discussion, as each one is expressed in terms of length/time.
1
Illustration 1: Validate the relation s = ut + at2 , where u is the initial velocity, a is the acceleration, t is the time
and s is the displacement. 2 (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The above relation is having units of displacement. To validate above relation dimensionally correct, we need
to match the dimensions of each quantity to the right of equality with the dimensions of displacement.
By writing the dimensions of either side of the equation, we obtain
1. Area m2 L2
Coefficient of elasticity
12. Nm–2 ML−1 T −2
(c) Torque
(d) Heat
4. ML T −2 (a) Force
(b) Weight
(c) Thrust
4. USES OF DIMENSIONS
The major uses of dimensions are listed hereunder:
(a) Conversion from one system of units to another.
(b) To test and validate the correctness of a physical equation or formula.
(c) To derive a relationship between different physical quantities in any physical phenomenon.
(d) Conversion from one system of units to another: If we consider n1 as numerical value of a physical quantity
with dimensions a, b and c for units of mass, length and time as M1, L1, and T1, then the numerical value of the
same quantity, n2 can be calculated for different units of mass, length and time as M2, L2 and T2, respectively.
a b c
M L T
n2 = n1 1 1 1
M2 L2 T2
(e) To test and validate the correctness of a physical equation or formula: The principle of homogeneity
requires that the dimensions of all the terms on both sides of physical equation or formula should be equal if
the physical equation of any derived formula is correct.
(f) To derive a relationship between different physical quantities in any physical phenomenon: Suppose
that if a physical quantity depends upon a number of parameters whose dimensions are not known, then the
principle of homogeneity of dimensions can be used. As we know that the dimensions of a correct dimensional
equation are equal on both sides, it can be used to find the unknown dimensions of these parameters on
which the physical quantity depends. Further, it can be used to derive the relationships between any physical
quantity and its dependent parameters.
a
Derivation: Sn = u + (2n− 1)
2
1 1
S= Sn + Sn−1 = un+ an2 − (n(n− 1) + a(n− 1)2 )
n
2 2
1 a
Sn =
u(1) + a(1)(2n−S1)
n =u + (2n− 1) (1) (We ignore ‘1’ in formula but it carries dimension of time.)
2 2
Where, n – dimension of time; u – dimension of velocity; s – dimension of displacement; and a – dimension
of acceleration.
1 . 6 | Units, Dimensions and Errors
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
The formula for displacement in nth second by a moving body is wrong using dimensional analysis.
NO! Actually, if we go back deeper in derivation we would very easily find that although the equation
looks dimensionally incorrect but it is precise and accurate.
Vaibhav Gupta (JEE 2009, AIR 54)
Illustration 2: A calorie is a unit of heat or energy and it equals about 4.2 J. Suppose that we employ a system of
unit in which the unit of mass equals α kg, the unit of length equals β metre, and the unit of time is γ second. Then,
show that a calorie has a magnitude 4.2 α −1β−2 γ 2 in terms of the new units. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Here the system is expressed in one set of units. When we want to convert the units in order of magnitude
only, the conversion factor is obtained by dividing the original units by new set of units.
1 cal = 4.2 kg m2 s–2
SI New system
N1 = 4.2 N2 = ?
M1 = 1 kg M2 = α kg
L1 = 1 m L2 = β m
T1 = 1 s T2 = γ s
Illustration 3: The centripetal force F acting on a particle moving uniformly in a circle may depend upon mass (m),
velocity (v), and radius (r) of the circle. Derive the formula for F using the method of dimensions. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: To obtain the relation between force F, mass M, velocity V and radius r, we use the dimensional analysis. The
power of base units of each quantity on the right of the equality are matched with the power of same unit on left
of the equality.
Let F = K (m) ( v ) (r )
x y z
… (i)
Here, k is a dimensionless constant of proportionality. By writing the dimensions of RHS and LHS in Eq. (i), we have
x z y
MLT −2 =
= M LT −1 L MxLy + z T − y
By equating the powers of M, L, and T of both sides, we have
x =1, y =2 and y + z =1 or z =1 − y =−1
mν2 mν2
By substituting the values in Eq. (i), we obtain F =kmν2r −1 =k ; F=
r r
(where k = 1). [The value of K cannot be calculated wring dimensional analysis].
P hysics | 1.7
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
A dimensionally correct equation may or may not be an exact equation but an exact equation must be
dimensionally correct.
Example: F = ma and F = 0.5ma, both are dimensionally correct but only one is correct w.r.t the physical
relation.
Vaibhav Krishnan (JEE 2009, AIR 22)
5. LIMITATIONS OF DIMENSIONS
(a) From a dimensionless equation, the nature of physical quantities cannot be decided, i.e., whether a given
quantity is scalar or vector.
(b) The value of proportionality constant also cannot be determined.
(c) The relationship among physical quantities having exponential, logarithmic, and trigonometric functions
cannot be established.
6. ORDER OF MAGNITUDE
In physics, we often learn quantities which vary over a wide rage. For example, we discuss regarding the size of a
mountain and the size of the tip of a pin. In the same way, we also discuss regarding the mass of our galaxy and
the mass of a hydrogen atom. Sometimes, we also discuss regarding the age of universe and the time taken by an
electron to complete a circle around the proton in a hydrogen atom. However, we observe that it is quite difficult
to get a feel of largeness or smallness of such quantities. Therefore, to express such drastically varying numbers,
we use the power of ten method.
In this method, each number is expressed as a × 10b where 1 ≤ a ≤ 10 and b is an integer. Thus, we represent the
diameter of the sun as 1.39 × 109 m and diameter of a hydrogen atom as 1.06 × 10−10 m. However, to have an
approximate idea of the number, we may round the number ‘a’ to 1 if it is less than or equal to 5 and 10 if it is
greater than 5. Thereafter, the number can be expressed approximately as 10b. Further, we then obtain the order
of magnitude of that number. Thus, now we can more clearly state that the diameter of the sun is of the order of
109m and that of a hydrogen atom is of the order of 10–10m. More precisely, we say that the exponent of 10 in such
a representation is called the order of magnitude of that quantity. Thus, now we can say that the diameter of the
sun is 19 orders of magnitude larger than the diameter of a hydrogen atom. This is due to the fact that the order
of magnitude of 109 is 9 and of 10–10 is –10. The difference is 9 –(–10) = 19.
–1 deci d
–2 centi c
–3 milli m
–6 micro m
–9 nano n
–12 pico p
–15 femto f
–18 atto a
Tip: The best way to remember is by memorizing from milli to atto, kilo to exa and thereafter to go the power of 3.
For example, if one asks for giga since we have already memorized from kilo to exa, then we need to go like kilo
mega giga and since it is 3 in the order shown, giga would be assigned a value of 3 * 3 = 9, i.e., 109.
7. SIGNIFICANT FIGURES
Significant figures in the measured value of a physical quantity provide information regarding the number of digits
in which we have confidence. Thus, the larger the number of significant figures obtained in a measurement, the
greater is the precision of the measurement.
“All accurately known digits in a measurement plus the first uncertain digit together form significant figures.”
0.071 2 3
410 m 3 4
720 2 4
2.40 3 5
1.6 × 1014 2 6
But the least precise measurement of 420.4 m is correct to only one decimal place. Therefore, the final answer
will be 441.2 m.
(b) Multiplication or division: Suppose in the measured values to be multiplied or divided, the least number of
significant digits is n; then, in the product or quotient, the number of significant digits should also be n.
Example: 1.2 × 36.72 = 44.064 ≈ 44
In the example shown, the least number of significant digits in the measured values is two. Hence, the result
when rounded off to two significant digits becomes 44. Therefore, the answer is 44.
1100ms−1
Example:= 107.8431373 ≈ 108
10.2ms−1
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Tip: In algebraic operations with significant figures, the result shall have significant figures corresponding
to their number in the least accurate variable involved.
Nivvedan (JEE 2009, AIR 113)
Illustration 4: Round off the following number to three significant digits: (a) 15462, (b) 14.745, (c) 14.750 and (d)
14.650 ×1012 . (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The values above when rounded off to the three significant figures, if the fourth digit of the number is greater
than or equal to 5, we increase the third digit by 1 and discard the digits after third digit. If the fourth digit is not
greater than or equal to 5, we discard the digits from fourth onwards and write the number up to third significant
figure. The power of 10 is not considered as the significant number.
(a) The third significant digit is 4. Now, this digit is to be rounded. The digit next to it is 6 which is greater than
5. The third digit should, therefore, be increased by 1. The digits to be dropped should be replaced by zeroes
because they appear to the left of the decimal point. Thus, 15462 becomes 15500 on rounding to three
significant digits.
(b) The third significant digits in 14.745 is 7. The number next to it is less than 5. Therefore, 14.745 becomes 14.7
on rounding to three significant digits.
(c) 14.750 will become 14.8 because the digit to be rounded is odd and the digit next to it is 5.
(d) 14.650 ×1012 will become 14.6 × 1012 because the digit to be rounded is even and the digit next to it is 5.
25.2 × 1374
Illustration 5: Evaluate . All the digits in this expression are significant. (JEE MAIN)
33.3
Sol: The result of the above fraction is rounded off to the same number of significant figure as is contained by the
least precise term used in calculation, like 25.2 and 33.3.
25.2 × 1374
We have = 1039.7838.
33.3
Out of the three numbers given in the expression, both 25.0 and 33.3 have 3 significant digits, whereas 1374 has
four. The answer, therefore, should have three significant digits. Rounding 1039.7838 to three significant digits, it
25.2 × 1374
hence becomes 1040. Thus, we write = 1040.
33.3
8. ERROR ANALYSIS
We define the uncertainty in a measurement as an ‘error’. By this we mean the difference between the measured
and the true values of a physical quantity under investigation. There are three possible ways of calculating an error
P hysi cs | 1.11
as listed hereunder:
(i) Absolute error (ii) Relative error (iii) Percentage error
Let us consider a physical quantity measured by taking repeated number of observations say x1 , x2 , x3 , x 4 ,.....
if <x> or x be the average value of the measurement, then the error in the respective measurement is
x2 − x ….; ∆x
∆x1 = x1 − x ; ∆x2 = = xexp erimental value − x true value
However, if we take the arithmetic mean of all absolute errors, then we obtain the final absolute error ∆xmean . When
arithmetic mean alone is considered, then only the magnitudes of the absolute errors are taken into account.
9. PROPAGATION OF ERRORS
Illustration 6: Two resistors R1 = 100 ± 3 Ω and R2 = 200 ± 4 Ω are connected in series. Find the equivalent resistance.
(JEE MAIN)
Sol: When resistance are added in the series, the error in the resultant combination is given by ∆R eq = ∆R1 + ∆R 2
where ∆R1 = 3 Ω and ∆R2 = 4 Ω.
The equivalent resistance R
= R1 + R=
2 (100 ± 3) Ω + ( 200 ± 4 ) Ω= 300 ± 7 Ω
Illustration 7: A capacitor of capacitance C = 2.0 ± 0.1 µF is charged to a voltage V = 20 ± 0.2 volt. What will be the
charge Q on the capacitor? Use Q = CV. (JEE MAIN)
∆Q ∆C ∆V ∆C ∆V
Sol: The relative error of result of the above product is given by =
± + where and is the relative
error in determination in C and V respectively. Q C V C V
A Bm ∆y ∆A ∆B ∆C
If y = k then, = + m + n
C n y A B C
Percentage error Percentage error Percentage error Percentage error
= + m + n
in value of y in value of A in value of B in value of C
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
•• The error in a measurement is always equal to the least count of the measuring instrument.
•• Errors never propagate particularly in case of constants.
Nitin Chandrol (JEE 2012, AIR 134)
a3b2
Illustration 8: A physical quantity P is related to four observables a, b, c and d as follows: P =
. The percentage
cd
errors of measurement in a, b, c and d are 1%, 3%, 4% and 2%, respectively. What is the percentage error in the
quantity P? (JEE MAIN)
a3b2 ∆P ∆N ∆D 3 2
Sol: The relative error of ratio of P = is calculated as =
± + where N = a b and D= c d and
cd P N D
∆N ∆D
and are the relative error in the N and D.
N D
a3b2 ∆P ∆a ∆b 1 ∆c ∆d
P= ; =3 +2 + +
cd P a b 2 c d
∆a 1 ∆b 3 ∆c 4 ∆d 2 ∆P 1 3 1 4 2
But
= = , = , = , ∴ 3×
= + 2× + × +
a 100 b 100 c 100 d 100 P 100 100 2 100 100
% error in P = 3% + 6% + 2% + 2% = 13%.
using the screw S. The side of the Vernier scale which slides over the mm sides has 10 divisions over a length
of 9 mm. Further, B and D are two movable jaws that are fixed with it. When the Vernier scale is pushed toward
A and C, then B touches A and straight side of C will touch straight side of D. In this position, however, if the
instrument is free from error, zeroes of Vernier scale will coincide with zeroes of the main scales. Further, to
measure the external diameter of an object, it is held between the jaws A and B, while the straight edges of C
and D are used for measuring the internal diameter of a hollow object.
(iii) Metallic strip: There is a thin metallic strip E attached to the back side of M and connected with Vernier
scale. When jaws A and B touch each other, the edge of E touches the edge of M. When the jaws A and B are
separated, the E moves outward. This strip E is used for measuring the depth of a vessel.
n−1
nV.S.D. =(n − 1) M.S.D.; 1V.S.D. = M.S.D.; 1 M.S.D. − 1 V.S.D.
n
n−1 1
=1 M.S.D. − M.S.D. = M.S.D.
n n
The difference between the values of one main scale division and one Vernier scale division is known as Vernier
constant (VC) or the least count (LC). This is precisely the smallest distance that can be accurately measured with
the Vernier scale. Thus,
In the ordinary Vernier caliper, one main scale division is 1 mm and 10 Vernier scale divisions coincide with 9 main
scale divisions.
9
1V.S.D.= M.S.D.=0.9mm; V.C.=1M.S.D. − 1V.S.D.=1mm-0.9mm=0.1mm=0.01cm
10
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
The main scale reading with which the Vernier scale division coincides has no connection with reading.
Chinmay S Purandare (JEE 2012, AIR 698)
1 . 1 4 | Units, Dimensions and Errors
0 5 10 0 5 10
(A) Positive zero error (B) Negative zero error
Illustration 9: N-divisions on the main scale of a Vernier caliper coincides with N + 1 divisions on the Vernier scale.
If each division on the main scale is of ‘a’ units, then determine the least count of the instrument. (IIT JEE 2003)
Illustration 10: In the diagram provided, find the magnitude and the nature of zero error. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Here as the zero division of the main scale is to the left of the zero division of the Vernier scale, thus Vernier
caliper is said to have positive error. Thus the measured length of any object will be greater than actual length. This
error is to be subtracted from measured length to get actual length.
P hysi cs | 1.15
Here, zero of Vernier scale lies to the right of zero of the main scale; hence, it has positive zero error.
Further, N = 0, x = 5, 0 0.5 1
M
L.C. of, V.C. = 0.01 cm.
V
Hence, zero error = N + x × 0.01 = 0.05cm Zero correction = –0.05cm
0 5 10
∴The actual length will be 0.05 cm less than the measured length. Figure 1.4
which can be accurately measured and hence called the least count (LC) of the screw.
Pitch
Thus, Least count= . If pitch is 1 mm and there are 100 divisions on the
Number of divisions on circular scale
circular scale, then
1mm
L.C.= = 0.01mm
= 0.001cm
= 10µm
100
Since, LC is of the order of 10µm , the screw is called a micrometer screw.
PROBLEM-SOLVING TACTICS
1. While changing units, one can visualize them as some constants multiplied to the numbers. This trick is very
helpful particularly in understanding units. Like you can cut out units from both sides of equations very easily
just like constants.
2. Application of dimensional analysis can possibly rule out inappropriate answers in multiple choice questions
(MCQs).
Further, dimensional analysis can also be used to eliminate invalid choices in MCQ even in mathematics. It
definitely saves lot of time.
3. Be careful in handling error approximation. Binomial theorem can only be applied in very low percentage of
errors (generally less than 5% error), else not.
4. One must accurately know the rules for determining significant digits and be precise while dealing with 0s
and 5.
P hysi cs | 1.17
FORMULAE SHEET
Pitch (p)
Least count of screw gauge =
Number of parts on circular scale (n)
∆x ∆a
(k) IfIf x a=
= then
x a
∆x ∆a + ∆b
(l) If x= a − b , then =
x a−b
a ∆x ∆a ∆b
(m) If x = a b or=x , then= +
b x a b
Solved Examples
the equation is incorrect. Let the correct relation be dis tance travelled
Using average speed =
T = Cma kb where C is a constant. Time taken
100.5m
Equating the dimensions of both sides, we get
= = 9.757 ms−1
b 10.3s
a
T = M MT −2 ;
P hysi cs | 1.19
V 2 ∝ λa ρb Tc ⇒ V 2 = K λa ρb Tc … (i)
...(1)
Error in the value of g
Dimensions of V, ρ, λ and T are [L T −1],
[M L −3], [L] and [M T-2] respectively. ∆g ∆ eff ∆T ∆g ∆ + ∆r ∆T
= + 2 ;⇒ = + 2
g ∆ eff T g +r T
Thus according to the equation (i),
a b c
Further, since errors can never exceed the least count of
V 2 =λ
ρ T ⇒ L2 T −2 the measuring instrument. Therefore,
b
= L a ML−3 MT −2
c
∆ =0.1cm ; ∆r =0.01cm ;
∆g 0.1 + 0.01 0.1
Matching the powers of the same units we get a−3b ∆T =0.1s=
⇒ + 2
g 98.0 + 1.28 20.0
=2, b + c = 0 and 2c = 2
∆g ∆g
⇒c = 1, b = −1 and a = −1. ⇒ = 0.0011 + 0.01 ; ⇒ = 0.0111
g g
T T ∆g
Thus we get V 2 =K × ⇒ V2 ∝ . ⇒ Percentage error ⇒ × 100 =
1.1%
λρ λρ g
Hence proved. and absolute error =∆g =g ( 0.011 ) =0.11ms−2 ;
where eff is the effective length of the pendulum equal (D) ( 2.0 ± 0.05 ) × 1011 n / m2
d Y
=
FL
=
4FL
=
( 4 )(1.0 × 9.8 )( 2)
4 π2 +
4 π ( eff ) 2 4π ( + r ) Al πd2
( )( )
2 2 2
Since g =
= = π 0.4 × 10−3 0.8 × 10−3
T2 T2 T2
= 2.0 × 10−3 N / m2
P hysi cs | 1.21
Sol: The gauge is found to have positive error. This has Sol: The 6th division of main scale coincides with the
to be subtracted from measured value to get actual 40th division of circular scale, the diameter of sphere is
value. The error is e= number of division coinciding obtained as L.S.D + C.S.D.
with main scale (n) × leas count. 1
L.C.
= = 0.01mm
Pitch 100
Least count L.C.=
Number of divisions on circular scale Linear scale reading=6 (pitch) =6mm
1
= mm = 0.01mm Circular scale reading=n (L.C. ) =40 × 0.01 =0.4mm
100
As zero is not hidden from circular scale when A and B ∴ Total reading = ( 6 + 0.4 ) =
6.4mm
touch each other, the screw gauge has positive error.
e=
+n(L.C.) =
32 × 0.01 =
0.32mm . Example 4: Least count of Vernier calipers is 0.01 cm.
When the two jaws of the instrument touch each other,
Therefore, Linear scale reading=4 × (1mm) =
4mm the 5th division of the Vernier scale coincides with a
Circular scale reading=16 × ( 0.01mm) =
0.16mm main scale division and the zero of the scale lies to the
left of the zero of the main scale. Furthermore while
∴Measured reading= ( 4 + 0.16 ) mm =
4.16mm measuring the diameter of a sphere, the zero mark of
the Vernier scale lies between 2.4 cm and 2.5 cm and
∴Absolute reading=Measures reading-e the 6th Vernier division coincides with a main scale
= ( 4.16 − 0.32 ) mm =
3.84mm division. Calculate the diameter of the sphere.
Thickness of the glass plate is 3.84 mm. Sol: As the instrument is noted to have negative error,
the measured diameter will be less then original. Thus
Example 2: The smallest division of the main scale it has to be added to measured length to get otiginal
of a Vernier calipers is 1 mm and 10 Vernier divisions length of diameter.
coincide with 9 main scale divisions. While measuring The instrument has a negative error,
1 . 2 2 | Units, Dimensions and Errors
e =( −5 × 0.01 ) cm =−0.05cm Sol: As zero mark of circular gauge lies 6 division below
the main reference line, the gauge is noted to have
Measured reading = ( 2.4 + 6 × 0.01=
) 2.46cm True positive error. Positive error e = n × Least count . This
reading = Measured reading error has to be subtracted from the measured reading.
= 2.46 − ( −0.05
= ) 2.51cm P 1mm
L.C.
= = = 0.01mm
Therefore, diameter of the sphere is 2.51 cm. N 100
The instrument has a positive zero error,
Example 5: The pitch of a screw gauge is 1 mm and
there are 100 divisions on its circular scale. When e=+n (L.C. ) =+ ( 6 × 0.01 ) =+0.06mm
nothing is put in between its jaws, the zero of the Linear scale reading=2 × (1mm) =
2mm
circular scale lies 6 divisions below the reference line.
When a wire is placed between the jaws, 2 linear scale Circular scale reading=62 × ( 0.01mm) =
0.62mm
divisions are clearly visible while 62 divisions on circular
scale coincide with the reference line. Determine the Measured reading=2+0.62=2.62mm
diameter of the wire.
True reading
= 2.62 − 0.06 = 2.56mm
JEE Main/Boards
kilogram, the unit of length equals ( β ) meter and unit of Q.21 The coefficient of viscosity ( η) of a liquid by the
time ( γ ) seconds. Show that a calorie has a magnitude method of flow through a capillary tube is given by the
formula
4.2 α −1 β−2 γ 2 in terms of new units.
πR 4P
η=
8Q
Q.14 The centripetal force (F) acting on a particle
moving in the circumference of a circle depends upon Where R= radius of the capillary tube,
its mass (m), linear velocity (v) and radius (r) of the =length of the tube, P= pressure difference between
circle. Use method of dimensions to find the expression its ends, and Q=volume of liquid flowing per second.
for centripetal force.
Which measurement needs to be made most accurately
and why?
Q.15 Show by method of dimensions:
(i) Joule = 107 Erg (ii) 105 dyne/cm2 = 104 N/m2 Q.22 Consider a planet of mass (m), revolving round
the sun. The time period (T) of revolution of the
Q.16 The latent head of ice is 80 cal/ gm. Express it in planet depends upon the radius of the orbit (r), mass
J/kg. of the sun (M) and the gravitational constant (G).
Using dimensional analysis, verify Kepler’s third law of
planetary motion.
Q.17 A satellite is revolving around the earth in a
circular orbit. The period of revolution (T) depends on
(i) Mass of earth (M) Exercise 2
(ii) Radius of orbit (r) and
Single Correct Choice Type
(iii) Gravitational constant (G)
r3 Q.1 The dimensional formula for Planck’s constant is
Use the method of dimensions to prove that T∝
GM
(A) ML2 T −1 (B) ML2 T3 (C) ML−1 T −2 (D) MLT −2
Q.18 The pressure (P), volume (V) and temperature
(T) of a real gas are related through Van der Waals Q.2 Turpentine oil is flowing through a tube of length
equation: and radius r. The pressure difference between the two
ends of the tube is P; the viscosity of the oil is given
q
P + 2 ( V − b) =
V
RT
by η =
(
ρ r 2 − x2) where ν is the velocity of oil at a
4ν
Find the dimensions of constants a and b and also write distance x from the axis of the tube. From this relation,
the units of a and b in the SI system. the dimensions of viscosity η are
Q.19 If the dimensions of length are expressed as (A) M0L0 T0 (B) MLT −1 (C) ML2 T −2 (D) ML−1 T −1
Gx C y hz where G, C and h are universal gravitational
Q.3 The time dependence of a physical quantity is
constant, speed of light in vacuum and Plank’s constant
respectively, then what are the values x, y and z?
( )
given by P=P0 exp −αt2 [Where α is a constant and
t is time]. The constant α
(A) Is dimensionless (B) Has dimensions [T-2]
Q.20 Laplace corrected Newton’s calculation for the (C) Has dimensions [T2] (D) Has dimensions of P
velocity of sound. Laplace said that speed of sound in a
solid medium depends upon the coefficient of elasticity
Q.4 which of the following quantities can be written in
of the medium under adiabatic conditions (E) and the
SI units in kg m2 A-2 s-3
density of the medium ( ρ ).
(A) Resistance (B) Inductance
E
Prove that v = k (C) Capacitance (D) Magnetic flux
ρ
1 . 2 4 | Units, Dimensions and Errors
Q.5 If L and R denote inductance and resistance Q.13 In the measurement of n from the formula
respectively, then the dimensions of L/R is 2Wg
n= , the quantity which should be measured
πr 4 θ
(A) M L T
0 0 0
(B) M L T (C) M L T (D) MLT
0 0 2 0 2 2
with the best care is
(A) W (B) (C) r (D) θ
1
Q.6 The dimensions of ∈ E2
2
Q.14 When the number 6.03587 is rounded off to the
( ∈0 : permittivity of free space; E: electric field) is
second place of decimals, it becomes
(A) MLT −1 (B) ML2 T −2 (C) ML−1 T −2 (D) ML2 T −1
(A) 6.035 (B) 6.04 (C) 6.03 (D) None
Q.24 Which of the following pairs don’t have same (A) Henry (B) Ampere (C) Candela (D) Mole
dimensions?
Q.32 The dimensional formula for which of the following
(A) Solid angle and vector
pairs is not the same
(B) Potential energy and torque
(A) Impulse and momentum
(C) (Area × velocity) and rate of change of volume with
(B) Torque and work
time
(C) Stress and pressure
(D) None of these
(D) Momentum and angular momentum
Q.25 Which of the following quantities are
dimensionless? (Symbols have their usual meaning) Q.33 Dimensional formula for coefficient of viscosity
(A)
Iω2
Gp
(B) (C)
ρvr
(D)
τθ ( η) [useF= 6πη r v(r= radius ; v = velocity;
mvr T η Iω F = viscous force ]
2
[Useful relation I= mr2, F= = 6πηrv ] (A) ML-2T-1 (B) M-1L1T-1 (C) M1L1T-2 (D) ML-1T-1
5
Q.26 Suppose A=Bn Cm, where A has dimensions LT, B Q34 The time dependence of a physical quantity P is
has dimensions L2 T-1, and C has dimensions LT2. Then −αt2
given by p=p0 e where
α is constant and t is time.
the exponents n and m have values:
The constant α
(A) 2/3; 1/3 (B) 2;3 (C) 4/5; -1/5 (D) 1/5; 3/5
(A) Is dimensionless (B) Has dimensions T-2
Q.27 A uniform wire of length L and mass M is stretched (C) Has dimensions T2 (D) Has dimensions of p
between two fixed points, keeping a tension F. A sound
of frequency µ is aimed on it. Then the maximum
Q.35 From the following pairs of physical quantities, in
vibrational energy is existing in the wire when µ =
which group dimensions are not same:
1 ML FL FM 1 F (A) Momentum and impulse
(A) (B) (C) 2 × (D)
2 F M L 2 ML
(B) Torque and energy
Q.28 The dimension ML-1 T-1 can correspond to (C) Energy and work
record time for different number of oscillations. The Given that 1 division on main scale corresponds to
observations are shown in the table. 0.5 degree. Total divisions on the vernier scale is 30 and
match with 29 divisions of the main scale. The angle of
Least count for length = 0.1cm, Least count for time =
the prism from the above data (2012)
0.1s
(A) 58.59° (B) 58.77° (C) 58.65° (D) 59°
Student Length of Number of Total time Time
pendulum oscillations for (n) period
Q.16 Let [e0] denote the dimensional formula of
(cm) (n) Oscillations (s)
the permittivity of vacuum. If M = mass, L = length,
(s)
T = time and A = electric current, then: (2013)
I 64.0 8 128.0 16.0
(A) [e0] = [M-1L-3T4A2]
II 64.0 4 64.0 16.0
III 20.0 4 36.0 9.0 (B) [e0] = [M-1L2T-1A-2]
If EI , EII and EIII are the percentage errors is g.i.e., (B) [e0] = [M-1L2T-1A]
∆g (D) [e0] = [M-1L-3T2A]
x100 for students I, II and III respectively (2008)
g
Q.17 A student measured the length of a rod and wrote
(A) EI = 0 (B) EI is minimum
it as 3.50 cm. Which instrument did he use to measure
(C) EI = EII (D) EI I is max imum it? (2014)
(1) A screw gauge having 100 divisions in the circular
Q.12 A Vernier callipers has 1 mm marks on the main scale and pitch as 1 mm.
scale. It has 20 equal divisions on the vernier scale
(2) A screw gauge having 50 divisions in the circular
which match with 16 main scale divisions. For this
scale and pitch as 1 mm.
vernier callipers, the least count is (2010)
(3) A meter scale.
(A) 0.02 mm (B) 0.05 mm
(4) A vernier calliper where the 10 divisions in vernier
(C) 0.1 mm (D) 0.2 mm
scale matches with 9 division in main scale and main
scale has 10 divisions in 1 cm.
Q.13 The density of a solid ball is to be determined in
an experiment. The diameter of the ball is measured
Q.18 A student measures the time period of 100
with a screw gauge, whose pitch is 0.5mm and there are
oscillations of a simple pendulum four times. That data
50 divisions on the circular scale. The reading on the
set is 90 s, 91 s, 95 s and 92 s. If the minimum division
main scale is 2.5mm and that on the circular scale is 20
in the measuring clock is 1 s, then the reported mean
divisions. If the measured mass of the ball has a relative
time should be: (2016)
error of 2% the relative percentage error in the density
is (2011) (A) 92 ± 5.0 s (B) 92 ± 1.8 s
(A) 0.9% (B) 2.4% (C) 3.1% (D) 4.2% (C) 92 ± 3 s (D) 92 ± 2 s
Q.14 Resistance of a given wire is obtained by measuring Q.19 A screw gauge with a pitch of 0.5 mm and a
the current flowing in it and the voltage difference circular scale with 50 divisions is used to measure the
applied across it. If the percentage errors in the thickness of a thin sheet of Aluminium. Before starting
measurement of the current and the voltage difference the measurement, it is found that when the two jaws of
are 3% each, then error in the value of resistance of the the screw gauge are brought in contact, the 45th division
wire is (2012) coincides with the main scale line and that the zero of
the main scale is barely visible. What is the thickness of
(A) 6% (B) zero (C) 1% (D) 3%
the sheet if the main scale reading is 0.5mm and the
25th division coincides with the main scale line? (2016)
Q.15 A spectrometer gives the following reading when
used to measure the angle of a prism. (A) 0.80 mm (B) 0.70 mm
JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1
density ( ρ ) , and the coefficient of viscosity ( η) of the
liquid. Obtain an expression for the critical velocity.
Q.1 A research worker takes 100 careful readings in
an experiment. If he repeats the same experiment by
taking 400 readings, then by what factor will be the Q.9 The mass m of the heaviest stone that can be moved
probable error be decreased? by the water flowing in a river varies with the speed
of water (V), density of water (d) and the acceleration
due to gravity. Prove that the heaviest mass moved is
Q.2 The length, breadth and thickness of a rectangular
proportional to the sixth power of speed. Also find the
sheet of metal are 4.234m, 1.005m and 2.01 cm
complete dependence.
respectively. Find the area and volume of the sheet to
correct significant figures.
Q.10 The frequency (f) of a stretched string of linear
mass density (m), length ( ) depends (in addition to
Q.3 The intensity of X- rays decreases exponentially
quantities specified before) on the force of stretching
according to the law I=i e−µx , where i is the initial
intensity of X-rays and I is the intensity after it penetrates k F
(F). Prove that f = where k is a dimensionless
a distance X through lead. If µ be the absorption m
constant.
coefficient, then find the dimensional formula for µ.
Q.15 It has been observed that the rate of flow (V) of Q.22 As part of their introduction of the metric system
a liquid of viscosity η through a capillary tube of radius the national convention made an attempt to introduce
(r) depends upon η ,r and the pressure gradient P decimal time. In this plan, which was not successful, the
maintained across the length ( ) of the tube. Assuming day-starts at midnight into 10 decimal hours consisting
a power law dependence, prove that the rate of flow of 100 decimal minutes each. The hands of a surviving
of liquid is proportional to r4. Also find the exact decimal pocket watch are stopped at 8 decimal hours,
expression up to a constant. 22.8 decimal minutes. What time is it representing in
the usual system?
Q.16 The height h to which a liquid rises in a tube of
radius (r) depends upon the density of the liquid (d), Q.23 Figure shows a frustum of a cone
surface tension (T), and acceleration due to gravity r₁
(g). Show that it would not be possible to derive the
relation without the additional information that h is h
inversely proportional to r. Also find the relation.
r₂
Q.17 The viscosity η of gas depends upon its mass m,
Match the following dimensionally:
the effective diameter D and the mean speed v of the
molecules present in the gas. Assuming a power law, (a) Total 1/2
find dependence of η on all these quantities. (i) π (r1 + r2 ) h2 + (r − r )
2
circumference of the
1 2
flat circular faces
Q.18 The distance moved by a particle in time from
the center of a ring under the influence of its gravity is (b) Volume
given by x=a sin ωt where a and ω are constant. If ω is (ii) 2π (r1 + r2 )
found to depend on the radius of the ring (r), its mass (c) Area of the
(m) and universal gravitation constant (G), find using curved surface (
2 2
(iii) πh r1 + r1r2 + r2 )
dimensional analysis an expression for ω in terms of r,
m and G.
Q.24 Suppose that a man defines a unit of force as
mv that which acts due to gravitation between two point
Q.19 The centripetal force is given by F = . The masses each of 1 kg and 1 m apart. What would be
r
mass, velocity and radius of the circular path of an the value of ‘G’ in this new system? What would be the
object are 0.5kg, 10m/s and 0.4 m respectively. Find value of one newton in this new system?
the percentage error in the force. Given: m,v and are Given: G (in SI unit system) =6.6 ×10−11 .
measured to accuracies of 0.005 kg, 0.01m/s and 0.01
m respectively. Gm1m2
Use F =
r 2
Q.20 An experiment to determine the specific resistance
ρ of a metal wire provided the following observations.
Q.25 The distance between neighbouring atoms or
Resistance of R= ( 64 ± 2 ) ohm; Length = (156 ± 0.1 ) cm; molecules, in a solid substance can be estimated by
calculating twice the radius of a sphere with volume
Radius r= ( 0.26 ± 0.02 ) cm
equal to the volume per atoms of the material.
πr 2R Calculate the distance between neighboring atoms in
If s is expressed as: ρ = Find the percentage error
in ρ . the following: (a) iron (b) sodium
Given: The densities of iron and sodium are 7870 kg/m3
Q.21 The consumption of natural gas by a company and 1013 kg/m3 respectively, the mass of an iron atom
satisfied the empirical equation = V 1.50 t + 0.008 t2 , is 9.27 ×10−26 kg and the mass of sodium atom is 3.82
where ’V’ is the volume in millions of cubic metre and ‘t’
×10−26 kg.
is the time in months. Expressed this equation in units
of cubic metre and seconds, put the proper units on the
α
coefficients. Assume a month is of 30 days. Q.26 If force ‘F’ and density‘d’ are related as F = ,
then find out the dimensions of α & β . β+ d
1 . 3 0 | Units, Dimensions and Errors
Q.27 If the velocity of light ‘c’ Gravitational constant ‘G’ Multiple Correct Choice Type
& Plank’s constant ‘h’ be chosen as fundamental units,
find the dimensions of mass, length & time in this new Q.5 If dimension of length are expressed as Gx, cy, hz
system. where G, c and h are the universal gravitational constant,
speed of light and plank’s constant respectively, then:
a
nRT − RTV
Q.28 In the formula; ρ = e , find the (A) x=(1/2),y=(1/2) (B) x=(1/2),z=(1/2)
v −b
dimensions of ‘a’ and ‘b’ where P=pressure, n=no. of (C) y=(-3/2), z=(1/2) (D) y=(1/2), z=(3/2)
moles, T=temperature, V=volume and R=universal gas
constant. Q.6 Which of the following groups have the same
dimensions?
Q.29 A ball thrown horizontally from a height ‘H’ with (A) Velocity, speed (B) Pressure, stress
speed ‘v’ travels a total horizontal distance ‘R’. From
dimensional analysis, find a possible dependence of ‘R’ (C) Force, impulse (D) Work, energy
on H, v and g. It is known that ‘R’ is directly proportional
to ‘v’. Comprehension Type
Q.12 The value of y in above expression is Q.17 Considering force (F), velocity (V) and Energy € as
1 1 3 7 fundamental quantities, match the correct dimensions
(A) (B) − (C) (D) of following quantities.
2 2 2 2
Column I Column II
Q.13 The value of x in the above expression is
(A) Mass (p) F1 V 0E1
1 1 3 7
(A) (B) − (C) (D)
2 2 2 2
(B) Light year (q) F1 V1E−1
Q.14 The ratio of power output of engine of two
helicopters when linear size of one helicopter is one (C) (r)
fourth of linear size of other and all other parameters 1 F3 V 0E−2
Frequency
remaining same is T
(A) 132 (B) 16 (C) 128 (D) 4 (D) Pressure (s) F0 V −2E1
Match the Columns
Q.15 Match the physical quantities in column I with Previous Years’ Questions
their dimensional formulae expressed in column II.
Column I Column II
Momentum Momentum
(A) Angular momentum
(p) ML2 T −2
(C) (D)
(B) Latent heat
(q) ML2Q −2
Position Position
Q.4 Consider the spring-mass system, with the mass (C) Torque
(r) ML2 T −1
submerged in water, as shown in the figure. The phase
space diagram for one cycle of this system is
(D) Capacitance
(s) ML3 T −1Q2
(E) Inductance
(t) M−1L−2 T2Q2
(F) Resistivity
(u) L2 T −2
Momentum Momentum
Q.7 Some physical quantities are given in column I
(A) (B) and some possible SI units in which these quantities
may be expressed are given in column II. Match the
physical quantities in column I with the units in
Position Position
column II. (2007)
P hysi cs | 1.33
Q.9 Column II shows five systems in which two objects are labelled as x and Y. Also in each case a point P is shown.
column I gives some statements about X and / or Y. Match these statements to the appropriate systems (s) from
column II. (2009)
Column I Column II
Column I Column II
(B) The gravitational potential (q) P Two ring magnets Y and Z, each
energy of X is continuously of mass M, are kept in frictionless
vertical plastic stand so that they
Z
increasing.
Y repel each other. Y rests on the base
X X and Z hangs in air in equilibrium.
P is the topmost point of the stand
on the common axis of the two rings.
The whole system is in lift that is
going up with a constant velocity.
(D) The torque of the weight of (s) A sphere Y of mass M is put in a non-
Y about point P is zero viscous liquid X kept in a container
at rest. The sphere is released and it
moves down in the liquid
Y
X
P
X
P
Q.10 L, C and R represent the physical quantities Q.12 The pairs of physical quantities that have the same
inductance, capacitance and resistance respectively. dimensions is (are) (1995)
The combinations of which have the dimensions of
(A) Reynolds number and coefficient of friction
frequency (1984)
(B) Curie and frequency of a light wave
(A) 1/RC (B) R/L (C) 1 / LC (D) C/L
(C) Latent heat and gravitational potential
Q.11 The dimensions of the quantities in one (or more) (D) Plank’s constant and torque.
of the following pairs are the same. Identify the pair are
the same. (1986)
Q.13 Let ε0 denote the dimensional formula of
(A) Torque and work the permittivity of the vacuum and µ0 that of the
(B) Angular momentum and work permeability of the vacuum. If M = mass, L=length,
T=time and I=electric current. (1998)
(C) Energy and Young’s modulus
M−1L−3 T −2 I (B) ε =
(A) ε0 = −1 −3 4 2
(D) Light year and wavelength 0 M L T I
P hysi cs | 1.35
MLT −2 I −2 (D) µ =
(C) µ0 = 2 −1 (A) 5.112 cm (B) 5.124 cm
0 ML T I
(C) 5.136 cm (D) 5.148 cm
divisions that correspond to 11 main scale divisions. The readings of the two calipers are shown in the figure. The
measured values (in cm) by calipers C1 and C2 respectively, are (2016)
2 3 4
C1
0 5 10
2 3 4
C1
0 5 10
(A) 2.87 and 2.86 (B) 2.87 and 2.87 (C) 2.87 and 2.83 (D) 2.85 and 2.82
Q.22 In an experiment to determine the acceleration due to gravity g, the formula used for the time period of
7 (R − r )
a periodic motion is T = 2π . The values of R and r are measured to be (60 ± 1) mm and (10 ± 1) mm,
5g
respectively. In five successive measurements, the time period is found to be 0.52 s, 0.56 s, 0.57 s, 0.54 s and 0.59 s.
The least count of the watch used for the measurement of time period is 0.01 s. Which of the following statement(s)
is(are) true? (2016)
(A) The error in the measurement of r is 10% (B) The error in the measurement of T is 3.57%
(C) The error in the measurement of T is 2% (D) The error in the determined value of g is 11%
PlancEssential Questions
JEE Main/Boards JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1 Exercise 1
Q. 1 Q. 3 Q.13 Q. 3 Q. 5 Q. 14
Q. 22
Exercise 2 Exercise 2
Q. 9 Q. 10 Q. 21 Q. 1 Q. 3 Q. 21
Q. 36 Q. 54 Q. 56
P hysi cs | 1.37
Answer Key
JEE Main/Boards
Exercise 1
Q.1 0.17,17% Q.2 (422+1.7) ×103cm3 Q.3 12%
Q.5 ( 2 ± 0.8 ) C
0
Q.4 (375 ± 0.17) × 104 m2 Q.6 0.8%
Q.7 4.8gm/cc Q.8 0.882 m2 Q.9 4.8g/cm3
mv 2
Q.13 4.2 α −1 β−2 γ 2 Q.14 F = Q.16 3.3 × 105 J / kg
r
1 3 1
Q.18 ML5 T −2 , L3 and kg m5 s−2 ,m3 Q.19 x = ,y = − ,z = Q.21 R
2 2 2
2
4π 3
Q.22 T2 = r
GM
Exercise 2
Q.19 A
1 . 3 8 | Units, Dimensions and Errors
JEE Advanced/Boards T
Q.16 h = k
rdg
Exercise 1
kmv
Q.17 η =
Q.1 By a factor of 4 D2
Q.3 L-1 Q.19 3.7%
Q.4 R=
S (32 ± 0.8 ) Ω,R=
S (32Ω ± 2.5% ) ; Q.20 18.6%
Q.14 0.068
H
r 4p Q.29 R = kv
Q.15 V = K g
η
Q.8 A→p,q,s,t; B→q; C→s; D→s Q.9 A→p,t; B→q,s,t; C→p,r,t; D→q Q.10 A, B, C
Q.21 C Q.22 A, B, D
P hysi cs | 1.39
Solutions
Sol 2: Volume of the cube for side of length ‘L’ is L3 Cu. Now let us first find the area,
Units. A 250 × 150m2
=
∴ V = L3 A 375 × 102 m2
=
∆V ∆L ∆A 5 4
=3 ⋅ → (1) … (i) Now
= +
V L A 250 150
Here we have to write the volume in standard form i.e.
∆A
V + ∆V = 0.046
A
V = (75)2 cm3
∆A =1750 m2
3
V = 421875cm
∴ Area = (375 × 102 + 1750)m2
3
=⇒ V 422000 cm → (1) … (ii)
Area = (375 + 0.17) × 10 4 m2
∆V ∆L
Now = 3. .V
V L Sol 5: T initial 0
= (15 ± 0.5)°Cc
0
0.1 = (17 ± 0.3)°C
T final c
∆
=V 3 × 421875
75 Rise in temperature =
= (2 ± 0.8).
∆S ∆r ∆S ∆r
= 2. ⇒ × 100= 2 × 100 Sol 12: V = At2 + Bt + C
S r S r
Now using the concept of Dimensions; all the individual
∆S terms i.e. At2 , Bt, C should have the dimension of
⇒ 2(0.4%) =0.8 %
× 100 = velocity v.
S
T −1 ] m / s.
∴ C [L=
=
mass And Bt = [L T −1 ]
Sol 7: Density =
volume
⇒ B[T] = [L T −1 ] = T −2 ] m / s2
⇒ B [L=
Mass = 5.74 gm → 3 significant digits
And At2 = [L T −1 ]
Volume = 1.2 cc → 2 significant digits
A[t2 ] = [L T −1 ]
5.74
∴d= = 4.78 = 4.8 gm/cc A [L T −3 ] ⇒=
= −3
A [L T = ] m / s3 .
1.2
Final result should be in 2 significant digits. Calorie = 4.2[M2 L2 T −2 ]
Now we change the system of units to m', L', T'
Sol 8: Diameter given
m' = αm
= 1.06 m → 3 significant digits.
L' = β
π.d2
And now Area = t' = r t.
4
A = 0.88206 ⇒ A = 0.882m2 m' L'2 T' −2
Hence=
C 4.2 ⋅ ⋅
α β2 γ
Sol 9: Solution similar to Q.7
4.2
C= [m' L'2 T'−2 ]
Sol 10:=
m1 1.2kg → 2 Significant digits αβ2 γ −2
2 −2
Sol 15: (i) Dimensions of energy = [M L T ] L = [M−a+ c L3a+b + 2c T −2a−b −c ]
Let M1 ,L1 , T1 represent mass in gram, length in cm and Comparing the corresponding component;
time in second. c−a =0
And M2 ,L2 , T2 represents mass in kilogram, length in 3a + b + 2c =1c
meters and time in second.
−2a − b − c =0
Now n1 [M1 L21 T1−2 ] = n2 [M2 L22 T2−2 ] Solve for a,b,c.
M L 2 T −2 ∗ This is a typical question from this chapter. So keep
n1 = n2 2 2 2 practicing problems of this type.
M1 L1 T1
Sol 20: V∝(k)a(E)b(ρ)c
(
⇒ n1 = n2 103 (102 )2 1 ⇒ n=
1 )
n2 × 103+ 4
−3 −1
k = [ML−1 T −2 ] , E = [ML2 T −2 ] , ρ =[ML ] , V = [L T ]
7
⇒ n=
1 n2 × 10
Now follow the same procedure as above to find a=1,
7
⇒ 1 Joule = 10 erg. [ n2 = 1] b = 1 / 2, c = −1 / 2
1
∴ λ.E = h Sol 6: (C) Physically the term ∈ E2 equals the electric
c
2
energy per unit volume. i.e Energy/Volume.
[ML2 T −2 ][L] [M L2 T −2 ]
⇒ h= = [ML2 T −1 ] ∴ = [M L−1 T −2 ]
[L T −1 ] [L3 ]
[∝] =[M0 L0 T −2 ]
Sol 10: (B) This is just a generalization of the previous
∴ The dimension are [M0 L0 T −2 ] or [ T −2 ] which is question.
option B.
X = Ma Lb T −c
Mag. Flux: [ML2 T −2 A −1 ] Sol 11: (B) Here volume is an intrinsic property of each
sphere. So, it will have the same number of significant
So, the answer is resistance. i.e option (A). digit even they are measured in bulk.
Tip: - Don’t get tensed up if you don’t know these terms. ∴ The final result should be having 3 significant digit.
You will learn them later. For time being, do remember Just multiply 1.75 × 25 and then scale the result to 3
them. significant digits.
4 3
Sol 5: (B) Using the dimension mentioned in the above Sol 12: (A) V= πr
question, 3
∆v ∆r
We get [L / R] = [M0 L0 T ] = 3.
v r
Tip: - Once check the dimension of (R*C)!! ∆v ∆v
= 3(2%) ⇒ = 6%
v v
P hysi cs | 1.43
2WgL 1
Sol 13: (C) η = n1 = n2
16
4
πr θ
∆n ∆w ∆g ∆L ∆r ∆θ Now=
n1 1=
n2 16 watts.
= + + + 4 +
n w g L r θ
Sol 19: (C) T = 2π / g
Here a small error in r gets magnified by four times in
L
the final result. So, it has to be measured with care. g= 4 π2
T2
Sol 14: (B) Refer theory. ∆g ∆L ∆T ∆g
∴= + 2 ⇒ = 1 + 2(3) =7%
g L T g
Sol 15: (C) Let us first write dimension of Young’s (P.S:- Error is an error either it is +ve or –ve. It effect the
Module in fundamental units Y = [M L −1 −1
T ] end result)
a b c
And now let Y = v A F 1
Sol 20: (B) S1 − S2 = ut + at2
−1 a −2 b
y = [L T ] [L T ] [M L T ] −2 c 2
∆
=s 1.1m and= a 0.5m / s2
t 1s,=
y = [Mc La+b + c T −a−2b −2c ]
Sol 17: (D) This is very same as Q.15 Sol 22: (A) Refer theory.
Try this yourself !
Sol 23: (D)
Sol 18 : (A) Power = [M L2 T −3 ] 3.06
+ 1.15
2 −3
n1 [M1 L1 T1 ] =n2 [M2 L2 T2 ] 2 −3 1.2
↓
m1 20kg
= = 20M2 → (1)
2.55 + 1.15
L1 10m
= = 10L2 → (2)
↓
T=
1 5=
s 5 T2 → (3) 2.6 + 1.15
m L 2 T −3 ↓
Now n1 = n2 2 . 2 . 2
m1 L1 T1
3.75
1 1 2 ↓
. . (5 )
3
n1 = n2
20 10 3.8
1 . 4 4 | Units, Dimensions and Errors
Sol 24: (D) (A) Solid angel and unit vector. ∴ We get three equations;
Both are dimension. Unit vector is just unit magnitude a + b = 0→ (1) …(i)
with a direction.
a + c = 0 → (2) …(ii)
(B)Potential energy and torque
In a crude way, energy is similar to work −2a =−1 → (3) …(iii)
Which is F.s and torque is s × F . Hence the dimension ∴ We get a = 1 / 2, b = c = −1 / 2
would of course be the same.
F
We can also check by comparing down the dimension ∴ We have µ = λ. [ λ is any constant]
ML
of them.
(C) Area × Velocity = [L2][LT–1] = [L3T–1] Sol 28: (D)
3
∆v [L ] (A) Moment of a force = Force × Perpendicular distance
= = [L3 T −1 ] . Hence same.
∆t [T]
= M L T-2 × L = M L2 T-2
Sol 30: (B) Let M' , T' ,L' be the value of mass, time and
n m
Sol 26: (D) A = B C length respectively in the new system.
1
[L T] = [L2 T −1 ]n [L T[L2 ]m
T] = [L2n+m T −n+ 2m ] We know = that M' 2M = and T' T
2
Comparing respective exponents; ∴ n' [M1 L'2 T −2 ] = n [M L2 T −2 ]
2n + m =1…(i)
→ (1)
m'
2m − n = 1 …(ii)
→ (2) n' [M1 L' 2 T'−2 ] = 8 [ L'2 2−2 T'−2 ]
2
Give the value of n and m. 1
n1 =8 × =1
8
Sol 27: (D) Aim of the question is to use dimensional
analysis. Sol 31: (A) Refer theory.
∆ρ ∆m ∆r ∆L
Sol 35: (D) Light year is the distance travelled by the ∴ × 100 = +2 + × 100
light in one year. ρ m r L
After substituting the values, we get the maximum
percentage error in density = 4 %
Previous Years’ Questions
X Capacitance Sol 7: (D)
Sol 1: (B)=
[Y] =
Z2 2
(Magnetic induction) Dipole moment = (charge) × (distance)
Electric flux = (electric field) × (area)
M−1L−2Q 2 T2 −3 −2 4 4
= [M L T Q ]
2 −2 −2
M Q T Sol 8: (A) Least count (LC)
Pitch 0.5
1 = = = 0.01
Sol 2: (D) ε E2 is the expression of energy density Number of divisions on circular scale 50
2 0
(Energy per unit volume) Now, diameter of ball
1 ML T 2 −2
=(2 × 0.5 mm) + (25 − 5) (0.001) =1.2 mm
E2
ε0= = −1 −2
[ML T ]
2 L
3
FL 4FL (4)(1.0 × 9.8)(2)
Sol 9: (B) Y= = =
∆q Al π d l π (0.4 ×10 −3 )2 (0.8 ×10−3 )
2
Sol 3: (D) C =
∆V
= 2.0 ×1011 N / m2
A ∆q ( ∆q)L
or ε0 = or ε0 =
L ∆V A.( ∆V) ∆Y ∆ d ∆l
Further
= 2 +
∆V ( ∆q)L ∆V Y d l
X=
ε0L = L
∆t A ( ∆V) ∆t
∆ d ∆ l 0.01 0.05 11
But [A] = [L ] 2 ∴ ∆ Y 2
= + y = 2 × + × 2.0 ×10
d l
0.4 0.8
∆q
∴ X= = current = 0.225 ×1011 N / m=
2
0.2 ×1011 N / m2
∆t
(By rounding off)
l3 =
Sol 4: (A) V = (1.2 × 10−2 m)3 =×
1.728 10−6 m3
or (Y + ∆ Y)= (2 + 0.2) ×1011 N / m2
Length (l) has two significant figures, the volume
(V) will also have two significant figures. Therefore, the
Sol 10: (A) Length of air column in resonance is odd
correct answer is =V 1.7 ×10−6 m3
λ
integer multiple of .
4
1 . 4 6 | Units, Dimensions and Errors
l V
Sol 11: (B) T= 2 π or Sol 14:
V (A) R =
g R= i
i
∆R ∆V ∆i
t l (4 π2 )(n2 )l ∆R⇒ ∆V ∆i =+
= 2π ∴g = ⇒ =+ R V i
n g t2 R V i
∆g ∆l 2∆ t ∆V
% error in g = × 100 = + × 100 × 100 = 3
g l t V
∆V
0.1 2 × 0.1 ⇒ = 0.03
EI = + ×100 = 0.3125% V
64 128 ∆i
Similarly, = 0.03
0.1 2 × 0.1 i
EII = + ×100 = 0.46875%
64 128 Hence
∆R
= 0.06
0.1 2 × 0.1 R
EIII = + ×100 = 1.055 %
20 36 ∆R
So percentage error is × 100 =
6%
R
Hence EI is minimum.
Sol 15: (C)
Sol 12: (D) Least count of vernier calipers
1
LC 1MSD − 1 VSD
= L.C =
60
Smallest division on main scale 9
= Total Reading = 585 + 58.65
=
Number of divisions on vernier scale 60
d 1 1 dθ ∆θ
Exercise 1 [Hint : =
dx θ
− . = !]
θ2 dx θ2
∆ Re =
0.2
Sol 2: Length
= (L) 4.234m → 4 significant digits
Breadth
= (B) 1.005m → 4 significant digits ∆ R e = (6 ± 0.2)Ω
V
Sol 3: I = I0 e−µx Sol 5: Ohm’s Law: V=IR ⇒ R =
I
Now mx should have the dimension [M0 L0 T0 ] 6.4 ∆R ∆V ∆I
R
= = 3.2Ω and = +
⇒ µ.[L] =
[M L T ] 0 0 0 2 R V I
Sol 7: Refer to the solution of Q11 (Ex – 1) and Q19 (Ex – Sol 11: Now if there is an error, the next possible value
2) and try it yourself. of L would be 100.3 or 100.4 cm.
i.e least count for r=2.34 cm, L.C=0.01 cm
Sol 8: Vc ∝ [d]a (ρ)b (η)c
Vc = [L T −1 ]
(L+r)
ρ =[M L−3 ]
d = [L]
[∴ 2.35 or 2.36]
η =[ML−1 T −1 ]
and
= for t 2.3s
= , L.C 0.1s
[L T −1 ] = [L]a [ML−3 ]b [ML−1 T −1 ]c
∆g ∆L ∆r ∆T
[L T −1 ] = [Mb + c La−3b −c T −c ] ∴ = + + 2
g L r T
b+c =0 ∆g 0.1 0.01 0.1
∴ = + + 2.
a − 3b − c =1 g 100.2 2.34 2.3
−c =−1 ∆g
= 0.092
g
We get c =
1, b =
−1, and a =
−1
η ∆g
∴V ∝ × 100 =
9.2%
c dρ g
‘T’ has to be measured more accurately because each
Sol 9: m ∝ V a (d)b (g)c
error gets double magnified in calculating g.
m = [M]
1 1 1
V = [L T −1 ] Sol 12: = + ⇒ f = 14.3
f v u
d = [M L−3 ] 1 1 1
= +
f 50.1 20.1
g = [L T −2 ]
∆f ∆V ∆ 4
And then = +
[M] = [LT −1 ]a [ML−3 ]b [L T −2 ]c f2 v 2 u2
[M] = [M6 La−3b + c T −a−2c ] ∆V ∆u 2
∆
=f + f
b = 1; a − 3b + c = 0; − a − 2c = 0 v 2 u2
0.5 (0.2)
⇒ c=
−3 and a =
6 =∆f + (14.3)
2
2 2
(50.1) (20.1)
∴ m ∝ V 6 . d g−3
∆f =0.4cm
kV 6 d
⇒ m= Focal length
= (14.3 ± 0.4)cm
g3
wair
Sol 10: f ∝ ma 6 Fc Sol 13: Specific gravity (s) =
w water
−1
[f] = [T ] ∆s ∆wair ∆w water
=
+
m ≡ [M] s wair w water
≡ [L] ∆s 0.1 0.1
= +
F ≡ [M L T −1 ] s 10 5
∆R ∆h ∆L Sol 17: η ∝ ma Db v c
= 2 +2
R h L
η ≡ [M L−1 T −1 ]
∆R 0.001 0.1
=
2 + m ≡ [M]
R 0.085 4.4
∆R D ≡ [L]
= 0.068
R V ≡ [L T −1 ]
p
c Solve in a similarly way to Q.16
a b
Sol 15: V ∝ n r
Sol 18: ω ∝ r a mb Gc
V-Rate of flow ⇒ Volume/time ≡ [L3 T −1 ]
[ω] ≡ [m0o LL0o TT0]o ]
η ≡ [m L−1 T −1 ]
[r] ≡ [L]
r ≡ [L]
p m ≡ [M]
≡ [m L−2 T −2 ]
p ≡ [m L−1 T −2 ] *
L
G = [M−1 L3 T −2 ]
Now solving for the constants a, b, c gives us the result.
And solve for a, b, c
[L3 T −1 ] = [M L−1 T −1 ]a [L]b [M L−2 T −2 ]c
Now proceeding; πr 2R
Sol 20: ρ =
[L] ≡ [ML−3 ]a [M L T −2 ]6 [L T −2 ]c [L]d
1 . 5 0 | Units, Dimensions and Errors
∆ρ ∆r ∆R ∆L G 6.6 × 10−11 N.
∴=
=2⋅ + +
ρ r R L But according to the problem, the force is 1 unit.
Now let us examine the units of (1) and (2) for (1); unit m 9.27 × 10−26
is m2/s and dimension is [L3 T −1 ] . And for 2; unit is v
= = = 1.178 × 10−29 m3 / atom
ρ 7870
m3 / s2 and dimension is [L3 T −2 ].
4 πr 3
m3 r 1.41 × 10−10 m
Now, = 1.178 × 10−29 m3 ⇒ =
∴ V (1.50 m3 / s1 )t + 0.008 ⋅ 1 t2
= 3
s12
Hence, the distance between atoms is d = 2r= 2.82 ×
By changing the unit system; 10-10m
2.4
= 8(2.4) + 22.8 hours. = 19.747 hours Sol
= T −1 ] G [M−1 L3 T −2 ]
27: c [L=
100
h = [M L2 T −1 ]
⇒ 19 Hr, 10 minutes, 50 seconds Now for mass M = cx Gy hz
Finding the value x, y, by following the method
Sol 23: Aim of the question is to do dimensional analysis. described in Q11 (Ex1)
Circumference will have dimension [L]
Volume [L3] −a
nRT RTV
Area [L2] Sol 28: p = e
v −b
Verify the options for correct choices There we can use the ideal gas equation;
pv = nRT
Sol 24: For m
=1 m
=2 1kg and=
r 1 m, In solving question involving RT; we can replace RT by
PV and then proceed.
G.(1)2
The force
= F = GN a
1 So, now will have a dimensionally [M0 L0 T0 ]
RTV
P hysi cs | 1.51
Sol 29: R ∝ Ha v b gc ∆m
First let us find
m
r ≡ [L]
∆m =π sec2 θ
H ≡ [L]
∆m 1 2
v ≡ [L T −1 ] = = → (1)
m sin θ cos θ sin2θ
g ≡ [L T −2 ]
∆m
a −1 b −2 c Now for to be minimum;
[L] ≡ [L] [L T ] [L T ] m
sin2θ has to be maximum
[L] ≡ [La+b + c T −b −2c ]
sin2θ = n π / 2 (n is odd)
a + b + c = 1 → (1) … (i)
θ = n.π / 4
b + 2c =0 → (2) … (ii) Hence θ = 450 is the answer.
And also given that, R ∝ v, a = 1, b = 1
Sol 2: (C) The least count of the vernier can be measured
So a + c =0 by using the formula;
1 + 2c =
0 =L.C 1 M.S.D − 1 V.S.D
⇒ c=
−1 / 2 and a =
1/2 M.S.D → Main scale division.
⇒ 1 USD = 0.1 – 0.02 (i) Only quantities with same physical dimension can be
added or subtracted.
1 USD = 0.08 cm
∴ b must be having a dimension of volume.
And the number of division of vernier scale =10.
∴ Length of vernier scale = 0.8
Comprehension Type
[∴ 0.8 ×10]
Sol 7: (B) b is dimension same as V.
Sol 3: (C) Explained briefly in the above question.
a
(a) 0.00145 → 3 Sol 8: (C) Now must be having dimensioned same
as P. V2
(b) 14.50 → 4
⇒ a ≡ PV 2
(c) 145.00 → 5
x − 3y − 2z =
2 Previous Years’ Questions
−2z =−3
Sol 1: (C) N= Number of electrons per unit volume
Solving them gives;
∴ [N] = [L−3 ], [e] =[q] =[It] =[AT]
3 1 7
λ= , y=− , x=
2 2 2 [M−1 L−3 T 4 A2 ]
[ ε0 ] =
x Substituting the dimension we can see that,
P1 L
Sol 14: (C) = 1
P2 L2 Ne2
= [T −1 ]
m ε0
P1
7/2
= (4)
= 128 Angular frequency has also the dimension [T −1 ]
P2
Sol 15: A→r, B→ w, C→p, D→t, E→q, F→s, G→u, H→v Substituting the values, we get λ ≅ 600 mm
Angular momentum = MVR = MLT–1(L)=MLT–1 Sol 3: (D) Momentum is first positive but decreasing.
Latent heat = L2T–2 Displacement (or say position) is initially zero. It will
first increase. At highest point, momentum is zero and
Torque = F×R = MLT–2×L=ML2T–2
displacement is maximum. After that momentum is
Capacitance downwards (negative) and increasing but displacement
is decreasing. Only (D) option satisfies these conditions.
Charge AT
= = = M−1L−2 T 4 A2 In all the given four figures, at mean position the
Potential Difference ML T −3 A −1
2
position coordinate is zero.
Magnetic Flux At the same time mass is starting from the extreme
Inductance = = ML2T–2A–2 position in all four case. In figures (C) and (D), extreme
Current
position is more than the initial extreme position. But
Resistivity = ML3T–3A–2 due to viscosity opposite should be the case.
Magnetic Flux = ML3T–3A–2 (B =F/qv) Correct answer is (B), because mass starts from positive
extreme position (from uppermost position). Then,
Magnetic Energy Density = ML–1T–2
it will move downwards or, momentum should be
negative.
Sol 16: A→q, B→p, C→r, D→q
L
Angle and unit vector = MoLoTo Sol 4: (B) t ≡ ∴ L ≡ tR ≡ ohm-second
R
Power = W/T=M L T 1 2 –3
q2 q2
Work = F,D=M L T 1 2 –2 U≡ ∴ C≡ ≡ coulomb2 / joule
2C U
Therefore, A→q, B→p, C→r, D→q
q
q ≡ CV ∴ C ≡ ≡ coulomb / volt
V
Sol 17 A→s, B→p, C→q, D→r
−e
L≡
Force → F, Velocity → V, Energy → E di / dt
Angular momentum
[ML2 T −1 ] 1
Speed of light, c =
ε0 µ0
Latent heat
[L2 T −2 ]
1 1
Torque ∴ [µ 0 ] =
= = [MLT −2 I −2 ]
2
2 −2
[ML T ] [ε0 ] [c] [M L T I ] [LT −1 ]2
−1 −3 4 2
Capacitance
[M−1L−2 T2Q2 ] φ weber
Sol 14: (A, B, D) (A) L = or henry=
i ampere
Inductance
[ML2Q −2 ]
di e
(B) e = −L ∴ L =−
Resistivity dt
(di/ dt)
[ML3 T −1Q −2 ]
volt-second
or henry=
Sol 7: A → p, q; B → r, s; C → r, s; ampere
D → r, s 1 2 2
(D)
= U = L i i Rt
2
Sol 8: A → p, q, t; B → q; C → s, D → s
∴L =Rt or henry = ohm –second
Sol 9: A → p, t; B → q, s, t; C → p, r, t, D → q
40 s
Sol 15: (A, C)
= T = 2s.
Sol 10: (A, C) Resistance = ML2T‒3 A‒2 20
∆g ∆T 200 × 0.05 1
×100 =
−200 × =
− −5%
= 1 main scale division = cm
g T 2 8
1
1 vernier scale division = cm
4MLg 10
Sol 16: (A) Y = & % ymax = %M + %L + %l + 2%d
πld2 1
So least count = cm
0.5 40
Least count of both instrument, ∆ =∆d = =5 × 10 −3
100 For screw gauge,
−3
∆ 5 × 10 pitch (p) = 2 main scale division
% × 100
= = 2%
0.25 P
So least count p =
∆d 5 × 10 −3 100
%d × 100
= × 100
= 1%
d 0.5
Sol 21: (C)
Here we see that, contribution of , = 2%
In first; main scale reading = 2.8 cm.
Contribution of d = 2% d = 2 × 1 = 2%
1
Hence both terms and d contribute equally. Vernier scale reading = 7 × 0.07 cm
=
10
So reading = 2.87 cm;
Sol 17: (B)
In second; main scale reading = 2.8 cm
Main scale division (s) = .05 cm
Vernier scale reading =
49
Vernier scale division (v) = = .049 −0.1 −0.7
100 7× = = −0.07 cm
10 10
Least count = .05 – .049 = .001 cm
so reading = (2.80 + 0.10 − 0.07) cm = 2.83 cm
Diameter: 5.10+24 × .001 =5.124 cm
∆Y ∆ ∆Tmean =
0.02
∴ × 100 = × 100
Y
0.02
From the observation 1 =MSR+20(LC) ∴ error in T is given by
∴Error × 100 =
3.57%
0.56
2 =MSR+40(LC) 1
Error in r = × 100 =10%
⇒ Change in lengths = 25(LC) 10
∆g
Sol 20: (B, C) For vernier callipers, ∴ × 100 ≈ 11%
g
2017-18 100 &
op kers
Class 11 T
By E ran culty
-JE Fa r
IIT enior emie .
S fP r es
o titut
Ins
PHYSICS
FOR JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
SECOND
EDITION
Exhaustive Theory
(Now Revised)
Formula Sheet
9000+ Problems
based on latest JEE pattern
PlancEssential
Questions recommended for revision
2. M OT I O N I N A
STRAIGHT LINE
1. INTRODUCTION
Mechanics is a branch of Physics which deals with motion of bodies and the cause behind it. Motion of a body that
includes position and time can be determined with respect to other bodies. Branch of physics that deals with the
motion of particles and rigid bodies irrespective of the forces responsible for their motion is known as Kinematics.
When the size of a body is too small such that its motion can be described by a point mass moving along straight
line, motion is known as rectilinear motion or one-dimensional motion.
1.1 Motion
A body is said to be in motion when it changes its position with respect to the observer while it is said to be at rest
when there is no change in its position with respect to the observer. For instance, two passengers travelling in a
moving train are at rest with respect to each other but in motion for a ground observer.
1.2 Particle
Physically, a particle is considered as analogues to a point. A body with a definite size is considered as a particle
when all of its parts have same displacement, velocity and acceleration. The motion of any such body can be
studied by the motion of any point on that body.
A B
Given the co-ordinates of two points A & B, the position vector of B w.r.t. A can be
rA
determined as follows:
rB
x
AB =rB − rA ⇒ AB =( xB − x A ) ˆi + ( yB − y A ) ˆj + ( zB − z A ) kˆ
O
Figure 2.2
∧ ∧ ∧
Illustration 1: Find the torque (τ) exerted by force i + j + 2k at point P (2, 3, 4) w.r.t origin. Given, τ =rxF
r : is the position vector of point at which force is acting w.r.t to the given point (in this case origin) (JEE MAIN)
2 . 2 | Motion in a Straight Line
Sol: The force F is given in Cartesian coordinates. Express the position vector of point P in Cartesian coordinates
and find the cross product τ =rxF
Here= r op= P [ P : Position vector of point P]
∧ ∧ ∧
⇒ r = 2 i + 3 j + 4k
∧ ∧ ∧ i j k
and F = i + j + 2k ∧ ∧
∴ τ = r ×F 2 3 4 = i(2) − j(0) + k(
−1) = τ = 2 i −k
∧ ∧ ∧ 1 1 2
= i + j + 2k
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Illustration 2: Find the distance and displacement of a particle travelling from one point to another, say from pt. A
to B, in a given path. (JEE MAIN)
50 m
10 m
40 m
A B
55 m
Figure 2.4
P hysics | 2.3
Illustration 3: If a particle travels a distance of 5 m in straight line and returns back to the initial point, then find
(i) Total distance travelled (ii) Total displacement (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: Distance is length of the path travelled. Displacement is the vector from initial point to final point.
Total distance travelled = 5 + 5 = 10 m (since, initial and final 5m
position of the particle are same). A B
Displacement = 0 m (5-5=0, since the directions are opposite
and cancel with each other) Figure 2.6
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
displacement distance
≤
time elapsed time elapsed
therefore,
•• Average speed does not mean the magnitude of the average velocity vector.
Vaibhav Krishnan (JEE 2009 AIR 22)
Illustration 4: If a train moves from station A to B with a constant speed v =40 km/h and returns back to the initial
point A with a constant speed V2=30 km/h, then calculate the average speed and average velocity. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Average speed is distance covered divided by time taken. Distance is length of the path travelled. Average
velocity is displacement divided by time taken. Displacement is the vector from initial point to final point.
s
Let the distance AB = s, Time taken by train from A to B, t1 =
v1
2 . 4 | Motion in a Straight Line
Illustration 5: Consider a train moving from station A to B with a constant speed of 40 km/h for half the time and
with constant speed of 30 km/h for the next half time of that journey. Calculate the average speed of the whole
journey. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Average speed is distance covered divided by time taken. Here we need to assume total time of journey as T.
The speed in each half of the time T is constant. The distance covered in each half of the time can be easily written
in terms of T. Average speed is distance covered divided by total time taken.
Let AB = s and T = Total time of journey. A B
T T 40km/h 30km/h
∴ Distance travelled in first half time is, s1 = v1
2 2 Figure 2.7
v1 (T / 2) + v 2 (T/ 2) v1 + v 2 40 + 30
Vavg = ; Vavg = = ; Vavg = 35 km / h
T 2 2
Illustration 6: A particle travels half of the journey with speed 2 m/s. For second half of the journey, the particle
travels with a speed of 3 m/s for half of remaining time, and for the other half it travel with a speed of 6 m/s. Find
its average speed. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: Average speed is distance covered divided by total time taken. Here we need to assume total distance of
journey. The speed in each part of the journey is constant. The time taken to cover each part of the journey can be
calculated in terms of distance covered and speed in that part.
Let total distance = 4 s 2s 2t
Let the time taken in covering last half of journey = 2t
Speed= 2m/sec 3m/Sec 6m/Sec
For the first half of the journey
speed (v1) = 2 m/s and distance (d1) = 2s Figure 2.8
dis tance 2s
So, time taken ( t1=
) = = s
speed 2
For the first part of second half of the journey
v2 = 3 m/s ; t2 = t s; ∴ d=
2 v 2 x t=
2 3t
Sol: The relative velocity between observer and men is (15 + v). The relative velocity between observer and cyclists
is (25 + v). In the reference frame of observer, the time elapsed between the passing of two men is 20/(15 + v) and
the time elapsed between the passing of two cyclists is 30/(25 + v). Both these timings should be equal so that the
men and cyclists pass the observer together.
Let us assume that a man, a cyclist and the observer are in line. Now after t time, the observer again meets with
the next man and cyclist
15m/Sec 15m/Sec
20 m Men
15t
25 m/Sec 25m/Sec
Vm/S Cyclists
30 m
25t
Observer
vt
Figure 2.9
Illustration 8: 2 Cars A and B simultaneously start with speed 20 m/sec and 30 m/sec, respectively. Both cars have
constant but different acceleration. On completing the race simultaneously, if the final velocity of A is 90 m/sec,
then find the final velocity of B (i.e. vB) (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: Both cars travel equal distance in equal time. Initial velocities and accelerations of both the cars are different.
Problem can be best solved by equating the average velocities.
Since both cars travel equal distance at equal intervals of time, both cars have equal average speeds, i.e. average
speed of car A = average speed of car B and for
u+ v 20 + 90 30 + vB
for constant
for constant accn , avg velocity =
acceleration, ;∴ =; ⇒ VB = 80 m/s
2 2 2
∆r dr
Instantaneous velocity
= v lim
= .
∆t →0 ∆t dt
(a) As the time interval tends to zero (i.e. ∆t → 0 ), the displacement vector ∆ r is along the direction of motion
of the particle i.e. tangential to the path of the particle at that instant. Thus, the instantaneous velocity direction is
always tangential to the path of the the particle.
(b) Instantaneous speed and the magnitude of instantaneous velocity are always the same.
i.e. Instantaneous Speed= | Instantaneous Velocity |
A particle moving on a straight line, say along the x-axis, has an instantaneous velocity as follows
∆x
v ( t ) − lim − lim v
∆t →0 ∆t ∆t →0 av
A particle is said to move in a uniform velocity when the velocity of a particle remains constant with respect to time.
It is said to be accelerated when velocity changes with respect to time.
y
Illustration 9: The distance travelled by a particle in time t is given by s(t) = (2.5 m / s2 )t2 . V
A
Find (a) the average speed of the particle during time 0 to 5 s?
rA rAB
(b) The instantaneous speed at t = 5.0 sec (JEE MAIN) B
rB
Sol: Average speed is distance covered divided by total time taken. Instantaneous
O x
speed is the rate of change of distance at a particular instant.
(a) The distance travelled during time 0 to 5.0 sec Figure 2.10
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Retardation:
•• Negative acceleration does not imply retardation.
•• Retardation refers to decrease in speed and not velocity.
Nivvedan JEE 2009 AIR 113
Illustration 10: Consider a particle moving with a speed of 5 m/s towards east. After 10 sec N
velocity of particle is 5 m/s towards north. Find the average acceleration and its direction.
(JEE MAIN)
∧ W E
v =5i
Sol: Average i acceleration is change in velocity divided by total time taken.
∧ ∧
v = 5 i ; vf = 5 j ∴ v f − fi = 5ˆj − 5iˆ S
i
∧ ∧
∧
Times j v f − v=i =10
v f = 5 interval 5 jsec
−5 i ˄
J
∧ ∧ v f − vi
We
v f −know
v i = 5 jthat
− 5 i, Average acceleration = Time interval ˄
i
∧
5 j − 5i 1 ∧ ∧ Figure 2.11
⇒ accnavg = = ( j − i )m / sec2
10 2
˄
1 ˆ ˆ 1 (-i)
∴ | accnavg =| ( j − i) = m / sec2
2 2
∧ ∧ ˄
1 45° J
Unit vector along that direction=
is ( j − i ) [ 45° due west of north]
2
Figure 2.12
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
u o
ds
v= ⇒ ds = vdt ; ⇒ ds =(u + at)dt [∴ v =u+ at] … (ii)
dt
Suppose the position of the particle is ‘0’ at time ‘0’ and ‘s’ at time ‘t’. Hence,
at t = 0, s = 0 and
at t = t, s = s
s t
Integrating equation (ii) for these limits: ∫ ds
= ∫ (u + at)
o o
t t t
s t 1
⇒ s = ∫ udt + ∫ at.dt ⇒ s − 0 = u t + ∫ tdt ⇒ s = ut + at2
0
0 0
0
0
2
Sol: We know the formula for displacement in nth second. For 5th second and 10th second we get two equations
and two variables u and a. So we solve the equations to get the values of u and a.
We know that displacement in nth second (xnth)
a
xnth =
u + (2n − 1) … (i)
2
a
Given x5th = 50 ; ⇒ u + [2x5 − 1] =50
2
9
⇒u + a =
50 … (ii)
2
a
and X10th = 100 ; ⇒ u [2x10 − 1] =
100
2
19
⇒ u+ a =
100 … (iii)
2
19 9
Subtracting (ii) from (i), we get − a =100 − 50 ⇒ a =10m / sec2
2 2
9
Substituting the value of a in (i) we get, u + (10) = 50 ⇒ u = 50 − 45 = 5m / s
2
1
x ut + at2
We know =
2
1
At t= 7 sec
= x (5)(7) + (10)(7)2 =35 + 245 = 280 m
2
We know v = u + at
1 1 1 1
= x8 − x6 = ut + at2
X 6 sec to 8 sec − ut + at2 = u ( 8 − 6 ) + a 82 − 62 =
5(2) + x10(28) =
150m
2 at t 2 2 2
= sec
8= at t 6 sec
Illustration 12: Consider a particle moving in a straight line with constant acceleration, has a velocity ( v p ) = 7 m/s
and VQ = 17 m/s, when it crosses the point P and Q respectively. Find the speed of the particle at mid-point of PQ.
(JEE ADVANCED)
7m/sec 17m/sec
P Q
Figure 2.13
Sol: Initial and final velocity are known for constant acceleration and a particular displacement. The final velocity
for half the displacement is to be calculated. This problem can be easily solved by using the third equation of
motion with constant acceleration.
Let the mid-point be R VP=7m/sec V=VR VQ=17m/sec
Then PR=RQ = s (say) R
S S
From PR From RQ P Q
x=s x=s
Using formula v2= u2 + 2ax
We get: VR2 = 72 + 2as ... (i)
And 172 = VR2 + 2as ... (ii)
Subtracting (i) from (ii) we get 17 - VR = VR - 7 ⇒ 2VR = 17 + 7
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
⇒ 2VR2 = 338 ∴ VR =
13m / sec
Illustration 13: A body moving with uniform acceleration covers 24 m in the 4th second and 36 m in the 6th
second. Calculate the acceleration and initial velocity. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: We know the formula for displacement in nth second. For 4th second and 6th second we get two equations
and two variables u and a. So we solve the equations to get the values of u and a.
a
Sn =
u + (2n − 1)
2
a
∴ 24 =u + (2x4 − 1) … (i)
2
a
u + (6x2 − 1)
36 = … (ii)
2
12
From equation (i) and (ii) we get 12 =
2a ⇒ a == 6m / s2
2
6
From equation (i) 24 =
u + (2x4 − 1) ⇒ u = 3 ms-1
2
Observation: Motion is independent of the mass of the body and hence no equation of motion considers mass.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
1
r = ro + s = ro + ut + at2
2
s is the displacement and not the distance of the particle. The values are different when u and a are
of opposite sign or u ↑↓ a.
Case 1: When velocity u is either zero or parallel to a, then motion is simply accelerated and in this case
1
distance is equal to displacement. So, we can write, d= s= ut + at2 .
2
Case 2: When u is not parallel to a, the motion is first retarded and then accelerated in opposite direction.
Hence distance is either greater than or equal to displacement ( d ≥s).
Illustration 14: Consider an object moving with an initial velocity of 10 m/s and u = 10 m/sec
acceleration of 2 m/s2 . Find distance travelled from t = 0 to 6 s. (JEE MAIN)
a = 2m/s²
Sol: Distance covered is equal to displacement if the object moves in a straight
line and there is no change in direction of motion. If direction of motion Figure 2.15
changes, distance should be calculated separately for different parts of the
path.
t=0 t=6 sec t=5 sec
2
1
V= u + at ; ⇒ 0= 10 + ( −2)t ; ⇒ t =5sec ; x=
5 ut + at
2
1 1
= (10)(5) + ( −2)(5)2 ; = 25m and =x6 (10)(6) + ( −2)(6)=2
24m x=0 x=24m x=25m
2 2
Figure 2.16
∴ Total distance travelled = 25 + (25-24) = 26 m.
Illustration 15: Consider a body moving with velocity 9 m/s. It is subjected to acceleration of -2 m/s2. Calculate the
distance travelled by the body in fifth second. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: Distance covered is equal to displacement if the object moves in a straight line and there is no change in
direction of motion. If direction of motion changes, distance should be calculated separately for different parts of
the path.
Advice: Distance travelled in 5th sec need to be calculated and not the displacement.
Hence displacement formula cannot be used directly to calculate the distance in nth second.
According to equations of motion, t=5
a 2
Sn =
u + (2t − 1) =
9 − (2x5 − 1) = 9 – 9 = 0 t=0 t=1 t=2 t=3 t=4 t=4.5
2 2
The value obtained is for displacement and not distance. Figure 2.17
1 1
(S4.5 – S=
4
) 2 9x4.5 − x2x(4.5)2 − 9x4 − x2(4)2
2 2
= 2 [4.5-4.25] = 2 x 0.25 = 0.5 m
s a
(u²/2g) v
+ +
(u/g)(2u/g)
O O
t t
(u/g) - g
-v -a
t
Figure 2.19
Observation:
(a) Time taken by the body to travel up is equal to the time taken by the body to fall down. Time of descent (t2)
= time of ascent (t1) = u/g
(b) The speed with which a body is projected up is equal to the speed with which it comes down. The magnitude
of velocity at any point is same whether the body is moving up or down.
Illustration 16: Consider a ball being thrown upwards with an initial speed of u. Find out u if the ball is at a height
of 80 m and the interval between two times is 6 s. (g=10 m/s2) (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Body thrown vertically upwards reaches the maximum height, stops momentarily and then starts falling
vertically downwards. So for any point at height less than the maximum height, the body will reach the point twice
during its travel, first time while ascending and the second time while descending.
u = u m/s, a=g= -10 m/s2 and s=80 m
1
s ut + at2 , we have
Substituting the value, = 80 = ut – st2 or st2 – ut + 80 = 0
2
P hysi cs | 2.13
Figure 2.21
(c) The following graphs show the distance, velocity and acceleration with respect to time (for free fall):
s v O
g
tan=g
t t t
Figure 2.22
1
( e) The distance covered
(d) covered in
in the
the nth
nth sec,
sec,h
= n
2
g(2n − 1)
Hence the ratio of the distance covered in 1st, 2nd, 3rd sec, etc. is 1:3:5 i.e. only odd integers.
These results obtained are the corollary of the Galileo’s Theorem:
For a uniform accelerating body, the distance travelled is always odd ratio, i.e. 1:3:5:7, for regular time interval.
(e) As h = (1/2) gt2, i.e. h α t2, distance covered in time t, 2t, 3t, etc., will be in the ratio of 12:22:32, i.e. square of
integers.
2 . 1 4 | Motion in a Straight Line
Illustration 17: A ball is thrown upwards from 40 m high tower with a velocity of 10 m/s. Calculate the time when
it strikes the ground. (g = 10 m/s2) (JEE MAIN)
Sol: In the second equation of motion with constant acceleration, value of all the quantities need to be substituted
with proper sign. If the displacement and acceleration are in the opposite direction of initial velocity (taken as
positive) then substitute there values with negative sign.
u = + 10 m/s, a = - 10 m/s2
+ve u=+10m/s
a=g=-10m/s²
s = -40 m (at the point where the ball strikes the ground) s=0
1
Substituting in
Substituting s = ut + at2 ,,we
in S= wehave
have -40=10t – 5t2
2
40m
or 5t2 -10t -40 = 0 or t2-2t-8=0
Solving this, we get t = 4 s and -2 s. Considering the positive value, t=4 s.
Figure 2.24
CC
t=1s
tAB=tDE=2s
t =t =1s
t=0 B D EC CD
t=2s
t=-2s A
E t=4s
Figure 2.25
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
We have studied the formula of maximum height (H) and time taken (T) to reach the point where the
velocity of an object becomes zero under gravity.
The retardation of the object is ‘g’. H = u2/2g and T = u/g.
This can be used for an object having an initial velocity ‘u’ and retardation ‘a’.
P hysi cs | 2.15
(i) v = ds
dt
(ii)=
a
dv
= v
dt
dv
ds
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
dv
a= v is useful when acceleration displacement is known and velocity displacement is required.
ds
Yashwanth Sandupatla (JEE 2012, AIR 821)
Illustration 18: For a particle moving along x-axis, displacement time equation is x = 20 + t3 - 12t.
(a) Find the position and velocity of the particle at time t = 0
(b) Find out whether the motion is uniformly accelerated or not.
(c) Find out the position of particle when velocity is zero. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Displacement is given as a function of time. Differentiating the equation of displacement w.r.t time we get the
velocity as a function of time. Differentiating the equation of velocity w.r.t time we get the acceleration as a function
of time.
(a) x = 20 + t3 - 12t ... (i)
At t = 0, x = 20 + 0 – 0 = 20 m
dx
By differentiating Equation (i) w.r.t. time i.e. =
v = 3t2 − 12 … (ii)
dt
Velocity of particle can be obtained at time t.
At t = 0, v = 0 -12 =- 12 m/s
dv
(b) Differentiating equation (ii) w.r.t. time, we get the acceleration=
a = 6t
dt
As acceleration is a function of time, the motion is non-uniformly accelerated.
(c) Substituting v=0 in equation (ii) 0=3t2 – 12
From the above equation, t = 2 sec. Substituting it in equation (i) we have x=20 + (2)3 - 12(2) or x=4 m
2 . 1 6 | Motion in a Straight Line
Illustration 19: Acceleration of an object moving in straight line is a=v2 and initial velocity of that object is u m/sec
Find. (i) v(x) i.e. velocity as a function of displacement (ii) v(t) i.e. velocity as a function of time (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: Acceleration is the differentiation of velocity with respect to time. We can use the following transformation:
dv dv dx dv
a
= = = v
dt dx dt dx
v x
dv dv dv v x v
a v= v 2 ; ⇒ dx Integration ⇒ ∫
v o∫
(i)
= = = dx ⇒ nv u =x o ; nv − nu =
x ; ⇒ n x ; ∴ v= u e x
=
dx v u
u
v t
dv dv dv 1 v t 1 1 1 1 1 − ut u
(ii)=
a = v2 ; = dt Integration ⇒ ∫ ∫
= dt ; ⇒ − u =t o ⇒ − − =t ; ⇒ =−t + = ;∴ v =
dt v 2
uv
2
o
v v u v u u 1 − ut
Basic Graphs: (a) A linear relationship between x and y represents a straight line. y
(d) A quadratic equation in x and y represents a parabola in x-y graph. E.g., y=3x2 +2,
y2=4x, x2=y-2
dy
Analysis of Graphs: (a) If z = , the value of z at any point on x-y graph can be obtained by the slope of the graph
at that point. dx
(b) If z = y(dx) or x(dy), the value of z between x1 and x2 or y1 and y2 is obtained by the area of graph between x1
and x2 or y1 and y2.
A B gc
a decreasing g c
decreasing
f
velocity d e
t
an
nt
v=constant
st
ta
n
ns
co
co
Retardation(a)
v=
a
constant S increasing f
a increasing ° velocity
Time(t) e x O t x
° Time
Figure 2.27 Figure 2.28
P hysi cs | 2.17
Illustration 20: Displacement–time graph of a particle moving in a straight line is shown in the Fig. 2.30. State
whether the motion is accelerated or not. Describe the motion of the particle in detail. Given s0=20 m and t0=4 s.
V=5 m/s (JEE MAIN)
+ve
S=-20 m S=0
t=0
Figure 2.29
Sol: The velocity of the particle at any instant is the slope of the displacement time graph at S
that instant. If the slope is constant, velocity is constant.
Slope s–t is a straight line. Hence, velocity of particle is constant. At time t = 0, displacement t
of the particle from its mean position is –s0 i.e. -20 m. Velocity of particle, t
°
s0 20 -S
V slope
= = =
t0
= 5m / s
4
°
Figure 2.30
At t = 0 particle is at –20 m and has a constant velocity of 5 m/s. At t0 = 4 sec, particle will
pass through its mean position.
Inference: Displacement–time graph for uniformly accelerated or retarded motion is a parabola. Since, for constant
1
acceleration, then relation between displacement and time is: =s ut ± at2 which is quadratic in nature. Thus,
2
displacement–time graph will be parabolic in nature.
Illustration 21: Acceleration–time graph of a particle moving in a straight line is shown in Fig. 2.31. At time t=0,
velocity of the particle is 2 m/s. Find velocity at the end of the 4th second. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The area enclosed by the acceleration-time graph between t = 0 and t = 4s will give a(m/s²)
the change in velocity in this time interval.
4
dv = a dt
or change in velocity = area under a-t graph
t(s)
1 O 2 4
Hence v f −
= vi = 8m / s ; ∴ v f = v i + 8 = (2 + 8)m / s = 10m / s
(4)(4)
2 Figure 2.31
2 . 1 8 | Motion in a Straight Line
X θ = 0º, so v = 0
i.e. line parallel to time axis represents that the particle is at rest
O T
Figure 2.32
X θ = 90º,so v = ∞
i.e. line perpendicular to time axis represents that particle is changing its position
with constant time. Hence, particle possesses infinite velocity (which is not
O T possible practically).
Figure 2.33
i.e. line with constant slope represents uniform velocity of the particle.
O T
Figure 2.34
i.e. line bending towards position axis x represents increase in velocity of particle.
Hence, the particle possesses acceleration.
O T
Figure 2.35
i.e. line bending towards time axis t represents decreasing velocity of the particle.
Hence, the particle possesses retardation.
O T
Figure 2.36
i.e. line with negative slope represents that particle returns to the point of reference
(i.e. negative displacement).
O T
Figure 2.37
X Straight line segments of different slopes represent that velocity of the body is
different for different intervals of time.
A B C
O T
S
Figure 2.38
P hysi cs | 2.19
x At one point the particle has two positions, which is not possible.
T
O
Figure 2.39
x Particle moves towards origin initially and after that moves away from origin.
T
O
Figure 2.40
θ = 0º, a = 0, v = constant
Velocity
i.e. line parallel to time axis represents that the particle is moving with constant
O velocity.
Time
Figure 2.41
θ = 90º, a = ∞, v is increasing
Velocity
i.e. line perpendicular to time axis represents that particle is increasing in velocity,
O but there is no change in time. Hence the particle possesses infinite acceleration
Time (which is not possible practically).
Figure 2.42
O
Time
Figure 2.43
i.e. line bending towards velocity axis represents increasing acceleration of the
body.
O
Time
Figure 2.44
i.e. line bending towards time axis represents the decreasing acceleration in the
body.
O
Time
Figure 2.45
2 . 2 0 | Motion in a Straight Line
Velocity
i.e. acceleration is constant and positive but initial velocity of the particle is
O negative.
Time
Figure 2.46
i.e. acceleration is constant and positive but initial velocity of the particle is positive.
O
Time
Figure 2.47
i.e. acceleration is constant and negative but initial velocity of the particle is
O positive.
Time
Figure 2.48
i.e. acceleration is constant and negative but initial velocity of the particle is zero.
O
Time
Figure 2.49
i.e. acceleration is constant and negative but initial velocity of the particle is
Velocity
O
negative.
Time
Figure 2.50
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
The following are the lists of motions that are not possible v s
practically:
•• Slopes of v-t or s-t graphs can never be infinite at any
point, because infinite slope of v-t graph means infinite
t t
acceleration. Similarly, infinite slope of s-t graph means
infinite velocity. Hence, the graphs shown here are not
possible. v s
•• At a particular time, two values of velocities v1 and v2 v₁ s₁
or displacements S1 and S2 are not possible. Hence, the
v₂ s₂
following graphs shown here are not possible.
t t
t₀ t₀
GV Abhinav (JEE 2012 AIR 329)
Figure 2.51
P hysi cs | 2.21
Illustration 22: At t = 0, a particle is at rest at origin. For the first 3 s the acceleration is 2 ms-2 and for the next 3 s
acceleration is -2 ms-2. Find the acceleration versus time, velocity versus time and position versus time graphs.
(JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: The area enclosed by the acceleration-time graph and the time-axis Y
between t = 0 and t = t gives the change in velocity in this time interval. 2m/s²
Similarly the area enclosed by the velocity-time graph and the time-axis a(m/s²)
between t = 0 and t = t will give the change in displacement in this time
interval. O X
3 6 t(s)
Given for the first 3 s acceleration is 2 ms-2 and for next 3 s acceleration is
-2 ms-2. Hence acceleration–time graph is as shown in the Fig. 2.52. -2m/s²
The area enclosed between a–t curve and t-axis gives change in velocity for Figure 2.52
the corresponding interval. Also at t=0, v=0, hence final velocity at t=3 s
will increase to 6 ms-1. In next 3 s the velocity will decrease to zero. Hence
the velocity–time graph is as shown in figure.
Note that due to constant acceleration v-t curves are taken as straight line. 6
5
Now for x-t curve, we will use the fact that area enclosed between v-t curve v(m/s) 4
3
and time axis gives displacement for the corresponding interval. Hence 2
displacement in the first 3 s is 4.5 m and in next 3 s is 4.5 m. Also the x–t 1 1 2 3 4
curve will be of parabolic nature as the motion has a constant acceleration. 0
Therefore, x–t curve is as shown in figure. t(sec.)
Y
x(m) Figure 2.53
9
4.5
O X
3 6 t(s)
Figure 2.54
Illustration 23: The graph in the Fig. 2.55 shows the velocity of a body plotted as a function of time.
(a) Find the instantaneous acceleration at t = 3 s, 7 s, 10 s, and 13 s.
(b) Find the distance travelled by the body in the first 5 s, 9 s, and 14 s
(c) Find the total distance covered by the body during motion.
(d) Find the average velocity of the body during motion.
(JEE ADVANCED)
C
45
40
35
30
V(m/s)
25 A B
20
15 D
10 J
5 E F G H
O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
t(sec.)
Figure 2.55
Sol: The area enclosed by the acceleration-time graph and the time-axis between t = 0 and t = t gives the change
in velocity in this time interval. Similarly the area enclosed by the velocity-time graph and the time-axis between
2 . 2 2 | Motion in a Straight Line
6. RELATIVE MOTION
(a) Motion of an object is dependent on observation.
(b) Motion is a relative term.
(c) An observation of motion is always with respect to frame of reference.
Thus the relative velocity of any two bodies moving from the same origin is equal to the vector difference of their
velocities.
P hysi cs | 2.23
The relative rate of change of VBA gives relative acceleration of B with respect to A and is given by aBA = aBO - aAO
and aAB = aAO - aBA
Fact: Distance between two objects with respect to is independent of the reference frame.
If ‘x’ is the minimum distance between the two objects at time ‘t’ then in any frame of reference the minimum
distance of the objects remains constant at time ‘t’.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
To find the relative velocity of an object A (say) w.r.t to object B (say), inverse (change the direction of)
the velocity vector of object B and then add it to velocity of A.
Anurag Saraf (JEE 2011 AIR 226)
Illustration 24: A man whose velocity in still water is 5 m/s swims from point A to B (100 m down-stream of A)
and back to point A. Velocity of the river is 3 m/s. Find the time taken in going down-stream and upstream and the
average speed of the man during the motion. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The velocity of man in ground frame is the vector sum of the velocity of river and the velocity of man in river
frame. In going down-stream, the magnitude of velocity of river and the magnitude of velocity of man in river
frame are added to get the magnitude of velocity of man in ground frame. In going up-stream, the magnitude of
velocity of river is subtracted from the magnitude of velocity of man in river frame to get the magnitude of velocity
of man in ground frame.
During down-stream, velocity of the man = Vm = Vmw + Vw = 3 + 5 = 8 m / s Time taken during down-stream = 100/8
=12.5 s
During upstream, velocity of the man = V= m ' Vmw + Vw = - 5 + 3 = - 2 m/s.
Illustration 25: Yashwant started moving with constant speed 10 m/s to catch the bus. When he was 40 m away
from the bus, it started moving away from him with acceleration of 2 m/s2. Find whether Yashwant catches the bus
or not. If yes, at what time he catches the bus. If no, then find the minimum distance between the bus and him.
(JEE MAIN)
u=0m/s
10m/sec a=2m/s²
Bus
40 m
w.r.t bus
u=10m/s u=0m/s
a=0m/s²
a=2m/s²
Bus
40 m
Figure 2.57
2 . 2 4 | Motion in a Straight Line
Sol: This problem is best solved in the reference frame of bus. In this frame the initial velocity of Yashwant is
towards the bus (assumed positive) and the acceleration of Yashwant is in the opposite direction i.e. away from the
bus (assumed negative).
Yashwant moves with the initial velocity of 10 m/s and acceleration of 2 m/s2.
Assuming Yashwant never catches the bus, let us find the distance at which his velocity becomes zero.
We know v2 = u2 + 2as
100
s
Here v = 0; u = 10 m/s; a = -2 m/s2 ; ∴ 02 = (10)2 + 2(-2) s ⇒= = 25m
4
Our assumption was right, since Yashwant travels only 25 m in the positive direction in bus reference frame.
So, minimum distance = 40 – 25 = 15 m.
(a) Minimum distance between two bodies in motion: Minimum distance between two moving bodies or the
time taken when one body overtakes the other can be solved easily by the principle of relative motion. Here we
consider one body to be at rest and other body to be in relative motion of the other body. By combining two
problems into one, the solution becomes easy. Following examples will illustrate the statement.
Illustration 26: Car A and car B start moving simultaneously in the same direction along the line joining them.
Car A moves with a constant acceleration a = 4 m/s2, while car B moves with a constant velocity v = 1 m/s. At time
t = 0, car A is 10 m behind car B. Find the time when car A overtakes car B. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: This problem is best solved in the reference frame of any one of the two cars (say car B). In this frame the
initial velocity of car A is in the direction away from car B (assumed negative) and the acceleration of car A is in the
direction towards the car B (assumed positive).
Given: uA=0, uB=1m/s, aA = 4 m/s2 and aB = 0
Assuming car B to be at rest, we have
uAB = uA – uB = 0 – 1 =- 1m/s
aAB = aA – aB = 4 – 0 = 4m/s2
Now, the problem can be solved easily as follows:
Substituting the proper values in equation
a=4m/s² v=0m/s
A 10 m B
+ve
Figure 2.58
1 1 1 ± 1 + 80 1 ± 81
s ut + at2 , we get 10 =−t + (4)(t2 ) or, 2t2 − t − 10
= = =0 or, t =
2 2 4 4
P hysi cs | 2.25
a=4m/s² v=1m/s
A 10 m B
+ve
Figure 2.59
1±9
= = or t 2.5 s and − 2 s Ignoring the negative value, the desired time is 2.5 s.
4
B
(b) River–boat problem
y
We come across the following three terms: vbr w
v = absolute velocity of river x
r
v br = velocity of boatman with respect to A
Figure 2.60
river or velocity of boatman in still water and v b = absolute velocity of
boatman
Here, it is important to note that v br is the velocity of boatman with which he steers and v b is the actual velocity
of boatman relative to ground.
Further, v= b v br + v r Now, let us derive some standard results and their special cases.
A boatman starts from point A on one bank of a river with velocity v br in the direction shown in Fig. 2.60.
River is flowing along positive x-direction with velocity v r .
Width of the river is w, then
Therefore, vbx = vrx + vbrx = vr – vbr sinθ and vby = vry + vbry = 0 + vbr cos θ
Now, time taken by the boatman to cross the river is:
w
t=
v br cos θ … (i)
Further, displacement along x-axis when he reaches on the other bank (also called drift) is:
w
x=
v bx t =
(v r − v br sin θ)
v br cos θ
w
x=
(v r − v br sin θ) ... (ii)
v br cos θ
Or the three special cases are:
(i) Condition when the boatman crosses the river in shortest interval of time
From Equation (i) we can see that time (t) will be minimum when θ = 0º, i.e. the boatman should steer his boat
perpendicular to the river current.
B
w
Also, tmim
= = as cos θ 1
v br
vbr
(ii) Condition when the boatman wants to reach point B,
i.e. at a point just opposite from where he started A vr
In this case, the drift (x) should be zero. Therefore x = 0
Figure 2.61
w
Or (v r − v br sin θ) 0 or vr = vbr sin θ
=
v br cos θ
2 . 2 6 | Motion in a Straight Line
vr v B
vr
sin θ
or = = or θ sin −1 r
v
v br v br br
vbr
Hence, to reach point B, the boatman should row at an angle θ = sin-1 upstream
from AB. Further, since sin θ ≤ 1.
A vr
So, if vr ≥ vbr, the boatman can never reach point B. If vr = vbr, sin θ =1 or 90º it
Figure 2.62
is quite impossible to reach B if θ =90º. Moreover it can be seen that vby = 0 if
vr = vbr and θ = 90º. Similarly, if vr ≥ vbr, sin θ > 1 i.e. no such angle exists. Practically it is not possible to reach B if
river velocity (vr) is too high.
v v
When vr < vbr: In this case x = 0, when θ = sin-1 r or s= w at θ sin−1 r
v mim v
br br
dx d w
When vr > vbr: In this case x is minimum, where = 0 ; (vr − vbr sin θ) = 0
dθ dθ vbr cos θ
v
or − v br + v r sin θ =0 or θ =sin−1 br
vr
Now, at this angle we can find xmin and then smin
vr v
=smin w = at θ sin −1 br
v
br vr
Illustration 27: A man rows a boat at 4 km/h in still water. If he is crossing a river with a 2 km/h current
(a) What will be the direction of the boat, if he wants to reach a point directly opposite the starting point on the
other bank?
(b) With these conditions, how much time it will take for him to cross the river, given the width of river is 4 km?
(c) What will be the minimum time and what direction should he head to cross the river in shortest time?
(d) If he wants to row 2 km up the stream and back to the origin, what will be the time required? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The velocity of boat in ground frame is the vector sum of the velocity of river and the velocity of boat in river
frame. If the boat heads in the direction perpendicular to the direction of river flow in the frame of the river, it will
cross the river in shortest time. But in doing so it will get drifted in the direction of the river flow as well, and thus
will not reach the other bank directly opposite to the starting point.
(a) Given, that vbr = 4 km/h and vr = 2 km/h ;
1 vr −1 2 −1 1
vbr-vr vbr+vr
∴ θ sin−=
= sin
= sin
= 30o0
=30
v
br 4
2
D C D C
To reach the point directly opposite to starting point, the boat
Figure 2.63(a)
should head at an angle of 30º with AB or 90º + 30º = 120º with
the river flow.
P hysi cs | 2.27
4 2
= 30º ; t
vbr = 4 km/h and θ= = h
4 cos30o 3
w 4
(c) For shortest time θ = 0º and tmin= = = 1h
v br cos30 o 4
Hence, he should incline his boat perpendicular to the current for crossing the river in shortest time of 1 h.
CD DC 2 2 1 4
(d) t = tCD + tDC
= or t + = + =1 + = h
vbr − v vbr + vr 4−2 4+2 3 3
r
(c) Aircraft wind problem: The only difference between this and the river boat is that v br is replaced by v aw
(velocity of aircraft with respect to wind or velocity of aircraft in still air), v r is replaced by v w (velocity of wind)
and v b is replaced v a (absolute velocity of aircraft) . Further, =
v a v aw + v w. Following example will illustrate it.
Illustration 28: An aircraft flies 400 km/h in still air. If 200√2 k/h wind is blowing from the south and the pilot wants
to travel from point A to a point B, north east of A. Find the direction in which the aircraft is to be steered and time
of journey if AB = 100 km. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The velocity of aircraft in the ground frame is the vector sum of its velocity N
B
in the wind frame and the velocity of the wind. This velocity in ground frame is
along the known direction A to B which is 45o east of north. The direction of va 45° vw=200 km/h
wind is towards north. The direction of velocity in wind frame is un-known which
C
can be found using triangle law of vector addition. 45°
A vaw =400 km/h
Give that v w = 200 2km / h vaw = 400 km/h. v a should be along AB or in north-
east direction.
Figure 2.64
The direction of v aw should be such that the resultant of v w and v aw is along
AB or in north-east direction.
If v aw makes an angle α with AB as shown in Fig. 2.64, then by applying sin law in triangle ABC,
AC BC BC o
200 2 1 1
= or sin α =
= sin 45 = ; ∴ α = 30o
sin 45o sin α AC 400 2 2
Therefore, the pilot should steer in a direction at an angle of (45o + α) or 75o from north towards east.
v a 400 sin105o km
Further, = = ; | vo | × (400)
sin (180° − 45° − 30° ) sin 45° sin 45o h
cos15o km 0.9659 km
= (400) = (400) 546.47 km / h
sin 45o h 0.707 h
AB 1000
∴ The time for journey from A to B=
is t = h ; t=1.83 h
| v a | 546.47
^
Vertical (J)
(d) Rain problem: In these type of problems, we again come across three
terms v r , v mand v rm , Here
vr ==velocity
velocityof ofrain
rain
^
vm = = vvelocity
elocity of man (itmay
man (it maybebevelocity
velocityofof cyclist
cyclist or or velocity
velocity of motorist
of motorist also )
also) Horizontal (i)
and v rm =
and = vvelocity
elocity of rain
rain with
withrespect to man
respect to man Figure 2.65
Here, v rm is the velocity of rain which appears to the man. Now, let us take one example of this
2 . 2 8 | Motion in a Straight Line
Illustration 29: Rain appears to fall vertically to a man walking at a rate of 3km/h. At a speed of 6 km/h, it appears
to meet him at an angle of 450 of vertical. Find out the speed of rain. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: This problem is best solved by using Cartesian coordinates. Take x-axis along the horizontal and y-axis
vertically upwards. The velocity of man is along positive x-axis. The velocity of rain has both horizontal and vertical
components. Express the velocity of man and rain in terms of unit vectors î and ˆj .
Let î and ˆj be the unit vectors in horizontal and vertical directions, respectively.
Velocity of rain
∧ ∧
v=r a i + b j … (i)
Then the speed of rain will be
|=
vr | a2 + b2 ... (ii)
∧
In the =
first case, v m velocity
= of man 3 i
∧ ∧
∴ v rm =v r − v m =(a − 3) i + b j It seems to be in vertical direction. Hence, a – 3 = 0 or a = 3
∧
In the second case v m = 6 i
∧ ∧ ∧ ∧
∴ vm = (a − 6) i + b j =−3 i + b j
This seems to be at 450 of vertical
Hence, |b|=3
Therefore, from Eq. (ii) speed of rain is | vr |= 32 + 32 = 3 2km / h
Alternative Solution:
3kmph 6kmph
Vrm₁ Vr Vrm₁
Vr
45°
90°
6
3 3 3 3 3
Vr Vr
45° 45° 45°
3 2 3 2
Figure 2.68
| Vr | = 3 2 km/h
P hysi cs | 2.29
PROBLEM-SOLVING TACTICS
To avoid confusion while using signs in equations of motion, the following points need to be considered:
(a) Assuming any one direction to be positive, the other automatically becomes negative.
Generally, vertically up is considered as positive and right side is taken as positive.
(b) Write down the values of velocity, displacement and acceleration according to the sign convention.
(c) On completion of sign convention, then simply use the equations of motions.
FORMULAE SHEET
v = 2gh
ds dr dv
(i) v= or v = (ii) a = (iii) ds = v dt (i v) dv = v dt
dt dt dt
• For one dimensional motion,
ds dv dv
(i)
(i) v = (ii)=
a = v
dt dt ds
(iii) ds ==
v dt and (iv) dv adt
= or vdv ads
dy y
• If z = or , the value of z at any point on x-y graph can be obtained by the slope of the graph at that
dx x
point.
ds
(i) slope of displacement–time graph gives velocity as v =
dt
dv
(ii) slope of velocity–time graph gives acceleration as a =
dt
If z = yx, y (dx), or x (dy), the value of z between x1 and x2 or y1 and y2 can be obtained by the area of
graph between x1 and x2 or y1 and y2
(iii) velocity–time graph gives displacement (as ds=v dt)
(iv) acceleration–time graph gives change in velocity (as dv= adt).
relative velocity of A with respect to B (written as v AB ) is v AB
= v A − vB
Similarly, relative acceleration of A with respect to B is aAB= aA − aB
v AB =− vBA or aBA = −aAB
• In case of a one dimensional motion when we can treat the vectors as scalars by assigning positive to one
direction and negative to another, the above equations can be written as v AB
= v A − vB and aAB = aA − aB
Solved Examples
JEE Main/Boards = 2 R = 2 x 40 = 80 m
Initial point to final point gives the direction of
Example 1: A person in his morning walk moves on displacement.
a semicircular track of radius 40 m. Find the distance
travelled and the displacement, when he starts from
one end of the track and reaches the other end. Example 2: A man walks 2.5 km from his house to the
market on a straight road with a speed of 5 km/h. He
Sol: Distance is length of the path travelled. instantly turns back home with a speed of 7.5 km/h
Displacement is the vector from initial point to final finding the market closed. Calculate the
point. (a) magnitude of average velocity and (b) the average
The distance covered = length of the semicircular track speed of the man over the interval of time.
(i) 0 to 30 min (ii) 0 to 50 min
40m
(iii) 0 to 40 min
Initial position Final position Sol: Average speed is distance covered divided by
time taken. Distance is length of the path travelled.
= π R = 3.14 x 40 m = 125.6 m
Average velocity is displacement divided by time taken.
Displacement = Final position - initial position Displacement is the vector from initial point to final
= diameter of semicircular track point.
P hysi cs | 2.31
Distance between market and home = 2.5 km Example 3: A particle moving with an initial velocity 2.5
m/s along the positive x direction accelerates uniformly
Speed of man from home to market = 5 km/h
at the rate 0.50 m/s2. (i) Find the distance travelled in
∴ Time taken by the man to reach the market the first 2 sec. (ii) Calculate the time taken to reach the
Dis tance 2.5 1 velocity of 7.5 m/s? (iii) Calculate the distance travelled
t1 = ;=
t1 = = h 30 min in reaching the velocity 7.5 m/s?
Speed 5 2
Speed of man during his return = 7.5 km/h Sol: This is the case of motion with uniform acceleration.
Time taken by man to return home Use the three equations of motion with uniform
acceleration.
2.5 1
t2
= = = h 20 min 1
7.5 3 (i) We have, = x ut + at2
2
Total time taken by the man returning home = 30 + 20
= 50 min 1
= (2.5m/ s)(2s) + (0.50m / s2 )(2s)2
2
(i) Over the interval 0 to 30 min:
= 5.0 m + 1.0 m 6.0 m
During this time, man goes from home to market.
Therefore, displacement s = 2.5 km. Since the particle does not turn back it is also the
distance travelled.
Displacement 2.5
Average velocity= = = 5km / h (ii) We have, v = u + at
Time 1
2 or 7.5 m/s = 2.5 m/s + (0.50 m/s2 ) t
Dis tance 2.5
Average speed = = = 5km / h =t 7.5m / s − 2.5m / s
= 10 s
Time 1
0.50m / s2
2
(iii) We have, v2= u2 + 2ax
(ii) For the time interval 0 to 50 min: In 50 min the man
goes from home to market and return back or , (7.5 m/s)2 = (2.5 m/s) 2 +2.(0.50 m/s2)x
Distance = 2.5 + 1.25 = 3.75 km Here, due to upward motion, u is positive and due to
downward motion, a is negative.
Average velocity
Velocity becomes zero at maximum height
Displacement 1.25 Time taken to reach maximum height (t0) = u/g;
= = = 1.875km / h
time 1
40x u 40
60 t=
0 = = 4s +−ve
ve
a 10
Dis tance 3.75
Averagespeed
= = = 5.625 km/h (i) t < t0. Therefore, distance and displacement are
time 1
40x 1 1
60 equal. d= s= ut + at2 = 40x2 − x10x4 = 60m
2 2
2 . 3 2 | Motion in a Straight Line
(ii) t=t0, then distance and displacement are equal. divided by time taken.
1 dx x(t2 ) − (x(t1 )
d= s= 40x4 − x10x16 = 80m Velocity, v = ; ⇒ v avg =
dt t2 − t1
(iii) t>t0. Hence, d> s;
Given, x = 8.0 + 2.0 t2
1
s=
40x6 − x10x36 =
60m
2 dx d
(i) Velocity
(a) Velocity v
= = (8.0 + 2.0 t2 )
dt dt
u2 1
While d = + | a(t − t0 )2 | = 0 + 2.0 x 2t; v = 4t
2a 2
Velocity at t = 0s, (v)t-0 = 4 x 0 ms -1
2
(40) 1 Velocity at t = 2s, (v)t-2 =4 x 2 ms-1
= + x10x(6 − 4)2= 100m
2x10 2
(ii) Average velocity
=
} 2
40 − 16
= 12ms−1
2 2
Sol: This is the case of motion with non-uniform
acceleration. Acceleration is given as a function of
Example 7: The motion of two bodies A and B
time. Change in velocity can be found by integrating
represented by two straight lines drawn on the same
the expression for acceleration with respect to
displacement-time graph, make angles 30º and 60º with
time. Displacement can be found by integrating the
time axis, respectively. Which body possesses greater
expression for velocity.
velocity? What is the ratio of their velocities?
dv
(i)=
a t2 dt
= t2 ⇒ dv =
dt Sol: The slope of the displacement time graph at an
v t instant gives the velocity at that instant.
2
Integration we get: ⇒ ∫ dv =
∫ t dt
u o The velocity of body = slope of displacement time
graph. Therefore the line having greater slope has
t3 t3 greater velocity, i.e. the body B has greater velocity.
⇒ v =u = ⇒v= +4
3 3 Ratio of their velocities,
dx 4 + t3 4 + t3 v A tan300 1 / 3 1
(ii) and =
v = ⇒ dx =
dt = =
dt 3 3 vB tan600 3 3
Integration we get
Example 8: Displacement–time graph S
x t t 3
t t4 of a particle moving in a straight line is
⇒ ∫ dx = ∫ udt + ∫ dt ; ⇒ x = ut +
3 12 as shown in Figure. State whether the
o o o
motion is accelerated or not. Describe t₀
the motion in detail. Given s0=20 m -s₀
Example 6: The position of an object moving along and t0 = 4 s.
x-axis is given by x = 8.0 + 2.0t2, where x is in meter and
t is in second. Calculate: Sol: The slope of the displacement time graph at an
(i) the velocity at t = 0 and t = 2.0 sec. instant gives the velocity at that instant. If the slope is
constant, the velocity is uniform (zero acceleration). If
(ii) average velocity between 2.0 sec and 4.0 sec. the slope changes with time the motion is accelerated.
Sol: Here the position is given as a function of time. Slope of s–t graph is constant. Hence, velocity of
Differentiate this expression w.r.t time to get velocity particle is constant. Further at time t = 0, displacement
as a function of time. Average velocity is displacement of the particle from the mean position is –s0 i.e. –20 m.
P hysi cs | 2.33
Sol: The retardation of train is constant, so we can use Sol: (i) Find the initial velocity u in terms of t1 and t2.
the equations of motion with uniform acceleration. The Use the equations of motion with uniform acceleration.
acceleration is taken with a negative sign. The acceleration due to gravity is taken with a negative
sign.
(i) The distance covered by the body in nth second,
a C
Sn =u + (2n − 1)
2
B
a a t₂ H
S1 =24 =u − (2 − 1) =u−
2 2 t₁
a 3a
S2 =22 =u − (4 − 1) =u−
2 2 A
3a a
Subtracting, 2 = − ;a =2m / s2 Let u be initial velocity.
2 2
a Total time of flight from A to B and from B
u = 24 + = 24 + 1 = 25 m / s
2 2u g(t1 + t2 )
to C to A =t1 + t2 = ; u=
(ii) Time t taken by the train before coming to rest, g 2
1 g 1 gt t
v=u-at or 0 = 25 – 2t or t =12.5 sec. h =ut1 − gt12 = (t1 + t2 )t1 − gt12 = 1 2
2 2 2 2
(iii) If S is the distance before the train comes to rest i.e.
u2
u2 (25)2 (ii) Maximum
Maximum heightheight reached,
reached, AC
= H
=
v=0; 0 = u2 – 2aS; S = = = 156.25m. 2g
2a 2x2 g2 (t1 + t2 )2 g(t1 + t2 )2
=
(iv) The time t taken by the train to cover a distance of =
4x2g 8
1 2
100 m is given by S = ut − at , H
2 ( c )(iii)LetLetv vbebevelocity
velocityatatheight
height ,
2
1
= 25t − x 2 x t2 ; t2 -25t + 100 = 0.
100 H
2 v2 = u2 − 2g = u2 − gH
2
(t-20) (t-5) = 0.; t=20, t=5,
t = 20, is not possible as the train takes only 12.5 second g2 (t + t )2 g2 (t1 + t2 )2 g2
=1 2 − = (t + t )2
to stop. Therefore t=5 second Time t’ taken by the train 4 8 8 1 2
to cover a distance of 100 m plus length of the train, i.e,= g
v ( t1 + t2 )
1 2 2 2
44m, is given by S = 100 + 44 = ut’ − at'
2
1 2 2 Example 4: If v(s) = s2 + s where s is displacement. Find
25t'− x 2 x t' − 144 = 0 ; t' − 25t' + 144 = 0
2 acceleration when displacement is 1 m.
t'2 − 16t' + 9t + 144 =
0 ; ( t − 16)(t'− 9) =
0
Sol: Differentiate the expression for velocity with
=t 16
= s ,t' 9 s respect to time to get the expression for acceleration.
∴ Time taken by the train to pass the observer = 9 – 5 dv dv ds dv
= 4 second. a
We know= = = (v)
dt ds dt ds
dv dv
Example 3: A particle is projected vertically upwards ⇒a=v ; ∴ = (2s) + (1)
from a point A on the ground. It takes a time t1 to reach ds ds
a point B at a height h above the ground as it continues
dv
to move, it takes a further time t2 to reach the ground. and
and = s2 + s
= 3m ; v(s)
ds s =1m
Find
(i) The height h ∴ v(1)= (1)2 + 1= 2 ; ∴a(s = 1m) = (2) x(3) =6 m / sec2
a positive constant and v is the velocity of the particle. (ii) If total distance travelled by the particle is 4250 m
The velocity of the point mass at t = 0 is equal to v 0 . then find maximum speed.
Find the distance it will travel before it stops and the
(iii) Also, find the value of acceleration and retardation.
time it will take to cover this distance.
Sol: Area under the v-t graph in the given time interval
Sol: In the expression for acceleration separate the
is equal to displacement of the particle in the given
variables and integrate to get the desired quantity.
time interval.
dv dv
Acceleration = = −K v= Kdt. ; (i) v
dt − v
Let t0 be the time which the particle takes to come to
vmax
a stop.
Integrating
1
t0 0 −
1 v0
− 2
v 100 sec 400 sec 550 sec
∫ Kdt ∫
− v dv =
= v 2 dv ∫ [2v1/2 ]00
= t
0 v0 0
(ii) Distance travelled = Area under v – t graph
1
2v1/2
0
=Kt0 2v
= 0 or t0
2
1 1
k = (100) vmax + (400 − 100) (vmax ) + (550 − 400) vmax
2 2
dv dv ds dv dv
= = v ; ∴v −K v
= 1 1
dt ds dt ds ds 4250
⇒= x100 x vmax + 300 vmax + x150 vmax
2 2
v dv = −Kds ⇒ 4250 =
vmax ⇒ vmax =
10m / s
Let s0 be the dist nce covered when the velocity decrease ∆v
from v0 to zero. (iii) a =
∆t
s0
0 10 − 0
For
= t 0 to 100 sec =
⇒a = 0.1 m /s2
Integrating, ∫ − ∫ Kds =
v dv = −Ks0
100 − 0
v0 0
10 − 10
For t 100 to 400 =
= sec ⇒ a = 0
v 3/2
0
v 3/2 2v 3/2 400 − 1000
or = − 0 = −Ks0 ; ∴ s0 = 0 For t = 400 sec to 500 sec (retardation)
3 / 2 v 3 3k
0
2 0 − 10 10
⇒ a− = =− ⇒ 0.06 m/s2
550 − 400 150
Example 6: Is the variation of position, shown in Figure.
observed in nature? Example 8: A particle starts from rest at time t = 0 and
undergoes acceleration a, as shown in the Figure.
(i) Draw a neat sketch showing the velocity of the
Time (t) particle as a function of time during the interval 1 to 4
O seconds, indicating each second on the abscissa.
Position(x)
(ii) Draw a neat sketch showing the displacement of the
Sol: Time never decreases in a reference frame.
particle as a function of time during 0 to 2 second. In
No, since with increase of position x, time first increase both the cases, explain the various steps.
and then decrease, which is impossible (Time always 2
a(m/s )
increase)
+3
Example 7: A particle start from rest with constant
acceleration for 100 s, then move with constant velocity 1 4
2 3
for 5 min. Finally, particle retards uniformly and come
to rest in 150 s. t(sec.)
(i) Draw v-t graphs -3
2 . 3 6 | Motion in a Straight Line
Sol: Area under the a-t graph in the given time interval 1
is equal to the change in velocity of the particle in the distance travelled = 6 x 1 − x 3 x = 4.5m
2
given time interval. Thus v-t graph can be plotted if the
At t = 3, S3 = 6 + 4 ½ = 10.5 m
initial velocity is known. Area under the v-t graph in the
given time interval is equal to the displacement of the At t = 4, S4 = 6 + [6 x 2- ½ x 3 x 4] = 12 m
particle in the given time interval.
(i) The velocity is given by the area enclosed during the Example 9: A ball is dropped from a height of 19.6 m
time interval; and the velocity is constant from 0 to 2 above the ground. It rebounds from the ground and
sec. raises itself up to the same height. Take the starting
point as the origin and vertically downward as the
At t = 1 sec., velocity = 3 m/s positive X-axis. Draw approximate plots of x versus t, v
At t = 2 sec., velocity = 6 m/s. versus t and a versus t. Neglect the small interval during
which the ball was in contact with the ground.
At this instant the acceleration becomes negative, so
the velocity starts decreasing uniformly. Sol: From the first equation of motion for constant
acceleration, plot the v-t graph. From the second
equation of motion for constant acceleration, plot the
6 x-t graph.
5
v(m/s) 4 Since the acceleration of the ball during the contact
3
2
1 1 2 3 4 is different from ‘g’, we have to treat the downward
0 motion and the upward motion separately.
t(sec.) For the downward motion: a = g = 9.8 m/s2,
1 2
At t = 3 sec., velocity = 6 -3 = 3 m/s x =+ut at = (4.9m / s2 )t2
2
At t = 4 sec., velocity = 6 – 6 = 0 m/s. The ball reaches the ground when x = 19.6 m. This gives
(ii) The particle starts from rest, and the acceleration a t = 2 s. After that it moves up, x decreases and at t =
is constant from 0 to 2 sec. 4 s, x becomes zero, the ball reaching the initial point.
x
6 20 m
27/8 10 m
S(m) 1
3/8
1 2 3 4 t (second)
0 1/4 1 3/2 23 4
t in sec We have t = 0, x = 0
1 2 t = 1s, x=4.9 m
S= at The graph between S and t will be parabola,
2
1 1 1 1 1 31 3 t= 2s x =19.6 m
At=
= t At tsec sec
= , S1/2
= S1/2
= x 3 x=
x3x m m
2 2 2 2 4 84 8 t = 3s x = 4.9 m
1 3 t = 4s x=0
At t 1sec,=
= S1/2 = x 3 x1 m
2 2
Velocity: During the first two seconds
3 1 9 27
At t
= sec
= S1/2 = x 3x m V
2 2 4 8 20 m/s
1
At t 2=
= sec S2 x=
3 x 4 6m
2 10 m/s
Boat 1 hr
1 2 3 4 t (second)
JEE Main/Boards
4 m/s travel in straight line with uniform acceleration Q.14 The velocity–time graph of a particle moving
2m/s2 and a m/s2 respectively. What is the length of the along a straight line is as shown in Fig. Calculate the
path if they reach the final point at the same time? distance covered between t = 0 to t = 10 second. Also
find displacement in time 0 to 10 seconds.
Q.6 Brakes are applied to a train travelling at 72 kmh- v(in ms)
1. After passing over 200 m, its velocity is raced to 36 20
kmh-1. At the same rate of retardation, how much 10
further will it go before it is brought to rest? 0
2 46 8 10 t(s)
-10
-20
Q.7 On turning a corner, a motorist rushing at 44 ms-1
finds a child on the road 100 m ahead. He instantly Q.15 The position of an object moving along x-axis is
stops the engine and applies the brakes so as to stop given by x=a+bt2, where a = 8.5 m and b = 2.5 ms-2 and
it within 1 m of the child. Calculate time required to and t is measured in second. What is the velocity at t=0
stop it. s and t=2.0 s? What is the average velocity between t =
2.0 s and t = 4.01 s?
Q.8 A body starting from rest, was observed to cover
20 m in 1 second and 40 m during the next second. Q.16 The displacement x (in m ) of a body varies with
How far had it travelled before the first observation was time t (in sec) as x =- (2/3)t2 +16 t + 2. How long does
taken? the body take to come to rest?
Q.9 An automobiles starts from rest and accelerates Q.17 The height y and the distance x along the
uniformly for 30 seconds to a speed of 72 km h-1. It then horizontal, for a body projected in the vertical plane are
moves with a uniform velocity and it is finally brought given by y = 8t – 5t2 and x = 6 t. What is initial velocity
to rest in 50 m with a constant retardation. If the total of the body?
distance travelled is 950 m, find the acceleration, the
retardation and total time taken. Q.18 The displacement of a particle along X-axis
is given by x = 3 + 8t + 7t2 . Obtain its velocity and
acceleration at t = 2s.
Q.10 From the top of a tower 100 m in height a ball
is dropped and at the same instant another ball is
Q.19 The relation between time t and distance x is t
projected vertically upwards from the ground so that it
= αx2 + βx where α and β are constants. Show that
just reaches the top of tower. At what height do the two
retardation is 2α υ, where υ is the instantaneous velocity.
balls pass one another?
Q.12 A stone is dropped from a balloon at an altitude Q.21 A tennis ball is dropped onto the floor from a
of 300 m. How long will the stone take to reach the height of 4.0 ft. It rebounds to a height of 3.0 ft. If the
ground if (i) the balloon is ascending with a velocity of ball was in contact with the floor for 0.010 s, what was
5 ms-1. (ii) the balloon is descending with a velocity of 5 the average acceleration during contact?
ms-1. (iii) the balloon is stationary?
Q.22 A particle starts from rest with zero initial
Q.13 The velocity–time graph of a body moving in a acceleration. the acceleration increases uniformly with
straight line is shown in Fig. Find the displacement and time. Find the time average and distance average
the distance travelled by the body in 6 seconds. of velocity upto a certain instant when the velocity
becomes v.
v(in ms)
4
Q.23 A particle moves along a straight line such that
2
its displacement x from a fixed point on the line at time
-2 1 2 3 4 5 6 t(s) t is given by x2 = at2 + 2bt + c Find acceleration as a
-4 function of displacement x.
P hysi cs | 2.39
Q.24 A ball is dropped from a height of 19.6 m above Q.3 An object is tossed vertically into the air with an
the ground. It rebounds from the ground and raises initial velocity of 8 m/s. Using the sign convention
itself up to the same height. Take the starting point upwards as positive, how does the vertical component
as the origin and vertically downward as the positive of the acceleration ay of the object (after leaving the
X-axis. Draw approximate plots of x versus t, v versus t hand) vary during the flight of the object?
and a versus t. Neglect the small interval during which
(A) On the way up ay > 0, on the way down ay >0
the ball was in contact with ground.
(B) On the way up ay <0, on the way down ay < 0
Q.25 A train travelling at 72 km/h is checked by track (C) On the way up ay >0, on the way down ay < 0
repairs. It retards uniformly for 200 m covering the next
(D) on the way up ay <0, on the way down ay <0
400 m at constant speed and accelerates uniformly
to 72 km/h in a further 600 m. If the time at constant
lower speed is equal to the sum of the times taken in Q.4 If position time graph of a X
retarding and accelerating. Find the total time taken. particle is since curve as shown,
t
What will be its v-t graph?
Q.26 A point traversed half the distance with a velocity V V
v0. The remaining part of the distance was covered with (A) (B)
t t
velocity v1 for half the time, and with velocity v2 for
the other half of the time. Find the men velocity of the V V
point averaged over the whole time of motion. (C) (D)
t t
Q.27 A person sitting on the top of a tall building is Q.5 A man moves in x-y plane along the path shown.
dropping balls at regular intervals of one second. Find At what point is his average velocity vector in the same
the positions of the 3rd, 4th and 5th ball when the 6th ball direction as his instantaneous velocity vector. The man
is being dropped. starts from point P.
Q.28 A stone is dropped from a balloon going up with (A) A (B) B (C) C (D) D
a uniform velocity of 5.0 m/s. if the balloon was 50 m
high when the stone was dropped, find its height when Q.6 The greatest acceleration or deceleration that a
the stone hits the ground. train may have is a. The minimum time in which the
train reach from one station to the other separated by
Take g = 10 m/s2.
a distance D is
Exercise 2 (A)
d
(B)
2d
(C)
1 d
(D) 2
d
a a 2 a a
Single Correct Choice Type
Q.7 Acceleration versus velocity graph
Q.1 An object is moving along the x axis with position a
of a particle moving in a straight line
as a function of time given by x = x(t). Point O is at x = starting from rest is as shown in figure.
0. The object is definitely moving towards O when a a v
The corresponding velocity–time
graph would be v v
(A) dx/dt < 0 (B) dx/>dt>0 v v
(C) d(x2)/dt < 0 (D) d(x2)/dt > 0 v v v v (A) (B)
(A) (A) (B) (B) t t
v v
Q.2 A particle starts moving rectilinearly at time t t t t t
= 0 such as that its velocity ‘v’ changes with time ‘t’ v v v v (C) (D)
according to the equation v = t2 – t where t is in seconds (C) (C) (D) (D) t t
and v is in m/s. The time interval for which the particle t t t t
retards is
Q.8 Suppose a player hits several baseballs, which
(A) t < 1/2 (B) 1/2 < t <1
baseball will be in the air for the longest time?
(C) t> 1 (D) t < ½ and t>1
(A) The one with the farthest range.
2 . 4 0 | Motion in a Straight Line
(B) The one which reaches maximum height. Previous Years’ Questions
(C) The one with the greatest initial velocity.
(D) The one leaving the bat at 45º with respect to the Q.1 In the arrangement
ground. shown in the Figure. the ends A B
P and Q of an unstretchable
string move downwards with
Q.9 A ball is thrown from a point on ground at some
angle of projection. At the same time a bird starts uniform speed U. Pulleys A P O
from a point directly above this point of projection at and B are fixed. M
a height h horizontally with speed u. Given that in its Mass M moves upwards with s speed (1982)
flight ball just touches the bird at one point. Find the
distance on ground where ball strikes. (A) 2U cos θ (B) U/cos θ
(C) 2U/cos θ (D) U cos θ
h 2h 2h h
(A) 2u (B) u (C) 2u (D) u
g g g g
Q.2 A particle is moving eastwards with a velocity of 5
m/s. In 10 s the velocity changes to 5 m/s northwards.
Q.10 It takes one minute for a passenger standing on
The average acceleration in this time is (1982)
an escalator to reach the top. If the escalator does not
move it takes him 3 minute to walk up. How long will it (A) Zero
take for the passenger to arrive at the top if he walks up
1
the moving escalator? (B) m / s2 towards north-east
2
(A) 30 sec (B) 45 sec (C) 40 sec (D) 35 sec
1
(C) m / s2 towards north-west
Q.11 A body A is thrown vertically upwards with 2
such a velocity that it reaches a maximum height of
h. simultaneously another body B is dropped from 1
(D) m / s2 towards north
height h. It strikes the ground and does not rebound. 2
The velocity of A relative to B v/s time graph is best
represented by: (upward direction is positive) Q.3 A river is flowing from west to east at a speed of 5
m/min. A man on the south bank of the river, capable of
(A) VAB (A) VAB
(B) VAB (B) VAB swimming at 10 m/min in still water to swim across the
t t t t river in the shortest time. He should swim in a direction.
VAB VAB (1983)
(C) VAB (C) VAB (D) (D)
t t (A) Due north (B) 30º east of north
t t
(C) 30º west of north (D) 60º east of north
Q.12 Particle A and B are moving with constant
velocities along x and y axis respectively, the graph of Q.4 A boat which has a speed of 5 km/h still crosses
separation between them with time is a river of width 1 km along the shortest possible path
y in 15 min. The velocity of the river water in km/h is
A (1988)
x (A) 1 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 41
B
Q.5 A particle P is sliding down a frictionless hemis-
s s
(A) (B) pherical bowl. It passes the point A at t = 0. At this
instant of time, the horizontal component of its velocity
t t is v. A bead Q of the same mass as P is ejected from
A at t = 0 along the horizontal string mass AB, with
(C)
s
(D)
s the speed v. Friction between the bead and the string
may be neglected. Let tp and tQ be the respective times
t t
P hysi cs | 2.41
taken by P and Q to reach the point B. Then (1993) Q.9 A small block slides without friction down an
inclined plane starting from rest. Let sn be the distance
Q
A B s
travelled from t = n. Then n is
n − 1 to t = (2004)
P sn + 1
C 2n − 1 2n + 1
(A) (B)
(A) tp < tQ (B) tp = tQ 2n 2n − 1
h
d
V V
Q.11 From a tower of height H, a particle is thrown
d d vertically upwards with a speed u. The time taken by
(C) h (D) h the particle, to hit the ground, is n times that taken by
it to reach the highest point of its path. The relation
between H, u and n is: (2014)
(A) 2gH = nu2(n -2) (B) gH = (n -2)u2
Q.8 A particle starts from rest. Its acceleration (a) versus (C) 2gH = n2u2 (D) gH = (n -2)2u2
time (t) is as shown in the Figure. The maximum speed.
The maximum speed of the particle will be (2004)
a
Q.12 Two stones are thrown up simultaneously from
the edge of a cliff 240 m high with initial speed of 10
10m/s²
m/s and 40 m/s respectively. Which of the following
graph best represents the time variation of relative
position of the second stone with respect to the first?
t(s)
11
(Assume stones do not rebound after hitting the ground
(A) 110 m/s (B) 55 m/s and neglect air resistance, take g = 10 m/s2) (The figures
are schematic and not drawn to scale) (2015)
(C) 550 m/s (D) 660 m/s
240 240
(A) (B)
2 . 4 2 | Motion in a Straight Line
t(s)
12 8 12
(A) (y2-y1)m (y2-y1)m (B) (y2-y1)m (y2-y1)m
240 240 240 (y2-y1)m 240
(y2-y1)m
(A) (B) (C) 240 (D)
240
(A) (B) t(s)
t(s) t(s)
12 8 12 8 12 8 12
(y2-y1)m t(s) (y2-y1)m t(s)
12 8 12
(C) 240 (y2-y1)m (y2-y1)m 240 (D) (y2-y1)m
(C) (D)
240 240 240
(B) (C) t(s) (D) t(s)
8 12 8 12
t(s) t(s) t(s) t(s)
8 12 8 12 8 12
(y2-y1)m
240
(D) JEE Advanced/Boards
t(s) t(s)
Exercise 1 8 12
the average velocity during the motion is 20 ms–2, then
the final value of t.
Q.1 A car moving along a straight highway with a speed
v m\s
of 126 km/h is brought to stop with in a distance of 200
m. what is the retardation of the car (assumed uniform)
O
and how long does it take for the car to stop? t 25 sec
Q.6 The velocity–time graph of the particle moving Q.10 Two particles are moving along two straight lines,
along the straight line is shown. The rate of acceleration in the same plane, with the same speed=20 cm/s.
and deceleration is constant and it is equal to 5ms–2, If The angle between the two lines is 60° , and their
P hysi cs | 2.43
intersection point is O. At a certain moment, the two (i) how far beyond the straight point will automobile
particles are located at distances 3m and 4m from O, overtake the truck?
and are moving towards O. Find the shortest distance
(ii) How fast will the automobile be travelling at that
between them subsequently?
instant? (It is instructive to plot qualitative graph of x
versus t for each vehicle.)
Q.11 A point mass starts moving in a straight line with a
constant acceleration a. At a time t, after the beginning
Q.18 Two bodies moves in a straight line towards
of motion, the acceleration changes sign, remaining
each other at initial velocities v1 and v2 and constant
the same magnitude. Determine the time t from the
accelerations a1 and a2 directed against the
beginning of motion in which the point mass returns to
corresponding velocities at the initial instant.
the initial position?
What must be the maximum initial separation lmax
th
1 between the bodies for which they meet during
Q.12 For of the distance between two stations,
m th motion? Motion in which the point mass returns to the
1
a train is uniformly accelerated and for of the initial position?
n
distance, it is uniformly retarded. It starts from rest at
Q.19 An ant runs from an ant-hill in a straight line so
one station and comes to rest at another. Find the ratio
that its velocity is inversely proportional to the distance
of its maximum velocity to its average velocity?
from the center of the ant-hill. When the ant is at point
A at a distance l1 = 1m from the center of the ant-hill,
its velocity v1 = 2cm / s , what time will it take ant to run
Q.13 The velocity of a particle moving in the positive from point A to point B, which is at a distance l2 = 2m
direction of the x axis varies as v= α v x , where α is from the center of the ant-hill?
positive constant. Assuming that at the moment t=0
the particle was located at the point x=0, find: (i) the
time dependence of the velocity and acceleration of Q.20 Distance between two points A and B is 33 m. A
the particle. particle P starts from B with velocity of 1m/s along AB
with an acceleration of 2m / s2 . Simultaneously another
(ii) the mean velocity of the particle averaged over the particle Q starts from A with a velocity of 9 m/s in the
time that the particle takes to cover the first s meter of same direction AB and has an acceleration 1m / s2 in
the path. the direction AB. Find whether Q will be able to catch P.
Q.3 A particle has initial velocity 10 m/s. It moves due (B) The ball will never return to him.
to constant retarding force along the line of velocity
(C) The ball will return to him if the cart moves with
which produces a retardation of 5 m / s2 . Then
constant velocity.
(A) the maximum displacement in the direction of initial
(D) The ball will fall behind him if the cart moves with
velocity is 10 m.
some positive acceleration.
(B) the distance travelled in first 3 seconds is 7.5 m.
(C) the distance travelled in the first 3 seconds is 12.5 m. Assertion Reasoning Type
(D) the distance travelled in the first 3 seconds is 17.5 m. (A) Statement-I is true, statement-II, is true and
statement-II is correct explanation for statement-I
Q.4 A bead is free to slide down a smooth wire tightly (B) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true and
stretched between points A and B on a vertical circle. statement-II is NOT the correct explanation for
If the bead starts from rest at A, the highest point on statement-I.
the circle
A (C) Statement-I is true, statement-II is false.
(D) Statement-I is false, statement-II is true.
B
Q.8 Statement-I: Positive acceleration in rectilinear
motion of a body does not imply that the body is
(A) Its velocity v on arriving at B is proportional to cos θ speeding up
(B) Its velocity v on arriving at B is proportional to tan θ Statement-II: Both the acceleration and velocity are
(C) Time to arrive at B is proportional to cos θ vectors.
(D) Time to arrive at B is independent of θ .
Q.9 Statement-I: A particle having zero acceleration
must have constant speed.
Q.5 The figure shows the velocity +v0
v
(v) of a particle plotted against T Statement-II: A particle having zero acceleration must
O have zero acceleration.
time (t) t 2T
-v0
Q.10 Statement-I: A student performed an experiment
(A) The particle changes its direction of motion at some by moving a certain block in a straight line. The velocity
point. position graph cannot be as shown.
(B) The acceleration of the particle remains constant. V
(C) The displacement of the particle is zero.
(D) The initial and final speed of the particle are the
V
same.
Statement-II: The rate of change of quantity which is Q.17 The v-t graph of the particle is correctly shown by
constant is always zero.
V V
(A) 0 (B) 0
Comprehension Type
(A) -52m (B) 5 m (C) 10 m (D) 15 m Q.20 Column I shows position versus time graph for an
object and column II shows possible graphs.
Q.15 The maximum displacement of the particle is
(A) 33.3 m (B) 23.3 m Column I Column II
t
X parabola
x
0 (r) A ball rolling away from the
T 2T (A) origin; hits a wall and bounces
straight back.
t
2 . 4 6 | Motion in a Straight Line
P Q
(i) the speed of the combined mass immediately after
135° the collision with respect to an observer on the ground.
45°
A B (ii) the length L of the string such that the tension in
the string becomes zero when the string becomes
Q.2 A body falling freely from a given height H hits an horizontal during the subsequent motion of the
inclined plane in its path at a height h. As a result of combined mass.
this impact the direction of the velocity of the body
becomes horizontal. For what value of (h/H) the body
Q.6 A particle of mass 10−2 kg is moving along the
will take maximum time to reach the ground? (1986)
positive x-axis under the influence of a force F(x)
= −k / 2x2 where k= 10−2 Nm2 . At time t=0 it is at x=0.1
Q.3 Two towers AB and CD are situated a distance d m and its velocity v=0.
apart as shown in Figure. AB is 20 m high and CD is
(i) Find its velocity when it reaches x=0.5 m.
30 m high from the ground. An object of mass m is
thrown from the top of AB horizontally with a velocity (ii) Find the time at which it reaches x=0.25 m. (1998)
of 10 m/s towards CD. Simultaneously other object of
mass 2m is thrown from top of CD at an angle of 60° to Q.7 A large heavy box is sliding without friction down
the horizontal towards AB with the same magnitude of a smooth plane of inclination θ . From a point P on the
initial velocity as that of the first object. The two objects bottom of the box, a particle is projected inside the
moves in the same vertical plane, collide in mid-air and box. The initial speed of the particle with respect to box
stick to each other. (1994) is u and the direction of projection makes an angle α
2m
60°
C with the bottom as shown in the Figure. (1998)
m
A
Q
P
d
B D
P hysi cs | 2.47
(i) Find the distance along the bottom of the box at the initial height. The acceleration of the train in
between the point of projection P and point Q where m/s2, is. (2011)
the particle lands (Assume that the particle does not
hit any other surface of the box. Neglect air resistance.) Assertion Reasoning Type
(ii) If the horizontal displacement of the particle as seen Mark your answer as
by an observer on the ground is zero, find the speed of
the box with respect to the ground at the instant when (A) If Statement-I is true, statement-II is true:
the particle was projected. statement-II is the correct explanation for statement-I.
(B) If Statement-I is true, statement-II is true: statement-
Q.8 An object A is kept fixed at the point x=3 and y=1.25 II is not a correct explanation for statement-I.
m on a plank P raised above the ground. At time t=0 (C) If Statement-I is true: statement-II is false.
the plank starts moving, along the +x-direction with
an acceleration 1.5 m/s2. At the same instant a stone (D) If Statement-I is false: statement-II is true.
is projected from the origin with velocity u as shown.
A stationery person on the ground observes the stone Q.11 Statement-I For an observer looking out through
hitting the object during its downward motion at an the window of a fast moving train, the nearby objects
angle of 45o to the horizontal. All the motions are in x-y appear to move in the opposite direction to the train,
plane, Find u and the time after which the stone hits while the distant objects appear to be stationary.
the object. (Take g=10 m/s2) (2000) Statement-IIIf the observer and the object are moving
y A at velocities v1 and v 2 respectively with reference to a
laboratory frame, the velocity
1.25m P of the object with respect
to the observer is v 2 − v1 (2008)
u
x
O 3.0m Q.12 A particle of mass m moves on the x-axis as follows:
it starts from rest at t=0 from the point x-0, and comes
Q.9 On a frictionless horizontal surface, assumed to be
to rest at t=1 at the point x=1. No other information
the x-y plane, a small trolley A is moving along a straight
is available about its motion at intermediate times
line parallel to the y-axis with a constant velocity of
(0<t<1). If α denotes the instantaneous acceleration of
( 3 − 1) m/s. At a particular instant when the line OA the particle, then (1993)
makes an angle of 45° with the x-axis, a ball is thrown
(A) α cannot remain positive for all t in the interval
along the surface from origin O. Its velocity makes an
0≤t ≤1
angle φ with the x-axis and it hits the trolley. (2002)
(B) α cannot exceeds 2 at any point in its path
y
A (C) α must be ≥ 4 at some point or points in its path
(D) α must change sign during the motion, but no other
assertion can be made with information given.
45°
O
Q.13 The coordinates of a particle moving in a plane
(i) The motion of the ball is observed from the frame of are given by x(t)= acos (pt) and y(t)=bsin(pt) where
the trolley. Calculate the angle θ made by the velocity a,b (<a) and p are positive constants of appropriate
vector of the ball with the x-axis in the frame. dimensions. Then
(ii) Find the speed of the ball with respect to the surface, (A) the path of the particle is an ellipse
if φ = 4θ / 3 . (B) the velocity and acceleration of the particle are
normal to each other at t= π / 2p
Q.10 A train is moving along a straight line with a
(C) the acceleration of the particle is always directed
constant acceleration a. A boy standing in the train
towards a focus.
throws a ball forward with a speed of 10 m/s, at an
angle of 60° to the horizontal. The boy has to move (D) the distance travelled by the particle in time interval
forward by 1.15 m inside the train to catch the ball back t=0 to t= π / 2p is a.
2 . 4 8 | Motion in a Straight Line
14. A rocket is moving in a gravity free space with a relative to the rocket. The time in seconds when the two
constant acceleration of 2 ms–2 along + x direction (see balls hit each other is (2014)
figure). The length of a chamber inside the rocket is
4 m. A ball is thrown from the left end of the chamber a = 2ms
-2
4m
PlancEssential Questions
JEE Main/Boards JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1 Exercise 1
Q. 9 Q.12 Q.15 Q.2 Q.5 Q.7
Q.25 Q.27 Q.9 Q.10 Q.17
Exercise 2 Exercise 2
Q.3 Q.4 Q.7 Q.4 Q.17 Q.18
Q.12 Q.19 Q20
Answer Key
Q.6 66.67m
Exercise 1
Q.7 4.5 s
Q.1 110m
Q.8 2.5 m
Q.2 0.25 ms–2
Q.9 2/3 ms–2, 4 ms–2, 65 sec
Q.3 136 m
Q.10 75 m from ground
Q.4 2/3 ms–2
Q.11 3 sec
P hysi cs | 2.49
Q.12 (i) 8.36 s (ii) 7.33 s (iii) 7.82 s Q.21 Approximately, 3000 ft/s2 (in the upward direction)
Q.28 68.5 m
Q.20 18 ms–1
Exercise 2
JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1 Q.11=t t1 (2 + 2)
1 1
Q.1 11.43 sec,-3.06 ms−2 Q.12 1 + + : 1
m n
Q.2 105 m/s
α2 t α2 α S
Q.13=
(i) v = ,a (ii) v =
Q.3 1:3:5 2 2 2
Q.4 25m Q.14 2 m
( v1 + v 2 )
2
Q.8 h / 8g
Q.18 lmax =
−1 2(a1 + a2 )
Q.9 tan (3)
Q.19 t=75 s
Q.10 50 3cm
Q.20 Q can not catch P
2 . 5 0 | Motion in a Straight Line
Exercise 2
Q.6 A, B, C Q.7 C, D
Comprehension Type
Q.20 A → p, s; B → r ; C → q ; D → s
Q.5 (i) 2.5 m/s (ii) 0.32 m Q.6 (i) -0.1 m/s (ii) 1.48 s
Q.11 B Q.12 A, C
Q.13 A ,B, C
Solutions
1 v= u2 + a(20)
Sol 3: Sn =+
u an − 2
2
u=
2 v=
1 u1 + a(30)
1 3
12 =u + a 2 − ⇒ 12 =u + a......................(1)
… (i) ⇒ v 2 = u1 + a(30) + a(20)= u + 50a
2 2 1
1 7 Substituting in (iii)
20 =u + a 4 − ⇒ 20 =u + a......................(2) … (ii)
2 2
(u1 + 50a − u1 )(u1 + u1 + 50a) =
4as
Eq (2) – Eq (1) 7 3
20 − 12 = u + a − u + a 50a ( 2u1 + 50a) = 4as
2 2
7 3 ⇒ 50(2u1 + 50a) =
4s
⇒ 20 − 12 = u7+ a − u3+7−a3
20 − 12 = u + a2 − ⇒ u=+8 a2 = 2a
2 2 2 s = 1000m
73− 3 8
⇒= ⇒
8 =87 −= =2a 2a⇒ a= = 4ms−2
2 2 2 ⇒ 50 ( 2u1 + 50a) =
4 × 1000
a
=8 8= 4ms −2
−2
a= = 24ms in (i)
Substituting 4000
2 ⇒ 2u1 + 50a= = 80
50
3
12= u + .4 ⇒ 2u1 + 50a =
80
2
3 Dividing by 2 on both sides
u = 12
=
12 u−+ .4 = 12-6 ms−1 =6 ms−1
2
u1 + 25a =
40 ....................(4)
… (iv)
3
u 12 − .4
=
2 st = u(t2 ) + 1 at22 − u(t1 ) + 1 at12
∆s= st − v12 − u12 =
2as
2 1
2 2
∆=
1
s u(t2 − t1 ) + a(t22 − t12 ) ( v1 − u1 )( v1 + u1 ) =
2as
2
v1 =
u1 + 30a , s=
1000
1 1
∆s= st
2
− st = u(t2 ) + at22 − u(t1 ) + at12
1
2 2
(u1 + 30a − u1 )(u1 + 30a + u1 ) =2a × 1000
30a(2u 1 +30a) =
2000a
1
∆=s u(t2 − t1 ) + a(t22 − t12 ) 200
2 2u1 + 30a =
t2 a,=
= t1 5 3
1 1 100
∆s = u(9 − 5) + a(92 − 52 ) = 6(9 − 5) + 4(92 − 52 )
u1 + 15a = ..................(5) … (v)
2 2 3
= 6(4) + 2(56)
∆s =136m Subtracting (iv)-(v)
Here v1 = u2 1
Sol 5: s=
1 u1 t + a1 t2 ………..for car 1
2
∴ adding (i), (ii)
1
s= u2 t + a2 t2 …….....for car 2
v12 − u12 4as
= 2
2
s1 = s2
( v 2 − u1 )( v 2 + u1 ) =
4as .................(3) … (iii)
2 . 5 2 | Motion in a Straight Line
1 1 1
∴ u1 t + a1 t2 = u2 t + at2 20 a t1 − .............(1)
= … (i)
2 2 2
−1
=u1 2ms
= a1 2ms−2
1 1
−1 40 =
40
a =
t2a− t2 − , Also t2 =
tt21 =
+ t11 + 1
=u2 4ms
= a2 1ms−2 2 2
1 1 (body travels 40 m in here 1 second)
⇒ 2(t) + 2t2 =4(t) + 1(t2 )
2 2
1
1 1 ⇒ 40
= a t1 + 1 −
⇒ (4 − 2)t = (2 − 1)t2 ⇒ 2t = t2 2
2 2
1 1
⇒ 2= t ⇒ t = 4s ⇒=40 a t1 + ...................(2) … (ii)
2 2
1 1 Subtract (ii) – (i)
⇒ s=
1 u1 t + a1 t2 = 2(4) + 2(4)2 = 8 + 16 = 24m
2 2
Length of path is 24m 1 1
40 − 20= a t1 + − a t1 −
2 2
Sol 6: We know that v 2 − u2 =
2as , Given that
1 1
−1 −1 −1 −1 20 = a t1 + − a t1 −
=u 72kmh
= 20ms
= , v 36kmh
= 10ms 2 2
1 2 1 2 2
1 ⇒ s1 = at = . .30 = 300m
Sol 8: s =+
u a t − 2 2 3
2
Let distance travelled in uniform velocity and retardation
∵ body starts from rest, u=0 be s2 ,s3 respectively
1 s3 =50m
20 =0 + a t −
2
P hysi cs | 2.53
Retardation
retardation = r
v2
=
202
= 4ms−2
Sol 11: ∆s =
1
2
( )
g t22 − t12 t2 = 2 + t1
2s3 2 × 50
∆s is distance between travelled between t2 and t1.
v 20
⇒ t3= = = 5s 1
r 4 ⇒
= ∆s g ( t2 − t1 )( t2 + t1 )
2
1
∴ Total
∴ total timetime t = t1 + t2 + t3 = 30 + 30 + 5 = 65s = g ( t1 + 2 − t1 )( t1 + 2 + t1 )
2
2 −2
∴ acceleration
∴ Acceleration is
is ms , Retardation is 4 ms−2
3 1
= g ( 2 )( 2t1 + 2 )
2
Total time taken is 65 s.
⇒=∆s g ( 2t1 + 2 ) and we are given that ∆s =78. 4
For ball thrown from top, let distance travelled be s, Sol 12: (i) Given that h = 300 m. We know that
time taken t, 1
= ut + gt2
h
1 2
s1 = gt2
2 If balloon is ascending ⇒ initial velocity of stone is
−5ms−1
For ball thrown from bottom, let initial velocity be v,
given it just reaches top. 1
⇒ 300=-5(t)+ ( 9.8) t2 ⇒ 4.9 t2 -5t-300=0
=⇒v 2gs = 2
(s 100m)
2
It is a quadratic equation in t
−1
⇒ v = 2g(100) ⇒ v = 10 2g ms
−b ± b2 − 4ac
∴t = ; b=-5, a = 4.9, c=-300
Let s2 be distance travelled by ball 2, when it meets ball 2a
1,
1 2 1
s= vt −= gt 10 2g t − gt2 −( −5) ± 52 − 4(4.9)( −300) 5 ± 25 + 5880
2
2 2 ⇒ t= =
2(4.9) 9.8
s1 + s2 =
100m 5 ± 76.844
⇒ t=
9.8
1 2 1
∴ 100 = gt + 10 2gt − gt2
2 2 For solution to be real, t>0
100 10
=t = 5 + 76.844
10 2g 2g t= = 8.36s
9.8
1
s=
2 vt − gt2
2 (ii) If balloon is descending ⇒ initial velocity of stone
2 is 6 ms−1
10 1 10
= 10 2g − g. v
2g 2 2g
2 . 5 4 | Motion in a Straight Line
1 v(2)=2b(2)=4b=4(2.5) = 10 ms−1
2
⇒ 300 =5t + 9.8t2 ⇒ 4.9t + 5t − 300 =
0
2 v(2)= 10 ms−1
displacement
−5 ± 52 − 4(4.9) − (300) Average velocity =
⇒t= time
2(4.9)
x(4.01) − x(2) a + b(4.01)2 − (a + b(2)2 )
For t > 0 = =
4.01 − 2 4.01 − 2
⇒t=
−5 + 25 + 5880
= 7.33 s b 2
2.5 (16.0801 − 4 )
( 4.01 ) − 2 =
2
9.8 =
2.01 2.01
(iii) If balloon is stationary ⇒ initial velocity is 0 ms–1 = 15. 025 ms-1 ≅ 15 ms-1
1 1
s1 = × 6 × 20 (area of triangle = x base x height) dy d
2 2 Sol 17: v y = = (8t − 5t2 ) =−
8 10t
dt dt
=60m
1 v y (0) = 8 ms−1
s2
For 6 < t < 8,= (2)( −20) =-20m
2
dx d
For 8 < t < 10, s3 =2 × 10 =20m v=
x = = 6 ms−1
(6t)
dt dt
3
Displacement = ∑ si v= v 2x + v 2y = 82 + 62 = 10
i=1
= | s1 | + | s2 | + | s3 | =|60|+|(-20)|+|20| dx d
Velocity
velocity(v) = = (3 + 8t + 7t2 )
dt dt
= 60+20+20 = 100m
v(t)
= 8t + 14t
∴ Distance travelled is 100 m and displacement is 60 m
v(2) = 36 ms−1
8 + 14(2) =
Sol 15: x(t)= a + bt2 dv d
a = = (8 + 14t) =14ms−2
dt dt
dx d
(
v = = a + bt2 =2bt
dt dt
) ∴ Velocity = 36 ms−1
Acceleration =14 ms−2
V(t)=2bt
Body is having a constant acceleration.
v(0)=0
P hysi cs | 2.55
−1
6
∫ dt t
∫0 dt t 0t
⇒C=
2 ms
c1 t2 c1 t2
t0 Substituting in (ii)
∫0 . .dt
∴ v
x
=2
t0 c t
2
2
a−
(ax 2
− ac + b2 )
∫0 12 .dt ac = x 2
=
ax2 − ax2 + ac − b2
x x3
c1 2
t0 4 t5 t0 t05
2 ∫0 t .dt
c1 5 0 c1 ac − b2
= 4 = . = . 5 ∴ ac =
c1 t0 2 2 t3 t 0 2 t 3 x3
2 ∫0 t .dt
3 0
0
3
3 1 2
v = v h= gt
x 5 2
3 h = 19. 6 m
Distance average of velocity is v
5 g =9. 8 m
a − v2
⇒ ac = ...............(2) … (ii) 9.8
x
Coming back to (i)
at + b 0 t
v= 4
x
Squaring on both sides =v gt 0≤t<2
at + b
2
a2 t2 + 2a + b + b2 For ascent uint = − v(2) = - g(2)
2
v = =
x x2 u = 19.6 ms−1
v = u+g(t-2) = 19. 6 + g(t-2); 2 < t < 4
2 a(at2 + 2abt) + b2
v = .............(3)
… (iii)
= v gt; 0≤t<2
x2
= 19.6 + g(t − 2); 2<t≤4
x2 = at2 + 2bt + c
Substituting in (iii)
a(x2 − c) + b2
v2 =
x2
P hysi cs | 2.57
v
202 − v 2 v 2 − u2
=200 = .............(2) s … (ii)
19.6 2a1 2a
202 − v 2 v 2 − u2
=200 = .............(2) s
2a1 2a
0 t
202 − v 2
600 = ..............(3) … (iii)
2a
-19.6
Divide (ii) by (iii)
1 2 202 − v 2
S gt 0≤t<2
2 200 2a1 1 a
⇒ = ⇒ = ⇒ a1 = 3a
The motion of ball is symmetric about t=2 i.e., if we 600 202 − v 2 3 a1
make t=4 as initial point, and reverse the motion of 2a
time ascent looks like decent.
Substitute in (i)
x
400 1 1 400 4
⇒ (20 − v) + ⇒ = (20 − v)
=
v 3a a v 3a
19.6
⇒ (20 − v)(v) =
300a............(4) … (iv)
From eq (iii)
0 t
2 4 202 − v 2
600 =
2a
Graph is symmetric about 2
1 2 (20 − v)(20 + v)
S gt 0≤t<2 a=
2 1200
1 Substitute in (iv)
g(4 − t)2 2<t≤4
2 300(20 − v)(20 + v)
(20 − v) =
1200
Sol 25: Let r = retardation = −a1
1
v
⇒= (20 + v) ⇒ 4v = 20 + v
Let a = acceleration 4
Let t1 = retardation time 20 400
⇒ v = ms−1 ⇒ t2 = = 60 s
t2 = uniform velocity time 3 20
t3 = acceleration time 3
Total time=2 t2 = 120 s = 2 min
Let v = uniform velocity
1 2 1
Sol 27: s = gt (s is distance from top) For < t < 1 , body is trying to go back to original
2 2
position.
Time of flight of 5th ball = 1 sec
Time of flight of 4th ball = 2 sec
Sol 3: (D) The acceleration on the ball is acceleration
Time of flight of 3th ball = 3 sec due to gravity which is always pointed downward,
1 2 2 2 1 towards the earth.
s= g 1 2 3 = g 1 4 9
2 2 Hence ay < 0 always.
−2
take g = 10 ms
Sol 4: (C) Here x (t) = - sin (t)
s = 5 1 4 9 = 5 20 45
dx
∴ 3rd , 4th , 5th ball are at 45, 20 , 5 m from top v(t) = = − cos(t)
dt
Sol 28: initial velocity of stone = 5 ms−2 Sol 5: (C) Average velocity vector is along the direction
Height = 50 m of the line joining the instantaneous point and the
starting point.
1
−5(t) + 10t2
⇒ 50 = Instantaneous velocity vector is along the slope at the
2
instantaneous point.
⇒ 5t2 − 5t − 50 =
0 ⇒ t2 − t − 10 =0
Both are same for point C.
1 ± 1 + 4(10)(1) 1 ± 41
⇒t= =
2(1) 2 Sol 6: (D) Here we use the symmetry of motion. i.e.
from ending point if you go reverse in time, it looks like
1 + 41 train is accelerating.
for t > 0 t =
2
So here for minimum time, train should accelerate for
Distance travelled by balloon in this time = 5(t) half the distance and then decelerate.
Total height of balloon 50 + 5t
d 1 2 d
=∴ d 1 at= ; t d
41 = 2
∴ 2 2 at= ; t a
=50 + 5 1 + = 68.5 m 2 2 a
2 d
=T 2t=
; T 2 d
=T 2t=
; T 2 a
a
Exercise 2
Sol 7: (D) The equation of line is
Single Correct Choice Type
a + kV= C, where k is slope of line, C is y intercept.
d(x2 ) dx dv
Sol 1: (C) = 2x − <0 a=
dt dt dt
2x − v < 0 dv dv
⇒ =C − kv; =dt
if x > 0 ⇒ v < 0 dt C − kv
if x , 0 ⇒ v > 0
P hysi cs | 2.59
2h
Time of flight (t) = 2 y
g
2h
∴ Dis tance =
2u
g
R
M
Sol 10: (B) We may use the formula U U
L et (A − ax t)2 + (B − ay t)2 =
f(x)
D(t) = f(x)
2 . 6 0 | Motion in a Straight Line
N
Displacement
Sol 6: (B) |Average velocity| =
time
AB 2
W E = = = 2m/s
time 1
v2 = u2 ± 2gh
V
vf=5m/s
i.e., v-h graph will be a parabola (because equation is
5 2 m/s quadratic).
(b) Initially velocity is downwards (–ve) and then after
collision it reverses its direction with lesser magnitude,
45° i.e., velocity is upwards (+ve). Graph (a) satisfies both
-vi=5m/s these conditions.
→
Note that time t = 0 corresponds to the point on the
∆ v = 5 2 m/s in north-west direction.
graph where h = d
→ 5 2 1
aav = = m/s2 (in north-west direction) at t=0, h=d
10 2
2
Sol 3: (A) To cross the river in shortest time one has to d
h
swim perpendicular to the river current. 3 1
ω ω
t= = Sol 9: (C) Distance travelled in tth second is,
vb 2
v br – v r2
1
s1 = u + at – a
1 1 2
∴ =
4 Given, u = 0
25 – vr2
1
sn an – a
2 2n – 1
Solving this equation, we get vr = 3 km/h ∴ = =
sn+1 1 2n + 1
a(n + 1) – a
2
Sol 5: (A) For particle P, motion between AC will be
an accelerated one while between CB a retarded one. Sol 10: (A) The v-x equation from the given graph can
But in any case horizontal component of its velocity be written as
will be greater than or equal to v. On the other hand,
in case of particle Q, it is always equal to v. Horizontal v
v = – 0 x + v0 … (i)
displacement for both the particles are equal. Therefore, x
0
tP < tQ.
dv v 0 dx v
a= =– = – 0 v
dt x0 dt x
0
Substituting v from Eq (i) we get,
P hysi cs | 2.61
1 1 1 g
y1 10t − gt2 and =
Sol 12: (B) = y 2 40t − gt2 =S2 = g(2)2 (4)
2 2 2 2
y2 − y1 = 30t (straight line)
1 g
but stone with 10 m/s speed will fall first and the other = S3 = g(3)2 (9)
2 2
stone is still in air. Therefore path will become parabolic g
till other stone reaches ground. Distance travelled in 1st second D1 =
2
Distance travelled in 2nd second D2 = S2 –S1
JEE Advanced/Boards g 3g
= (4 − 1)=
2 2
Exercise 1
Similarly D3 = S3 − S2 = g (9 − 4) = g (5)
Sol 1: Initial velocity
5 =126
−1 km/h 2 2
= 126of×car ms
18
5
= 126 × ms−1 = 35ms−1 g 3g 5g
18 D=
1 : D 2 : D3 =: : 1:3:5
2 2 2
= 35ms−1
Distance =200 m
∴ Ratio is 1: 3: 5
v2 35 × 352
=r2 = v 35 × 35 = 3.0625 ms–2
v =2s 2rs ⇒2
= ×r 200=
2s 2 × 200 Sol 4: Locomotive stops when V=0
= 3.0625ms−2
= 3.0625ms−2
v 35 given u = 54 km/hr=15 ms-1
E= = =v 11.43s
35
r 3.0625 E= = = 11.43s retardation (r)= 0.3 ms-2
r 3.0625
∴Retardation = 3.06 ms-2 uu 15 15
Hence =t === == 50
t= 50s s
r r 0.3
0.3
Time taken = 11.43 s
Distance travelled
30 × 5 −1 1 1
Sol 2: Velocity of police van (V1) = 30 km /h = ms ut − rt2 =
S= 15(50) − (0.3)(50)2 =
375m
18 2 2
Velocity of bullet with respect to police van =150 ms-1 Distance of traffic light (L) =400 m
2 . 6 2 | Motion in a Straight Line
Hence final distance of Locomotive= Now is you observe the graph, region I ( 0 < t < t1) is
symmetric to region II ( (t2 < t < 25)
L – S = 400-375=25 m
5 2
∴Locomotive is 25 m from traffic light. ∴ for t2< t < 25 area = t
2 1
∴ total Displacement
Sol 5: initial position = 3 cm
Final position =-5 cm 5 5
= t12 + 5t1 (25 − 2 t1 ) + t12 =5t12 + 125t1 − 10t12
2 2
Displacement = -5-(3)=-8 cm
= 125t1 − 5t12
Time =2 s
Avg velocity =20 ms-1
Initial velocity = 12 cms-1
1 125t − 5t12
= ut + at2
S ⇒ 20 = 1
2 25
1 2
⇒ 5t1 − 125t1 + 100 =
0
−=8 12(2) + a(2)2
2 ⇒ (t1 − 5)(t1 − 20) =
0
⇒ a =−16cms−2 ⇒ t= 5 , t= 20
1 1
Acceleration is −16cms−2
for t1=5 , ⇒ t2=20 or t1=20 , ⇒ t2=5
⇒ t1 < t2 ⇒ t1=5
Sol 6:
Hence the value of t is 5 sec.
Sol 7:
v
I II III
20
0 t a₂
t₁ t₂ 25
total Displacement a₁ I II
Average Velocity =
total time
total time (t) = 25 s 20 25
25
total displacement = area under v-t. graph = ∫=
v.dt
a2 =
0 − 20
a
∆ν
0 25 − 20 t
V0=5(t1)
a2 = −4ms−2
Final acceleration equal declaration,
∵ Particle returns to initial position, its displacement is
V0 -5 (25 – t2)=0
zero
⇒ 5t1-5(25-t2) =0
∴ ∫ v.dt =
0
⇒ t2=25-t1
t1
For 0 < t =
< t1 area 1
∫=
5 t.dt (v at) for 0 < t < 20, area = × 20 × 20 =200m
2
0
t1
5t12 for t > 0 V = 20 - 4 ( t -20)
= ∫=
5 t.dt (v at) =
2
0
∵ v = u –at and its starts for t =20 s
5t2
For t1
= 1
< t < t2 area t t
2
t2 = ∫ [20 − 4(t − 20)].dt= ∫ (100 − 4t).dt
= ∫ 5t1 .dt= 5t1 ( t2 − t1=
) 5t1 ( 25 − 2t1 ) 20 20
t1 4
= 100(t − 20) − (t2 − 202 ) = 100t − 2t2 − 1200
2
P hysi cs | 2.63
total area = 0 3
⇒ cos θ1 =
⇒ 200 + [100t -2t2 -1200] = 0 10
1
⇒ 2t2-100t +1000 =0 ⇒ sin θ2 =
10
⇒ t2-50t+500=0
⇒ tan θ2 =3
⇒ t = 36.2 s ⇒ θ2 = tan−1 3
Sol 8: ∵the stone can reach height (H) = 4h, Hence wind stream is inclined at tan-13° with vertical.
It initial velocity
Sol 10: for particle 1
ν 2(4h)g
= v ( 2Hg ) S1= (300 - 20t) cm
1 2 S2 = (400- 20t) cm
Distance travelled by upper stone D1 = gt
2 Let S1 have unit vector î
Distance travelled by lower stone
1 3
D=
1
vt − gt2 ⇒ S=
2 (400 − 20t)iˆ − (400 − 20t) ˆj
2
2 2 2
D1 + D2 =
h
= (200 − 20t)iˆ − 3(200 − 10t) ˆj
1 1
⇒ gt2 − vt − gt2 = h
2 2 Separation = S1 - S2
⇒ h = vt ⇒ h = 8hg.t
= [(300 − 20t) − (200 − 2t)] ˆi + 3(200 − 10t)ˆj
h h
⇒
= t = = (100 − 10t) ˆi + 3(200 − 10t)ˆj
8hg 8g
= 10[(10 − t)iˆ + 3(20 − t)ˆj]
h
Hence time when two stone cross is . = 10 (10 − t)2 + 3(20.t)2
dist ance
8g
= 10 1300 − 140t + 4t2
d(t)
Sol 9: Let vertical direction limit vector be ˆj , for a quadratic equation, min occurs at − b = 140= 35
horizontal î 2a 2 × 8 2
Drop
2
35 35 35
d = 10 1300 − 140 + 4 = 50 3cm
2 2 2
₂
₁ ∴ min separation is 50 3cm .
₁ + ₂ = 90
Sol 11: Final velocity (u) = at1
Let it further travel for t seconds, acceleration a.
Vcar = 2 î
Let initial displacement be S1.
Vdrops=6 ˆj
1 2
S1 = at
Vdrops w. r.t car = Vdrops - Vcar =−2iˆ + 6ˆj 2 1
1 1 α2
∴ at12 + at1 t − at2 = 0 dv = dt
2 2 2
⇒ t2 − 2t1 t − t12 = 0
α2
⇒v= t
2t1 ± 8t12 2
⇒t= =( ± 2 + 1)t1
2
α2 α2
∴
= a ,v
= t
t>0 2 2
∴t1= ( 2 + 1)t1 t
t
(ii) s = ∫ v.dt
s = ∫ v.dt
Total Time = t +t1 0
0 t
t α2 2
Total Time
= ( 2 + 2)t1 s =α ∫ t.dt
s=∫ t.dt
2
0
20
2 2
Sol 12: Let max velocity = V, total distance = S 2 α t 2 s
sα t2
= ⇒= t2 s
s
= 4⇒= t α
s 4 α
V 2 = 2a ; a=acceleration s s α s
m Average velocity=s =s =α s
Average velocity= = t 2= s 2
mv 2 t 2 s 2
⇒a= α
2s α
nv 2
Similarly retardation r = α s
2s ∴ Mean velocity <v> =
2
Here we again used the principle, retardation is
acceleration in reverse time. V V
Sol
Time14:of Time
flightof=flight
2 = 2 g
v 2s g
∴Time of acceleration t1= =
a mv 1= 4v22 2av 2
11 at24v 2 1 .a.2av
dispalcement
dispalcement = = at2 2= .a. =2 =
v 2s 2
g2
Time of deceleration t2= = 2 2 g2 gg2
r nv 2 ×21 × (9.8)2
= 2 × 1 × (9.8)
= 2m
= = 2m
2
1 s s (9.8)2 (9.8)
Time of uniform velocity = s − −
v m n
It falls 2m behind him.
s
Avg. Velocity =
2s 2s 1 s s Sol 15: Let distance be S
+ + s − −
mv nv v m n s
Vman =
V 90
=
1 1 s
1+ + Vescalator =
m n 60
Max
Max Velocity
Velocity 11 11
= 11+ +m + +n : 1 : 1
= Vman on moving escalator w. r. t ground= Vman+ Vescalator
Avg.
Avg. Velo city
Velocity m n 1 1 s
= s + =
90 60 36
Sol 13: (i) v = α x s s
Time= = 36
=
dv α dx α s v
= = . .v 36
dt 2 x dt 2 x
He can reach in 36 seconds.
v
= α
x Sol 16: Total distance to be covered= 180+180=360m
dv α α2 Let V1, V2 be velocities of trains
∴ = α= = a
dt 2 2 It they move in same direction, relative velocity = V1-V2
Opposite direction, relative velocity = V1+V2
P hysi cs | 2.65
He observes both moving with velocity –v. Sol 17: (B) For
dx
0 , t < T dx >0
Sol 7: (C, D) While throwing, the horizontal component 0, t < T > dt
0
dt dx
of the velocity of ball (with respect to earth) is equal to T < t < 2T <0
velocity of cart. dt
d2 x dv
<0∀t ⇒ <0∀t
dt2 dt
P hysi cs | 2.67
dv 20(u cos 45°) – 40(u cos 45°) = 40(v) – 20(u cos 450°)
Sol 18: (D) <0
dt \ v=0
Sol 19: (C) Speed is |v|. Apply |v| to v-t graph. i.e., particle Q comes to rest. So, particle Q will fall
vertically downwards and will strike just midway
Match the Columns between A and B.
(ii) Maximum height,
Sol 20: A → p,s; B → r; C → q; D → s
u2 sin2 θ (49)2 sin2 45°
H= = = 61.25 m
dx 2g 2 × 9.8
(A) < 0, x>0 , 0<t<T
dt Therefore, time taken by Q to reach the ground,
⇒ Ball rolling towards origin. (p)
2H 2 × 61.25
t= = = 3.53 s
dx g 9.8
= 0 t>T
dt
So it suddenly stops (s) Sol 2: Let t1 be the time from A to B and t2 the time
dx from B to C
(B) There is a sudden change in slope i.e.
dt Then
A
Hence it had bounced of something (r)
H h
(C) There is a sudden change in slope. The particle was
going to origin and went back (q) H
B
dx h
(D) < 0, x > 0 ⇒ Object going towards origin.
dt
C
dx
= 0; t>T
dt 2(H – h) 2h
t1 = and t2 =
dx g g
< 0; 0<t<T
dt
Then, the total time
⇒ Sudden change in velocity.
2
dx T = t1 + t2 = [ H–h + h ]
Also = 0 ⇒ ball stops (s) g
dt
dt
For t to be maximum =0
dh
Previous Years’ Questions
2 –1 1
or + =0
g 2 H – h 2 h
Sol 1: (i) Range of both the particles is
1 1
u2 sin2θ (49)2 sin90° or = or 2h = H
R= = h H–h
g 9.8
By symmetry we can say that they will collide at highest h 1
∴ =
point. H 2
5m/s C
60°
A VAX
10 m/s P 2
t= s
5 3m/s 3
B F D
A 10m/s d₁ d₂
vCx = 5 m/s 2
|vCx| t = (5) = 5.77 m
vCy = 5 3 m/s 3
Therefore, position from B is d1 i.e., 11.55 m and from
(v CA )yCE 10
∴ = = D is d2 or 5.77 m.
(v CA )x AE d
v Cy – v Ay Sol 4: u = 5 3 m/s
10 5 3–0 10
or = or = 1
v Cx – v Ax d 5 – (–10) d ∴ u cos60° = (5 3 ) m/s = 2.5 3 m/s
2
∴ d = 10 3 m = 17.32 m 3
and u sin 60° = (5 3 ) m/s = 7.5 m/s
2
AC
(ii) Time of collision, t =
→
| v CA | y u 2
→ 60°u
| v CA | = (v 2CAx ) + (v CAy )2 Q
h
2 2
= {5 – (–10)} + {5 3 – 0} = 10 3 m/s 10m
x P
y=10-h
CA = (10)2 + (10 3)2 = 20 m x
0
20 2
∴t= = s Since, the horizontal displacement of both the shots
10 3 3 are equal. The second should be fired early because it’s
horizontal component of velocity u cos 60° or 2. 5 3
P hysi cs | 2.69
m/s is less than the other which is u or 5 3 m/s. Therefore, velocity of stone at highest point will be
→
Now let first shot takes t1 time to reach the point P and v = ( 4iˆ + 3ˆj ) m/s
the second t2.
or speed at highest point,
Then, x = (u cos 60°)t2 = ut1 →
v=|v|= (4)2 + ((3)2 m/s = 5 m/s
or x = 2.5 3 t2 = 5 3 t1 … (i)
Now, applying law of conservation of linear momentum,
or t2 = 2t1 … (ii) let v0 be the velocity of combined mass after collision.
1 2 1 Then, mv = (2m)v0
and h = |(u sin 60°)t2 – gt | = gt12
2 2 2
v 5
1 1 ∴ v0 = = m/s = 2. 5 m/s
or h = gt22 – (u sin 60°)t2 = gt12 2 2
2 2
∴ Speed of combined mass just after collision is
Taking g = 10 m/s2 2. 5 m/s
h = 5t22 – 7.5 t2 = 5t12 … (iii) (ii) Tension in the string becomes zero at horizontal
position. It implies that velocity of combined mass
Substituting t2 = 2t1 in Eq. (iii), we get also becomes zero in horizontal position. Applying
conservation of energy, we have
5(2t1)2 – 7.5(2t1) = 5t12
or 15t12 = 15t1 ⇒ t1 = 1 s T= 0
v= 0
and t2 = 2t1 = 2 s
L
x = 5 3 t1 = 5 3 m [From Eq. (i)]
This is the absolute velocity of stone (with respect to x =0.5m 0.5 0.5
1 –k –k dx
ground). At highest point of its trajectory, the vertical ∴
2
mv2 = ∫ F(dx) = ∫ 2x2 (dx) = 2 ∫ x2
x =1.0m 1.0 1.0
component (z) of its velocity will become zero, whereas
the x and y-components will remain unchanged
2 . 7 0 | Motion in a Straight Line
0.5
k 1 1 Acceleration of particle with respect to block
k 1 – k
= = =
2 x 1.0 2 0.5 1.0 2 = acceleration of particle – acceleration of block
= (g sin θ î + g cos θ ˆj )–(g sin θ) î = g cos θ ˆj
k
∴v=± Now motion of particle with respect to block will be a
m
projectile as shown
Substituting the values
10 –2 Nm2
v=± = ± 1 m/s u O
10 –2 kg
P R
Therefore, velocity of particle at x = 1.0 m is
v = – 1.0 m/s g cos
Negative sign indicates that velocity is in negative
x-direction. The only difference is, g will be replaced by g cos θ
(ii) Applying work-energy theorem between any u2 sin2α
∴ PQ = Range (R) =
intermediate value x = x, we get gcos θ
x x
1 –k dx k 1 k 1 (ii) Horizontal displacement of particle with respect
2
mv2 = ∫ 2x 2
= = – 1
2 2 1.0 2 x
to ground is zero. This implies that initial velocity
1.0
with respect to ground is only vertical, or there is no
horizontal component of the absolute velocity of the
k 1 1 1–x
∴ v2 = – 1 ∴v= –1 = particle.
m x x x
u
^
k 10 –2 λ Nm2 j
= u cos(+)
m ^
10 –2 kg i
dx 1–x
but v = – =
dt x
0.25 x v cos
x x
∴ ∫ 1–x
dx = – ∫ dt or ∫ 1–x
dx = – ∫ dt
1 0
Sol 7: (i) Accelerations of particle and block are shown Let v be the velocity of the block down the plane.
in figure.
Velocity of particle
= u cos (α + θ) î + u sin(α + θ) ˆj
Velocity of block = – v cos θ î – v sinθ ˆj
g sin
g cos ∴ Velocity of particle with respect to ground
= {u cos (α + θ) – v cos q} î +
^
i ^
i {u sin (α + θ) – v sin q} ˆj
Now, as we said earlier that horizontal component of
g sin absolute velocity should be zero.
Therefore, u cos (α + θ) – v cos θ = 0
ucos(α + θ)
or v = (down the plane)
cos θ
P hysi cs | 2.71
Sol 8: Let t be the time after which the stone hits the Sol 9: (i) Let A stands for trolley and B for ball.
object and θ be the angle which the velocity vector u
Relative velocity of B with respect to A ( vBA ) should be
makes with horizontal. According to question, we have
following three conditions. Vertical displacement of along OA for the ball to hit the trolley. Hence, vBA will
stone is 1.25 m make an angle of 45° with positive x-axis.
1 2 Q = 45°
1.25 = (u sin θ)t – gt
2 (ii) Let v = absolute velocity of ball.
where g = 10 m/s2 4θ 4
φ= = (45°) = 60° → with x-axis
or (u sin θ)t = 1.25 + 5t 2
… (i) 3 3
→
v 3v ˆ
Horizontal displacement of stone ∴ v B = (v cos θ) î + (v sin θ) ˆj = î + j
2 2
= 3 + displacement of object A →
v A = ( 3 – 1) ˆj
1 2
∴ (u cos θ)t = 3 + at , → 3v
2 v
∴ v BA = î + – 3 + 1 ˆj
where a = 1.5 m/s2 2 2
→
or (u cos θ)t = 3 + 0.75 t2 … (ii) Since v BA is at 45°
Horizontal component of velocity (of stone) = vertical
v 3v
component (because velocity vector is inclined at 45° ∴ = – 3 + 1 or v = 2 m/s
2 2
with horizontal)
∴ (u cos θ) = gt – (u sin θ) … (iii) 2usin θ 2 × 10 × sin60°
Sol 10: t = T = = = 3s
g 10
(The right hand side is written gt – u sin θ because the
stone is in its downward motion. Therefore, gt > u sin θ. 1 2
Displacement of train in time t = at
In upward motion u sin θ > gt) 2
Multiplying Eq. (iii) with t we can write Displacement of boy with respect to train = 1.15 m
or (u cos θ)t + (u sin θ)t = 10 t2 … (iv) ∴ Displacement of boy with respect to ground
> 4 m/s2 y
Hence, |a| ≥ 4 at some point or points in its path.
t=
2p Vy
Sol 13: (A, B, C) b
a x
x
x = a cos (pt) ⇒ cos (pt) = … (i) O ax
a
y
y = b sin (pt) ⇒ sin (pt) = … (ii)
b
Squaring and adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
x2 y2
+ =1
2
a b2
a x
O ax
P hysi cs | 2.73
t=0
y = 0 = vx = ay
x=a
vy = by and
ax = – ap2
PHYSICS
FOR JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
SECOND
EDITION
Exhaustive Theory
(Now Revised)
Formula Sheet
9000+ Problems
based on latest JEE pattern
PlancEssential
Questions recommended for revision
3. MOTION IN A PL ANE
1. INTRODUCTION
Motion in a plane is a two dimensional motion. The analysis of this type of motion becomes easy when we consider
this motion as a combination of two straight line motions along two mutually perpendicular axes lying in the
plane of motion. In Cartesian coordinate system the two mutually perpendicular axes are the x-axis and the y-axis
respectively. The displacement, velocity and acceleration of the particle are resolved into components along the
x and y axes and motion along each axis is studied independent of the other. The net displacement, velocity or
acceleration is the vector sum of their respective components along the two axes. In this chapter we will discuss
about the motion of a projectile, the motion of a body relative to another body, the motion of a body in a river, the
motion of an airplane with respect to wind, and circular motion.
2. MOTION IN A PLANE
When a body moves in a straight line, we call it motion in a straight line or one dimension. For eg, a car going
straight on a road. When you throw a ball towards your friend, the ball follows a non-linear path. This motion is
termed as motion in two dimensions or motion in a plane.
The position of a particle that is free to move can be located by two coordinates in a plane. We choose the plane
of motion as the X-Y plane. We choose a suitable instant as t = 0 and choose the origin at the place where the
particle is situated at t = 0. Any two convenient mutually perpendicular directions in the X-Y plane are chosen as
the X and Y-axes.
3. PROJECTILE MOTION
Projectile motion is a form of motion in which an object or particle (here called a projectile) is thrown in an oblique
direction near the earth’s surface, and it moves along a curved path under the action of a continuous motive force.
The path observed during a projectile motion is called its trajectory. Projectile motion is possible only when there
is one force applied at the beginning of the trajectory, after which there is no force in operation except a constant
force.
u
u
u
Figure 3.1
However, we can separately discuss the motion of the projectile for both the horizontal and vertical parts. In this
regard, we begin by considering the origin as the point of projection.
Now, we have ux = ucos θ; ax = 0 ; uy =
usin θ; ay =
−g.
A
u sin
X
O u cos B
Figure 3.2
Now, t = 0 exactly corresponds to the initial position O of the particle. Hence, the time at which it reaches B is thus,
2usin θ
T=
g
This equation helps us to exactly calculate the time of flight.
3.1.4 Range
Consider the distance OB covered by a particle, which is the horizontal range. It is the distance travelled by the
2usin θ
particle in time T =
g
2u2 sin θ cos θ u2 sin2θ
By the equation of horizontal motion, =x (ucos θ) × T or, = OB =
g g
3.1.5 Maximum Height
We have, ν y = uy −=
gt u sin θ − gt
usin θ
However, at the maximum height, =
0 usin θ − gt or, =t
g
2
1 u sin θ 1 u sin θ
The actual maximum height is H =uy t − gt2 =(u sin θ) − g
2 g 2 g
The above are the standard equations of trajectory of any projectile. Here, we should be aware of the fact that the
equation is quadratic in x. This is why the path of a projectile is always a parabola. Further, the above equation can
x
also be represented in terms of range (R) of the projectile as y = x 1 − tan α
R
Illustration 1: Assume that a ball is thrown from a field at a speed of 12.0 m/s and at an angle of 45° with the
2
horizontal. At what distance will it hit the field again? Take g = 10.0 m/ s . (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Use the formula for the range of a projectile.
Thus, the ball hits the field exactly at 14.4 m from the point of projection.
3 . 4 | Motion in a Plane
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
(i) Range is maximum where 2= α 45 and this maximum range is:
α 1or=
u2 Y
Rmax
= = 4H
g
(ii) For given value of u, range at α and range at φ are equal although
times of flight and maximum heights may be different. Because u
u
u2 sin2(90o − α ) u2 sin(180o − 2α ) u2 sin2α
R o
= = = = Rα
90 −α g g g 30°
60°
X
As we have seen in the above derivations that ax = 0, i.e., motion of
the projectile in the horizontal direction is uniform. Hence, horizontal Figure 3.3
component of velocity u cos α does not change during its motion.
Motion in the vertical direction is first retarded and then accelerated in opposite direction. As the equa-
y ax − bx2 (equation of parabola), therefore, the path
tion of trajectory of projectile is of the form, =
followed by a projectile is a parabola.
B Rajiv Reddy (JEE 2012, AIR 11)
Illustration 2: Find the angle of a projectile for which both the horizontal range and maximum height are equal.
(JEE MAIN)
Sol: Use the formula for the range and maximum height of a projectile.
Given, R = H
Illustration 3: The given Fig. 3.4 shows a pirate ship 560 m from a fort defending a harbor entrance. A defense
canon, located at sea level, fires balls at initial speed ν =82m / s (JEE ADVANCED)
y
63°
27° x
Figure 3.4
(a) At what angle θ from the horizontal must a ball be fired to hit the ship?
Sol: Use the formula for the range of a projectile to find the angle of projection.
1 −1 gR 1 −1 (9.8m / s2 )(560m) 1 −1
=θ sin
= sin = sin 0.816
2 ν2 2 (82m / s)2 2
0
One solution of (54.7 ) is worked out using a calculator; now, we subtract it from 180 to get the other solution
(125.3 ) . This gives =
us θ0 27 and
= θ0 63 .
P hysics | 3.5
Illustration 4: Suppose a batsman B hits a high-fly ball to the outfield, directly toward an outfielder F and with a
launch speed of ν =40m / s and a launch angle of θ0 = 35 . During the flight, a line from the outfielder to the ball
makes an angle φ with the ground. Based on the data provided, plot the elevation angle tan = θ 2cot α versus time
t, assuming that the outfielder is (a) already positioned to catch the ball, (b) is 6.0 m too close to the batsman and
(c) is 6.0 m too far away. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: While trying to catch a ball which has gone to a great height you can imagine that the angle of line of sight
increases as the ball moves. If we neglect air drag, then the ball is a projectile for which the vertical motion and the
horizontal motion can be analyzed individually.
90
60
(deg)
y
Too close
30
B y F
x Too far
x R x
R 0 1 2 3 4 5
(a) t (s)
(b)
Figure 3.5
Assuming that the ball is caught at approximately the height it is hit, the horizontal distance traveled by the ball is
the range R, given by Eq. (R =(ν20 / g)sin2θ )
The ball can be caught if the outfielder’s distance from the batsman equals the range R of the ball. Using the above
equation, we find the elevation angle φ for a ball that was hit toward an outfielder is (a) defined and (b) plotted
versus time t.
ν20 (40m / s)2
=R sin2
= θ sin(70
= ) 153.42m
g 9.8m / s2
Fig. 3.5 (a) above shows a snapshot of the ball in flight when the ball is at height y and horizontal distance x from
the batsman (who is at the origin). The horizontal distance of the ball from the outfielder is R – x, and the elevation
angle φ of the ball in the outfielder’s view is given by tan φ = y/(R–x).
Illustration 5: Suppose that a projectile is fired horizontally with a velocity of 98 m/s from the top of a hill that is
490 m high. Find:
(a) The time taken by the projectile to reach the ground,
(b) The distance of the point where the particle hits the ground from the foot of the hill and
(c) The velocity with which the projectile hits the ground. (take g = 9.8 m / s2 ) (JEE MAIN)
3 . 6 | Motion in a Plane
Sol: Let x-axis be along the horizontal and the y-axis be along the vertical. The projectile will have uniform velocity
along the positive x-axis and uniform acceleration along the negative y-axis.
In this problem, we cannot apply the formulae of R, H and T directly. Necessarily we have to follow the three steps
discussed in the theory. Here, however, it will be more convenient to choose x and y directions as shown in the Fig.
3.6 provided.
Here,=
ux 98m / s,a
= x 0,u
= y ay g O
0 and = u = 98 m/s
x
1 1
(a) At A, S y = 490m . Therefore, applying sy =uy t + ay t2 ∴ 490 =0 + (9.8)t2 ∴ t =10s
2 2
y
1 1
uy t + ay t2 ∴ 490 =0 + (9.8)t2 ∴ t =10s
2 2
1
(b) BA =sx =ux t + ax t2 or BA =
(98)(10) + 0 or BA =
980m A Vx
2 B
∴ ν= ν2x + ν2y = 2 2
(98) + (98) = 98 2 m / s Figure 3.6
v y 98
and tan=
β = = 1 ∴ β 45
=
v x 98
Thus, we show that the projectile hits the ground with a velocity 98 2 m / s at an angle of β = 45 with horizontal
as shown in the Fig. 3.6 provided.
Based on the analysis, alternatives are, therefore, distinguished on the basis of coordinate system that we choose
to employ:
(a) Planar coordinates along the incline (x) and perpendicular to the incline (y)
(b) Planar coordinates in horizontal (x) and vertical (y) directions
However, we use the first approach for analyzing this kind of motion, i.e., coordinates along the incline (x) and
perpendicular to the incline (y).
P hysics | 3.7
Here, the first value represents the initial time of projection. Hence, the second expression gives us the time of
flight. However, we should note here that the expression of time of flight is as in a normal case albeit in a significant
manner.
2uy
In the generic form, we can express the formula of the time of flight as: Τ =
ay
5.2.2 Range of Flight
The first thing that we should note that we do not use the term “horizontal range” as the range on the inclined
plane is no more horizontal. Rather, we simply refer the displacement along the x-axis as “range”. Thus, we can
find range of flight by considering motion in both “x” and “y” directions. We further note that we utilize the same
approach even in the normal case. Now, let “R” be the range of the projectile motion.
1
Substituting the value of “T” as obtained earlier, we have x= ux Τ − ax Τ2
2
ucos(θ − α ) × 2usin(θ − α ) gsin α × 4u2 sin2 (θ − α )
R −
gcos α 2g2 cos2 α
u2
=⇒R
gcos 2
α
{2cos ( θ − α ) sin( θ − α ) cos α − sin α × 2sin ( θ − α )}
2
u2
sin2(θ − α )cos α − sin α {1 − cos2(θ − α )}
=⇒R
gcos2 α
u2
=⇒R {sin2(θ − α)cos α − sin α + sin α cos2(θ − α)}
gcos2 α
u2
= ⇒R
Now, we use the trigonometric relation, sin(A
{sin(2θ − 2α + α) − sin α}
B) 2sinA
= +gcos α cosB + cos AsinB
u2 u2
=⇒R {sin(2θ − 2α + α) =
− sin α} ⇒ R {sin(2θ − α) − sin α}
gcos2 α gcos2 α
u2
=⇒R {sin(2θ − α) − sin α}
gcos2 α
3 . 8 | Motion in a Plane
This is the exact expression for the range of projectile on an inclined plane. We also note that this expression
u2 sin2θ
reduces to the one for the normal case, when α =0 ⇒R =
g
In the same way, the expression of range of flight differs only with respect to angle of sine function:
u2
=R {sin(2θ + α) + sin α}
gcos2 α
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
It is very handy to note that expressions have changed only with respect of the sign of “ α ” for the time
of flight and the range. We only need to exchange “ α ” by”– α s”.
Vaibhav Krishan (JEE 2009, AIR 22)
Illustration 6: Assume that a projectile is thrown from the base of an incline y g sin
of angle 30° as shown in the Fig. 3.9 provided. It is thrown at an angle of 60°
u g cos
from the horizontal direction at a speed of 10 m/s. Calculate the total time of
flight is (consider g = 10 m/s2). (JEE MAIN)
g
O
Sol: The x-axis has to be assumed along the inclined.
This problem can be handled with a reoriented coordinate system as shown in
the Fig. 3.9 provided. Here, the angle of projection with respect to x-direction
is ( θ – a) and acceleration in y-direction is “g cosa”. Now, the total time of P
flight for the projectile motion, when the point of projection and return are on
the same level, is x
Figure 3.9
2usin(θ − a)
⇒Τ=
gcos α
Now,
= θ 60
=
,a 30 , u = 10m/s. Then, by substituting these values, we finally obtain
2X10 sin(60 − 30 ) 20 sin30 2
=
⇒Τ = =
gcos30 10 cos30 3
Illustration 7: Consider that two projectiles are thrown with the same speed from point ”O” and “A” so that they hit
the incline. If t0 andt A be the time of flight in two cases, then prove which option out of those given here is true.
(JEE MAIN)
utan θ
(A) t0 = t A (B) t0 & t A (C) t0 > t A (D) =
t0 t=
A
g
P hysics | 3.9
Sol: The x-axis has to be assumed along the inclined. Use the formula for time
of flight on an inclined. Let us first consider the projectile thrown from the point u
A
“O”. Considering the angle the velocity vector makes with the horizontal, we
u
represent the time of flight as:
2usin(2θ − θ) 2utan θ
=⇒ t0 = ⇒ t0
gcos θ g
O
Further, for the projectile thrown from the point “A”, the angle with horizontal is Figure 3.10
zero. Hence, the time of flight is expressed as
2usin(2X0 − θ) 2utan θ
=⇒ tA =
gcos θ g
Thus, we observe that the times of flight in the two cases are equal.
⇒ tA =
t0
Hence, option (A) is correct.
Illustration 8: Two inclined planes of angles 30° and 60° are placed so that X
they touch each other at the base as shown in the Fig. 3.11 provided.
Further, a projectile is projected at right angle at a speed of 10 3 m/s Y 103 m/s Q
from point “P” and hits the other incline at point “Q” normally. Then,
the time of flight is: (JEE ADVANCED) P
15
10 3 60° Vx
30°
60°
5 3 V
Vy
Figure 3.12
=Vx 10
= 3 cos 60 5 3 will remain constant
∴ Here, V cos60 = 5 3
55 33 −V−V
∴ VV = = X2 10
X2=
=10 ∴∴VyVy= =−V− Vsin30
sin30= == 5−5
−=
33 2 2
∴
∴ VV = = uu−−gt
gt 5 5= = 1515
∴∴− − − 10t
− 10t
∴
∴==10t
10t 20
20 =
=∴∴t t 2s2s
3 . 1 0 | Motion in a Plane
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
sin(2θ−α)=1
sin(2θ − a)= 1 ⇒⇒ sin(2θ − α )= sin π / 2
u2
⇒ 2θ − α = π / 2 ⇒ θ = π / 4 + α / 2 ⇒ Rmax = (1 − sin α )
gcos2 α
Anand K (JEE 2011, AIR 47)
6. RELATIVE MOTION
The measurements describing motion are generally subject to the state of motion of the frame of reference with
respect to which measurements are taken about. Our day-to-day perception of motion is generally based on our
earth’s view—a view common to all bodies at rest with respect to earth. However, we come across cases when there
is a subtle perceptible change in our view of earth. One such case is traveling in the city trains. We easily find that
it takes lot longer to overtake another train on a parallel track. Also, we happen to see two people talking while
driving separate cars in parallel lanes, as if they were stationary to each other! In terms of kinematics, as a matter
of fact, they are actually stationary to each other even though each of them is in motion with respect to ground.
In this topic, we study motion from a perspective other than that of our earth. The only condition that we subject
ourselves is that two references or two observers making the measurements of motion of an object, are moving at
constant velocity.
We now consider two moving observers, “A” and “B”:
The relative velocity of A with respect of B (written as ν AB ) is ν AB = ν A − νB
Similarly, the relative acceleration of A with respect to B is aAB = aA − aB Relative velocity
A B
Illustration 9: Assume that two cars, standing apart, start moving
toward each other at speeds of 1 m/s and 2 m/s along a straight road.
What could be the speed with which they approach each other? 1 m/s 2 m/s
x
(JEE MAIN)
Sol: Let us consider that “A” denotes earth, “B” denotes the first car and
“C” denotes the second car. Therefore, the equation of relative velocity x
for this case is: νBA =
1m / s and νCA = −2m / s.
νCA = νBA + νCB ⇒ −2 = 1 + νCB ⇒ νCB = −2 − 1 = −3m / s
x
This implies that the car “C” is approaching “B” at a speed of –3 m/s along 0 m/s 3 m/s
the straight road. Further, it also means that the car ”B” is approaching
Figure 3.13
P hysi cs | 3.11
“C” at a speed of 3 m/s along the straight road. We, therefore, say that the two cars approach each other at a
relative speed of 3 m/s.
To evaluate relative velocity, we proceed as follows:
•• Apply velocity of the reference object (say object “A”) to other object(s) and hence render the reference object
at rest.
•• The resultant velocity of the other object (“B”) is therefore equal to relative velocity of “B” with respect to “A”.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
•• The foremost thing in solving problems of relative motion is about visualizing measurement. If we
say a body “A” has relative velocity “v” with respect to another moving body “B”, then we simply
mean that we are making measurement from the moving frame (reference) of “B”.
•• It is helpful in solving problem to make reference object stationary by applying negative of its
velocity to both objects. The resultant velocity of the moving object is equal to the relative velocity
of the moving object with respect to reference object. If we interpret relative velocity in this manner,
it gives easy visualization as we are accustomed to observing motion from stationary state.
Illustration 10: Assume that a boy is riding a cycle at a speed of 5√3 m/s toward east along a straight line. It starts
raining at a speed of 15 m/s in the vertical direction. What is the direction of rainfall as observed by the boy?
(JEE MAIN)
Sol: Let us denote earth, boy and rain with symbols A, B and C, respectively.
The question here provides the velocity of B and C with respect to A (earth).
-VBA VBA
νBA = 5 3 m/s; νCA = 15 m/s x
Now, we need to determine the direction of rain (C) with respect to boy (B), VCB
i.e., νCB .
VCA
νCA = νBA + νCB ⇒ νCB = νCA − νBA
Thus, we now draw the vector diagram to evaluate the terms on the right
side of the equation. Therefore, here, we need to evaluate “ νCA − νBA ”,
which is equivalent to “ νCA + ( −νBA ) ”. We now apply parallelogram theorem Figure 3.14
to obtain vector sum as represented in the Fig. 3.14 provided.
For the boy (B), the rain appears to fall, making an angle “ θ ” with the vertical (–y direction).
νBA 5 √ 3 1
⇒ tan
= θ = == tan30=
⇒ θ 30
νCA 15 √3
Illustration 11: Consider that a person is driving a car toward east at a speed of 80 km/hr. A train appears to move
toward north with a velocity of 80√3 km/hr to this person. Find the speed of the train as measured with respect to
earth. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: The velocity of the train with respect to earth is the vector sum of its velocity with respect to car and the
velocity of car with respect to earth.
Let us first denote the car and train as “A” and “B,” respectively. Here, we are provided with the y
speed of car (“A”) with respect to earth, i.e., “ ν A ” and speed of train (“B”) with respect to “A,”
i.e., νBA . νA =80km / hr; νBA =
80 √ 3km
3 km/ /hrhr VBA
VB
Now, we are required to find the speed of train (“B”) with respect to earth, i.e., νB . From the
equation of relative motion, we have VA
x
νBA = νB − ν A ⇒ νB = νBA + ν A
Figure 3.15
3 . 1 2 | Motion in a Plane
To evaluate the right-hand side of the equation, we draw vectors “ νBA ” and “ ν A ” and use parallelogram law to find
the actual speed of the train.
⇒ νB {(ν BA + ( νA ) }
)=
2 2
(
2
80 3 =
)
+ 802 160km / hr
ν A= (ν 2
AB + νB2 + 2ν AB νB cos α )
where “ α ” is the angle between νB and ν AB vectors. The angle “ β ” formed by the resultant velocity with x-direction
ν AB sin α
is given as: tan β =
νB + ν AB cos α
d d Figure 3.17
makes with the vertical. =t =
ν Ay ν AB cos θ
Thus, we can use either of these two expressions to calculate time to cross the river, depending on the inputs
available.
P hysi cs | 3.13
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
We have discussed motion with specific reference to boat in a water stream. However, the consideration
is general and is applicable to the motion of a body in a medium. For example, the discussion and analysis
can be extended to the motion of an aircraft, whose velocity is modified by the motion of the wind.
Illustration 12: An aircraft flies with velocity of 200 ( 2 )km/hr and the wind is blowing from the south. If the
relative velocity of the aircraft with respect to wind is 1000 km/hr, then find the direction in which the aircraft
should fly such that it reaches a destination in the north-east direction. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The vector sum of the velocity of the airplane with respect to the wind and the velocity of the wind with
respect to ground is equal to velocity of the aircraft with respect to ground. This net velocity should be in north-
east direction.
We show the velocities pertaining to this problem in the Fig. 3.18 provided. In the Fig. 3.18 provided, OP denotes
the velocity of the aircraft in still air or equivalently it represents the relative velocity of the aircraft with respect to
air in motion; PQ denotes the velocity of the wind and OQ denotes the resultant velocity of the aircraft. However, it
is clear that the aircraft should fly in the direction OP so that it is ultimately led to follow the north-east direction.
We should understand here that one of the velocities is the resultant velocity of the remaining two velocities.
Therefore, it follows that the three velocity vectors are represented by the sides of a closed triangle.
We can now demonstrate the direction of OP, if we can find the angle” θ ”. The y
easiest way to determine the angle between vectors composing a triangle is to
apply the sine law,
Q
OP PQ
= VB
sin 45 sin θ VA
P
Therefore, by substituting these values, we obtain
VAB
x
O
Figure 3.18
3 . 1 4 | Motion in a Plane
Illustration 13: Assume that a boat, capable of sailing at 2 m/s, moves upstream in a river. The water in the stream
flows at 1 m/s. A person walks from the front to the rear end of the boat at a speed of 1 m/s along the liner
direction. What is the speed of the person (m/s) with respect to the ground? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: First find the velocity of boat with respect to ground. The velocity y
of man with respect to boat is added to the velocity of boat with
respect to ground to get the velocity of man with respect to ground.
Let us assume that the direction of stream be in x-direction and the VAB VA VB
direction across stream be in y-direction. We further denote boat with
”A”, stream with “B”, and the person with “C”. We can now solve this
problem in two parts. In the first part, we find out the velocity of boat
(A) with respect to ground and then we calculate the velocity of the
person (C) with respect to ground. O x
Figure 3.19
Here,
velocity of boat (A) with respect to stream (B): νBA = –2 m/s y
Velocity of the stream (A) with respect to ground: νB = 1 m/s
Velocity of the person (C) with respect to boat (A): νCA = 1 m/s
Velocity of the person (C) with respect to ground: νC =? VA VCA VC
The velocity of boat with respect to ground is equal to the resultant velocity
of the boat as given by: ν A =νBA + νB ⇒ ν A =−2 + 1 =−1m / s
For the motion of person and boat, the velocity of the person with respect
to ground is equal to the resultant velocity of (i) velocity of the person (C) O x
with respect to boat (A) and (ii) velocity of the boat (A) with respect to
Figure 3.20
ground. Hence, νC =νCA + ν A ⇒ νC =1 + ( −1) =0 .
7. CIRCULAR MOTION
Circular motion is a movement of an object/particle along the circumference of a circle or motion along a
circular path. However, it can be uniform or non uniform.
Familiar examples of circular motion include an artificial satellite orbiting the earth at constant height, a stone
which is tied to a rope and is being swung in circles and a car turning through a curve in a race track.
Angular displacement of a body is the angle in radians (degrees, revolutions) through which a point or line has
been turned in a specified sense about a specified axis. Angular displacement is denoted by θ .
The angular velocity is defined as the rate of change of angular displacement. The SI unit of angular velocity
dθ ν
is radians per second. Angular velocity is usually represented by the symbol omega ( ω ). =
ω ,=
ω where
dt r
v is linear velocity.
Angular acceleration is the rate of change of angular velocity. In SI units, it is measured in radians per second squared
(rad/ s2 ), and is usually denoted by the Greek letter alpha ( α ).
dω d2 θ aΤ
=
α = , or =
α
dt dt2 r
P hysi cs | 3.15
⇒a= −
ν
r
( )
ν cos θˆi − ν sin θˆj = ax ˆi + ay ˆj where ax =
ν2
− cos θ ; ay =
r
ν2
− sin θ
r
It is evident from the equation of acceleration that it varies as the angle with horizontal, “ θ ” change. Therefore, the
magnitude of acceleration is
a= a = ( )
ax 2 + ay 2 ⇒ a = a =
ν
r
{ (
ν2 cos2 θ + cos2 θ )} ⇒a=
ν2
r
Illustration 14: Assume that a cyclist negotiates the curvature of 20 m at a speed of 20 m/s. What is the magnitude
of his acceleration? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The speed of the cyclist moving along circular path is constant. So its acceleration is centripetal.
Let the speed of the cyclist be constant. Then, the acceleration of the cyclist is the centripetal acceleration that is
required to move the cyclist along a circular path, i.e., the acceleration resulting from the change in the direction
of motion along the circular path.
ν2 202
Hence, v = 20 m/s and r = 20 m ⇒ a= = = 20m / s2
r 20
3 . 1 6 | Motion in a Plane
dν d2s d2 d2 θ
aΤ = = =
dt dt2 dt2
( rθ ) = r = rα
dt2
Illustration 15: A particle, starting from the position (5 m, 0 m), is moving along a circular path about the origin in
x–y plane. The angular position of the particle is a function of time as given here, θ= t2 + 0.2t + 1 . Find (i) tangential
acceleration (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Differentiate the expression for angular position with respect to time to get angular velocity. Tangential
acceleration is the product of angular acceleration and the radius.
From the data on initial position of the particle, it is clear that the radius of the circle is 5 m.
(i) For determining tangential acceleration, we need to have expression of linear speed in time.
ν = ωr = ( 2t + 0.2 ) × 5 = 10t + 1
dν
We obtain tangential acceleration by differentiating the above function: a=
Τ = 10m / s2
dt
Illustration 16: At a particular instant, a particle is moving at a speed of 10 m/s on a circular path of radius 100 m.
Its speed is increasing at the rate of 1 m/s2. What is the acceleration of the particle? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The acceleration of the particle is the vector sum of the centripetal acceleration and the tangential acceleration.
The tangential acceleration is equal to the rate of change of speed.
The acceleration of a particle is the vector sum of mutually perpendicular radial and tangential accelerations. The
magnitude of tangential acceleration given here is 1 m/s2. Now, the radial acceleration at the particular instant is:
ν2 102
a=
R = = 1m / s2
r 100
Hence, the magnitude of the acceleration of the particle is: a = ( )
a = aΤ2 + aR 2 =12 + 12 m / s2 =2m / s2
Illustration 17: Which of the following expressions represent the magnitude of centripetal acceleration?:
d2r dν dθ
(A) (B) (C) r (D) None of these (JEE MAIN)
dt 2 dt dt
Sol: The magnitude of centripetal acceleration depends on the square of the magnitude of velocity.
P hysi cs | 3.17
dν dθ
The expression represents the magnitude of tangential acceleration. The differential represents the
dt dt
dθ
magnitude of angular velocity. The expression r represents the magnitude of tangential velocity and the
2 dt
dr
expression is second-order differentiation of position vector (r). This is the actual expression of acceleration of
dt2
d2r
a particle under motion. Hence, the expression represents the magnitude of total or resultant acceleration.
dt2
Hence, option (d) alone is correct.
Illustration 18: A particle is executing circular motion. But the magnitude of velocity of the particle changes from
zero to (0.3i + 0.4j) m/s in a period of 1 second. The magnitude of average tangential acceleration is:
(A) 0.1 m/ s2 (B) 0.2 m/ s2 (C) 0.3 m/ s2 (D) 0.5 m/ s2 (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Tangential acceleration is equal to the rate of change of speed. Average tangential acceleration is change in
speed divided by total time.
∆ν
The magnitude of average tangential acceleration is the ratio of change in speed and time as given by: aΤ =
∆t
Now,=
∆ν (0.3 2
0.42
+= ) aΤ 0.5m / s2
0.25 0.5m / s;=
=
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Radial acceleration contributes in changing the direction of velocity of an object, but it does not affect the
magnitude of velocity. However, tangential acceleration affects the speed of the object in motion.
FORMULAE SHEET
2usin θ
Time of flight: T =
g
u2 sin2θ
Horizontal range: R =
g
y
2 2
u sin θ
Maximum height: H =
2g
2
The net speed is given by=
Vm VmR + VR2
2
and velocity perpendicular to river
= Vy VmR − VR2 B
2
The net speed is given by=
Vm VmR − VR2
d d x
t
= = and velocity v x is zero, therefore, in A
vy 2
v mR − vR2 Figure 3.25
(f) Rain Problems: vRm
= vR − v m or v=
Rm vR2 + v m
2
θ2 − θ1 ∆θ at
i. Average angular velocity =
ωav =
t2 − t1 ∆t a
dθ V
ii. Instantaneous angular velocity ω = O
dt ar or a P
ω2 − ω1 ∆ω
iii. Average angular acceleration=
αav =
t2 − t1 ∆t Figure 3.26
dω dω
iv. Instantaneous angular acceleration α = =ω
dt dθ
V2
vii. Radial or normal or centripetal acceleration ar = = ω2r
r
( )
12
viii. Total acceleration a =at + ar ,a =a2t + ar2 W
AC
tation
Ro
dω
ix. Angular acceleration α = (non-uniform circular motion)
dt
v 2 mv 2
x. Radius of curvature =
R = Figure 3.27
a⊥ F⊥
Solved Examples
Similarly, the components of velocities, when the horizontal direction. Now, considering accelerated
projectile makes an angle 45 with horizontal and vertical motion in horizontal direction, we have:
directions are:
1 1g
x= R=' ux Τ + ax Τ2 ⇒ R=' ux Τ + Τ2 ; R=' R + H
ν x =ν cos 45 ; ν y =ν sin 45
2 22
But we know that horizontal component of velocity
remains unaltered during motion. Hence, Example 4: An airplane has to go from a point A to
another point B, 500 km away due 30° east of north. A
ucos60 wind is blowing due north at a speed of 20 m/s. The air
ν x= ux ⇒ ν cos 45= ucos60 ⇒ ν= speed of the plane is 150 m/s. (i) Find the direction in
cos 45
which the pilot should head the plane to reach the point
Here, we know initial and final velocities in vertical B. (ii) Find the time taken by the plane to go from A to B.
direction. We can apply v = u + at in vertical direction to
know the time as required: Sol: The vector sum of the velocity of the airplane with
respect to the wind and the velocity of the wind with
ν sin 45 =u + at =usin60 − gt respect to ground is equal to velocity of the aircraft with
ucos60 − ν sin 45 respect to ground. This N
⇒ ν cos
= 45 ucos60
=
⇒t net velocity should be C R
g
in the direction A to B. 30 20m/s
Substituting value of “v” in the above equation, we have: 30 D
In the resultant 150m/s vw = 20m/s
cos60 direction R, the plane
W
usin60 − u X sin 45
cos
45
cos60 reaches the point B. S
⇒t= usin60 − u X sin 45
cos
g 45
⇒t= Velocity of wind V w =20 m/s
g ( 3 +1 ) ( )
3 − 1
⇒t
=
u
g
(
sin60 − cos60=
)
⇒t
( 310+ 1 ) ( )
32− 1
Velocity of aero plane V a =150 m/s
⇒t
=
u
g
(
sin60 − cos60=
)
⇒t
10 2
y
2
⇒ t= = 0.1s
20
2
⇒ t= = 0.1s
20
Q -VA O VA P
Example 3: A projectile is at an angle “ θ ” from the
x
Sol: Take the x-axis along the horizontal. Take the y-axis
vertically upwards. Along x-axis initial velocity is positive In ∆ACD, according to the sine formula
and acceleration is uniform and positive. Along y-axis
initial velocity is positive and acceleration is uniform 20 150 20
∴ = ⇒ sinA= sin30
and negative. sinA sin30 150
20 1 1
The acceleration due to wind affects only the motion = × = ⇒ A = sin−1 (1 / 15)
in horizontal direction. It would, therefore, not affect 150 2 5
attributes like time of flight or maximum height that
results exclusively from the consideration of motion in 20
vertical direction. The generic expressions of time of R
flight, maximum height and horizontal range of flight
with acceleration are given as under:
150
2uy u2y gΤ2 uxuy
=
Τ ; =
H = ; =
R
g 2g 4 g
(i) The direction is sin−1 (1 / 15) east of the line AB.
The expressions above revalidate the assumption made
in the beginning. We can see that it is only the horizontal (ii) sin−1 (1 / 15) = 3 48' ⇒ 30° + 3°48'= 33°48'
range that depends on the component of motion in
P hysi cs | 3.21
Figure shows the conditions of the problem. Here, A Figure shows the conditions of the problem. The boy’s
and B are the two tall buildings having windows W1 window is at O and friend’s window is at A. Let the boy
and W2, respectively. The window W1 is 2 km (=2000 m) throw the stone with a velocity v 0 making an angle θ
above the ground while window W2 is 40 m above the with the horizontal so as to enter the window at A. The
ground. We want to throw the ball from window W1 stone will follow the parabolic path with A as the highest
with such a horizontal speed ( ν x0 ) so that it enters the point on the trajectory of stone.
window W2. Note that the horizontal range of the ball R
is R = 200 m. Let t sec be the time taken by the ball ∴ =40 or horizontal range, R = 2 × 40 = 80 m
2
to reach from window W1 to window W1. This time will
depend upon the vertical motion (downward) alone. Motion in a plane
angle of projection.
P hysi cs | 3.23
JEE Advanced/Boards 1
(uAx t )
2
s
= + uAy t − gt2
2
Example 1: A particle A is projected with an initial 2
velocity of 60 m/s at an angle 30° to the horizontal. At
( 1
)
2
= 30 3 × 1.09 + 30 × 1.09 − × 10 × 1.09 × 1.09
the same time a second particle B is projected in opposite 2
direction with initial speed of 50 m/s from a point at a
distance of 100 m from A. If the particles collide in air, s = 62.64m
find (i) the angle of projection α of particle B, (ii) time
when the collision takes place and (iii) the distance of P Example 2: A man running on a horizontal road at
(
from A, where collision occurs. g = 10m / s2 ) 8 km/h finds the rain falling vertically. He increases his
speed to 12 km/h and finds that the drops make an
60 m/s
50 m/s angle 30° with the vertical. Find the speed and direction
of the rain with respect to the road.
30° Sol: Velocity of rain with respect to the man is equal to
B
A
100 m the vector sum of the velocity of rain with respect to
ground and the negative of the velocity of man with
Sol: This problem is best solved in the reference frame respect to ground. The direction of velocity of rain with
of one of the two particles, say particle B. The relative respect to man is known in each case.
acceleration between the particles is zero. So in this
We have,
reference frame, the particle A moves with uniform velocity.
v= v rain,man + v man,road … (i)
(i) Taking x- and y-directions as shown in the figure. rain,road
V ra
30°
uBx =
−50 cos α ; uBy =
50 sin α
in,
an
ro
,m A
ad
and Relative acceleration
ain
X
Vr
AB 100
Therefore, the time of collision =
is t =
( )
Or t = 1.09 s uAB 30 3 + 40 v rain,road sin 30o + α =12 km / h cos30o … (iii)
of its greatest height. Determine its angle of projection. Let the shells collide at the point P(x, y). If the first shell
Sol: The maximum height is known in terms of initial takes t seconds to collide with second and ∆ t be the
velocity and angle of projection. Horizontal component time interval between the firings, then
of velocity of projectile remains constant. Use the third
equation of motion with uniform acceleration in vertical =x v 0 cos
= θ1 t v 0 cos θ2 ( t − ∆t ) ... (1) ... (i)
direction to find the vertical component of velocity at = x v 0 cos = θ t v cos 1 θ ( t − ∆t ) 2 ... (1)
height equal to half of the maximum height. and
= y v 0 sin θ21 ( t − ∆0 t ) − 2g ( t − ∆t ) ... (2) ... (ii)
21
y v sin θ ( t − ∆t ) − g ( t − ∆t )
2
Suppose the particle is projected with velocity u at an and
= ... (2)
From Eq.(1)0 t = 2 ∆t cos θ2 2 ... (3)
angle θ with the horizontal. Horizontal component of its cos∆θt2cos
− cosθ2 θ1
velocity at all height will be ucos θ . From
From Eq. (i) t =
Eq.(1) ... (3) ... (iii)
From Eqs. (2) andcos(3)θ2 − cos θ1
At the greatest height, the vertical component of
velocity is zero, so the resultant velocity is= From Eqs. (2)(and
2v 0 sin θ2 )
θ1 − (3)
From
∆t Eqs. (ii) and (iii) as ∆t ≠ 0
( cos
g2v θ2(+θ1cos
0 sin − θθ21))
= ∆t as ∆t ≠ 0
= 11 sg ((on 2 + cos θ1 ) values)
cos θsubstituting
= 11 s (on substituting values)
and
= y v 0 sin θ2 ( t − ∆t ) − g ( t − ∆t ) ... (2)
2
∆t cos θ2
From Eq.(1) t = ... (3)
cos θ2 − cos θ1 P hysi cs | 3.25
opposite directions. Find the distance between the Both the particles are initially at the same position and
particles at the moment when their velocity vectors have same acceleration g, so
become mutually perpendicular.
r0 0, =
= w 0, and v=
0 v1 − v 2 .
Sol: The relative acceleration between the particles is
Thus, the sought distance is
zero. Initial relative distance is zero. So the final relative
distance between them is equal to product of time r
= v 0=t ( v1 + v 2 ) t (using the value of t)
and relative velocity. The time required can be found
by using the equations of final velocities in Cartesian v1 + v 2
= v1 v 2
coordinates. g
= 2.5 m, on substituting the values of v1 , v 2 and g.
v₂ v₁
Example 10: A boy whirls a stone in a horizontal circle
of radius 1.5 m and at height 2.0 m above level ground.
The string breaks, and the stone flies off horizontally and
v’₂ v’₁ strikes the ground after travelling a horizontal distance
of 10 m. What is the magnitude of the centripetal
v₂t v₁t
acceleration of the stone while in circular motion?
Let the velocities of the particles (say v '1 and v '2 ) Sol: The time of fall of the stone depends on the
become mutually perpendicular after time t. Then, their height of the stone and can be found using the second
velocities become equation of motion with constant acceleration and zero
initial velocity. The horizontal component of stone’s
v1ˆi + gt ˆj ; v 2, =
v1, = − v 2ˆi + gt ˆj
velocity remains constant is equal to the horizontal
As v1, ⊥ v 2, , so, v1, ⋅ v 2, =
0 distance covered by the stone divided by the time of
fall. The centripetal acceleration is equal to the square
( )( )
or v1ˆi + gt ˆj ⋅ v 2ˆi + gt ˆj =
0 of the horizontal velocity divided by the radius of the
2 2 horizontal circle.
or − v1 v 2 + g t =
0
v1 v 2 2h 2×2 10
=t = v = 15.63m / s
= 0.64 s ; =
Hence, t = g 9.8 t
g
In the frame attached with 2 for the particle 1 v2
a
= = 163m / s2
R
1
r =r0 + v 0 t + wt2
2
JEE Main/Boards
Q.12 A body is projected downward at an angle of 30° Q.23 A jet airplane travelling at the speed of 500km
to the horizontal with a velocity of 9.8 m/s from the top h−1 ejects its projects of combustion at the speed of
of a tower 29.4 m high. How long will it take before
1500km h−1 relative to the jet plane. What is the speed
striking the ground?
of the later with respect to observer on the ground.
Q.27 A ball is dropped from a height of 90 m on a floor. he applies brakes and reduces his speed at a constant
At each collision with the floor, the ball loses one tenth −1
rate of 0.5 ms per second. Find the magnitude of the
of its speed. Plot the speed-time graph of its motion net acceleration of the cyclist.
between t=0 to 12s. (g=10 ms−2 )
Q.38 A particle moves in a circle Y
Q.28 A man walks on a straight road from his home to of radius 4.0 cm clockwise at Q
a market 2.5 km away with a speed of 5 km/h. Finding constant speed of 2 cm s−1 . If
the market closed, he instantly turns and walks back
x̂ and ŷ are unit acceleration
with a speed of 7.5 km/h. What is the (a) magnitude of X
vectors along X-axis and O P
average velocity and (b) average speed of the man, over
Y-axis respectively, find the
the interval of time (i) 0 to 30 min. (ii) 0 to 50 min (iii) 0
acceleration of the particle at
to 40 min?
the instant half way between PQ figure.
Q.5 particle is dropped from the height of 20m from Q.10 A boat having a speed of 5 km/hr. in still water,
horizontal ground. A constant force acts on the crossed a river of width 1 km along the shortest possible
particle in horizontal direction due to which horizontal path in 15 minutes. The speed of the river in Km/hr.
acceleration of the particle becomes 6 ms-2. Find the
horizontal displacement of the particle till it reaches (A) 1 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 41
ground.
Q.11 A motor boat is to reach at a point 30° upstream
(A) 6m (B) 10 m (C) 12 m (D) 24 m
(w.r.t. normal) on other side of a river flowing with
velocity 5m/s. Velocity of motorboat w.r.t. water is 5 3
Q.6 Find time of flight of projectile thrown horizontally m/s. The driver should steer the boat at an angle
−1
with speed 10 ms from a long inclined plane which (A) 120° w.r.t. stream direction
makes an angle of θ= 45° from horizontal.
(B) 30° w.r.t. normal to the bank
(A) 2 sec (B) 2 2 sec (C) 30° w.r.t. the line of destination from starting point.
(C) 2 sec (D) None of these (D) None of these
3 . 3 0 | Motion in a Plane
Q.12 A flag is mounted on a car moving due north with Q.18 If acceleration of A is 2 m/s2 to left and acceleration
velocity of 20 km/hr. Strong winds are blowing due East of B is 1 m/s2 to left, then acceleration C is
with velocity of 20km/hr. The flag will point in direction A B
(A) East (B) North-East
(C) South-East (D) South-West
Circular Motion
Q.14 Wind is blowing in the north direction at speed of
2 m/s which causes the rain to fall at some angle with Single Correct Choice Type
the vertical. With what velocity should a cyclist drive so
that the rain appears vertical to him? Q.19 Two racing cars of masses m1 and m2 are moving
(A) 2m/s south (B) 2m/s north in circles of radii r1 and r2 respectively, their speeds are
such that they each make a complete circle in the same
(C) 4m/s west (D) 4 m/s south
time t. The ratio of the angular speed of the first to the
second car is:
Q.15 When the driver of a car A sees a car B moving
towards his car and at a distance 30m, takes a left turn (A) m1 : m2 (B) r1 : r2 (C) 1:1 (D) m1r1 : m2r2
of 30° . At the same instant the driver of the car B takes
a turn to his right at an angle 60° . The two cars collides Q.20 A particle moves in a circle of radius 25 cm at two
after two seconds, then the velocity (in m/s) of the car revolution per sec. The acceleration of the particle in
A and B respectively will be : [assume both cars to be m / s2 is:
moving along same line with constant speed] (A) π2 (B) 8π2 (C) 4π2 (D) 2π2
(A) 7.5, 7.5 3 (B) 7.5, 7.5
Q.21 Two particle and Q are located at distance rP and
(C) 7.5 3 , 7.5 (D) None
rQ respectively from the centre of a rotating disc such
that rP > rQ :
Q.16 At a given instant, A is moving
with velocity of 5m/s upwards. What is (A) Both P and Q have the same acceleration
velocity of B at that time (B) Both P and Q do not have any acceleration
(A) 15 m/s ↓ (C) P has greater acceleration than Q
A
(B) 15 m/s ↑ B (D) Q has greater acceleration than P
(C) 5 m/s ↓
(D) 5 m/s ↑ Q.22 When particle moves in a circle with a uniform
speed:
Q.17 The pulleys in the diagram (A) Its velocity and acceleration are both constant
are all smooth and light. The (B) Its velocity is constant but the acceleration changes
acceleration of A us a upwards
and the acceleration of A is a (C) Its acceleration is constant but the velocity changes
upward and the acceleration A (D) Its velocity and acceleration both change
of C is f downwards. The C
acceleration is Q.23 If a particle moves in a circle described equal
(A) 1 2(f − a) up B angles in equal times, its velocity vector:
Q.24 If the equation for the displacement of a particle Q.2 A boat which has a speed of 5 km/h in still water
moving on a circular path is given by ( θ= crosses a river of width 1 km along the shortest possible
) 2t + 0.5 ,
3
path in 15 mi. The velocity of the river water in km/h is
where θ is in radians and t in seconds, then the angular
velocity of the particle after 2 sec from its start is: (1988)
Q.30 A particle moves in a circular orbit under the Q.6 Two cars of masses m1 and m2 are moving in circles
force proportional to the distance ‘r’. The speed of the of radii r1 and r2, respectively. Their speeds are such that
particle is: they make complete circles in the same time t. The ratio
of their centripetal acceleration is (2012)
(A) Proportional of r 2 (B) Independent of r
(A) m1r1: m2r2 (B) m1 : m2 (C) r1 : r2 (D) 1 : 1
(C) Proportional to r (D) Proportional to 1/r
JEE Advanced/Boards
Q.13 An aeroplane is flying at a height of 1960 metre in Q.21 A butterfly is flying with velocity y
a horizontal direction with a velocity of 100 m/s, when 10iˆ + 12ˆj m/s and wind is blowing B
it is vertically above an object M on the ground it drops along x axis with velocity u. If butterfly
a bomb. If the bomb reaches the ground at the point N, starts motion from A and after some A 37°
then calculate the time taken by the bomb to reach the time reaches point B, find the value of u. x
ground and also find the distance MN.
Q.14 A projectile is projected from the base of a hill Q.22 Rain is falling vertically with a speed of 20 m/ s−1
whose slope is that of right circular cone, whose axis is relative to air. A person is running in the rain with a
vertical. The projectile grazes the vertex and strikes the velocity of 5 m/ s−1 and a wind is also blowing with a
hill again at a point on the base. If θ be the semi-vertical
speed of 15 m/ s−1 (both towards east). Find the angle
angle of the cone, h its height u the initial velocity of
with the vertical at which the person should hold his
projection and α the angle of projection, show that
umbrella so that he may not get drenched.
gh(4 + tan2 θ)
(i) tan
= θ 2cot α (ii) u2 =
2 Circular Motion
Q.15 A person is standing on a truck moving with a
constant velocity of 14.7 m/s on a horizontal road. The Q.23 A bullet is moving horizontally with certain
man throws a ball in such a way that it returns to the velocity. It pierces two paper discs rotating co-axially
truck after the truck has moved 58.8 m. Find the speed with angular speed ω separated by a distance . If the
and the angle of projection (i) as seen from the truck, (ii) hole made by the bullet on 2nd disc is shifted through
as seen from the road. an angle θ with respect to that in the first disc, find the
velocity of the bullet, (change of velocity in the bullet is
neglected)
Q.16 Two bodies are thrown simultaneously from the
same point. One thrown straight up and the other at an
Q.24 Position vector of a particle performing circular
angle α with the horizontal. Both the bodies have equal
velocity of v 0 Neglecting air drag, find the separation of motion is given by = r 3iˆ + 4ˆj m, velocity vector is
the particle at time t. v= −4iˆ + 3ˆj m/s. If acceleration is a =−7iˆ − ˆj m/ s2 find
the radial and tangential components of acceleration.
Q.17 Two particles move in a uniform gravitational field
with an acceleration g. At the initial moment the particles Q.25 An astronaut is rotating in a rotor having vertical
were located at one point and moved with velocities axis and radius 4m. If he can withstand upto acceleration
3 m/s and 4 m/s horizontally in opposite directions. Find of 10g. Then what is the maximum number of permissible
the distance between the particles at the moment when (
revolution per second? g = m s2 . )
their velocity vectors become mutually perpendicular.
Q.26 A racing-car of 1000 kg moves round a banked
Q.18 A particle is projected from O at an elevation α track at a constant speed of 108 km h−1 . Assuming the
and after t second it has an elevation β as seen from total reaction at the wheels is normal to the track and
the point of projection. Prove that its initial velocity is the horizontal radius of the track is 90 m, calculate the
gt cos β angle of inclination of the track to the horizontal and
. the reaction at the wheels.
sin(α − β)
Q.27 A particle A moves along a A
Q.19 The velocity of a particle when it is at its greatest circle of radius R=50 cm so that its r
2 radius vector r relative to the point O R
height is of its velocity when it is at half its greatest (see figure) rotates with the constant O
5 C
angular velocity ω =0.40 rad/sec.
height. Find the angle of projection of the particle. Find the modulus of the velocity
of the particle and modulus and
Q.20 A man crosses a river in a boat. If he crosses the direction of its total acceleration.
river in minimum time he takes 10 minutes with a drift
120 m. If he crosses the river taking shortest path, he Q.28 A wet open umbrella is held upright and is rotated
takes 12.5 minutes. Assuming v b r > v r find about the handle at uniform rate of 21 revolutions is 44s.
(i) Width of the river If the rim of the umbrella circle is 1 meter in diameter
(ii) Velocity of the boat with respect to water, and the height of the rim above the floor is 1.5m, find
where the drops of water spun off the rim and hit the
(iii) Speed of the current.
floor.
3 . 3 4 | Motion in a Plane
Q.29 A spaceman in training is rotated in a seat at the (A) The maximum height reached by the projectile can
end of horizontal rotating arm of length 5m. if he can be 0.25 m.
withstand acceleration up to 9 g, what is the maximum (B) The minimum velocity during its motion can be
number of revolutions per second permissible? Take
15 m/s
g = 10m s2
3
(C) The time taken for the flight can be sec.
Q.30 An insect on the axle of a wheel observes the 5
motion of a particle and ‘find’ it to take its place along (D) Minimum kinetic energy during its motion can be 6J.
the circumference of a circle of radius ‘R’ with a uniform
angular speed ω . The axle is moving with a uniform
speed ‘v’ relative to the ground. How will an observer Q.2 A particle is projected from the ground with velocity
on the ground describe the motion of the same point? u at angle θ with horizontal. The horizontal range,
maximum height and time of fight are R , H and T
Q.31 A stone is thrown horizontally with a velocity 10 u2 sin2θ u2 sin2 θ
m/s. Find the radius of curvature of its trajectory in 3 respectively. They are given
= by, R = ,H
g 2g
second after the motion began. Disregard the resistance 2usin θ
of air. and T =
g
Q.32 A table with smooth horizontal surface is fixed Now keeping u as fixed, θ is varied from 30° to 60° .
Then,
in a cabin that rotates with a uniform angular velocity
ω =220s−1 in a circular path of radius R=700m. A smooth (A) R will first increase then decrease, H will increase and
groove AB of length L=7 m is made on the surface of T will decrease
the table. The groove makes an angle θ= 30° with the (B) R will first increase then decrease while H and T both
radius OA of the circle in which the cabin rotates. A will increase
small particle is kept at the point A in the groove and is
(C) R will first decrease while H and T will increase
released to move along AB. Find the time taken by the
particle to reach the point B. (D) R will first increase while H and T will increase
Q.5 If v1 sin=
θ1 v 2 sin θ2 , then choose the incorrect
Exercise 2 statement.
(A) The time of flight of both the particle will be same
Projectile Motion
(B) The maximum height attained by the particles will
Single Correct Choice Type be same
(C) The trajectory of one with respect to another will be
Q.1 A projectile of mass 1 kg is projected with a velocity a horizontal straight line
of 20 m/s such that it strikes on the same level as the (D) None of these
point of projection at a distance of 3 m. Which of the
following options is incorrect?
P hysi cs | 3.35
Multiple Correct Choice Type (B) P will hit the roof BC, if a>g B C
(C) P will hit the wall CD if a<g
Q.6 Choose the correct alternative (s) u
(D) May be either (A), (B) or (C), P
(A) If the greatest height to which a man can throw a depending on the speed of projection A D
stone is h, then the greatest horizontal distance upto of P
which he can throw the stone is 2h.
(B) The angle of projection for a projectile motion whose Q.11 The vertical height of point P above the ground is
range R is m times the maximum height is tan−1 (4/n) twice that of point Q. A particle is projected downward
with a speed of 5 m/s from P and at the same time another
(C) The time of flight T and the horizontal range R of a particle is projected upward with the same speed from
projectile are connected by the equation= gT2 2R tan θ Q. Both particles reach the ground simultaneously, if PQ
where θ is the angle of projection. is lie on same vertical line then
(D) A ball is thrown vertically up. Another ball is thrown (A) PQ=30 m
at an angle θ with the vertical. Both of them remain in
air for the same period of time. Then the ratio of heights (B) PQ=60 m
attained by the two balls 1:1. (C) Time of flight of the stones
(D) Time of flight of the stones=1/3s
Q.7 If it is the total time of flight, h is the maximum
height & R is the range for horizontal motion, the x & y
co-ordinates of projectile motion and time t are related Q.12 Two particles A & B projected along different
as: directions from the same point P on the ground with the
same speed of 70 m/s in the same vertical plane. They
t t X X hit the ground at the same point Q such that PQ=480m.
(A) y 4th T 1 − T =
= (B) y 4th 1 −
R
R Then: (Use g=9.8 m/ s2 , sin−1 0.96= 74° , sin−1 0.6
= 37° )
T T R R (A) Ratio of their times of flights is 4:5
(D) y 4th 1 −
(C) y 4th 1 − =
=
t t X
X
(B) Ratio of their maximum heights is 9:16
(C) Ratio of their minimum speeds during flight is 4:3
Q.8 A particle moves in the xy plane with a constant
acceleration ‘g’ in the negative y-direction. Its equation (D) The bisector of the angle between their directions
of motion is =y ax − bx2 , where a and b are constants. of projection makes 45° with horizontal.
Which of the following is correct?
Comprehension Type
(A) The x-components of its velocity is constant.
(B) At the origin, the y-component of its velocity is a A projectile is thrown with a velocity of 50m s−1 at an
angle of 53° with the horizontal.
g .
2b
(C) At the origin, its velocity makes an angle tan−1 (a) Q.13 Choose the incorrect statement
with the x-axis. (A) It travels vertically with a velocity of 40m s−1
(D) The particle moves exactly like a projectile.
(B) It travels horizontally with a velocity of 30m s−1
Q.9 A ball is rolled off along the edge of a horizontal (C) The minimum velocity of the projectile is 30 m s−1
table with velocity 4m/s. It hits the ground after time
0.4s. Which of the following are correct? (D) None of these
(A) The height of the table is 0.8 m. Q.14 Determine the instants at which the projectile is at
(B) It hits the ground at an angle of 60° with the vertical the same height.
(C) It covers a horizontal distance 1.6 m from the table (A) t=1s and t=7s (B) t=3s and t=5s
(D) It hits the ground with vertical velocity 4m/s (C) t=2s and t=6s (D) all the above
Q.10 A large rectangular box moves vertically downward Q.15 The equation of the trajectory is given by
with an acceleration a. A toy gun fixed at A and aimed
towards C fires a particle P. = 240x − x2
(A) 180y = x2 − 240x
(B) 180y
Two projectile are thrown simultaneously in the same Q.21 Statement-I: Three projectiles are moving in
plane from the same point. If their velocities are v1 and different paths in the air. Vertical component of relative
v 2 at angles θ1 and θ2 respectively from the horizontal, velocity between any of the pair does not change with
then answer the following questions time as long as they are in air. Neglect the effect of air
friction.
Statement-II: Relative acceleration between any of the
Match the Columns
pair of projectile is zero.
Q.16 Match the quantities is column I with possible
options from column II. Circular Motion
Particle’s Motion Trajectory Q.22 An object follows a curved path. The following
(A) Constant velocity (p) straight line quantities may remain constant during the motion-
(C) Variable acceleration (r) Parabolic (C) Acceleration (D) Magnitude of acceleration
(D) Constant acceleration (s) Elliptical Q.23 The position vector of a particle in a circular motion
about the origin sweeps out equal area in equal times-
Assertion Reasoning Type (A) Velocity remains constant
(A) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true and (B) Speed remains constant
statement‑II is correct explanation for statement-I. (C) Acceleration remains constant
(B) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true and statement‑II (D) Tangential acceleration remains constant
is NOT the correct explanation for statement-I
(C) Statement-I is true, statement-II is false.
(D) Statement-I is false, statement-II is true.
Previous Years’ Questions
Q.1 A large heavy box is sliding without friction down
Q.17 Statement-I: The speed of a projectile is minimum
a smooth plane of inclination
at the highest point.
θ . From a point P on the
Statement-II: The acceleration of projectile is constant bottom of the box, a particle
during the entire motion. is projected inside the box. P
O
escapes being hit by B, t0 in seconds is (2014) Q.3 The distance r of the block at time t is (2016)
A
B
(A)
4
(
R 2 ωt
)
e + e−2ωt (B)
R
2
cos2ωt
(C)
R
2
cos ωt (D)
4
(
R ωt
e + e−ωt )
o o
30 60
PlancEssential Questions
JEE Main/Boards JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1 Exercise 1
Q.15 Q.20 Q.22 Q.3 Q.7 Q.10
Q.41
Exercise 2
Exercise 2 Q.9 Q.12 Q.15
Q.17 Q.27
Answer Key
Q.10 10s; 99.1 m s−1 Q.18 653.06 m, 7° 42’ with horizontal, 2.19 s
Q.19 5° 43’
Q.11 58 m s−1 ; 30° 27’ with horizontal; 44.1 m below
and 150 m horizontally away from the starting point Q.20 30° 58’
3 . 3 8 | Motion in a Plane
Exercise 2
Projectile Motion
Single Correct Choice Type
Circular Motion
Single Correct Choice Type
(1 + α2 )a / 2β Q.9 Yes
Q.1 v=
0
Q.10 (i) 58.8 m (ii) 2gh
Q.2 20 3 m/s, 60° 2 + cot2 θ
P hysi cs | 3.39
Projectile Motion
Comprehension Type
Q.16 A → p; B → p, q, r, s; C → p, q, r, s; D → p, r
Circular Motion
Q.22 A, D Q.23 B, D
Solutions
v 2
Horizontal velocity vx = v cos 45° = 1 v2 1 2
2 = 16 sin2θ1 = R
g 16
v 2v v2
Horizontal range (r) = vx.t = . = ∴ R2 = 16H1H2 ⇒ R = 4 H1H2
2 g g
2
v
r g Sol 17: Given that, v = î + 2ˆj
= 2 =4
h v Horizontal displacement x = vx . t ; x=1t
4g
x = t ... (i)
∴ Its maximum horizontal range is 4 times height.
1 2
Vertical displacement y = vyt – gt = 2t – 5t2
2
Sol 15: Horizontal range is given by
⇒ y = 2x – 5x2
v 2 sin2θ
D= where θ is angle of projection v 2 sin2θ
g Sol 18: r = ;
g
sin2(60o )
D1 = (30)2. = 90 sin 120o = 45 3 m v2 80 × 80
10 Max range = = = 640 m
g 10
sin2(30)
D2 = (20)2. = 40 sin 60° = 20 3 m 80 × 80
10 100 3 = . sin2q
10
Distance = D1 – D2 = 45 3 – 20 3 = 25 3 m
sin 2θ = 0.27
gx2
Sol 20: y = x tanθ – Sol 24: v = 126 km h–1 = 35 ms–1
2v 2 cos2 θ
g(50)2 v2 352
13 = 50 tanθ – a= = = 3.0625 ms–1
2 × (10 g)2 cos2 θ 2s 2 × 200
v v 2s 2 × 200
⇒ 26 = 100 tanθ – 25 sec2q ⇒t= = 2 = = = 11.43 s
a v v 35
⇒ 25 tan2θ – 100 tan θ + 51 = 0 (sec2θ = 1 + tan2θ) 2s
2s
100 ± (100)2 – 4 × 25 × 51 Note: - here t = can also be written as
⇒ tan θ = v
2 × 25
s v
100 ± 70 3 17 t= ; is average velocity of motion.
tanθ = = , v 2
50 5 5
2
3
For tmin , tan θ is minimum ∴ θ = tan–1 ~
– 30.1° So in a uniform accelerated motion,
5
Distance
t=
Sol 21: Given, R=2H Avg velocity
u2 sin2θ u2 sin2 θ Try deriving the same assuming it has some final velocity.
⇒ 2
=
g 2g
⇒ 2sin θ cos θ= sin θ sin θ Sol 25: Distance to be travelled by B relative to A
⇒ tan θ =2 = 2(400) + x
2 1 x = initial separation (distance between them)
sin θ
= , cos θ
=
3 3 Relative velocity = VB – VA = 72 – 72 = 0
2 2 2 2 Relative acceleration = 1 ms–2
So, R= u sin2θ= u 2sin θ cos θ= u 2 × 2= 4u
g g g 3 3g Time = 50
1 2
∵ at = S
Sol 22: He moves 5 steps forward and 3 steps backward 2
in 8 seconds.
1
⇒ He moves 2 m in 8 second ∴ 800 + x = × 1 × (50)2
2
Lets call it drunk movement (D.M) x = 450 m
i.e. in 1 D. M = 2 m in 8 seconds Initial separation was 450 m.
∴ Distance travelled in n D.M = 2n m in 8n seconds.
Now 13m – 5m = 8 m Sol 26: Distance between two busses coming from
same direction is VT; V is speed of bus.
i.e. man will have complete D.M such that
Relative velocity of with buses coming from opposite
2n ≥ 8 for least possible n ⇒ n = 4 direction = V + VC; VC is speed of man.
⇒ he travelled 8 m in 32 seconds Relative velocity of man with buses coming from same
he falls in pit in next 5 m, 5 seconds direction as man = V – VC
∴ He falls in 32 + 5 = 37 seconds. VT VC T
18 = ⇒ 1– = ... (i)
V – VC V 18
3 . 4 4 | Motion in a Plane
Vt VC T
6= ⇒ 1+ = ... (ii)
V + VC V 6 Sol 28: (i) 0 to 30
equation (i) + equation (ii) 1 1
distance = V × t = 5 × (t = 30 min = Hr) = 2.5 km
2 2
1 1 distance 2.5
⇒2=T + speed = = = 5 km/h
6 18 time 1/2
2 displacement 2.5
T= = 9 min velocity = = = 5 km/hr
1 1 time 1/2
+ (ii) 0 to 50
6 18
0 to 50 = 0 to 30 + 30 to 50
⇒ V = 40 km/h–1
In 30 to 50
VC = 20 km/h = velocity of cyclist 2
Distance = V × t = 7.5 × = 2.5 km
6
2
2h 2 × 90 (20 min = Hr)
Sol 27: t = = = 3 2s 6
g 10 Displacement (s) = ∑ Vt = 2.5 – 2.5 = 0 km
t = time of descent
Total distance (s) = ∑ | V | t = 2.5 + 2.5 = 5 km
2V1
t1 = s
g Velocity = =0
t
t1 = time of flight between consecutive collisions with
D 5 5
the floor Speed = = = 6 km/hr (50 min = Hr)
t 5/6 6
V1 = (0.9)V (i.e. velocity after collison)
(iii) 0 to 40
V
⇒ t1 = (1.8) ; t1 = (1.8) t 0 to 40 = 0 to 30 + 30 to 40
g
t1 + t2 = t + 1.8t = 2.8t = (2.8) 3 2 ~
– 12 s 1
= 1.25 km
In 30 to 40, distance = v × t = 7.5 ×
6
V12 V2 Displacement = 2.5 – 1.25 = 1.25 km
H1 = = (0.9)2. = (0.81)90 = 72.9 m
2g 20
Total distance = 2.5 + 1.25 = 3.75 km
H 1.25
90 m Velocity = = 1.875 km/h
4/6
72.9 m
3.75
Speed = = 5.625 km/h
4/6
x = Vx. t = V
V
B 4
0.9V sinθ t = .V.5 = 2658.4 ft
5
Vx = V sinθ = 534 ft/s
V
O 3 2 (1.9) 3 2 12 Vy = V cosθ + gt = 560 ft/s
P hysi cs | 3.45
Circular Motion 1 π π
∴a= . m/s2 ;
a= m/s2
Sol 30: Minutes hand of a clock completes one 2 30 60
revolution in one hour i.e. 3600 second
2π
1 Re v Sol 34: Time period T =
So, ω = and 1 revolution = 2π Rad ω
3600 s Given T = 2 s
2π π
ω= rad/s ⇒ ω = × 10–2 rad/s 2π
3600 18 ∴ω= = π rad/s
T
and acceleration a = Rω2 m/s2
Sol 31: A wheel making 300 rotation per minute R = 100 cm = 1 m
and one rotation = 2π rad. ∴ a = p2 m/s2
1 minute = 60 sec
300.2π Sol 35: (i) Given that insect completes 7 revolutions in
∴ω= rad/s; ω = 10π rad/s 100 seconds.
60
7.2π
Sol 32: 4 rotations per second ∴ ω = 7 Rev/100s = rad/s
100
14 π
rotations ω= rad/s
⇒ω=4 and 1 rotation = 2π rad 100
s
ω = 0.44 rad/s and v = Rω
⇒ ω = 4.(2π) rad/s; ω = 8π rad/s
R = 12 cm = 0.12 m
and the velocity of a point on its circumference
v = (0.12) (0.44) m/s2
v = Rω
1 v = 5.3 × 10–2 m/s2
R = 50 cm = m.
2 (ii) Acceleration is not constant. Because the direction of
1 the acceleration vector keeps on changing in direction.
v = (8π) m/s Hence acceleration vector in circular motion can never
2
be a constant vector.
v = 4π m/s
→
| a | = Rω2 = (0.12) (0.44)2 m/s2
revolutions 2π
Sol 33: ωinitial = 100 = 100 rad/s →
minute 60
| a | = 2.3 × 10–2 m/s2
10π
ωi = rad/s
3
revolutions 2π Sol 36: Earth completes 1 rotation in 1 day
ωf = 400 = 400. rad/s
minute 60
rotation w
i.e., ω = 1.
40π day
ωf = rad/s
3
2π
ω = 1. rad/s
∆ω ω – ωi 24 × 60 × 60
α= = f
∆t t A
π
40π 10π ω= × 10–2 rad/s
– 432
3 3 30π
α= rad/s2 = and now acceleration at point A;
5 × 60 3 × 5 × 60
a = rω2
π
α= rad/s2 r = 6400 km = 6400 × 103 m
30
and linear acceleration a = Ra r = 64 × 105 m
π2
1 ∴ a = 64 × 105 × × 10–4 m/s2
R = 50 cm = m (432)2
2 A = 0.03 m/s2
3 . 4 6 | Motion in a Plane
5 →
Sol 37: v = 27 km/h = 27 × m/s →
v 2 − 1 (iˆ +ˆj) v2 ˆ ˆ
(i + j)
18 ⇒ Now a A = aA = –
r 2 r 2
15
v= m/s →
2 Put v = 2 cm/s and r = 4 cm to find a A
→
v2 (15)2
ar = = = 0.7
R 4 × 80 Sol 39: Now this tests your understanding of
→
1 displacement vector
Q
a t = 0.5 m/s2 = m/s2
2 → → →
→ → → Displacement vector r = rf – ri
a net = ar + a t = 2
(0.7) + (0.5) 2 →
where rf is the co-ordinates of final A B C
→ →
a net = 0.86 m/s2 position and ri is the co-ordinates of
initial position.
P
Sol 38: At point the acceleration y Now for all the three girls, final
will be centripetal acceleration position is point Q and initial destination is point P. Hence
which is radially directed towards displacement is same for all the three girls,
Q
point O. i.e. A → → → →
→ i.e. 2 r = 2( rQ – rP ) = 2 PQ = 2×200=400 m
2
v ê π/4
Physically: a = (– r ) Distance is the total length of the path travelled.
r O P x
Here for girl B; distance travelled is same as her
Remember êr and êt are the
displacement vector, since she travelled in the straight
unit vectors along radial and line connecting the points.
tangential direction respectively.
Refer to the figure.
Sol 40: Now from the argument made Q
So in this case also, êt →
→ →
2
above, displacement r = rf – ri
→ v êr
a A = r (– êr ) Here the cyclist started from the point P
A O
O and then finally reached the point O
Now, since the point is in O →
→
between the points P and Q, Hence r f = r i
y →
So r = zero
Hence net displacement is zero.
x Total displacement 0
π/4 And average velocity = = =0
Total time 10
Sol 41: Let us say the circular turn is B Let us say at point B, the A
of the shape AB. particle loses its contact. So N
h B
let us write the equations of
Now at the starting point of the track R cosθ
motions. At point B say the θ θ
→ → → R
i.e. C; a = ar + at particle has velocity v.
O
→ O V
→ a → 2
ar = centripetal acceleration ar mg cosθ = N +
mv
→
at R mg
v 2 êr C
= (– )
R mv 2
N = mg cosθ – ... (i)
5 A R
v = 36 km/h = 36 × m/s = 10 m/s
18 Now when the particle is about to lose contact, the
R = 140 m normal reaction between the particle and the surface
→
(10)2 5 becomes zero.
ar = = m/s2 (– êr )
140 7 ∴ N=0
dv mv 2
and given that = 1 m/s ⇒ mg cosθ = ... (ii)
dt R
→ dv → Now energy at point A, taking O as reference
∴ at = ( êt ); a t = 1 m/s2 ( êt )
dt 1
EA = 0 + mg R and EB = mv2 + mg R cosq
→ → → 2
Now a = a r + a t Using Energy conservation EA = EB
→
a = (0.7 (– êr )) + 1 êt ) m/s2 1
⇒ mg R = mv2 + mg R cosq
2
|a| = (0.7)2 + 1 = 0.49 + 1 = 1.49 m/s2 = 1.22 m/s2 ⇒ 2mg R (1 – cosθ) = mv2
1 10 mv 2
and tan β = ⇒ β =tan–1 2mg (1 – cosθ) = … (iii)
0.7 7 R
Sol 42: mv 2
Putting this value of in eqn (ii)
R
O ⇒ mg cosθ = 2mg (1 – cosθ) ⇒ 3 cos θ = 2
50° V
2 2
O V 40° 90° ⇒ cosθ = ⇒ θ = cos–1
3 3
40° 40° 2
B and now h = R (1 – cosθ) = R 1 –
V 3
A R
∴ h= .
→ 3
Velocity at point A, V A = v î
→
Velocity at point B, VB = v sin 50 î +v cos 50 ˆj Exercise 2
→
VB = v (0.76 î + 0.64 ˆj ) Projectile Motion
→ →
Now change in velocity DV = VB – V A Single Correct Choice Type
y x V = Vx if Vy(t) = 0
g sinθ
Vy2 42
Vy(t) = 0 ⇒ H = = = 0.8 m
g cosθ 45°θ 2g 2 × 10
But given height is 0.45 m
Vx = V cos (θ – 45o); Vy = V sin (θ – 45o)
∴ |V| > |Vx|
g
gy = g cosφ = ; φ = 45° The given data is sufficient to calculate Vy(t)
2
1 2
g 0.45 = 4(t) – .gt
gx = g sinφ = 2
2 From this we can get t
Vy And Vy(t) = 4 – g(t)
time of flight = 2
gy So data is sufficient.
2V cos(θ – 45) 2 2V sin(45 – θ)
= =
g g 2H
Sol 5: (C) t =
2 g
It hits perpendicularly to plane 1
Horizontal displacement (x) = a t2
⇒ Vx = 0 2 x
ax = horizontal acceleration
⇒ 0 = V cos(θ – 45) – gx(t)
2
1 2H
2 2V sin(θ – 45)
g
⇒ V cos(θ–45)= . x = ax g
2 g 2
1 tan θ – 1 1 ax
⇒ tan(θ – 45) = ⇒ = 6
2 tan θ + 1 2 x = H. g = 20 × = 12 m
10
⇒ tanθ = 3
⇒ θ = tan–13
Sol 6: (C)
10 ms–1
Let’s solve the problem along the 45°
Sol 2: (D) Both the bodies have same horizontal range,
plane of inclined surface.
since they form complementary angles with horizontal
axis. y
It θ = 45° they have same time of flight else differs. 10 ms–1 45°
gy
45° gx
Sol 3: (C) u = u cosθ î + u sinθ ˆj x
Let final velocity be v g
gx = gsin45° =
v = v cos α î + v sin α ˆj 2
u cos θ = v cos a g
gy = gcos 45° =
{ Horizontal components of velocity are same} 2
1 4
Horizontal range along inclined = g t2 Vy = Vsin53° = 5. = 4 km/hr
2 x 5
1 4.V 2 2V 2 .gx Vx = V cos 127° = – 3 km/hr
= gx . =
2 g2y g2y Resultant velocity along x-direction
V = V sinθ î + V cos θ ˆj V1 3
= + V
ˆ 2 2 2
VResult = V – Vr = (V sin θ – Vr) î + Vcos θ j
They collide in 2 second
V sin θ – Vr
tan30o = V 3
V cos θ ⇒ 1+ V (2) = 30
2 2 2
1 5 3 sin θ – 5
=
3 5 3 cos θ V1 + 3 V = 30
2
⇒ θ = 60° V2 = 3V
1
⇒ He should steer at 30° w.r.t the line of destination
from starting point ⇒ V1 + 3 ( 3 V ) = 30
1
⇒ V1 = 7.5 ms–1
Sol 12: (C) Car moving north ⇒ wind force acting south. V2 = 7.5 ms–1
Also normal winds are acting due east so flag will point
south-east. V1 is velocity of B
V2 is velocity of A
Sol 13: (C) y
B C A
45° Sol 16: (A)
45°
x Length of string 1: L1
= x1 + 2x2 + x3
V V ˆ x2
VB w.r.t C = – î + j Length of string 2: L2 = x4 x3
2 2 x1
x1 = x2 + x4
V V ˆ
VA w.r.t B = î + j Differentiate on both side B
2 2 x4
dx1 = dx2 + dx4
V V ˆ V V ˆ
VA w.r.t C = VAB + VBC = î + j – î + j dx4 = 0 ∴ length of string is
2 2 2 2 constant
ˆ ⇒ dx1 = dx2 ... (i)
VAC = 2Vj
VCA = – VAC = – ˆ L1 = x1 + 2x2 + x3
2Vj
Differentiating dL1 = dx1 + 2dx2 + dx3
dl1 = 0 as length of string is constant.
Sol 14: (B) Vrain = Vx î + Vy î
dx1 + 2dx2 + dx3 = 0
Vrain = 2ms–1
⇒ 3dx1 + dx3 = 0 (dx1 = dx2)
Vrc = Vrain – Vcyclist
dx3 3dx1
Vrc = Vy ˆj ⇒ dx3 = – 3dx1 ⇒ =–
dt dt
⇒ Vcyclist = Vx î VB = – 3 VA = – 3(5) = – 15 ms –1
x1 = xA, x2 = xC
ω1
L1 = xA + 2x3 + xC ⇒ =1
ω2
dL1 = dxA + 2dx3 + dxC
1
dL1 = 0 Sol 20: (C) r = 25 cm = m.
4
dxA + 2dx3 + dxC = 0 And given ω = 2 rev/s
dxA + 2dxB + dxC = 0 But 1 rev = 2π rad
1 ω = 2(2π) rad/s ∴ ω = 4π rad/s
dxB = – (dxA + dxC)
2 1
Now acceleration = rω2 = (4 π)2 m / s2
2
d xB d x
2
d xC2 4
1 A a = 4p2 m/s2
⇒ =– +
dt 2
2 dt 2
dt2
lets take upwards as positive Sol 21: (C) P ω
Now acceleration of P is rP.ω 2 rP
1 1
⇒ aB = – (a – f) ∴ aB = (f – a) towards centre of disc and
2 2 acceleration of Q is rQ.ω2
rQ
Given rp > rQ
Sol 18: (A) Length of string L = 2x1 + 2x2 + 2x3
∴ aP > aQ
x1 x2
→ →
Sol 22: (D) Velocity V = r × ω
x3 →
→ →
Acceleration = ( r × ω ) × ω
Now In uniform Circular motion, ω is constant and of
d2L d2 x 2d2 x2 2d2 x3 course r is constant. Hence magnitude of both velocity
1
= 2 2 + +
dt2 dt2 dt2 and acceleration are constant. But the directions keep
dt varying.
0 = aA + aB + aC Hence both velocity and acceleration change.
aA = 2 and aB = – 1
Sol 23: (C) Equal angles in equal time implies ω is
(B is moving away from central line) constant. Now follow the above argument
aC = – (2 – 1 ) = – 1
∴ aC = 1 ms–2 upwards (A) Sol 24: (C) θ = 2t3 + 0.5
Note: - try understanding the sign convention used here. dθ 2
Positive was towards a reference point and negative was ω= = 6t2 = 6t0
dt t to
away. o
Now here to = 2 s
Circular Motion ω = 6(2)2 = 24 rad/s
Sol 26: (B) Initially the fan makes 600 revolutions per
minute Previous Years’ Questions
2π
∴ ω = 600 rev/min = 600 rad / sec Sol 1: (A) To cross the river in shortest time one has to
60 swim perpendicular to the river current.
∴ 1 rev = 2π rad
1 min = 60 sec Sol 2: (B) Shortest possible path comes when absolute
2π velocity of boatman comes perpendicular to river
ωi = 600 rad/sec current as shown in figure.
60
ωi = 20π rad/sec Vr
ω ω 1 1
t= = ; =
Sol 27: (A) Let ‘R’ be the radius of the wheel. In one vb 2
v br – v r2 4 25 – vr2
revolution, the wheel completes a distance of 2pR.
And for 2000 revolutions, it is 2000× 2pR. Solving this equation we get vr = 3 km/h
But given the distance is 9.5 km
2000 × 2pR = 9.5 × 103 m Sol 3: (B)
u2 a
Sol 5: (D) maximum vertical height = = 10m V= (1 + α2 )
2g
2β
u2 sin2θ
Horizontal range of a projectile = Sol 2: Let Vx be velocity along Vy
2g
Range is maximum when θ = 45 0 x-axis. Let Vy(t) be velocity
along y-axis at time t.
u2
Maximum horizontal range = at t = 2, θ = 30° θ=30°
g
Vy (2)
Hence maximum horizontal distance = 20 m. ⇒ = tan30° g
Vx θ0 B
Sol 6: (C) a ∝ r Vx
1
⇒ Vy(2) = Vx
Sol 7: (A) x = t; y = 2t − 5t2 3
Exercise 1 ⇒0–
Vx
= – g ; ⇒ Vx = 3g
3
Projectile Motion Initial velocity of projectile
cm
V – u = at
0
10H2 + R 2
50
4
Vy – 4.2 = – 10 37°
x 5(16H2 + R 2 )
5.6
O
V=
103 4H
Vy = –
35
103 Sol 6: V0 = Vx î , V(t) = Vx î + Vy ˆj , Vy = gt
Vy –
35
Angle of inclination = tan–1 = tan–1 = –27.72° 3 3
Vx 5.6 |V(t)| = V = V
2 0 2 x
Ball is directed at an angle 27.72° below x-axis. 2
3 3
Vx 2 + Vy2 = 2
V ; ⇒ Vx + (gt)2 = Vx
2 x 2
Sol 4: (i) there is no friction and motion is taking
plane in a horizontal plane, 5 2 2gt
⇒ (gt)2 = Vx ; ⇒ Vx =
4 5
Hence acceleration = 0 in all frames of reference (except
some random accelerating frame of reference which we 1
will not be using in this problem) 2 × 10 ×
2 = 4.4 m/s
=
Vball = Vcos φ î + V sinφ ˆj 5
Vball – trolley (VbT) = Vball – Vtrolley = Vcos φ î + (V sinφ – Vtrolley) ˆj V22 sin2θ
Sol 7: OA = (V2 = 40 ms–1)
Hence motion of the ball is a straight line as observed g
by trolley.
40 × 40 sin120
In trolley’s frame of reference, O moves downward let = = 80 3 m
10
initial position of O be Oo. OoA makes 45° with x-axis.
V 3 ˆj
And the ball follows the path O0A. Hence velocity vector V = V cosθ î + V sinθ ˆj = î + V
of the ball makes 45° with the x-axis in this frame 2 2
θ = 45° OA = Vx t
4θ 4(45) V
(ii) φ = = = 60° ⇒ . t = 80 3
3 3 2
V sin φ – Vtrolley = tan θ = 1 Vt = 160 3
V cos φ 1 2 3 1
V sin60 – ( 3 – 1) y = Vyt – gt = Vt – gt2
∴ =1 2 2 2
V cos60
V 3 V = 160 3
= V – ( 3 –1) ⇒ V = 2 ms –1
t
2 2
y = a 3 t (as they meet at same point)
2 2
V sin2θ 2V 3 1
Sol 5: R = = sinθ cosq a 3t= 160 3 t – (10)t2
g g 2 2
V 2 sin2 θ ⇒ 5t2 + a 3 t – 240 = 0
H= ... (i)
2g
16 3
H tan θ 4H t>0⇒t=
= ⇒ tanθ = 5
R 4 R
P hysi cs | 3.55
1
Sol 14: (i) Let initial velocity be V Separation x(t) = V21(t) – a21t2
2
V 2 sin2 α
H= = V0(cos α)t î + V0(sinα – 1)t ˆj
2g
Vy V sin α |x(t)| = t V0 (cos α )2 + (sin α – 1)2
t= =
g g
= V0 .t 2 – 2sinα = V0 .t + 2(1 – sin α )
Horizontal distance = H tanq
Note: - body just gazes ⇒ Vy = 0 at the top. Sol 17: θ1 θ2
H tanθ = Vx .t Let the vertical components of their velocities be Vy. Let
V sin α this angle of depression be q1, q2.
H tanθ = V cosα .
g Vy
tan q1 =
2
V sin α 2
V sin α cos α 2 3
. tan θ =
2g g Vy
tan q2 =
⇒ tan θ = 2cota 4
They both are perpendicular, q1 + q2 = 90°
u2 sin2 α
(ii) H = (v = u)
2g 1
⇒ tanq2=tan(90 – q1)=cot q1=
tanθ1
2Hg ⇒ tan q1 . tan q2 = 1
u2 =
2
sin α Vy2
u = 2Hg cosec α = 2Hg(1 + cot α)
2 2 2 ⇒ =1
12
tan θ gh (4 + tan θ)
2 2
⇒ Vy = 12 ms
–1
= 2Hg 1 + =
2 2 Vy
Vy = gt; t=
g
Sol 15: (i) The ball returns to him
Separation = relative velocity × time = (Vx1 – Vx2) t
⇒ there is no velocity in x-direction in the truck’s frame
of reference Vy 7 × 12
= [3 – (–4)] × = = 2.43 m
⇒ Angle of projection = 90° g 10
P hysi cs | 3.57
t = seconds V(t) = Vx î + (Vy – gt) ˆj Sol 20: If he takes minimum time ⇒ he is always
Vy Vy – gt perpendicular w.r.t water
tanα = tanβ =
Vx Vx ⇒ drift = velocity of water × time
Vy = Vx tana 120
Vw = = 0.2 ms–1 = 12 m/min
10 × 60
Vx tan α – gt
tanβ = If he takes shortest path, his resultant velocity along the
Vx flow of river is 0 ms–1
gt ⇒ i.e. Vw – Vx = 0 ; Vx = 0.2 ms–1
Vx =
tan α – tan β Lets assume his velocity is V
V= Vx2 + Vy2 = 1 + tan α . Vx
2
V(10) = Vy(12.5)
gt 4
⇒ Vy = V
= 1 + tan2 α . tan α – tan β 5
3
gt ⇒ Vx = V ( V 2 + V 2 = V)
= sec α . 5 x y
sin α cos β – cos α sin β
3
cos α cos β ⇒ 0.2 = V
5
1 gt ⇒ V = 0.33 ms–1 = 20 m/min
= . . cosα cosb
cos α sin( α – β)
width = V × 10 = 200 m
gt cos β
V=
sin(α – β) Sol 21: Velocity of wind = u î
⇒ V butterfly w.r.t earth = V + Vwind
Sol 19: Let V = Vx î + Vy ˆj = (10 + u) î + 12 ˆj
Velocity at maximum height Vh = Vx ( Vy = 0) 12
tanθ =
Vy2 10 + u
Maximum height =
2g 3 12
=
4 10 +u
Velocity at half maximum height = Vy
2
⇒ u = 6ms–1
Vy2 1 Vy2 Vy
2
= ⇒ Vy2 = Note: - The resultant velocity is directed along AB.
2g 2 29 2
2
Sol 22: Vrain/grd = – 20 ˆj 10iˆ
Vy
V= Vx2 + Vm = 5 î
2
Vair = 15 î 20ˆj
Now as per given information,
Vrain – Vground = – 20 ˆj θ
2
2 Vy ⇒ Vrain = 15 î – 20 Ĵ
Vx2 + = Vx
5 2 Vman = 5 î
5 2 Vy2 ⇒ Vrain/man = 15 î – 20 Ĵ – 5z = 10 î – 20 Ĵ
⇒ Vx = Vx2 +
2 2
3 . 5 8 | Motion in a Plane
→
10 1
So tanθ = = a r = – 3 î – 4 ˆj m/s2
20 2
→ → →
1 And also a = a r + a t
⇒ θ = tan –1
2 →
Given a = –7 î – ˆj
Circular Motion → → →
∴ a t = a – a r = (–7 î – ˆj ) – (–3 î – 4 ˆj )
Sol 23: Let the time = t0 at the Bullet →
instant the bullet hits the first a t = – 4 î + 3 ˆj m/s2
disc and makes a hole in it.
And time = t1 when bullet
makes hole in Disc-2. In this
D1 D2 Sol 25: Acceleration inside a rotor = Rω2
time interval Dt = t1 – t0, →
a = Rω2
An angular displacement of θ is made by point A w.r.t
the point B. →
How for a max
At t = t1 A
2
θ
B
amax = R ωmax
A is hole in Disc-I
Given amax = 10g = 100 m/s2
B is hole in Disc-II
∴ ω Dt = θ → (i) 100 10
ωmax = = rad/s = 5 rad/s
4 2
And also in the same time interval Dt;
1
Bullet travelled a distance of ‘’ we know that 1 rad = rev
2π
∴ = v Dt → (ii) 5
∴ ωm = rev/s
Comparing eq → (i) and (ii); we get
n 2π
ω∆t θ
= Sol 26:
v∆t
w mv 2
v= N sinθ = ... (i)
θ R
N cos θ = mg → ... (ii)
→ →
Sol 24: r = 3 î + 4 ˆj ; v = – 4 î + 3 ˆj
→ → N
| r | = 5m; | v | = 5 m/s θ
θ mv 2
v2 (5)2
We know that radial acceleration = = = 5 m/s2 R
r 5
And this acceleration will be along the negative radial
direction. θ
→
∴ r = 3 î + 4 ˆj mg
→
Unit vector in the direction of r
→ Dividing (i) and (ii)
→ r 1
Is r = = (3 î + 4 ˆj ) v2
|r | 5 ⇒ tanθ =
Rg
3 4 ˆj 5
∴ r̂ = î + ... (i) ⇒ V = 108 Km/h = 108 × m/s
5 5 18
V = 30 m/s
→ v2 3 4
Now a r = (– r̂ ) = 5 – ˆi – ˆj R = 90 m
5 5 5
P hysi cs | 3.59
30.30 21 21
∴ tanθ = =1 umbrella = rev/s = .2π rad/s
90.10 44 44
π 21π
⇒ θ= ω= rad/s = 3 rad/s
4 22
Squaring (i) and (ii) and adding them;
Now for a drop on the Rim; velocity
2
mv 2 →
N2 (sin2θ + cos2θ) = + (mg)2
| v | = Rω
R
→ 1
2 | v | = (3) m/s
mv 2 2
N= (mg)2 +
R
→ 3
|v|= m/s
2
N = m (10)2 + (10)2
Now this is fairly a kinematics problem;
N = 10 m 2 Newton 3
v= m/s
⇒ N = 104. 2 N. 2
1.5
Sol 27: In solving this question, we will use one of the
most important theorems in circles B
Vx
A θ
A x
θ
r
R Vy
O
C 1 2
2θ 1.5 = 0. t – gt
O 2
B C
⇒t= 0.3 and x = vt
The figure explains us that for every θ traversed by AB ,
3
OB traverses an angle of 2θ. x= × 0.3
2
∴ ωOB = 2 × ωAB x = 0.82 m
Hence in this case ω w.r.t C is twice that of w.r.t point C. vy
and tan θ =
∴ ω = 2(0.4) = 0.8 rad/sec. vx
→ vy at point B is vy = 0 – gt
| v | = Rω
1 3
R = 50 cm = m vy = – 10 0.3 m/s and vx = m/s
2 2
→ 1 vy 10 0.3
|v|= (0.8) m/s ∴ tanθ = =
2 vx 3/2
→
→ → →
| v | = 0.4 m/s and a = a r + a t
θ= 74.6°
→
But here a t = 0
Sol 29: Acceleration inside a rotor = Rω2
→ → v 2
∴ a = a r = (– êr ) →
a = Rω2
R
→
Now for a max
Sol 28: Angular velocity of the ω
2
amax = R ωmax
cos θ = 0.3
100 10
ωmax = = rad/s = 5 rad/s
4 2 1000
R= = 334 m
1 (10)(0.3)
We know that 1 rad = rev
2π
5 Sol 32:
∴ ωm = Rev/s
2π Fcosθ
θ
Sol 30: From the top view; The θ F=mRω2
insect looks at the particle as Insect
∴ x-co-ordinates of the Particle F sinθ
= R cosθ But θ = ωt Now mRω2 cosθ = ma
∴ x = R cos ωt; y = R sin ωt
R ∴ a = Rω2cosq
→
∴ r particle,insec t θ 1 2
Now s = ut + at
2
= R cos ωt î + R sin ωt ˆj
1
L=0+ Rω2 cosθ t2
Now 2
→ → →
r particle, observer = r particle,insec t + r insec t, observer 2L
t= 2
Rω cos θ
→
r particle, observer = vt î
Sol 33: In this case, there will mv 2
→
∴ rPO = (R cos ωt + vt) î + R sin ωt ˆj be a pseudo force acting on A N R
the body. Now we use Work- Rsinθ
Hence the motion will be a cycloid. Energy theorem, i.e. work ma
B
R cosθ θ
done by all the forces is equal R
to change in kinetic energy. mg
Sol 31: Now we shall follow a v We know that, work done by
standard procedure rather normal force and centripetal
than a clumsy formula to find force is zero. a
the radius of curvature. vx
θ
v Work done by pseudo force =
Let us first find vx and vy at t θ
ma.(R sin θ)
=3s vy WPF = maR sinθ
vx = v0 = 10 m/s î Work done by gravitational force = mg(R – R cos θ)
2 2 2
→ v2 1 3 1
| a net |=
2
a + m/s 2 = .1 . , [ 20 ]2
R 2 2 2
P.E. = [7.5, 2.5] J
1
K.E = mV2 – PE
2
Exercise 2
1
= × 1 × ( 20 )2 – [7.5, 2.5] = [2.5, 7.5] J
2
Projectile Motion
x 3 V2 = V2 cosθ2 î + V2sinθ2 ˆj
t= =
Vx 20 cos θ V1(t) = V1 – gt ˆj
2Vy 2 20 sin θ V2(t) = V2 – gt ˆj
t = time of flight = =
g g
V12 = V1 – V2
3 2 20 sin θ V12 is independent of t.
⇒ =
20 cos θ g dV12
i.e. a12 = =0
dt
3g
sin2θ = ⇒ Trajectory of particle 1 w.r.t particle 2 is straight line
20
along the direction of V12.
3
sin2θ =
2
Sol 4: (C) V12 = V1 – V2
2θ = 120°, 60°
⇒ θ = 60°, 30° = (V1 cos θ1 – V2 cos θ2) î + (V1 sinθ1 – V2 sinθ2) ˆj
3 1 V1 cos θ1 = V2 cos θ2
⇒ sinθ = ,
2 2 ⇒ V12 = (V1 sinθ1 – V2 sinθ2) ˆj
1 3 ˆ 3 ˆ 1 ˆ but x θ1 ≠ x θ2 ⇒ x1 ≠ x2
ˆ
V= 20 2 i + 2 j, 2 i + 2 j
Sol 5: (D) Vy = V sinθ
Vx = [ 5 , 15 ] ms–1
2Vy
Vy2
2 2 Time of flight =
H= =
1 3 , 1 [ t
2 2 20 ] = [0.75, 0.25]
2
2g 2g Vy2
M a x i m u m height =
2g
Vy2 1
P.E = mgH= m × g × = m Vy2 V1 sin θ1 = V2 sin θ2
2g 2
3 . 6 2 | Motion in a Plane
⇒ Vy1 = Vy2 gT
2
2 2
V12 = (V1 cos θ1 – V2cos θ2) î V sin θ 2 (gT)2 gT2
h= = = =
⇒ Trajectory of one with respect to other is horizontal. 2g 2g 8g 8
gT2 = 8 h
1 2 1 h1 sin2 θ1 (3 / 5)2
H= gt = × 10 × (0.4)2 = 0.8 m = = = 9 : 16
2 2 h2 (4 / 5)2
sin2 θ2
Vmin = Vx = V cosq
Sol 10: (A, B) In box frame of
reference, a acts upwards Vmin cos θ1
1 (4 / 5)
a u g = = =4:3
i.e. Resultant acceleration is (g – Vmin cos θ2 (3 / 5)
2
a) downwards . If g = a, resultant
acceleration = 0, P will hit C. Angle bisector is 45° as θ1, θ2 are complementary angles.
Since it is single correct you may as well solve by substituting Sol 20: (D) VAB = VA – VB
any 3 points in motion. You may also eliminate option B, D
VAB > VA
as coefficient of x2 should be negative, which is common
knowledge to be known about trajectory equation. ⇒ VB < 0
Which is possible
Sol 16: A → p; B → p, q, r, s; C → p, q, r, s; D → p, r
Sol 21: (A) Statement-II true
(A) Constant velocity ⇒ same direction ⇒ straight line
Relative vertical acceleration is zero, relative vertical
Answer is (A) (B) velocities don’t charge.
(B) Constant speed ⇒ Constant magnitude of velocity
⇒ Variable direction of velocity ⇒ there is acceleration Circular Motion
⇒ It can follow any path.
Sol 22: (A, D) In a curved path; the direction of velocity
B → p, q, r, s →
(C) With variable acceleration, it can follow any path keeps on changing. So v cannot remain constant under
→
C → p, q, r, s any conditions. However | v |
(D) Consider a particle moving in circle with uniform = Speed can remain constant.
velocity u.
→
mu2 → dv
Magnitude of acceleration = , directed toward canter. And a = ; so it follows that acceleration also cannot
r dt
→
This acceleration has constant magnitude, but variable → dv
remain constant. But still | | =
a is possible
direction. dt
Hence (q) false
Sol 23: (B, D) For a circular motion
Now circle is a special case of ellipse
Sweeping equal area in equal time is
⇒ (s) is also false
only possible when ω is constant.
Straight line is a trivial example of constant acceleration.
→ → →
So p is true. ∴ Now v = r × ω
We know that trajectory of a projectile is parabola. Here So velocity is not constant
acceleration is constant g towards ground.
→
Hence r is true. But speed = | v | = rω = constant
D → p r. → → →
and a = ar + at
Assertion Reasoning Type → dv dω
at = = r. = zero
Sol 17: (B) Speed of projectile is minimum because dt dt
Vy = 0 → → → →
and a r = r × ( r × ω )
∴ Acceleration is not constant.
Sol 18: (D) Vx = V cosθ
Angle of projections are different,
Vx ≠ Vx are θ1 ≠ θ2
1 2
gcos in
in gs
gs
Acceleration of particle with respect to block The relative velocity of B with respect to A is perpendicular
to line
= (Acceleration of particle) – (acceleration of block)
of motion of A.
= (g sin θ î + g cos θ ˆj ) – (g sin θ) î = g cos θ ˆj Now
∴ AB V cos30° = VA
motion of particle with respect to block will be a
projectile as shown. ⇒ VB = 200 m/s
And time t0 = (Relative distance) / (Relative velocity)
u 500
Q = = 5sec
VB sin30o
P R
g cos
Sol 3: (D)
The only difference is, g will be replaced by gcosθ.
dv
v = ω2r , where v is the velocity of the block radially
u sin2α u2 sin2α
2 dr outward.
PQ = Range (R) = PQ =
gcos θ gcos θ
v r
∫0 vdv = rdr ω2 ∫
(ii) Horizontal displacement of particle with respect R /2
to ground is zero. This implies that initial velocity
with respect to ground is only vertical, or there is no R2
horizontal component of the absolute velocity of the ⇒ v = ω r2 −
4
particle.
u sin(+) r dr r
u ∫R /2 2
= ω∫ dt
0
R
j a r2 −
vcos 4
i
u cos(+)
v = r
R ωt
4
e + e−ωt ( )
v sin
= u cos (α + θ) î + u sin (α + θ) ˆj
PHYSICS
FOR JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
SECOND
EDITION
Exhaustive Theory
(Now Revised)
Formula Sheet
9000+ Problems
based on latest JEE pattern
PlancEssential
Questions recommended for revision
4. F ORCES AND LAWS OF
MOTION
1. INTRODUCTION
In this chapter, we study in detail the actual consequences due to motion, i.e., the concept of force, which we
specifically define as a push or pull experienced by a particular body or system. As we are of aware of the fact that
the equation(s) of motion is/are governed by the choice of reference frame made, we, therefore, also concentrate
on the same by involving different types of reference frames.
2. FORCE
Force, by its nature, is better understood as any influence that causes an object to undergo a certain change,
which maybe with respect to its movement, direction, or even geometrical construction. To be succinct, suffice it
to say that a force can facilitate an object with mass to change its velocity, either to accelerate or deform a flexible
object, or both. However, we can also define force using intuitive concepts such as a push or a pull. As mandated
for a vector quantity, force has both magnitude and direction. We generally measure force based on the SI unit (of
Newton) and represent the same using the symbol ‘F.’ It is imperative to understand, therefore, that in case if a body
is subjected to more than one force, then the actual net force acting on that particular body is invariably a vector
addition of all the forces in operation.
object and ‘g’ as its acceleration due to gravity, then we can conveniently express the weight of that particular
body/object as Mg. However, we always consider that the weight of a body/object is in a direction that is
vertically downward.
(b) Normal force: To understand the concept of normal force, let us consider
a book resting on a table, as an example. The book has a specific weight,
specifically in vertically downward direction and is at rest to begin with.
Therefore, we understand that there is definitely one more force that
Normal
is operative on the block but in an opposite direction, which helps to force weight
balance its weight. The source of this force is none other than the table
Figure: 4.3
and we hence call the same as a normal force. This signifies the fact that
if in case two bodies are in contact with each other, then a contact force
arises; further, if the contact surface is smooth, then the direction of the
force is usually normal to the plane of contact. As stressed earlier, we
always mean that its direction is towards the body under consideration.
(c) Tension in a string: Let us assume that there is a block hanging from
a fixed surface by a string. The weight of this block is acting vertically Tension in
string
downward although it is not under motion; hence, its weight is adequately
balanced by a force originating from the string. We call this force as
‘tension in string.’ Thus, we define ‘tension’ as a resisting force that is Weight
operative in a stretched string. Further we understand that its direction
is along the string but away from the body/object under consideration. Figure: 4.4
Sol: Weight acts vertically downwards and contact force from the surface is Figure: 4.5
normal to the surface at the point of contact.
The FBD of the cylinder is as shown in the Figure 4.6.
Here, w = weight of the cylinder and represent the normal reactions between
the cylinder and the two inclined walls. N1 N₂
W
Figure: 4.6
Illustration 2: A block of mass m is attached with two strings as shown in the
Figure 4.7. Draw the FBD of the same. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: Weight acts vertically downwards and tension forces along the length of
the strings. The FBD of the block is as shown in the Figure 4.8.
Figure: 4.7
T₁
T₂
mg
Figure: 4.8
on it. This property due to which a body remains at rest or continues its motion with uniform velocity is called as
inertia. Force is push or pull, which disturbs or tends to disturb inertia of rest or inertia of uniform motion of a body.
Thus, Newton’s first law of motion defines inertia, force and intertial frame of reference. One example in this regard
is the straight line motion of a body in the absence of the constraining force.
Illustration 3: A heavy particle of mass 0.50 kg is hanging from a string fixed with a roof. Find the force exerted
by the string on the particle. (Take g = 9.8 m / s2 ) (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The weight of the particle is balanced by the force of tension in the string.
The forces acting on the heavy particle are
(a) Pull of the earth 0.50 kg × 9.8 m / s2 =
4.9 N , vertically downward
(b) Pull of the string, T, vertically upward.
Figure: 4.9
The heavy particle is at rest with reference to position of the earth (which we
assume to be an inertial frame). Hence, the sum of forces should be zero.
Therefore, T is 4.9 N when acting vertically upward.
Illustration 4: The given diagram shows the forces in operation on a block. Determine whether the block is under
acceleration or not. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: If the net force on the block is non-zero then the block accelerates. If the
net force on the block is zero, then acceleration is zero. 4N 4N
To check whether the particle will have any acceleration or not, let us confirm 30° 30°
if net force is zero or not by resolving the forces in both horizontal and vertical
directions.
8N
Net force in horizontal direction
= 4 cos30° − 4 cos30
= ° 0
Figure: 4.10
8 − 4 sin30° − 4 sin30° ≠ 0
Net force in vertically downward direction =
The net force is not zero. Therefore, the particle will have downward acceleration.
5. INERTIA
Inertia is the resistance of any physical object to any change in its state of motion (including a change in direction).
However, we need to understand that inertia is actually a passive property. Further, it does not permit a body to
do anything but resists active agents such as torques and forces. In other words, it is tendency of objects to keep
moving in a straight line at constant linear velocity.
(ii) A person runs a certain distance before taking a long jump. This is mainly because the velocity acquired by
running prior to attempting a long jump is added at the time of jump, so that he or she can cover a long distance.
F = ma F = ma
Figure: 4.11
However, the second law can also be stated in terms of an object’s acceleration. As the law is valid only for constant-
mass systems, the mass can be considered outside of the differentiation operator by the constant factor rule in
differentiation. Thus,
dv
=F m
= ma, Where F is the net force applied, m is the mass of the body, and a is the body’s acceleration.
dt
Thus, we now know that the net force applied to a body results in a proportional acceleration. In other words, if a
body is in an accelerating mode, then there is force acting on it. Both force and acceleration are vector quantities
(as denoted by the bold type in the Figure 4.11 ). This shows that they have both a magnitude (size) and a direction
relative to some reference frame.
Illustration 5: Two forces F1 and F2 act on a 2 kg mass. If = 10 N and = 5 N, find the acceleration. (JEE MAIN)
F2=5N
2.5 3m / sec2
⇒ a =
120°
Further, if the resultant force is at angle α with F1
2Kg
5sin120° F1=10N
tan α= ⇒ α= 30°
10 + 5cos120°
Figure: 4.12
There fore acceleration is 2.5 3m / sec2 at an angle 30° with the direction of F1
Sol: List all the forces acting on the block. Take components of forces along the M
horizontal and the vertical. Apply Newton’s second law along the horizontal and along
the vertical. Figure: 4.13
Let us consider the block as the whole system. Therefore, the forces acting on the block are
(a) Pull of the earth, Mg, vertically downward,
N
(b) Contact force by the table, N, vertically upward, and
T
(c) Pull of the string, T, along the string.
Please observe the provided free body diagram for the block.
The acceleration of the block is horizontal and toward the right. Now, take this direction
as the x-axis and vertically upward direction as the y-axis. Therefore, we have
Component of Mg along the x-axis = 0; component of N along the x-axis = 0 Mg
Figure: 4.14
Component of T along the Xx-axis = T cos
Hence, the total force along the x-axis = T cos.
Now, applying Newton’s second law, T cos = Ma. ... (i)
Component of Mg along the y-axis =-Mg
Component of N along the y-axis = N
Component of T along the y-axis = T sin
The total force along the y-axis = N + T sin − Mg.
Again applying Newton’s second law, N + T sin − Mg = 0; … (ii)
1 N − m2
The quantity is 9.0 × 109 .
4 πε0 C2
This is called Coulomb force and it acts along the line joining the particles. Electromagnetic force is realized in
many forms in our day-to-day life. Some examples having practical importance in this regard are listed hereunder:
(1) Forces between two surfaces in contact, (2) Tension in a string or a rope, and (3) Force due to spring.
(a) First Law: “Every object persists in its state of rest or uniform motion in a
straight line unless it is compelled to change that state by forces impressed on it.” Drag
Airspeed
Before release: Object is in state of rest, air speed is zero, and there is weight but
no drag. When the object is released: Object accelerates – airspeed increases.
As drag depends on airspeed – drag increases.
Weight
When drag is equal to weight: Object no longer accelerates but holds a constant
velocity – terminal velocity. Figure: 4.15
P hysics | 4.7
(b) Second Law: Differential form: Force = change of momentum with change of
d(mv)
time, i.e., F = with mass constant: Force = mass × acceleration F=ma
dt
Figure: 4.16
(c) Third Law: For every action, there is an equal and opposite reaction.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
If the forces are coplanar, only two axes say X and Y, taken in the plane of forces are needed. Choose
the X-axis along the direction in which the system is known to have or is likely to have acceleration. A
direction perpendicular to it may be chosen as the Y-axis. If the system is in equilibrium, any mutually
perpendicular directions in the plane of the diagram may be chosen as the axes. Write the components
of all the forces along the X-axis and equate their sum to the product of the mass of the system and
its acceleration. This gives you an equation. Write the components of the forces along the Y-axis and
equate the sum to zero. This gives you another equation. If the forces are collinear, this second equation
is not needed.
If necessary you can go to step 1, choose another object as the system, repeat steps 2, 3 and 4 to get
more equations. These are called equations of motion. Use mathematical techniques to get unknown
quantities out of these equations. This completes the algorithm.
Note: (i) If the system is in equilibrium we will write the two equations
= as: ∑ Fx 0=
and ∑ Fy 0 (ii) If
the system is in collinear, the second equation, i.e.∑ Fy = 0 is not needed.
9. IMPULSE
Definition:
The impulse of a force is defined as the product of the average
force Raindrop
F and the time interval ∆t during which the force acts: Impulse = F∆t . v0
vf 0 m/s
Impulse, hence, is a vector quantity and has the same direction as the average
force. The SI unit of impulse is Newton-second (Ns).
However, we can also define impulse as the change in the linear
momentum of a body. Forces acting for a very short duration are called
impulsive forces. Figure: 4.18
Illustration 7: A truck of mass travelling at 4 m/s is brought to rest in 2 s when it strikes a wall. What force (assume
constant) is exerted by the wall? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Force on the truck is the change in momentum per unit time.
Using the relation, impulse = change in linear momentum
We have, F.t = mv f − mv 0 = m(v f − v 0 ) or F(2) = 2 × 103 0 − ( −4) or 2F = 8x103 or F = 4x103
( ∑ F ) ∆=t
mv f − mv 0 ;
m
F∆t =mv f − mv 0 ⇒ F =− v 0
∆t
F= +0.90 N [Hint: Third law of motion]
−(0.060kg/ s)( −15m/ s) =
Illustration 9: A bullet of mass strikes an obstacle and moves at to its original direction. If its speed also changes
from 20 m/s to 10 m/s, then find the magnitude of impulse acting on the bullet. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: Find the impulse along the initial line of motion and along the perpendicular to the initial line of motion.
Mass of the bullet, m = 10-3kg
Figure: 4.20
m2F a a
∴ Fc = F m₁ Fc Fc m₂
m1 + m2
Figure: 4.21
10.2 Blocks Connected by Strings
If two blocks of masses and are connected by an inextensible string so that a
F
if force F is applied to and there is an equal and opposite tension T in the T
m₂ T m₁
string and if a is acceleration of the masses, then Newton’s law gives
F− T = m1a ; T = m a Adding F ; T = m2 F Figure: 4.22
2 = F (m1 + m2 )a or a =
m1 + m2 m1 + m2
a
If three blocks of masses, , and are connected by two strings with tension T₂ T₂ T₁ T₁
and when a force F applied to imparts an acceleration a to all the blocks, m₃ m₂ m₁ F
then Newton’s law gives the following relations for these three blocks:
F− T1 = m1a ; T1 −=T2 m2a= T2 m3a Figure: 4.23
4 . 1 0 | Forces and Laws of Motion
F
Adding F = (m1 + m2 + m3 )a or a =
m1 + m2 + m3
N
(m2 + m3 )F m3 F
T1 = ; T2 = a
m1 + m2 + m3 m1 + m2 + m3
C
B
A
D
Illustration 10: Two blocks of masses and are placed in contact with F₁ F₂
each other on a frictionless horizontal surface as shown in the Figure 4.27. M₁ M₂
Constant forces and are applied on and as shown in the Figure 4.27. Find
Figure: 4.27
the magnitude of acceleration of the system. Also, calculate the contact
force between the blocks. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Draw the FBD of each block. Apply Newton’s first law along the vertical
and Newton’s second law along the horizontal. M₁g M₂g
In this problem, acceleration of both blocks will be the same as they are rigid
F₁ N N F₂
and in contact with each other. As the surfaces are frictionless, contact force
on any surface will be normal force only. Let us assume that the acceleration
of blocks be a and contact forces, and N as shown in free body diagrams N₁ N₂
of blocks. [FBD of M₂] [FBD of M₁]
F1 − N =
M1a ...... (i) and M1g− N1 =
0 .......(ii)
Applying, Newton’s second law for
N − F1 =
M2a ...... (iii) and M2g− N2 =
0 .......(iv)
F1 − F2 M2F1 + M1F2
=
By solving (i) and (iii) a = and N
M1 + M2 M1 + M2
Illustration 12: Two blocks each having mass of 20 kg rest on frictionless surfaces as are shown in the Figure 4.30.
Assume that the pulleys to be light and frictionless. Now, find:
(a) The time required for the block A to move 1 m down the plane, starting from rest;
(b) The tension in the cord connecting the blocks. sinθ = 3 / 5 (JEE ADVANCED)
T
N
MA
A
mAgsin mAgcos
B mAg
Figure: 4.30
Sol: Draw the FBD of each block. Apply Newton’s second law along the direction of motion for each block. Solve
the equations obtained to get the values for two variables T and a.
4 . 1 2 | Forces and Laws of Motion
Blocks A and B are considered as two systems. The free body diagrams for the blocks A
and B are shown in the Figure 4.31 where T is tension in the string.
T a
mA gsin θ − T = mA a .......(i) N
mBAT
=N mA gcos θ .......(ii)
B
T = mB a ........(iii)
mng
Adding equation (i) and (iii), mA gsin=
θ (mA + mB )a
mA Figure: 4.31
20 3 2
=⇒ a = gsin θ = (10) 3m / s
m
A + mB 20 + 20 5
1 1
1 2s 2 1 2
(a) s = at2 ; t = = 2× = 0.82
2 a 3
(b) T = mB a = 20 × 3 = 60N.
Illustration 13: From a gun (mass = M) a bullet (mass = m) is fired with speed relative to barrel of the gun which
is inclined at an angle of with horizontal. The gun is placed over a smooth horizontal surface. Find the recoil speed
of the gun. (JEE ADVANCED)
vr
Sol: Apply the law of conservation of linear momentum
along the horizontal direction. 60°
vr sin 60°
Let the recoil speed of the gun is v. By taking gun + bullet
as the system, the net external force on the system in
vr cos 60°– v
horizontal direction is zero. Initially, the system was at M
rest. Therefore, applying the principle of the conservation Components of velocity
of linear momentum in horizontal direction, of bullet relative to ground
Illustration 14: A man of mass is standing on a platform of mass kept on a smooth horizontal surface. Now,
the man starts moving on the platform with velocity relative to the platform. Based on the above, find the recoil
velocity of the platform. (JEE MAIN)
constant. Initially, both the man and the platform were at rest.
mv
Hence, =0 m1 (vr − v) − m2 v ∴v = 1 r
m1 + m2
At t=0 At t=t
v=u m=m
m = m0 v=v
Exhaust velocity = vr
Figure: 4.34
Let m0 be the mass of the rocket at time t = 0. Let m be its mass at any time t and v its velocity at that moment.
Initially, let us suppose that velocity of the rocket is u.
dm
Further, let − be the mass of gas ejected per unit time and, the exhaust velocity of the gases. Usually
dt
dm
− and, are kept constant throughout the journey of the rocket. Now, let us write few equations which can be
dt
3. Net
(c) Net force onforce on the rocket
the rocket Fnet= Ft − W (upwards)
(upwards)
dm
or or Fnet =v r − − mg
dt
F dv v r −dm −dm
(d) Net4.acceleration of theofrocket
Net acceleration
the rocket a= or
= − g or dv v r
= − gdt
m dt m dt m
v −dm
m t m
v − u vr ln 0
− g∫ dt or = − gt
∫ dv vr ∫
or=
u m0 m 0
m
m
Thus, v =u − gt + v r ln 0 ...(i) ... (i)
m
dm dm
Note:
1.=Ft Vr − is upwards, as vr is downwards and is negative.
dt dt
4 . 1 4 | Forces and Laws of Motion
m
2. If gravity is ignored and initial velocity
= eq(i) reduces to v vr ln 0
of the rocket u 0,=
m
Illustration 15: (a) A rocket set for vertical firing weighs 50 kg and contains 450 kg of fuel. It can have a maximum
exhaust velocity of 2 km/s. What should be its minimum rate of fuel consumption?
(a) (i) To just lifting it off from the launching pad?
(ii) To give it an acceleration of 20 m/?
(b) What will be the speed of the rocket when the rate of consumption of the fuel is 10 kg/s after whole of the
fuel is consumed? (take g = 9.8 m/). (JEE ADVANCED)
Illustration 16: Suppose that a raindrop falls through a cloud and accumulates mass at a rate of kmv where k > 0
is a constant, m is the mass of the raindrop, and v its velocity. What is the speed of the raindrop at a given time if
it starts from rest, and what is its mass? (JEE ADVANCED)
e2kVt − 1
so, V + v = (V − v)e2kVt ,i.e. v = V = V tanh(Vkt), so that v = g
e2kVt + 1 tanh( kgt )
k
dm g
Now we may f ind the mass : we have = kmv
= km tanh( kgt
= ) m kg tanh( kgt ).
dt k
t 1 dm t
Thus, ∫ dt = ∫ kg tanh( kgt )dt
0 m dt 0
m dm t
∫m0 m
= ∫0 kg tanh( kgt )dt
logm − logm0 =
logcosh( kgt )
13. EQUILIBRIUM
Equilibrium is the condition of a system, when net external farce is zero.
Figure: 4.35
13.2.1 Masses Connected by Pulley and Constraint Relation
Let us consider blocks of masses and connected by a string and passing over the pulley as shown in the Figure
4.36. Let be the acceleration of downward and be the acceleration of upward. Let T is the tension in the string,
so that the pulley moves clockwise. For block,
As there are three unknown parameters, we take the following steps for
writing the constraint relation and hence find the parameters:
x0
(a) Assume direction of acceleration of each body.
(b) Locate position of each block from any fixed point like, for example,
center of the pulley. x2 a2
T T
a1 x1
(c) Identify the constraint and write the equation of constraint in terms of m2 m1
distance.
m2g m1g
(d) Write the equation of constraint and hence differentiate twice to find
one of the parameters. Figure: 4.36
In this case, the string is inextensible; therefore, the constraint the length
of string remains constant. If is the length of the string passing over the
pulley, and lengths of string from the pulley to and respectively, then the
4 . 1 6 | Forces and Laws of Motion
m − m2 m2 (m1 − m2 )g 2m1m2
Adding a = 1 g ; T = m2a + m2g = + m2g ; T = g
m1 + m2 m1 + m2 m1 + m2
2m1m2
If the pulley is pulled in upward direction with an acceleration a,=
then T (g + a)
m1 + m2
Illustration 17: Find the relationship between accelerations of blocks A and B based on
the Figure 4.37. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Measure all distances of pulley and block from a fixed point (stationary point).
The physical property that we can use here is the inextensibility of string,
B A
i.e., ab + bc + cd + de + ef = constant.
Figure: 4.37
Let at any moment A and B are distances and from the support as shown in the Fig. 4.37.
Let us take gh= and ik= and hence express the length of string in equation (i) in terms of, l1 and l2 .
We hence obtain XB − l1 + bc + (XB − l1 − l2 ) + de+ (X A − l2 ) =constant Here,, bc and de are constants.
cons tant
∴ 2XB + X A = ..........(1) ... (i)
a
Let at time ∆t, changes to + ∆ and changes to - ∆ dk e
14 PSEUDO FORCE
T cos a
4.1 Inertial and Non-inertial Frames of References T
Non-accelerated frames of reference are called inertial frames, whereas T sin
ma
accelerated frames are called non-inertial frames. If one is travelling in a mg Observer
train which is accelerating forward, the body in the train is pushed backward
and he or she is pushed forward when the brakes are applied. This is due to
inertia of the body. Such an accelerated frame is called a non-inertial frame. Figure: 4.39
P hysi cs | 4.17
In order to make Newton’s laws applicable to such a frame, a fictitious force or pseudo force is applied on the
body. Based on the above discussion, we now understand that the magnitude of this pseudo force is equal to the
product of the mass m of the body and acceleration a of the reference frame and its direction is opposite to the
acceleration of the frame.
∴ pseudo force, F =−m × a . Thus in a non-inertial frame trolley moving with an acceleration a hanging bob of
mass m will be deflected through an angle due to a pseudo force acting in backward direction. In the non-inertial
frame of reference, this bob is in equilibrium under the action of force due to tension T, weight mg and the pseudo
force ma in a direction making an angle with the vertical.
a a
T sin θ =ma ; T cos θ =mg ; tan=θ θ tan−1
or=
g g
Example: Motion of a block on an inclined plane is an example of accelerated frame of motion.
Motion of a Block on a Smooth Inclined Plane: Let us consider a block N
of mass m placed on a frictionless inclined plane, inclined at an angle to a
the horizontal. We observe that the normal reaction N acts perpendicular
mg sin
to the plane and its weight is resolved into component mg sin along the mg cos q
plane which slides the block downward with acceleration a and component
mg cos perpendicular to the plane downward, which is equal and opposite m
to the normal reaction.
Figure: 4.40
∴ mgsin θ =ma mgcos θ =N or
= a gsin θ However, if the plane is
provided with a horizontal acceleration a′ in the horizontal direction as a
shown in the Figure 4.44, then the body lies in an accelerating frame of N mg cos
reference and a pseudo force ma′ acts horizontally in a direction opposite a’
to that of a′ because an inertial force ma′ acts on it in the direction of ma’
mg sin
a′. Thus ma′ can be resolved into a component ma′cos up the plane and
md
ma′sinperpendicular to the plane in the downward direction as shown
mg
sin
co
in the Figure 4.44. From Newton’s second law of motion, we know that: mg
s
mgsin θ − ma'cos θ = ma or=
a gsin θ − a'cos θ Figure: 4.41
=N m(gcos θ + a'sin θ) . If the body is at rest relative to the inclined plane,
then a=0 or gsin
= θ a'cos θ or =a' gtan θ
Sol: Analyze the motion of blocks 1 and 2 in the reference frame of block Figure: 4.42
3. As block 3 is accelerated, blocks 1 and 2 experience pseudo forces in the
frame of block 3.
Let a1, a2 and a3 be the accelerations of 1, 2, and 3, respectively. Let a1x, a2x and a3x be the absolute horizontal
acceleration of 1, 2 and 3 to the right and a1y, a2y and a3y be their downward accelerations. According to the
constraints of the problem a1y = 0, a3y = 0
Let a13x = relative acceleration of 1 w.r.t. 3. = a1x − a3x = 0 ⇒ a3x = a1x
a23y = relative acceleration of 2 w.r.t 3. = a2y − a3y = a2y − 0 ⇒ a2y = 0
a23x = relative acceleration of 2 w.r.t. 3. = a2x − a3x = 0 ⇒ a2x = a3x
N’
∴ a1x = a2x = a3x and a1y = a2y = a3y = 0 N T
N
F
Consider the free-body diagrams of blocks 1 to 3. T R 2 3
1
From the FBD, we obtain the following equations. R
T
T = m1a1x ........(i) m₂g m₃g
For Block I
m₁g T
N− m1g =
0 .......(ii)
Figure: 4.43
4 . 1 8 | Forces and Laws of Motion
R = m2a2x ........(iii)
For Block II
T − m2g = 0 .......(iv)
F −R − T = m3a3x .......(v)
For Block III
N'− N − T − m3g =0 ........(vi)
15. FRICTION
If there are two bodies in contact with each other, then the force which
opposes the relative motion between two bodies in contact is called force
of friction. Further, the magnitude of the frictional force depends upon the fmax A
nature of two surfaces in contact. This is primarily due to surface irregularities Force of fK
at molecular levels, with the result that even a highly polished surface has Friction
irregularities. This results in producing interlocking of uneven surfaces. fS
Once there is smooth motion of the body, the friction is less than the
maximum force of static friction or limiting friction.The variation of force of O Force Applied, F
friction with the applied force is shown in the graph when any block is
moving over another surface. However, when any block is at rest, the Figure: 4.44
resultant force of static friction is equal to the force applied. Then, it reaches
to a maximum value at A, the limiting friction. Once the motion resumes, a
lesser force is required for maintaining uniform motion.
plane whose inclination is gradually increasing. Then the body just starts sliding down at fs
R
a certain angle of inclination θ. Now, the weight mg can be resolved into a component
mg sin due to which the body is about to slide down against maximum or limiting value
mg sin
of friction and therefore the second component mg cos balances the normal reaction R
perpendicular to the inclined plane. mg cos
mg
fs
; R mgcos θ ;
fs mgsin θ=
∴= ∴ = tan θ = µ as µ tan λ ;
= θ = λ = tan−1 (µ ) Figure: 4.47
R
Here, the angle θ is called angle of inclination. We now know that the angle of friction λ is that minimum angle of
inclination of the inclined plane at which a body placed at rest on the inclined plane just starts sliding down.
However, when θ < λ, then the body is in equilibrium and does not slide. On the contrary, when θ > λ, then the
body starts sliding down with an acceleration.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Value of friction is not always equal to µN. Further, µN is the maximum value of friction. Friction does not
oppose motion; rather, it opposes relative motion between two surfaces.
Anand K (JEE 2011, AIR 47)
Illustration 19: A heavy box of mass 20 kg is pulled on a horizontal surface by applying a horizontal force. If the
coefficient of kinetic friction between the box and the horizontal surface is 0.25, then find the force of friction exerted
by the horizontal surface on the box. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Force of friction on a body sliding on a surface is equal to the normal reaction N
multiplied by the coefficient of kinetic friction between the pair of surfaces.
The situation is shown in the Figure 4.49. In the vertical direction, there is no acceleration;
therefore, N=mg. fk F
As the box slides on the horizontal surface, the surface exerts kinetic friction on the box. mg
Therefore, the magnitude of the kinetic friction is fk =µk N = µkMg
Figure: 4.49
=0.25 × (20kg) × (9.8m/ s2 ) =49N. This force thus acts in the direction opposite to that of the pull.
Illustration 20: Two blocks, M1 and M2, connected by a massless string slide down M1
an inclined plane, having an angle of inclination of. The masses of the two blocks are
= 4 kg and = 2 kg, respectively and the coefficients of friction of and with inclined M2
plane are 0.75 and 0.25, respectively. Assuming the string to be taut, find
37°
(a) The common acceleration of the two masses and
Figure: 4.50
4 . 2 0 | Forces and Laws of Motion
(b) The tension in the string. (note: sin =0.6, cos =0.8) (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: Let each block is having acceleration a down the incline plane. Draw the FBD of each block and apply the
Newton’s second law of motion along the direction of motion. Solve the equations obtained to get the value of
two variables a and T.
Let a be the common acceleration of the system and T be the tension in the string µ=
1 3 4, µ=
2 1 4
Equation of motion for M1 and M2 are : M1a
Mg cos R1
M1a M1gsin37° + T − µ1M1gcos37°
= ......(i)
Mg sin
M2a M2gsin37° − T − µ2M2gcos37°
= .....(ii) M1 T R2 a
T
s
Now, by adding, (i) and (ii)
co
M2
g
s
1
M
(M1 + M2 )a
= (M1 + M2 )gsin37° − (µ1 M1 + µ2 M2 )gcos37° g co
Mg sin
s
mM 2
co
M 1g
g
M2g
3 1
2
M
37°
∴ (4 + 2)a = (4 + 2)g× (0.6) − 4 × + × 2 g × 0.8
4 4 Figure: 4.51
9.8 × 0.8 7.64
6a g[3.6 − 2.8]
= or =a = = 1.27m / sec2
6 6
6 1 8
From
= (ii) T M2gsin37° − µ2M2gcos37° − M2a =2 × 10 × − × 2 × 10 × − 2 × 1.27 = 12 − 4 − 2.54 = 5.46 Newtons
10 4 10
Illustration 21: Assume that a small block of mass 100 g moves with uniform speed in a horizontal circular groove,
with vertical side walls, of radius 25 cm. If the block takes 2 s to complete one round, then find the normal contact
force by the side wall of the groove. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The normal contact force provides the necessary centripetal force to the block to move in a circle.
2π × (25 cm)
The speed of the=block is v = 0.785m / s.
2.0s
v 2 (0.785m/ s)2
a
The acceleration of the block is= = = 2.5m / s2
r 0.25m
However, toward the center, the only force in this direction is the normal contact force due to the side walls. Thus,
2
from Newton’s second law, this force is =
N ma
= (0.100kg)(2.5m/ s= ) 0.25N
P hysi cs | 4.21
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
I have found students often confused over the concept of centripetal force. They
think that this force acts on a particle moving in a circle. This force does not act but
required for moving in a circle which is being provided by the other forces acting on
the particle. Let us take an example, Suppose a particle of mass ‘m’ is moving in a
vertical circle with the help of a string of length l fixed at point O.
Let v be the speed of the particle at its lowest position. When I ask the students what T
forces are acting on the particle in this position, they immediately say, three forces are
mv 2
v
acting on the particle: (i) tension, T (ii) weight, mg and (iii) centripetal force, (r=I).
I
However, they are wrong. Only the first two forces T and mg are acting on
the particle. mg
mv 2
The third force is required for circular motion which is being provided by T and
I Figure: 4.52
2
mg. Thus, the resultant of these two forces is v =
µrg or v = µrg toward O. Or we
mv 2
can write T − mg =
I Ankit Rathore (JEE Advanced 2013, AIR 158)
force R
mv 2
for a particle to move on a circular path is called as centripetal force. ∴ Centripetal force =
R
The term “centripetal force” merely signifies a force toward the center; however, it tells nothing about its nature or
origin. Further, the centripetal force may be a single force due to a rope, a string, the force of gravity, friction, and
so forth or it may be resultant of several forces.
Illustration 22: A ball of mass 0.5 kg is attached to the end of a cord whose length is 1.50 m. The ball is whirled in
a horizontal circular path. If the cord can withstand a maximum tension of 50.0 N, what is the maximum speed the
ball can have before the cord breaks? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The tension force in the cord provides the necessary centripetal force to the ball to move in a circular path.
v2
Because the centripetal force in this case is the force T exerted by the cord on the ball, we have T = m ; therefore,
r
Tr
solving for v, we have v =
m
The maximum speed that the ball can have corresponds to the maximum tension. Hence, we find
Tmaxr (50.0N)(1.50m)
vmax
= = = 12.2m / s
m 0.500kg
4 . 2 2 | Forces and Laws of Motion
Illustration 23: A car moves on a horizontal circular road of radius R. The speed of the car is increasing at a rate
dv
= a . The frictional coefficient between the road and tire is µ . Find the speed at which the car will skid.
dt
(JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: The net acceleration of the car is the vector sum of the centripetal acceleration and the tangential acceleration.
By Newton’s second law the friction force on the car is (mass)×(net acceleration).
Here, at any time t, the speed of the car becomes V; therefore, the net acceleration in the plane of the road is
2
v2
+ a2
R
( ) . This acceleration is provided by the frictional force. At the moment, the car will slide if it reaches
2
v2
( )
1/ 4
the speed as given by M + a2 R 2 (µ2 g2 − a2 )
µMg ⇒ v =
=
R
Illustration 24: A large mass M and a small mass m hang at the two ends of the Tcos
string that passes through a smooth tube as shown in the Figure 4.53. The small
mass m, which lies in the horizontal plane, moves around in a circular path. The T
Tsin
length of the string from the mass m to the top of the tube is l and θ is the angle
this length makes with the vertical. What should be the frequency of rotation of the
mg
small mass m so that the large mass M remains stationary? (JEE MAIN)
M
Sol: For the mass M to be stationary the tension in the string should balance the
weight of M. For mass m the horizontal component of tension in the string provides mg
the centripetal force. The vertical component of tension balances the weight of m. Figure: 4.53
The forces acting on the small mass m and the large mass M are shown in the Figure 4.56. When mass M is
stationary, then T = Mg … (i)
where T is tension in the string.
For the smaller mass, the vertical component of tension T cos θ balances mg and the horizontal component T sin θ
supplies the necessary centripetal force.
T cos θ =mg … (ii)
2
T sin θ= mrω … (iii)
ω being the angular velocity and r is the radius of horizontal circular path.
2 Mgsin θ Mgsin θ Mg
From (i) and (iii), Mg sinθ = mrω
= ⇒ ω = =
mr mlsin θ ml
P hysi cs | 4.23
1 1 ω 1 Mg
= =
Frequency of rotation= ∴ Frequency =
T ' 2π / ω 2π 2π ml
according to an inertial observer, if the block rotates uniformly it hence undergoes an acceleration of magnitude
v2
r where v is the tangential speed. The inertial observer hence concludes that this centripetal 2
acceleration is
mv
provided by the force exerted by the string T and writes as per Newton’s second law T = .
r
t
N N Noninertial observer
t
2
mv /r
mg Inertial observer mg
However, according to a non-inertial observer attached to the turntable, the block is at rest. Therefore, by applying
mv 2
Newton’s second law, this observer introduces a fictitious outward force of magnitude . According to the non-
r
mv 2
inertial observer, this outward force balances the force exerted by the string and therefore T − = 0 . In fact, the
r
centrifugal force is sufficient pseudo force only if we were analyzing the particles at rest in a uniformly rotating
frame. In contrast, if we analyze the motion of a particle that moves in the rotating frame then we may have to
assume other pseudo forces together with the centrifugal force, such forces are called Coriolis forces. The Coriolis
force, named after the 19th century French engineer-mathematician, is perpendicular not only to the velocity of the
particle but also to the axis of rotation of the frame. Once again we should be remembering that all these pseudo
forces, centrifugal or Coriolis, are needed only if the reference frame is rotating. We must know that if we work from
an inertial frame, then there is no need to apply any pseudo force. However, we should be aware of the fact that
there should not be a misconception that centrifugal force acts on a particle because the particle describes a circle.
Therefore, when we are working from a frame of reference that is rotating at a constant angular velocity ω w.r.t.
an inertial frame, then we have to obviously assume that a force m ω2 r acts radially outward on a particle of mass
m kept at the distance r from the axis of rotation. Then only we can apply Newton’s laws of motion in the rotating
frame. This radially outward pseudo force is called centrifugal force. One should be careful when using fictitious
forces to describe such physical phenomena. Remember that fictitious forces are used only in non-inertial frames
of references. Therefore, when solving problems of this nature, it is often best to use an inertial frame.
Sol: In the reference frame of cabin the particle experiences centrifugal force in the radial direction. This force can
be assumed constant for L<<R.
Let us analyze the motion of particle with respect to the table which is moving with cabin at an angular speed of
ω . Now, along the smooth groove AB centrifugal force of magnitude mω2R will act at A on the particle which can
be treated as constant from A to B as L<<R.
4 . 2 4 | Forces and Laws of Motion
∴ Acceleration of the particle along AB with respect to the cabin a = ω2R (constant)
1 1 2L
Therefore, required time “t” is given by s= ut + at2 ⇒ L= 0 + × ω2Rt2 ⇒ t=
2 2 ω2R
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
You might have seen that if the speed of a car is too high, the car starts skidding outward with the radius
of the circle increased of the necessary centripetal force is reduced.
1
centripetal force ∝ Anurag Saraf (JEE 2011, AIR 71)
r
(b) By Banking of Roads only: It is a common fact that friction is not always
reliable particularly at circular turns when in high speeds and where sharp N
turns are also involved. To avoid dependence on friction, the roads are
banked at the turn in such a way that the outer part of the road is somewhat mv
2
G
lifted compared to the inner part. r
Now, by applying Newton’s second law along the radius and the first law in
mv 2
the vertical direction, we obtain
= N sin θ = and N cos θ mg
r
Thus, from the above two equations, we obtain mg
v2 … (i) or Figure: 4.56
tan θ = =v rgtan θ … (ii)
rg
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
This is the speed at which a car does not slide down even if a track is smooth. If the track is smooth and
speed is less than rgtanθ , then the vehicle will move down so that r gets decreased and if speed is
more than this, then the vehicle will move up.
Vijay Senapathi (JEE 2011, AIR 71)
P hysi cs | 4.25
(c) By Both Friction and Banking of Road: If a vehicle is moving on a circular road which is both rough and
banked, then three forces may act on the vehicle, and out of these the first force, i.e., weight (mg) is fixed
both in magnitude and direction. The direction of the second force, i.e., normal reaction N is also fixed
(perpendicular to road) while the direction of the third force, i.e., friction f can be either inward or outward
while its magnitude can be varied up to a maximum limit ( fL = µN ). Therefore, the magnitude of normal
reaction, N and direction plus magnitude of friction, f, are so adjusted that the resultant of the three forces
2
mentioned above is mv towards the center.
r
N N
f mv
2 f
r
Nsin fcos
mg mg
Therefore, magnitude of N and direction plus magnitude of friction mainly depends on the speed of vehicle,
v. Thus, the situation varies on a case-to-case basis even though we can observe the following scenarios:
(i) Friction f is outward if the vehicle is at rest or v = 0. Because, in this case, the component of weight mg sin θ
is balanced by f.
(ii) Friction f is inward if v > rgtan θ
Let us now observe how the force of friction and normal reaction changes as speed is gradually increased.
In Figure 4.57 (a): When the car is at rest, then the force of friction is upward. However, we can resolve the forces
in any two mutually perpendicular directions. Let us resolve them in both horizontal and vertical directions.
∑ F=
v θ mg
0 ∴ Nco s θ + f sin= ... (ii)
2
In Figure 4.57 (b): Now the car is given a small speed v, so that a centripetal force mv is now required in
r
horizontal
mv 2
direction toward the center. Therefore, Eq. (i) will now become Nsin θ − f cos θ =
r
mv 2
Or we can say, in case (a) Nsinθ and f cos θ were equal while in case (b) their difference is . This can occur in
r
any of the following three ways:
(i) N increases while f remains same
(ii) N remains same while f decreases
(iii) N increases and f decreases
But only the third case is possible, i.e., N will increase but f will decrease. This is because Eq. (ii), Nco s θ + f sin θ = mg
is still has to be valid.
Therefore, to keep Nco s θ + f sin θ to be constant (=mg), N should increase but f should decrease (as θ =constant).
Now, as speed goes on increasing, force of friction first decreases But becomes zero at v= rgtanθ and then
reverses it direction. Let us show an example which illustrates this theory.
4 . 2 6 | Forces and Laws of Motion
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
This is similar to the case, when necessary centripetal force to vehicles is provided by the property of
banking. The only difference here is that the normal reaction is being replaced by the tension.
Yashwanth Sandupatla (JEE 2012, AIR 821)
Illustration 27: A particle of mass m is placed over a horizontal circular table rotating with an angular velocity ω
about a vertical axis passing through its center. The distance of the object from the axis is r. Based on the above, find
the force of friction f between the particle and the table. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: The particle is stationary in the rotating reference frame rigidly fixed to the rotating table. In the list of all the
forces acting on the particle, include the centrifugal force (pseudo force) acting on the particle radially outwards.
Let us solve this problem from both the frames. The one is a frame fixed on the ground while the other is a frame
fixed on the table itself.
4 . 2 8 | Forces and Laws of Motion
N
N = normal reaction
r f mg = weight
f = force of function
N
Figure: 4.63 mg
2
f Pseudo force =mr
From frame of reference fixed on ground (inertial)
Here, N will balance its weight and force of friction, whereas f will provide the
necessary centripetal force. mg
Figure: 4.64
Thus, f mrω2
=
Illustration 28: A simple pendulum is constructed by attaching a bob of mass m to a string of length L fixed at the upper end.
The bob oscillates in a vertical circle. It is found that the speed of the bob is v when the string makes an angle α with the vertical.
Based on the above, find the tension in the string and the magnitude of net force on the bob at that instant.
(JEE MAIN)
Sol: Apply Newton’s second law on the bob in two perpendicular directions. O
One along the string and the other along the tangent to its circular path, i.e.
along the perpendicular to the string.
The forces acting on the bob are:
T
(a) Tension, T and
(b) Weight, mg
As observe that the bob moves in a circle of radius L with center at O, it is
mg sin mg cos
mv 2
imperative that a centripetal force of magnitude is required toward O. mg
L
However, this force will be provided by the resultant of T and mg cos α . Figure: 4.65
Thus,
mv 2 v2
(i) T − mgcos α = or T m gcos α +
=
L L
2 4
mv 2 2 2 v
(ii) =
Fnet 2
(mgsin α ) + = m g sin α + 2
L
L
P hysi cs | 4.29
Illustration 29: Suppose that a hemispherical bowl of radius R is rotating about its axis of symmetry which is kept
vertical. Further, a small ball kept in the bowl rotates with the bowl but without slipping on its surface. If the surface
of the bowl is smooth and the angle made by the radius through the ball with the vertical is 5gR , then find the
angular speed at which the bowl is rotating. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The horizontal component of normal contact force acting on the ball
will provide the necessary centripetal acceleration to move in a circular
path. The vertical component of normal contact force acting on the ball will
balance its weight. R
Let us assume that ω be the angular speed of rotation of the bowl. Now, the N
Ar
two forces acting on the ball are r
(a) Normal reaction, N and mg
(b) Weight, mg Figure: 4.66
We know that the ball is rotating in a circle of radius r (=R sinα ) with center
A at an angular speed ω .
Thus, Nsin α= mrω2= mRω2 sin α … (i)
and Ncos α =mg … (ii)
1 ω2R g
Thus, by dividing Eq. (i) by (ii), we obtain = ∴ ω=
cos α g R cos α
N
= m g2 + ω4R 2 sin2 θ − 2g ω2 Rsin2 θ =mg’
g'
where = g2 + ω4R 2 sin2 θ − 2g ω2 Rsin2 θ 2
C mr
Also, it is obvious that the direction of the resultant makes an angle α with
P
Illustration 30: A body weighs 98 N on a spring balance at the North Pole. What will be its weight recorded on the
same scale if it is shifted to the equator? Use g=GM/R2=9.8 m/s2 and the radius of the earth R=6400 km.
(JEE MAIN)
Sol: At the equator due to the rotation of earth the body experiences centrifugal force, directed away from the
center of earth. So the apparent weight at equator is less than the actual weight at the poles.
At poles, we know that the apparent weight is the same as the true weight. Thus, 98 N = mg = m ( 9.8 m/s2)
or, m = 10 kg. At the equator, however, the apparent weight is mg′ = mg – mω2 R .
2π rad
It is given that the radius of the earth is 6400 km and hence the angular speed is=
ω = 7.27 × 10−5 rad / s
24 × 60 × 60 s
Thus, mg′= 98N – (10 kg) (7.27 × 10−5 s−1 )2 (6400 km) = 97.66 N.
P hysi cs | 4.31
about electric and magnetic forces later on.) Generally, it acts in the downward
direction (by definition!) and is equal to the mass of the system times the local
gravitational field strength g—commonly, but misleadingly called “the acceleration
due to gravity.”
The example at right. Here, we find two objects in contact with the system—one Figure: 4.72
being the “surface” and other one “pusher.” Thus, we find a total of four forces—
the normal force, the frictional force (from the surface), the push (from the
pusher), and the weight (due to the only force—so far—that acts without needing
to touch—gravity.)
Step 4: Draw an “FBD.” Now, the system may be represented by a simple circle or square; however, we want to
focus our attention on the forces on and the resulting acceleration of the system. Now, draw each force with its tail
at the surface of the system extending in the proper direction. Further, include the acceleration vector as well, but
distinguish it from the force vectors by drawing it in a different way.
Example at the right. In this example, note that the normal force is directed perpendicular to the surface (not shown
in the FBD), the frictional force is directed opposite to the direction that the system slips with respect to the surface,
the push is in its given direction, and the weight is directed “down.” We also show the acceleration as a different-
looking vector that is directed upward along the plane, but we do not know this for certain; it may be directed
downward along the incline. To keep us remind ourselves of this fact, we put a “(?)” next to the acceleration vector.
Step 5: Now, pick a coordinate system and hence determine the angles that the forces and accelerations make
with the coordinate axes. It is usually “clever” and preferable to pick a coordinate system that minimizes the
number of unknown vectors that will have to be broken down into components. The answers you obtain thereafter
must and will be independent of your choice of coordinate system, but clever choices will help us to arrive at
equations that are more easy to solve. However, you may need to do some geometrical work on another sheet of
paper to figure out how the angles are related to those given in the problem statement.
Example at right. In this example, we have chosen a coordinate system that requires us to determine the components
of only the weight and the push—the two forces about which we know a lot. These two forces lie at the angle theta
(given in the problem statement as 20 degrees) from one of the axis directions.
Step 6: Now, write Newton’s second law. This law is the basic physical principle you are applying; i.e., the “starting
point” for your calculations. Just proceed to do it! Example: ∑ F = ma
Step 7: Thence, apply the basic equation to this problem. Now, simply write what the “sum
of forces”
is in this case.
If the acceleration is zero, then use that fact to simplify the equation too. Example: n + f + P + W = ma
Step 8: Now, continue by writing the component equations. This is simply a matter of recognizing that every vector
equation is shorthand for two (or, more generally, three) scalar equations. Then, simply rewrite the vector equation
for each component direction with each vector quantity rewritten as the corresponding component. Examples:
x : nx + fx + Px + Wx =
max ;and ny + fy + Py + Wy =
may
Step 9: Now, determine what each component is in terms of the vector magnitude and trigonometric functions of
the associated angles. In this step, it is imperative that we explicitly indicate the signs of the vector components.
This is also a good time to explicitly substitute “mg” for “W” if you really happen to know the mass of the system.
Example: Notice that the normal force is purely in the +y direction, the frictional force is purely in the –x direction, the
push has a positive x-component and a negative y-component, the weight has negative x- and y-components, and the
assumed acceleration is purely in the +x direction. Thus, we have: x : 0 + ( − f) + ( + Pcos θ) + ( − mgsin θ)= m( + a)
y : ( + n) + 0 + ( − Psin θ) + ( − mgcos θ) =m(0)
Step 10: To conclude this procedure, as a final step, simplify the resulting equations and figure out where to go
from here. This is the end of “the method.” Example: P cos θ − f − mgsin θ = ma n − P sin θ − mgcos θ = 0
P hysi cs | 4.33
FORMULAE SHEET
(a) =
F1 Fcos
= θ component of F along AC F2 Fsin=
= θ component of F perpendicular to AC
F B
F₂
Figure: 4.75
F₁ A C
Figure: 4.73
dp d(mv)
F =
(b) =
dt dt
T
Fnet
(c) ∑
= F F=
net ma or=a
m
∑ Fx=
FP =ma
0 ⇒ T sin θ= ma
∑ Fy= 0 ⇒ T cos θ= mg mg
a Figure: 4.74
θ =tan−1
g
(d) Impulse = change in momentum F∆=
t mv f − mVo
fmax
(e) µ = fmax A
R
Force of fK
Friction
fS
O Force Applied, F
A
(f) fmax = flimiting = µsR R
fm O
Figure: 4.76
fmax
(g) Angle of Friction: tan λ = =µ or
= λ tan−1 (µ )
R
(h) Pseudo force: F = –ma; where m = mass of the object, a = acceleration of the reference frame
(i) A particle in circular motion may have two types of velocities as listed hereunder.
(i) Linear velocity v and
(ii) Angular velocity ω .These two are related by the equation v = R ω (R = radius of circular path)
( j) Acceleration of a particle in a circular motion may have two components as listed hereunder.
dv dv dω
(k) = = Rα where α = angular acceleration = rate of change of angular velocity =
dt dt dt
The normal or radial component, also known as centripetal acceleration is toward the center and is given by
v2
an = Rω2 =
R
(l) Net acceleration of a particle is the resultant of two perpendicular components, an and at . Hence,
= a an2 + a2t
(m) Tangential component at is responsible for change of speed of a particle. This can be positive, negative or
zero, depending upon the situation whether the speed of the particle is increasing, decreasing or remains
constant.
a
(n) In general, in any curvilinear motion, direction of instantaneous velocity is
tangential to the path, while acceleration may assume any direction. If we
resolve the acceleration in two normal directions, one parallel to velocity and
v
another perpendicular to velocity, then the first component is at while the
other is an .
Figure: 4.77
a.v dv d v
Thus, at = component of a along v = acos θ = = = = rate of change of speed.
v dt dt
v2
Further, an = component of ∴ a1x = a2x = a3x perpendicular to v = a2 − a2t =
R
Here, v is the speed of the particle at that instant and R is called the radius of curvature to the curvilinear path
at that point.
(o) In at = a cos θ , if θ is acute, at will be positive and speed increases. However, if θ is obtuse at will be negative
and speed will decrease. If θ is 90° , at is zero and speed will remain constant.
(p) Now, depending upon the value of at , circular motion may be of three types as listed hereunder.
at
v v at
v
a
an a an a an
Figure: 4.78
(iii) Circular motion of decreasing speed, in which at is negative.
P hysi cs | 4.35
Solved Examples
JEE Main/Boards Sol: In the first case, the blocks A and B move together.
The friction force will be exerted on the bottom surface
Example 1: A spherical shell is of B. In the second case only block B moves. The friction
resting against the vertical wall force will be exerted both on bottom and top surface
which makes an angle 30° with of block B.
30°
the vertical as shown in the
Figure. Determine the normal Let us consider free diagrams of A and B as two separate
reaction at the wall and tension systems shown as follows:
in the string. NA NA
A
30°
F B
T sin 30° N
(a) =
WA m
=Ag 4 N ; WB m
= =Bg 8 N
mA gsin=
θ (mA + mB )gsin θ x₁
a₁ a₂
x₂
mA 20 3 2
=⇒a =
gsin θ = (10) 3 m / s x₃ x₃
m
A + mB 20 + 20 5
1
1 2s 2 1
(a)s = at2 ; t = = 2 × = 0.82 M₂a₃
2 a 3
a₁ a₂
(b) T = mB a = 20 × 3 = 60N.
N₁ N₂
Sol: Area under the force-time graph and the time axis a₃
is equal to the change in momentum. x
M₃ y
F
(N)
M₃g
2N
t =3 t =4 Sol: To find the constraint relation between the
t =2 t (sec) acceleration of the blocks, measure the distances of
blocks from the stationary pulleys. Draw the FBD for
–3N each block. For M1 and M2 apply Newton’s second law
in horizontal direction. For M3 apply Newton’s second
(a) Area under the curve from t = 0→2 sec. law in vertical direction.
A1 = 2 × 2 = 4N.sec. Area from t = 2→3 sec. (a) Forces of friction f, tension T and reaction are marked
for the blocks M1 ,M2 and M3 .
1
A2 = × 1 × 2 = 1N.sec. Now, take the horizontal line AB as the reference line,
2
i.e., x-axis and vertically downward as y-axis.
Area from t = 3→4 sec.
If x1 , x2 and x3 are the lengths of the strings, then
1
A3 =− × 1 × 3 =−1.5N.sec.
2 x1 + x2 + 2x3 =
L where L is the constant length of the
string.
Therefore, the net impulse = 4 + 1 – 1.5 = 3.5 N sec
Now, differentiating twice, a1 + a2 + 2a3 =
0
=Pƒ impulse +=
Pi 3.5 + 0 = 3.5 N.s or kg.m / s
As a3 is increasing, a1 and a2 are decreasing.
(b) Impulse from t = 0→3 sec
P hysi cs | 4.37
Thus, the constraint relation shows that (a) Let L be the length of the string. Let x1 be the length
a1 + a2 =
2a3 of the vertical string and x2 be the length of each string
in the horizontal direction. The constraint relation for the
(b) The equations of motion are given as follows string of length L is x1 + 2x2 = L Now, by differentiating
twice, a1 + 2a2 = 0
For M3 , M3g − T − T =M3a3 ...(i) ... (i)
If a1 is +ve, then a2 is –ve,
For M1 , T − µM1g =M1a1 ....(ii) ... (ii)
a a1
For M2 , T − µM2g =M2a2 ...(iii) a1 − 2a2 =0 or a2 = =
... (iii) 2 2
a
a1 + a2 =
2a3
...(iv) ... (iv) Let a1 = a be the acceleration of M and be the
2
acceleration of 2M.
2T
Dividing (i) by M3 , g − a3
= ∴ Mg – T = Ma … (i)
M3
T a
=2T
2M × ...(ii) ... (ii)
Dividing (ii) by M1 , − µg = a1 2
M1
Ma
=2 T Ma
= or T
T 2
Dividing (iii) by M2 , − µg = a2
M2 Now, by substituting for T in (i)
Using (iv), a1 + a2 =
2a3
Ma 3Ma 2g
Mg − = Ma; = Mg; ∴ a=
T T 4T 2 2 3
− µg + − µg
= 2g −
M1 M2 M3 Ma 2gM Mg
(b)=
T = =
2 2×3 3
1 1 4
T + + = 2µg + 2g
= 2g µ + 1 5Mg
M1 M2 M3 (c) Force on clamp
= C (2 T)2 + (T)
= 2
5T
= .
3
2g(µ + 1) (µ + 1)g
T= = Example 7: Masses M1 ,M2 and M3 are connected by
1 1 4 1 1 2
+ + + + strings of negligible mass which pass over massless and
M1 M2 M3 2M1 2M2 M3
frictionless pulleys P1 and P2 as shown in the Figure.
The masses move such that the portion of the string
Example 6: Masses M and 2M are connected through between P1 and P2 is parallel to the incline and the
pulleys A and B with strings as shown in the Figure. portion of the string between P2 and M3 is horizontal.
Assume that both the pulleys and the strings are light The masses M2 and M3 are 0.4 kg each and the coefficient
and all the surfaces are frictionless. of kinetic friction between masses and surfaces is 0.25.
(a) Find the acceleration of the block of mass M. The inclined plane makes an angle of 37° with the
horizontal, however, the mass M1 moves with uniform
(b) Find the tension in the string.
velocity downwards. Now, find
(c) Calculate the force exerted on the clamp.
(a) The tension in the horizontal portion of the string
Sol: To find the constraint relation between accelerations
of blocks M and 2M, measure all distances from the (b) The
= mass M1 g 9.8=(
ms−2 ,sin 37° 3 / 5 . )
fixed pulley A. Apply Newton’s second law in horizontal P1
direction for block 2M and Newton’s second law in T1
M2 M
vertical direction for block M. 2 gc
= 0.25
T1 os
a₂ T2
x₂ Mg P2
M3
2M T2 mMg
B T M1 37°
T A a₁
Clamp T x₁ Sol: Apply Newton’s first law for each of the blocks as
the velocity of each block is constant.
M
Let T1 be the tension between M1 and M2 and T2 be
Mg the tension between M2 and M3 .
4 . 3 8 | Forces and Laws of Motion
Let µ be the coefficient of kinetic friction. Then Example 9: In the adjacent Figure, masses of A, B and
(a) T2 =
µM3g =
0.25 × 4.0 × 9.8 =
9.8N C are 1 kg, 3 kg and 2 kg, respectively. Find (a) the
acceleration of the system and (b) tension in the string.
(b) T1 = M1g 2
Neglect friction ( g = 10m/ s )
T1 − T2 − µM2gcos θ − M2gsin θ = 0
4 3
M1g − 9.8 − 0.25 × 4 × 9.8 × − 4 × 9.8 × =0
5 5
60° 30°
4 12
M1 × 9.8 = 9.8 + 9.8 × + 9.8 × =0
5 5 Sol: Draw the FBD of each block and apply Newton’s
4 12 21 second law along the incline plane for each block.
∴ M =1 + + = = 4.2 kg
1 5 5 5 (a) In this case, the net pulling force
5 1
=T1 =
2
mg; T2
2
mg JEE Advanced/Boards
Example 11: A car is moving in a circular horizontal Example 1: In the system of two pulleys connected as
track of radius 10 m with a constant speed of 10 m/s. A shown in the figure, M1 = 4M2 and mass M1 is 20 cm
plumb bob is suspended from roof by a light rigid rod above the ground, whereas mass M2 is lying on the
of length 1 m. What is the angle made by the rod with ground. Find the distance covered by when the system
the track? is released. (g = 10 m / s2 ).
Sol: In the reference frame of the car the bob will
experience a centrifugal force radially outwards. The A
vector sum of the three forces acting on the bob (the
weight, the tension and the centrifugal force) will be T T
equal to zero.
a B
The different forces acting on the bob are shown in T
the Figure. Resolving the force along the length and x₂
perpendicular to the rod, we have
2a
T M₁
20 cm M₂ x₁
2
mv
R Sol: To find the constraint relation between accelerations
of M1 and M2, measure their distances from fixed pulley
A. Apply Newton’s second law in vertical direction for
each block.
mg M1 = 4M2
the strings around the pulley B will move through half Let a, b and c be the respective accelerations of masses
the distance as compared to that of A. A (8 kg), B (4 kg), and C (16 kg) such that a and b
g are downward and c is upward. Let x1 and x2 be the
∴ M1g − 2T = M1a T − M2g =M2 × 2a or a = .
4 distances of strings from axial line passing through P
Therefore, the time taken for M1 to reach the ground at and Q to the blocks A and B, respectively. Let x3 be the
1 2 1 2 length of the string from the axial line PQ to the center
20 cm distance s =+
ut at =at of the movable pulley. If L is the length of the string,
2 2
then the constraint relation gives
2s 2 × 20 × 4 20
or
= t = s
= x1 + x2 + x3 + x3 =L =cons tant
a 10 × 100 100
dx1 dx2 dx3
16 4 Differentiating + +2 0
=
or= = = 0.45 dt dt dt
100 10
d2 x1 d2 x2 d2 x3
Distance travelled by M2 Differentiating again + +2 0
=
1 1 10 dt2 dt2 dt2
x1 = × (2a) × t2 = × 2 × × (0.4)2 = 0.4m
2 2 4 or a + b −=
2c 0 or a=
+ b 2c.
Velocity of M2 after 0.4 seconds =v=u+2at
As tension T is equal in all the strings as it passes over
10 smooth pulleys, equations for the strings are as follows:
= 0 + 2× × 0.4 ; v = 2ms−1
4
Distance covered by M2 with velocity 2ms-1upwards 8g − T = 8a ... (i)
before coming to rest 2T − 16 g = 16c ... (ii)
v2 (2)2 4g − T = 4b ... (iii)
x=
2 = = 0.2 m
2g 2 × 10 a + b = 2c ... (iv)
From Eqs. (ii) and (iv), we obtain
Distance covered by M2 before coming to rest
=x =x1 + x2 =0.4 + 0.2 =0.6 m 2 T − 16 g =8 × 2c =8a + 8b
By substituting a and b from Eqs (i) and (iii)
Example 2: Masses 4 kg and 8 kg are attached to the
free end of an inextensible light string passing over two 2 T − 16 g = 8g − T + 8g − 2T = 16g − 3T
fixed pulleys as shown in the Figure. The movable pulley 32
carries a mass of 16 kg. Assuming frictionless motion,= 5T 32g = or T g.
5
calculate the acceleration of the three masses.
Now, from Eq (i)
32 32 g
8a = 8g − T = 8g − = ;a =
P Q 5 5 5
From Eq (iii),
a b
x3 T T T 32g −12g
x3 4b = 4g − T = 4g − =
x1 x2 5 5
g 3g
−
8kg 4kg a+b 5 5 g
c= = ∴ c =−
A c B 2 2 5
16kg ∴ 16 kg and 8 kg go downward and 4 kg go upward.
C
Sol: To find the constraint relation between accelerations Example 3: A block of mass m is pulled up by means
of blocks measure their distances from the fixed pulleys. of a thread up and inclined plane forming an angle α
Apply Newton’s second law in vertical direction for each with the horizontal. The coefficient of friction is equal
block. to µ. Find the angle β which the thread must form with
the inclined plane for the tension of the thread to be
minimum. Also, find the value of minimum tension.
P hysi cs | 4.41
T which is negative.
∴ For minimum T,
= β tan−1 µ
The value of Tmin can be found by writing β in terms of
µ.
1 1
= cos β = ,sin β
2
1+µ 1 + µ2
Sol: Draw the FBD of the block. Apply Newton’s first
law along the perpendicular to the inclined plane and mg ( sin α + µ cos α )
Newton’s second law along the inclined plane for the ∴ Tmin =
cos β + µ sin β
block.
T mg ( sin α + µ cos α ) mg ( sin α + µ cos α )
N = =
T cos 1 µ2 1 + µ2
+
T sin
1 + µ2 1 + µ2 1 + µ2
f mg ( sin α + µ cos α )
mg sin =
mg cos 1 + µ2
mg
When the body is just about to move up, the force of Example 4: Find the constraint relation in the Figure.
friction f is acting downward. If N is the normal reaction,
the force of friction f is equal to µN. Further, T and mg
can be resolved into rectangular components parallel y₃
and perpendicular to the inclined plane as shown in the
Figure. x₁ y₂
y₁
a₁
∴ T cos
= β mgsin α + µN ....(i)
N+ T=
sin β mgcos α=
or N mgcos α − T sin β m₁
T cos
= β mgsin α + µmgcos α − µT sin β m₂
or T cos β + µT=
sin β mg(sin α + µ cos α ) Sol: To find the constraint relation between accelerations
of blocks measure their distances from stationary points.
mg(sin α + µ cos α ) For block m1 measure the distance from fixed pulley on
T=
cos β + µ sin β the wedge. For block m2 measure the distance from the
fixed roof.
For T to be minimum, cos β + µ sin β should be
maximum. Since length of each string is constant
d x1 + (y 2 − y 3 ) + y 2 =
c1 ......(i) ... (i)
∴ (cos β + µ sin β) = 0
dβ y1 − y 2 =
c2 ⇒ 2 y 1 − 2 y 2 =
2c2 ......(ii) ... (ii)
By adding (i) and (ii), we obtain
1+² (x1 − y 3 + 2 y1 ) = c1 + 2c2
Example 6: A smooth ring A of mass m can slide on a Mg-T = Macosθ ... (ii)
fixed horizontal rod. A string tied to the ring passes over Now, consider the ring as the system. The forces acting
a fixed pulley B and carries a block C of mass M(= 2m) as on the ring are
shown in the Figure. At an instant the string between the
ring and pulley makes an angle θ with the rod. (a) Show (i) Mg downward due to gravity,
that, if the ring slides with a speed v, the block descends (ii) N upward due to the rod,
with speed v cos θ . (b) With what acceleration will the
ring start moving if the system is released from rest with (iii) T along the string due to string.
θ= 30° ? Taking components along the rod, the equation of
motion of the ring is
Tcos θ =ma.
......(ii) ... (ii)
From (i) and (ii)
P hysi cs | 4.43
Suppose the acceleration of m1 is a0 toward the right. Thus m3g − T 2= m3 (a0 + a) .....(iv) ... (iv)
That will also be the downward acceleration of the We want to calculate a0 , so we shall eliminate T and a
pulley B because the string connecting m1 and B is from (ii), (iii), and (iv).
constant in length. This implies that the decrease in
the separation between m2 and B equals the increase Putting T from (ii) in (iii) and (iv),
in the separation between m3 and B. Therefore, the m2g − m1 a0 2 m1a0
upward acceleration of m2 with respect to B equals the a0 − a = = g−
m2 2m2
downward acceleration of m3 with respect to B. Let this
acceleration be a. m3g − m1 a0 2 m1a0
and a0 + a = = g−
The acceleration of with respect to the ground = a0 − a m3 2m3
(downward) and the acceleration of with respect to the
ground = a0 + a (downward). ma 1 1
2g − 1 0
Adding, 2a0 = +
These accelerations will be used in Newton’s laws. Let 2 m2 m3
the tension be T in the upper string and T′ in the lower
ma 1 1
string. Consider the motion of the pulley B. or, g− 1 0
a0 = +
4 m2 m3
The forces on this light pulley are
(a) T upward by the upper string and m 1 1
or, a0 1 + 1 + = g
(b) 2T′ downward by the lower string. 4 m2 m3
T
Example 8: All the surfaces shown in the figure. are
assumed to be frictionless. The block of mass m slides
B
on the prism which in turn slides backward on the
T’ horizontal surface. Find the acceleration of the smaller
m₂ block with respect to the prism.
a ₀-a m₃
a ₀+a
4 . 4 4 | Forces and Laws of Motion
(ii) N normal to the incline (by the block), and T2cos θ= mω2R − T1cos θ .....(ii)
(iii) N′ upward (by the horizontal surface). Multiply (i) by cos θ ,
Horizontal components give, T2 sin θ cos θ= T1 sin θ cos θ + mgcos θ
Nsin θ Ma0=
= or, N Ma0 sin θ. .....(iii) ... (iii) Multiply (ii) by sin θ ,
Ma0 T2 sin θ cos θ =mω2 R sin θ − T1 sin θ cos θ
Replacing in (ii) + Ma0=
sin θ mgcos θ
sin θ Adding, 2T2 sin θ cos θ= mω2 R sin θ + mgcos θ
mgsin θ cos θ
or, a0 =
M + msin2 θ mω2 R sin θ mgcos θ
=2T2 +
sin θ cos θ sin θ cos θ
mgsin θ cos2 θ (M+ m)gsin θ
From (i),=a0 + gsin θ = 0.4 × π2 × 0.6 0.4 × 10 0.4 × π2
M + msin θ2 ω2 R mg
M + msin2 θ = m= + = +5
+ 0.8
cos θ sin θ (0.6)2 × 0.6 (0.6)2
P hysi cs | 4.45
2T
=2 10.97 +=
5 15.97 ∴=
T2 7.99 N ≈ 8 N = cos α + µ2 cos=
α cos α(1 + µ2 )
Subtracting the above mentioned terms, 1 + µ2 1 + µ2 1 + µ2
= = = = 1 + µ2
2
mω R mg sec α 1 + tan2 α 1+µ 2
2T1
= − = 10.97 −=
5 5.97
cos θ sin θ
mgsin θ + µ mgcos θ
T1 2.99 ≈ 3 N
= ∴ Tmin =
1 + µ2
Example 10: A block of mass m is pulled by means of
T
a thread up an inclined plane forming an angle θ with Example 11: A metal ring of
the horizontal. The coefficient of friction is µ . Find the mass m and radius R is placed
inclination of the thread with the horizontal so that on a smooth horizontal table A
tension in the thread is minimum. What is the value of and is set rotating about its own
/2
the minimum tension? axis in such a way that each part O
/2 C
of the ring moves with velocity
Sol: Draw the FBD of the block. Apply Newton’s second
v. Based on the above facts, find
law along the direction of the incline and Newton’s first B
the tension in the ring.
law along the direction perpendicular to the incline.
Let the mass moves up the plane with acceleration a. Sol: Each small part of the ring T
will experience a centrifugal
Writing the equation of motion, we obtain
force radially outwards. So the ring will tend to expand,
R + T=
sin α mgcos θ i.e. the radius and circumference will tend to increase. By
=R mgcos θ − T sin α virtue of its elasticity the ring will oppose its expansion.
… (i)
So each part of the ring will experience a force of pull or
T cos α − mgsin θ − f = ma ... (ii) tension from the other part.
where t is the force of friction Consider a small part ACB of the ring that subtends an
f = µ(mgcos θ − Tsin α ) … (iii) angle ∆θ at the center as shown in the Figure. Let the
tension in the ring be T.
Substituting the value of f from Eq (iii)
The forces on this elementary portion ACB are:
in Eq (ii) T cos α − mgsin θ − µ mgcos θ + µ Tsin α = ma
(i) Tension T by the part of the ring left to A
T(cos α + msin α=
) ma + mgsin θ + µ mgcos θ
(ii) Tension T by the part of the ring right to B
ma + mgsin θ + µ mgcos θ … (iv)
T= (iii) Weight ( ∆m )g
cos α + µ sin α
(iv) Normal force N by the table
For T to be minimum (cos α + µ sin α ) should be
d As the elementary portion ACB moves in a circle of
maximum (cos α + µ sin α ) = 0 radius R at constant speed v, its acceleration toward the
dα
( ∆m) v 2
d2 centre is Resolving the forces along the radius
(cos α + µ sin α ) = − ve R
dα 2 CO
2
d ∆θ ∆θ v … (i)
(cos α + µ sin α ) = − sin α + mcos α = 0 T cos 90° − + T cos 90° − = ∆m R
dα 2 2
= tan−1 (µ )
µ tan α α
=
∆θ v2
2
d 2T sin = ∆m ... (ii)
It can be shown that is negative. 2 R
dα2 Thus the length of the part ACB = R ∆θ . The mass
T will have minimum value when a = 0 and m
per unit length of the ring is
=α tan−1 (µ ) . From Eq. (iv) 2πR
mgsin θ + µ mgcos θ ∴ Mass of this portion ACB, ∆m =R∆θm m∆θ
Tmin = =
cos α + µ sin α 2πR 2π
cos α + µ sin=
α cos α + µ(µ cos α )
4 . 4 6 | Forces and Laws of Motion
JEE Main/Boards
Q.2 State the laws of motion. Q.14 Two bodies of masses 11 kg and 11.5 kg are
connected by a long light string passing over a
Q.3 A cricket player lowers his hands while catching a smooth pulley. Calculate velocity and height ascended/
ball. Why? descended by each body at the end of 4s.
Y
Q.4 An impulsive force of 100N acts on a body for 1 s. Q
What is the change in its linear momentum?
X
O P
Q.5 A force of 5N changes the velocity of a body from
10 ms-1 to 20 ms-1 in 5 sec. How much force is required
to bring about the same change in 2 sec? Q.15 A rope of mass 0.5 kg is pulling a block of mass
10 kg under the action of force of 31.5 N. If the block
Q.6 State and explain Newton’s first law of motion. is resting on a smooth horizontal surface, calculate the
force of reaction exerted by the block on the rope.
Q.7 What are the three types of inertia? Give at least
two examples of each type. Q.16 Two bodies of masses 4 kg and 3 kg respectively
are connected by a light string passing over a smooth
Q.8 State and explain Newton’s first law of motion. frictionless pulley. Calculate the acceleration of the
Hence deduce the relation F = ma, where the symbols masses and tension in the string.
have their usual meaning.
Q.17 Two bodies whose masses are m1=50 kg and
Q.9 Define absolute and gravitational units of force. m2=50 kg are tied by a light string and are placed on
What are the dimensions of force? a frictionless horizontal surface. When m1 is pulled by
a force F, an acceleration of 5 ms-2 is produced in both
Q.10 Mention some of the consequences of the the bodies. Calculate the value of F. What is the tension
Newton’s second law of motion. in the string 1?
Q.18 See Figure where in Q.26 A cyclist is riding with a speed of 27 kmh-1. As he
1m
a mass of 6 kg is approaches a circular turn on the road of radius 80.0 m,
T₁
suspended by a rope 50N
he applies brakes and reduces his speed at a constant
P
of length 2 m from the rate of 0.5 ms-1 per second. Find the magnitude of the
ceiling. A force of 50N 1m net acceleration of the cyclist.
T₂
in the horizontal
direction is applied at W Q.27 A particle moves in a circle of radius 4.0 cm
midpoint P of the rope, clockwise at constant seed of 2 cms-1. If x and y
60N
as shown. What is the are unit acceleration vectors along X-axis and Y-axis,
(a)
angle the rope makes respectively, find the acceleration of the particle at the
with the vertical in instant half-way between P and Q in the Figure.
T₂
equilibrium?
T₁
(take g = 10 ms–2) W Q.28 A cyclist is riding with a speed of 36 kmh-1. As he
P 50N
Neglect mass of the approaches a circular turn on the road of radius 140 m,
rope. T₂ he applies brakes and reduces his speed at the constant
60N rate of 1 ms−2 . What is the magnitude and direction of
(b) (c) the net acceleration of the cyclist on the circular turn?
If it starts from rest, what would be its position at time (A) Both the scales will read 10 kg
t = 5s?
(B) Both the scales will read 5 kg.
Q.23 A projectile is fired vertically from the earth’s surface (C) The upper scales will read 10 kg and the lower zero.
with an initial velocity of 10 km/s. Neglecting atmospheric
retardation, how far above the surface of the earth would (D) The readings may be anything but their sum will be
it go? Take the earth’s radius as 6400 km. 10 kg
Q.24 Two balls of mass m each are hung side by side Q.2 A block is kept on the floor of an elevator at rest.
two long threads, each of length l. If the distance The elevator starts descending with an acceleration of
between the upper end is r then find the distance r′ 12 m / s2 . Find the displacement of the block during the
2
between the centres of the ball in terms of g, r, l and m. first 0.2 s after the start. Take g=10 m / s .
(A) 10 cm (B) 20 cm (C) 30 cm (D) 40 cm
Circular Motion
Q.3 A body of mass m is kept on a rough horizontal
Q.25 Calculate the centripetal acceleration of a point on surface (friction coefficient=µ). A person is trying to pull
the equator of earth due to the rotation of earth about the body by applying a horizontal force but the body is
its own axis. not moving. The force by the surface on the body is F
Radius of earth = 6400 km. where
4 . 4 8 | Forces and Laws of Motion
(A) F=mg (B) F=µmg Q.9 Two masses m and m’ are tied with a thread passing
over a pulley. M’ is on a frictionless horizontal surface
(C) mg ≤ F ≤ mg 1 + µ2 (D) mg ≥ F ≥ mg 1 − µ2 and m is hanging freely. If acceleration due to gravity
is g, the acceleration of m’ in this arrangement will be
Q.4 Which of the following case correctly represents the (A) g (B) mg/(m + m’)
applied force on a string under tension. End of string is
represented with dot. (C) mg/m’ (D) mg/(m-m’)
F FF F
Q.10 A body of mass 60 kg is dragged with just enough
(A) (A) (B) (B) force to start moving on a rough surface with coefficients
F F of static and kinetic frictions 0.5 and 0.4 respectively.
F F
On continuing (g=9.8 m/s2) the same force what is the
acceleration:
(C) (C) (D) (D)
(A) 0.98 m/s2 (B) 9.8 m/s2
(C) 0.54 m/s2 (D) 5.292 m/s2
Q.15 When a bird of weight W alights on a stretched Q.21 A uniform chain of length is placed on a rough
wire, the tension T in the wire may be: table with length n hanging over the edge (n< ). If
(A)>W/2 (B)=W (C)<W (D) None of these. the chain just begins to slide off the table by itself from
this position, the coefficient of friction between chain
and table is
Q.16 A block of mass 3kg is at rest 3kg 1 n 1 1−n
on a rough inclined plane as shown (A) (B) (C) (D)
n 1−n n+1 1+n
in the Figure. The magnitude of net
force exerted by the surface on the 30°
block will be Circular Dynamics
(A) 26N (B) 19.5N (C) 10N (D) 30N Single Correct Question
Q.17 With what minimum acceleration can a fireman Q.22 A particle moves in a circle of radius R with a
slides down a rope whose breaking strength is two third constant speed under a centripetal force F. The work
of his weight? done F in completing a full circle is:
Fo Fo
m
P mb
v(t) v(t)
(A) (B)
=P1 mg ( sin θ − µ cos θ ) =
to P2 mg ( sin θ + µ cos θ ) the t t
f f
Q.16 A car is moving in a circular horizontal track of Q.21 A point particle of mass m, moves along the
radius 10m with a constant speed of 10m/s. A plumb uniformly rough track PQR as shown in the figure. The
bob is suspended from the roof of the car by a light coefficient of friction, between the particle and the
rigid rod. The angle made by the rod with the vertical is rough track equals µ. The particle is released, from rest,
(Take g=10/s2) (1992) from the point P and it comes to rest at a point R. The
energies, lost by the ball, over the parts, PQ and QR, of
(A) Zero (B) 30
o
(C) 45o
(D) 60o
the track, are equal to each other, and no energy is lost
when particle changes direction from PQ to QR. (2016)
Q.17 A ball of mass (m) 0.5 kg is attached
to the end of a string having length (L) The values of the coefficient of friction µ and the distance
0.5m. The ball is rotated on a horizontal L x(=QR), are, respectively close to :
circular path about vertical axis. The (A) 0.2 and 3.5 m (B) 0.29 and 3.5 m
maximum tension that the string can
bear is 324 N. The maximum possible (C) 0.29 and 6.5 m (D) 0
m
value of angular velocity of ball (in rad/s)
3kg − ms−1 (2011)
(A) 9 (B) 18 (C) 27 (D) 36
JEE Advanced/Boards
Q.10 A man of mass m has fallen into a ditch of width Q.15 At the moment t=0 the force F=at is applied to a
d and two of his friends are slowly pulling him out small body of mass m resting on a smooth horizontal
using a light rope and two fixed pulleys as shown in plane (a) is constant). The permanent direction of this
Figure. Show that the force (assumed equal for both the force forms as angle α with the horizontal. Find (a) The
friends) exerted by each friend on the rope increases as velocity of the body at the moment of its breaking off
the man move up. Find the force when the man is at a the plane; (b) The distance traversed by the body up to
depth h. this moment.
F
h
m
l C
Q.13 Two touching bars 1 and 2 are placed on an
inclined plane forming an angle α with the horizontal
shown in Figure. The masses of the bars are equal to Q.18 The inclined plane of forms an angle α=30o with
m1 and m2 and the coefficients of friction between the horizontal. The mass ratio. The coefficient of friction
the inclined plane and the bars are equal to k1 and k 2 between the body and inclined plane is equal to k-0.10.
respectively, with k1 > k 2 . The masses of the pulley and the threads are negligible.
Find the magnitude and the direction of acceleration of
Find (a) The force of interaction
the body m2 when the system of masses starts moving.
of the bars in the process of 2
motion; (b) The minimum value 1 m1
of the angle α at which the bars
m2
start sliding down.
Q.14 A small body A starts sliding down from the top Q.19 As shown in the Figure blocks of masses M/2, M
of fixed wedge (as shown in the Figure) whose base is and M/2 are connected through a light string as shown,
equal to l=2.10 m. The coefficient of friction between pulleys are light and smooth. Friction is only between
the body and the wedge surface is k=0.140. At what block C and floor. System is released from rest. Find the
value of the angle α will the time of sliding be the least? acceleration of blocks A, B and C and tension in the
string. C
A 2
B M/
= tan
M 2
A
l 2
M/
P hysi cs | 4.55
Q.20 On a smooth inclined plane of angle α is placed on between the bar and electric motor is equal to l. When
in such a way that the upper wedge face is horizontal. the motor is switched on, the bar, whose mass is twice
On this horizontal face is placed a block of mass m. Find as great as that of the other body, starts moving with
the resultant acceleration of the block in subsequent a constant acceleration w. How soon will the bodies
motion. collide?
m
Wedge Q.26 Two particle of equal masses m and m are
M
connected up a light string of length 2l. A constant force
F is applied continuously at the middle of the string,
always along the perpendicular bisector of the line
joining the two particles. Show that when the distance
Q.21 In the system shown in Figure. = mA 4m,m= 3m
B between the particles is 2x, the acceleration of approach
and mC = 8m . Friction is absent everywhere. String is
fx
light and inextensible. If the system is released from rest of particles is .
1
find the acceleration of each block.
m(2 – x2 ) 2
B
Q.27 Determine the acceleration of bodies A and B and
A
the tension in the cable due to application of the 300 N
C
force. Neglect all friction and the masses of pulleys.
Q.32 A boy whirls a stone in a horizontal circle of radius speed of the particle and the inclination of the string to
1.5m and 2m above the ground by means of a string. the vertical at the instant of the motion when the tension
The string breaks and the stone files off horizontally, in the string is equal to the weight of the particle.
striking the ground 10m away. What is the centripetal
acceleration during circular motion? Q.40 A hemispherical bowl of radius R is rotated about
its axis of symmetry which is kept vertical. A small block
Q.33 A stone is fastened to one end of a string and is is kept in the bowl at a position where the radius makes
−2
whirled in a vertical circle of radius R. Find the minimum angle ms with the vertical. The block rotates with the
speed the stone can have at the highest point of the bowl without any shipping. The frictional coefficient
circle. between the block and the bowl is β=54o28’. Find the
range of angular speed for which the block will not slip.
Q.34 A stone of mass 1kg is attached to one end of a
string of length 1m and breaking strength 500N, and Q.41 A table with smooth horizontal surface is fixed in a
is whirled in a horizontal circle on a frictionless table cabin that rotates with a uniform angular velocity m / s2
top. The other end of the string is kept fixed. Find the in a circular path of radius R=700m. A smooth groove
maximum speed the stone can attain without breaking AB of length L=7m is made on the surface of the table.
the string. (k1 + k 2 ) x
The groove makes an angle with the radius OA
m
Q.35 A circular automobile test track has a radius of
of the circle in which the cabin rotates. A small particle
200m. The track is so designed that when a car travels
if kept at the point A in the groove and is released to
at a speed of 100 kilometer per hour, the force between
move along AB. Find the time taken by the particle to
the automobile and the track is normal to the surface of
reach the point B.
track. Find the angle of the bank.
Q.37 A motorcycle has to move with a constant speed Q.43 A particle of mass m moves along a horizontal
on an over bridge which is in the form of a circular circle of radius R such that normal acceleration of particle
are of radius R and has a total length L. Suppose the varies with time as Tab=mgtanθ, Tab=mg/cosθ, T’=mgcosθ.
motorcycle starts from the highest point. (a) What can
where K is a constant. Calculate
its maximum velocity be for which contact with road is
not broken at the highest point? (b) If the motorcycle (i) Tangential force on particle at time t
goes at speed grφ2 (r − r φ) =2lgm times the maximum (ii) Total force on particle at time t
found in part (a). Where will it lose the contact with the (iii) Power developed by total force at time t and
road? (c) What maximum uniform speed can it maintain
(iv) Average power developed by total force over first t
on the bridge if it does not lose contact anywhere on
second
the bridge?
Q.44 A smooth sphere of radius R is made to translate in
Q.38 A simple pendulum is suspended from the ceiling
a straight line with a constant acceleration a. A particle
of a car taking a turn of radius 10m at a speed of 36km/h.
kept on the top of the sphere is released from there at
Find the angle made by the string of the pendulum with
zero velocity with respect to the sphere. Find the speed
the vertical if this angle does not change during the
of the particle with respect to the sphere as a function
turn. Take kmh-2.
of the angle Mg a2 + 4h2 it slides.
4h
Q.39 A heavy particle hanging from a fixed point by
Q.45 A uniform circular ring of mass per unit length
a light inextensible string of length ms−2 is projected
2(Mg− B)
horizontally with speed − ( x + y ) / 2cm / s2 , find the and radius R is rotating with angular velocity
g
P hysi cs | 4.57
(D) F ≤ (m1 + m2 + m3 )µ g
Q.46 If a particle is rotating in a circle of radius R with
velocity at an instant v and the tangential acceleration is
a. Find the net acceleration of the particle. Q.4 Blocks A and B in Figure are connected by a bar
of negligible weight. If mass of A and M are 170 kg
each and µ A = 0.2 and µB = 0.4 , where µ A and µB are
Q.47 A metal ring of mass m and radius R is placed on
the coefficients of limiting friction between blocks and
a smooth horizontal table and is set rotating about its
own axis in such a way that each part of the ring moves (
plane, calculate the force in the bar. g = 10 m / s2 )
with speed v. Find the tension in the ring.
B
Q.48 A car goes on a horizontal circular road of
radius R the speed is increasing at a constant rate
A 8
k1 m1 + k 2 m2
cos αmin = a. The friction coefficient is 15
m1 + m2
(A) 150 N (B) 75 N (C) 200 N (D) 250 N
1 1
=α tan−1 − . Find the speed at which the car will
2 µ Q.5 A person, standing on the floor of an elevator, drops
just skid. a coin. The coin reaches the floor of the elevator in a
time t1 . If the elevator is stationary and in time t2 if it is
Exercise 2 moving uniformly. Then
(A) t1 = t2
Forces and Laws of Motion
(B) t1 < t2
Single Correct Choice Type
(C) t1 > t2
Q.1 A chain of length L and mass M is hanging by fixing (D) t1 > t2 or t1 < t2 depending on whether the
its upper end to rigid support. The tension in the chain lift is going up or down.
at a distance x from the rigid support is
m2g3 cos α Q.6 How large must F be in the Figure shown to given
s=
6a2 sin3 α the 700 gm block an acceleration of 30 cm / s2 ? The
coefficient of friction between all surfaces is 0.15.
Q.2 A block A kept on an inclined surface just begins
to slide if the inclination is 30o. The block is replaced by 200gm
another block B and it is found that it just begins to slide
if the inclination is 40o. 700gm F
(A) Mass of A > mass of B.
(B) Mass of A < mass of B (A) 4 N (B) 2.18 N (C) 3.18 N (D) 6N
Q.15 (A, D) Two blocks A and B of Q.18 Assertion: The law of conservation of linear
30°
mass 10 kg and 20 kg respectively momentum, as applied to a single particle, is equivalent
are placed as shown in Figure. to Newton’s first law of motion.
Coefficient of friction between all
Reason: As Newton’s first law states in the absence
the surfaces is 0.2 (g=10 m/s2)
of external force state of motion of a body does not
(A) Tension in the string is 306 N change.
(B) Tension in the string is 132 N A B
(C) Acceleration of block B is 2.6m/s 2 Q.19 Assertion: The impulse of a force can be zero
(D) Acceleration of block B is 2.6m/s 2 even if force is not zero.
Reason: The impulse of a force is equal to change in
Q.16 In the arrangement shown in the Figure. all surface momentum of a body.
are smooth. Select the correct alternative(s)
Q.20 Assertion: If a book is placed on table at rest then
force exerted by table on the book and weight of the
B
A book formation reaction pairs according to Newton 3rd
law of motion
Fixed Reason: Since both are equal in magnitude and
opposite in directions.
(A) For any value of θ acceleration of A and B are equal
Q.21 Assertion: The mass of a body can be regarded
(B) Contact force between the two blocks is zero if as a quantitative measure of the resistance of a body to
mA / m
=B tan θ acceleration by a given force.
(C) Contact force between the two is zero for any value Reason: The acceleration produced by a given force is
of mA or mB inversely proportional to mass being accelerated.
(D) Normal reactions exerted by the wedge on the block
are equal. Q.22 Assertion: While conserving the linear momentum
of the system we must specify the reference frame.
Q.17 Two blocks A and B of equal mass m are connected Reason: Like velocity, momentum also depends on the
through a massless string and arranged as shown in reference from of observer.
Figure. Friction is absent everywhere. When the system
is released from rest. Comprehension Type
(A) Tension in string is mg/2 C
Paragraph 1: A ball of mass m
(B) Tension in string is mg/4 is connected with the string AB
(C) Acceleration in string is g/2 and BC respectively as shown in
the figure. Now string AB is cut. A
(D) Acceleration in string is 3g/2 Answer the following questions B
Assertion Reasoning Type Q.23 Tension in the string AB and BC respectively the
string AB is cut
Each of the question given below consists of two
statements, an assertion and reason. Select the number (A) mg cotB, mg cosB (B) mg tanB, mg cosB
corresponding to the appropriate alternative as follows
(C) mg tanB, mg secB (D) mg cotB, mg secB
(A) If both assertion and reason are true and reason is
the correct explanation of assertion Q.24 Tension in the string BC just after the string AB is
(B) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is cut
not the correct explanation of assertion (A) mg sinB (B) mg cosB
(C) If assertion is true but reason is false (C) mg tanB (D)mg secB
(D) If assertion is false but reason is true.
4 . 6 0 | Forces and Laws of Motion
M
Q.31 The net force due to plank, acting on the block A,
has magnitude
(A) 2mg (B) mg (C) 3mg (D) 5mg
l
Q.27 The acceleration of m in the S’ frame is Q.32 The magnitude of the force exerted on the pulley
by the clamp is, when the system is in equilibrium
(M+ m)gsin θ
(M+ m)gsin (M+ m)gsin θ
(A) (A) 2 (B)θ (B) (M+ m)gsin θ 2 2 mg
(M+ m)gsin
(M θ 2 θθ(M
M++m)gsin + m)gsin
(M
m++m)gsin
2 θ
θMsin2 θθ (A) 4mg (B) 4mg / 3 (C) (D) 2 2mg
(A) M +(A)
msin θmsin (B) m +(B)Msin
3
2 2 2
(M
M−+m)gsin
msin θ
M−+m)gsin
(M θmsin θθ(M
m + m)gsin
Msin
m+θ
(M θ 2 θθ
Msin
m)gsin
(C) (C) 2 (D) (D) Q.33 The plank is suddenly broken by an impulsive force,
(M− m)gsin
(M θ 2 θθ(M
M−+m)gsin M++m)gsin
(M+θm)gsin
msin θ θ
(C) M +(C)
msin θmsin (D) (D) M + msin θ
M + θmsin θ M + msin
M + msin 2 2 M +θmsin θ acting downwards. The instantaneous accelerations of A
and B, just after the plank is removed, are respectively,
Q.28 The acceleration of the incline in the S frame (A) 10 m/s2 and 10 m/s2 (B) 20 m/s2 and 3.33 m/s2
mgsin θ cos θ mgsin θ cos θ (C) 12 m/s2 and 6.66 m/s2 (D) None of the above
(A) mgsin θ cos θ (B) − mgsin θ cos θ
mgsin
(A) θ cos
M+mgsin
msin 2 θ
θθcos θ mgsin
(B) − θ cos
M+mgsin
msin 2 θ
θθcos
θ
(A) (A) M + msin 2 θ (B) −(B)
− M + msin 2
θ
M+M
Mgsin msin 2
θθ 2 θ M+ Mmsin 2
θθ 2 θ Passage 4: A vertical gap 2.2 cm wide of infinite extent
θ
+ cos
msin Mgsin θ cos
+ msin
(C) Mgsin θ cos θ (D) − Mgsin θ cos θ contains a fluid of viscosity 2.0 NS / m2 and specific
Mgsin
(C) 2 θ
θ cos θ (D) Mgsin 2 θ
θ cos
− +Mgsin θ
(C) (C)M+Mgsin
msin θθcos
2 (D) −(D) M msin θθcos
M + msin θ − M + msin 2 θ gravity 0.9. A metallic plate 1m X 1m X 0.2cm, which
M+M msin 2
θ 2 θ
+ msin M+ Mmsin 2
+ msinθ 2 θ
is in the middle of the gap, is to be lifted up with a
constant speed 0.15 m/sec through the gap. The weight
Q.29 The force exerted by the small m on the wedge of of the plate is 48N. Assuming pulley is massless and
mass M frictionless, string is also massless. (g=10 m/s2)
Mmg Mmg
(A) mgcos θ mgcos θ
(A) (B) (B) 2
M + msinM2 θ+ msin2 θ
mg mg
(C) (C) (D) None(D) None
cos θ cos θ m-83kg
60°
Q.30 At what acceleration ax (in the S frame) must the
0.2cm
incline be accelerated to prevent m from sliding
2.2cm
P hysi cs | 4.61
Q.34 Buoyant force acting on the plate Q.42 Three identical particles are joined together by
(A) 1800 N (B) 900 N (C) 180 N (D) 18 N a thread as shown in figure. All the three particles are
moving on a smooth horizontal plane about point O.
Q.35 Net frictional force exerted by the liquid on the If the velocity of the outermost particle is v 0 , then the
plate ratio of tensions in the three sections of the string is
(A) 30 N (B) 60 N (C) 15 N (D) 120 N (A) 3:5:7 (B) 3:4:5 (C) 7:11:6 (D) 3:5:6
Q.36 Tension in the string Q.43 The kinetic energy k of a particle moving along a
circle of radius R depends on the distance covered s as
(A) 90 N (B) 108 N (C) 240 N (D) 120 N
k= as2 where a is a constant. The total force acting on
the particle is:
Q.37 For doing so the kinetic friction between the s2
1/2
s2 R2
inclined plane and the block should be equals to (A) 2a (B) 2as (C) 2as (D) 2as
R R2 s2
3 3 1 1
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4 8 3 2 3
Multiple Correct Choice Type
Q.38 A block of mass m is placed on a plank, which is Q.44 A car of mass M is moving on a horizontal circular
pivoted at one end. The plank is slowly turned as shown path of radius r. At an instant its speed is v and is
in Figure. The friction coefficient between block and increasing at a rate a-
plank is 0.8. Angle between ground and plank friction
(A) The acceleration of the car is towards the centre of
force between block and plank at which the block starts
the path
sliding is
(B) The magnitude of the frictional force on the car is
block greater than mv 2 / R
ground
plank (C) The friction coefficient between the ground and the
car is not less than a/g
(A) 20o (B) 45o (C) 30o (D) 35o
(D) The friction coefficient between the ground and the
car is µ =tan−1 v 2 / Rg
(A) T sin θ= mω2L (1 + sin θ ) (B) T cos θ =mg Q.52 Assertion: A cyclist always bends inwards
while negotiating a curve
ω2L (1 + sin θ ) Reason: By bending he lowers his centre of gravity
(C) tan θ = (D) None of above
g
Q.53 Assertion: The tendency of skidding/overturning
Q.47 A person applies a constant force F on a particle is quadrupled, when a cyclist doubles his speed of
of mass m and finds that the particle move in a circle of turning.
radius r with a uniform speed v. v2
(A) This is not possible Reason: tan θ =
rg
(B) There are other forces also on the particle
(C) The resultant of other forces is mv 2 / r towards centre Q.54 Assertion: On a banked curved track, vertical
(D) The resultant of the other forces varies in magnitude component of normal reaction provides the necessary
as well as direction centripetal force.
Reason: Centripetal force is always required for turning.
Assertion Reasoning Type
In each of the following questions, a statement of Comprehension Type Questions
Assertion (A) is given followed by a corresponding
statement of Reason (R) just below it/of the statements, Passage 1: A block of mass m moves on a horizontal
mark the correct answer as circle against the wall of a cylindrical room of radius
(A) If both assertion and reason are true and reason is R. The floor of the room on which the block moves is
the correct explanation of assertion. smooth but the friction coefficient between the block
(B) If both assertion and reason are true but reason is and the side wall is µ . The block is given initial velocity
not the correct explanation of assertion. v o . Then answer the following questions.
(C) If assertion is true but reason is false.
Q.55 What is the tangential acceleration of the block?
(D) If assertion is false but reason is true. 2
(A) µg (B) −µg (C) µv 2 / R (D) −µv / R
(E) If both assertion and reason are false.
Q.56 What is the value of velocity v as the function of
Q.48 Assertion: Centripetal and centrifugal forces time t?
cancel each other
1 1 µt 1 1 µt
Reason: This is because they are always equal and (A) = + (B) = −
opposite. v v 0 2R v v 0 2R
1 1 µt 1 1 µt
Q.49 Assertion: A cyclist bends inwards from his (C) = + (D) = −
v v0 R v v0 R
vertical position, while turning to secure the necessary
centripetal force.
Q.57 What is the value of velocity v as the function of
Reason: Friction between the tyres and road provides
distance x travelled on the circumference?
him the necessary centripetal force. 2µ µ
− − x
(A) v = v o e R (B) v = v o e R
Q.50 Assertion: The tendency of skidding or
overturning is quadrupled, when a cyclist double his − x
2µ
=
(C) v v o 1 − e R (D) v = v o
speed of turning.
Reason: Angle of bending increases as velocity of Passage 2: In a rotor, a hollow vertical cylindrical
vehicle increases. structure rotates about its axis and a person rests
against the inner wall. At a particular speed of the rotor,
Q.51 Assertion: On banked curved track, vertical the floor below the person is removed and the person
component of normal reaction provide the necessary hangs resting against the wall without any floor. If the
centripetal force. radius of the rotor is 2m and the coefficient of static
friction between the wall and the person is 0.2. Find the
Reason: Centripetal force is always required for motion
following parameters and relations.
in curved path.
P hysi cs | 4.63
Q.58 If v is the velocity of rotation of rotor and N be the Q.62 The bob of a simple pendulum is given a velocity
reaction of wall, then- 10m/s at its lowest point. Mass of the bob is 1kg and
(A) N=mg string length is 1 m.
Column I Column II
(B) F = F1 + F2 ⇒| F |= 102 + 52 + 2.10.5cos120o = 5 3N
(A) Minimum tension in string (in (p) 50
2 Newton)
mv 2
(mg)
2
(C) N
= + (B) Magnitude of acceleration of (q) 60
r
bob when the string is horizontal
(in m / s2 )
(D) None of these
(C) Minimum magnitude of accelera- (r) zero
Q.59 In order to man remain in equilibrium we must tion of bob (in m / s2 )
have (D) Tangential acceleration at the
R highest point (in m / s2 ) (s) 10 65
fs
B
F
C
4 . 6 4 | Forces and Laws of Motion
Q.2 A uniform rope of length L and mass M lying on a acceleration of 0.2 m / s2 . The acceleration due to gravity
smooth table is pulled by a constant force F. What is the is g=9.8 m/s2. (1989)
S
tension in the rope at a distance l from the end where
the force is applied? (1978)
the table on either side of center O such that the mass and gravity is neglected, then the time after which the
m1 is at a distance of 0.124 m from O. The masses are bead starts slipping is (2000)
observed to be at rest with respect to an observer on the µ µ 1
turn of table. (1997) (A) α (B)
α
(C)
µα
(D) Infinitesimal
(A) Calculate the frictional force on m1 .
(B) What should be the minimum angular speed of the Q 14. A small block is shot into each of the four track
turn table, so that the masses will slip from this position? as shown below. Each of the track rises to the same
(C) How should the masses be placed with the string height. The speed with which the block enters the
remaining taut so that there is no frictional force acting track is the same in all cases. At the highest point of
on the mass m2 ? the track, the normal reaction is maximum in (2001)
2m
A Q.16 A reference frame attached to the earth (1986)
B (A) Is an inertial frame by definition
(B) Cannot be an inertial frame because the earth is
revolving round the sun
(B) Momentum of 5 kg mass after collision is 4kg−ms −1 (C) Radially outwards initially and radially inwards later.
(C) Kinetic energy of the centre of mass is 0.75 J (D) Radially inwards initially and radially outwards later.
(D) Total kinetic energy of the system is 4J
Q.21 A block of mass m1 = 1 kg another mass m2 = 2kg,
are placed together (see figure) on an inclined plane
Q.18 A smooth semicircular wire track of radius R is
with angle of inclination θ. Various values of θ are given
fixed in a vertical plane (Figure). One end of a massless
in List I. The coefficient of friction between the block m1
spring of natural length 3R/4 is attached to the lowest
and the plane is always zero. The coefficient of static
point O of the wire track. A small ring of mass m which
and dynamic friction between the block m2 and the
can slide on the track is attached to the other end of the
plane are equal to µ = 0.3. In
spring. The ring is held stationery at point P such that
List II expressions for the
the spring makes an angle 60o
friction on the block m2 are
with the vertical. The spring
given. Match the correct
constant k=mg/R. Consider the m1
expression of the friction in List
instant when the ring is making m2
II with the angles given in List I,
an angle 60o with the vertical. The
and choose the correct option.
spring is released (a) Draw the C
P The acceleration due to gravity
free body diagram of the ring. (b)
Determine the tangential 60° is denoted by g.
acceleration of the ring and the O [Useful information: tan (5.5°) ≈ 0.1; tan (11.5°) ≈ 0.2;
normal reaction. (1996) tan (16.5°) ≈ 0.3] (2014)
1N Code:
(A) (P)→(1), (Q)→(1), (R)→(1), (S)→(1)
O P (B) (P)→(2), (Q)→(2), (R)→(2), (S)→(3)
(A) θ = 45° (C) (P)→(2), (Q)→(2), (R)→(2), (S)→(4)
(B) θ > 45° and a frictional force acts on the block (D) (P)→(2), (Q)→(2), (R)→(3), (S)→(3)
towards P.
(C) θ > 45° and a frictional force acts on the block Q.22 The net reaction of the disc on the block is
towards Q. (2016)
(D) θ < 45° and a frictional force acts on the block (A) − m ω R cos ωtjˆ − mgkˆ
2
towards Q.
1
A (B) m ω2R(e2ω t − e−2ω t )ˆj − mgkˆ
2
Q.20 A wire, which passes through
the hole in a small bead, is bent in (C) m ω2R sin ωtjˆ − mgkˆ
the form of quarter of a circle. The 1
(D) m ω2R(e2ω t − e−ω t )ˆj − mgkˆ
wire is fixed vertically on ground as
o
90 B 2
shown in the figure. The bead is
released from near the top of the
wire and it slides along the wire
without friction. As the bead moves from A to B, the
force it applies on the wire is (2014)
(A) Always radially outwards.
(B) Always radially inwards.
P hysi cs | 4.67
PlancEssential Questions
JEE Main/Boards JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1 Exercise 1
Q. 18 Q.21 Q.26 Q.1 Q.4 Q.13 Q.17
Q.27 Q.28 Q.20 Q.29 Q.38 Q.43
Exercise 2 Exercise 2
Q.5 Q.14 Q.18 Q.3 Q.6 Q.8 Q.11
Q.14 Q.15 Q.16 Q.17
Previous Years’ Questions
Q.44 Q.45
Q.51 Q.59
Previous Years’ Questions
Q.12 Q.14 Q.17
Answer Key
Q.20 1 cm
Exercise 1
Q.21 9 m/s.
Forces and Laws of Motion
Q.22 r (iˆ 12500 + ˆj 6250)m
=
Q.4 100 Ns
Q.23 2.5 × 10 4 km
Q.5 12.5 N 2
Q.24 grφ (r − r φ) =2lgm
Q.14 0.872 m/s, 1.744 m
Q.15 30N
Circular Dynamics
−2 Q.25 0.03 m/s2
Q.16 1.4 ms , 33.6 N
Q.26 0.86 ms−2
Q.17 1000 N, 750 N
Q.27 − ( x + y ) / 2cm / s
2
Q.18 40°
−1 10
Q.28 1.22 m/s2; β =tan
7
4 . 6 8 | Forces and Laws of Motion
Exercise 2
Forces and Laws of Motion
Single Correct Choice Type
Circular Dynamics
Single Correct Choice Type
Circular Dynamics
Q.16 C Q.17 D Q.18 C Q.19 C Q.20 B Q.21 B
JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1
Forces and Laws of Motion
Q.1 (a) 70 kg, (b) 35 kg, (c) 105 kg, (d) zero
Q.2 (a) 750 N, (b) 250 N, Mode (b) should not be adopted
Q.3 (a) T=640 N, (b) T=240 N, (c) T=400 N, (d) T=0, Rope will break in case (a).
Q.4 15 m
Q.5 (a) 7500 N downwards, (b) 32500 N downwards, (c) 32500 N upward
(k1 + k 2 ) x
Q.7
m
Q.8 g/3, 2g/3
Q.9 Tab
= mgtan θ, Tob
= mg / cos θ , =
T' mgcos θ
P hysi cs | 4.69
mg 2
Q.10 a + 4h2 acceleration w1
4h Q.24
Q.11 4N kg w2
2(Mg− B)
Q.12 g
t0 time
mg2 cos α
Q.13 (a) =
f (k1 − k 2 ) ,
m1 + m2
µ(m1 + m2 )g
When t ≤ t0 (where t0 = ) w1 =
w2 =
kg
k1 m1 + k 2 m2 a
(b) cos αmin = t > t0 w1 = at / m1 − km2g / m1 , w2 = k g
m1 + m2
1 1 2l
=
Q.14 α tan−1 − Q.25 t =
2 µ (3 w + kg)
Q.38 45°
g
Q.39 v =
3
4 . 7 0 | Forces and Laws of Motion
Exercise 2
Forces and Laws of Motion
Comprehension Type
Circular Dynamics
Comprehension Type
Q.55 D Q.56 C Q.57 B Q.58 B Q.59 C Q.60 B
Q.4 a= 1.5m / s2 , T=5.2 N Q.5 (a) 4.2 kg, (b) 9.8 N Q.6 mgsinθ
Q.7 (a) 20N, (b) 50N Q.8 (a) 9.89 rad/sec, (b) 9.8 × 10−3 m / s2
Q.10 (a) f=36N inwards, (b) 11.67 rad/sec, (c) m2 at 0.2m and m1 at 0.1 m from O
Circular Dynamics
5 3 3mg
Q.13 A Q.14 A Q.15 B, C Q.16 B, D Q.17 A, C Q.18 B g,
8 8
Q.19 A, C Q.20 D Q.21 D Q.22 C
4 . 7 2 | Forces and Laws of Motion
Solutions
JEE Main/Boards ∆v 20 – 10 10
In case (i) = = = 2 m/s
∆t 5 5
Exercise 1 ∴F = ma ⇒ 5 = m(2) … (i)
J = Favg (t2 – t1) ; J = ∫ F dt Sol 14: writing down the equations of motion
t1
t2
dp dp
F=
dt
; J= ∫ dt dt
t1
p2
J= ∫ dp ; J = P2 – P1 = DP.
p1
T
T1 T1
Sol 12: Every action has an equal and opposite reaction. m2 11
mg T
m1 a
Sol 13: Lift moving uniformly
m1 g
a=0
And for second body
m T – m2g = m2a … (ii)
Then N – mg = 0 T
∴ N ≡ w = mg.
m2 a
Lift acceleration upward
m2 g
a
Adding (i) and (ii)
m (m1 – m2)g = (m1 + m2)a
m – m2
a = 1 g
N = mg + ma
m m1 + m2
ma(pseudo force) Here m1 = 11.5 kg, m2 = 11 kg, g = 10 m/s2
mg
Now m1 will descend down by height ‘h’ and m2 moves
N ≡ w = m(g + a) up by the same height h;
1
∴ weight Increases H = ut + at2
2
Lift accelerating downwards: 1
⇒ h = 0. t + × (0. 2) (4)2 = 1. 6 m.
2
ma
And for velocity
N
a N + ma = mg v = u + at
m
m v = 0 + (0. 2) (4)
N = mg – ma
mg v = 0. 8 m/s.
4 . 7 4 | Forces and Laws of Motion
Now, 31.5 – N = ma
⇒ 31.5 – ma = N The total external Horizontal force applied on the
system is F.
N = 31.5 – (0. 5) (3) F
∴ Acceleration ‘a’ of the system= m/s2
N = 30 Newton. m1 + m2
Given a = 5 m/s2
F
Sol 16: Constraint Equation: ∴5 = m/s2 ∴F = 200 ×5 N
50 + 150
F = 1000 N
T Consider m2
T1 T N
3kg = m2
m2 a m2 T
m1 = 4 kg (pseudo force)
m2 g
am + am = 0. [ length of string is constant]
1 2
T – m 2a = 0
Let us say m1 moves down with an acceleration ‘a’, then
m2 will move up by an acceleration ‘a’. ∵ T = m2a.
T = 150 × 5
T T = 750 N.
m1 a
Sol 18:
m1 g Tcos θ
T1 θ
50 N
m1g – T = m1a … (i) T1 sin θ P
T2
T
m2 a 60 N
m2 g
P hysi cs | 4.75
∴ 22 × 103 = (2. 8 × 108) (pR2) Sol 23: This is just an energy conservation problem on
surface of earth;
22 × 103
R= 1 Gm
28 × 107 π Ei = mv 20 + Ui ; Ui = –
2 R
R= 25 × 10 –6 m 1 Gm
∴Ei = mv 20 –
R = 5 × 10 m –3 2 R
1 1 v
2
r – r' Gm
⇒ = – 0 ∴ =
R + h R 2G 2 (r ')2 g
G = 6. 67 × 10–11 m3kg−1s−2 A
R = 64 × 10 m. 5
v0 = 104 m/s
After putting above values we get, h = 2.5 × 104 km
T sin θ = F … (i)
5
Sol 26: v = 27 km/h = 27 × m/s
T cos θ = mg … (ii) 18
Gm2 15
(i)/(ii) ⇒ Tan θ = v= m/s
(r ')2 mg 2
Gm
→
v2 (15)2
tan θ = … (iii) ar = = = 0. 7
(r ')2 g R 4 × 80
→
1
r – r' a t = 0. 5 m/s2 = m/s2
tan θ = 2
2 → → →
a net = a r + a t = (0.7)2 + (0.5)2
→
a net = 0. 86 m/s2
θ
r – r1
2
P hysi cs | 4.77
x ar
O P →
at
C
A
At point the acceleration will be centripetal acceleration
which is radially directed towards point O. i.e. Let us say the circular turn is of the shape AB.
→
v 2 ê Now at the starting point of the track i. e. C;
Physically: a = (– r )
r → → →
a = ar + a t
Remember êr and êt are the êt
unit vectors along radial and
→ v2
êr ar = centripetal acceleration = (– êr )
tangential directions respectively. A R
5
Refer to the figure. O v = 36 km/h = 36 × m/s = 10 m/s
18
v 2 ê
→
So in this case also a A = (– r ) R = 140 m
r
Now, since the point is in between the points P and Q, → (10)2 5
ar = = m/s2 (– êr )
y 140 7
dv
and given that = 1 m/s
dt
x → dv →
π/4 ∴ at = ( ê ); a t = 1 m/s2( êt )
dt t
→ → →
Now a = a r + a t
– êr
→
π a = (0. 7 (– êr )) + 1 êt ) m/s2
angle between OA and OP will be
4
|a| = (0.7)2 + 1 = 0.49 + 1 = 1.49 m/s2 = 1. 22 m/s2
Now let us resolve (– êr ) into î and ˆj .
1 10
π π and tan β = ⇒ β =tan–1
(– î ) + |– êr | sin (– ˆj )
(– êr ) = |– êr |. cos 0.7 7
4 4
But since êr and êt are unit vectors
Exercise 2
| êr | = | êt | = 1
1 1 ˆ 1
(– êr ) = – î – j = ( î + ˆj ) Forces and Laws of Motion
2 2 2
→ Single Correct Choice Type
v2 1 ˆ ˆ
Now a A = − (i + j)
r 2 Sol 1: (A) At point A;
→
v2 ˆ ˆ
aA = – (i + j)
r 2
→ (1)
Put v = 2 cm/s and r = 4 cm, to find a A .
→
After putting above values we get, aA =− ( xˆ + yˆ ) / 2 cm / s2 T1 A
T1=T2
T2 (2)
m = 10 kg
4 . 7 8 | Forces and Laws of Motion
F
2
12m/s
S = 20 cm.
The tension in the string acts towards the body, thus
Sol 3: (C) Here we need to understand the concept of making the string tough. Hence this is the correct
friction representation.
N
Sol 5: (A) Initially; F is upward Buyoant force
F1
a
f
mg
Mg – F = Ma
We are given that the body is not moving. Hence mg
balancing the forces in both the directions; Mg – Ma = F … (i)
⇒ N = mg and f = F1. F
Now we don’t know anything about F1.
a
But we know that the force F1 must be less than maximum
static friction i.e. mmg for the body to be at rest.
∴ f = F1 ≤ mmg. And minimum F1 can be zero. (M–m)a
∴ 0 ≤ f ≤ µ mg … (iii) F – (M – m)g = (M – m)a … (ii)
Now we know that contact force on the body is Solving (i) and (ii); we get
F= 2
N +f 2
2a
m= M
a+ g
N
Sol 6: (A) Let us assume that the string makes an angle
of ‘θ1’ with the normal of the plane.
f
P hysi cs | 4.79
B→a
m'
θ
a
θ m
A
The only external force acting on the sphere is ‘mg’ FBD of B;
which is vertically downward. Hence the string also
becomes vertical so as to balance the force mg.
N N
N – m'g = 0 …(ii)
N – m'g = 0 …(ii)
T ∴ T ∴
Sol 7: (C) F. B. D of (1) T – m'a = 0 T – m'a = 0
…(iii) …(iii)
T ... (i) m’g m’g
T–mg=0
m a a
⇒ T = mg …(i)
mg + F = ma Mg cos α
Mg sin α mg
F
a=g+ ; which is downwards. (i. e opposite) to the
m Given that insect moves very lowly;
direction of displacement (till it reaches maximum ∴ V = 0; Acceleration of the body is also zero.
height)
f = Mg cos α
Since mA > mB; aA < aB
N = Mg sin α
i.e. Body ‘A’ has less downward acceleration when
composed to Body ‘B’. Hence A will go higher than B. Now for the maximum case;
f = fs = mN.
Sol 13: (A) Let ‘x’ be the maximum length that can hang
∴ mN = Mg cos α
hand from the table.
µ (Mg sin α) = Mg cos α
Now say fs be the static friction
1
tan α = ⇒ tan α = 3
L–x µ
But we want to express in terms of θ;
x α + θ = 90o, → α = 90o – θ
tan α = tan (90o – θ)
3 = cotq
M
fs = . x. g … (i)
L Sol 15: (A) T θ
T
[ Condition for Equilibrium]
And also we know that fs = mN. w
M
N = (L – x)g When the bird alights on the wire; the wire makes a
L
curve of small angle.
µM
fs = (L – x) g … (ii) 2 T sin θ = w
L
from (i) and (ii) W
sin θ =
2T
Mx M
g = µ (L – x) g
L L we know that sin θ ≤ 1
x µ W W
⇒ < 1 ⇒T >
⇒ = 2T 2
L 1 + µ
x µ 1/4 Sol 16: (D) Now Balancing the forces parallel and
× 100 = × 100 = × 100 = 20%
L 1 + µ 5/4 perpendicular to the incline surface;
f = mg sin θ
N = mg cos θ
And Net force by surface = f 2 + N2
Sol 17: (C) While descending down; (ii) when the body just starts sliding and slides down
The fireman tries to pull the rope down and so there will For case I;
be a tension ‘T’ upwards. N
T F
mg – T = ma; mg – ma = T
2mg mg a
Now given Tmax = Mg sin θ
3 mg cos θ
mg
2mg θ
∴ amin = mg – m ∴ amin = g/3
3
As long as body doesn’t slide;
Sol 18: (C) F = mg sin θ;
40 ∴ F= f 2 + N2 = mg
50 sin 30º
50 ∴ It remains constant till a particular ‘θ’.
30º 30º For case II;
50 cos 30º
w=5 When the body is sliding down,
f = mN
30
N = mg cos θ
A 2
50 ∴F = (µN)2 + N2 = N µ + 1
30N
2
C = mg cos θ µ + 1
w
40 As θ increases; cos θ decreases.
B
Hence F decreases.
Circular Dynamics mv 2
Sol 26: (C) Centripetal force =
R
Sol 22: (D) Force acting on the particle at any instant is 5
v = 36 km/hr = 36 1000 m / s = 36
mRω2 towards the center. m/s
→ 3600 18
ds v = 10 m/s
2
F = (500)(10)
P 50
F F = 1000 N
→
i.e. F = mRw2 êr [ Radial dire ction]
Sol 27: (B) Use F = mrω2
And the displacement of the particle will be ‘ds’ along
tangential direction. Sol 28: (A) N
→ P
i.e. d s = ds êt
→ → θ
Now work = F . d s A
mg
W = mrw ds ( eˆ r .eˆ t )
2
θ
mv 2
Sol 23: (C) Centripetal force = mRw2 N = mg cos θ –
R
C
As one goes from A to P; θ decreases, so cos θ increase.
R ∴ N increases
D B
k
A Sol 29: (A) Centripetal force = –
r2
mv 2 k
Now at any point in the circle this value remains the ⇒ =–
same. Its only that the direction keeps changing. r r2
k
⇒ mv2 = –
Sol 24: (D) In uniform circular motion, ω is constant r
Now in the options, A, B, C the quantities are constant 1 k
⇒ mv2 = –
in magnitude but keep changing in direction. 2 2r
And since they are vector Quantities, we can’t say they k
⇒ kinetic energy K = –
are constant. For speed, its only magnitude that matters. 2r
Since it’s a Scalar Quantity. And since the motion is horizontal motion; let us assume
And Speed = Rω Constant the potential energy same as that of ground i.e. zero
k
Hence option D. ∴ total energy = K + U = – +0
k 2r
E=–
Sol 25: (A) m1 = m2 = m ; v1 = v2 = v 2r
mv 2 mvB2
N sin θ = TB = mg cos θ +
R R
N cos θ = mg mv 2A mvB2
Now TA – TB = –
v2 R R
tan θ =
Rg m 2
1 TA – TB = ( v – vB2 ) (i)
θ = tan–1= tan–1 =tan–1 R A
5 Now using conservation of energy theorem;
1
Sol 31: (D) At point A; EA = mv 2A + UA
2
v2
1
At point B; EB = mvB2 + UB
2
B EA = EB
T
1
v1 m( v 2A – vB2 )= UB – UA
A 2
mg But we can observe that both points A and B are at
same heights from the center.
In a vertical motion, the speed of ball doesn’t remain m 2 2
∴ UA = – UB TA – TB = . (U – UA) = (UB – UA)
constant and as we discussed earlier, centripetal force R m B R
can’t be constant in direction itself, so its ruled out.
∴ is constant
And for tension, consider two points A, B
Sol 33: (D)
→ mv 2A ˆ → mvB2
T A = mg + (– j ) and T B = ( î )
R R mv 2
R
Hence tension is also not constant. Now gravitational
force on the ball is (mg) at any point on the circle.
N
mg
Sol 32: (B) At point A
mv 2A
R
mv 2
mg cosθ mg + N =
R
TA
R
v= (mg + N)
A y m
θ θ Now for minimum case; let us say he just loses contact
mg
x i.e. N = 0
5N N + mg
α
Ft is inwards mg sinα
mg cosα
mg
Sol 8: (D) Sol 10: (A) Free body diagram (FBD) of the block (shown
by a dot) is shown in figure.
T=Mg
N Vertical
T= Mg
f
F cos 60° Horizontal
mg
R = sinθ
Sol 14: (A) When
T cosθ component will cancel mg.
P = mg (sin θ – µ cos θ)
T sinθ component will provide necessary centripetal
F = µ mg cos θ (upwards)
force to the ball towards centre C.
when P = mg sin θ
∴ T sinθ = mrw2 = m ( sinθ) w2
f=0
or T = mlw2
and when P = mg(sin θ + µ cos θ)
T
f = mmg cos θ (downwards) ∴ ω=
m
Hence friction is first positive, then zero and then
negative. Tmax 324
or wmax = = = 36rad/s
m 0.5 × 0.5
∴ Correct option is (A).
F −1 −bt 1
θ ⇒ v= e 0
m b
F −bt
mg ⇒ v= e
mb
mv 2
FBD of bob is T sinθ =
R
P hysi cs | 4.87
F N
and v→ as t → ∞
mb u = 10 m/s
man
So, velocity increases continuously and attains a a=0
F
maximum value= of v as t → ∞ mg
mb
N – mg = 0 ⇒ N = mg = 70×10 = 700 Newton.
Sol 19: (C) mg sin θ = µmg cos θ
tanθ = µ ⇒ reading by the scale = 70 kg
Case (II)
dy 1
⇒ = tan θ = µ = In the frame of the lift;
dx 2
ma
x2 1 1 N
⇒ = , x = ±1 ⇒ y= m (pseudo
2 2 6 force) man a = 5 m/s2
⇒
= x 2 3 m ≈ 3.5m Case (III)
N
Applying work energy theorem from P to R
m a
0 3
mg sin 30 × 4 − µmg × 4 − µmgx = 0
2
1 mg ma
⇒=µ ≈ 0.29
2 3 N = mg + ma
⇒ N = m(a + g)
⇒ N = 70 (10 + 5)
JEE Advanced/Boards
⇒ N = 70 (15)
Exercise 1 N = 1050 Newton
Forces and Laws of Motion ⇒ reading by the scale = 105 kg
Now In this case a = g downward,
Sol 1: The reading shown by the weighting scale is the
normal reaction between the man and the weighing ∴ from case (b);
scale. ⇒ N = m (g – a)
Now, in Case (I) ⇒ N = m(g – g)
N=0
i. e the man is in free fall.
4 . 8 8 | Forces and Laws of Motion
Sol 2: T – mg = ma
T m2 T = m (g + a)
Here rope tries to pull
T T = 40 (10 + 6)
the man down.
T = 640 N
T
m But Tmax = 600 N, hence the string breaks.
Case b:
N
T T
m1 T = m1g T + m2g = N a =4 m/s2
m1g T m2g mg
mg – T = ma
⇒ N = (m1 + m2)g …(i)
T = m(g – a) … (i)
In case II;
T = 40 (10 – 4)
Now rope pulls the man up
T = 40 × 6
N T=240N
T
T
T < Tmax
T m2 m1 m1 g = T
Case c:
m1 g m2 g u = 5 m/s uniformly i.e. a = 0
T
T = mg = 40 (10)
m1
T = 400 N
T + N = m 2g
T ≤ Tmax
⇒ N = m2g – T
⇒ N = m2g – m1g Case d:
mg
mg mg
P hysi cs | 4.89
mg ma
⇒ N = m (a + g) = 300 (25)
N = 7500 N upwards.
4 . 9 0 | Forces and Laws of Motion
Sol 8: T2
T2sinθ A T1
T1 mg
a C T1
T2 cos θ = mg … (i)
B T2 sin θ = T1 … (ii)
a
T2 T2=mg sec θ
T2 T1
From (ii) & (i) ⇒ tan θ =
A mg
⇒T=mgtan θ
mg Now just after the string AB is burnt,
T1 T2 = mg cos θ
a C
θ
mg
T2
T1 – mg = ma … (i)
T1 θ
mg cos θ
a B mg
T2
Sol 10:
mg
T d T
T2 + mg – T1 = ma … (ii) h
T
θθ T
T2
a A
d
mg θh
mg – T2 = ma … (iii)
now, (i) + (ii) 2T cos θ = mg
gives T2 = 2ma mg
=T sec θ
2
Now using this is equation (iii)
2
g 2g 2 d
a= and T2 = h +
3 3 2
sec θ =
h
O
Sol 9: mg h2 + (d / 2)2
∴T= .
θ 2 h
T2 cos θ
∴ We can see that when h decreases, T increases.
T2
T2 sin θ T1
m A
B
P hysi cs | 4.91
(M–m)g f
(M – m )g + FA = FB … (ii) mg sin α
From equation (i) and (ii), eliminating FA;
2(Mg – B) α
We get m =
g
mg sin a – µ mg cos α = ma
Sol 13: a N1 N
2
f1 1 ∴ a = g sin α – mg cos α
1
mg1 sin α a = g(sin α – µ cos α)
m1g cos α
Now time taken by the block to reach point O;
m1g sin α + N – f1 = m1a … (i) 1
s= ot + at2 ∴ s = cos α
N1 = mg cos α … (ii) 2
1
f1 = m1N1 = k1N1 … (iii) cos α = g (sin α – µ cos α) t2
2
N2 2 cos α
t=
f1 g(sin α – µ cos α )
N 2
m2g sin α for minimum t;
dt
m2g sin θ = 0.
dα
4 . 9 2 | Forces and Laws of Motion
F sin α fsB = µ mg
3
F Now when a force of µ mg acts on the block A; it
4
α
F cos α doesn’t cause any motion in A.
3
Hence; F = fA = µ mg
4
mg
And string is left unaltered. Hence tension is zero. And
Now at the moment, contact is lost;
hence fB = T = zero
N=0
3
(b) Now when force of µ mg is applied,
F sin α = mg 2
Body A will tend to move forward. (F ≥ fs)
at0sin α = mg
Let us assume that the whole system moves with on
mg acceleration ‘a’.
t0 =
asin α a
dv
now F cos α = ma ≡ m
dt
dv T T
∴ at cos α = m B A F
dt
fB fA
Integrating on both sides
t0 v
On body A;
∫ (acos α)t dt = m∫ dv
0 0 a
acos α t02 N
. = vm … (i)
2 2
T F
acos α m2g2 mg2 cos α fA
⇒v= . ⇒ v =
2m a2 sin2 α 2asin2 α mg
x t0 t0
acos α 2 acos α t3 T – fB = ma … (iv)
⇒ ∫ dx = ∫ 2m
t dt ⇒x=
2m 3
0 0 0 fB = µ mg … (v)
3
acos α mg Adding (i) and (iv);
x=
6m asin α F – (fA + fB) = 2ma
P hysi cs | 4.93
3 µ mg – (2 µ mg) = 2 ma 13
⇒ t2 =
2 2(2 – 3µ )g
a is negative
1 2
Distance travelled by B = at
It means that our assumption that both the bodies 2 B
move is false.
1 µg 13 13µ
= × . =
T F 2 4 2(2 – 3µ )g 16(2 – 3µ )
fA
1 300 × 2
⇒ am = [2mw + 2m kg – mkg] ⇒ aB = = 1.558 ms-2
m 385
⇒ am = 2w + kg 3
aA = a = 2. 338 ms2
2 B
Relative accelerator a = am + w = 3w + k g
T = 81. 8 N
1 2
at = l
2
2 2 Sol 28: F = 30t N
t= = 3w + kg
a ⇒ T = 10 t
wt. of A = 10 m1 = 10 N
Sol 26:
F (a) Block A loses contact when T = weight
10t = 10
θ t=1s
T
Similarly 2T = 10m2 when B loses contact
m
20t = 10(4)
2T cos θ = F
t = 2s
F
⇒T= (b) Net force on A FA = 10 t – 10 (t > 1)
2cos θ 1
aA = (10t – 10)
T sin θ m1
Horizontal acceleration ax =
m
aA = (10t – 10)
F sin θ F tan θ F x
= = = . dv A
2cos θ m 2m 2m ( )2 – (x)2 = 10t – 10
dt
Fx 2 2
ax = 1 vA = ∫ (10t – 10).dt = 5t2 – 10t
1
2m(2 – x2 )2 1
fx v = 5 ms–1
Acceleration of approach = 2ax = 1 t t
2
m(2 – x2 ) 2 (c) vA = ∫ (10t – 10)dt = 5t – 10t
1
1
xA xB Circular Dynamics
Sol 31:
100 10
ωmax = = rad/s = 5 rad/s θ
4 2
1
we know that 1 rad = rev
2π
5
∴ ωm = Rev/s
2π
T cos θ = mg
Sol 30: 2
T sinθ = mv
N R
θ
Now the component T cosθ has to balance the weight
θ mv 2 of the body
R
∴ Tmax cosθ = mg ⇒ 8 cosθ = 0. 4 × 10
θ 1
cosθ = ⇒ θ = 60°
2
mg ∴ Angle with the horizontal is (90°– θ)= 30°
mv 2
and T sinθ =
mv 2 R
N sin θ = ... (i)
R
3 0.4 × v 2
N cos θ = mg ... (ii) 8. =
2 4
Dividing (i) and (ii) v= 40( 3) m/s
v2 v = 8. 3 m/s
⇒ tanθ =
Rg
5 Sol 32: Speed of the particle just before the string
⇒ v = 108 km/h = 108 × m/s
18 breaks is v. Now after the string is broken; the path of
v = 30 m/s the stone will be;
R = 90 m v
30.30
∴ tanθ = =1
90.10
π 2
⇒ θ=
4
Squaring (i) and (ii) and adding them
2 10
mv 2
⇒ N (sin θ + cos θ) =
2 2
+ (mg)2
2
Writing the equations of motion;
R
1 2
2
along y : 2 = gt ... (i)
mv 2 2
2
⇒N= (mg) +
R along x : 10=vt ... (ii)
Solving for v; we get
⇒ N = m (10)2 + (10)2 = 10 2 m Newton v = 15.8 m/s
v2
and centripetal acceleration =
⇒ N = 10 . 4
2 N. R
(15.8)2
a= = 168.3 m/s2
1.5
P hysi cs | 4.97
T mv 2
R MLω2
mv 2 f
T=
R
Mg
Now for vmax
f = MLω2; N = Mg
we have Tmax = 500 N
and for static conditions;
1v 2
⇒ 500 =
1 f = mN = µMg ⇒ µMg = MLω2
v= 500 = 10 5 m/s µg
ω=
L
v = 22.36 m/s
4 . 9 8 | Forces and Laws of Motion
Sol 37: Let u be the speed at the highest point of the Let us call the point where tension is equal to the weight
bridge of the particle as ‘P’.
A
u Now at point P,
P
R θ mv 2
T= + mg cos θ ... (i)
mg R
O Given that T = mg
mv 2
mg = + mg cos θ
R
mu2 mv 2
+ N = mg mg(1 – cos θ) = ... (ii)
R R
mu2 Now Total energy at point O
N = mg –
R 1
0= m ( gL )2 + 0
Now for maximum speed where contact is broken; 2
N=0 mgL
2 E0 =
mu 2
∴ mg =
R 1
u= Total energy at point P = m(v2) + mgL (1 – cos θ)
Rg 2
E0 = EP
O gL FBD of body:
R
mg
P hysi cs | 4.99
mg
3
4
T = mRω2
Sol 41: 3
1 2 →
Now s = ut + at |a|= an2 + a2t = (Kt 2 )2 + ( KR )2
2
1 →
L=0+ Rω2 cosθ t2 Total force = m. | a | = m K(R + Kt 4 )
2
Now we know that work done by normal force in a
2L circular motion is zero
t=
Rω2 cos θ
4 . 1 0 0 | Forces and Laws of Motion
a → → →
Sol 46: a net = a radial + a tangential
In this case, there will be a pseudo force acting on the →
v2 →
body. Now we use Work-Energy theorem, i.e. work done ar = . (– êr ); a t = a( êt )
R
by all the forces is equal to change in kinetic energy. We
know that, work done by normal force and centripetal → 2
v2
force is zero | a net |= 2
a + m/s2
R
Work done by pseudo force = ma. (R sin θ)
WPF = maR sinθ
Sol 47: B
Work done by gravitational force = mg(R – Rcos θ)
A
Wmg = mgR(1– cosθ) θ w
Net work done = maR sinθ + mgR (1–cos θ) O
1
≡ mv2 = Rm(a sinθ + g(1 – cosθ))
2
v= 2R(asin θ + g(1 – cos θ)) Consider the part OAB;
Let the mass of this strip be ‘dm’
Sol 45: T
θ θ/2 dmv 2
O A
θ/2 R
T
P hysi cs | 4.101
→ → →
⇒ mg sin θ = µ mg cos θ
a net = ar + at ⇒ tan θ = µ ⇒ θ = tan–1(µ).
2
→ v → dv
ar = ; at = =a Hence the angle of inclination has nothing to do with
R dt the mass of the body.
2
→ v2 → v2
a net = (– êr ) + a ( êt ); | a net | = a2 + Here the angles are different because of the change in
R R
‘µ’ from one block to another.
→
f = m| a net |
Sol 3: (A) a
∴ Under static conditions
2
F m2
2
v2 m1 m3
mmg = m a +
R
v = [(m2g2 – a2)R2]1/4
Now let us say the whole system moves with an
acceleration ‘a’.
m1 F – N1 = m1a; …(ii)
F N1
Ng – m1g= 0; …(iii)
1
Sol 1: (C) A x m1g
(L–x) a
B
m For m2:
λ (linear density) of chain =
L
Now at point A; f
N1 N2 N1 – N2 = m2a; …(iv)
T m2g – f = 0; …(v)
m2 g
m
(L – x)g
L a
4 . 1 0 2 | Forces and Laws of Motion
m g
⇒ F ≥ (m1 + m2 + m3) 2 (from (viii) & (i)) T
µm3 Sol 6: (B) m2
T 700 gm F
Sol 4: (A) µ 2 = 0.4 m1
f = m N = µ mg cos α
T – f = 0 … (iii)
⇒ F1 = µ mg cos α + mg sin α … (i)
N1 + Ma = Mg … (iv)
Now when pushing downwards, friction will be acting
From (i) and (iii);
upwards,
⇒F=f+f
N F2
⇒ F = 2f ; f = µN = µ(mg – ma)
m f
F = µm (g – a)
mg sin θ mg cos θ ⇒F = 2 mm (g – a).
θ
Sol 9: (B) a1
mg
∴ F2 + f = mg sin θ
F2 = mg sin θ – f m1 µ
f = µ mg cos θ µ= 0 m2 m F
⇒ F2 = mg sin θ – µ mg cos θ … (ii)
Given that F1 = nF2
Let us say the whole system moves with an acceleration
∴ mmg cos θ + mg sin θ =n(mg sin θ – mmg cos θ)
a1.
n–1 F
⇒ µ= tan θ ∴ a1 = … (i)
n+1 m1 + m2
m1 g
For maximum force, F; the friction on ‘M’ will be towards
4 . 1 0 4 | Forces and Laws of Motion
µm1g
⇒ a2 = which is constant
m2
P hysi cs | 4.105
T cos θ – f = 0 … (ii) mA – mB
µ ≥ tan q
m2g cos θ = f … (iii) 2mB
N1 A T cos θ
θ
FBD of B;
N1 mg f1
T
B
Acceleration of block will be zero. Since its constrained.
∴ mg + f1 = T sin θ … (i)
f mBg cos θ
mBg sin θ N1 = T cos θ … (ii)
f1 f2
T – f – mBg sin θ = mB aB … (i)
N1 = mBg cos θ … (ii) N1 B N2
FBD of A;
N2
f T Mg
A
Mg – f1 – f2 = Ma … (iii)
mAg cos θ N1 = N2 = T cos θ
mAg sin θ
f2 = µ(N2) = µ T cos θ
4 . 1 0 6 | Forces and Laws of Motion
Mg – 2 µ T cos θ = Ma
T
2µT cos θ
a=g– FBD of B;
M m2 a
a = 4. 7 m/s2 mg
N1 mg – T = ma … (i)
Sol 16: (A, C) N3
A a
FBD of A; A
T
m1g cos θ
m1g sin θ mg sin θ
α
Sol 20: (D) Here; weight of the book is because of the
Gravitational Attraction Between earth and book. There B T
will also be a gravitational force between book and ma
table, which is very small, hence always neglected.
That Gravitational force between table and book form Fnet
mg
an Action-Reaction pair.
ma
∴ = tan α ⇒ a = g tan a
Sol 21: (A) Both assertion and reason are statements of mg
Newton’s laws. Since its acting leftwards, the vehicle should move
→ rightwards.
Sol 22: (A) Momentum = m u .
We have to specify reference frame, because velocities Paragraph 2:
will vary in different frames. So, momentum which
In s’ frame;
implicitly depends on velocity might also very.
FBD of M. y
a
x
Comprehension Type
m
Paragraph 1:
M
θ
B
α
T2 cos α
a
α T2
A Nθ
T2 sin α
Ti
θ
mg
N1 Mg
T2 cos α = mg ; T2 sin α = T1
N sin θ = Ma … (i)
⇒ T2 = mg seca; T1 = mg tana
N cos θ + Mg = N1 … (ii)
Now just after the string AB is cut;
FBD of m;
T2 = mg cos θ
N + ma sin θ
α
T2 B ma
mg sin θ + ma cos θ
mg cos θ
θ mg
mg sin θ
mg cos θ
mg N + ma sin θ = mg cos θ … (iii)
Now when string BC is cut; mg sin θ + ma cos θ = ma’ … (iv)
Mass ‘m’ will just have force fall. Hence tension in string from (i) and (iii);
AB is zero.
N = mg cos θ – mg sin θ
Now suppose it is keep in a moving automobile;
Now in equation (i)
In automobile’s frame of reference, there is a pseudo
N sin θ = Ma
force acting on the mass.
(mg cos θ – ma sin θ) sin θ = Ma
The resultant force should be along BC.
4 . 1 0 8 | Forces and Laws of Motion
Now using this value of a, solving equation (iv); ∴ max cos θ = mg sin θ
We get ax = g tan θ in positive x direction,
mgsin θ cos θ
mg sin θ + m cos θ = ma’
2
M + msin θ Paragraph 3:
2
mgsin θ cos θ Given that the plank has very rough surface.
⇒ g sin θ + = a’
M + msin2 θ N
µ >> 0
13 ⇒ tan θ = µ
|aA| = g
3 ⇒ θ = tan–1(0. 8)
F = (0.9) (103).(10) (0. 2 × 1 × 1 × × 10–2) Now for θ = 45º, let us say body is not sliding mg sin
θ–f=0
FB = 18 N.
N = mg cos θ
Now T + FB = W +Fv. T FB
fs = mmg cos θ=mmg/ 2 = 0.8 (mg/ 2 )
T = W + Fv – FB A
mg
Fv = 60 N. f = mg sin θ =
2
T = 48 + 60 – 18 w Fv
But for our assumption;
T = 90 N.
f ≤ fs
mg mg
⇒ ≤ (0. 8)
2 2
4 . 1 1 0 | Forces and Laws of Motion
2 T
v2 θ
f=m + a2 mrw2
r
2
mv 2
f= + (ma)2 and f = mmg mg
r
Resolving into components
T cosθ = mg
Sol 45: (B, D)
T sinθ = mrω2 ; r = L + L sinθ
N cosθ ⇒ T sin θ = mω2 L (1 + sinθ)
N
T sin θ ω2L(1 + sin θ)
⇒ =
N sinθ T cos θ g
mg
θ
C
Sol 47: (B, D) F
N
Although it is true that they are equal and opposite they Sol 52: (B)
can’t cancel each other because of this. N
N cosθ
Sol 49: (C)
N θ
N sinθ
N cosθ = mg
θ mv 2
N sinθ =
R
So bending inwards is always essential. He does it so
2
as to get horizontal component of normal force as
N sin θ = mv
R centripetal force. Although bending lowers his center of
gravity, it’s not the reason.
N cos θ = mg
It is not the friction between the tyres that provide him Sol 53: (A)
centripetal force, but it is component of Normal force. N
R For equilibrium;
fs
→ dv fs = mg
and also a t =
dt mN = mg
dv µv 2
=– µ.mv 2
dt R And this is = mg
R mg
dv µ
= – . dt Rg
v2 R v=
µ
Integrating both sides
v t v
dv µ 1 µt Match the Columns
∫ v 2
=–
R ∫ dt ⇒– =–
R
v0 0 v v0
Sol 61: mv 2c
1 1 µt R
= +
v v0 R C
mg
µv 2 T
Sol 57: (B) at = – T mvB2
R D
B R
dv dv dx dv
at = = . =v
dt dx dt dx
A u = 3 Rg
dv µv 2
⇒v =–
dx R At point B;
dv µ mvB2
=– dx TB =
v R R
Integrating both sides; And also total energy at point A;
v x
dv µ 1
E= m(u)2 + UA
∫ v
=–
R ∫ dx 2
v0 0
Now assume ground at the point A itself
v µx
ln = – ∴ UA = 0
v0 R
µx
– 1 9mRg
v = v0 e R EA = m (9Rg) =
2 2
vB = 7gR 1 1 2
m(10)2 = m( vB ) + mg(1). [R = 1, vA= 10, m = 1]
2 2
mvB2
and TB = = 7mg vB = 80 m/s
R
for point C; and similarly
mv 2c 1 1
Tc + mg = EA = EC ⇒ (10)2 = v 2C + g(2)
R 2 2
mv 2c vc = 60 m/s
Tc = – mg
R
∴ from (i), (ii), (iii)
Total energy at point C is TA = 10 + 100 = 110 N
1 TB = 80 N
Ec = mv 2c + mg(2R)
2
TC = 50 N
1
Ec = mv 2c + 2mgR ∴ minimum tension is 50 N
2
When string is horizontal i.e. at point B;
Ec = EA
1 9mgR
⇒ mv 2c + 2mgR = T mv 2
2 2
R
mv 2c 5mgR
= ⇒ vc = 5gR mg
2 2
mv 2c
→
vB2
∴ Tc = – mg = 5mg – mg = 4 mg
ar = = 80 m/s2 (– î )
R R
→
a t = g = 10 m/s2 (– ˆj )
Sol 62: VC C → → →
VB a net = ar + a t
→
D | a net | = (80)2 + (10)2
B
→
| a | = 10 65 m/s2
mv 2A vc
At point A; TA = mg + ... (i)
R mg
mvB2
At point B; TB = ... (ii) T
R
mv 2C
At point C; TC = – mg ... (iii)
R
1
→ → v 2c
Energy at point A = mv 2A (point A is assumed to be ∴ a net = a r = = 60 m/s2
2 R
ground)
P hysi cs | 4.115
3 3 Equation of motion of M1
mmg cosθ = (2) (10) = 21.21 N = F2 (say)
2 2 T + F1 – f1 = M1a ... (i)
or T = 4a
(a) Force required to move the block down the plane
with constant velocity. Equation of motion M2
F2 F2 – T – f2 = M2a
F
v or 7.84 – T = 2a ... (ii)
Solving eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
M3
F1 and F2 both will be acing downwards.
F = F1 + F2 = 31.21 N T
µM3g
Sol 4: Maximum force of friction between M1 and
inclined plane Sol 6: F
f1 = m1M1g cos θ = (0. 75)(4)(9. 8)(0.8) = 23.52 N θ
C
R R–h
N θ
r
h 60° P
mg
O
m g R mg
F = kx = =
4
R 4 ω
m1 m2
The free body diagram of the ring will be as shown. r1 × r2
mg r
Here, F = kx =
4
and N = Normal reaction.
(b) Tangential acceleration aT : The ring will move Free body diagram of m1 and m2 with respect to ground
forwards the x-axis just after the release. So net force m1 m2
T+f T
along x-axis
T = m2r2w2 … (i)
Since, m2r2w2 < m1r1w2
y Therefore, m1r1w2 > T
and friction on m1 will be inward (toward centre)
N
60°
f + T = m1r1w2 … (ii)
60°
F from equations (i) and (ii), we get
O 60°
ax f = m1r1w2 – m2r2w2 … (iii)
mg = (m1r1 – m2r2)w 2
5 3 f = (m1r1 – m2r2) w2
Fx = mg
8 Masses will start slipping when this force is greater than
Therefore, tangential acceleration of the ring, fmax or
Fx 5 3 (m1r1 – m2r2)w2 > fmax > mm1g
aT = ax = = g
m 8 ∴ Minimum value of ω is
Normal reaction N : Net force along y-axis on the ring
just after the release will be zero. µm1g 0.5 × 10 × 9.8
wmin = =
m1r1 – m2r2 10 × 0.124 – 5 × 0.176
Fy = 0
∴ N + F cos 60° = mg cos 60° wmin = 11.67 rad/s
(a) Masses m1 and m2 are at rest with respect to rotating (fmax)A = µA(mg cos 45°)
table. 2 2mg
= (mg/ 2)=
Let f be the friction between mass m1 and table. 3 3
P hysi cs | 4.119
be equal to 2 2
2
Similarly acceleration of B down the plane,
or fA + fB = F = mg/ 2
aB = g sin 45° – µB g cos 45°
Now since the blocks will start moving from block B first
(if they move), therefore, fB will reach its limiting value 1 1
(10) – (0.3)(10) = 3.5 2 m/s
2
first and if still some force is needed, it will be provided
2 2
by fA
The front face of A and B will come in a line when,
Here, (fmax)B < F
sA = sB + 2
Therefore, fB will be in its limiting value and rest will be
provided by fA. 1 2 1 2
or a t = aBt + 2
2mg 2 A 2
Hence fB = (fmax)B =
3 1 1
× 4 2 × t2 = × 3. 5 2 × t2 + 2
mg 2 2
mg 2mg
and fA = F – fB = – =
2 3 3 2 Solving this equation, we get t = 2s
1 2 1
Further, sA = at = × 4 2 × (2)2 = 8 2 m
2 A 2
Hence, both the blocks will come in a line after A has
travelled a distance 8 2 m down the plane.
4 . 1 2 0 | Forces and Laws of Motion
µ
Equating equation (i) and (ii), we get t = 2m2
α v1' = m1 – m2 v + v2
m +m 1
µ 1 2 m1 + m2
For t > , F > (fr)max i.e. , the bead starts sliding.
α c 1 –5
–2= v1 + 0 (as v2 = 0)
In the figure Ft is perpendicular to the paper inwards. 1 +5
∴ v1 = 3 ms–1
Sol 14: (A) Since, the block
rises to the same heights in m2 – m1 2m1
v0 v 2'
all the four cases, from = v2 + v1
conservation of energy, m2 + m1 m1 + m2
speed of the block at
2×1
highest point will be same N + mg =0+ (3) = 1 ms
–1
C
N
F P
O
Natural length of spring is 3R/4. If θ = 45º then cos θ = sin θ hence block will be at rest.
3 R R
∴ Extension in the spring x = R – = If plane is rough & θ > 45° then sin θ > cos θ so friction
4 4
will act up the plane
m g R mg
⇒ Spring force, F = kx = 4 = 4 If plane is rough & θ < 45 then cos θ > sin so friction will
R
act down the plane so (A, C) are correct
The free body diagram of the ring will be as shown.
mg
Here, F = kx = and N = Normal reaction. Sol 20: (D) Initially bead is applying radially inward
4 normal force.
(b)Tangential acceleration aT the ring will move
During motion at an instant, N = 0, after that N will act
forwards the x-axis just after the release. So, net force
radially outward.
along x-axis
Sol 21: (D) Condition for not sliding,
fmax > (m1 + m2) g sin θ
y mN > (m1 + m2) g sin θ
0.3 m2 g cos θ ≥ 30 sin θ
N
60° 6 ≥ 30 tan θ
60°
F 1/5 ≥ tan θ
O 60°
ax 0.2 ≥ tan θ
mg ∴ for P, Q
m g 3 3 f = (m1 + m2) g sin θ
Fx = F sin 60° + mg sin60° = + mg
4 2 2 For R and S
5 3
Fx = mg F = fmax = mm2g sin θ
8
2017-18 100 &
op kers
Class 11 T
By E ran culty
-JE Fa r
IIT enior emie .
S fP r es
o titut
Ins
PHYSICS
FOR JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
SECOND
EDITION
Exhaustive Theory
(Now Revised)
Formula Sheet
9000+ Problems
based on latest JEE pattern
PlancEssential
Questions recommended for revision
5. WORK, ENERGY AND
POWER
1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter explains the concepts of work and energy and how these quantities are related to each other. The
law of conservation of energy is an important tool in physics, for the analysis of motion of a system of particles or
bodies, and in understanding various phenomena in nature. When the nature of forces involved in a process are
not exactly known, or when we want to avoid complicated calculations, then the law of conservation of energy
proves to be an indispensable tool in solving many problems. The importance of energy cannot be explained in
words. The progress of science and civilization is based on finding new ways to efficiently use the energy available
in nature in various forms. Energy is required by a person to perform his/her daily activities, as well as to run our
automobiles and machines. Depletion of natural energy resources is a major concern these days. The efficiency
of energy utilization processes and quantity of energy sources harnessed by a country determines the pace of its
economic development.
2. WORK
2.1 Work
In physics, a force is said to do work only when it acts on a body, and if there is a consequential displacement of
the point of application in the direction of the force.
For example, say if a constant force F displaces a body through displacement s then the work done, W, is given by
W Fscos
= = θ F.s
where s is magnitude of displacement and θ is angle between force and displacement. The SI unit of work is Joule
or Newton-metre.
Sign Convention of Work
F
0 Direction of Motion
F 0 Direction of Motion
then W = Fs cos θ =− ve
i.e., in this case force is not truly supporting the motion of the body and hence the work done by that force is said
to be negative.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Students should be able to deduce that by positive work, force is actually doing what it is meant for, i.e.
force wants to move a body in certain direction and if it moves in that direction then it’s positive work.
Anurag Saraf (JEE 2011, AIR 226)
( ) ( )
Illustration 1: Assume that a body is displaced from rA = 2m, 4m,− 6m to rB = 6i − 4 j + 2k m under a constant
force F = ( 2i + 3j − k ) N . Now, calculate the total work done. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The work done by the constant force
F during displacement S of a particle is scalar product of force and
displacement and is given by W = F • S
∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧
rA = 2 i + 4 j − 6k mS =rB − rA = 6 i − 4 j + 2k − 2 i + 4 j − 6k =4 i − 8 j + 8k
∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧ ∧
W =F.S = 2 i + 3 j − k . 4 i − 8 j + 8k =8 − 24 − 8 =( −24 j)
Illustration 2: A block of total mass 5 kg is being raised vertically upwards with the help of a string attached to it
and it rises with an acceleration of 2 m/s2. Find the work done due to the tension in the string if the block rises by
2.5 m. Also, calculate the work done due to the gravity and the net work done. (JEE ADVANCED)
P hysics | 5.3
Sol: The tension in the string is acting vertically upwards and the block is also moving vertically
T
upwards, so the work done by the tension will be positive. The force of gravity is acting vertically
downwards so the work done by gravity will be negative. m a
Let us first calculate the tension T. mg
From the force diagram T-mg = 5a; T = 5(9.8 + 2) = 59 N.
Figure 5.3
As it is clear that both T and displacement S are in the same direction (upwards), then work done
by the tension T is W based on which we calculate that W = Ts
= 59(2.5) = 147.5 J .
Now, work done due to gravity = –mgs = –5(9.8) (2.5) = –122.5 J
Therefore, net work done on the block = work done by T + work done by mg = 147.5+ (–122.5) = 25 J.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
b
a
F(x) F(x)
F(x)
d
0 xi xf x 0 xi x xf x
Illustration 3: A force=F (10 + 0.50X) is observed to act on a particle in the x direction, where F is in newton and
x in meter. Find the actual work done by this force during a displacement from x=0 to x=2.0 m. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: If a particle is being displaced under action of variable force, the work done by this force is calculated as
s
W = ∫ 2 F • ds .
s1
As we know that the force is a variable quantity, we shall find the work done in a small displacement from x to x +
5 . 4 | Work, Energy and Power
dx and then integrate the resultant value to calcuate the total work done. The work done in this small displacement
is calculated as 2.0 2.0
x2
dW
= F.dx
= ∫ (10 + 0.50x ) dx
(10 + 0.50x ) dx . Thus, W = =+
10x 0.50 =
2
21 J.
0 0
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
The work done by the frictional force is either negative or zero, but never positive. The frictional force
always resists the attempted work done along a horizontal surface. Work done along a horizontal surface
is given by: - µmgl , where
v v
V V
f f
mg mg
l
Figure 5.5
Illustration 4: It is observed that a block of mass 4 kg slides down a plane inclined at 37o with the horizontal. The
length of the plane is calculated to be of 3 m. The value of the coefficient of sliding friction between the block and
the plane is 0.2. Based on the above, find the work done due to the gravity, the frictional force, and the normal
reaction between the block and the plane. (JEE MAIN)
P hysics | 5.5
Sol: Normal reaction is always perpendicular to the inclined plane hence it is perpen-
dicular to the displacement and thus the work done by it is zero. Whereas the frictional
force is in opposite direction to the displacement and hence the work done by the
firctional force is negative. The work done by the component of gravitational force o
along the inclined plane will be positive.
Total force acting on the block moving on inclined plane constitutes frictional force, Figure 5.6
normal reaction due to ground and gravitational force acting on wire. The work done
on block is given as
= W Fs cos θ
As the normal reaction is perpendicular to the point of displacement, work done by
the normal reaction R = R s cos 90° = 0. The magnitude of displacement s = 3 m and s
the angle between force of gravity (mg) and displacement is equal to (90°-37°). R
Therefore, work done by gravity = mgs cos (90°-37°)
mgs sin 370 4=
== x 9.8 x 3 x 3 / 5 70.56 J mg
Work done by friction = –(µR)s = –(µ mg cos 37°)s = –0.2 × 4 × 9.8 × 4 / 5 × 3 = –18.816 J. Figure 5.7
6. POWER
Power is defined as the rate at which the actual work is done. If an amount of work ∆W is done in time ∆t , then
∆W ∆W dW
average power, Pn = and instantaneous= power, P Lim= .
∆t ∆t →0 ∆t dt
It is a well-known fact that work done by a force F on an object that has infinitesimally small displacement ds is
dW Fds
dw=F.ds. Then, instantaneous power,
= P = = F. v .
dt dt
The S I unit of power is Watt (W) or Joule/second (J/s) and it is a scalar quantity. Dimensions of power is M1L2 T −3 .
Illustration 5: A block of mass m is allowed to slide down a fixed smooth inclined plane of angle θ and length .
Calculate the magnitude of power developed by the gravitational force when the block reaches the bottom.
(JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: The power dlivered by the force F is the scalar product of the force and velocity i.e. P = F.v
When body reaches bottom of the inclined plane the velocity of of body= is v =
2gh 2g• sin θ and the angle
between velocity and vertical will be ( 90 − θ ) . =
o
P F. V= mgsin θ 2g sin θ= 2m2g3 sin3 θ .
Illustration 6: A particle of mass m is moving in a circular path of constant radius r such that its centripetal
2 2
accelecration aC is varying with time t as ac = k rt , where k is a constant. The power delivered to the particle by
the force acting on it is (JEE MAIN)
7. ENERGY
Generally, the energy of a body is signified by the body’s capacity to do work. It is a scalar quantity and shares
the same unit as that of work (Joule in SI unit). In mechanics, both kinetic and potential energies are involved with
dynamics of the body.
7.1.2 Definition
∆U = -WAB where A is the initial state, B is the final state, and WAB is the total work done by conservative forces. We
know that potential energy depends upon the work done by conservative force only. Hence, it cannot be defined
for the nonconservative force (s). This is because of the proven fact that in this type work done depends upon the
path followed alone.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
GPE is always thought of as only of block. But to be more specific it is the energy of block-earth system.
Potential energy never comes in context of a single particle. It is always for a configuration. In the case
of GPE, writers however generally skip writing “Earth” each time.
Chinmay S Purandare (JEE 2012, AIR 698)
7.1.6 Spring
In case of a spring, natural length of the spring is assumed to be the reference point and correspondingly is always
assigned zero potential energy (This is a universal assumption.). However, in gravity, we can choose any point as
P hysics | 5.7
l0 1
For Stretching
Xi l0
f 1
− ∫ kx ( −i )( dx )i ;U = kx12
− ∫ F.dS ;Uf − 0 =
Uf − Ui =
i 0
2 l0 -x +ve
x
For Compression
f Xi Figure 5.9: Energy stored
1
Uf − Ui =− ∫ F.dS =− ∫ kxi ( dx )( −i ) =U = kx2 in compressed spring
i 0
2
Thus, if the spring is either stretched or compressed from natural length by x the corresponding potential energy
is 1 / 2kx2
r
A B
U+U
Figure 5.10
Let us assume that a body is taken from A to B in such away that there is no net change in its kinetic engery. Then
8. EQUILIBRIUM
We have already studied in the chapter on “Laws of Motion” that a body is said to be in translatory equilibrium only
if net force acting on the body is zero, i.e., Fnet
net
==00
dU
However, if the forces are conservative, then F = − ; for equilibrium, then
dr
5 . 8 | Work, Energy and Power
dU dU
F = 0; =
Thus, − 0, or
= 0
dr dr
i.e., exactly at the equilibrium position the slope of U-r graph is zero or the potential energy is optimum (maximum
or minimum or constant). Equilibria are of three types, i.e., stable equilibrium, unstable equilibrium, and neutral
equilibrium. Further, the situations where F = 0 and dU/dr = 0 can be obtained only under three conditions as
specified hereunder.
d2U
(a) If > 0, then it is stable equilibrium;
dr 2
d2U
(b) If < 0, then it is unstable equilibrium; and
dr 2
d2U
(c) If = 0, then it is neutral equilibrium.
dr 2
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
A system always wants to minimize its energy. The above equilibriums are categorized only on this
basis. Stable indicates that if system is disturbed slightly, from these configuration, it would try to come
back to its original state (position of energy minima). For unstable equilibrium, a slight disturbance
would cause the system to find some other suitable configuration (position of energy maxima). A neutral
equilibrium is generally found when U becomes constant and each position is a state of equilibrium. A
slight disturbance has no after reactions and the new state is also an equilibrium position.
Anurag Saraf (JEE 2011, AIR 226)
Illustration 7: The potential energy of a particle of mass 5 kg, moving in xy plane, is given by U = (-7x + 24y)J
∧ ∧
=
where x and y being in meters. Initially (at t=0), the particle is at the origin and has velocity v 14.4 i + 4.2 j m / s .
Then Calculate (a) the acceleration of the particle and (b) the direction of acceleration of the particle. (c) The speed
of the particle at t = 4 s. (JEE MAIN)
dU
Sol: If particle has potential energy U then corresponding conservative force, is F = − and according to the
dr
ay
Newton’s second law of motion F = ma . The direction of acceleration is calculated as tan θ = .
ax
(a) Acceleration,
δU δU
Fx = ,F = − ⇒ Fx =
7N, Fy =
− 24N; ⇒ ax =
7 / 5, ay =
−24 / 5
δx y δy
ay
(b) Direction of acceleration θ =tan−1 ;
ax
7 24
(c) v = u + a t ; v x = 14.4 + × 4 = 20 ; v y =4.2 − × 4 =( −15 )
5 5
Illustration 8: The potential energy of a particle in a certain field has the form U= a/r2 – b/r, where a and b are
positive constants and r is the distance from the center of the field. Find the value of r0 corresponding to equilibrium
position of the particles and hence examine whether this position is stable. (JEE ADVANCED)
dU
Sol: Conservative force acting on the particle is F = − . Under stable equilibrium particle has minimum potential
dr
P hysics | 5.9
U(r) a / r 2 − b / r
=
Force =
F=
−
dU
=
−2a b
− + ; F= −
(br − 2a)
dr r3 r2 r3
dU
At equilibrium, then=F = 0
dr
Hence, br – 2a = 0 at equilibrium.
Further, r = r0 = 2a/b corresponds to equilibrium.
At stable equilibrium, the potential energy of a particle is at its minimum, whereas at unstable equilibrium, it is the
maximum. From the principles of calculus, we know that for minimum value around a point r = r0, the first derivative
should be zero and the second derivative should be invariably positive.
For minimum potential energy, the applicable conditions are
dU d2U
=0 and >0 at r=
r0
dr dr 2
However, we have already used dU/dr = 0 to obtain r = r0 = 2a/b.
Now, in a similar way let us investigate the second derivative.
d2U d dU d 2a b 6a 2b
= = − + = −
dr 2 dr dr dr r3 r 2 r 4 r3
d2U 6a − 2br0 2a
At r= r0= 2a / b, = = > 0.
dr 2 r04 r04
Based on our calculations, the potential energy function U(r) has a minimum value only when r0 = 2a / b . Therefore,
we conclude that the system has stable equilibrium only at the minimum potential energy state.
Illustration 9: Find how much will mass “m” rise if 4 m falls away. Block are at rest and in equilibrium (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Initially the block is at rest. When the block rises to the maximum height, it again comes to rest momentarily.
So, by work energy theorem the total work done on the block by force of gravity and spring force is zero.
Applying work energy theorem (WET) on a block of mass m
Wg + Wsp = K.E.f − K.E.i k
Let the final displacement of the block from the initial equilibrium is x. Then
m
5mg 1 25m g 2 2 1 2 1 15m g 2 2
3mg 4m
− mg +X+ k = 0; kx2 + mgx −
− kx = 0; x
=
k 2 k 2 2 2k k
2
Figure 5.11
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Whenever there is frictional force, energy is dissipated which is equal to work done by frictional force
and the dissipated energy converts into heat. Practically, machine handlers do a lot of things to minimize
friction and reduce energy losses by applying lubricants and rollers in their parts.
Yashwanth Sandupatla (JEE 2012, AIR 821)
Illustration 10: A body of mass m was slowly hauled up the hill as shown in the Fig. 5.12 provided by a force F
which at each point was directed along a tangent to the trajectory. Find the work done due to this force if the
height of the hill is h, the length of its base is l, and the coefficient of friction is m. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: As block hauls slowly, the kinetic energy will not change throughout the motion.
And the sum of the work done by applied force, gravitational force, normal reaction
and frictional force will be zero as per work energy theorem.
Fi m
h
The four forces that are acting on the body are listed hereunder.
(a) Weight (mg),
(b) Normal reaction (N), l
Figure 5.12
(c) Friction (f), and
(d) The applied force (F)
According to the principle of work-energy theorem ds B
Wnet= ∆ KE or Wmg+WN+Wf+WF = 0 … (i)
F
0, because K i= 0= K f ∴ Wmg = − mgh; WN = 0
Here, ∆KE = A
f dl
(This is because the normal reaction is perpendicular to displacement at all the points.) Figure 5.13
Wf can be calculated as f =
µ mgcos θ
P2
W= ∫ (Fx dx + FY dy + Fz dz ) P1 Figure 5.14
P2
It is very clear for us now that a particle moves along a curved path from point P1 to P2, only when acted upon by
P2 P2
mdν x dVx
a force F that varies in both magnitude and direction.=
Fx ma
= x
; ∫ Fx dx = ∫ m dx
dt P1 P1
dt
Treating now ν x as a function of position, we obtain:
P P P P2 ν
dν x dν dx dν dν 2 2 dν x 2 dν 1 2 x2
dt
= x = x . ν x =ν x x ; ∴ ∫ Fx dx =
dx dt dx dx ∫ m
dt
dx =∫ m ν x x dx=
dx ∫ m ν x dν x= 2
1
2
(
mν x ∫= m ν2x2 − ν2x1 )
P P 1 1P 1 P1 ν x1
W
=
1 2
2 ( )
1
2
( )
M ν x2 + ν y22 + ν z22 − ν x12 + ν y12 + ν z12 = M ν22 − ν12 ; W=
1
2
1
mν22 − mν12
2
1
K
Define: = mν2 ≡ Kinetic energy of particle
2
KE: Potential of a particle to do work by virtue of its velocity.
We know that the work done on the particle by the net force equals the change in KE of the particle.
W
= ⇒ W = ∆K Work–Energy Theorem.
K 2 − K1 or
1
For a particle P = Mv (linear momentum); ∴ K = P2
2m
Regarding KE, the following two points are very significant.
(a) Since, both m and v2 are always positive, KE is always positive and hence does not depend on the directional
parameter of motion of the body.
(b) KE depends on the frame of reference. For example, the KE of a person of mass m in a train moving with speed
1
v is zero in the frame of train, whereas in the frame of earth the KE is mv 2 for the same person.
2
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Illustration 11: A uniform chain of length ℓ and mass m overhangs a smooth table with its two-third parts lying on
the table. Find the kinetic energy of the chain as it completely slips off the table. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The initial kinetic energy of the chain is zero. When chain start slipping off table the loss in its potential energy
is equal to the gain in its kinetic energy.
Let us take the potential energy at the table as zero. Now, consider a part dx of the chain at a depth x below the
m
(
surface of the table. The mass of this part is dm = dx and hence its potential energy is − m / dx gx.
)
/3
m
The potential energy of the one-third of the chain that overhangs is given by U=
1 ∫ − gx dx
0
/3
m x2 1
− g
= − mg
=
2 18
0
However, this is also the potential energy of the full chain in the initial position; this is because the part lying on the
table has zero potential energy. Now, we can calculate the potential energy of the chain when it completely slips
off the table as
dx
Figure 5.15
m 1
− mg The loss in potential energy is = − 1 mg − − 1 mg = 4 mg .
∫ − gx dx =
U2 =
0
2 18 2 9
Basically, this should be equal to the gain in the KE in this case. However, the initial KE is zero. Hence, the KE of the
4
chain as it completely slips off the table is mg .
9
Illustration 12: A block of mass m is pushed against a spring of spring constant k fixed at one end to a wall. The
block can slide on a frictionless table as shown in the Fig. 5.16. The natural length of the spring is taken as L 0 and
it is compressed to half its natural length when the block is released. Now, based on the above find the velocity of
the block as a function of its distance x from the wall. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: The block will move under action of restoring force of spring when spring is released. The block will have
constant kinetic energy when it looses contact with the spring. In this process the energy of system will be conserved
as there are no external forces acting on the system. (Spring + block system)
m
k
v
Lo/2
x
Figure 5.16
When the block is released, naturally the spring pushes it toward right. The velocity of the block keep on inreasing
till the block loses contact with the spring and thereafter moves with constant velocity.
P hysi cs | 5.13
Initially, the compression of the spring is L0 / 2 . But when the distance of the block from the wall becomes x, where
( )
x < L 0 , the compression is L 0 − x . Applying the principle of conservation of energy
2 1/2
k L0 2
2
1 L0 1 1
k (L0 − x ) + mv 2 . Solving this, v = − (L 0 − x )
2
k =
2 2 2 2 m 4
k L0
Thus, when the spring acquires its natural length, then x = L 0 and v = . Thereafter, the velocity of the block
remains constant. m 2
v 2 =v 20 + 2gh =v 02 + 2gr (1 + cos θ ) (Because there is no actual work done due to the influence of tension)
The particle will now fall because the string will slacken if Tc is negative. Therefore, the minimum velocity at the
v2
highest point is corresponding to the situation where Tc is just zero, i.e., when m 0 −=g 0, or=v0 rg
r
v2
(ii) At the lowest point B, θ =0 , tension TB is given by
= TB m B + g
r
5rg
Minimum tension at B when the particle completes the circle is given by T=
B m + g=
6mg
r
0 mvE2
At the point E, when
= θ 90
= , TE
r
Where velocity at E is given by VE =Vc2 + 2rg =rg + 2rg =3rg; VE = 3rg
5 . 1 4 | Work , Energy and Power
3rg N
Tension at E corresponding to speed =
VE is TE m=
3mg
r
(iii) In another case the particle of mass m is not tied to the string but is moving along a
r
circular track of radius r and has normal reaction N. However, it is moving with a velocity v
mv 2
and its radius vector is subtending an angle θ with the vertical, then mg cos θ − N = .
2 r mg
mv
At the highest point, mg − N = ; when ... (iii) Figure 5.18
r
N 0,=
= V rg Therefore, V = rg is the minimum speed with which the particle can move at the highest point
without losing contact.
P
Condition of Looping the Loop (u ≥ 5gR ) Vmin= gR T=0
The particle will complete the circle only if the string does not slack even
at the highest point (θ=π). Thus, tension in the string should be obviously
O
greater than or equal to zero (T ≥ 0) at θ=π. In the critical case, however, by
substituting T = 0 and θ=π in Eq. (iii), we obtain R
2
mvmin 2
mg= or vmin =gR or vmin = gR (at the highest point) u Umin= 5gR
R A T= 6mg
2 2 2
Therefore, from Eq. (ii) u=
min vmin + 2gh or umin
= gR + 2g(2R) or umin = 5gR
At u = 5gR , the velocity at the highest point is v = gR and the tension in the string is zero.
By substituting θ = 0° and v = 5gR in Eq. (iii), we get T = 6mg or in the critical condition tension in the string at
the lowest position is 6mg as shown in the Fig. 5.19. If u < 5gR , then the following two cases are possible.
If u < 5gR , then the tension in the string will be zero before reaching the highest point. From Eq. (iii), tension in
2
−v2 2gh − u
the string is zero (T=0) where, cos θ = or cos θ =
Rg Rg
2gh − u2 h u2 + Rg
Now, by substituting, this value of cosθ in Eq. (i), we obtain = 1− = or h = h1 (say) … (iv)
Rg R 3g
v
T=0
P
v0
O hR
u
A
Figure 5.20
Or, in other words, we can say that at height h1 tension in the string becomes zero. Further, if u < 5gR , then the
P hysi cs | 5.15
u2
0 u2 − 2gh or=
velocity of the particle becomes zero when = h = h2 (say) ... (v)
2g
i.e., at height h2 velocity of the particle becomes zero. Now, the particle will move out from the circle if tension
alone in the string becomes zero but not the velocity or T=0 but v ≠ 0 . This is possible only when h1 < h2 or
u2 + Rg u2
< or 2u2 + 2Rg < 3u2 or u2 > 2Rg or u > 2Rg .
3g 2g
Therefore, if 2gR < u < 5gR , the particle moves out from the circle.
2
From Eq.(iv), we observe that h >R if u > 2Rg . Thus, the particle, will move out of the circle when h>R or
90° < θ < 180° . This situation is shown in the Fig. 4.75.
Note, however, that after leaving the circle, the particle will follow a parabolic path.
v=0
N0
u hR
Figure 5.21
u2 u2 + Rg
Or < or 3u2 < 2u2 + 2Rg or u2 < 2Rg or u < 2Rg
2g 3g
Moreover, if h1 = h2 , u = 2Rg then both tension and velocity becomes zero simultaneously.
Further, from Eq (iv), we observe that h ≤ R if u ≤ 2Rg . Thus, for 0 < u ≤ 2gR , the particle oscillates in the lower
half of the circle (0° < θ ≤ 90°) . This situation is shown in the Fig. 5.21. (0 < u < 2gR ) or (0° < θ ≤ 90°)
Note: The above three conditions have been derived for a particle that is moving only in a vertical circle and
attached to a string. The same conditions apply, however, if a particle moves inside a smooth spherical shell also of
radius R. The only difference here is that the tension is replaced by the normal reaction N.
v= gR, N=0
Condition of Looping the Loop is (u ≥ 5gR ) v
u= 5gR, N=6mg
Figure 5.22
5 . 1 6 | Work , Energy and Power
N=0
v v0
Condition of Leaving the Circle ( 2gR < u < 5gR )
hR
Figure 5.23
Figure 5.24
Illustration 31: A heavy particle hanging from a fixed point by a light inextensible string of length l is projected
horizontally with speed gl . Now, find the speed of the particle and the inclination of the string to the vertical at
the instant of the motion when the tension in the string is equal to the weight of the particle. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: Loss in the kinetic energy of the particle is equal to the gain in the potential energy. Apply Newton’s second
law along the direction of the string.
T
B
h mg cos
mg sin
A u= gl
Figure 5.25
2 gl
Further, by substituting cos θ = in Eq. (iv), we obtain v =
3 3
P hysi cs | 5.17
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
If a particle of mass m is connected to a light rod and whirled in a vertical circle of radius R, then
to complete the circle, the minimum velocity of the particle at the bottommost point is not 5gR .
Because, in this case, velocity of the particle at the topmost point can be zero also. Using conservation
of mechanical energy between points A and B as shown in Fig. 5.26(a) we get
B
v=0
O h=2R
R R
u
A
u 2 gR u 2 gR
dR
(a) (b)
Figure 5.26
1 1
m(u2 − v 2 ) =
mgh or mu2 = mg(2R) (as v = 0) ∴ u = 2 gR
2 2
Our discussion above holds good in this case too, but instead of tension in the string
we have the normal reaction of the surface. If we take N is the normal reaction at the
O
mv12 v2
lowest point, then N − mg
= = m 1 + g However, at the highest point of the
; N
r r
mv 2 V1
circle, N + mg =2
r
mg
v2
N =m 2 − g ; N ≥0 ⇒ Implies the condition V1 ≥ 5rg
r Figure 5.27: Block moving
inside hollow sphere
In the same way as shown above, all the other equations similarly can be obtained by
just replacing tension T by reaction N.
Consider the point C where the mass is, at a certain instant. Now, the acting
forces are the normal reaction R and the weight mg. Further, the radial C
component of the weight is mg cosθ acting toward the center. The
mv 2 h
centripetal force in this case is taken as mg cos θ − R =
r
where v is the velocity of the body at O. ground
v2 Figure 5.28: Motion of body on
=R m g cos θ − … (i)
r spherical surface
Now, it is clear that the body flies off the surface at the point where R becomes zero.
mv 2
i.e..,g cos φ − R = … (ii)
r
To find v, we apply the principle of conservation of energy
1
i.e., mv 2 = mg(BN)= mg (OB − ON)= mgr (1 − cos φ)
2
v2
v 2= 2rg (1 − cos φ); 2(1 − cos φ=
) … (iii)
rg
From equations (ii) and (iii), we obtain
cos φ= 2 − 2cos φ; 3cos φ= 2
2 2
=cos φ ;= φ cos−1 … (iv)
3 3
This exactly denotes the angle at which the body goes off the surface. The height from the ground of that point is
2 5
= AN = r(1 + cos φ) = r 1 + = r
3 3
Illustration 32: A point mass m starts from rest and slides down the surface of a frinctionless solid sphere of radius
R as shown in the Fig. 5.29 provided. At what angle will this body break off the surface of the sphere? Also, find the
velocity with which it will break off. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: As the block slides down, the loss in potential energy is equal to gain in kinetic A
energy and at time of break off, the normal reaction from the sphere on block is N
m
zero.
R B
Applying princliple of conservation of energy (COE), at the points A and B
O v
1
mgR (1 − cos θ) = mv 2 … (i)
2 R m
2
Force equation in this equation is mg cos θ − N =mv / R … (ii)
N = 0 for break off. Figure 5.29
∴v
= gR cos θ … (iii)
Illustration 33: A heavy particle is suspended by a string of length . The horizontal velocity of the particle is v 0 .
However, the string becomes slack at some angle and the particle proceeds on a parabolic path. Find the value of
v 0 if the particle passes through the point of suspension. (JEE ADVANCED)
P hysi cs | 5.19
Sol: While particle moves in vertical circle, the tension in the string provides the necessary centripetal force. The
loss in kinetic energy is equal to the gain in potential energy. At point the string become P
slack the tension in the string is zero.
Let us suppose the string becomes slack when the particle reaches the point P. We now
assume that the string OP makes an angle θ with the upward vertical. Further, the only force O
acting on the particle at the point P is its weight mg. Further, the radial component of the
force is mg cos θ . Now, as the particle moves along the circle upto P,
v2
mg = cos θ m ⇒ = v 2 g cos θ … (i)
Figure 5.30
where v is its speed at the point P. Now, applying the principle of conservation of energy
1 1
2
mv 20=
2
mv 2 + mg (1 + cos θ ) or v 2 = v 20 − 2g 1 + cos θ ( ) … (ii)
From hereon, the particle follows a parabolic path due to acceleration due to gravity. Then as it passes through the
point of suspension O, the equations for horizontal and vertical motion give
2
sin θ sin θ
sin
= θ ( v cos θ ) t and − cos
= θ ( v sin θ ) t − 12 gt2 ⇒ − cos
= θ ( v sin θ ) v cos θ − 12 g v cos θ
2
1 2 sin θ sin θ
n θ) t −
2
gt ⇒ − cos
= θ ( v sin θ ) v cos θ − 12 g v cos θ
1 sin2 θ 1 g sin2 θ
or, − cos2 θ= sin2 θ − g or, − cos2 θ= 1 − cos2 θ − From(i)
2 v 2cos θ 2 g cos2 θ
1 sin2 θ 1 g sin2 θ
g or, − cos2 θ= 1 − cos2 θ − From(i)
2 v 2cos θ 2 g cos2 θ
1 1/2
or,=1
2
tan2 θ or, = , v 0 g 2 + √ 3
tan θ √ 2 From (iii) =
( )
1/2
r, =
tan θ √ 2 From (iii) =
(
, v 0 g 2 + √ 3
)
PROBLEM-SOLVING TACTICS
(a) One should always isolate the known and unknown quantities and write equations and solve them.
(b) The next step would be to find out a way from unknown to known quantities and write equations and solve
them.
(c) One should always be very careful in doing so to avoid silly mistakes such as unit change of parameter.
(d) Energy is scalar in nature. However, get a clear idea of what is being gained or lost by which entity.
(e) Physical visualization of any problem will always help in increaseaing confidence in solving equations
pertaining to the same.
(f) Further, problems involving integration would be easy to understand if you go event by event and then solve.
(g) Special cases and boundary conditions of circular motion are definitely recommended to be mastered because
many problems break down to these special cases just after few manipulations.
FORMULAE SHEET
S. NO. DESCRIPTION FORMULA
1 1
1 Kinetic energy of the particle K(v)
= = mv 2 mv. v
2 2
2 Work done by force F
W = F.r (here r is total displacement)
3 Work done by variable force w = ∫ F.dr
dW dr
4 Power generated by force F acting on body P
= = F.= F. v
dt dt
1 2
6 Energy conservation principle K + ∆U 0;=
∆= mv mgh
= or, v 2gh
2
For F = F1 + F2 + .......
9 Work done by variable forces in short range
( )
W= ∫ F.dr= ∫ F1 + F2 + ..... . dr
r
10 For conservative forces, change in potential energy Uf − Ui =− ∫ f F.dr
ri
1 2
11 Elastic Potential Energy U= kx
2
P hysi cs | 5.21
Solved Examples
JEE Main/Boards N
(
the air on the object? g = 10m / s2 )
N
Sol: According to work energy theorem, the total work
done by force of gravity and force of air resistance on mg
object is equal to the change in kinetic energy. ⇒ work done by net force for the displacement
x x
Work done by all forces = Change in KE
∫ F dx ; ⇒
⇒ W= ∆KE =− ∫ ( µ mg + kx ) dx
1
Wair + W gravity =
∆ K .E. ; Wair + mgh =mv 2 0 0
2
1 2 kx2
1 2 1 ⇒ 0 − mv =− µ mgx +
Wair
= mv
= − mgh ; x5 x10 x10 − 5 x10 x 20 2 0 2
2 2
R
Since the block slides and the spring is compressed h2
m1 m2
through a distance x the net retarding force acting on it
= F = − (kx + µN) = − ( µ mg + kx )
v h1
m1
5 . 2 2 | Work , Energy and Power
⇒ The total change in gravitational potential energy Example 5: A 0.5 kg block slides from the point A on
a horizontal track with an initial speed of 3 m/s toward
= ∆PE = −m1gRθ + m2gR sin θ a weightless horizontal spring of length 1 m and force
constant 2 N/m. The part AB of the track is frictionless
= gR (m2 sin θ − m1 θ ) … (i)
and the part BC has the coefficients of static and kinetic
friction as 0.22 and 0.2, respectively. If the distances
=
1 1
∆KE =m1 v 2 + m2 v 2 =
(m1 + m2 ) v 2 … (ii) AB and BD are 2 m and 2.14 m, respectively find the
2 2 2 total distance through which the block moves before it
where v = speed of m1 and m2 at the position as comes to rest completely (Take g = 10m / s2 ) .
shown in the Fig.5.26 provided. From the principle of
conservation of energy, we obtain
= ∆KE + ∆PE = 0 … (iii)
A B D C
Using (i)–(iii), we obtain Sol: The sum of work done by force of friction and
spring force is equal to change in kinetic energy of the
1
(m + m2 ) v 2 − gR (m1θ − m2 sin θ ) = 0
2 1
block.
2gR (m1 θ − m2 sin θ ) Suppose the block comes to rest at the point E, i.e.,
⇒v= let DE = x. The kinetic energy of the block is spent
(m1 + m2 ) in overcoming friction and compressing the spring
through a distance DE = x.
Example 4: A locomotive of mass m starts moving so Kinetic energy of the block
that its velocity varies according to the law v = α s ,
1 12 2 1 1
where α is a constant and s is the distance = covered.
== mv =
mv
; ; = x 0.5
= 0.52 x32.25
xx3 2
2.25
J J … (i)
Find the total work done by all the forces acting on the 2 2 2 2
locomotive during the first second after the beginning As the part AB of the track is frictionless, work done in
of motion. moving from A to B is zero.
Let normal reaction of the block = mg.
Sol: Velocity is given as the function of distance covered
so we can find the acceleration and by second law of C oefficient of friction = µ
motion we can find the force. As force comes out to be
Force due to friction along the track
constant the work done by force is product of force and
displacement. BC = µ mg 0.2
= = x 0.5 x10 1N
Given v = α s Distance through which the block moves against the
frictional force = 2.14 + x m
Differentiating w.r.t. ‘t’, we get
dv 1 −1/2 ds α α α2
= αs = v= xα =
s
dt 2 dt 2 s 2 s 2
α2 A B D C
∴ Acceleration a = 2 2.14 xE
2
m m m
Now, force acting on the locomotive is
Work done by block against friction before it comes to
α2 rest
F ma
= = m ; Here, u = 0
2 =µ mg (2.14 + x); =(2.14 + x) J … (ii)
1
s ut + at2 , we have
Now, using = Let the spring constant = k
2
∴ Work done by the block in compressing the spring
1 α2 2 α2 t2 through distance X
s=
0+ t =
2 2 4
1 2 1 2
Thus total work done on locomotive is when t=1 s is= 2 kx ; = 2= 2x x2 J … (iii)
2.14 + x + x2 2.25;
= x2 + x − 0.11 0
or=
or 100x2 + 100x − 11 = 0 1 2 2h 2
h= gt =
; t = seconds
or (10x + 11)(10x − 1) =
0 2 g 5
11 1 1
∴ x=− or x = ; Since x≠− . Therefore, the horizontal distance traveled by the ball
10 10 10
1 in this time is
∴ x= = 0.1m
10 5 2
d v=
= .t x = 1m
2 5
Restoring force of the spring
= x 0.1 0.2N
= kx 2= … (iv) Example 7: A block of mass 2 kg is pulled up on a
Static frictional force of the block smooth incline of angle 30o with horizontal. If the block
moves with an acceleration of 1m/s2, find the power
µstatic
= x10 1.1N
mg 0.22 x 0.5= … (v) delivered by the pulling force at a time t = 4 s after
motion starts. What is the average power delivered
From (iv) and (v) it is clear that the static frictional
during these four seconds after the motion starts?
force is greater than the restoring force of the spring.
Therefore, the block will not move in the backward
N F
direction. Hence the total distance through which the
block moves before it comes to rest completely is
m
2.00 + 2.14 + 0.10 = 4.24 m
Example 2: A smooth, light horizontal rod AB can depend on time taken by disc to fall vertical height 2R.
rotate about a vertical axis passing through its end A. At point C, for minimum velocity, normal force on the
The rod is fitted with a small sleeve of mass m attached block is zero.
to the end A by a weightless spring of length 0 and
Let the block escape the point at C with a velocity V
stiffness k. What work must be performed to slowly get
horizontally. Since it hits the initial spot A after falling
this system going and reach the angular velocity ω?
( ) (
thorugh a height 2R we can write 2R = 1 / 2 gt
2
)
Sol: When system starts moving about a point A, the where t = time of its fall
spring force provides the necessary centripetal force to ⇒t=2 R/g
the sleeve of mass m to move with angular speed ω .
The work done by external agent will be equal to the ∴ the distance AB =
2v R / g
kinetic energy of the spring and elastic potential energy ⇒ d=
2v R / g … (i)
of the spring.
Work–energy theorem applied to the motion of the
body from A to B leads
l0
∆KE =
WF
A B
1 1
m ⇒ mv 20 − mv12 =
µ mgd
2 2
The mass m rotates in a circle of radius , which is the
extended length of the spring. Centripetal force on ⇒ v=
0 v12 + 2 µgd … (ii)
m=k ( − 0 ) =mω 2
Energy conservation between B and C yields
0 2
mω
=or, = where n
1−n k
V
W = Change in KE of m + energy stored in the spring
2R
2 2 2
1 2 21 1 ω 2l 1 l
= 1 mω2ll02 ω+ k ( 1− 0 )l=0
2 Vl
m 0+ k 0 − l0
= 2m 2 + k −l
2 2 1 − n
2 1 − n 2 2 1 − n 0 (1 − n)
2
( ) d A
k20 mω2
1 k=
2 mω2 W 1 + n2 1 2 1 2
= W 0
+ n2
2 1 − n k ⇒ mv − mv =
mg(2R)
( )
2
2 1 − n 2 k 2 0 2 1
( )
⇒ v1 = v 2 + 4gR … (iii)
Example 3: A small block is projected with a speed
When the disc escapes C, its minimum speed v can be
Vo on a horizontal track which turns into a semicircle
given as
(vertical) of radius R. Find the minimum value of v 0
so that the body will hit the point A after leaving the mv 2
mg (∴ the normal contact force =
= 0)
track at its highest point. The arrangement is shown in R
the figure, given that the straight part is rough and the
curved part is smooth. The coefficient of friction is µ . ⇒ v =gR … (iv)
2R
V0 Using (i) and (iv),=
we obtain d (=
gR ) 2
R
g
2R … (vi)
Smooth Putting the values of v1 and d in (ii), we obtain
Rough surfacre A
Sol: While block travels on the frictional surface AB, the v 0= 5gR + 2 µg(2R) ; ⇒ v 0= (5 + 4 µ)gR
work done by the frictional force is equal to the change
v 0= The5gR
in kinetic energy of the block. + 2 µg(2R)
horizontal ;
distance ⇒ v 0= (5 + 4 µ)gR
moved by the block after leaving track at point C, will
5 . 2 6 | Work , Energy and Power
A
Sol: As the string becomes slack, the tension in the
string becomes zero. Apply the Newton’s second law
10m
of motion along the direction of string at the instant of
slacking. The loss in kinetic energy is equal to gain in
potential energy as the particle moves in vertical plane.
0 B
x Let the velocity be v′ at B where the string become slack
C
and the string makes angle θ with horizontal by the law
of conservation of energy.
= mA g(10 =
− 8) 2 x 200 x 9.8
mg sin
C moves down 6 m since B moves 6 m along x-axis. mg cos
mg
Total loss of potential energy
= 200 x 9.8 x 2 − 100
= x 9.8 x 6 100
= x 9.8 x10 9800 J.
This must be equal to kinetic energy gained
Kinetic energy gained
A v
P hysi cs | 5.27
JEE Main/Boards
Q.4 How do potential energy and K.E. of a spring vary time t for a body of mass 2kg moving under the action
with displacement? Is this variation different from of a force is given by x = t3 / 3 , where x is the metre
variation in potential energy and K.E. of a body in free and t is in second. Calculate work done by the body in
fall? first 2 seconds.
Q.5 Explain what is meant by work. Obtain an expression Q.19 A woman pushes a trunk on a railway platform
for work done by a constant force. which has a rough surface. She applies a force of
100N over a distance of 10m. Thereafter, she gets
Q.6 Discuss the absolute and gravitational units of work progressively tired and her applied force reduces linearly
on m.k.s. and c.g.s systems. with distance to 50N. The total distance through which
trunk has been moved is 20m. Plot the force applied
by the woman and frictional force which is 50N against
Q.7 What is meant by positive work, negative work and the distance. Calculate the work done by the two forces
zero work? Illustrate your answer with two example of over 20m.
each type.
Q.10 What is meant by power and energy? Give their Q.22 A body dropped from a height H reaches the
units.
ground with a speed of 1.2 gH . Calculate the work
done by air-friction.
Q.11 Explain the meaning of K.E. with examples. Obtain
an expression for K.E. of a body moving uniformly?
Q.23 A bullet weighting 10g is fired with a velocity of
800ms-1. After passing thorugh a mud wall 1m thick,
Q.12 State and explain work energy principle. its velocity decreases to 100 m/s. Find the average
resistance offered by the mud wall.
Q.13 What do you mean by potential energy? Give any
two examples of potential energy other than that of the Q.24 A particle originally at rest at the highest point of
gravitational potential energy. a smooth vertical circle of radius R, is slightly displaced.
Find the vertical distance below the highest point where
Q.14 Obtain an expression for gravitational potential the particle will leave the circle.
energy of a body.
Starting from the origin, the particle is taken along the vertically down over the edge of the table. If g is
positive x-axis to the point (a, 0), and the parallel to the acceleration due to gravity, then the work required to
y-axis to the point (a, a). The total work done by the pull the hanging part onto the table is:
force on the particle is:
MgL 4MgL MgL
(A) 2ka2 (B) 2ka2 (C) −ka2 (D) ka2 (A) MgL (B) (C) (D)
3 9 18
Q.2 Supposing that the earth of mass m moves around Q.8 A body is moved along a straight line by a machine
the sun in a circular orbit of radius ‘R’, the work done in delivering constant power. The distance moved by the
half revolution is: body in time t is proportional to:
mv 2 mv 2
(A) x π R (B) x 2R (A) t1/2 (B) t3/ 4 (C) t3/2 (D) t2
R R
(C) Zero (D) None of these
Q.9 An alpha particle of energy 4 MeV is scattered
through 180o by a fixed uranium nucleus. The distance
Q.3 A string of mass ‘m’ and length ‘I’ rests over a of the closest approach is of the order of
frictionless table with 1/4th of its length hanging from a
side. The work done in bringing the hanging part back (A) 1 A (B) 10−10 cm
on the table is: (C) 10−12 cm (D) 10−15 cm
(A) mgl / 4 (B) mgl / 32
(C) mgl / 16 (D) None of these Q.10 A simple pendulum has a string of length and bob
of mass m. When the bob is at its lowest position, it is
given the minimum horizontal speed necessary for it to
Q.4 A weight mg is suspended from a spring. If the move in a circular path about the point of suspension.
elongation in the spring is xo, the elastic energy stored The tension in the string at the lowest position of the
in it is: bob is:
1 1 (A) 3mg (B) 4mg (C) 5mg (D) 6mg
(A) mgxo (B) 2mgx0 (C) mgx0 (D) mgx0
2 4
Q.11 A horse pulls a wagon with a force of 360N at an
Q.5 A ball is thrown up with a certain velocity at angle of 600 with the horizontal at a speed of 10Km/
angle θ to the horizontal. The kinetic energy KE of the hr. The power of the horse is:
horizontal. The kinetic energy KE of the ball varies with
horizontal displacement x as: (A) 1000 W (B) 2000 W
KE KE (C) 500 W (D) 750 W
(A) (B) Q.12 A man pulls a bucket of water from a well of depth
x x H. If the mass of the rope and that of the bucket full of
O O
water are m and M respectively, then the work done by
KE KE
the man is:
(D)
(C)
( ) m
(A) m + M gh (B) + M gh
O
x
O
x 2
m +M
(D) m + M gh
(C) gh
Q.6 A body m1 is projected upwards with velocity v1 2 2
another body m2 of same mass is projected at an angle
of 45o. Both reach the same height. What is the ratio of Q13 A small block of mass m is kept on a rough inclined
their kinectic energies at the point of projection: surface of inclination θ fixed in a elevator. The elevator
goes up with a uniform velocity v and the block does
(A) 1 (B) 1/2 (C) 1/3 (D) 1/4
not slide on the wedge. The work done by the force of
friction on block in time t will be-
Q.7 A uniform chain of length L and mass M is lying on
a smooth table and one third of its length is hanging (A) Zero (B) mgvtcosθ
(C) mgvtsinθ (D) mgvtsin2θ
5 . 3 0 | Work , Energy and Power
Q.14 Two equal masses are attached to the two Previous Years Questions
ends of a spring of spring constant k. the masses are
pulled out symmetrically k. the masses are pulled out
symmetrically to stretch the spring by a length x over Q.1 Two masses of 1g and 4g are moving with equal
its natural length. The work done by the spring on each kinetic energies. The ratio of the magnitudes of their
mass is- momenta is: (1980)
1 1 1 1 (A) 4:1 (B) 2 :1 (C) 1:2 (D) 1:16
(A) kx2 (B) − kx2 (C) kx2 (D) − kx2
2 2 4 4
Q.2 A stone tied to a string of length L is whirled in a
Q.15 A particle is acted by a force F-kx, where k is a vertical circle with the other end of the string at the
+ve constant. Its potential energy at x-0 is zero. Which centre. At a certain instant of time, the stone is at its
curve correctly represents the variation of potential lowest position, and has a speed µ . The magnitude of
energy of the block with respect to x? the change in its velocity as it reaches a position, where
U U the string is horizontal, is (1998)
U U
(A) u2 − 2gL (B) 2gL
(A) x (B) x
( )
(A) x (B) x
(C) u2 − gL (D) 2 u2 − gL
Q.16 If W1 , W2 and W3 represent the work done in (A) v (B) v 2 (C) v 3 (D) v 4
moving a particle from A to B along there different
paths 1, 2 and 3 respectively (as shown) in the Q.4 An ideal spring with spring constant k is hung from
gravitational field of a point mass m, find the correct the ceiling and a block of mass M is attached to its
relation between W1 , W2 and W3 . lower end. The mass is released with the spring initially
(A) W1 > W2 > W3 (B) W
= W
= W3 unstretched. Then the maximum extension in the spring
1 2
is (2002)
(C) W1 < W2 < W3 (D) W2 > W1 > W3
2 1
M2 M1
S2 S1
Q.17 An ideal spring with spring-constant k is hung B
from the ceiling and a block of mass M is attached
to its lower end. The mass is released with the spring 2 1
initially unstretched. Then the maximum extension in M2 x M1
S2 S1
the spring is, B
(A) k =
(2 + 3 ) mg (B)
2Mg
x
3R k
Mg 4Mg 4Mg 2Mg Mg Mg
(C) (D) (A) (B) (C) (D)
k 2k k k k 2k
measured with respect to the equilibrium position of (A) Statement-I is false, Statement-II is true
the block B.
(B) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is false
y
The ratio is (2008)
x (C) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is the correct
explanation for Statement-I
1 1
(A) 4 (B) 2 (C) (D) (D) Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true, and Statement-
2 4
II is not the correct explanation for Statement-I.
Q.6 This question has Statement-I and Statement-II. Of
the four choices given after the statements, choose the Q.7 A person trying to lose weight by burning fat
one that best describes the two statements. lifts a mass of 10 kg upto a height of 1 m 1000 times.
Assume that the potential energy lost each time he
If two springs S1 and S2 of force constants k1 and k2, lowers the mass is dissipated. How much fat will he use
respectively, are stretched by the same force, it is found up considering the work done only when the weight
that more work is done on spring S1 than on spring S2. is lifted up? Fat supplies 3.8 × 107 J of energy per kg
(2012) which is converted to mechanical energy with a 20 %
Statement-I: If stretched by the same amount, work efficiency rate. Take g = 9.8 ms-2: (2016)
done on S1, will be more than that on S2 (A) 6.45 × 10-3 kg (B) 9.89 × 10-3 kg
Statement-II: k1 < k2 (C) 12.89 × 10-3 kg (D) 2.45 × 10-3 kg
JEE Advanced/Boards
compression of the spring when the blocks collide. down before coming to rest for the first time.
m1 m2
(b) How far below the initial position of m is the
m1 m2 equilibrium position of m located?
freely and touches the surface of the table with its end
P B. At a certain moment, the end A of the chain is set
free, with what velocity will this end of the chain slip
out of the tube?
6m
B A
5m
A
h
(a) If at an instant the string makes an angle θ with the B
horizontal, calculate relation between velocity u of A
velocity v of B.
Q.17 A system consists of two identical m
(
(b) Calculate v when B strikes the floor. g = 10m / s2 ) cubes, each of mass m, linked together
by the compressed weightless spring
Q.13 Two blocks are connected by a string as shown in constant k. The cubes are also connected
the Figure. They are released from rest. Show that after by a thread which is burned through at m
a certain moment. Find:
they have moved a distance L, their common speed is (a) At what values of ∆ l the initial compression of the
2 (m2 − µml) gl spring, the lower cube will bounce up after the thread
given by , where µ is the has been burned through:
(m1 − m2 )
(b) To what height h the centre of gravity of this system
coeffiecient of friction between the floor and the blocks. will rise if the initial compression of the spring ∆l=7mg/k
m1
Q.18 A stone with weight w is thrown vertically upward
into the air with initial speed v 0 . If a constant force f
due to air drag acts on the stone throughout its flight:
m2 (a) Show that the maximum height reached by the
v 20
stone is h = .
2g 1 + ( f / w )
Q.14 A particle of mass m is moving in a circular path of
constant radius r such that is centripetal acceleration αc (b) Show that the speed of the stone upon impact with
1/2
is varying with time t as αc=k2rt2 when k is a constant. w−f
what is the power delivered to the particle by the forces the ground is v = v 0
acting on it?
w+f
Q.19 One end of spring of natural length h is fixed at
Q.15 A body of mass m was slowly pulled up the hill as the ground and the other end is fitted with a smooth
shown in the Figure. by a force F which at each point ring of mass m which is allowed to slide on a horizontal
was directed along a tangent to the trajectory. rod fixed at a height h as shown in Figure. Initially, the
spring makes an angle of 37o with the vertical when the
F
m system is released from rest. Find the speed of the ring
when the spring becomes vertical.
h
m
l
h
Find the work performed by this force, if the height of o
37
the hill is h, the length of its base l, and the co-effiecient
of frinction between m and the hill is.
Q.16 A chain A B of length l is loaded in a smooth Q.20 A nail is located at a certain distance verticaly
horizontal tube so that a part of its length h hangs below the point of suspension of a simple pendulum.
5 . 3 4 | Work , Energy and Power
The pendulum bob is released from the position where spring so that the block presses the track with a force
the string makes an angle of 60o with the downward mg when it reaches the point P, where the radius of the
vertical. Find the distance of the nail from the point track is horizontal.
of suspension such that the bob will just perform a
complete revolution with the nail as centre. The length
of the pendulum is 1m. R
P
R
Spbare A L
(A) V (B) v 2 (C) v 3 (D) v 4 (D) The magnitude of its linear momentum is increasing
continuously.
Q.12 A block of mass M is hanging over a smooth and
light pulley thorugh a light string. The other end of the Q.16 One end of a light spring of constant k is fixed to
string is pulled by a constant force F. The string energy a wall and the other end is tied to block placed on a
of the block increases by 20 J in 1s. smooth horizontal surface. In a displacement, the work
1
(A) The tension in the string is Mg. done by the spring is kx2 . The possible cases are.
2
(B) The tension in the string is F.
(A) The spring was initially compressed by a distance x
(C) The work done by the tension on the block is 20J in and was finally in its natural length.
P hysi cs | 5.37
(B) It was initially stretched by a distance x and finally the correct explanation of assertion.
was in its natural length.
(C) Assertion is true but reason is false
(C) It was initially in its natural length and finally in a
(D) Assertion is false but reason is true.
compressed position.
(D) It was initially in its natural length and finally in a Q.21 Assertion: For stable equilibrium force has to be
stretched position. zero and potential energy should be minimum.
Reason: For equilibrium, it is not necessary that the
Q.17 No work is done by a force on an object if,
force is not zero.
(A) The force is always perpendicular to its velocity
(B) The force is always perpendicular to its acceleration Q.22 Assertion: The work done in pushing a block is
more than the work done in pulling the block is more
(C) The object is stationary but the point of application
than the work done in pulling the block on a rough
of the force moves on the object
surface.
(D) The object moves in such a way that the point of
Reason: In the pushing condition normal reaction is
application of the force remains fixed
more
(B) Both assertion and reason are true and reason is not (C) 1-True II-False (D) 1-True II-true
5 . 3 8 | Work , Energy and Power
Q.26 Consider a case of rigid body rolling without Q.30 Relative acceleration between two beads at the
sliding over a rough horizontal surface initial moment:
(A) There will be a non-zero conservative force acting (A) g/2 vertically away from each other
on the body and work done by non-conservative force
(B) g/2 horizontally towards each other
will be positive.
(C) 2g / 3 Vertically away from each other
(B) There will be non-zero non-conservative force
acting on body and work done by non-conservative (D) 2g / 3 Horizontally towards each other
force will be negative.
(C) There will be no non-conservative force acting on Q.31 The speed of bead when spring is at normal length
the body but totoal mechanical energy will not be
conserved.
(A)
(2 − 3 ) gR (B) (2 + 3 ) gR
(D) There will be no non-conservative force acting on 3 3
the body and total mechanical energy will be conserved.
2gR
(C) (D) 3gR
Q.27 Now consider a case of rigid body rolling with 3
sliding along rough horizontal plane and Vcm is linear.
Velocity by ω =Vcm / 2R , R is radius of body at (t=0)
Q.32 Choose the correct statement
(A) There is no non-conservative force acting on body.
(A) Maximum angle made by spring after collision is
(B) There is a non-conservative force acting on body same as that at initial moment.
and direction of force is opposite to direction of velocity.
(B) If the collision is perfectly inelastic, the total energy
(C) There is a non-conservative force acting on body is conserved.
and direction of the force along the direction of velocity.
(C) If the collision is perfectly elastic, each bead
(D) None of these. undergoes SHM.
Q.28 In the above problem if W=3Vcm/R where Vcm (D) Both linear momentum and angular momentum
velocity of centre of mass at t=0 with respect to centre of smooth ring are conserved
only at the instant of collision.
(A) There is non-conservative force acting on body.
(B) There is non-conservative force acting on body the Match the Columns
direction of velocity of centre of mass.
Q.33 A single conservative force acts on a body of
(C) There is a non-conservative force acting on body
mass 1kg that moves along the x-axis. The potential
opposite to the direction of velocity
energy U(x) is given by U(x) = 20 + ( x − 2 ) where x is
2
(D) None of these the meters. At x=5.0m the particle has a kinetic energy
of 20 J then:
Paragraph 2
Column-I Column-II
Two idedtical beads are attached to free ends of two
(A) Minimum value of x in meters (p) 29
by gravitational force is W2, kinetic energy when it has beyond the pulley. What will be the speed with which
lifted is K and speed of mass when it has lifted is v then: the mass M will hit the wall when the mass the m is
(data in column is given in SI units) (g=10 m/s2) released? (Take g=9.8 m/s2) (1985)
Column I Column II M
(A) W1 (p) 10800
K K
(C) (D)
t t
P hysi cs | 5.41
PlancEssential Questions
JEE Advanced/ Boards
JEE Main/Boards
Exercise 1
Exercise 1
Q.3 Q.5 Q.7 Q.11
Q. 18 Q.19 Q.22 Q.23
Q.13 Q.19 Q.21 Q.30
Exercise 2
Exercise 2
Q.4 Q.10 Q.12 Q.33
Q.1 Q.5 Q.10 Q.13
Q.34
Q.15 Q.16 Q.17
Answer Key
JEE Main/Boards
Exercise 1
Q.1 Zero Q.18 16 J Q.19 1750 J; -1000 J
Q.23 3150N
Exercise 2
Single Correct Choice Type
Q.6 A Q.7 C
5 . 4 2 | Work , Energy and Power
JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1
40
Q.10 3.32 m Q.11 154 m/s Q.12 m /s
41
Q.14 mk2r2t Q.15 mgh + µmgl Q.16 2hg n
h
1/2
3mg 8mg w−f h k
Q.17 (a) D> (b) h = Q.18 v0 Q.19
k k w+f 4 m
≥ cos2 −(3cos
( 2 / 3)θ= ) =B mg ( 2 − 3cos θ)
−1
and for θ ≥ cos−1 ( 2 / 3)= NA and 0,N
= for θmg
B
NA 0,N
3mgR k2 x'(1 + x')
Q.23 Q.24 2.12 m/s Q.25
k 2(1 − x')2
L
Q.26 (a) 2g R (1 − cos θ ) + L sin θ ; (b) 6mg 1 − cos θ + sin θ
R
−1 2
(c) The radius through the particle makes an angle cos with the vertical.
3
Q.27 3 R Q.28 Third trip Q.29 8 2 m
Exercise 2
Q.19 A, B Q.20 A, B, D
P hysi cs | 5.43
Comprehension Type
Paragraph 1
Q.25 A Q.26 D Q.27 B Q.28 B
Paragraph 2
Q.29 C Q.30 D Q.31 C Q.32 D
Q.33 A → s; B → q; C → r; D → p Q.34 A → r; B → p; C → q; D → s
Q.13 D Q.14 A, C
Solutions
mg m1v1 = m2v2
⇒ v2 < v1 ⇒ KE1 > KE2
Work done by gravity and normal force is zero.
5 . 4 4 | Work , Energy and Power
N
Sol 5: work is the vector product F.s
Work done by F is zero
w = F.s
F = force acting on the object
s = displacement of the object
If a constant force F displaces a body through F
displacements then the work done, w is given by
w = Fs cos θ
s = net displacement Work done by F is zero
Sol 7: Work done w = F.s
w = | F | | s | cos θ S1 S2 S
s2
θ = angle between force and displacement when 0 <
θ, π/2
WA→Β = ∫ F.ds
s1
5
= 7x − x2 + x3 = 7(5 – 0) – [52 – 02] + [53 – 03] 50 Friction force
0
Let us say at point B, the particle loses its contact. At ∫ Fydy + ∫ Fxdx
0 0
point B say the particle has velocity v. a a
mv 2 u sin u cos
2mg (1 – cosθ) = … (iii)
R h
u
mv 2
Putting this value of in eqn … (iv)
R u cos
x
5 . 4 8 | Work , Energy and Power
m5gR
2 2 T = mg + = 6mg mg
u sin θ R
Maximum height H =
2g
2 Sol 11: (C) F = 360 N 36
o
1
2
v 22 Work done is 1 hr 60
o
v1 2 v 22
H1 = ; H2 = =
2g 2g ug is w = 360 cos 60° 10 × 100
H1 = H2
3600 × 103 cos60°
Work done per sec=
v 12 v 22 60 × 60
⇒ =
2 4 1
= 1000 = 500 w
v2 = 2v1
2 2 2
x/2 x/2
P hysi cs | 5.49
dt
Sol 17: (B) By work energy theorem
wnet = ∆K ∴ power P = ρAv3 or P ∝ v3
JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1 mg
mv 2
Sol 1: By work energy theorem for point A to point B So net upward force exerted by the mass is – mg
R
A mv 2
m Which is equal to 3 mg ⇒ - mg = 3 mg
R
mv 2
= 4 mg
R
h
v= 4gR = 2 gR
B M
Now applying work-energy theorem
wnet = ∆KE
wnet = ∆KE wgravity = Kf
wg = KEf – KEi 1
mg(h-2R) = m (4gR)
1 2
mgh = mv2
2 h – 2R = 2R
v= 2gh h = 4R
Now m, M both move together so by conservation of
linear momentum 1
Sol 3: Mass = kg
2
mv = (M + m) v’
m 2gh k
v’ = m
M+m
3m/s
v’ is the combined velocity of (m + M) system.
A B D D’ C
Applying work energy theorem for the whole process x
2m 2.14 1m
wnet = ∆KE
Let us assume that block stops at point D’ which is at
wgravity + wfriction = kEf – kEi (kEi = 0) distance x m from D.
P hysi cs | 5.51
R dt
os
force
gc
mdv
m
T g mg sin P= .v
5m dt
3
cos =
3m 5 P
∫ vdv = ∫ m dt
v t
P
5m
∫ vdv = m ∫ dt
0 0
5 . 5 2 | Work , Energy and Power
v3 ps 9 5
= h1 = × = 1.5 m
3 m 10 3
3/2 (b) Force equilibrium on M
mv 3 m 2Pt 0.8m
s= =
3P 3P m T = Mg
x
1/2 Force equilibrium on m T
8P T
s= t3/2
T sin θ = mg
9m M Mg
Mg sin θ = mg
d 5d Mg
Sol 7: Length of the spring at point A = = M 3
cos37° 3 sin θ = =
By work energy theorem m 5
wnet = ∆KE Sol 9: M “falls” and loses potential energy. This loss
of potential energy is converted to gain in potential
1 1
mgh
+ 2 k (x -0 ) = 2 mv
2 2 2
energy of m and gain in kinetic of energy for m and M
wgravity both.
d M
[x = l – d = ] 1 1
4
5d 3 3d
h = l sin θ = . =
4 5 4 1
5 1-2
3g k h
v=d +
2d 16m
m
Sol 8: (a) When mass m comes to rest for the first time
kinetic energy of both the masses is zero.
Let the total length of the string be l. So, the length of
work energy theorem the hanging part in the beginning = l-2.
wnet = ∆KE = KEi – KEi Since, total mechanical energy is conserved.
–Mgh2 + mgh = 0 ⇒ Mh2 = mh1 Loss in M.E. = Gain in M.E.
5 1 1
⇒ h1 = h … (i) Mg1 = mv 2 + mgh + MV 2 ........ ∗
2 2 2 2
Length of the string is constant, so h can be obtained from the conservation of the length
of the string.
BC + Ac = A’C + B’C 0.8m
C
BC – B’C = A’C – AC A h = l − 2 − (l− 5 − 1) = 5 − 1
h2 + 0.8 = A’C h1
We want V, v can be obtained in terms of V.
(0.8)2 + h12 B’ M mA’
As M “falls”, it moves in circular path with its velocity
= (h2 + 0.8)2 h2 along the tangent. The velocity along the tangent can
B be resolved into two components, one along the length
h12 = h22 + 1. 6 h2
of the string and the other perpendicular to the length
By (i) of the string. The component along the length of the
25 2 string is same as the velocity of m as m always moves
h = h22 + 1. 6 h2 along the length of the string.
9 2
V cos θ = v
16h22
= 1.6 h2 2
9 cos θ =
5
9
h2 =
10
P hysi cs | 5.53
From, x + 0.4 = 5x
1
∗, 2 × 9.8 × 1 = × 0.5 × V 2 cos2 θ + 0.5 × 9.8 ×
2
( 5 −1 + ) 1
2
× 2V 2
x = 0.1 m
By work energy theorem
V can be obtained.
1 1
w= mv2 + mv2
Sol 10: Work energy theorem 2 2
wnet = ∆KE 1
- × 40 (0.1)2+0.32×10×0.3=0.32 v2
2
Since initial and final velocity of sand particles are zero
so ∆KE = 0 v = 1.54 m/s
wgravity = mg (0.2 + 0.01)
Sol 12:
wnet = 0 P
wgravity + wspring = 0
s
1
co
(0.1) × (10) × (0.21) – k (0.1)2 = 0
u
2 B
u
A V
k = 0.42 × 104 = 4200 N/m
u sin
Now if compression is 0.04 m
wgravity + wspring = 0 (a) Velocity of A along the string is equal velocity of B
along the string
1
⇒ (0.1)×(10)(h + 0.04) – × 4200 (0.04)2 = 0
2 Length of string is constant
h + 0.04 = 2100 × 16 × 10 -4
⇒ AP + BP = constant
h + 0.04 = 0.21 × 16 Differentiate w.r.t
h = 3.36 – 0.04 = 3.32 m d(AP) d(BP)
+ =0
dt dt
Sol 11: Let the extension kx
-u cos φ + v = 0
v = u cos φ
kx N (b) When B strikes ground length
0.4
BP = 6 cm
m T
So length of AP = 16 – 6 = 10 m
mg
6 3
sin φ = =
10 5
m
6m
x
4 v 5v
+0
5 4 /5 4
N – mg + kx cos θ = 0
By work energy theorem
N=0
h wnet = ∆KE
kx cos θ = mg … (i) 1 1
wgravity + wstring =
mv2 + mu2 - 0
By geometry (x + 0.4) cos θ = 0.4 2 2
1 1 25v 2
0.32 × 10 3.2 mg × 5 = mv2 + m
By (i) x cos θ = = =0.08 2 2 16
40 40
0.08 25 2
(x + 0.4) = 0.4 10 g = v2 + v
x 16
5 . 5 4 | Work , Energy and Power
m
d Sol 17: x
= − ∫ µ mgcos θ = – ∫ µmgd = −µ mg m
cos θ m
mg/k
1
wgravity = – mgh
By work energy theorem h1
wnet = ∆KE
m m m m
P hysi cs | 5.55
Let the natural length of spring be l1 We will find the velocity of block B when block A will
just lift upwards
Initially there is same compression x in spring in 2 2
equilibrium 1 7mg 1 mg 8mg 1
k – k – mg = mv2
2 k 2 k k 2
m
32m2g2
T=kx’ v2 =
k
Now block A and B together form a system with
mg v
acceleration – g, Vcm =
mg 2
mg = kx’ ⇒ x’ = So,
k
v2 = u2 + 2as
Now it is further compressed by Dl1 by thread
O = vcm2 – 2gs
Now if thread is burnt it will go at upward extreme
v2 = 8gs
which is x distance above natural length of spring.
Spring will just lift the lower block so by newton 2nd v2 4mg
law; T = kx = mg s= =
8g k
mg
x= Movement of centre of gravity
k
By mechanical energy conservation 8mg m 4mg 8mg
= + = upwards
k 2m k k
PEspring + PEgravity = PE’gravity + PE’spring v
2
Sol 18: (a)
1 mg
k ∆ + + mgh1
2 1 k W
2
2mg 1 mg
= mg + ∆1 + h1 + k
k 2 k By Newton’s second law
mg
2
mg w
1
k ∆12 + +2 ∆1 (w + f) = a
2 k k g
2
2(mg) 2
1 mg f vdv
= +mgDl1+ k a = – g 1 + =
k 2 k w dx
2
1 2(mg) 0 s
f
k Dl12 =
2 k ∫ vdv = – ∫ g 1 + w dx
v0 0
2mg
Dl1 =
k v 02 f
To lift block of mass m 0– = – g 1 + s
2 w
mg
D > Dl1
k v 02
s=
3mg f
D > 2g 1 +
k w
(b)
B Final velocity = v
mg
8mg (b) By work energy theorem
k
k wfriction + wgravity = ∆KE
7mg
k 1 −4fs
–2fs + 0 = m (v2 – v02); v2 – v02 =
A 2 m
5 . 5 6 | Work , Energy and Power
1 h2 1
K. . = mv2 u
2 16 2
C
k h
v= B
m 4
o
By work energy conservation mg sin60 o
mg cos60
u
w1 = ∆KE 0.1kg mg
1
mg R (1 – cos θ) = mv2 mg
2
mv 2 (a) By newton’s second law
2mg (1 – cos θ) =
R
mv 2
By newton’s 2nd law T – mg cos60° =
R
Mg cos θ – N = 2 mg (1 – cos θ) mg m
T= + (4)= (4.9 + 4) m
N = mg (3 cos θ – 2) 2 R
For θ ≤ cos-1 (2/3) ; NB=0, = 8.9 × 0.1 = 0.89 N = 8.9 × 104 dyne
mg
+
mg
m
By work energy theorem (c) If the projection speed is slightly greater than u0,
then speed at top most point is just than zero.
wnet = ∆KE
1
wspring + wforce = m ω2 ( + x)2
2
−1 1
kx2 + wforce = mω2 ( + x)2 N V’
2 2
mg
1 1
wforce = kx2 + mω2 ( + x)2
2 2 Particle will lose contact when normal just becomes
zero.
2
1 x'2 2 1 x' So by Newton’s second law
= k + mω2 +
2 (1 − x')2 2 1 − x' mV'2
mg cos θ =
2 mω2 R
k 2
= x + v’2 = g R cos θ
2(1 − x')2 k
By work energy theorem, wnet = ∆KE
2
k 1 1
wforce = [x’2 + x’] mg R (1–cos θ)= mv’2= mg R cos θ
2(1 − x')2 2 2
2(1 – cos θ) = cos θ
k2 x'(1 + x') mω2
= where x’ = 2 – cos θ = - cos θ
2(1 − x')2 k
2
cos θ =
3
Sol 26: (a) Minimum speed is required so in the limiting So it will lose contact when particle makes an angle
case velocity of block at highest point is zero 2
cos-1 with vertical.
By work energy theorem 3
wnet = ∆KE
Sol 27: (a) By work energy theorem
1
wgravity = 0 - mu02 wnet = ∆KE
2
1 1
– mg [L sin θ+R (1–cos θ)]= − mu02 mg (5R – R) = mv2
2 2
v2 = 8gR
u0 = 2g[L sin θ + R(1 − cos θ)]
By Newton’s second law force exerted in horizontal
(b) Let the final velocity be v at top point mv 2 8mgR
direction = = = 8mg
1 R R 8mg
wgravity = mv [v2 – 4 u02]
2
Net force = 82 + 1 = 65 mg
1 mg
–mg [L sin θ + R (1 – cos θ)] = m[v 2 − 4u02 ]
2 By Netwons second law
v2 = 3u02 mv 2
Force = mg
By Newton’s second law
R
mv 2
2 mg + mg = ⇒ v2 = 2gR
mv 2 m(3u0 ) R
Force = ma= = mg
R R Let the height be h
3m By work energy theorem
= [2G(R(1-cosθ) + L sin q]
R 1
mg(h – 2R) = m 2gR
L 2
= 6 mg [1 – cos θ + sin q]
R h – 2R = R ⇒ h = 3R
P hysi cs | 5.59
L wnet = ∆KE
wgravityA + wgravityB = ∆KE …..(i)
The initial energy is mgh = mgL/2. On the level ground,
the particle experiences a constant friction force f = μk Initially length of string between P1 and P3 is 8m
N = μkmg. It will stop once the work W = -fs done by Finally length of string between P1 and P3 is 10 m so A
friction has dissipated all the initial energy: has moved (10 – 8) upward
L By (i)
mgL / 2 ==
fs µk mgs ⇒ s= = 100 cm
2µk
m 1 1 m 2
– g × 2 + mg × 3 = mvB2 + v
So the particle will make two full passes (one moving 2 2 2 2 A
right, one moving left) over the flat area, then stop
1 36 VB
2
halfway across (20 cm from the left edge) on its third mg [3 - 2]= m VB2 +
trip. 2 25 2
(3 − 2)g × 2
Sol 29: P1 VB = ≈ 4m/s
4 36
P3 1 +
25 2
3 x
V2 (b) Velocity of A and B is zero at maximum displacement
AVA
4 4
m
P2
2 h
x x2 + 42
VBcos NBcos
VB x +4
2 2
3 h= x2 + 42 - 8
By work energy theorem
m
– gh + mg x = 0
3 2
cos θ =
5 h= 2 x
4
sin θ =
5 2 x2 + h2 - 8 = 2 x
(a) Length of string is constant
x= 8 2 m
⇒ AP1 + P1P2 + P2P3 = 0
5 . 6 0 | Work , Energy and Power
Sol 1: (B) Potential of water after falling down will Sol 7: (B)
convert in heat and sound. So temperature will increase
w
slightly.
x
+
Sol 2: (A) By work energy theorem
wnet = ∆KE
m
wgravity + wspring = 0 By Newton’s second law
1 Kx = mω2 ( + x)
mg (0.4 + x) + - kx2 = 0
2
mω2
20 × 0.4 + 20 x – 1000 x = 02 x=
k − mω2
1000 x – 20 x – 8 = 0
2
mω2
Let x’ =
20 ± 400 + 32000 k
x=
2000 x'
x=
1 − x'
20 ± 180 200 1
x= = = = 0.1 m By work energy theorem
2000 2000 10
wnet = ∆KE
−dv
Sol 3: (C) F – 1
dR wspring + wforce = m ω2 ( + λ)2
2
k −k k
U = – ∫ FdR = – dR = – = −1 1
R 2
R R kx2 + wforce = mω2 ( + x)2
2 2
F = –[8x3 – 27] k 2
wforce = [x’2 + x’]
at x = 3/2 2(1 − x')2
Force is zero
k2 x'(1 + x') mω2
= where x’ =
3+ 2(1 − x')2 k
f = -ve
2
v2
Sol 8: (B) ac = k2 rt2 =
3− R
F = +ve v = krt
2
dv
So this is stable equilibrium at = = kr
dt
Power P = F.V= mat.v = mkr. Krt = m k2 r2 t
P hysi cs | 5.61
Sol 9: (D) Tension is zero as can and pendulum are Sol 13: (D)
falling freely under gravity
u1 u2
Sol 10: (D)
O1 O2
f(x) = -kx + ax2
U(x) = ∫ −f(x)dx u1 + u2 = V
kx2 ax 4 kx2 −ax 4
U(x) = - − + +c= +c Acceleration will be same for both as acceleration of
2 4 2 4 both observers is zero.
It corresponds to graph (D) for c = 0 Kinetic energy will be different so by work energy
theorem work done will also depend on kinetic energy.
Sol 11: (C) Power = F.v
Force = rate of change of linear momentum of wind Multiple Correct Choice Type
dm v
= ρAV where ρ= density Sol 14: (A, D)
dt v’
A = area of blades mg
P ∝ v2
Sol 15: (B, D)
Sol 18: (C, D) Work done = 0 so kinetic energy is Sol 26: (D) There is no friction and non-conservative
constant force so mechanical energy is conserved.
Since in velocity and acceleration, direction is changing
so they are not constant. Sol 27: (B) As there is sliding at t =0 so friction will act
opposite to the direction of velocity
Sol 19: (A, B) By work energy theorem v cm
Sol 28: (B) ω > 3VCM
wnet = ∆KE R
R
1
mgh = m (vb2 – vi2) VCM
2
So final velocity is larger than initial and will depend on
speed of projection. So friction will act in the direction of velocity to increase
the velocity and decrease the angular acceleration
Sol 20: (A, B, D) By work energy theorem
wnet = ∆KE = 0 Sol 29: (C)
wyou + wgravity = 0
60 o
R 3R
wyou = -wgravity = + mgh
o
N
30
Assertion Reasoning Type 30
o
R/2 R
o
30 o
Sol 21: (B) Force has to be zero 30
a a
Comprehension Type mg 1
3+ = ma
2 3
Sol 25: (A) Work done in raising box = –wgravity
= –(–mgh) = mgh 2g
a=
3
1 – false
a a 2g
From figure relative acceleration is + =a=
2 2 3
P hysi cs | 5.63
mgR 1 1 g 11g
+ kx2 + 0 = 0 + mv2 T = 72 R + = × 72 = 72×11 = 792
x 2 2 10 10
2gR KE = 1080
v=
3 KE = ½ mv2 = 1080
v = 5.47 m/s
Sol 32: (D) (A) Wrong, collision can be inelastic
(B) In perfectly inelastic collision energy is not conserved Previous Years’ Questions
(C) For SHM, θ should be small.
(D) At the instant of collision, they are at the bottom Sol 1: Given t = x +3
⇒ ΣF = 0 and ΣM = 0 or x = (t – 3) …… (i)
∴ v = 50 cos θ … (i) 50
cos
m Ag v=
4 A 4
For equilibrium of A
mAg = kx At point B. T = 0 but v ≠ 0
mA g (2)(9.8) (4M)v 2
∴x= = = 0.01 m Hence, 4 Mg cos 60° =
k 1960
g 50
For equilibrium of B mmBg =T= kx = mAg or v2 = = … (ii)
2 3
mA 2
mB = = = 10 kg 10
µ 0.2 = as = m amd g 10m / s2
3
Energy stored in spring
3 10
1 2 1 Also, v2 = u2 – 2gh = u2 – 2g = u2 – 3(10)
U= kx = (1960) (0.01)2 = 0.098 J 2 3
2 2
or v = u – 100
2 2
Sol 4: Let M strikes with speed v. Then, velocity of m at or solving eqs. (i), (ii) and (iii), we get
2 cos θ = 0.86 or θ = 30°
this instant will be v cos θ or v. Further M will fall a
5
distance of 1 m while m will rise up by ( 5 – 1) m. From Range 1 u2 sin2θ
(b) x = =
energy conservation: decrease in potential energy of M 2 2 g
= increase in potential energy of m+ increase in kinetic
energy of both the blocks. 50 × 50 × 3
= = 108.25 m
1m 2 × 10 × 2
u2 sin2 θ 50 × 50 × 1
2m y=H= = = 31. 25 m
2g 2 × 10 × 4
M
Hence, the desired coordinates are (108.25 m, 31.25 m).
1m v cos
5m Sol 6: Let the string slack s at point Q as shown in
v
figure. From P to Q path is circular and beyond Q path
is parabolic. At point C, velocity of particle becomes
( 5- 1)m horizontal therefore. QD = half the range of the
M projectile
Now, we have following equations
5
mv 2
1 (1) TQ=0. Therefore, mg sin θ = ... (i)
L
2
P hysi cs | 5.65
L L + L sin
B
L
P u T
a
L cos T a
0.36 kg
(2) v2 = u2 – 2gh = u2 – 2gL(1 + sinθ) … (ii)
0.72 kg
1
(3) QD = (Range) 0.72 kg
2
L v 2 sin2(90° – θ) v 2 sin2θ g
⇒ L cos θ – = = … (iii) T – 0.36 g = 0.36 a = 0.36
g 2g 2g 3
∴ T = 0.48 g
Eq. (iii) can be written as
Now, WT = TS cos 0° (on 0.36 kg mass)
1 v2
cos θ – = sinθ cosq g
g gL = (0.48 g) (1) = 0.08(g2) = 0.08(10)2 = 8 J
6
v2
Substituting value of = sinθ from Eq. (i), we get
gL
Sol 8: (D) Decrease in mechanical energy
1
cos θ – = sin θ cosθ = (1 – cos θ) cosq
2 2 = work done against friction
8
1 1
1 ∴ mv2 – kx2 = µ mgx
or cos θ – = cosθ – cos3 q 2 2
8
2µ mgx + kx2
or v =
1 1 m
∴ cos3 θ = or cos θ = or θ = 60°
8 2
Substituting the values, we get
∴ From Eq. (i) v2 = gL sin θ = gL sin 60°
4
v = 0.4 m/s = m/s
3 10
or v =
2
gL
2 ∴ Answer is D
∴ Substituting this value of v2 in eq. (ii)
Sol 9: (D)
u2 = v2 + 2gL (1 + sin θ)
dw = F.(dx ˆi + dyjˆ )
= F.dr
3 3 3 3
= g L + 2gL 1 + = gL + 2gL xdx ydy
2 2 2 = K∫ +
( ) ( )
3/2 3/2
x2 + y 2 x2 + y 2
3 3
= gL 2 + x2 + y 2 =
a2
2
0 a
K K −a2 a2
u=
gL 2 +
3 3
w
=
a3
∫ xdx + ∫ ydy
=
a3 2
+ = 0
2
2 a 0
5 . 6 6 | Work , Energy and Power
Sol 10: (5) The initial speed of 1st bob (suspended by a 0.2 ≥ tan q
string of length l1) is 5gl1 . ∴ for P, Q
The speed of this bob at highest point will be gl1 . f = (m1 + m2) g sin q
When this bob collides with the other bob there speeds For R and S
will be interchanged.
F = fmax = mm2g sin q
l1
gl=
1 5gl2 ⇒ = 5
l2 Sol 14: (A, C)
dW
Sol 11: (5) Power = ⇒ W = 0.5 × 5 = 2.5 = KEf − KEi
dt m1g cos
2.5
= (
M 2
v − v i2
2 f
) ⇒ vf =
5
m1
m2g cos
m2
d(KE) dv
Sol 12: (B) = mv (m1+m2)g cos (m1+m2)g sin
dt dt
Sol 13: (D) Condition for not sliding,
fmax > (m1 + m2) g sin q As I1 = I2
mN > (m1 + m2) g sin q n1w1d1v1 = n2w2d2v2
0.3 m2 g cos θ ≥ 30 sin q
V2 B2 v 2 w2 B2 w2 n1 w1d1 B2n1
6 ≥ 30 tan q Now,
= = =
V1 B2 v1 w1 B1 w1 n2 w2d2 B1n2
1/5 ≥ tan q
2017-18 100 &
op kers
Class 11 T
By E ran culty
-JE Fa r
IIT enior emie .
S fP r es
o titut
Ins
PHYSICS
FOR JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
SECOND
EDITION
Exhaustive Theory
(Now Revised)
Formula Sheet
9000+ Problems
based on latest JEE pattern
1. INTRODUCTION
In this chapter we will study the motion of system of particles or bodies. The individual particles or bodies comprising
the system in the general case move with different velocities and accelerations and exert forces on each other and
are influenced by external or surrounding bodies as well. We will learn the techniques to simplify the analysis of
complicated motion of such a system. We will also learn about the dynamics of extended bodies whose shape
and/or mass changes during their motion. We define the linear momentum of a system of particles and introduce
the concept of center of mass of a system. The dynamics of center of mass and the law of conservation of linear
momentum are important tools in the study of system of particles.
2 CENTER OF MASS
When we study the dynamics of the motion of a system of particles as a whole, then we need not bother about the
dynamics of individual particles of the system, but only focus on the dynamics of a unique point corresponding to
that system. The motion of this unique point is identical to the motion of a single particle whose mass is equal to
the sum of the masses of all the individual particles of the system and the resultant of all the forces exerted on all
the particles of the system, by the surrounding bodies, or due to action of a field of force, is exerted directly to that
particle. This point is called the center of mass (COM) of the system of particles. The COM behaves as if the entire
mass of the system is concentrated there. The concept of COM is very useful in analyzing complicated motion of
system of objects, in particular, when two or more objects collide or an object explodes into fragments.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
For a two-particle system, COM lies closer to the particle having more mass, which is rather obvious. If
COM’s co-ordinates are made zero, we would clearly observe that distances of individual particles are
inversely proportional to their masses.
Vaibhav Gupta (JEE 2009, AIR 54)
Illustration 1: Two particles of masses 1 kg and 2 kg are located at x = 0 and x = 3 m respectively. Find the position
of their center of mass. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: For the system of particle of masses m1 and m2, if the m1 = 1kg COM m2 = 2kg
distance of particle from the center of mass are r1 and r2
respectively then it is seen that m1r1 = m2r2. x=0 x=x x=3
Since, both the particles lie on x-axis, the COM will also lie on r1 = x r2 = (3-x)
the x-axis. Let the COM be located at x = x, then r1 = distance
of COM from the particle of mass 1 kg = x Figure 6.1
∑ mi xi ∑ mi yi m
A B 2m
X
X= i
, Y= i
∑ mi ∑ mi Figure 6.2
i i
Take the x and y axes as shown in Fig. 6.2. The coordinates of the four particles are as follows:
Hence, the coordinates of the center of mass of the four-particle system are
m . 0 + 2ma + 3ma + 4m . 0 a m . 0 + 2m . 0 + 3ma + 4ma 7a
X = = ; Y =
m + 2m + 3m + 4m 2 m + 2m + 3m + 4m 10
a 7a
The center of mass is at , .
2 10
xcm =
∫ xdm ; y cm =
∫ y dm ; z cm =
∫ z dm
∫ dm ∫ dm ∫ dm
where x, y and z are the co-ordinates of an infinitesimal elementary mass dm taken on the continuous mass
distribution. The integration should be performed under proper limits, such that the elementary mass covers the
entire body.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Many people have misconception that the center of mass of a continuous body must lie inside the body.
Center of mass of a continuous body may lie outside that body also. e.g. Ring.
Vaibhav Krishnan (JEE 2009, AIR 22)
Figure 6.3
Y
(b) Center of Mass of a Uniform Semicircular Wire
Center of mass of a Uniform Semicircular Wire of radius R is
(0, 2R/π).
R
d
Rsin
X
O Rcos
Figure 6.4
x
dx L
H
Figure 6.6
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Student must solve the above integrations to get a better view of how we take infinitesimal segment of
a body and the corresponding limits to integrate over whole body.
Please solve the integrations for hollow cone and solid cone to note the difference.
Nivvedan (JEE 2009, AIR 113)
Illustration 3: A rod of length L is placed along the x-axis between x = 0 and x = L. The linear density (mass/length)
ρ of the rod varies with the distance x from the origin as ρ = a + bx. Here, a and b are constants. Find the position
of center of mass of this rod. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: To find C.O.M of continuous mass distributions consider a small element of distribution of mass dm. Then the
co-ordinate of C.O.M. is given as
∫ x dm
∴ xCOM = the limits of integration should be chosen such that the small elements covers entire mass
M
distribution.
Choose an infinitesimal element of the rod of length dx situated at co-ordinates (x, 0, 0) (see Fig.6.7) The linear
mass density can be assumed to be constant along the infinitesimal length dx.
Thus the mass of the element dm = rdx = (a + bx) dx P Q
Illustration 4: Determine the center of mass of a uniform solid cone of height h and
semi angle α, as shown in Fig. 6.8 (JEE MAIN) R
3. CENTER OF GRAVITY
Definition: Center of gravity is a point, near or within a body, at which its entire weight can be assumed to act
when considering the motion of the body under the influence of gravity. This point coincides with the center of
mass when the gravitational field is uniform.
Note: The center of mass and center of gravity for a continuous body or a system of particles will be different when
there is non- uniform gravitational field.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
You can find the center of gravity and center of mass for a very thin cylinder extending from the surface
of earth to the height equal to radius of earth to get the difference. Just sum up all the individual weights
of infinitesimal size disks and find the position where gravity will make the same weight of body. This will
give center of gravity.
Chinmay S Purandare (JEE 2012, AIR 698)
6 . 6 | Center of Mass and the Law of Conser vation of Momentum
mx − m1 x1 my − m1 y1 mz − m1 z1
xcm = ; y cm = ; z cm =
(m − m1 ) (m − m1 ) (m − m1 )
where (x, y, z) are coordinates of center of mass of original (whole) body and (x1, y1, z1) are coordinates of center
of mass of the portion taken out.
Illustration 5: A circular plate of uniform thickness has a diameter of 56 cm. A circular portion of diameter 42 cm
is removed from one edge of the plate as shown in Fig. 6.9. Find the center of mass of the remaining position.
(JEE MAIN)
Sol: Let O be the center of circular plate and, O1, the center of circular portion removed
from the plate. The COM of the whole plate will lie at O and the COM of the circular
cavity will lie at O1. Let O be the origin. So OO1 = 28cm – 21cm = 7cm.
The center of mass of the remaining portion will be given as O O1
28cm
mx − m1 x1 σ(Ax − A1 x1 ) π((28)2 0 − (21)2 7) 21cm
= xcm = =
(m − m1 ) σ(A − A1 ) π((28)2 − (21)2 )
xcm = − 9 cm = − 0.09 m.
Figure 6.9
This means that center of mass of the remaining plate is at a distance 9 cm from the
center of given circular plate opposite to the removed portion i.e. in this questioon,
the new Centre of Mass will shift 9 cm left.
Where a1 , a2 , …… an are the accelerations of the individual particles, and acm is the acceleration of the center
of mass. Now, from Newton’s second law, the force Fi acting on the ith particle is given by Fi = mi ai . Then, above
equation can be written as
Macm = F1 + F2 + ......... + Fn = Fint ernal + Fexternal ….(iii)
Internal forces are the forces exerted by the particles of the system on each other. However, from Newton’s third
law, these internal forces occur in pairs of equal and opposite forces, so their net sum is zero. ∴ Macm =Fext
This equation states that the center of mass (C.O.M) of a system of particles behaves as if all the mass of the system
were concentrated there and the resultant of all the external forces acting on all the particles of the system was
applied to it ( at C.O.M).
Concept: Whatever may be the rearrangement of the bodies in a system, due to internal forces (such as different
parts of the system moving away or towards each other or an internal explosion taking place, breaking a body into
fragments) provided net Fext=0, we have two possibilities:
(a) If the system as a whole was originally at rest, i.e. the C.O.M was at rest, then the C.O.M. will continue to be
at rest.
(b) If before the change, the system as a whole had been moving with a constant velocity (C.O.M was moving with
a consant velocity), it will continue to move with a constant velocity.
In presence of a net external force if the C.O.M had been moving with certain acceleration at the instant of
an explosion, in a particular trajectory, the C.O.M. will continue to move in the same trajectory, with the same
acceleration, as if the system had never exploded at all.
Briefly saying, any internal changes of the body do not effect the motion of C.O.M.
mv
or V= − ms-1
M+m
Negative sign shows that the platform will move in the opposite direction of relative velocity of man.
Illustration 7: Two block of masses m1 and m2 connected by a weightless spring of stiffness k rest on a smooth
horizontal plane (see Fig 6.11). Block 2 is shifted by a small distance x to the left and released. Find the velocity of
the center of mass of the system after block 1 breaks off the wall. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: Elastic potential energy stored in spring will get converted in kinetic energy of the blocks. If we consider the
FBD of mass m1 at the instant when it breaks off the wall, the normal reaction from the wall is zero, but normal
6 . 8 | Center of Mass and the Law of Conser vation of Momentum
reaction from the wall is equal to is equal to force exerted by spring on mass m1 so at this instant, force by spring
is also zero.
1 2
The initial potential energy of compression is = kx
2
When the block m1 breaks off from the wall, the normal reaction from the wall is zero, which in turn means that
the tension in the spring is zero. Thus the spring has its natural length at this instant and the kinetic energy of the
block m2 is given by
1 1
m v 2 = kx2
2 2 2 2
kx2
x
v 22 =
m2 m1 m2
k
v2 = x Figure 6.11
m2
m2 m2 x k
∴ Vcm
= = v2
m1 + m2 m1 + m2 m2
x km2
∴ Velocity of center of mass of system Vcm = ms-1
m1 + m2
6. LINEAR MOMENTUM
The quantity momentum
(denoted as P ) is a vector defined as the product of the mass of a particle and its velocity
v , i.e. P = m v ………(i)
From Newton’s second law of motion, if mass of a particle is constant
dv d dP
= F ma= m= (mv)
=
dt dt dt
Thus, for constant m, the rate of change of momentum of a body is equal to the resultant force acting on the body
and is in the direction of that force.
a system of n particles with masses m1 , m2 ….. etc., and velocities v1 , v 2 ….. etc. respectively, the total momentum
For
P in a particular reference frame is,
P = P 1 + P2 + ........ + Pn = m1 v1 + m1 v 2 + ......... + mn vn ;
or P = MVcm
dP dVcm
Also, =M = Macm = Fext
dt dt
dP
∴ = Fext
dt
The magnitude of linear momentum may be expressed in terms of the kinetic energy as well.
p = mv
P hysics | 6.9
1 2
or =p2 m
=2 2
v 2m mv
= 2mK
2
p2
Thus, p = 2Km or K =
2m
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Both linear momentum and kinetic energy are dependent on the reference frame since velocity is
inclusively dependent on the frame of reference.
Nitin Chandrol (JEE 2012, AIR 134)
Illustration 8: A gun (mass = M) fires a bullet (mass = m) with speed v r relative to barrel of the gun which is
inclined at an angle of 60° with horizontal. The gun is placed over a smooth horizontal surface. Find the recoil
speed of gun. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: When a bullet is fired, gun recoils in backward direction. Using law of conservation of linear momentum we
can find the recoil velocity of gun.
Let the recoil velocity of gun be v . The relative velocity of the bullet is v r at an angle of 60o with the horizontal.
Taking gun + bullet as the system the net external force on the system in horizontal direction is zero. Let x-axis
be along the horizontal and bullet be fired towards the positive direction of x-axis. Initially the system was at rest.
Therefore, applying the principle of conservation of linear momentum along x-axis, we get
o
vr sin 60
o
vr cos 60 -v
Components of velocity
of bullet relative to ground
Figure 6. 12
6 . 1 0 | Center of Mass and the Law of Conser vation of Momentum
Mv x + m(v rx + v x ) =
0
− Mv + m(v cos60° − v) = 0
r
mv r cos60°
v =
M+m
mv r
or v= ms-1
2(M + m)
-1 -1
10ms 3ms
Illustration 9: The block of mass m1 = 2kg and m2 = 5kg are
moving in the same direction along a frictionless surface with m1 m2
speeds 10 ms and 3 ms , respectively m2 being ahead of
-1 -1
m1 as shown in Fig. 6.13. An ideal spring with spring constant Figure 6.13
K = 1120 N/m is attached to the back side of m2 . Find the
maximum compression of the spring when the blocks move together after the collision. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: As frictional force on the blocks is zero the total momentum of blocks can be conserved during collision. At
the instant of maximum compression some part of initial total K.E. of blocks is stored as elastic P.E. in the spring.
Let v be the final velocity of the system after collision when the blocks move together.
Applying the law of conservation of momentum, we have
m1u1 + m2u2 =(m1 + m2 )v
Substituting the values,
(2 × 10) + (5 × 3) = (2 + 5)v
35
=
v = 5m/s
7
Applying the law of conservation of energy we get
1 1 1 1
m u2 + m u2 = (m + m2 )v 22 + Kx2
2 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 2
m u2 + m u2 =(m + m )v + Kx2
1 1 2 2 1 2 2
2 × (10)2 + 5 × (3)2 = [(2 + 5) × (5)2 ] + 1120 x2
70 1
x2 = = ⇒ x = 0.25m
1120 16
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
In the above questions, note that the compression would be maximum when the relative velocity
between the blocks is zero.
B Rajiv Reddy (JEE 2012, AIR 11)
7. VARIABLE MASS
From Newton’s second law, Fext = ma is applicable to a system whose total mass m is constant. If total mass of the
system is not constant, then this form of Newton’s second law is not applicable. If at a certain moment of time the
P hysi cs | 6.11
dp
total mass of a system is m and a mass dm is added (or separated) to the system, then we apply Fext = to the
system comprising “m+dm” to get dt
Fext .dt =dp =pfinal − pinitial =(m + dm)(v + dv) − [mv + dm(v + u)]
or Fext= .dt mdv − dmu ; ( dm.dv 0 )
dv dm
or= Fext m − u
dt dt
dv dm
or m = Fext + u
dt dt
where u is velocity of adding or separating mass dm relative to the system having instantaneous mass m and
dm
instantaneous velocity v with respect to an inertial reference frame. The term can be positive or negative
dt
depending upon whether mass is added to the system or mass is separating from the system.
Problems related to variable mass can be solved in following three steps.
(a) Make a list of all the external forces acting on the main mass and draw its FBD.
(b) Apply an additional thrust force or reaction force Ft on the main mass, due to the action of the added(separated)
dm
mass on the main mass, the magnitude of which is u ± and direction is given by the direction of u in
dt
case the mass is being added or the direction of −u if mass is being separated.
(c) Apply the equation
dv dm
m = Fext + u (m = instantaneous mass)
dt dt
Illustration 10: A flat cart of mass m0 at t=0 starts moving to the left due to
a constant horizontal force F. The sand spills on the flat cart from a stationary
hopper. The rate of loading is constant and equal to µ kg/s. Find the time
dependence of the velocity and the acceleration of the flat cart in the process of
loading. The friction is negligibly small. (JEE ADVANCED)
F
Sol: The hopper is at rest in K frame, so in the frame of the cart its initial velocity
will be u=-v, where v is velocity of cart in K frame. Here we have used the
dv dm Figure 6.14
equation of motion of variable mass m = Fext + u
dt dt
dm
The rate of increase of mass of the flat car = µ kgs−1
dt
The hopper is stationary and so its relative velocity is u = 0 - v = - v
The equation of motion is given by
dv dm dm
m = F+ u = F − µv µ and u =
= −v
dt dt dt
At the instant t, m = m0 + µt
v t
dv dt dt dv dt
∴
F − µv
= =
m m0 + µt
⇒ ∫ F − µv = ∫ m + µt
0 0 0
1 F − µv 1 m + µt
or, − loge = loge 0
µ F µ m0
6 . 1 2 | Center of Mass and the Law of Conser vation of Momentum
F m + µt Ft
or loge = loge 0 ⇒ v = ms−1
F − µv m0 m0 + µt
The acceleration a is given by
dv Fm0
a
= = ms−2
dt
(m0 + µt )
2
Alternative:
dv dm dm dv dm
m F+
= u=
F− v or m + v=
F
dt dt dt dt dt
mv t
d
or F ⇒ ∫ d(mv) =
(mv) = ∫ Fdt
dt 0 0
Ft
or mv= Ft ⇒ v= ; ( m= m0 + µt)
(m0 + µt)
8. ROCKET PROPULSION
The propulsion of rocket is an example of a system of variable mass. In the combustion chamber of a rocket, the
fuel is burnt in the presence of an oxidizing agent due to which a jet of gases emerges from the tail of the rocket.
Thus the mass of the rocket is continuously decreasing. This action due to emission of gases in the backward
direction produces a reaction force in the forward direction due to which the rocket moves forward.
u v
At t = 0 At t = 0
v=u m=m
m = m0 v=v
Exhaust velocity = vr
Let m0 be the mass of the rocket and u be its velocity at time t = 0, and m be its mass and v be its velocity at any
time t. (see Fig. 6.15)
dm
The mass of the gas ejected per unit time or the rate of change of mass of the rocket is − and v r be the exhaust
dt
dm
velocity of the gases relative to the rocket. Usually − and v r are assumed constant throughout the journey of
the rocket. dt
Now using the equation of motion for a system of variable mass derived in the previous article we get,
dv dm
m = mg + v r
dt dt
dv v r dm
or = g+
dt m dt
dm
or
= dv v r + g.dt
m
dm
This is a vector equation and we do not assume any sign of . It is taken to be positive. After evaluating the
dt
definite integrals, when we substitute the scalar components of the vectors with proper signs we get the correct
result.
P hysi cs | 6.13
v m t
dm
Integrating on both sides, we get
= ∫ dv vr ∫ + g. ∫ dt
u m0
m 0
m
or =
v − u v r ln + g.t
m0
m
or v =u + g.t + v r ln
m0
Now taking upwards direction as positive and downwards as negative (g and vr are downwards and u is upwards)
we get,
m
v = u − g.t + ( − v r )ln
m0
m
Thus, v =u − gt + v r ln 0
m
dm
Now if − = µ (constant), then m = m0 - mt
dt
m0
Thus, v =u − gt + v r ln
m0 − µt
If the initial velocity of the rocket u = 0, and the weight of the rocket is ignored as compared to the reaction force
m
of the escaping gases, the above equation reduces to v = v r ln 0
m
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
The concept of variable mass can also be physically visualized by changing the reference frame to the
instantaneous velocity of body. In that case mass is either being added by constant speed or being
removed by a constant speed. Considering the dm mass and the body as a system, and writing the
equations of conservation of momentum one can see the magic!
Anand K (JEE 2011, AIR 47)
Illustration 11: (a) A rocket set for vertical firing weighs 50 kg and contains 450 kg of fuel. It can have a maximum
exhaust velocity of 2000 m/s. What should be its minimum rate of fuel consumption?
(i) To just lift it off the launching pad?
(ii) To give it an acceleration of 20 m/s2?
(b) What will be the speed of the rocket when the rate of consumption of fuel is 10 kg/s after whole of the fuel is
consumed? (Take g = 9.8 m/s2) (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: To lift the rocket upward against gravity, the thrust force in the upward direction due to exiting gases should
be greater than or equal to the gravitational force. During motion the mass of rocket decreases till whole of its fuel
is consumed. Final velocity of rocket is
m
v =u − gt + vr ln 0 .
m
(a) (i) To just lift the rocket off the launching pad
Initial weight = thrust force
6 . 1 4 | Center of Mass and the Law of Conser vation of Momentum
dm dm m0 g
or m=
0g vr − ; or − =
dt dt vr
dm (450 + 50)(9.8)
Substituting the values, we get − = = 2.45 kg/s
dt 2 × 103
(ii) Net acceleration a = 20 m / s2
∴ ma= Ft − mg
dm
or m(a + g) = Ft = v r −
dt
dm m(g + a)
This gives, − =
dt vr
9. COLLISION
An event in which two or more bodies exert forces on each other for a relatively short time is called collision.
If net external force acting on the system of bodies is zero, then according to the law of conservation of linear
momentum, the total momentum of the system of bodies before and after the collision remains constant.
Collisions can also be classified on the basis of the line of action of the forces of interaction.
(i) Head- on collisions: A collision is said to be head-on if the direction of the velocities of each of the
colliding bodies are along the line of action of the forces of interaction acting on the bodies at the
instant of collision.
(ii) Oblique collisions: A collision is Y
said to be oblique if the direction of
the velocities of the colliding bodies A v1
u1
are not along the line of action of
X X
the forces of interaction acting on A B
the bodies at the instant of collision.
Just after collision, at least one of the B v2
colliding bodies moves in a direction
different from the initial direction of Figure 6.17: Collision in two dimensions
motion.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Consider the collision of two small smooth spheres of masses m1 and m2 moving with m1 m1
v1 v2
velocities u1 and u2 respectively in the same direction along the line joining their centers.
Suppose m1 is following m2 with u1 > u2 i.e. m1 tries to overtake m2 but as the line of m2 m2
motion is same as the line joining the centers of the spheres, head-on ellastic collision
Figure 6.19: Head-on
takes place. Let their velocities after the elastic collision are v1 and v 2 respectively,
collision between two
with v 2 > v1 as shown in the Fig. 6.19
particles
6 . 1 6 | Center of Mass and the Law of Conser vation of Momentum
2m1 m2 − m1
=v2 u1 + u2 …(iv)
m1 + m2 (m1 + m2 )
m − m2 2m2
Similarly, v1 1
= u1 + u2 …(v)
m1 + m2 m1 + m2
Special Cases
(i) When m1 = m2 ,
From equation (i)
u1 − v1 = v 2 − u2 or v1 + v 2 = u1 + u2 …(vi)
Equation (iii) gives
v1 − v 2 = u2 − u1 …(vii)
Solving (vi) and (vii) we get
v1 = u2 and v 2 = u1
∴ In one dimensional elastic collision of two bodies of equal masses, the bodies exchange there velocities after
collision.
(ii) When m2 is at rest i.e. u2 = 0 .
2m1u1 m − m1 2m1u1
=v2 + 2 u2 ⇒ v 2 =
m1 + m2 m2 + m1 m1 + m2
1 m1m2 2 2
=∆E (e − 1)(u1 − u2 )
2 m1 + m2
Putting e = 0 in this equation, it is clear that the loss of kinetic energy is maximum in case of pefectly inelastic
collision.
Illustration 12: A block of mass m moving at a velcoity v collides head on with another block of mass 2m at rest.
If the coefficient of restitution is 0.5, find the velocities of the blocks after the collision. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Solve using law of conservation of momentum, before and after collision and the equation of restitution.
Suppose after the collision the block of mass m moves at a velocity u1 and the block of mass 2m moves at a
velocity u2 . By conservation of momentum,
mv mu1 + 2mu2
= … (i)
The velocity of sepration is u2 − u1 and the velocity of approach is v.
v
So, u2 − u1 = … (ii)
2
v
Solving (i) and (ii) we get, u1 = 0 ms−1 and u2 = ms−1.
2
Illustration 13: A ball is moving with velocity 2 m/s towards a heavy wall moving 2 m/s 1 m/s
towards the ball with speed 1 m/s as shown in Fig. 6.20. Assuming collision to be
elastic, find the velocity of ball immediately after the collision. (JEE MAIN)
Figure 6.20
Sol: The equation of conservation of momentum will not give us any fruitful
result because the mass of the wall is very large and remains at rest before and
after the collision. This problem has to be solved by using equation of restitution
The speed of wall will not change after the collision. So, let v be the velocity of the ball after collision in the direction
shown in Fig. 6.21. Since, collision is elastic (e = 1).
velocity of Separation=velocity of approach
or v − 1 = 2 − ( −1)
or v = 4 m/s
Illustration 14: A ball of mass m is projected vertically up from smooth horizontal floor with a speed V0. Find the
total momentum delivered by the ball to the surface, assuming e as the coefficient of restitution of impact.
(JEE MAIN)
Sol: By Newton’s third law the impulse delivered by the ball to the surface at each collision will be equal in
magnitude to the impulse delivered to the ball by the surface i.e. change in momentum of ball at each collision.
The total impulse will be the sum of DP due to all the collisions.
The momentum delivered by the ball at first, second, third impact etc. can be given as the corresponding change
in its momentum ( ∆P ) at each impact.
( ∆=
P)1 (mV1 )ˆj − m( −V0 )ˆj ⇒ ∆P=
1 m(V1 + V0 )
Similarly ∆P=
2 m(V1 + V2 ) , ∆P=
3 m(V2 + V3 ) , …. and so on.
⇒ The total momentum transferred ∆P = ∆P1 + ∆P2 + ∆P3 + .......
Illustration 15: A stationary body explodes into four identical fragments such that three of them fly off mutually
perpendicular to each other, each with same K.E. Find the energy of explosion. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: As the body is initially at rest, the vector sum of momentum of all fragments will be zero. The energy of
explosion will appear as K.E. of fragments.
Let the three fragments move along X, Y and Z axes. Therefore their velocities can be given as
V1 = Viˆ , V2 = V ˆj and V3 = Vkˆ ,
where V = speed of each of the three fragments. Let the velocity of the fourth fragment be V4 Since, in explosion no
net external force is involved, the net momentum of the system remains conserved just before and after explosion.
Initially the body is a rest,
⇒ mV1 + mV2 + mV3 + mV4 = 0
(
Putting the values of V1 , V2 and V3 , we obtain, V =−V ˆi + ˆj + kˆ
4 )
Therefore, V4 = 3 V
The energy of explosion
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
∴E =
KEf − KEi =
mV1 + mV2 + mV3 + mV4 − (0)
2 2 2 2
P hysi cs | 6.19
1
Putting V=
1 V=
2 V=
3 V and setting mV 2 = E0 , we obtain, E = 6E0 .
2
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
It is not advised to break the components of velocity in any other direction even though they are still
valid. The only problem will be in using the coefficient of restitution.
Definition of coefficient of restitution can be applied in the normal direction in the case of oblique
collision.
G.V. Abhinav (JEE 2012, AIR 329)
Illustration 16: After perfectly inelastic collision between two identical particles moving with same speed in
different directions, the speed of the particles becomes half the initial speed. Find the angle between the two
before collision. (JEE MAIN)
v
Sol: In case of an oblique collision, the momentum of individual particles are added m 2m
v
vectorially in the equation of conservation of linear momentum.
m 2
Let θ be the desired angle. Linear momentum of the system will remain conserved.
v
Figure 6.23
6 . 2 0 | Center of Mass and the Law of Conser vation of Momentum
Illustration 17: A ball of mass m hits the floor with a speed v making an angle of incidence θ with the normal. The
coefficient of restitution is e. Find the speed of the reflected ball and the angle of reflection of the ball.
(JEE MAIN)
Sol: In case of an oblique collision with fixed surface the component of velocity of
colliding particle parallel to surface doesn’t change. The impulse will act along the
v
normal to the surface so use the equation of restitution along the normal. v’
See Fig. 6.24. Let the angle of reflection is θ ' and the speed after the collision is v ' . ’
The impulse on the ball is along the normal to the floor during the collision. There
is no impulse parallel to the floor. Thus, the component of the velocity of the ball
parallel to the surface remains unchanged before and after the collision. This gives Figure 6.24
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Inelastic collision doesn’t always mean that bodies will stick, which is very clear from the concept of
oblique collision. Only the velocities along n-axis become same and may be different in t-direction.
Anurag Saraf JEE 2011, AIR 226
Note : When the net external force acting on the system is zero, the C-frame becomes an inertial frame.
Finally, let us consider total kinetic energy. The total kinetic energy of the two particles in the C-frame is
1 2 1 2
P1/c2 P1/c2
K sys/c = K1/c + K 2/c = m1 v1/c + m2 v 2/c = +
2 2 2m1 2m2
m1m2 1 1 1
Now, µ= or + =
m1 + m2 m2 m2 µ
P1/c2 µv rel
2
Then K=
sys/c =
2µ 2
The total kinetic energy of the partices of the system in the K-frame is related to the total kinetic energy in C-frame.
The velocity of the ith particle of the system in K-frame can be expressed as:
= v i v i/c + v c
1 1 2 1 v 2c
So we can write K=
sys
2
∑ i i 2 ∑ i i/c c 2 ∑ i i/c c ∑ i i/c 2
m=v 2
m (v + v=) m v 2
+ v m v + ∑ mi
In the C-frame, the summation ∑
= mi v i/c MV
= com,C 0.
1 v2 v 2c
So we get K sys =∑ mi v i/c
2
+ c ∑ mi =
K sys/c + ∑ mi
2 2 2
Sol: In absence of frictional forces on block, the total mechanical energy of the system comprising the blocks and
spring will be conserved. At the time of maximum expansion of spring, the mechanical energy in C frame will be
totally stored as elastic P.E. of the spring
This problem can be best solved in the C-frame or the reference frame rigidly fixed to the center of mass of the
system of two blocks.
Initially at t=0 when the block m2 is given velocity v 0 , the total kinetic energy of the blocks in C-frame is related
to the total kinetic energy in the given frame K by the relation,
2
µvrel (m + m2 )v c2 (m + m2 )v c2 m 1 m2 m2 v 0
K sys = + 1 K sys/c (0) + 1
= =
µ ; vrel v 0=
= ; vc
2 2 2 m1 + m2 m1 + m2
where the first term on the right hand side of this relation is the total kinetic energy in C-frame at t=0, Ksys/c(0), and
the second term is the kinetic energy associated with the motion of the system of blocks as a whole in the K-frame.
As there are no dissipative external forces acting on the system, the total mechanical energy will remain constant,
both in the C-frame and the K-frame. In the C-frame the blocks will oscillate under the action of spring force and
the kinetic energy in the C-frame will get converted into the elastic potential energy of the spring and vice-versa,
the total mechanical energy remaining constant at each instant, equal to the total kinetic energy in C-frame at t=0,
Ksys/c(0).
Initially at t=0 when the block m2 is given velocity v 0 , the mechanical energy in C frame will be totally kinetic
(Ksys/c(0)), and at the instant of maximum extension of the spring, the mechanical energy in C-frame will be totally
converted into elastic potential energy of the spring. So we have,
1 2 1 m1m2 2 1 2
K sys/c (0) = kxmax ⇒ v = kx
2 2 m1 + m2 0 2 max
m1m2
Thus, maximum extension is xmax = v 0
k(m1 + m2 )
tf
Thus the quantity ∫ti F . dt is the impulse of the force F during the time interval ti and t f and is equal to the
Illustration 19: A block of mass m and a pan of equal mass are connected by a string going over a smooth light
pulley as shown in Fig. 6.27. Initially the system is at rest when a particle of mass m falls on the pan and sticks to
it. If the particle strikes the pan with a speed v find the speed with which the system moves just after the collision.
(JEE MAIN)
Sol: By Newton’s third law, the impulse imparted to the particle in upward direction will be equal in magnitude to
the total impulse imparted to the system of block and the pan.
Let N be the contact force between the particle and the pan during the collision.
Consider the impulse imparted to the particle. The force N will be in upward direction and the
impulse imparted to it will be ∫ N dt in the upward direction. This should be equal to the change
in momentum imparted to it in the upward direction.
Thus, ∫ N dt =Pf − Pi =−mV − ( −mv) =mv − mV ….(i) m
Similarly considering the impulse imparted to the pan. The forces acting on it are tension T upwards
and contact force N downwards. The impulse imparted to it in the downward direction will be, m m
∫ (N − T)dt= mV − 0= mV ….(ii)
Figure 6.27
Impulse imparted to the block by the tension T will be upwards,
∫ T dt= mV − 0= mV ….(iii)
Adding (ii) and (iii) we get, ∫ Ndt = 2mV ….(iv)
v
2mV or
Comparing (i) and (iv) we get, mv − mV = V= ms−1
3
PROBLEM-SOLVING TACTICS
Applying the principle of Conservation of Linear Momentum
(a) Decide which objects are included in the system.
(b) Relative to the system, identify the internal and external forces.
(c) Verify that the system is isolated.
(d) Set the final momentum of the system equal to its initial momentum. Remember that momentum is a vector.
(e) Always check whether kinetic energy is conserved or not. If it is conserved, it gives you an extra equation.
Otherwise use work-energy theorem, carefully.
(f) Try to involve yourself physically in the question, imagine various events. This would help in some problems
where some parameters get excluded by conditions. This will also help in checking your answer.
Impulse
(g) Ignore any finite-value forces, while dealing with impulses.
(h) Write impulse equations carefully, because integration which we are unable to calculate will always cancel out.
Collisions
(i) Remembering special cases of collisions would be nice.
6 . 2 4 | Center of Mass and the Law of Conser vation of Momentum
FORMULAE SHEET
∑ m i ri
Position of center of mass of a system: rcom = i
M
rCOM = xCOMˆi + y COMˆj + z COMkˆ
m1 x1 + m2 x2 + ..... + mn xn ∑ mi xi
xCOM = = i
m1 + m2 + ..... + mn ∑ mi
i
COM COM
R R
R 3R
2 8
O O
Hemispherical shell Solid hemispherical
COM COM
R R
R 3R
2 8
O O
Hemispherical shell Solid hemispherical
Figure 6.29
If some mass or area is removed from a rigid body, then the position of center of mass of the remaining portion is
obtained from the following formula:
m r − m2 r2
rCOM = 1 1
m1 − m2
Where m1 is the mass of the body after filling all cavities with same density and m2 is the mass filled in the cavity.
Cavity mass is assumed negative.
m1 v1 + m2 v 2 + ..... + mn v n
∑ mi vi
Velocity of COM v COM = i
=
m1 + m2 + ..... + mn ∑ mi
i
P hysi cs | 6.25
Total momentum of a n-particle system PCOM = P1 + P2 + ...... + Pn = Mv COM
∑ mi ai
m a + m2 a2 + ...... + mnan i
Acceleration of COM aCOM = 1 1
m1 + m2 + ...... + mn ∑ mi
i
Net force acting on the system FCOM = F1 + F2 + ...... + Fn
Net external force on center of mass is Macm = Fext
If net force on the system F = F1 + F2 + F3 + ...... + Fn = 0 then, P1 + P2 + P3 + ...... + Pn = constant
dv dm
m = −mg + v r −
dt dt
dm dm
Here − = rate at which mass is ejecting and v r − =Thrust force.
dt dt
m
Final velocity of rocket v =u − gt + v r ln 0
m
Impulse of a force: J =∫ F dt =∆p =pf − pi
Collision
(a) In the absence of any external force on the system the linear momentum of the system will remain conserved
before, during and after collision, i.e.,
m1 v1 + m2 v 2 =(m1 + m2 )v =m1 v '1 + m2 v '2 …(i)
(b) In the absence of any dissipative forces, the mechanical energy of the system will also remain conserved, i.e.
1 1 1 1 2 1 1
m1 v12 + m2 v 22 = (m1 + m2 )v 2 + kxm = m1 v1' 2 + m2 v '22 …(ii)
2 2 2 2 2 2
m − m2 2m2
= v '1 1 v1 + v 2
m1 + m2 m1 + m2
m − m1 2m1
= v '2 2 v 2 + v1
m1 + m2 m1 + m2
6 . 2 6 | Center of Mass and the Law of Conser vation of Momentum
m − em2 m2 + em2
= v '1 1 v1 + v 2
m1 + m2 m1 + m2
m − em1 m1 + em1
= v '2 2 v 2 + v1
m1 + m2 m1 + m2
The C-frame: Total kinetic energy of system in K-frame is related to total kinetic energy in C-frame as:
Mv 2c
K sys =
K sys/c +
2
;M= ∑ mi
mm
−P2/c = 1 2 ( v1 − v 2 )
For a two-particle system: P1/c =
m1 + m2
2 2
mm µv rel P1/c
Or P1/c = µv rel = 1 2 v1 − v 2 and K=
P2/c = sys/c =
m1 + m2 2 2
Solved Examples
JEE Main/Boards
∫ x dm
Example 1: The linear mass density of rod of a length Center of mass of rod X cm =
l=2 m varies from A as (2+x) kg/m. What is the position ∫ dm
of center of mass from end A. l
l
x3
∫ x(2 + x)dx (x2 + )
Sol: To find C.O.M of continuous mass distributions 3
0 0
= X cm =
consider a small element of distribution of mass dm. l
2
l
x
Then the co-ordinate of C.O.M. is given as ∫ (2 + x)dx 2x +
2
0
0
y
l3
l2 + 2
X cm =
= 3 6l + 2l
l2 12 + 3l
2l +
2
6 × 2 + 2 × 4 20 10
x For l = 2 m, X cm
= = = m
(0,0) A 12 + 3 × 2 18 9
x dx
10
So center of mass is at a distance m from A.
∫ x dm
∴ xCOM = the limits of integration should be
9
M
chosen such that the small elements covers entire mass Example 2: One fourth of the mass of square lamina is
distribution. cut off (see figure). Where does the center of mass of
the remaining part of the square shift.
Take an element of the rod of infinitesimal length dx at
distance x from point A. The mass of the element will be Sol: To find the C.O.M. of a body having a cavity we first
dm = λ dx = (2 + x)dx As x varies from o to l the element fill the cavity with the same density as body and find
covers the entire rod. the C.O.M. (x,y,z) of the whole body. Then we consider
the cavity as second body having negative mass and
P hysi cs | 6.27
A x
vA vB
o
30
o
60
x
(0,0)
Example 3: The magnitude and direction of the and v 'B = v 'Bx 2 + v 'By 2 = 41.92 ms−1
velocities of two identical frictionless balls before they
strike each other are as shown in figure. Assuming v’A v’B
e=0.90, determine the magnitude and direction of the
velocity of each ball after the impact. v A = 30 ms−1 ,
vB = 40 ms−1
o
40.3 55.6
o
350
⇒ a0= − 9.8 ms−2 m k
28 M
v0
⇒ a0 = 12.5 − 9.8 = 2.7 ms−2
1 2 m2 v 20 1 2 1
= mv 0 − (M + m) K sys
= m vB= +0 mv 2
2 2 2 2
(M + m)
2mv 2cm
Now =
K sys K sys/c +
mv 20 m 2
= 1 − 1 v2
2 M + m
⇒ mv 2 =K sys/c + m
2 4
mMv 20
∆K = J
2(M + m) 1 µv 2 m v2
⇒ K sys/c = mv 2 K sys/c = rel = .
4 2 2 2
Example 7: Two blocks B and C of mass m each
connected by a spring of natural length l and spring Initially the potential energy of spring is zero and when
constant k rest on an absolutely smooth horizontal the compression is maximum the energy in C-frame
surface as shown in figure A third block A of same mass will be entirely converted into potential energy of the
collides elastically to block B with velocity v. Calculate the spring, thus we can write
velocities of blocks, when the spring is compressed as
mv 2 1
much as possible and also the maximum compression. 2
= k xmax
4 2
m
v ⇒ xmax =
v
2k
A B C
C v0 A B
m m 2m
M(M + m)v 22
⇒ mg(R − r) =
B M 2m
2g(R − r)
⇒ v2 =
m ms-1
M(M + m)
(a) How far has the block moved when the cylinder
reaches the bottom point B of the track?
Example 5: Two balls of masses m and 2m are
(b) How fast is the block moving when the cylinder suspended by two threads of same length l from the
reaches the bottom of the track? same point on the ceiling. The ball m is pulled aside
through an angle α and released after imparting to it a
Sol: As there are no frictional forces acting on the tangential velocity v0 towards the other stationery ball.
system comprises cylinder and block, the gravitational To what heights will the balls rise after collision, if the
potential energy of cylinder is converted into the kinetic collision is perfectly elastic?
energy of cylinder and block.
Sol: In case of perfectly elastic collision, the kinetic
energy of the system is conserved. At the maximum
(a) There are no external forces acting on the system
vertical displacement of the ball the total kinetic energy
comprising cylinder and the block in the horizontal
is converted in to gravitational potential energy.
direction. So we can conserve momentum in the
horizontal direction, so when cylinder reaches point B
on the block, let its velocity in K-frame be v1 towards
right and velocity of block in K-frame be v2 towards left.
So we get
0= Mv 2 ….(i)
mv1 − Mv 2 or mv1 =
Also the COM of the system was initially at rest and
will continue to remain at rest in absence of horizontal
external forces. When m moves towards right a distance
of (R – r) relative to block M. m
h = l(1-cos )
We can write, 2m
v0
mx1 + Mx2 m ∆x1 + M ∆x2
X cm = = ⇒ ∆X cm = 0
m+M m+M Ball of mass m will collide the ball of mass 2m, which is
initially at rest.
6 . 3 2 | Center of Mass and the Law of Conser vation of Momentum
The velocity of impact of m be v, then by conserving Suppose the velocity of the shot relative to the gun be
energy of m we get u and its velocity relative to the ground be V. The gun
1 1 recoils with a speed v. As the system comprising gun
m v 20 + mgl(1 − cos α ) = mv 2 and the shot rests on a smooth horizontal plane, the
2 2
net horizontal external force will be zero, so conserving
2 2 …(i)
v + 2gl(1 − cos α ) =v
0 momentum in the horizontal direction, taken as the
Conserve momentum of balls before and after collision x – axis, we get
to get,
(nm) v x + mVx =0 ⇒ nm v x + m(ux + v x ) =0
v v1 + 2v 2
mv mv1 + 2mv 2 or =
= …(ii)
⇒ (nm)( − v) + m(u cos 45 − v) =
0
Equation for coefficient of restitution gives
mu
v v 2 − v1
= …(iii) ⇒ − (n + 1)mv + =0 …(i)
2
Add (ii) and (iii) to get 2v = 3v2
Again, Vx =−n v x =−n ( − v) ; ⇒ Vx =
nv …(ii)
2 v −1 v
or v 2 = ms and v1 = − ms−1 …(iv)
3 3 Now the component of the velocity of the gun along
Conserve energy for ‘m’ as it reaches maximum height, the vertical i.e. along the y – axis is zero, so the velocity
2 of the shot along the y – axis will be given by
1 v
m = mg h1 u
2 3 =Vy u sin 45 + 0 ; Vy = …(iii)
2
v2 v 2 + 2gl(1 − cos α ) Vy u / 2
or=
h1 = 0 [using (i)] ⇒ tan =
θ = (using (ii) & (iii))
18g 18 g Vx nv
u
Conserve energy for ‘2m’ as it reaches maximum height, ⇒ tan θ = ….(iv)
2 2nv
1 2v
2m = 2mgh2 u
2 3 From (i) we get v =
2(n + 1)
1 4v 2 u
⇒ h2 =. ⇒ = 2 (n + 1) ….(v)
2g 9 v
2 From (iv) and (v) we get
h2
⇒= [v 02 + 2gl(1 − cos α )] [using (i)]
9g
n+1 n+1
tan
= θ ⇒
= θ tan−1
Example 6: A gun is mounted on a gun carriage n n
movable on a smooth horizontal plane and the gun is
elevated at an angle 45° to the horizontal. A shot is
fired and leaves the gun inclined at an angle θ to the
horizontal. If the mass of gun and carriage is n times
that of the shot, find the value of θ.
m
o
45
y
nm
x
Let the mass of the shot be m and the mass of the gun
carriage be nm.
P hysi cs | 6.33
JEE Main/Boards
Q.2 A body of mass 1 kg, which was initially at rest, Q.8 A body of mass 2kg moving with a velocity of 3
explodes and breaks into three fragments of masses in ms-1 collides head-on with a body of mass 1 kg moving
the ratio of 1 : 1 : 3 . with a velocity of 4 ms-1. After collision the two bodies
stick together and move with a common velocity which
Both the pieces of equal masses fly off perpendicular to
in the units m/s is equal to
each other with a speed of 30 m/s each. The velocity of
the heavier fragment is 1 1 2 3
(A) (B) (C) (D)
10 4 3 3 4
(A) ms-1 (B) 10 2 ms-1
2
Q.9 Two particles of masses M and 2M are at a distance
(C) 20 ms-1 (D) 20 2 ms-1 D apart. Under the mutual gravitational force they start
moving towards each other. The acceleration of their
center of mass when they are D/2 apart is:
Q.3 If the linear momentum of a body is increased by
50%, its kinetic energy will increase by (A) 2GM / D2 (B) 4 GM / D2
(A) 50% (B) 100% (C) 125% (D) 150% (C) 8 GM / D2 (D) Zero
of the lighter block. The velocity of the center of mass of 20 m and the bullet at the distance of 100 m from
is (2002) the foot of the post. The initial velocity v of the bullet
is (2011)
(A) 30 ms-1 (B) 20 ms-1
v m/s
(C) 10 ms-1 (D) 5 ms-1
v
o
60 B
a a a a
(A) (B) (C) (D)
10 8 12 3
o
30 C
Q.6 Two small particles of equal masses start moving
in opposite directions from a point A in a horizontal 3 3 3m
circular orbit. Their tangential velocities are v and 2v
respectively, as shown in the figure. Between collisions, Q.8 The speed of the block at point B immediately after
the particles move with constant speed. After making it strikes the second incline is (2008)
how many elastic collisions, other than that at A, these
(A) 60 ms-1 (B) 45 ms-1
two particles will again reach the point A? (2009)
2v
Q.9 The speed of the block at point C, immediately
before it leaves the second incline is (2008)
(A) 4 (B) 3 (C) 2 (D) 1 Q.10 If collision between the block and the incline
is completely elastic, then the vertical (upward)
Q.7 A ball of mass 0.2 kg rests on a vertical post of component of the velocity of the block at point B,
height 5 m. a bullet of mass 0.01 kg, travelling with a immediately after it strikes the second incline is ( 2008)
velocity v ms-1 in a horizontal direction, hits the center
(A) 30 ms-1 (B) 15 ms-1
of the ball. After the collision, the ball and bullet travel
independently. The ball hits the ground at a distance (C) Zero (D) − 15 ms-1
6 . 3 6 | Center of Mass and the Law of Conser vation of Momentum
Q.11 This question has Statement-I and Statement-II. (D) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true, statement-II
Of the four choices given after the Statements, choose is a correct explanation of statement-I.
the one that best describes the two Statements.
Statement-I: A point particle of mass m moving with Q.12 Distance of the centre of mass of a solid uniform
speed v collides with stationary point particle of mass cone from its vertex is z 0 . If the radius of its base is R
M. If the maximum energy loss possible is given as and its height is h then z 0 is equal to: (2015)
1 m 3h 5h 3h2 h2
f mv 2 then f = . (A) (B) (C) (D)
2 M+m 4 8 8R 4R
Statement-II: Maximum energy loss occurs when the
particles get stuck together as a result of the collision. Q.13 A particle of mass m moving in the x direction
(2013) with speed 2v is hit by another particle of mass 2m
moving in the y direction with speed v. If the collision
(A) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true, statement-II is perfectly inelastic, the percentage loss in the energy
is not a correct explanation of statement-I. during the collision is close to (2015)
(B) Statement-I is true, statement-II is false.
(A) 50% (B) 56% (C) 62% (D) 44%
(C) Statement-I is false, statement-II is true
JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1 45° and 135° respectively with line AB. Each particle has
an initial speed of 49 ms-1. The separation AB is 245
Q.1 A block of mass 10 kg is suspended from a 3 m m. Both particles travel in the same vertical plane and
long weightless string. A bullet of mass 0.2 kg is fired undergo a collision. After the collision, P retraces its
into the block of horizontally with a speed of 20 ms-1 path. Taking g = 9.8 ms-2, determine
and it gets embedded in the block. Calculate (a) The position of Q when it hits the ground.
(a) The speed acquired by the block (b) How much time, after the collision, does Q take to
(b) The maximum displacement of the block reach the ground.
with the wall and is then released. It is found that after Q.10 Prove that in case of oblique elastic collision of
the first rebound, the string makes a maximum angle of two particles of equal mass out of which one is at rest,
30° with the wall. Calculate the coefficient of restitution the recoiling particles always move off at right angles
and the loss of kinetic energy due to impact. If all the to each other.
energy is converted into heat, find the heat produced
by the impact. Q.11 A uniform thin rod of mass M and length L
is standing vertically along the y-axis on a smooth
Q.6 A small ball A slides down the quadrant of a circle hroizontal surface, with its lower end at the origin (0,0).
as shown in the figure and hits the ball B of equal mass A slight disturbance at t = 0 causes the lower end to slip
which is initially at rest. Find the velocities of both the on the smooth surface along the positive x-axis, and
balls after collision. Neglect the effect of friction and the rod starts falling.
assume the collision to be elastic.
(a) What is the path followed by the center of mass of
A the rod during its fall?
10 cm
(b) Find the equation of trajectory of a point on the rod
located at a distance r from the lower end.
10 cm
Q.8 Find the center of mass of a uniform disc of radius Q.14 A shell is fired from a cannon with a velocity v
a from which a circular section of radius b has been m/s at an angle θ with the horizontal direction. At the
removed. The center of the hole is at a distance c from, highest point of its path is explodes into two pieces
the center of the disc. of equal masses. What is the speed of other piece
immediately after explosion, if one of the piece retraces
its path to the cannon?
Q.9 A man of mass m climbs a rope of length L
suspended below a balloon of mass M. The ballon is
stationary with respect to ground, Q.15 A particle of mass 4m which is at rest explodes into
three fragments. Two of the fragments each of mass
(a) If the man begins to climb up the rope at a speed vrel
m are found to move with a speed v each is mutually
(relative to rope) in what direction and with what speed
perpendicular directions. Calculate the energy released
(relative to ground) will the balloon move?
in the process of explosion.
(b) How much has the balloon by climbing the rope.
(c) What is the state of motion after the man stops Q.16 A moving particle of mass m makes a head on
climbing? elastic collision with a particle of mass 2m which is
initially at rest. Show that the colliding particle losses
(8/9)th of its energy after collision.
6 . 3 8 | Center of Mass and the Law of Conser vation of Momentum
Q.17 A ball is dropped on the ground from a height h. Q.21 A 60 kg man and a 50 kg woman are standing on
If the coefficient of restitution is e, then find the total opposite ends of a platform of mass 20 kg. The platform
distance travelled by the ball before coming to rest and is placed on a smooth horizontal ground. The man and
the total time elapsed. the woman begin to approach each other. Find the
displacement of the platform when the two meet in
Q.18 A block of mass m1 = 150 kg is at rest on a very terms of the displacement x0 of the man relative to the
long frictionless table, one end of which is terminated platform. The length of the platform is 6m.
in a wall. Another block of mass m2 is placed between
the first block and the wall, and set in motion towards Q.22 A rope thrown over a pulley has a ladder with a
m1 with constant speed u2 . man A on one of its ends and a counter balancing mass
M on it other end. The man whose mass is m, climb
upwards by ∆ r relative to the ladder and the stops.
150 kg m1 2 Ignoring the masses of the pulley and the rope, as well
m2
as the friction in the pulley axis, find the displacement
of the center of mass of this system.
Assuming that all collisions are completely elastic, find
3a
the value of m2 for which both blocks move with the Q.23 A drinking straw of length and mass 2m is
2
same velocity after m2 has collided once with m1 and
once with the wall. The wall has effectively infinite mass. placed on a square table of side ‘a’ parallel to one of its
sides such that one third of its length extends beyond
m
Q.19 A simple pendulum is suspended from a peg on a the table. An insect of mass lands on the inner end
2
vertical wall. The pendulum is pulled away from the wall
to a horizontal position and released. The ball hits the of the straw (i.e., the end which lies on the table) and
walks along the straw until it reaches the outer end.
2 It does not topple even when another insect lands on
wall, the coefficient of restitution being .
5 top of the first one. Find the largest mass of the second
What is the minimum number of collisions after which insect that can have without toppling the straw. Neglect
the amplitude of oscillation becomes less than 60°? friction.
Q.20 A block A of mass 2m is placed on another block Q.24 A boy throws a ball with initial speed 2 ag at an
b of mass 4 m which in turn in placed on a fixed table. angle θ to the horizontal. It strikes a smooth vertical
The two blocks have the same length 4d and they are wall and returns to his hand. Show that if the boy is
placed as shown in the figure. standing at a distance ‘a’ from the wall, the coefficient
of restitution between the ball and the wall equals
1
A 2m . Also show that θ cannot be less than 15°.
(4 sin2θ − 1)
m v B 4m
2d Q.25 A ball is projected from a point A on a smooth
d CM
P inclined plane which makes an angle α to the
4d horizontal. The velocity of projection makes an angle
θ with the plane upwards. If on the second bounce
The coefficient of friction (both static and kinetic)
the ball is moving perpendicular to the plane, find e in
between the block B and the table is µ. There is no
terms of α and θ . Here e is the coefficient of restitution
friction between the two blocks. A small object of mass
between the ball and the plane.
m moving horizontally along a line passing through the
center of mass of the block B and perpendicular to its
face with a speed v collides elastically with the block B Q.26 Two identical smooth balls are projected toward
at a height d above the table. each ther from points A and B on the horizontal ground
with same speed of projection. The angle of projection.
(a) What is the minimum value of v (call it v0), required
to make the block A topple? The angle of projection in each case is 30°. The distance
between A and B is 100 m. The balls collide in air
(b) If v = 2v0 find the distance (from the point P) at and return to their respective points of projection. If
which the mass m falls on the table after collision. coefficient of restitution is e = 0.7, find
P hysi cs | 6.39
(a) The speed of projection of either ball. Q.30 Ball B is hanging from an inextensible cord BC.
An identical ball A is released from rest when it is just
(b) Coordinates of point with respect to A where the
touching the cord and acquires a velocity v 0 before
balls collide.(Take g = 10 ms-2)
striking ball B. Assuming perfectly elastic impact
(e = 1) and no friction, determine the velocity of each
Q.27 Three identical particles A, B and C lie on a smooth ball immediately after impact.
horizontal table. (see figure) Light inextensible strings
which are just taut connect AB and BC and ∠ABC is
Q.31 A particle whose initial mass is m0 is projected
135°. An impulse J is applied to the particle C in the
vertically upwards at time t = 0 with speed gT, where
direction BC.
T is a constant. The particle gradually acquires mass
Find the initial speed of each particle. The mass of each on its way up and at time t the mass of the particle
particle in m. has increased to m0 edT . If the added mass is at rest
J relative to the particle when it is acquired, find the time
when the particle is at highest point and its mass at
135
o C that instant.
2k
1.
v0
O A
Determine
It collides with M, comes back and has a velocity of
(a) The maximum allowable velocity v 0 if the impulse 1.0 m/s when it reaches its initial position. The other
of the force exerted on the cord is not to exceed 3 Ns. blocks M after the collision moves 0.5 m up and comes
(b) The loss of energy as the cord becomes taut, if the to rest. Calculate the coefficient of restitution between
sphere is given the maximum allowable velocity v 0 . the blocks and the mass of the block M.
(Take sin θ ≈ tan θ =0.05 and g = 10 ms-2)
Q.29 An open car of mass 1000 kg is running at 25 m/s
holds three men each of mass 75 kg. Each man runs Exercise 2
with a speed of 5 ms–1 relative to the car and jumps off
from the back end. Find the speed of the car if the three Single Correct Choice Type
men jump off.
Q.1 A bullet of mass m moving with a velocity v strikes
C
a vertically suspended wooden block of mass M and
A embedded in it. If the block rises to a height h, the
initial velocity of the bullet will be
v0
M+m
(A) 2hg (B) 2hg
B m
(a) In succession
m M+m
(C) 2hg (D) hg
(b) All together. M+m m
Neglect friction between the car and the ground.
6 . 4 0 | Center of Mass and the Law of Conser vation of Momentum
Q.2 Two identical billiard balls A and B of equal mass Q.7 A body of mass m1 and speed v1 makes a head-on,
and radius are in contact on a horizontal table. A elastic collision with a body of mass m2, initially at rest.
similar third ball C strikes these balls symmetrically in The velocity of m1 after the collision is
the middle and remains at rest after the impact, the
m1 + m2 m1 − m2
coefficient of restitution of the balls is (A) v1 (B) v1
m1m2 m1 + m2
A 2m1 v1 2m2 v1
(C) (D)
C m1 + m2 m1 + m2
B
Q.8 In the above example, the velocity of mass m2 after
1 1 2 3 the collision is
(A) (B) (C) (D)
6 3 3 2 m1 + m2 m1 − m2
(A) v1 (B) v1
m1m2 m1 + m2
Q.3 A sphere of mass m moving with a constant velocity
u hits another stationary sphere of the same mass. If e 2m1 v1 2m2 v1
is the coefficient of the restitution, then the ratio of the (C) (D)
m1 + m2 m1 + m2
velocities of the two spheres after collision will be
Q.13 The center of mass of triangle shown in the figure. (B) If both A and R are true but R is not the correct
has co-ordinates. explanation of A.
y (C) If A is true but R is false
(D) If A is flase but R is true
b h h b
(C)
= x = ;y (D)
= x = ;y Q.17 Assertion: The center of mass of a proton and
3 3 3 3 an electron, released from their respective positions
remains at rest.
Q.14 A cart of mass M is tied to one end of a massless
rope of length 10 m. The other end of the rope is in the Reason: The proton and electron attract and move
hands of a man of mass M, the entire system is on a towards each other. No external force is applied,
smooth horizontal surface. The man is at x = 0 and the therefore, their center of mass remains at rest.
cart at x = 10 m. if the man pulls the cart by a rope, the
man and the cart will meet at the point : Q.18 Assertion: The center of mass of a body may lie
where there is no mass.
(A) x = 0 (B) x = 5 m
Reason: Center of mass of a body is a point, where the
(C) x = 10 m (D) They will nevemeet
whole mass of the body is supposed to be concentrated.
Comprehension Type (C) The total momentum of the particles after collision
is less than that before collision.
In physics, we come across many examples of collisions.
The molecules of a gas collide with one another and (D) Kinetic energy and momentum are both conserved
with the container. The collisions of a neutron with an in the collision.
atom is well known. In a nuclear reactor, fast neutrons
produced in the fission of uranium atom have to be Q.25 In elastic collision
slowed down. They are, therefore, made to collide with
hydrogen atom. The term collision does not necessarily (A) Only energy is conserved.
mean that a particle or a body must actually strike (B) Only momentum is conserved.
another. In fact, two particles may not even touch each
other and yet they are said to collide if one particle (C) Neither energy nor momentum is conserved.
influences the motion of the other. When two bodies (D) Both energy and momentum are conserved.
collide, each body exerts an equal and opposite force
on the other. The fundamental conservation law of
physics are used to determine the velocities of the Previous Years’ Questions
bodies after the collision. Collision may be elastic or
inelastic. Thus a collision may be defined as an event in
which two or more bodies exert relatively strong forces Q.1 A body of mass m moving with a velocity v in
on each other for a relatively short time. The forces the x-direction collides with another body of mass
that the bodies exert on each other are internal to the M moving in the y-direction with a velocity V. They
system. coalesce into one body during collsion. Find
Almost all the knowledge about the sub-atomic (a) The direction and magnitude of the momentum of
particles such as electrons, protons, neutrons, muons, the composite body.
quarks, etc. is obtained from the experiments involving (b) The fraction of the initial kinetic energy transformed
collisions. into heat during the collision. (1978)
There are certain collisions called nuclear reactions in
which new particles are formed. For example, when a Q.2 A 20 g bullet pierces through a plate of mass
slow neutron collides with a U235 nucleus, new nuclei M1 = 1kg and then comes to rest inside a second plate
barium-141 and Kr92 are formed. This collisioin is called of mass M2 = 2.98kg as shown in the figure. It is found
nuclear fission. In nuclear fusion, two nuclei deuterium that the two plates initially at rest, now move with equal
and tritium collide (or fuse) to form a helium nucleus velocities. Find the percentage loss in the initial velocity
with the emission of a neutron. of the bullet when it is between M1 and M2 . Neglect
any loss of material of the plates due to the action of
Q.23 Which one of the following collisions is not elastic? bullet. Both plates are lying on smooth table. (1979)
M1 M2
Q.24 Which one of the following statemnts is true
about inelastic collision?
Q.3 A circular plate of uniform thickness has a diameter
(A)The total kinetic energy of the particles after collision of 56 cm. A circular portion of diameter 42 cm is
is equal to that before collision. removed from one edge of the plate as shown in figure.
Find the position of the center of mass of the remaining
(B) The total kinetic energy of the particle after collision
portion. (1980)
is less than that before collision.
P hysi cs | 6.43
l
6 . 4 4 | Center of Mass and the Law of Conser vation of Momentum
Q.10 A particle of mass m is projected from the Q.11 A bob of mass m , suspended by a string of length
ground with an initial speed u0 at an angle α with the l1, is given a minimum velocity required to complete
horizontal. a full circle in the vertical plane. At the highest point,
At the highest point of its trajectory, it makes a it collides elastically with another bob of mass m
completely inelastic collision with another identical suspended by a string of length l2, which is initially at
particle, which was thrown vertically upward from rest. Both the strings are mass-less and inextensible. If
the ground with the same initial speed u0 . The angle the second bob, after collision acquires the minimum
that the composite system makes with the horizontal speed required to complete a full circle in the vertical
immediately after the collision is (2013, 14, 15, 16) plane, the ratio l1 / l2 is (2013)
π π π π
(A) (B) + α (C) − α (D)
4 4 4 2
PlancEssential Questions
JEE Main/Boards JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1 Exercise 1
Q. 7 Q.9 Q.16 Q.3 Q.6 Q.7
Q.10 Q.20 Q.21
Q.28 Q.32
Exercise 2 Exercise 2
Q.1 Q.9 Q.1 Q.2 Q.3
Q.4 Q.9
Answer Key
JEE Main/Boards
Exercise 1
5 10 7 3
Q.9 , Q.10 ,−
3 3 6 2
1
Q.11 (a) 3 ms-1 (b) ms-1 in the direction of motion of 1 kg
3
m1 17 ˆ 7 ˆ 5 5
Q.12 d Q.13 − ˆi + j+ k Q.14 0.5aiˆ + 0.7b ˆj Q.15 m; m
m2 4 4 6 6
Exercise 2
JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1
Q.1 (a) 0.39 m/s (b) 0.220 m (c) 39.32 J Q.2 15 m/s, 1080 kg ms-1
cb2
Q.8 At a distance from O on the other side of the hole.
a2 − b2
m
Q.9 (a) −mv rel / (M + m) (b) L (c) system is stationary
M+m
x2 y2
Q.11 (a) Straight line (b) + =1
[L / 2 − r]2 r2
2
m − m2 mhcot θ
Q.12 1 g Q.13 Q.14 3v cos θ
m1 + m2 M + m
6 . 4 6 | Center of Mass and the Law of Conser vation of Momentum
3 h(1 + e2 ) 2h 1 + e
Q.15 mv 2 Q.17 , Q.18 50 kg
2 1−e 2 g 1 − e
5 30 − 11x0
Q.19 4 Q.20 (a) 6µgd (b) = −6d 3µ Q.21
2 13
2 10 3J
Q.27 , , Q.28 (a) 1.65 m/s (b) 2.25 J Q.29 (a) 25.97 m/s (b) 25.92 m/s
7m 7m 7m
16.1o
Exercise 2
Comprehension Type
Q.23 B Q.24 B Q.25 D
MV ∆K Mm(v 2 + V 2 )
Q.1 (a) θ =tan−1 = ,P m2 v 2 + M2 V 2 (b) = Q.2 25%
mv K i (M + m)(mv 2 + MV 2 )
2mv 20
Q.3 9 cm Q.4 Opposite to velocity of B Q.5 (a) v0/3 (b)
3x20
2 2
x y
Q.6 4 Q.7 (a) a straight line (b) + 1
=
2
L r2
−r
2
Solutions
JEE Main/Boards
a a
Sol 5: MTot. . aCOM = m1 a + m2 a + …. mn a
1 2 n F dx
(Now, just like above question, question-4, we can find
that
x
B b C
m x + m2 x2 + ....mn xn
xCOM = 1 1
Mtot. b 4a2 − b2
sinθ = , cosθ = ,
2a 2a
Sol 6: We have
b
Mtot. . aCOM =m1 a + m2 a + …. mn a tanθ =
1 2 n
4a2 − b
Now, aCOM = 0, so we have
M M
Now, ρ = =
dV1 dV2 dVn 1 2 2
a sin θ cos θ
0 = m1 + m2 + ....mn a sin2θ
dt dt dn 2
EF
x dt, and integrating, we get
= 2(acos
θ − x).
tan θ
C = m1 V1 + m2 V2 + .....mn Vn =MTot. VCOM AE
(AD −DE)
C
So VCOM = = constant So, dA = . dx
MTot.
Hence proved. So, dm = ρ. dA = ρ. . dx
acos θ
Sol 7:
r3 =(0.025,0.433)
∫ x.dx
100 So xCOM = 0
y M
0.5 acos θ
0.5 ρ
x =
M
. ∫ x × 2x(acos θ − x). tan θ.dx
0
150 200
0.5 acos θ
r1 =(0,0) r2 =(0.5,0) 1×2
=
a2 sin θ.cos θ
. ∫ x(asin θ − x tan θ)dx
0
m x + m2 x2 + m3 x3 acos θ
So xCOM = 1 1 2 x2 x3 tan θ
MTot. = . asin θ −
a2 sin θ.cos θ 2 3
0
150 × (10) + 200 × (0.5) + 100 × (0.25)
= a3 sin θ.cos2θ a3 sin θ.cos2 θ
450 2
= . −
a2 sin θ.cos θ 2 3
P hysi cs | 6.49
2 × 1 + 3(–6) −18 + 2
xCOM = = =–1
Sol 10: Same as question (9) 1+3 4
5×1 + 4 ×3 12 + 5 17
m1 x1 + m2 x2 + m3 x3 y COM = = =
xCOM = and 1+3 4 4
m1 + m2 + m3
13 × 1 + 3 × ( −2) 13 − 6 7
m1 y1 + m2 y 2 + m3 y 3 z COM = = =
y COM = 1+3 1+3 4
m1 + m2 + m3
17 7
So, rCOM = −1, ,
4 4
Sol 11: (a) 2 1
2m/s 5m/s
m1 x1 + m2 x2 + m3 x3 + m4 x 4
m v + m2 v 2 Sol 14: xCOM =
v COM = 1 1 m1 + m2 + m3 + m4
m1 + m2
1× 0 + 2× a + 3× a + 4 × 0 5a a
2× 2 + 5×1 9 = = = î
= = = 3 m/s 1+2+3+ 4 10 2
2+1 3
m1 y1 + m2 y 2 + m3 y 3 + m4 y 4
(b) y yCOM =
2 1 m1 + m2 + m2 + m4
x 2m/s –5m/s
2× 2 −5×1 1× 0 + 2× 0 + 3×b + 4 ×b 7b ˆ
v COM = = –1/3 m/s = = j
2+1 10 10
2.5 2.5 5 5
So rCM = , = , Sol 4: (C)
3 3 6 6
A B
Exercise 2 25 m/s 20 m/s
(M + m) vA = 20 m/s
⇒v= 2gh
m
Sol 5: (C)
Sol 2: (B) m1 = 200g, m2 = 200 g, m3 = 600 g 2.5m
30 m/s
1.25m
15m/s
2.9 g
m m=0.1kg
30 m/s
m
3m Using momentum conservation
vx
1.50 × 0.1 = (2.9 + 0.1) v
vy
⇒ 15 = 3 × v ⇒ v = 5 m/s
from momentum conservation 1 v2
so mv2 = mgh ⇒h =
x ⇒ 30 × m = 3m × vx = 10 m/s 2 2g
25 5
y ⇒ 30 × m = 3m × vy = 10 m/s ⇒h = = = 1.25 m
2 × 10 4
⇒v= 102 + 102 = 10 2 m/s So L. (1 – cosθ) = 1.25 m
1
⇒cosθ = ⇒ θ = 60º
Sol 3: (C) Momentum = mv (mass = constant) 2
3v
so new vn = Sol 6: (A) The center of mass will be on x-axis, so yCOM
2
= 0.
1 1 9
New, K. E. = ×m×vn2= ×mv2× m 3m
2 2 4 ⇒15 × +y× =0
4 4
P hysi cs | 6.51
⇒y = –5 cm m1 v1 + m2 v 2
Sol 4: (C) v CM =
m1 + m2
Sol 7: (D) Elastic collision ⇒ Energy is conserved.
10 × 14 + 4 × 0 140
1 1 1 = = = 10 m/s
× mv12 = ×m×v22 + m×v22 10 + 4 14
2 2 2
v1=14 m/s v2=0
⇒v12 = 2v22
⇒v1 = 2 v'2
v2 m1 y1 + m2 y 2 + m3 y 3 + m4 y 4 + m5 y5
=
Using momentum conservation m1 + m2 + m3 + m4 + m5
⇒2mv ⇒2cosθ = mv1
(6m)(0) + (m)(a) + m(a) + m(0) + m( −a)
1v1 =
⇒cosθ = × 6m + m + m + m + m
v′2 2
a
=
1 10
cos θ = ⇒ θ = 45º ⇒ 90º
2
Sol 6: (C) At first collision one particle having speed
4π
Sol 8: (C) Momentum conservation 2v will rotate 240° or while other particle having
3
⇒ 2 × 3 – 1 × 4 = (2 + 1) v
2π
2 speed v will rotate 120° or . At first collision they
⇒v= m/s 3
3
will exchange their velocities. Now as shown in figure,
after two collisions they will again reach at point A.
Sol 9: (D) No external force ⇒ aCOM = 0
v A 2v
Previous Years’ Questions
2v 2/3 2/3 v
Sol 1: (D) Net force on centre of mass is zero. Therefore,
centre of mass always remains at rest. 2/3
st nd
1 collision 2 collision
Sol 2: (A) Let v’ be the velcoity of second fragment. v 2v
From conservation of linear momentum,
2m v cos θ m m
v cos θ v' 2h
Sol 7: (D) R = u
Just before explosion Just after explosion g
o
30 o 30
o
Sol 11: (C) Loss of energy is maximum when collision
30
C is inelastic as in an inelastic collision there will be
v1 maximum deformation.
v 2 = component of v1 along BC 1 Mm 2
KE in COM frame is V
2 M + n rel
3
= v1 cos30° = ( 60) 1 Mm 2
2
KEi =
2
V= ( Vrel 0 )
KEf 0=
M+m
=( 45) ms−1
1 Mm 2
Hence loss in energy is V
2 M+m
Sol 9: (B) Height fallen by the block from B to C M
⇒f=
M+m
h2 = 3 3 tan 30° = 3 m
Let v 3 be the speed of block, at point C, just before it h 3h
leaves the second incline, then: Sol 12: (A) z 0 =h − =
4 4
v3 = v 22 + 2gh2
1 1
m ( 2v ) + 2m ( v ) = 3mv 2
2 2
Sol 13: (B) Einitial =
= 45 + 2 × 10 × 3 = 105 ms −1 2 2
1 4 4 2 4
Sol 10: (C) In elastic collision, component of v1 E=
final 3m v 2 + v= mv 2
2 9 9 3
parallel to BC will remain unchanged, while component
perpendicular to BC will remain unchanged in 4
3−
magnitude but its direction will be reversed. ∴ Fractional loss= 3= 5= 56%
3 9
v
B
60°
B
30°
60° v||
30° C
30°
C
Just before Just after
P hysi cs | 6.53
JEE Advanced/Boards 1 1
× mTot × vTot2 = ×10.2×(0. 392)2 = 0. 8 J
2 2
Exercise 1 So energy lost = 40 J – 0.8 J = 39.2 J
20 100 m/s
30 v
0.2kg 100 m/s g=9.8m/s2
10kg
20m/s 50
From the conservation of momentum
(a) Now, from equation of motion
we have,
v = u + at = 100 – 9. 8 × (5) = 51 m/s
m1v1 + m2v2 = mTot × v
so v = 51 m/s
0. 2 × 20 + 10 × 0 = (10 + 0. 2) × v
Now at this velocity, particle exploded, Dt is very small
⇒ 4 = 10.2 × v and hence momentum can be conserved.
4
v= m/s = 0. 392 m/s So 50 × 51 = 20 × 150 + 30 × v′
10.2
⇒2550 = 3000 + 30 × v′
(b) From conservation of energy (Force by string is
perpendicular to displacement, hence no work done by −450
string) ⇒=v′ = –15m / s
30
1
× m × v2 = mghvert. (b) When no explosion:
2
v 2
(0.392)2 v = u + at
⇒h= = = 0. 0078 m
2g 2 × 9.81 ⇒ v = 100 – 9. 8 × 8 = 21.6 m/s
= 7. 8 mm ≈ 0. 008 m so momentum = m × v
In horizontal direction: = 50 × 21. 6= 1080 kg. m/s
When explosion:
For 20 kg v = u + at
= 150 – 9. 8 × (s) = 120.6 m/s
For 30 kg v = u + at
R(1 – cosθ) = 0. 008 m
= – 15 – 9. 8 × 3 = –44.4 m/s
1 − 0.08
⇒ cosθ = = 1 – 0.0027 = 0.9973 So total momentum
R
= 20 × (120.6) – (44.4)×(30)
So R sinθ = 3 × (1 − cos2 θ)
= 2412 – 1332 = 1080 kg m/s
2
=3× 1 − (0.9937) = 0. 220 m
Sol 3: (a) The particle are meet at the mid-point of the
So total displacement = 0. 220 m trajectory (i. e. vertical velocity = 0)
(c) Initial energy: u = 49 m/s
1 1 usin θ
×mB×vB2 = ×(0. 2)×(20)2 = 40 J So t =
2 2 g
Final energy: Thus, vx = horizontal velocity = ucosθ
6 . 5 4 | Center of Mass and the Law of Conser vation of Momentum
P Q 60º
P 30º
45º O 135º
45º
A B x Velocity of ball just before impact
position of Q
= 2gL(1 − cos θ) = 2 × 9.8 × 1 / 2
ucos 45º ×usin 45º = 9.8 = 3. 13 m/s
So position of Q =
g
1
v of ball after impact ⇒ mg(Dh) = mv2
u2 sin90º u2 (49)2 × 10 2
= = = = 122. 5 m
2g 2g 2 × 9.8 (energy conservation)
From position A in the (+)ve x-direction
⇒ 2gL.(1 − cos30º ) = vf
(b) Time take would be same as the vertical component
has not changed, so 3
⇒ 2 × 9.8 × 1 − = vf
usin θ 49 × sin 45º 2
t= = = 3. 54 sec
g 9.8
⇒ vf = 2.626
Sol 4: ⇒ vf = 1. 62 m/s
150 m/s 1.62
so coefficient of rest. = =0. 517
3.13
200 kg Loss of kinetic energy = heat produced
1
y
100 m/s = × m × (vi2 – vf2)
500 kg 60 m/s
150 kg vx 2
150 kg
x 1
= ×(0.01) × [(3. 13)2 – (1. 62)2]
2
0.0717
vy = = 0. 036 J
2
Now, since there is no external force = 0. 0085 cal.
Using momentum conservation in x-direction
Sol 6: No friction ⇒ no torque, so its pure translational
500 × 100 = 150 × vx + 150 × (–60)
motion
⇒150 × vx = 5 × 104 + 9000
Now, conservation of energy
150 × vx = 59 × 103
1
⇒ × mv2 = mgh
⇒vx = 393.33 m/s 2
P hysi cs | 6.55
Sol 8:
⇒v= 2gh
= 2 × 9.8 × 0.1 y
v = 1. 4 m/s a b
Now, as collision is elastic c x
B m r + m2 r2
A
1.4 m/s
B A
Now rCOM = 1 1
m vA vB m1 + m2
Take the disks as these two bodies and treat m2 as
so vB – vA = 1. 4 m/s …(i)
negative
and conservation of momentum gives:
Given body =
mAvA + mBvB = mA × 1. 4 m/s
⇒vA + vB = 1. 4 m/s …(ii)
on solving (i) and (ii) a b
vB = 1. 4 m/s
vA = 0 m/s
ρ.πa2 .(0) − ρ.πb2 × c
So xCOM =
ρ.( πa2 − πb2 )
Sol 7:
m
0.6-x where ρ =
W E area
−b2c
A B xCOM =
0.6m (a2 − b2 )
(a) Initial acceleration of B = 0.5 m / s2 W Sol 9: (a) No external force, hence vCOM = 0
So, kx = (0.5) (0.25)
As the magnitude of force would be the same for A, vB
Initial acceleration of A =
kx
=
( 0.5) ( 0.25)
0.1 0.1
2
vmax.
= 1.25 m/ s E m
= 1.25 cm/ s2 E thus,
(=
0.5 ) ( 0.25 ) ( 0.5 ) ( 0.25 ) m. vmax. – M. vB = 0
=(b) x
k 2 ⇒ mvmax. = M. vB …(i)
and vrel. = vmax. + vB …(ii)
= 0.0625 m
= 6.25 cm M
vrel. = + 1 vB
(c) Max distance would be when spring is fully
m
elongated. And, symmetry of conservation of energy vrel .m
⇒vB =
implies that expansion would be equal to companion. (m + M)
So, Maximum distance between m.vrel
⇒vB = in (–)ve direction
A and B = 60 cm + 6.25 cm (m + M)
= 66.25 cm (b) Drel. = L
Let xCOM = 0
then m. x1 – M. x2 = 0
6 . 5 6 | Center of Mass and the Law of Conser vation of Momentum
Sol 15:
Sol 17:
v
y
m h
vx x
2m m v
vy 2h
and time at first impact =
Momentum conservation in x-direction g
4 4 2 = h. [1 + 2e2(1 + e2 + e4 …. . )]
6 . 5 8 | Center of Mass and the Law of Conser vation of Momentum
⇒ v2 < gL
2e2 h.[1 + e2 ]
= h. 1 + =
2
1 − e [1 − e2 ] v after n collisions = en. 2gL
Similarly total time ⇒ e2n. (2gL) < gL
2 × un 1 4 1
n
2h ∞ 2un = time between ⇒ e2n < ⇒ <
= +∑ 8 2 5 2
g n=1 g
two impacts
⇒ n = 4 is the largest value satisfying.
2h 2h 2h 2
= + .2e + .2e +…
g g g Sol 20: (a)
2h m
= [1 + 2e(1 + e + e2…. )]
g v 2d
d
2h 2e 2h 1 + e
= 1 + = .
g 1 − e g 1 − e 4d
v=0
v1
Sol 18: If the block m2 is moving with same velocity v2
after wall collision ⇒ the velocity of block m1 and m2
m 4m
has same magnitude.
v1 –v1 Now, using momentum conservation ⇒ 4mv2 + mv1 = mv
u2 ⇒ 4v2 + v1 = v … (i)
m1 m2 m1 m2 v 2 − v1
Elasticity =1
u2 v
Now =1
v1 − ( − v1 ) ⇒ v2 – v1 = v …(ii)
2v
⇒ u2 = 2v1 …. (i) (i) + (ii) ⇒5v2 = 2v ⇒ v2 = and
5
and using momentum conservation
−3v
v1 =
u2m2 = m1v1 – m2v1 5
⇒2m2v1 = m1v1 – m2v1 ⇒3m2v1 = m1v1 To topple, the distance by 4m block should be 2d. (No
horizontal force on 2m block, and hence that block
⇒3m2 = m1
remains stationary)
⇒ m2 = 50 kg
N2
Sol 19:
N2 4mg
L
N1
2mg f=uN2
60º
N1 + 4mg = N2,
Now N1 = 2mg
h
⇒N2 = 6 mg
For the amplitude to be less than 60º. So f = 6μmg
1 thus acceleration (or deceleration)
mv2 < mg(Dh)
2
f 6µmg 3µg
⇒v2 < 2g (Dh) a= = =
4m 4m 2
v2< 2gL (1 – cos60º) So now the velocity (or v2) required
P hysi cs | 6.59
N Sol 25:
a a
4 2
os
gc
in
gs
a 2mg m’g
g
2µsinθ
Time for first collision, T1 =
a gcos α
2µsinθ
N = 2mg+m’g Time for second collision, T2 = e
gcos α
a a As velocity becomes perpendicular to the surface, its
m’g = 2mg
2 4 horizontal component (along the surface) must go to
‘O’.
⇒ m' =
m
m O = µ cos θ − gsin α(T1 + T2 )
As the mass of first insect is , the second insect would
also have the same mass. 2
2µ sin θ
m ⇒ µ cos
= θ gsin α (1 + e )
Hence, mass of the other insect = m'− m = gcos α
2
cot θ cot α
⇒1 + e =
Sol 24: 2
cot θ cot α
⇒e
= −1
2
Sol 26:
d u
gcos
Horizontal velocity: 2 ag . cosθ
gsin
2 ag cos θ
after collision: 2usin θ
(4 sin2θ − 1) here time of flight =
gcos α
so time (total) total time for second bounce
d d(4 sin2θ − 1) d.(4 sin2θ) 2usin θ 2uesin θ
= + = = +
2 ag cos θ 2 ag cos θ 2 ag cos θ gcos α gcos α
ucos θ
Now this time must be equal to time of flight Also equation of motion along incline =
gsin α
2usin θ 2.2 ag d(4 sin2θ) ucos θ 2usin θ 2uesin θ
= ⇒ = so = +
g g 2 ag cos θ gsin α gcos α gcos α
3J and
vc = ,
7m (1225) × 25 = 1150 × v2 + 75 × v1
A’ v2
1150
90 -
o 1150 × 25. 306 = 1075×v2 + 75×v1
2m
v0
1150 × 25.306 + 75 × 5
O ⇒ = v2
0.5m (m) 1075
(a) The comp. ⊥ to the string will only be there and the ⇒v2 = 25. 63 m/s
momentum along the thread will be lost.
6 . 6 2 | Center of Mass and the Law of Conser vation of Momentum
(iii) 2v
2
v1 ⇒ v0 = 2vA + v 0 − A
2 2
3
1075 v2 2 3v 0
⇒ vA = ⇒ 0. 693 v0
1075 × 25.63 = 1000 × v2 + 75 × v1 3
⇒ 1075×25.63 = 1000v2 + 75(v2–5) So, vBx = 0. 693 v0 and
1075 × 25.63 + 75 × 5 2v A 4 v
⇒ = v2 vBy = v0 – = v0 – v 0 = 0 = 0. 2 v0
1075 3 5 5
⇒v2 = 25.97 m/s
So, vB = (0.693)2 + (0.2)2 .v0
(b)All together
⇒ 1225 ×25 = 1000 × v2 + 225 × v1 ⇒ vB = 0. 721 v0
2v A so acceleration of 2 kg block
so on, solving v0 – = vBy
3 µmgcos α + mgsin α
= = μgcosα + gsinα
Putting this in (ii) m
P hysi cs | 6.63
So for a distance of 6m, v just before impact would be: v of system after collision = 2gh
v2 = u2 – 2as so using momentum conservation.
⇒v2 = (10)2 – 2 × 6 × [0. 25 × 10
(M + m) 2gh = mv
× 0. 998 + 10×0. 05]
= 100 – 12 × [3] (M + m)
⇒v = 2gh
m
v2 = 64
vin. = 8 m/s Sol 2: (C)
Now, after collision: vA
N
motion A
f=uN 30º
mgsin mgcos C
B
so acc. = μg cosα – g sinα vB
= 2. 5 – 0. 5 = 2 m/s2 Let the initial velocity of
So v = u – 2as
2 2
C=v
1 =u –2×2×6
2 2
then momentum conservation in y gives
⇒u2 = 25 ⇒u = 5 m/s vA = vB
so after collision v of 2 kg block = 5 m/s and using momentum conservation in x,
For M block: mv = 2mvA cos30º
acc = same as in 1 part (ind. of mass,)
st
v
⇒v = 3 vA ⇒vA =
= μgcosα + gsinα = 3m/s2 (in (–)ve direction) 3
So v = u + 2as
2 2 so coefficient of restitution
h
Sol 22: (B) A → true, R → true. But R not explanation
of A.
b x
y x
Equation ⇒ + = 1,
h b
6 . 6 6 | Center of Mass and the Law of Conser vation of Momentum
Comprehension Type
m V2
Sol 23: (B) Obvious (inelastic) m V V1 + V1
Sol 25: (D) Basic concept. Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
v2 M2 + m
=
v M1 + M2 + m
Previous Years’ Questions
Substituting the values of m : M1 and M2 we get,
percentage of velocity retained by bullet.
Sol 1: (a) From conservation of linear momentum,
momentum of composite body v2 2.98 + 0.02
× 100 = × 100 = 75%
=
p (pi )1 + (pi )2 = (mv)iˆ + (MV)ˆj
v 1 + 2.98 + 0.02
∴ %loss = 25%
|p|
∴= (mv)2 + (MV)2
Let it makes an angle α with positive x-axis, then Sol 3: Suppose r1 be the distance of centre of mass of
the remaining portion from centre of the bigger circle,
py MV then
α =tan−1 = tan−1
px mv A1r1 = A2r2
(b) Fraction of initial kinetic energy transformed into A
heat during collision r1 = 2 r2
A1
K f − Ki K
= = f -1
Kf Ki π(42)2
r1 = × 7 = 9 cm
p2 / 2(M + m) π[(56)2 − (42)2 ]
= −1
1 2 1 2
mv + MV
2 2 Sol 4: Before collision net momentum of the system
was zero. No external force is acting on the system.
(mv)2 + (MV)2
= -1 Hence, momentum after collision should also be zero.
(M + m)(mv 2 + MV 2 ) A has come to rest. Therefore, B and C should have
equal and opposite momenta or velocity of C should
Mm(v 2 + V 2 )
= be V in opposite direction of velocity of B.
(M + m)(mv 2 + MV 2 )
Sol 5: Collision between A and C is elastic and mass of
Sol 2: Applying conservation of linear momentum
both the blocks is same. Therefore, they will exchange
twice. We have
their velocities i.e., C will come to rest and A will be
moving will velocity v 0 . Let v be the common velocity of
A and B, then from conservation of linear momentum,
we have
v0
(A) C A B
At rest
v0
(B) C A B
M1 M2
v v
mv M1 v1 + mv 2 ….(i)
= (C) C A B
mv
= 2 (M2 + m)v1 ….(ii)
mA=
v 0 (mA + mB )v
P hysi cs | 6.67
1
v0 For θn to be less than 60°, i.e., cos θn is greater than
or mv=
0 (m + 2m)v or v = 2
3 1
, i.e., (1 − cos θn ) is less than , we have
(b) From conservation of energy, we have 2
n
4 1
1 1 1
m v 2 = (m + mB )v 2 + kx20 <
2 A 0 2 A 2 5 2
2 The condition is satisfied for n = 4.
1 1 v 1
or
= mv 20 (3m) 0 + kx20
2 2 3 2 ∴ Required number of collisions = 4.
1 1 2mv 20
or kx20 = mv 20 or k = Sol 7: (a) Since, only two forces are acting on the rod,
2 3 3x20 its weight Mg (vertically downwards) and a normal
reaction N at point of contact B (vertically upwards).
Sol 6: As shown in figure initially when the bob is at A, No horizontal force is acting on the rod
its potential energy is mgl . When the bob is released
and it strikes the wall at B, its potential energy mgl is (surface is smooth).
converted into its kinetic energy. If v be the velocity
with which the bob strikes the wall, then A A
O
A
C C
n
B O M B
C x
h (A) (B)
B
Therefore, CM will fall vertically downwards towards
1 negative y-axis i.e., the path of CM is a straight line.
mgl = mv 2 or v = (2gl ) …..(i)
2 (b) Refer figure (B). We have to find the trajectory of a
Speed of the bob after rebounding (first time) point P(x, y) at a distance r from end B.
v1 = e (2gl ) …..(ii) CB = L/2
∴ OB = (L/2) cos θ
The speed after second rebound is v 2 = e2 (2gl )
MB = r cos θ
In general after n rebounds, the speed of the bob is
∴ x = OB – MB = cos θ {(L/2 – r)}
v n = en (2gl ) …..(iii)
x
or cos θ = ….(i)
Let the bob rises to a height h after n rebounds. {(L / 2) − r}
Applying the law of conservatioin of energy, we have
Similarly, y = r sin θ
1
mv n2 = mgh y
2 or sin θ = ….(ii)
r
v n2 e2n . 2gl Squaring and adding Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
∴ h= = = e2n .l
2g 2g
x2 y2
sin2 θ + cos2 θ = +
2
2n
4
n
{(L / 2) − r}2 r2
=
. l = l …..(iv)
5 5 x2 y2
or + 1 ….(iii)
=
If θn be the angle after n collisions, then {(L / 2) − r}2 r2
This is an equation of an ellipse. Hence, path of point P
h = l − l cos θn = l (1 − cos θn )
is an ellipse whose equation is given by (iii).
From Eqs. (iv) and (v), we have
4
n
4
n Sol 8: (a) Since, the collision is elastic, the wedge will
l = l (1 − cos θn ) or = (1 − cos θn ) return with velocity viˆ
5 5
6 . 6 8 | Center of Mass and the Law of Conser vation of Momentum
∴ (Fcos30°) ∆=
t mv − ( −mv)
= 2mv m( +9ms−1 ) = m( −3 ms−1 ) + 3m (v C )
or v C = 4ms−1
2mv 4mv
∴ F= =
∆t cos30° 3 ∆t Sol 10: (A) Velocity of particle performing projectile
4mv motion at highest point
F=
3 ∆t = v=
1 v 0 cos α
F (Fcos30°)iˆ − (Fsin30°)kˆ
∴= Velocity of particle thrown vertically upwards at the
position of collision
2mv 2mv
or F
= ˆi − kˆ
∆t 3 ∆t
(ii) Taking the equilibrium of wedge in vertical mv0
z-direction during collision.
N mu0cos
2 2
u sin α
C v 22 =
= u20 − 2g v 0 cos α
=
2g
mg So, from conservation of momentum
mv 0 cos α
tan θ
= = 1
F sin 30
o mu0 cos α
N=
mg + Fsin30° ⇒ θ = π/4
2mv
N mg +
= Sol 11: The initial speed of 1st bob (suspended by a
3 ∆t
string of length l1) is 5gl1 .
or in vector form
C
h
mg
2017-18 100 &
op kers
Class 11 T
By E ran culty
-JE Fa r
IIT enior emie .
S fP r es
o titut
Ins
PHYSICS
FOR JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
SECOND
EDITION
Exhaustive Theory
(Now Revised)
Formula Sheet
9000+ Problems
based on latest JEE pattern
PlancEssential
Questions recommended for revision
7. R OTAT I O N A L
MECHANICS
1. INTRODUCTION
In this chapter we will be studying the kinematics and dynamics of a solid body in two kinds of motion. The first
kind of motion of a solid body is rotation about a stationary axis, also called pure rotation. The second kind of
motion of a solid is the plane motion wherein the center of mass of the solid body moves in a certain stationary
plane while the angular velocity of the body remains permanently perpendicular to that plane. Here the body
executes pure rotation about an axis passing through the center of mass and the center of mass itself translates
in a stationary plane in the given reference frame. The axis through the center of mass is always perpendicular to
the stationary plane. We will also learn about the inertia property in rotational motion, and the quantities torque
and angular momentum which are rotational analogue of force and linear momentum respectively. The law of
conservation of angular momentum is an important tool in the study of motion of solid bodies.
Let velocities of points P and Q of a rigid body with respect to a Figure 7.1: Metal cylinder rolling on a surface is a
reference frame be VP and VQ as shown in the Fig. 7.2. rigid body system. Relative distance between points
A and B do not change.
As the body is rigid, the length PQ should not change during
the motion of the body, i.e. the relative velocity between P and
Q along the line joining P and Q should be zero i.e. velocity of approach or separation is zero. Let x-axis be along
PQ, then
VQP = relative velocity of Q with respect to P
VQP = ( VQ cosθ2 î + VQ sinθ2 ˆj ) – ( VP cosθ1 î – VP sinθ1 ˆj )
VQP = ( VQ cosθ2 – VP cosθ1) î + ( VP sinθ1 + VQ sinθ2) ˆj
7 . 2 | Rotational Mechanics
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
A A 1
B B
1
C C
(a) (b)
Figure 7.3: (a) Angular velocity of A and B w.r.t. C is ω1 (b) Angular velocity of A and C w.r.t. B is ω1
Suppose A, B, C are points of a rigid system hence during any motion the lengths of sides AB, BC, and CA
will not change, and thus the angle between them will not change, and so they all must rotate through
the same angle. Hence all the sides rotate by the same rate. Or we can say that each point is having the
same angular velocity with respect to any other point on the rigid body.
Neeraj Toshniwal (JEE 2009 AIR 21)
line fixed to it remains parallel to its initial orientation all the time. E.g. a car
moving along a straight horizontal stretch of a road. In this kind of motion, the
displacement of each and every particle of the rigid body is the same during
any time interval. All the points of the rigid body have the same velocity and m6
acceleration at any instant. Thus to study the translational motion of a rigid m3
body, it is enough to study the motion of an individual point belonging to that m8
rigid body i.e. the dynamics of a point. m2
m5
Illustration 1: A body is moving down into a well through a rope passing over a fixed pulley of radius 10 cm.
Assume that there is no slipping between rope and pulley. Calculate the angular velocity and angular acceleration
of the pulley at an instant when the body is going down at a speed of 20 cm s-1 and has an acceleration of 4.0 m
s-2. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Since the rope does not slip on the pulley, the linear speed and linear acceleration of the rim of the pulley will
be equal to the speed and acceleration of the body respectively.
Therefore, the angular velocity of the pulley is
linear velocity of rim 20 cm s-1
ω= = = 2 rad s-1
radius of rim 10 cm
And the angular acceleration of the pulley is
4. ROTATIONAL KINEMATICS
Suppose a rigid body performing pure rotational motion about an axis of rotation rotates by an angle ∆θ in a time
interval ∆t. The instantaneous angular velocity ω, is defined as,
∆θ dθ
ω = Lim = …(i)
∆t→0 ∆t dt
Similarly, the instantaneous angular acceleration α is defined as,
dω d2 θ
α= = 2 …(ii)
dt dt
The relations between linear distance s, linear velocity v and linear acceleration a, and the corresponding angular
variables describing circular motion θ, ω, and α respectively are given as:
s = rθ ; v = rω ; at = rα …(iii)
Here the subscript t along with a in the expression for acceleration signifies that this is the tangential component
of linear acceleration.
If a body rotates with uniform angular acceleration,
1 2
ω = ω0 + αt ; θ = ω0 t + αt ; ω2 = ω20 + 2αθ …(iv)
2
where ω0 is initial angular velocity.
The equations for angular displacement, angular velocity and angular acceleration are similar to the corresponding
equations of linear motion.
Illustration 2: A disc starts rotating with constant angular acceleration of π / 2 rad s-2 about a fixed axis
perpendicular to its plane and through its center. Calculate
(a) The angular velocity of the disc after 4 s
(b) The angular displacement of the disc after 4s and
(c) Number of turns accomplished by the disc in 4 s. (JEE MAIN)
Sol:Use the first and second equations of angular motion with constant angular acceleration.
π
=
Here α rad s−2 ; ω0 = 0 ; t = 4 s ;
2
π
(a) ω(4 s) = 0 + rad s-2 × 4 s = 2π rad s-1
2
1π 2 2
(b) θ rad s × (16s ) = 4π rad
(4s) = 0 + 2 2
(c) ⇒ n × 2π rad = 4π rad ⇒ n = 2.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
dω
For variable angular acceleration we should proceed with differential equation = α
dt
Akshat Kharaya (JEE 2009 AIR 235)
P hysics | 7.5
5. MOMENT OF INERTIA
Before discussing the dynamics of rigid body motion let us study about an important property of a rigid body
called Moment of Inertia which is indispensable in understanding its dynamics.
Physical Significance of Moment of Inertia: As the name suggests, moment of inertia is the measure of the
rotational inertia property of a rigid body, the rotational analog of mass in translational motion. “It is the property
of the rigid body by virtue of which it opposes any change in its state of uniform rotational motion.” The moment
of inertia of a rigid body depends on its mass, on the location and orientation of the axis of rotation and on the
shape and size of the body or in other words on the distribution of the mass of the body with respect to the axis
of rotation. SI units of moment of inertia is Kg-m2. Moment of inertia about a particular axis of rotation is a scalar
positive quantity.
Definition: Moment of inertia of a system of n particles about an axis is defined as:
n
I = m1r12 + m2r22 + .................+ mnrn2 i.e. I = ∑ mi ri2 …(i)
i=1
where, ri is the perpendicular distance of ith particle of mass mi from the axis of rotation.
For a continuous rigid body, the moment of inertia can be calculated as:
I = ∫ r2 (dm) …(ii)
where dm is the mass of an infinitesimal element of the body at a perpendicular distance r from the axis of rotation.
Moment of inertia depends on:
(a) Mass of the rigid body.
(b) Shape and size of the rigid body.
(c) Location and orientation of the axis of rotation.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Moment of inertia does not change if the mass:
(i) Is shifted parallel to the axis of rotation because ri does not change.
(ii) Is rotated about the axis of rotation in a circular path because ri does not change.
Chinmay S Purandare (JEE 2012 AIR 698)
(iii) Find the moment of inertia of the system about an axis passing through m2 m1
m1 and m2 .
(iv) Find moment of inertia about an axis passing though center of mass and
perpendicular to line joining m1 and m2 . (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Use the formula for moment of inertia of a system of n particles. Find the B
distance of center of mass from m1.
Figure 7.6
(i) Moment of inertia of particle on right is I1 = m1r12
7 . 6 | Rotational Mechanics
m1m2
Icm = (r + r2 )2 .
m1 + m2 1
Illustration 4: Three particles each of mass m, are situated at the vertices of an equilateral x
triangle PQR of side a as shown in the Fig 7.7. Calculate the moment of inertia of the R
system about
(i) The line PX perpendicular to PQ in the plane of PQR.
(ii) One of the sides of the triangle PQR
(iii) About an axis passing through the centroid and perpendicular to plane of the triangle P a Q
PQR. (JEE MAIN)
Figure 7.7
Sol: Use the formula for moment of inertia of a system of n particles.
(i) Perpendicular distance of P from PX = 0; perpendicular distance of Q from PX = a perpendicular distance of R
from PX = a/2. Thus, the moment of inertia of the particle at P is 0, that of particle Q is ma2 , and of the particle at
R is m(a/2)2 .
2
The moment of inertia of the three particle system about PX is I = 0 + ma2 + m(a/2)2 = 5ma
4
Note that the particles on the axis do not contribute to the moment of inertia.
(ii) Moment of inertia about the side PR = mass of particle Q × square of perpendicular distance of Q from side PR,
2
3 3ma2
IPR = m a =
2 4
a
(iii) Distance of centroid from each of the particles is , so moment of inertia about an axis passing through the
3 2
a
centroid and perpendicular to the plane of triangle PQR = IC = 3m
3
= ma2
P hysics | 7.7
l l
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
While deriving the MOI of any rigid body the element chosen should be such that:
Either perpendicular distance of axis from each point of the element is same or the moment of inertia of
the element about the axis of rotation is known.
Nitin Chandrol (JEE 2012 AIR 134)
Illustration 5: Find the moment of inertia of a uniform sphere of mass m and radius R
about a tangent if the sphere is (i) solid (ii) hollow (JEE MAIN) Figure 7.8: Parallel axes
Sol: We know the formula for moment of inertia of sphere about an axis passing through its center. Use the parallel
axes theorem to find the moment of inertia about the tangent.
(i) Using parallel axis theorem
P hysics | 7.9
I = IC + md2 R R
For solid sphere
2 7
IC = mR 2 , d = R ; I= mR 2
5 5
(ii) Using parallel axis theorem Solid sphere Hollow sphere
2
I = IC + md
For hollow sphere
Figure 7.9
2 5
IC = mR 2 , d = R ; I = mR 2
3 3
Illustration 6: Find the moment of inertia of the two uniform joint roads having mass m each
P
X
about point P as shown in Fig 7.10. Use parallel axis theorem. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: We know the formulae for moment of inertia of rod about the axes passing through its
center and through one of its ends and perpendicular to it. Use the parallel axes theorem to
find the moment of inertia about the point P.
Figure 7.10
m2
Moment of inertia of rod 1 about axis P, I1 = P 1
3
2 /2
m2 5/2
Moment of inertia of rod 2 about axis p, I2 = + m 5 COM
12 2
5m2 2
So moment of inertia of a system about axis p; I =
3 Figure 7.11
lz
Sol: For a uniform disc all diameters are equivalent, i.e. moment of inertia about any
diameter will be equal to that about any other diameter. We know the formula for C 0 D
moment of inertia of disc about axis perpendicular to its plane and passing through
its center. Use the perpendicular axes theorem to find the moment of inertia about
a diameter.
A
Let AB and CD be two mutually perpendicular diameters of the disc. Take them as x
and y axes and the line perpendicular to the plane of the disc through the center as Figure 7.14
1
the Z – axis. The moment of inertia of the ring about the Z – axis is I = MR 2 . As the
disc is uniform, all of its diameters are equivalent and so I = I 2
x y
I MR 2
From perpendicular an axis theorem Iz = Ix + I y ; hence Ix = z =
2 4
1
Illustration 9: In the Fig 7.15 shown find the moment of inertia of square plate having
I 2
mass m and sides a about axis 2 passing through point C (center of mass) and in the
plane of plate. (JEE MAIN) C
3
Sol: For uniform square plate axes 2 and 4 along diagonals are equivalent and axes 1
I
a
and 3 are equivalent. Suppose IC is the moment of inertia about the axis perpendicular
to the plane of plate and passing through the center C. Use perpendicular axes theorem 4
to prove that the axes 1 and 2 are also equivalent. I a
Using perpendicular axes theorem IC = I 4 + I2 = I' + I'=2I' …. (i)
Figure 7.15
Using perpendicular axes theorem IC = I3 + I1 = I + I = 2I ….(ii)
From (i) and (ii) we get I' = I
ma2 ma2
IC = 2I = ⇒ I' =
6 12
Illustration 10: Find the radius of gyration of a hollow uniform sphere of radius R about its tangent. (JEE MAIN)
Illustration 11: A uniform disc of radius R has a round disc of radius R/3 cut as shown in Fig 7.16. The mass of the
disc equals M. Find the moment of inertia of such a disc relative to the axis passing through geometrical center of
original disc and perpendicular to the plane of the disc. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: Consider the whole disc without the cavity. The cavity can be thought of as a negative mass of same density as
disc. We know the formula for moment of inertia of uniform disc about axis perpendicular to its plane and passing
through its center. Find the moment of inertia of cavity (negative mass) about the perpendicular axis passing
through center of whole disc. The moment of inertia of disc with cavity is the sum of the moment of inertia of whole
disc and the moment of inertia of cavity (negative).
Let the mass per unit area of the material of disc be σ . Now the empty space can be considered as having density
–σ
Now I0 = Iσ + I −σ
Iσ = (σπR 2 )R 2 /2 = MI of σ about O = MR 2 /2
−σπ(R/3)2 (R/3)2
I-σ = + [ −σπ(R / 3)2 ](2R/ 3)2 O
2 R/3
2
R
= M.I of − σ About O = -MR /18
I0 = MR 2 /2 − MR 2 /18
4
I0 = MR 2
9
Figure 7.16
6 TORQUE
6.1 Torque About a Point
Torque of force F relative to a point O is defined as Line of action
of force
τ = r × F …(x)
P
where F = force applied to a point on a body
r = position vector of the point of application of force relative to the point O in r
a chosen reference frame about which we want to determine the torque (see Fig. r sin
7.17). O
Torque is a vector quantity and its direction is given by the right hand rule for cross Figure 7.17: Torque of a force
product of vectors.
7 . 1 2 | Rotational Mechanics
Magnitude of torque | τ | = r F sin θ = r⊥F = rF⊥
where θ is the angle between the force F and the position vector r of point of application.
r⊥ = r sin θ = perpendicular distance of line of action of force from point O.
F⊥ = F sin θ = component of F perpendicular to r
SI unit of torque is N-m.
Illustration 12: Find the torque about point O and A. (JEE MAIN) y
o
30
Sol: Express the position vector of A relative to O in terms of unit vectors î and (1, 1)
o
ˆj . Force is given in terms of unit vectors î and ˆj . 60
Torque about point O, τ = r0 × F, r0 = ˆi + ˆj , F = 5 3 ˆi + 5jˆ
τ = (iˆ + ˆj) × (5 3iˆ + 5j)
ˆ = 5(1 − 3)kˆ
x
Torque about point A, τ = ra × F, ra = ˆj , F = 5 3 ˆi + 5jˆ O A B
τ = ˆj × (5 3iˆ + 5j)
ˆ = -5 3kˆ
Figure 7.18
Illustration 13: A particle of mass m is released in vertical plane from a point on the x0
x – axis, it falls vertically along the y – axis. Find the torque τ about origin? O P
(JEE MAIN)
r
Sol: Torque is produced by the force of gravity. This will be equal to the product of
force of gravity and the perpendicular distance between the line of action of force of
gravity and the origin O.
τ = rF sin θ kˆ Or τ =r⊥F = x0mg mg
x0 Figure 7.19
= r mg = mgx0kˆ
r
Case III: Line of action of F and axis AB are skew and F ⊥ AB A
Illustration 15: A bob of mass m is suspended at point O by string of length . Bob is moving in a horizontal circle
find out. (i) Torque of gravity and tension about point O and O’ (ii) Net torque about axis OO’. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: Torque of a force about an origin is equal to the product of force and the perpendicular distance between the
line of action of force and the origin.
Z
(i) Torque about point O
O
Torque of tension (T), τnet = 0 (tension is passing through point O)
Torque of gravity τmg = mg sin θ (along negative ˆj )
Torque of gravity about axis OO’ τmg = 0 (force mg is parallel to axis OO’)
Torque of tension about axis OO’ τT = 0 (force T intersects the axis OO’) 90+
O
Net torque about axis OO’ τnet = 0
r
A pair of forces each of same magnitude and acting in opposite directions is called a force couple.
7 . 1 4 | Rotational Mechanics
To find the total torque on the rigid body about the axis we take summation of torques acting on all the particles
of the body. The total torque comes out to be equal to the resultant torque due to external forces only as the
torques due to internal forces cancel each other in pairs when summation is taken on all the particles of the body
(By Newton’s third law of motion internal forces form pairs of equal and opposite collinear forces. So the lever arms
of the forces of a pair with respect to the axis will be equal so their torques will have equal magnitude but opposite
directions and cancel each other in the summation). So
1 1 1
= m1 ω2r12 + m2 ω2r22 + .........+ mnω2rn2
2 2 2
1
= (m1r12 + m2r22 + .......... + mnrn2 )ω2
2
Now as we have learnt the term m1r12 + m2r22 + .......... + mnrn2 is the moment of inertia of the rigid body.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Most of the problems involving incline and a rigid body, can be solved by using the conservation of
energy. Care has to be taken in writing down the total Kinetic energy. Rotational Kinetic Energy term has
to be taken into consideration along with translational kinetic energy. And while writing the rotational
energy, the axis about which the moment of inertia is taken should be carefully chosen.
The point about which the conservation is done should be inertial to avoid calculating the work done
by pseudo forces or the point itself should be the COM so that the work done by the torque of pseudo
forces would be 0.
Shrikant Nagori (JEE 2009 AIR 30)
Illustration 16: A uniform circular disc has radius R and mass m. A particle, A
also of mass m, is fixed at a point A on the edge of the disc as shown in Fig
7.28. The disc can freely rotate about a fixed horizontal chord PQ that is at a R
distance R/4 from the center C of the disc. The line CA is ⊥ to PQ. Initially the
disc is held vertical with point A at its highest point. It is then allowed to fall C
so that it starts rotating about PQ. Find the linear speed of the particle as it R/4
reaches lowest point. (JEE ADVANCED) P Q
Sol: Find the moment of inertia of circular disc and the particle at point A
about the chord PQ. The loss in potential energy of the system comprising the Figure 7.28
disc and the particle will be equal to the gain in its rotational kinetic energy.
2 2
1 mR 2 R 5R 15mR 2 A
I= × + m + m =
2 2 4 4 8
Energy equation C
O
5R mgR 1 5R mgR
mg + = Iω2 − mg −
4 4 2 4 4 C
g
ω=4
5R
5Rω A’
V= = 5gR
4 Figure 7.29
Illustrations 17: A pulley having radius r and moment of inertia I about its axis is fixed at the top of an inclined
plane of inclination θ as shown in Fig 7.30. A string is wrapped round the pulley and its free end supports a block
7 . 1 6 | Rotational Mechanics
of mass m which can slide on the plane initially. The pulley is rotated at a
speed ω0 in a direction such that the block slides up the plane. Calculate the
distance moved by the block before stopping? (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: Apply Newton’s second law of motion for block M along the inclined M
plane. Find the torque (about its axis) of force of tension acting on pulley.
This will be equal to the product of moment of inertia I and the angular
acceleration of pulley.
Suppose the deceleration of the block is a. The linear deceleration of the rim
of the pulley is also a. The angular deceleration of the pulley is α = a/r. If the Figure 7.30
tension in the string is T, the equations of motion are as follows:
ma and Tr = Iα = Ia / r.
mg sinθ – T =
Eliminating T from these equations,
a mgr 2 sin θ
mg sinθ – I ma; Giving, a =
=
r2 I + mr 2
The initial velocity of the block up the incline is v = ω0r Thus, the distance moved by the block before stopping is
2
v2 (I + mr )ω20
x= =
2a 2mg sin θ
Illustration 18: A uniform rod of mass m and length can rotate in vertical plane
about a smooth horizontal axis hinged at point H. H X
(i) Find angular acceleration α of the rod just after it is released from initial /2 mg
A
horizontal position from rest?
Figure 7.31
(ii) Calculate the acceleration (tangential and radial) of point A at this moment.
(iii) Calculate net hinge force acting at this moment.
(iv) Find α and ω when rod becomes vertical.
(v) Find hinge force when rod become vertical. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: The axis of rotation passing through H is fixed. So the torque of force of gravity about axis through H is equal
to the product of moment of inertia about axis through H and angular acceleration of rod. Angular acceleration at
an instant can be found if the torque of force of gravity at the instant is known.
(i) τH = IH α
m2 3g
mg. = α ⇒ α=
2 3 2 X
3g 3g H A
(ii) atA = α = . =
2 2 Figure 7.32
2
aCA = ω r = 0. = 0 (∵ ω = 0 just after release)
N1
(iii) Suppose hinge exerts normal reaction in component form as shown
In vertical direction
Fext = maCM
3g N2
⇒ mg − N1 = m.
4
(We get the value of aCM from previous example) Figure 7.33
mg
⇒ N1 =
4
P hysi cs | 7.17
In horizontal direction
Fext = maCM ⇒ N2 = 0 (∵ aCM in horizontal = 0 as ω = 0 just after release)
(Work done by gravity when COM moves down by (½) = change in K.E.)
3g
ω=
(v) When rod becomes vertical
3g
α = 0, ω = (Using Fnet = MaCM )
mω2
FH - mg = ( aCM = centripetal acceleration of COM)
2
5mg
Ans. FH =
2
Bar
Illustration 19: A bar of mass m is held as shown between 4 disks each of mass m’ and radius
r = 75 mm. Determine the acceleration of the bar immediately after it has been released
from rest, knowing that the normal forces exerted on the disks are sufficient to prevent any
slipping and assuming that. (a) m = 5 kg and m’ = 2 kg.
A
(b) The mass m’ of the disks is negligible.
(c) The mass m of the bar is negligible (JEE ADVANCED)
B
Sol: Apply Newton’s second law of motion in vertical direction for the motion of center
of mass of bar. Write the equation of torque due to force of friction acting on disc, for
rotational motion about fixed axis through center of disk. Acceleration of rod will be equal to Figure 7.34
the tangential acceleration of the disc in the case of no slipping.
(a) Equation of center of mass of rod,
mg – 4f = ma ….(i)
(where f is frictional force from one disk)
Torque acting on each disk due to frictional force is
m'r 2 a
fr = ….(ii)
2 r
From (i) and (ii) we get
mg – 2m’ a = ma ….(iii)
5g
5g = (5 + 2 × 2)a; a=
9
(b) Putting m’=0 in eqn. (iii) we get a = g
(c) Putting m = 0 in eqn. (iii) we get a = 0
5g
(a) ↓
9
(b) g ↓ c) 0
7 . 1 8 | Rotational Mechanics
So the work done by torque is equal to the change in the rotational kinetic energy.
1
W = ∆Krot = ∆ Iω2 …(i)
2
This is called the Work-Energy Theorem for rotation of rigid body.
The rate at which work is done is called power P, given by
dW dθ
P == τ = τω …(ii)
dt dt
Also, the power P delivered by the torque on the rigid body is equal to the rate of change of kinetic energy
1 2 dK d 1 2
K= Iω ∴ P = = Iω
2 dt dt 2
1 dω dω
∴ P = × I × 2ω= I ω=τω
2 dt dt
Illustrations 20: Two boys weighing 20 kg and 25 kg are trying to balance a seesaw of total length 4 m, with the
fulcrum at the center. If one of the boys is sitting at an end, where should the other sit? (JEE MAIN)
Figure 7.35
Sol: For rotational equilibrium, the net torque about the fulcrum of all the forces acting on the boys and the seesaw
should be zero.
It is clear that the 20 kg kid should sit at the end and the 25 kg kid should sit closer to the center. Suppose his
P hysi cs | 7.19
distance from the center is x. As the boys are in equilibrium, the normal force between a boy and the seesaw equals
the weight of that boy. Considering the rotational equilibrium of the seesaw, the torque of the forces acting on it
should add to zero. The forces are
(a) (25kg) g downward by the 25 kg boy
(b) (20kg) g downward by the 20 kg boy
(c) Weight of the seesaw and
(d) The normal force by the fulcrum.
Taking torques about the fulcrum.
(25 kg) g x = (20 kg) g (2 m) or x = 1.6 m
9. ANGULAR MOMENTUM
9.1 Angular Momentum of a Particle About a Point
If p is the linear momentum of a particle in a given reference frame, then angular momentum of the particle about
an origin O in this reference frame is defined as
L = r × p …(i)
where r is the position vector of the particle with respect to origin O (see Fig. 7.36).
Magnitude of angular momentum =
is L r p sinθ Pcos
or L = r⊥ p or L = p⊥ r
P
θ = angle between vectors r and p Psin
r
r⊥ = component of position vector r perpendicular to vector p .
p⊥ = component of vector p perpendicular to position vector r . o
2
SI unit angular momentum is kg m s . -1
Figure 7.36: Angular
momentum about a point
Relation between Torque and Angular Momentum
∵ L = r × p
Differentiating with respect to time we get
dL dr dp
= × p+r × = v × (mv) + r × F = 0 + r × F = τ
dt dt dt
dL
⇒ = τ …(ii)
dt
For a single particle moving in a circle of radius r with angular velocity ω we have
v = ωr and p = mωr
So angular momentum comes out to be L = r p= mr2ω
Y
Illustration 21: A particle of mass m is projected at time t = 0 from a
point O with a speed u at an angle of 45° to the horizontal. Calculate the v
magnitude and direction of the angular momentum of the particle about
the point O at time t = u/g. (JEE ADVANCED) r
X
Sol: Express the position and velocity of particle in Cartesian coordinates O
in terms of unit vectors î and ˆj and then calculate the cross product in Figure 7.37
7 . 2 0 | Rotational Mechanics
Cartesian coordinates.
Let us take the origin at O, X –horizontal axis and
Y – Axis along the vertical upward direction as shown in Fig 7.37 for horizontal during the time 0 to t.
u u u2
v x = u cos45°= u/ 2 and x = v x t = . =
2 g 2g
For vertical motion,
u (1 − 2 )
v y = u sin 45° - gt = − u= u
2 2
1 u2 u2 u2
and y = (u sin 45 º) t − gt2 = − = ( 2 − 1)
2 2g 2g 2g
The angular momentum of the particle at time t about the origin is
L r × P = m r × v = m(ix ˆ + ˆjy) × (iv
ˆ + ˆjv ) = m(kxv ˆ ˆ
= x y y − kyv x )
u2 u u2 u2 mu3
= m kˆ (1 − 2) − ( 2 − 1) = − kˆ
2g 2 2g 2 2 2g
mu3
Thus, the angular momentum of the particle is in the negative z – direction i.e., perpendicular to the plane
of motion, going into the plane. 2 2g
Illustration 22: A cylinder is given angular velocity ω0 and kept on a horizontal rough surface the initial velocity is
zero. Find out distance travelled by the cylinder before it performs pure rolling and work by frictional force.
(JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: Due to backward slipping force of friction will act forwards. The cylinder is accelerated forwards. The torque
due to friction and hence the angular acceleration is opposite to the initial angular velocity. So the angular velocity
will decrease and the linear velocity of center of mass of cylinder will increase in the forward direction, till the
slipping stops and pure rolling starts. The work done by frictional force is equal to change in the kinetic energy of
the cylinder. The kinetic energy includes both rotational kinetic energy and translational kinetic energy.
MR 2 α
µMg R =
2
2µg 0 v
α=
R … (i) R
Initial velocity u = 0 a v
R
2 2
v = u + 2as
fk
v 2 = 2as … (ii)
fK = ma; µMg = Ma ;
S
a = µg … (iii)
Figure 7.38
ω = ω0 − αt
2µg
From equation (i) ω = ω0 − t ; V = u + at
R
From equation (iii) v = µ g t
2v ω
ω = ω0 − ; ω = ω0 − 2ω ; ω = 0
R 3
From equation (ii)
2
ω0R ω 2R 2
= (2as) = 2µ gs ; S= 0
3 18µg
P hysi cs | 7.21
µmg × ω20R 2
W = ( − fkRdθ + fk ∆s) = − µmgR∆θ + ;
18µg
ω0R 1 2µg ω0R
2
ω2R ω2R
1 2
×
2ω20R
∆θ = ω0 × t − αt = 0
ω × = 0 − 0 =
2 3µg 2 R 3µg 3µg 9µg 9µg
2ω20R ω2R 2 mω20R 2
W = −µmg × R
+ µmg × 0 = −
9µg
18µg
6
Illustration 23: A hollow sphere is projected horizontally along a rough surface with speed v and angular velocity
v
ω0 . Find out the ratio , so that the sphere stops moving after some time. (JEE ADVANCED)
ω0
Sol: For the sphere to stop after sometime, the acceleration should be opposite to velocity, i.e. the force of friction
should be backwards (forward slipping). Also, the torque due to friction should be opposite to angular velocity, i.e.
if the torque due to friction is clockwise (see Fig. 7.39), then the initial angular velocity should be anti-clockwise.
Torque about lowest point of sphere
2 3 ωg
fK × R = Iα ; µmg × R = mR 2 α ; α= (Angular acceleration in opposite direction of angular velocity)
3 2R
0
ω = ω0 − αt (Final angular velocity ω = 0)
a=0
3 ωg ω0 × 2R a v v=0
ω0 = × t ; t=
2R 3ì g
Acceleration a = μg ft v
v t = v – at (Final velocity v t = 0); 0R
v Figure 7.39
v = µg × t ; t =
µg
To stop the sphere, time at which v and ω are zero, should be same.
v 2ω0R v 2R
= ; ⇒ =
µg 3ì g ω0 3
(a) Let just after collision the speed of COM of rod is v and angular velocity about COM is ω .
External force on the system (rod + mass) in horizontal plane is zero.
Apply conservation of linear momentum in x direction;
mv 0 = 2mv ….. (i)
(b) Net torque on the system about any point is zero
Apply conservation of angular momentum about COM of rod.
2m2
mv 0 = Iω ⇒ mv 0 = ω …... (ii)
2 2 12
v0
From equation (i) velocity of center of mass v =
2
3v 0
From equation (ii) angular velocity ω = .
L1 = m1r12 ω, L2 = m2r22 ω, L3 = m3r32 ω, .... Ln = mnrn2 ω where ω is the instantaneous angular velocity of the
rigid body
Total angular momentum of the body
L = m1r12 ω + m2r22 ω + m3r32 ω ............+ mnrn2 ω
L= ∑ mi (ri )2ω = I ω
i
So L = I ω
Remember: This formula is applicable only for rotation of the rigid body about a fixed axis.
Again differentiating this relation with respect to time we get,
dL dω
=I = I α = τext
dt dt
P hysi cs | 7.23
Illustration 25: Two small balls of mass m each are attached to a light rod of length , one at its center and the
other at its free end. The rod is fixed at the other end and is rotated in horizontal plane at an angular speed ω .
Calculate the angular momentum of the ball at the end with respect to the ball at the center. (JEE MAIN)
Sol:Both the balls A and B have same angular velocity but different linear velocities.
The situation is shown in Fig 7.42. The velocity of the ball A with respect to
the fixed end O is v A = ω ( /2) and that of B with respect to O is vB = ω A
. Hence the velocity of B with respect to A is vB – v A = ω( /2) . The angular B
O
momentum of B with respect to A is, therefore,
1 Figure 7.42
L = mvr = mω = mω2
22 4
along the direction perpendicular to the plane of rotation.
Illustration 26: A uniform rod of mass m and length can rotate freely on a smooth horizontal plane about a
vertical axis hinged at point H. A point mass having same mass m coming with an initial speed u perpendicular to
the rod strikes the rod in-elastically at its free end. Find out the angular velocity of the rod just after collision?
(JEE MAIN)
Sol: After collision the rod and the particle execute pure rotational motion about vertical axis ml
through fixed point H. +
H
Angular momentum is conserved about H because no external force is present in horizontal u
plane which is producing torque about H.
m2 3u m
mul = + m2 ω ⇒ ω=
3 4
Figure 7.43
Illustration 27: A uniform rod of mass m1 and length lies on a frictionless horizontal plane. A particle of mass
m2 moving at a speed v 0 perpendicular to the length of the rod strikes it at a distance /3 from the center and
stops after the collision. Calculate (a) the velocity of the center of the rod and (b) the angular velocity of the rod
about its center just after the collision. (JEE ADVANCED)
w
Sol: Conserve the linear momentum of the system comprising
“the rod and the particle” before and after the collision. Conserve R
the angular momentum, about the center of the rod, of the system A v
A
comprising “the rod and the particle” before and after the collision. /3
The situation is shown in the Fig 7.44. Consider the rod and the
particle together as the system. As there is no external resultant force,
the linear momentum of the system will remain constant. Also there (A) (B)
is no resultant external torque on the system and so the resultant
Figure 7.44
external torque on the system and the angular momentum of the
7 . 2 4 | Rotational Mechanics
system about the line will remains constant. Suppose the velocity of the center of the rod is V and the angular
velocity about the center is ω .
(a) The linear momentum before the collision is m2v0 and that after the collision is M1V.
m
Thus m2 v 0 = m1 v, or V = 2 v 0
m
1
(b) Let A be the center of the rod when at rest. Let AB be the line perpendicular to the plane of the Fig 7.44.
Consider the angular momentum of N “the rod plus the particle” system about AB.
Initially the rod is at rest. The angular momentum of the particle about AB is
L = m2 v 0 ( /3)
After collision the particle comes to rest. The angular momentum of the rod about a is
L = LCM + m1 r0 × v
As r0 || v , r0 × v = 0 thus, L = LCM
of the body has a position vector r relative to O, and during any
vA
time interval the vector r rotates by an angle θ relative to its initial
direction, then position vector of any other point, say B, relative to
vB = vA + vBA
any other origin, say O’, inside the rigid body will also rotate by the B
same angle θ. This means the angular variables θ, ω, and α do not
depend on the choice of origin in the rigid body.
vBA = x rBA
Illustration 28: Consider the general motion of a wheel (radius r) which can be viewed as pure translation of its
center O (with the velocity v) and pure rotation about O (with angular velocity ù )
Find out v AO , vBO , v CO , vDO and v A , vB , v C ,vD (JEE MAIN)
= ω( −k)
(
)
ˆ × r( −ˆj) = −ωri
O
ˆ ; vDO = ωr(ˆj)
Similarly vBO = ωr ( −ˆj) ; v CO = ωr(i)
v A = v O + v AO = v ˆi − ωriˆ ; A
Figure 7.46
vB = v O + vBO = v ˆi + ωrjˆ
v C = v O + v CO = v ˆi + ωr ˆi ; vD = v O + vDO = v ˆi + ωrjˆ
If Ptotal is the total linear momentum
of the rigid body in the K frame, L C is angular momentum of the body in C
frame about center of mass and r C is the position vector of center of mass relative to some origin in K frame, then
we have,
Ptotal = MVC
Total Kinetic energy
1 1
K = MVC2 + IC ω2 …(iii)
2 2
LC = IC ω …(iv)
Angular momentum in K frame = LC about C.O.M + L of the C.O.M about some origin in K frame
L = IC ω + r C × MVC …(v)
At contact point a0
3αR f
a0 = a + aR = = 3a …… (iii) a
2
m m F
Equation of motion of plate: f
F – f = ma0
Figure 7.50: (a) FBD of Cylinder. (b) FBD of Plate.
F = m(a + a0)
F 3F
F = 4ma ; a = ; a0 =
4m 4m
Sol: Linear velocity of any point on the rim of the wheel has magnitude ωr in A
the reference frame of center of wheel (C-frame). Velocity in ground frame is
the vector sum of velocity in C-frame and the velocity of center of wheel.
Figure 7.51
Contact point at surface is in rest for pure rolling
Velocity of point is A zero.
So v = ω r
Velocity of point B = v + ω r = 2v
Illustration 30: A uniform sphere of mass 200 g rolls without slipping on a plane surface so that its center moves
at a speed of 2.00 cm s-1. Find its kinetic energy. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The kinetic energy of sphere is the sum of the translational kinetic energy and the rotational kinetic energy.
As the sphere rolls without slipping on the plane surface its angular speed about center is
v 1 1 1 2 1
ω = cm . The kinetic energy is K = Icmω2 + Mv cm2 = . Mr 2 ω2 + Mv cm2
r 2 2 2 5 2
1 1 7 7
= Mv cm2 + Mv cm2 = Mv cm2 = (0.200 kg)(0.02 m s-1 )2 = 5.6 × 10−5 J
5 2 10 10
Illustration 31: A constant force F acts tangentially at the highest point of a uniform disc of mass m kept on a
rough horizontal surface as shown in Fig 7.52. If the disc rolls without slipping, calculate the acceleration of the
Center C and point A and B of the disc. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: Apply Newton’s second law for the motion of center of mass of the disc. B
F
Find the torque of the force F and the force of friction acting on the disc at point r
A about the center of mass of the disc and thus obtain the equation relating C
the angular acceleration in the C-frame to the torques of all the external forces.
The situation is shown in Fig 7.52. As the force F rotates the disc, the point of
contact has a tendency to slip towards left so that the static friction on the A rough surface
disc will act towards right. Let r be the radius of the disc and be the linear
acceleration of the center of the disc. The angular acceleration about the center Figure 7.52
of the disc is
α = a/r, as there is no slipping.
7 . 2 8 | Rotational Mechanics
1 a 1
Fr – f r = I α = Fr – f r = I = mr 2 or F – f = ma …….. (ii)
2 r 2
From (i) and (ii),
3 4F
2F = ma or a =
2 3m
Acceleration of point A is zero
4F 8F
Acceleration of point B is 2a = 2 = .
3m 3m
Illustration 32: A circular rigid body of mass m, radius R and radius of gyration (k) rolls without slipping on an
inclined plane of an inclination θ. Find the linear acceleration of the rigid body and force of friction on it. What must
be the minimum value of coefficient of friction so that rigid body may roll without sliding?
(JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: Apply Newton’s second law for the motion of center of mass of the rigid a/R
body. Find the torque of the force F and the force of friction acting on the rigid
body about the center of mass of the disc and thus obtain the equation relating
the angular acceleration in the C-frame to the torques of all the external forces. f
If a is the acceleration of the center of mass of the rigid body and f the force of mgcos
friction between sphere and the plane, the equation of translational and rotational
mg mgsin
motion of the rigid body will be
ma (Translational motion)
Mg sin θ – f =
fR = I α (Rotational motion)
Figure 7.53
Iα
f= I = m k 2 , due to pure rolling a = α R
R
Iα Iα mk 2 α R2 + k2
mg sin θ − = m αR = mαR += ma + = a
R R R R
2
mk 2
f ≤ mN; a ≤ µ ≤ mg cos θ
R2
k2 g sin θ tanθ tanθ
R2 × ≤ µg cos θ ; µ ≥ ; µmin ≥
R 2
(
k2 + R2 ) R
1+ 2
2 R2
1+ 2
k k
P hysi cs | 7.29
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
•• From above example if rigid bodies are solid cylinder, hollow cylinder, solid sphere and hollow sphere
(having radius ‘r’ and mass ‘m’)
•• Increasing order of acceleration
(l.A.R.)
V+r=2v
V2
rig
id
v
ro
d
2v
P Instantaneous axis
V1
Figure 7.54: IAR (a) pure rolling; (b) Rod slipping down a wall
Geometrical construction of instantaneous axis of rotation (I.A.R). If we know the velocity vectors of any two
points in the rigid body then the I.A.R. is the axis passing through the point of intersection of the perpendiculars
drawn to the velocity vectors at those points.
Once location of I.A.R is known, we find the moment of inertia of the body about this axis, and then the equations
of rotation about fixed axis can be used for this axis.
0
1
K.E. =
1
2
1
2
1
Icmω2 + Mv cm2 = Icmω2 =
2
1
+ Mω2R 2
2 2
(Icm + MR 2 )ω2 =
1
I
2 contact point
ω2 ( )
Notice that in pure rolling of uniform object, equation of torque can also be applied about the contact point.
Sol: As the rod falls, it executes pure rotational motion about the instantaneous
axis of rotation. The loss in gravitational potential energy is equal to the gain
in the rotational kinetic energy.
The position of instantaneous axis of rotation (IAOR) is shown in Fig 7.57.
Figure 7.56
C = cosθ, sinθ ; r= = half of the diagonal
2 2 2
All surfaces are smooth, therefore, mechanical energy will remain conserved.
∴ Decrease in gravitational potential energy of bar = increase in rotational
kinetic energy of bar about IAOR.
(lAOR)
1
mg (1 – sinθ) = Iω2 ... (i) A
2 2 r
2
m
Here, I = +mr 2 (about IAOR) or I
12 C
2 2 2 O
m m m B
= + = Substituting in Eq. (i)
12 4 3 Figure 7.57
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Smooth surface
Rough surface With respect to the COM of the cylinder, the
surface moves at a higher speed than itself. So
v > rω
v the surface tries to increase its angular velocity
by exerting a frictional force in backward
Rough surface direction. And this friction would be kinetic
friction.
Smooth surface
Smooth surface
Smooth surface
Illustration 35: A rigid body of mass m and radius r rolls without slipping on a surface. A force is acting on the rigid
body at x distance from the center as shown in Fig 7.58. Find the value of x so that static friction is zero.
(JEE MAIN)
Sol: For static friction to be zero, the linear and angular accelerations a and α
caused by the force F should be related as a = α R, for rolling without slipping.
P F
x
Torque about center of mass Fx = Icm α … (i)
a
o
a=R
F = ma … (ii) f
Rough surface
From equation (i) & (ii) max = Icmα (a = α R) ;
I Figure 7.58
x = cm
mR
7 . 3 2 | Rotational Mechanics
Illustration 36: There are two cylinders of radii R₁ and R2 having moments of
inertia I₁ and I2 about their respective axes as shown in Fig 7.59. Initially, the 1 2
cylinders rotate about their axes with angular speed w1 and w2 as shown in the R1
11 R2 12
Fig 7.59. The cylinders are moved close to touch each other keeping the axes
parallel. The cylinders first slip over each other at the contact but the slipping
finally ceases due to the friction between them. Calculate the angular speeds Figure 7.59
of the cylinders after the slipping ceases. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: The force of friction acting on the cylinder moving faster will be such that its angular velocity decreases. The
force of friction acting on the cylinder moving slower will be such that its angular velocity increases. When slipping
ceases, the linear speeds of the points of contact of the two cylinders will be equal.
If w'1 and w'2 be the respective angular speeds at the instant slipping ceases, we have
The change in the angular speed is brought about by the frictional force which acts as long as the slipping exists. If
this force f acts for a time t. the torque on the first cylinder is fR1 and that on the second is fR2. Assuming w1 > w2.
The corresponding angular impulses are – fR1 t and fR2 t,
We therefore, have
I1 I2
or − (ω`1 −ω1 ) = (ω`2 −ω2 ) …(ii)
R1 R2
I ω R + I2 ω2R1 I ω R + I2 ω2R1
Solving (i) and (ii) ω '1 =1 1 2 R 2 and ω '2 =1 1 2 R1 .
2 2
I2R1 + I1R 2 I2R12 + I1R 22
1 1
Mgh = Iω2 + MV 2 … (i)
2 2 C
1 K2
1 1 2 1+
Its total kinetic energy = MV 2 + Iω2 = MVC …(ii)
2 C 2 2 R2
where K is the radius of gyration of the disc and VC the velocity of center of mass.
1 K2 2gh
So MVC2 1 + 2 Mgh;
= VC2 =
2 R K2
1 + 2
R
Thus the velocity of center of mass of a body rolling down an inclined plane is given by
P hysi cs | 7.33
2gh
VC = 1/2
K2
1 + 2
R
If aC is linear acceleration of center of mass down this plane, and distance covered on the plane is s, then if the body
starts from rest we have
2 VC2 2 gh g sin θ
VC = 2aCs ∴ aC = = or aC =
2s K
2
h K2
1 + 2 × 2 × 1+ 2
R sin θ R
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Rather than going in a conventional way, using this method greatly simplifies our effort. But take care
while writing the kinetic energy!
Nitin Chandrol (JEE 2012 AIR 134)
Illustration 37: A solid sphere is released from rest from the top of an incline of inclination θ and length . If the
sphere rolls without slipping. What will be its speed when it reaches the bottom? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The loss in the gravitational potential energy of the solid sphere is equal to the gain in the kinetic energy.
The kinetic energy of the sphere comprises the rotational kinetic energy as well as the translational kinetic energy.
Let the mass of the sphere be m and its radius be r. Suppose the linear speed of the sphere when it reaches the
bottom is v. As the sphere rolls without slipping, its angular speed ω about its axis is v/r. The kinetic energy at the
bottom will be
1 2 1 12 1 1 1 7
K= Iω + mv 2 = mr 2 ω2+ mv 2 = mv 2 + mv 2 = mv 2
2 2 25 2 5 2 10
This should be equal to the loss of potential energy mg sinθ. Thus
7 10
mv 2 = mg sinθ Or v= g sinθ .
10 7
11. TOPPLING
When an external force is applied to the upper edge of a body Q R
with a flat base to cause it to slide along a surface, the body may Ftopple
topple before sliding starts. Toppling is more likely to happen
when the width of the base of the body is small.
Toppling occurs due to the turning effect of torques of applied
force at the upper edge and frictional force at the base. mg N
Let the surface be quite rough and the force F is applied at f P S
h
height h above the base of the block as shown in Fig. 7.61. Width
of the base is b. The static friction at the base is f = F. The normal Rough surface
reaction is N = mg. The couple of forces F and f try to topple
b
the block about point S. To cancel the effect of this unbalanced
torque the normal reaction N shifts towards S by a distance x so
that torque of N counter balances torques of F and f. Figure 7.61: Block toppling on rough surface
7 . 3 4 | Rotational Mechanics
Fh
Fh = (mg)x or x =
mg
If F or h or both increase, distance x also increases, but it cannot go beyond the maximum value of xmax = b/2 i.e in
extreme case N passes through edge S. If F is further increased block will topple.
mgb
So, Ftopple =
2h
Here we assumed that the surface is sufficiently rough so that sliding starts only when
b
F = fmax = µmg > Ftopple or µ > (toppling before sliding)
2h
If surface is not sufficiently rough, the body slides before F is increased to Ftopple i.e. the body will slide before
toppling. This is the case when
b
F = fmax = µmg < Ftopple or µ <
2h
Illustration 38: A uniform cube of side ‘a’ and mass m rests on a rough horizontal table. A horizontal force F is
a
applied normal to one of the faces at a point directly below the center of the face, at a height above the base.
4
(i) What is the minimum value of F for which the cube begins to tip about an edge?
(ii) What is the minimum value of µs so that toppling occurs?
(iii) If f1= µmin , find minimum force for toppling.
(iv) Minimum µs so that Fmin can cause toppling. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: For part (i) we consider toppling before sliding. The normal reaction will pass through the edge. In part (ii) it
is not mentioned whether the toppling occurs before sliding or sliding occurs before toppling. So the toppling will
occur for any value of µs , sliding or no sliding. Part (iii) is same as part (i). Part (iv) is the case of toppling before
sliding.
(i) In the limiting case normal reaction will pass through O. The cube will tip about O if torque of F about O
exceeds the torque of mg.
a a
Hence, F > mg or F > 2 mg
4 2
Therefore, minimum value of F is 2 mg.
(ii) In this case since it is not acting at COM, toppling can occur even after body started sliding even if there is no
friction by increasing the torque of F about COM. Hence µmin = 0.
(iii) Now body is sliding before toppling. O is not I.A.R., torque equation cannot be applied across it. It can be
applied about COM.
a a
F× =N× … (i) N
4 2
N = mg ... (ii)
From (i) and (ii) -> F = 2 mg
F
Illustration 39: Find minimum value of so that truck can avoid the dead end, without toppling the block kept
on it. (JEE ADVANCED)
b
v
h m
Sufficiently
rough surface
power breaks
Figure 7.63
Sol: The block kept on truck will experience pseudo force in forward direction and friction
b
force due to the floor of the truck in backward direction. We assume the case of toppling
before sliding. In extreme case the normal reaction N = mg will pass through the edge.
h ma
h b b
ma ≤ mg ⇒ a ≤ g
2 2 h
f
N
b
Final velocity of truck is zero. So that 0 = v 2 − 2( g) mg
h
Figure 7.64
h v2
=
2b g
PROBLEM-SOLVING TACTICS
•• Most of the problems involving incline and a rigid body can be solved by using conservation of energy during
pure rolling. In case of non-conservative forces, work done by them also has to be taken into consideration in
the equation. Care has to be taken in writing down the Kinetic energy. Rotational Kinetic Energy term has to be
taken into consideration. And while writing the rotational energy, the axis about which the moment of inertia
is taken should pass through the COM.
•• The motion of a body in pure rolling can be viewed as pure rotation about the bottommost point of the body
or the point of contact with the ground. Hence an axis passing through the point of contact and tangential
to the point would be the Instantaneous axis of rotation. So problems on pure rolling can be solved easily by
using the concept of instantaneous axis of rotation.
•• Problems on toppling can be easily solved by writing the moments on the body and visualizing them as forces
acting on the body. If the net moment is tending to stabilize the body, then the body doesn’t topple. For any
condition else it may get toppled.
•• Problems which include the concept of sliding and rolling can be solved easily by using the concept of
conservation of angular momentum. But care has to be taken in selecting the proper axis so that net moment
about that axis vanishes.
7 . 3 6 | Rotational Mechanics
FORMULAE SHEET
- Average velocity= ∆s / ∆t
- Average acceleration= ∆v / ∆t
-Angular impulse
7 Force From the newton second law of motion, force is F = ma τ= r×F = I×α
time rate of change of momentum. It’s a vector
(Newton’s If = 0 the body is in
quantity. dL
second law of equilibrium with its =
dp
motion) Linear force F= = ma surrounding dt
dt
If = 0 the body is in
S.I. unit: Newton N
equilibrium with its
Angular force τ = I × α surrounding
12 Parallel Axis
I xx = Icc +Md2 where Icc is the moment of
Theorem
inertia about the center of mass
Solved Examples
JEE Main/Boards
X v
R
The first five Examples discussed below show us the cm
strategy to tackle down any problem in the rigid body L
motion. Hence follow them up properly! They may be
lengthy but are very learner friendly!!
Sol: The frictional forces acting on the feet of man will
Example 1: A person of mass M is standing on a railroad provide the necessary centripetal acceleration to move
car, which is rounding an unbanked turn of radius at in a circular path. Apply the Newton’s second law of
speed v. His center of mass is at a height of L above motion at the center of mass of the man to get the
the car midway between his feet, which are separated equation of motion along the circular path. In the
by a distance of d. The man is facing the direction of vertical plane the man is in rotational and translational
motion. What is the magnitude of the normal force on equilibrium under the action of its weight acting
each foot? vertically downwards and the normal reactions at its
feet acting vertically upwards. Get one equation each
P hysi cs | 7.39
X v NL
R
N1 N2 L Fcm
f1 f2
f
d
We draw the free body diagram of the man, as shown 2
in figure.
Static friction f1 and a normal reaction N1 is acting on Both these torques about the center of mass must add
the inner foot. Static friction f 2 and normal reaction up to zero.
N2 is acting on the outer foot. We do not assume the Therefore
limiting value of frictional forces. The weight of the man
d d
acts at its center of mass. ( N1 + Lf1 )+ ( − N2 + Lf2 )=0
2 2
As the man is moving in a circular path with speed, by
d
Newton’s Second Law the forces of friction should act (N − N2 ) + L(f1 + f2 )= 0 ….(iii)
2 1
towards the center of the circular path.
Putting (i) in (iii) we get,
cm
d v2
(N1 − N2 ) + Lm = 0
N1 2 R
Fcm 2Lmv 2
or
L
N2 − N1 = ….(iv)
Rd
F1 Solving (ii) and (iv) we get
d
2 1 2Lmv 2
N1= mg − ….(v)
2 R d
v2
f1 + f2 =m ….(i)
R 1 2Lmv 2
= N2 + mg …. (vi)
For vertical equilibrium we should have 2 R d
N1 + N2 − mg =
0
or mg
N1 + N2 = ….(ii) Example 2: A Yo-Yo of mass m has an axle of radius b
and a spool of radius R. Moment of inertia about the
For rotational equilibrium of the man about its center center can be taken to be Icm = (1/2) MR² and the
total thickness of the string can be neglected. The Yo-Yo is
of mass we have τcm 0
=
released from rest. You will need to assume that the
The gravitational force does not contribute to the center of mass of the Yo-Yo descends vertically, and
torque about center of mass because it is acting at the that the string is vertical as it unwinds.
center of mass itself. We draw a torque diagram in the
figure showing the line of action of the forces at the
inner foot.
The torque on the inner foot about COM is given by
d
τcm1 = N + Lf1 (clockwise) b
2 1
We draw a similar torque diagram for the forces at the
outer foot. R
(c) Find the angular velocity of the Yo-Yo when it (b) Substitute Eq. (v) into Eq. (i) to determine the angular
reaches the bottom of the string when a length L of the acceleration
string has unwound. bT 2bg
α= = 2 ….(vi)
Icm (R +2b2 )
Sol: Apply the Newton’s second law of motion at the
center of mass of Yo-Yo to get the equation of motion From (iii) and (vi) we get
along the vertical direction. Get the relation between
net torque, of all the external forces acting on Yo- 2b2g g
acm = bα = = ….(vii)
2 2
Yo, and its moment of inertia, both these quantities (R + 2b ) 1 + (R / 2b2 )
2
calculated about the axis passing through the center of For a typical Yo-Yo, the acceleration is much less than
mass of Yo-Yo. As the Yo-Yo descends, the loss in the that of an object in free fall.
gravitational potential energy is equal to the gain in the
(c) Use conservation of energy to determine the angular
translational and rotational kinetic energy.
velocity of the Yo-Yo when it reaches the bottom of
the string (Tension force does not perform any work
>
k
because point of contact between string and Yo-Yo is
>
X i always at rest).
Loss in gravitational potential energy = Gain in kinetic
>
j
T energy MgL
b
1 1 1 1
= MgL
= Mv 2cm + = Icmω2 2
M( v cm + R 2 ω2 ) ….(viii)
R 2 2 2 2
Linear velocity of COM and angular velocity are related
mg by the constraint condition,
(a) The torque of tension in the cord about the center of v cm - bω= 0 ⇒ v cm= bω ….(ix)
mass of the Yo-Yo is in the clockwise direction. So as the
Yo-Yo descends with linear acceleration acm, it rotates in Solving (viii) and (ix) for ω, we get ω =
4gL
the clockwise direction with angular acceleration α. (2b2 + R 2 )
τcm = b T = Icmα (clockwise) ….(i)
Example 3: A uniform cylinder of radius R and mass
Applying Newton’s Second Law for the motion of COM
M with moment of inertia about the center of mass
in the vertical direction,
Icm = (1/2) MR² starts rolling due to the mass of the
Mg - T = Macm ….(ii) cylinder, and has dropped a vertical distance h when
As the string is stationary, and the Yo-Yo does not slip it reaches the bottom of the incline. Let g denote the
on the string, the angular acceleration and the linear gravitational constant. The coefficient of static friction
acceleration of COM are related by the constraint between the cylinder and the surface is µ . The cylinder
condition, rolls without slipping down the incline. The goal of this
problem is to find the magnitude of the velocity of
acm - bα = 0 ⇒ acm= bα ….(iii) the center of mass of the cylinder when it reaches the
From (ii) and (iii) we get, bottom of the incline.
Mg – T = M bα ….(iv)
Eliminating α from (i) and (iv) we get
Mb2 T
Mg – T =
Icm
P hysi cs | 7.41
R
cm
>
cm Fs X k
h
fs
mg
N
v x .f = 1ax xf
= 2((2 / 3)g sin=
β)(h / sinβ) (4 / 3)gh
Choose x = 0 as the point where the cylinder just …(viii)
starts to roll. With the unit vectors shown in the figure
above, Newton’s second Law, applied in the x – and y –
Note that if we substitute Eq. (vi) into Eq. (iv) the
directions in turn, yields
magnitude of the friction force is
Mg sin β − fs = Max …(i)
fs = (1/3) Mg sinb …(ix)
−N + Mg cos β =0 …(ii)
In order for the cylinder to roll without slipping.
Choose the center of the cylinder to compute the
torque about (see figure below). fs ≤ µsMg cos β …(x)
>
1 P1 X k
µs ≥ tanβ …(xii) mg
3
P
Applying the energy equation mg
We shall use the fact that the energy of the cylinder- f i
N
earth system is constant since the static frictional j
d2
force does no work. Choose a zero reference point
for potential energy at the center of mass when the
cylinder reaches the bottom of the incline plane.
The gravitational force M g = Mg sin β ˆj acts at the
Then the initial potential energy is Ut = Mgh …(xiii) center of mass. The vector from the point P to the
Mg – N = 0 center of mass is given by rp.mg = dp ˆi − Rjˆ , so the
torque due to the gravitational force about the point
For the given moment of inertia, the final kinetic energy
P is given by
is
1 1 τp.mg= rp.mg × Mg= (dP ˆi − Rj)
ˆ × (Mg sin β ˆi + Mg cos βˆj)
Kf = Mv x.f 2 + Icmωz.f 2
2 2
1 1 = (dpMgcos β + RMgsin β)kˆ …(xvii)
= Mv x.f 2 + (1 / 2)MR 2 (v x.f /R)2 … (xiv)
2 2
The normal force acts at the point of contact between
3
= Mv x.f 2 the cylinder and the surface and is given by
4
N = −Njˆ . The vector from the point P to the point
of
Setting the final kinetic energy equal to the initial
contact between the cylinder and the surface is τP.N =
gravitational potential energy leads to
dpˆi . So the torque due to the normal force about the
point P is given by
vxy=0 τp.N = τp.N × N =(dpˆi) × ( −Nj)
ˆ =−d kˆ
p …(xviii)
h
Substituting Eq. (xxxiii) for the normal force into Eq.
v=0 (xviii) yields
x
vxy
τp.N = −dPMg cosβ kˆ …(xix)
Becomes RMg sin βk̂ = (Icmα z +RMax )kˆ …(xxiv) in direction and have same line of action and will also
pass through the point of contact S. (Point of contact is
Using the fact that Icm = (1 / 2 ) MR² and α x = vertically below the COM of the ball).
ax / R, we can conclude that RM ax = ( 3 / 2 ) MR ax Thus we choose the initial point of contact S as the
…(xxv) origin and the net torque of all the forces about the
origin S comes out to be zero at all times. So we can
We can now solve Eq. (xxv) for the x – component of conserve the angular momentum of the ball about the
the acceleration initial point of contact (origin S).
VC WC VF
rs,cm,f mvcm,f
S W2,f
Sol: The angular momentum of any rigid body about
a fixed point in ground reference frame is the sum of L f =(mR + (2/5)mR)v cm,f = (7/5)mRv cm,f
the angular momentum in the C-frame and the angular Now equating Li = Lf we get
momentum corresponding to the translation of the
center of mass relative to the fixed point in ground mR v0 = (7/5) m R v cm,f
frame. or v cm,f = (5/7) v 0
X k
cm provides a frictionless surface). The center of mass of
the stick is the same as the geometric center (at the
mg i midpoint of the stick). The moment of inertia of the
stick about its center of mass is Icm . A puck (with
fk N j putty on one side) has same mass m as the stick. The
puck slides without spinning on the ice with a speed
of v 0 towards the stick, hits one end of the stick, and
At t = 0, when the ball is released v cm,i = v 0 towards attaches to it. You may assume that the radius of the
right and ωi =0 , so the ball slips towards right on the puck is much less than the length of the stick so that
surface and hence the frictional force on the ball, will moment of inertia of the puck about its center of mass
be towards left. is negligible compared to Icm .
The frictional force will pass through the point of
contact S with the surface.
The weight of the ball as well as the normal reaction
from the surface are equal in magnitude and opposite
7 . 4 4 | Rotational Mechanics
(b) What is the linear velocity of the stick plus puck after L0 = ( / 4)(mv 0 )
the collision? After the collision, the angular momentum is L= Icmωf
f
(c) Is mechanical energy conserved during the collision? where Icm is the moment of inertia about the center of
Explain your reasoning. mass of the stick-puck combination.
(d) What is the angular velocity of the stick plus puck This moment of inertia of the stick about the new center
after the collision? of mass is found from the parallel axis theorem, and the
(e) How far does the stick’s center of mass move during moment of inertia of the puck is m ( / 4)2 , and so
one rotation of the stick?
Icm = m(2 / 12) + m( / 4)2 + m( / 4)2 = 5m2 / 24
i
ends, where should the other sit?
>
2 2
T= N = (392N) × = 450 N.
3 3
Sol: The disc can be thought of made-up of elementary The slipping will stop when the condition of pure rolling
rings of infinitesimal thickness. The torque about the is satisfied.
center of disk due to friction force on each ring will be v
Velocity about the center = 0 . Thus v 0 > ω0r . The
different from the other rings in the disc as the radii 2r
of rings are different, varying from 0 to R. So use the sphere slips forward and thus the friction by the plane
method of integration to find the torque on the entire on the sphere will act backward. As the friction is kinetic
disc. its value of N is given by µN = µMg and sphere will be
Consider a differential circular strip of the disc of radius decelerated by acm = f/M. Hence.
x and thickness dx. Mass of this strip is dm = 2ρ πx dx , This friction will also have a torque T = fr about the
M center. This torque is clockwise and in the direction of
where ρ = . Frictional force on this strip is along
πR 2 ω0 . Hence the angular acceleration about the center
the tangent and is equal to dF = 2µρπgx dx will be
r 5f
Torque on the strip due to frictional force is equal to α=f =
(2 / 5)Mr 2 2Mr
dt = mρg2px2dx
The disc is supposed to be the combination of Number and the clockwise angular velocity at time t will be
of such strips hence torque on the disc is given by v 0 5f
5f
ω(t) = ω0 + t= + t
R 2Mr 2r 2Mr
2 R3
τ= ∫ dτ = µρ g2πx ∫ x dx = µρg2π 3
Pure rolling starts when
0
⇒ τ = µMg(2/3)R Eliminating t from (i) and (ii)
5 5 v
2µMgR 4 µg v(t) + v(t) = v 0 + 0 Or
⇒ α= = 2 2 2
MR 2 3 R
3 Thus the sphere rolls with translational velocity 6 v 0 /7
2 in the forward direction.
The α is opposite to the ù
ω(t) − ω0 + αt ⇒ 0 = ω0
4µg
t
JEE Advanced/Boards
3R
3ω0R Example 1: A carpet of mass M made of inextensible
⇒t= . material is rolled along its length in the form of a
4µg
cylinder of radius R and is kept on a rough floor. The
carpet starts unrolling without sliding on the floor
Example 10: A sphere of mass M and radius r shown
when a negligibly small push is given to it. Calculate
in figure slips on a rough horizontal plane. At some
the horizontal velocity of the axis of the cylindrical part
instant it has translational velocity v 0 and rotational
of the carpet when its radius decreases to (R/2).
v
velocity about the center is 0 . Find the translational
2r 50N
velocity after the sphere starts pure rolling. P
30o
=V0/2r
r V0
Sol: As the carpet unrolls, the radius and mass of
A cylindrical part decreases and center of mass descends.
F Thus loss in the gravitational potential energy is equal
to gain in rotational plus translational kinetic energy.
Sol: Due to forward slipping the friction will act
If ρ is the density of material of the carpet, initial mass
backwards. So the sphere will decelerate. The torque
of the carpet (cylinder) M will be πR 2Lρ . When its radius
due to friction will be in the direction of initial angular
becomes half, the mass of cylindrical part will be
velocity. So the angular velocity will increase.
π(R / 2)2 Lρ = M/4
MF =
P hysi cs | 7.47
So initial PE of the carpet is MgR while final energy. At the edge the COM moves in circular arc during
the time interval when the vertical radius through the
(M/4) g(R/2) = MgR/8
point of contact turns by angle α to become normal to
So loss in potential energy when due to unrolling radius the inclined plane. During this interval normal reaction
changes from R to R/2 from edge should always be greater than zero.
MgR (1–(1/8)) = (7/8)MgR … (i)
1 1
Initial energy E1= mv 20 + Ic.mω2+mgR
2 2
v0
For rolling =ω
R
R R/2
(A) (B)
perpendicular to the direction of motion of the truck. Here a’ = acceleration of the center of mass of the
Its friction with the floor of the truck is large enough object.
to prevent slipping. If the truck has an acceleration of
For rotational motion
9 m/s² calculate.
fR = Ia
mR 2 a'
= 2. . for no slipping α = a/R
2 R
f
⇒ a' = ….. (ii)
m
From (i) and (ii) we get
(a) The force of friction on each disc.
2
(b) The magnitude and direction of the frictional torque F= ma î ⇒ Force of friction on each disc is
3
acting on each disc about the center of mass ‘O’ of the
f ma ˆ
object. Take x-axis along the direction of the motion of = i = 6iˆ N
the truck, and z-axis along vertically upwards direction. 2 3
1 2
Express the torque in the vector form in terms of unit 2
vectors î , ˆj and k̂ in the x, y and z directions. z
mr 2 2
v 0
τf +τmg = Ic.mα ⇒ µmgr = α 3 2 2 2 v0
2 (c) ⇒ W = m µ g t − v 0 µgt .
2 3µg 3µg
2µg
⇒ α= …(ii) mv 20
r = −
2µg 6
Therefore ω(t ) = 0 + t0
0 r
Using ωt = ω0 + αt
7 . 5 0 | Rotational Mechanics
m 1 ML2 m2 v 20
⇒ + mL2 ×
2 3
M
2
2
+ m L
h
3
M
= m + gL(1 − cos θ)
2
Sol: During the collision between rod and the mass,
the linear momentum is not conserved because of the 1 m v0
2 2
M
reaction force acting on the rod due to the hinge at = m + gL(1 − cos θ)
2 M 2
the fixed point O. The torque of reaction force at the + m
hinge will be zero about the hinge itself, i.e. about point 3
O. So we can conserve the angular momentum of the 1 m v0 2 2
“rod and mass system” before and after collision. As the cos θ
cos è= .
2 M M
rod rotates, the gain in gravitational potential energy is 3 + m 2 + m gL
equal to the loss in the kinetic energy.
Just before collision, velocity of the mass m is along the Example 6: A billiard ball, initially at rest, is given a
horizontal and is equal to v 0 = 2gh . In the process of sharp impulse by a cue. The cue is held horizontally
a distance h above the center line as shown in figure.
collision only angular momentum of the system will be
The ball leaves the cue with a speed v 0 and because
conserved about the point O.
of its forward rotation (backward slipping) eventually
If L1 and L2 are the angular momentum of the system 9
just before and just after the collision then L1 = mv 0L acquires a final speed v 0 show that.
7
ML2
And L2 = Iω = + mL2 ω F
3
h
From Conservation of Angular Momentum
o
4
(L/2)(1-cos) m h= R where R is the radius of the ball.
5
h
Sol: Initial linear and angular velocity of ball is found
L(1-cos)
Let ω0 be the angular speed of the ball just after it be limiting. Write the equations of Newton’s second
leaves the cue. The maximum friction acts in forward law and torque about center of mass for the sphere
direction till the slipping continues. Let v be linear and the equation of Newton’s second law for the plank.
speed and ω the speed when slipping is ceased. The free body diagram of the sphere and the plank are
v as shown below:
∴ v = Rω or ω =
R Writing equation of motion:
9 µsMg
Given, v = v 0 ….. (i)
7 For sphere: Linear acceleration a1 = =µsg ….(i)
M
9 v0
∴ ω= ….. (ii) (µSMg)R
7 R 5 µS g
Angular acceleration: α = = ….(ii)
Applying Linear impulse = change in linear momentum 2 2 R
MR 2
5
For plank: Linear acceleration
F dt = V0 …. (iii)
Applying Angular impulse = change in angular
momentum
2 B1
or =
Fh dt mR 2 ω0 …. (iv)
5 s Mg
Angular momentum about bottommost point will
remain conserved.
i.e., Li = L f s Mg a2
or Iω0 + mRv 0 = Iω + mRv F
2
∴ mR 2 ω0 + mRv 0
5
F − µSMg
2 9 v0 9 α2 =
= mR 2 + mRv 0 …... (v) m
5 7 R 7
For no slipping α2 = a1 + Rα
4
Solving Eqs. (iii), (iv) and (v), we get h = R Solving the above four equations, we get
5
7
F = µS g M + m
Example 7: Determine the maximum horizontal force F 2
that may be applied to the plank of mass m for which 7
Thus, maximum value of F can be µS g M + m
the solid does not slip as it begins to roll on the plank. 2
The sphere has a mass M and radius R (see figure). The
coefficient of static and kinetic friction between the Example 8: A uniform disc of radius r0 lies on a
sphere and the plank are µs and µk respectively. smooth horizontal plane. A similar disc spinning with
the angular velocity ω0 is carefully lowered onto the
M first disc. How soon do both discs spin with the same
angular velocity if the friction coefficient between them
is equal to µ ?
of rings are different, varying from 0 to r0. So use the Let m be the mass of the sphere.
method of integration to find the torque on the entire
Since, it is a case of backward slipping, force of friction
disc.
is in forward direction. Limiting friction will act in this
From the law of conservation of angular momentum. case.
Iω0 = 2Iω
Here, I = moment of inertia of each disc relative to
common rotation axis
ω0 fmax
∴ ω= = steady state angular velocity
2
The angular velocity of each disc varies due to the
torque τ of the frictional forces. To calculate τ , let us f µmg
Linear acceleration
= a = =µg
take an elementary ring with inner and outer radii r and m m
r + dr. The torque of the friction acting on the given is τ f.r 5 µg
equal to. Angular retardation α= = =
I 2 2 2 r
mr
mg 2µmg 5
dτ = µr 2πr dr = r 2 dr
πr 2 r2 Slipping ceases when v = rω
0 0
Or (at) = r (ω0 − αt)
where m is the mass each disc. Integrating this respect
to r between 0 and r0 , we get 5 µg
Or µgt = r ω0 −
2 2 r
τ= µmgr0
3
7 2 rω0
The angular velocity of the lower disc increases by d ω r 0; t =
µgt =ω
2 7 µg
over the time interval
2
3r v= at =µgt =rω0
= 0 dω 7
4µg v 2
And ω= = rω
Integrating this equation with respect to ω between 0 r 7 0
ω0 3r0 ω0
and , we find the desired time t = Alternative solution: Net torque on the sphere about
2 8µg
the bottommost point is zero. Therefore, angular
momentum of the sphere will remain conserved about
Example 9: A solid sphere of radius r is gently placed
the bottommost point.
on a rough horizontal ground with an initial angular
speed ω0 and no linear velocity. If the coefficient of Lt = L f
friction is µ , find the time when the slipping stops. In
∴ Iω0 = Iω + mrv
addition, state the linear velocity v and angular velocity
ω at the end of slipping. 2 2 2 2
Or mr= ω0 mr ω + mr(ωr)
5 5
2
∴ ω = ω0
7
2
And v = rω = rω0
7
Sol: Apply Newton’s second law at the center of mass τ f(2R) − T.R 0.2f − 0.1T
of reel in horizontal direction. Find relation between net α = τ = f(2R) − T.R = 0.2f − 0.1T
α= I = I = 0.6
torque about center of mass of reel and moment of I I 0.6
f T
inertia about axis passing through the center of mass. = f − T…(ii)
…….(ii)
= 3 − 6 …….(ii)
Apply Newton’s second law for hanging mass in vertical 3 6
direction.
T
2R
R
a2
10N
a1
T
JEE Main/Boards
Q.7 What are the factors on which moment of inertia of Q.20 A uniform circular disc and a uniform circular ring
a body depends? each has mass 10kg and diameter 1m. Calculate their
moment of inertia about a transverse axis through their
Q.8 Is radius of gyration of a body a constant quantity? center.
Q.9 There are two spheres of same mass and same Q.21 Calculate moment of inertia of earth about its
radius, one is solid and other is hollow. Which of them diameter, taking it to be a sphere of radius 6400 km
has a larger moment of inertia about its diameter? and mass 6 ×1024 kg.
Q.10 Two circular discs A and B of the same mass and Q.22 Calculate moment of inertia of a uniform circular
same thickness are made of two different metals whose disc of mass 700 g and diameter 20 cm about
densities are dA and dB ( dA > dB ). Their moments of (i) An axis through the center of disc and perpendicular
inertia about the axes passing through their centers of to its plane,.
gravity and perpendicular to their planes are I A and IB .
(ii) A diameter of disc
Which is greater, I A or IB ?
(iii) A tangent in the plane of the disc,
Q.11 The moments of inertia of two rotating bodies (iv) A tangent perpendicular to the plane of the disc.
A and B are I A and I B ( I A > I B ) and their angular
moments are equal. Which one has a greater kinetic
Q.23 Three particles, each of mass m, are situated at
energy?
the vertices of an equilateral triangle ABC of side L. Find
the moment of inertia of the system about the line AX
Q.12 Explain the physical significance of moment of perpendicular to AB in the plane of ABC, in the given figure.
inertia and radius of gyration.
x C
Q.13 Obtain expression of K.E. for rolling motion.
Q.28 A body is seated in a revolving chair revolving at Q.5 A rigid body can be hinged about any point on the
an angular speed of 120 r.p.m. By some arrangement, x-axis. When it is hinged such that the hinge is at x, the
the body decreases the moment of inertia of the system moment of inertia is given by I = 2x² - 12x + 27
from 6 kg m² to 2 kg m². What will be the new angular
The x-coordinate of center of mass is
speed?
(A) x = 2 (B) x = 0 (C) x = 1 (D) x = 3
Q.3 A thin uniform rod of mass M and length L has its (A) (1/2) W (B) (1/4) W
moment of inertia I1 about its perpendicular bisector. (C) (1/3) W (D) (2/3) W (E) W
The rod is bend in the form of semicircular arc. Now its
moment of inertia perpendicular to its plane is I2 . The
ratio of I1 : I2 will be Q.8 A right triangular plate ABC of mass m is free to
rotate in the vertical plane about a fixed horizontal
(A) < 1 (B) >1 (C) =1 (D) Can’t be said axis though A. It is supported by a string such that the
side AB is horizontal. The reaction at the support A in
Q.4 Moment of inertia of a thin semicircular disc (mass equilibrium is:
= M & radius = R) about an axis through point O and
perpendicular to plane of disc, is given by:
O l
A B
R
l
1 1 1
(A) MR 2 (B) MR 2 (C) MR 2 (D) MR 2 C
4 2 8
mg 2mg mg
(A) (B) (C) (D) mg
3 3 2
7 . 5 6 | Rotational Mechanics
0 x
8 3
(A) rad/s (B) rad/s
2 2 289 8
(A) Iω − mv
I 24 8
(C) rad/s (D) rad/s
289 17
P hysi cs | 7.57
B
V
A
R (a) (b)
9 10
(A) 1 (B) (C) (D) None
10 9
v v 2v 2v
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2R R R 3R Q.20 A body kept on a smooth horizontal surface is
pulled by a constant horizontal force applied at the
Q.17 A yo-yo is released from hand with the string top point of the body. If the body rolls purely on the
wrapped around your finger. If you hold your hand still, surface, its shape can be:
the acceleration of the yo-yo is (A) Thin pipe (B) Uniform cylinder
(A) Downward, much greater than g (C) Uniform sphere (D) Thin spherical shell
(B) Downward much greater than g
(C) Upward, much less than g Q.21 A uniform rod AB of mass m and length l is at rest
on a smooth horizontal surface. An impulse j is applied
(D) Upward, much greater than g to the end B, perpendicular to the rod in the horizontal
(E) Downward, at g l
direction. Speed of point P at A distance from the
6
Q.18 Inner and outer radii of N a spool are r and R πml
center towards a of the rod after time t = is
respectively. A thread is wound over its inner surface 12J
J J
and placed over a rough horizontal surface. Thread is (A) 2 (B)
pulled by a force F as shown in figure. Then in case of m 2m
pure rolling. J J
(C) (D) 2
m m
(A) i, ii only (B) ii, iii only (A) Zero (B) mv 3 /(4 2g)
Q.26 If a person is sitting on a rotating stool with his Q.4 Consider a body, shown in figure, consisting of two
hands outstretched, suddenly lowers his hands, then identical balls, each of mass M connected by a light rigid
his rod. If an impulse J = Mv is imparted to the body at one
(A) Kinetic energy will decrease of its end, what would be its angular velocity? (2003)
Q.5 A tube of length L is filled completely with an Q.9 A cubical block of side L rests on a rough horizontal
incompressible liquid of mass M and closed at both the surface with coefficient of friction µ . A horizontal force
ends. The tube is then rotated in a horizontal plane about F is applied sufficient high, so that the block does not
one of its ends with a uniform angular velocity ω . The slide before toppling, the minimum force required to
force exerted by the liquid at the other end is (1992) topple the block is (2000)
N
Mω2L Mω2L Mω2L2
(A) (B) Mω2L (C) (D)
2 4 2
F
Q.6 A cylinder rolls up an inclined plane, reaches some
height and then rolls down (without slipping throughout G
these motions.) The directions of the frictional force L
acting on the cylinder are (2002) L
2
(A) Up the incline while ascending and down the incline f1
while descending.
mg
(B) Up the incline while ascending as well as descending
(A) Infinitesimal (B) mg/4
(C) Down the incline while ascending and up the inline
while descending. (C) mg/2 (D) mg (1 – µ )
M
Q.11 One quarter section is cut from a O uniform
x circular disc of radius R. This section has a mass M. It is
O
made to rotate about a line perpendicular to its plane
1 and passing through the center of the original disc. Its
(A) MR 2 ω (B) MR 2 ω
2 moment of inertia about the axis of rotation is (2001)
3
(C) MR 2 ω (D) 2MR 2 ω
2
7 . 6 0 | Rotational Mechanics
a
v
M
O
(A) 3v / 4a (B) 3v / 2a
(t) (t)
(A) 0 (B) 0
ρL3 ρL3 5ρL3 3ρL3
(A) (B) (C) (D)
8π2 16π2 16π2 8π2
t t
Q.16 A diatomic molecule is made of two masses m1
and m2 which are separated by a distance r. If we
calculate its rotational energy by applying Bohr’ s rule
(t) (t)
(m1 + m2 )
2
n2 2 n2 2
(A) (B)
2 (m1 + m2 ) r 2
t t
2m12 m22 r 2
(A)
2n2 2 (m1 + m2 ) n2 2
Q.13 A thin circular ring of mass M and radius r is (C) (D)
rotating about its axis with a constant angular velocity
(m1 + m2 ) r2 2m1 m2 r 2
ω . Two objects, each of mass m2 are attached gently
to the opposite ends of a diameter of the ring. The Q.17 A hoop of radius r and mass m rotating with an
wheel now rotates with an angular velocity (2006) angular velocity ω0 is placed on a rough horizontal
(A) wM/(M + m) surface. The initial velocity of the centre of the hoop is
zero. What will be the velocity of the centre of thehoop
(B) w(M – 2m)/(M + 2m) when it ceases to slip? (2013)
(C) wM/(M + 2m)
r ω0 r ω0 r ω0
(D) w(M + 2m)/M (A) (B) (C) r ω0 (D)
3 2 4
Q.14 A cubical block of side a moving with velocity v on Q.18 A bob of mass m attached to an inextensible
a horizontal smooth plane as shown. It hits at point O. string of length is suspended from a vertical support.
The angular speed of the block after it hits O is (1999) The bob rotates in a horizontal circle with an angular
speed w rad/s about the vertical. About the point of
suspension: (2014)
P hysi cs | 7.61
(A) Angular momentum changes in direction but not in Which of the following
statements is false for the
magnitude. angular momentum L about the origin? (2016)
(B) Angular momentum changes both in direction and R
magnitude. (A) L mv
= − a kˆ when the particle is moving from
2
(C) Angular momentum is conserved. C to D.
(D) Angular momentum changes in magnitude but not R
(B) L mv
= + a kˆ when the particle is moving from
in direction.
2
B to C.
Q.19 The current voltage relation of diode is given mv
R kˆ when the particle is moving from D to A.
by I e
= (
1000 V /T
)
− 1 mA , where the applied voltage V
(C) L =
2
is in volts and the temperature T is in degree Kelvin. mv ˆ
If a student makes an error measuring ± 0.01 V while (D) L = − R k when the particle is moving from
2
measuring the current of 5 mA at 300 K, what will be A to B.
the error in the value of current in mA? (2014)
(A) 0.5 mA (B) 0.05 mA Q.22 A roller is made by joining together two cones
(C) 0.2 mA (D) 0.02 mA at their vertices O. It is kept on two rails AB and CD
which are placed asymmetrically (see figure), with its
axis perpendicular to CD and its centre O at the centre
Q.20 From a solid sphere of mass M and radius R a
of line joining AB and CD (see figure). It is given a light
cube of maximum possible volume is cut. Moment of
push so that it starts rolling with its centre O moving
inertia of cube about an axis passing through its center
parallel to CD in the direction shown. As it moves, the
and perpendicular to one of its faces is: (2015)
roller will tend to: (2016)
MR 2 4MR 2 4MR 2 MR 2
(A) (B) (C) (D) B D
16 2 π 9 3π 3 3π 32 2 π
JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1
0.3m C
Q.1 A thin uniform rod of mass M and length L is
0.1m
hinged at its upper end, and released from rest in a String
horizontal position. Find the tension at a point located B
at a distance L/3 from the hinge point, when the rod A
becomes vertical.
W
a
A a B
com
Hinges h
Q.3 A rigid horizontal smooth rod AB of mass 0.75 kg
and length 40 cm can rotate freely about a fixed vertical
axis through its mid-point O. Two rings each of mass 1
kg are initially at rest at a distance of 10 cm from O on
either side of the rod. The rod is set in rotation with an
Suppose that m = 20.0 kg, h = 2.20m, and W = 1.00 m
angular velocity of 30 rad per second. Find the velocity
and the bottom smooth hinge is not screwed into the
of each ring along the length of the rod in m/s when
door frame, find the forces acting on the door.
they reach the ends of the rod.
Q.11 Two uniform cylinders each of mass m = 10 kg Q.14 A uniform rod AB of length L and mass M is lying
and radius r = 150 mm, are connected by a rough belt on a smooth table. A small particle of mass m strikes
as shown. If the system is released from rest, determine the rod with a velocity v 0 at point at distance from the
center O. The particle comes to rest after collision. Find
(a) The tension in the portion of the belt connecting the
the value of x, so that of the rod remains stationary just
two cylinder.
after collision.
(b) The velocity of the center of cylinder a after it has
moved through 1.2 m.
7 . 6 4 | Rotational Mechanics
B
m V0 m V0
R R
m v0
C
x (i) Calculate the velocity of the center of mass of the
O disk at t0
(ii) Assuming the coefficient of friction to be µ calculate
A t0 . Also calculate the work done by the frictional force
as a function of time and the total work done by it over
Q.15 A uniform plate of mass m is suspended in each of a time t much longer then t0 .
the ways shown. For each case determine immediately
after the connection at B has been released:
Q.18 A circular disc of mass 300 gm and radius 20 cm
can rotate freely about a vertical axis passing through
Pin support its center of mass o. A small insect of mass 100 gm
is initially at a point A on the disc (which is initially
stationary). The insect starts walking from rest along the
A B
rim of the disc with such a time varying relative velocity
that the disc rotates in the opposite direction with a
(1/2)C constant angular acceleration = 2 π rad/s². After some
time T, the insect is back at the point A. By what angle
has the disc rotated till now, as seen by a stationary
C earth observer? Also find the time T.
(I) y
Q.16 A carpet of mass ‘M’ made of inextensible (a) The angular velocity of the disc
material is rolled along its length in the form of cylinder (b) The impulse on the particle due to disc.
of radius ‘R’ and is kept on a rough floor. The carpet
starts unrolling without standing on the floor when (c) The impulse on the disc due to hinge.
a negligibly small push is given to it. The horizontal
velocity of the axis of the cylindrical parts of the carpet Q.20 The door of an automobile is open and
when its radius decreases to R/2 will be: perpendicular to the body. The automobile starts with
an acceleration of 2 ft/sec², and the width of the door
is 30 inches. Treat the door as a uniform rectangle, and
neglect friction to find the speed of its outside edge as
seen by the driver when the door closes.
Exercise 2
G Single Correct Choice Type
F
0.9m Q.1 Let I1 and I2 be the moment of inertia of a uniform
h square plate about axes APC and OPO` respectively as
I
shown in the figure. P is center of square. The ratio 1
0.6m of moment of inertia is I2
(a) The acceleration of the cabinet,
O
(b) The range of values of h for which the cabinet will A B
not tip.
P
Q.22 Two thin circular disks of mass 2 kg and radius
10 cm each are joined by a rigid massless rod of length
20 cm. The axis of the rod is along the perpendicular to D C
the planes of the disk through their center. The object O’
is kept on a truck in such a way that the axis of the
1 1
object is horizontal and perpendicular to the direction (A) (B) 2 (C) (D) 1
of motion of the truck. Its friction with the floor of the 2 2
truck is large enough so that the object can roll on
the truck without slipping. Take x-axis as the vertically Q.2 Moment of inertia of a rectangular plate about an
upwards direction. If the truck has an acceleration of axis passing through P and perpendicular to the plate
9m/s² calculate. is I. Then moment of PQR about an axis perpendicular
to the plane.
P Q
O
20cm
S R
(a) The force of friction on each disk.
(A) About P = I/2 (B) About R = I/2
(b) The magnitude and the direction of the frictional
torque acting on each disk about the center of mass O (C) About P > I/2 (D) About R > I/2
of the object. Express the torque in the vector form of
unit vectors in the x-y and z direction. Q.3 Find the moment of inertia of a plate cut in shape
of a right angled triangle of mass M, AC=BC=a about
Q.23 Three particles A, B, C of mass m each are joined an axis perpendicular to plane, side the plane of the
to each other by mass less rigid rods to form an plate and passing through the mid-point of side AB.
equilateral triangle of side a. Another particle of mass
m hits B with a velocity v 0 directed along BC as shown. A
The colliding particle stops immediately after impact.
O
(i) Calculate the time required by the triangle ABC to
complete half-revolution in its subsequent motion. (ii)
What is the net displacement of point B during this
interval? C B
Q.5 A heavy seesaw (i.e., not mass less) is out of balance. 3
(C) g (D) gcos θ
A light girl sits on the end that is tilted downward, and 2
a heavy body sits on the other side so that the seesaw
now balances. If they both move forward so that they (E) (3 / 2)g
are one-half of their original distance from the pivot
point (the fulcrum) what will happen to the seesaw?
Q.8 A mass m is moving at speed v perpendicular to a
(A) The side the body is sitting on will tilt downward rod of length d and mass M = 6m which pivots around
(B) The side the girl is sitting on will once again tilt a frictionless axle running through its center. It strikes
downward and sticks to the end of the rod. The moment of inertia
of the rod about its center is Md² /12. Then the angular
(C) Nothing; the seesaw will still be balanced speed of the system right after the collision is.
(D) It is impossible to say without knowing the masses (A) 2v / d (B) 2v / (3d)
and the distances.
(C) v / d (D) 3v / (2d)
Q.6 A pulley is hinged at the center and a mass less
thread is wrapped around it. The thread is pulled with Q.9 A sphere of mass M and radius R is attached by a
a constant force F starting from rest,. As the time light rod of length l to a point P. The sphere rolls without
increases, slipping on a circular track as shown. It is released from
the horizontal position. The angular momentum of the
F system about P when the rod becomes vertical is:
l
P
Q.11 In the previous question, if dv/dt = 0, then the (C) x = vt + 0.5b sin ( 3vt / b ) , y =
0.5c = 0.5b cos ( 3vt / b )
angular acceleration of the ladder when α = 45 ° is
0.5vt + 0.5b sin ( 3vt / b ) , y =
(D) x = 0.5b cos ( 3vt / b )
(A) 2v 2 /L2 (B) v 2 /2L2
Q.14 A yo-yo is resting on a perfectly rough horizontal
(C) 2[v 2 L2 ] (D) None table. Forces F1 , F2 and F3 are applied separately as
shown. The correct statement is
Q.12 A uniform circular disc placed on a rough horizontal
surface has initially a velocity v 0 and an angular velocity F3 F2
ω0 as shown in the figure. The disc comes to rest after
moving some distance in the direction of motion.
v0
Then is
rω0
F1
0
(C) The disc will make one rotation in time T/2. Q.27 A man spinning in free space changes the shape
of his body, eg. By spreading his arms or curling up. By
(D) The disc will cover a distance greater then s in
doing this, he can change his
further time T.
(A) Moment of inertia
Q.23 A rigid object is rotating in a counterclockwise (B) Angular momentum
sense around a fixed axis. If the rigid object rotates
(C) Angular velocity
though more than180 ° but less than 360 ° , which of
the following pairs of quantities can represent an initial (D) Rotational kinetic energy
angular position and a final angular position of the
rigid object. Q.28 A ring rolls without slipping on the ground. Its
(A) 3 rad, 6 rad (B) –1 rad, 1 rad center C moves with a constant speed u. P is any point
on the ring. The speed of P with respect to the ground
(C) 1 rad, 5 rad (D –1rad, 2.5 rad
is v.
(A) 0 ≤ v ≤ 2u
Q.24 ABCD is a square plate with center O. The moments
of inertia of the plate about the perpendicular axis (B) v = u, if CP is horizontal
through O is I and about the axes 1, 2, 3 & 4 are I1 , I2 ,
(C) v = u is CP makes an angle of 30 ° with the horizontal
I3 , & I 4 respectively. If follows that:
and P is below the horizontal level of c.
1 (D) v = 2 u, if CP is horizontal
A 2
B
Q.29 A small ball of mass m suspended from the ceiling
at a point O by a thread of length moves along a
3
O horizontal circle with a constant angular velocity ω .
C
D 4
(A) I2 = I3 (B) I = I1 + I 4
(C) I = I2 + I 4 (D) I1 = I3
(D) Angular momentum is not conserved about A. (A) Friction acting on a cylinder without sliding on an
7 . 7 0 | Rotational Mechanics
inclined surface is always upward along the incline Q. 34 A wheel of radius r is rolling on a straight line,
irrespective of any external force acting on it the velocity of its center being v. At a certain instant
the point of contact of the wheel with the grounds is M
(B) Friction acting on a cylinder without sliding on an
and N is the highest point on the wheel (diametrically
inclined surface may be upward may be downwards
opposite to M). The incorrect statement is:
depending on the external force acting on it
(A) The velocity of any point P of the wheel is
(C) Friction acting on a cylinder rolling without sliding
proportional to MP
may be zero depending on the external force acting
on it (B) Points of the wheel moving with velocity greater
than v form a larger area of the wheel than points
(D) Nothing can be said exactly about it as it depends
moving with velocity less than v
on the frictional coefficient on inclined plane.
(C) The point of contact M is instantaneously at rest
Q. 32 A plank with a uniform sphere placed on it rests (D) The velocities of any two parts of the wheel which
on a smooth horizontal plane. Plank is pulled to right are equidistant from center are equal.
by a constant force F. If sphere does not slip over the
plank. Which of the following is correct?
Q.35 A ring of mass M and radius R sliding with a
velocity v 0 suddenly enters into a rough surface where
e the coefficient of friction is µ , as shown in figure.
> V0
(A) Acceleration of the center of sphere is less than that
of the plank Rough ()
(B) Work done by friction acting on the sphere is equal Choose the correct statement(s)
to its total kinetic energy
(A) As the ring enters on the rough surface, the limiting
(C) Total kinetic energy of the system is equal to work frictional force acts on it
done by the force F
(B) The direction of friction is opposite to the direction
(D) None of the above. of motion.
(C) The frictional force accelerates the ring in the
Q. 33 a uniform disc is rolling on a horizontal surface. clockwise sense about its center of mass
At a certain instant B is the point of contact and A is at
(D) As the ring enters on the rough surface it starts
height 2R from ground, where R is radius of disc.
rolling.
3
(B) The net work done by friction force is − mv 20
8 A
mv 20
(C) The loss is kinetic energy of the ring is
4
X Y
mv 20
(D) The gain in rotational kinetic energy is +
8
Q.40 Statement-I A disc A moves on a smooth Q.45 Statement-I: For a round shape body of radius R
horizontal plane and rebounds elastically from a rolling on a fixed ground, the magnitude of velocity of
smooth vertical wall (Top view is shown in Fig 7.166), its center is given by ωR , where ω is its angular speed.
in this case about any point on line XY the angular
momentum of the disc remains conserved. Statement-II: When distribution of mass is symmetrical
then center of round shape body is its center of mass.
7 . 7 2 | Rotational Mechanics
Paragraph 2:
F
A uniform rod is fixed to a rotating turntable so that its
x lower end is on the axis of the turntable and it makes
an angle of N20°to the vertical. (The rod is thus rotating
with uniform angular velocity about a vertical axis
Q.46 Statement-I: a body cannot roll on a smooth passing through one end.) If the turntable is rotating
horizontal Surface. clockwise as seen from above.
Statement-II: when a body rolls purely, the point of
contact should be at rest with respect to surface. Q.51 What is the direction of the rod’s angular
momentum vector (calculated about its lower end)?
Comprehension Type (A) Vertically downwards
Paragraph 1: (B) Down at 20°to the horizontal
The figure shows an isosceles triangular plate of mass (C) Up at 20° to the horizontal
M and base L. The angle at the apex is 90°. The apex lies (D) Vertically upwards
at the origin and base is parallel to X – axis
x1
B Q.11 The ratio is
x2
(A) hA > hC ; KB > K C
1 1
(B) hA > hC ; K C > K A (A) 2 (B) (C) 2 (D)
2 2
P hysi cs | 7.75
Q.12 When disc B is brought in contact with disc A, Q.16 The center of mass of the disk undergoes simple
they acquire a common angular velocity in time t. The harmonic motion with angular frequency ω equal to
average frictional torque on one disc by the other
during this period is. (A)
k
(B)
2k
(C)
2k
(D)
4k
M M 3M 3M
2Iω 9Iω 9Iω 3Iω
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3t 2t 4t 2t
Q.17 The maximum value of v 0 for which the disk will
Q.13 The loss of kinetic energy during the above roll without slipping is
process is
Iω2 Iω2 Iω2 Iω2 M M 3M 5M
(A) (B) (C) (D) (A) µg (B) µg (C) µg (D) µg
2 3 4 6 k 2k k 2k
Q.14 A small object of uniform Q.18 A thin uniform rod, pivoted at O, is rotating in
density rolls up a curved the horizontal plane with constant angular speed ω , as
surface with an initial velocity shown in the figure. At time t = 0, a small insect starts
V
v. If reaches up to a maximum from O and moves with constant speed v, with respect
height of 3v /4g with respect
2
to the rod towards the other end. It reaches the end
to the initial position. The object is of the rod at t = T and stops. The angular speed of
(A) Ring (B) Solid sphere the system remains ω throughout. The magnitude of
(C) Hollow sphere (D) Disc ( )
the torque τ about O, as a function of time is best
r r
O T O T
y
Q.19 A small mass m is attached to a massless string
whose other end is fixed at P as shown in the figure.
The mass is undergoing circular motion in the x-y
2d
P
x
Q.15 The net external force acting on the disk when its O m
center of mass is at displacement x with respect to its
equilibrium position is
2kx 4kx
(A) −kx (B) −2kx (C) − (D) − (A) LO and LP do not vary with time.
3 3
7 . 7 6 | Rotational Mechanics
(B) LO varies with time while LP remains constant. Q.22 Consider a disc rotating in the horizontal plane
with a constant angular speed ω about its centre O. The
(C) LO remains constant while LP varies with time. disc has a shaded region on one side of the diameter
and an unshaded region on the other side as shown in
(D) LO and LP both vary with time. the figure. When the disc is in the orientation as shown,
two pebbles P and Q are simultaneously projected at an
angle towards R. The velocity of projection is in the y-z
Q.20 A lamina is made by removing a small disc of
plane and is same for both pebbles with respect to the
diameter 2R from a bigger disc of uniform mass density
disc. Assume that (i) they land back on the disc before
and radius 2R, as shown in the figure. The moment of
inertia of this lamina about axes passing though O 1
the disc has completed rotation (ii) their range is less
and P is I0 and IP respectively. Both these axes are 8
perpendicular to the plane of the lamina. The ratio than half the disc radius and (iii) ω remains constant
IP / IO to the the nearest integer is (2012) throughout. Then (2012)
R
y
2R
x Q
2R P O
O
Q P P Q
y
x /2
Now consider two similar systems as shown in the P
3R
figure: Case (a) the disc with its face vertical and parallel R
30o x
to x-y plane; Case (b) the disc with its face making an O
angle of 45° with x-y plane and its horizontal diameter
2R
parallel to x-axis. In both the cases, the disc is welded
at point P, and the systems are rotated with constant
angular speed ω about the z-axis.
z z
Q
(A) The point O has a linear velocity 3Rωˆi
Q
45o 11 ˆ 3
(B) The point P has a linear velocity Rω kˆ
y y
P P Rω i +
4 4
x x
13 ˆ 3
Case (a) Case (b) (C) The point P has a linear velocity Rω i − Rω kˆ
4 4
Q.23 Which of the following statements about the 3 1
instantaneous axis (passing through the centre of mass) (D) The point P has a linear velocity 3 − Rω ˆi + Rω kˆ
4 4
is correct? (2012)
(A) It is vertical for both the cases (a) and (b) (B) It is
Q.26 Two solid cylinders P and Q of same mass and
vertical for case (a); and is at 45° to the x-z plane and
same radius start rolling down a flixed inclined plane
lies in the plane of the disc for case (b)
from the same height at the same time. Cylinder P has
(C) It is horizontal for case (a); and is at 45° to the x-z most of its mass concentrated near its surface, while Q
plane and is normal to the plane of the disc for case (b) has most of its mass concentrated near the axis. Which
statement(s) is (are) correct? (2012)
(D) It is vertical for case (a); and is at 45° to the x-z
plane and is normal to the plane of the disc for case (b) (A) Both cylinders P and Q reach the ground at the
same time.
Q.24 Which of the following statements regarding the (B) Cylinder P has larger linear acceleration than
angular speed about the instantaneous axis (passing cylinder Q.
through the centre of mass) is correct? (2012)
(C) Both cylinders reach the ground with same
(A) It is 2 ω for both the cases translational kinetic energy
ω (D) Cylinder Q reaches the ground with larger angular
(B) It is ω for case (a); and for case (b)
2 speed
mg v1=3m/s v2
(A) µ1 = 0 µ2 ≠ 0 and N2 tan θ = A C
2 30m 27m
mg
B D
(B) µ1 ≠ 0 µ2 =0 and N1 tan θ =
2
mg
(C) µ1 ≠ 0 µ2 ≠ 0 and N2 =
1 + µ1 µ2
Q.32 A ring of mass M and radius R is rotating with
mg angular speed ω about a fixed vertical axis passing
(D) µ1 = 0 µ2 ≠ 0 and N1 tan θ =
2 through its centre O with two point masses each of
M
Q.29 A uniform circular disc of mass 1.5 kg and radius 0.5 mass at rest at O. These masses can move radially
8
m is initially at rest on a horizontal frictionless surface. outwards along two massless rods fixed on the ring
Three forces of equal magnitude F = 0.5 N are applied
simultaneously along the three sides of an equilateral as shown in the figure. At some instant the angular
triangle XYZ with its vertices on the perimeter of the 8
disc (see figure). One second after applying the forces, speed of the system is ω and one of the masses is at
9
the angular speed of the disc in rad s-1 is (2014) 3
a distance of R from O. At this instant the distance of
5
F the other mass from O is (2015)
X
O
Y E
Z
F
O
Q.30 A horizontal circular platform of radius 0.5 m
and mass 0.45 kg is free to rotate about its axis. Two
massless spring toy -guns, each carrying a steel ball of
mass 0.05 kg are attached to the platform at a distance 2 1 3 4
(A) R (B) R (C) R (D) R
0.25 m from the centre on its either sides along its 3 3 5 5
diameter (see figure).Each gun simultaneously fires the
balls horizontally and perpendicular to the diameter
in opposite directions. After leaving the platform, the Q.33 The densities of two solid spheres A and B of the
balls have horizontal speed of 9ms-1 with with respect r
to the ground. The rotational speed of the platform in same radii R vary with radial distance r as ρA (r ) =
k
r
5 R
rad s-1 after the balls leave the platform is (2014)
and ρB (r ) =k , respectively, where k is a constant.
R
The moments of inertia of the individual spheres about
P hysi cs | 7.79
axes passing through their centres are I A and IB ,
I n
(C) The force F is given by F= (ˆi + 2 ˆj) N
respectively. If B = , the value of n is (2015)
I A 10
(D) The torque τ = − ( 20 / 3) kˆ N m
Q.34 A uniform wooden stick of mass 1.6 kg and length
rests in an inclined manner on a smooth, vertical
Q.36 Two thin circular discs of mass m and 4m, having
wall of height h ( < ) such that a small portion of the
radii of a and 2a, respectively, are rigidly fixed by a
stick extends beyond the wall. The reaction force of the
wall on the stick is perpendicular to the stick. The stick massless, rigid rod of length = 24 a through their
makes an angle of 30° with the wall and the bottom of centers. This assembly is laid on a firm and flat surface,
the stick is on a rough floor. The reaction of the wall on and set rolling without slipping on the surface so that
the stick is equal in magnitude to the reaction of the the angular speed about the axis of the rod is ω . The
floor on the stick. The ratio h / and the frictional force angular momentum of the entire assembly about the
(
fat the bottom of the stick are g = 10 ms−2 (2016))
point ‘O’ is L (see the figure). Which of the following
statement(s) is(are) true? (2016)
h 3 16 3
(A)
= = ,f N
16 3 4m
h 3 16 3 m
(B)
= = ,f N
16 3 z
h 3 3 8 3 2a
(C)
= 2 = ,f N
16 3 O
a
h 3 3 16 3
(D)
= = ,f N
16 3
(B) The angular momentum L with respect to the origin
is given by L = − (5 / 3) kˆ Nms
7 . 8 0 | Rotational Mechanics
PlancEssential Questions
JEE Main/Boards JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1 Exercise 1
Q.19 Q.22 Q.23 Q.5 Q.7 Q.8
Q.27 Q.28 Q.10 Q.11 Q.21
Q.24
Exercise 2 Exercise 2
Q.12 Q.25 Q.7 Q.9 Q.21
Q.22 Q.28 Q.41
Q.54
Previous Years’ Questions
Q.4 Q.7 Q.9 Previous Years’ Questions
Q.12 Q.1 Q.3
Answer Key
JEE Main/Boards
Q.11 KB> K A
Exercise 1 Q.18 8 g
Q.19 1.584 × 10⁷ g cm²
Q.1 kg m2, [M1L2T0], No
Q.20 1.25 kg m²;
Q.2 Torque Q.21 9.83 × 10³⁷ kg m²
Q.3 Inertia
Q.22 3.5 × 10⁴ g cm² ; 1.75 × 10⁴ g cm² ; 8.75 × 10⁴ g
Q.4 Theorem of parallel axes and theorem of cm² ; 10.5× 104 g cm²
perpendicular axes
5 2
2 Q.23 mL
Q.5 I = MR 2 , M = mass & R = radius 4
5
2 Q.24 0.01J
Q.6 I = MR 2 , M = mass & R = radius
3 Q.26 108 days
Q.8 No
Q.27 80π kg m2 s−1
Q.9 Hollow sphere
Q.10 IB> IA Q.28 360 r.p.m
P hysi cs | 7.81
Exercise 2
2v 0 v0
3aρ0 5a 7ρ0 a3 12 Q.17 (i) v = (ii) t =
Q.7 (a) ; (b) ; (c) ; (d) ; 3 3µg
2 9 12 7ρ0 a2
1
w = 1 [3µ22mg22 t22 − 2µ mg t v 0 ](t < t0 ),
(e)
7 2 3
ρ ga w = 2 [3µ mg t − 2µ mg t v 0 ](t < t0 ),
4 0 2 1
w = − 1 mv 202 (t > t0 )
w = − 6 mv 0 (t > t0 )
6
Q.8 300 rad/sec, 150 rad/sec
Q.18 t = 2 5 sec, q = 4π/5 rad
Q.9 16 m/s²
37 37
Q.19 (a) ω / 3 , (b) m ω R, (c) mωR
27 3 3
Q.10 v = gR
7
Q.20 15 ft/sec
200 3
Q.11 (a) N; (b) 4 m/s Q.21 (a) 5 m/s2, (b) 0.3 < h < 1.5 m
7 7
7 . 8 2 | Rotational Mechanics
6aπ a
Q.22 6N, −0.6jˆ ± 0.6kˆ Q.23=
(i) t ;=
(ii) s 1 + (2π + 3)2
3v 0 3
Exercise 2
Comprehension Type
Q.47 C Q.48 A Q.49 C Q.50 C Q.51 B Q.52 B
Q.53 A Q.54 A Q.55 D Q.56 B
Solutions
Sol 2: Torque is the rotational analogue of force. Considering, the solid sphere as a large group of hollow
spheres whose radii range from 0 to R with a thickness
Sol 3: Moment of inertia is the rotational analogue of of dr. Integrating moment of inertia of these dements
mass of a body. gives the required value.
dm = ρ. 4pr2.dr (dm = ρ. dv) and I = ∫ dI
Sol 4: The theorem of parallel axes R
2 ∴
I = Icm + m.d 2 I= ∫ 3 .r
2
ρ. 4pr2dr ( I = ∫ r 2dm ) and
0
where Icm = Moment of Inertia about an axis passing 2
through center of mass and parallel to the considered (Ihollow sphere = MR2)
3
axis R
2 2 r5
m = mass of the body ⇒ dI = (dm)r2 = . 4pρ
3 3 5 0
d = distance between the axis (about which the value
of I is required) and the axis passing through center of M
R4 2
mass and parallel to the considered axis. = 4pρ . = MR ρ = 4 π 3
2
5 5 R
The theorem of perpendicular axes 3
Iz = Ix + Iy
z Sol 6: The moment of inertia of a hollow sphere about
2
an axis passing through its center is I = MR2
3
where M = mass of sphere
R = Radius of sphere
x
Derivation:
Ix
I= ∫ dI = ∫ r 2dm = ∫ r. ρ 2πrRdθ
Iy
∴
[ Iring = MR ] 2
Circular discs A and B of same mass and same thickness
but different densities dA and dB (dA > dB)
⇒ dI = dmr2 ⇒I= ∫ 2πρR (R
3
sin3θ)dq
π MA = MB
3
I = 2prR4 ∫ sin θdθ
0 ⇒ πR 2A . dA tA = πRB2 . dB .tB
π 1/2
MR 2 (3sin θ – sin3θ) RA d
⇒I=
2 ∫ 4
. dq ⇒ = B
0 RB dA
MR 2
π
3cos θ cos3θ MAR 2A
⇒I= (IA)x = = (IA)y
– + 4
2 0
4 12
MAR 2A
MR 2
3 1 3 1 2 ⇒ (IA)z = (IA)x + (IA)y =
⇒I= – – + ⇒ I = MR2 2
–
2 4 12 4 12 3 [By perpendicular axes theorem]
also
Sol 7: Factors on which moment of inertia depend
MBRB2
→ Mass of the body (IB)z =
2
→ Mass distribution of the body 2
IA R d
→ Size of the body = A = B ⇒ IA < IB since dB < dA
IB RB dA
→ Axis about which moment of inertia is required
Sol 11: Given.
Sol 8: No, it is not a constant
Moment of inertia of two rotating bodies A and B as
It depends on the axis about which moment of inertia
IA and IB (IA > IB)
is calculated
and
Iaxis
Since, K = Angular moment (LA and LB) are equal
M
⇒ LA = LB
Iaxis = moment of inertia about a given axis
then kinetic energies
M = mass of the body (constant)
(K.E.)A and (K.E.)B will be
Sol 9: Given 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 L2
L A / I A and L2B / IB K.E.= Iω = Lω=
A solid sphere and hollow sphere have same mass and 2 2 2 2 2 I
same radius
2 ⇒ (K.E.)A < (K.E.)B since IB < IA
Isolid sphere = MR2
5
2
Ihollow sphere = MR2 Sol 12: Moment of inertia is the measure of tendency
3
P hysi cs | 7.85
I
⇒K= Sol 15: Newton’s second law of linear motion is
M
F = ma
Sol 13: Kinetic energy of rolling motion where F = force acting on the body
m = mass of body
a = acceleration of body
w Vcm Now, consider ‘dm’ part of as body acted upon by a force
F and the body is rotating with an angular acceleration
of ‘α’
Consider a body rolling with angular velocity ω and
linear center of mass velocity vcm
Velocity of a particle at any point is given by dm
(V + rω cosθ) î + (rω sinθ) ˆj
cm F r
Vcm+r cos
dT = r × F
r
= r. dm (rα)
r sin
= r2 . dm . α
K.E. = ∫ d(K.E.)
∫ dT = ∫ r 2dm.α
∫ 2 dm ((Vcm + rω cos θ) )
1 2
= + (rω sin θ)2
⇒ Taxis = Iaixs aaxis
M M
1 2 2 1 2
=
2 ∫r ω dm +
2 ∫ Vcm dm + Sol 16: Principle of conservation of angular momentum.
0 0
In absence of a torque, the angular momentum of a
M
1 body is always conserved (constant)
2 ∫ 2Vcm r ω cos θ dm
0 dL
m T= =0
1 1 2 dt
= Icm ω2 + Vcm
2 2
+ Vcm ω ∫ r cos θ dm ⇒ L = constant ⇒ Iω = constant
0
R 2π
1 1 or I1ω1 = I2ω2
= Icm ω2 + MVcm
2
+ Vcm ω ∫ ∫ r cos θ .dθ .dr
2 2 0 0
7 . 8 6 | Rotational Mechanics
Example: By stretching hands a ballet decreases the angular Sol 21: Given,
speed of the body by increasing the moment of inertia
Radius of earth assuming it as a sphere as 6400 km
Example: A person sitting is a chair which can rotate mass of earth is 6 × 1024 kg
holds a rotating wheel in hands and when he flips the
Moment of inertia of the earth is
wheel, the person along with chair rotates conserving
angular momentum. 2 ∴ 2
I= MR2 ( I = MR2 for a sphere (solid))
5 5
Sol 17: Consider a circular ring of radius R and mass M 2
⇒I= × 6 × 1024 × (6400 × 103)2
5
⇒ I = 9.8304 × 1037 kgm2
R
dm Sol 22: Given,
A Uniform circular disc of mass 700 gms and diameter
2 2 20 cm
I= ∫ dI = ∫ R .dm = MR
(i) Moment of inertia about the transverse axis through
center of disc is
Sol 18: Given,
MR 2
I = 200 g cm2 I=
2
r = 5 cm 700 × 10 × 10
⇒ I= = 3.5 × 104 gcm2
We know that for a thin ring the moment of inertia 2
about an axis passing through center is Mr2 (ii) Moment of inertia about the diameter of disc is
T MR 2
⇒M= = 8 grams I=
2
r 4
∴
[ Ix = Iy and Ix + Iy = Iz
Sol 19: Given,
(perpendicular axis theorem)]
diameter of disc = 40 cm
z
thickness of disc = 7 cm
density of disc = 9 gm cm–3
x
πD2
mass of the disc = ρ.V = ρ. .t
4
y
= 9 × π × 400 × 7 = 79168.13 grams
700 × (10 × 10)
moment of inertia of disc about a transverse axis ⇒ I= =1.75×104gcm2
through the center of the disc is 4
MR 2
I=
2
79168.13 × 20 × 20 R
⇒I= ⇒ I = 1.584 × 107 g cm2 (iii)
2
C
D w V
1 60°
2
L L
A circular dice of mass M and radius r is set rolling on
table the kinetic energy of the disc is given by
60°
A B
1 2 1
L K.E = Iω + mv2(refer Q. 14)
2 2
Given, particles of masses m are placed at A, B and C 1 mr 2 2 1
⇒ K.E. = ω + mv2
and side of triangle ABC is L 2 2 2
Then, mv 2 mv 2
⇒ K.T. = +
4 2
AC AB L
CD = AC cos60° = = =
2 2 2 [For pure rolling v = rω]
moment of inertia of system is
3
I = I A + IB + IC ⇒ K.E. = mv2
4
2
L
⇒ I = m(0)2 + m(L)2 + m
2 Sol 26: Given,
I2 R 22
=
I1 R12
⇒ I2 = 4I1
7 . 8 8 | Rotational Mechanics
I 1 ω1 = I 2 ω2 Exercise 2
(By principle of conservation of angular momentum)
Single Correct Choice Type
ω1 ω1
⇒ ω2 = = rad/days
4 108
Sol 1: (B)
Then, the new period of revolution
A
2π
= = 108 days B MR 2
(2π / 108) I=
12
∴ π MR 2
T = I=
ω 12
D C
2a
A B
M
Mass of each rod =
4
P hysi cs | 7.89
Moment of inertia of one rod about the given axis is Sol 5: (D) Given,
M(2a)2 Ma2 4Ma2 Ma2 I’ as a function of x of a rigid body
I= + = =
4 × 12 4 4×3 3 I = 2x2 – 12x + 27
Ma2 The value of moment of inertia is minimum at center
Total moment of inertia = 4I =
3 of mass point
To calculate min value of I, differentiate w.r.t. x and equate
Sol 3: (A) Given, it to 0
d2 I
>0
Now rod is bent into semi-circular arc dx2
⇒4>0
∴ x = 3 is the x-coordinate of center of mass.
Sol 6: (D)
R 3m
Length of arc = L = pR A B
Moment of inertia of the arc = MR2
2N 4N
ML2
= = I2``
π2 To keep the body in equilibrium a 6 N acts at point x
from A
I2 > I1 (since p2 < 12)
x 6N
1 1
Sol 4: (B) So,=
2I
2
(M + M) R2 ⇒ 2I =
2
( 2M) R2 A B
P
2N 4N
Imaginary
R semi-disc Taking moment of torques about A
of same
specific list ∑ MA = 0 (In equilibrium)
⇒6×x–4×3=0
Mars=M
Radius=R ⇒ x = 2m
1 Sol 7: (D)
⇒ I = M R2 1 2
2 T1 T2
L/4
A B
L C
L/2
w
7 . 9 0 | Rotational Mechanics
Let T1 and T2 be tensions is the strings considering force Sol 10: (C) Given,
equilibrium
Two spheres of same mass M and radii R and 2R and
T1 + T2 = W also have equal rotational kinetic energies
Also Considering moment equilibrium about A 1 1 L2 L2
⇒ I1 ω12 = I2 ω22 ⇒ 1 = 2
2 2 I1 I2
∑ MA = 0 ∴
[ Iω= L (Angular momentum)]
3L L
⇒ T2 × –W× =0
4 2 L2 I2 R 22 R2
⇒ = = = =2
2W W L1 I1 R12 R1
⇒ T2 = ⇒ T1 =
3 3
Sol 11: (A) Angular momentum remains constant since,
Sol 8: (B) RA T no torque is acting on the skater.
v 2 viˆ
→
⇒ v = v î + v ˆj
Sol 17: (B)
T
∴
[ v = Rω pure rolling]
→
⇒ v = v( î + ˆj )
→ →
a.v 1
cosθ = =
→ →
2
| a || v | mg
⇒ θ = 45°
mg – T T
Acceleration of yo-yo = =g–
m m
Sol 15: (C)
y
Sol 18: (B) In case of pure rolling v = Rω
3m/s (Bottom–most point has zero velocity)
8m
x
O
v
y
f
after 5 seconds w
15m
v
f
8m as ω is in clockwise direction, thread winds also friction
acts leftwards to increase w.
v cos
O
fa
Na
(a)
7 . 9 2 | Rotational Mechanics
6J
⇒ω=
m
f1=0
N1=0 B
mg w
L
.w
6 w B
fb
Nb vcm
vcm /2
1
f1 + Na = mg Nb = mg .w
2
N1 mg
+ Na = mg fb =
3 3
π m
fa ∴ After time t =
+ Na = mg [ N1 = fa] 12J
3
π m 6J π
The angle rotated by rod θ = ωt = . =
9mg Na 3mg 12 J m 2
Na = fa = ⇒ fa =
10 3 10
2
ω 2
fa 9 Velcoity of point P = + (v cm )
= 6
fb 10
2 2
J J J
= + = 2
F m m m
Sol 20: (A)
⇒ vcm = Rω
F = Ma (By Newton’s second law), also T = Ta 1 2
(K.E.)rotational Iω
Ia ∴ a = 2
⇒ FR = ( α = for pvre rolling) (K.E.)translational 1
R R mv 2
2
⇒ I = MR2
(K.E.)r mR 2 ω2 1
This is satisfied for thin pipe ⇒ = =
(K.E.)t 2mv 2 2
∆KEP = mgH Keeping these things in mind, only option (A) is correct.
∴ ∆KEQ = 2∆KEP
Sol 2: (C) Since, it is head on elastic collision between
two identical spheres, they will exchange their linear
Sol 26: (B) Moment of inertia decreases since mass is velocities i.e., A comes to rest and B starts moving
closer to axis while. with linear velocity v, As there is no friction anywhere,
torque on both the spheres about their center of mass
Angular momentum remains constant which implies
is zero and their angular velocity remains unchanged.
angular velocity increases and which intern implies
Therefore,
increase is kinetic energy.
∴ 1
( L = Iω and K.E = Lω) A=
2 v
A B A B
Sol 27: (C) Angular momentum is conserved on any Before collision After collision
point on the ground since the only force present passes
through that point making torque zero. v
Sol 3: (B) L = m r⊥
2
v 2 sin2 45° v2
Here, r⊥ = h = =
2g 4g
v v2 mv 3
∴L = m =
2 4g 4 2g
7 . 9 4 | Rotational Mechanics
Sol 4: (A) Let ω be the angular velocity of the rod. For work to be minimum, the moment of inertia (I)
Applying, angular impulse = change in angular should be minimum or
momentum about center of mass of the system dI
=0
L dx
J. = Ic ω
2
or 2(0.3) – 2 (0.7)(1.4 – x) = 0 or (0.3)x = (0.7)(1.4 – x)
L ML2
∴ (Mv)
= (2) ω (0.7)(1.4)
2
4 ⇒ x= = 0.98m
0.3 + 0.7
v
∴ ω=
L
Sol 8: (C) From the theorem
L0 = LCM + M (r × v) … (i)
M M
We may write
J = Mv Angular momentum about O = Angular momentum
about CM + Angular momentum of CM about origin
∴ L0 = Iω + MRv
M
Sol 5: (A) Mass of the element dx is m = dx. 1 3
L = MR 2 ω + MR(Rω) = MR 2 ω
2 2
This element needs centripetal force for rotation.
y
y
v=R
F F+dF M v
x=L x x
O B O
x dx (a) (b)
x=0 Note that is this case both the terms in
M Eq. (i) i.e., LCM and M (r × v)
∴ dF = mx ω2 = xω2dx
L Have the same direction. That is why we have used
L m L 2
Mω L L0 = Iω ~ MRv if they are in opposite direction as
∫0 dF = L .ω ∫0 xdx =
2
∴ F= shown in figure (b).
2
This is the force exerted by the liquid at the other end.
Sol 9: (C) At the critical condition, normal reaction N
will pass through point P. In this condition.
Sol 6: (B) mg sin θ component is always down the
τN = 0 = τfr (About P)
plane whether it is rolling up or rolling down. Therefore,
for no slipping, sense of angular acceleration should N
also be same in both the cases.
Therefore, force of friction f always act upwards. F
m2 r m1 r a2
Sol=
16: (D) r1 = ;r Moment of inertia about the required axis = I = ρa3 ,
m1 + m2 2 m1 + m2 6
nh M
(l1 + l)=
ω = n
2π
where ρ =
4 3
πR
3
1 n (m1 + m2 )
2 2
K.E.
=
2
( l1 + l2 ) ω=
2
2R
5
3M 1 32R5 4MR 2 4MR 2
2m1 m2 r 2 3M 1
=I = = =
4 π R3 6 3 4 π R3 6 9 3 9 3 π 9 3 π
Sol 17: (B) From conservation of angular momentum
about any fix point on the surface R
mr 2 ω
=0 2mr 2 ω Sol 21: (A,=
C) L0 mv
2
− kˆ ( ) [D to A]
ω0 R
∴ω = =L0 mv + a kˆ [C to D]
2 2
ω0 r
∴ VCM =
2 Sol 22: (D) From normal reactions of roller, we can
conclude it moves towards left.
Sol 18: (A)
JEE Advanced/Boards
L
Exercise 1
Sol 1: Given,
V
A thin uniform rod of mass M and length L is hinged at
its upper end, and is released from rest in a horizontal
L changes in direction not in magnitude position.
O
L/3 COM
V
1000 L/2
Sol 19: =
(C) 5 e T −1 h1
L COM
V
⇒ e1000 6 ….(i)
=
T h2
V
1000
Again,
= I e T −1
Let angular velocity of the rod about hinge ‘O’ when it
1000 V is vertical be ‘ω’
dI 1000
= e T
dV T Moment of inertia of rod about o is
1000
2
1000 V L
dI = e T dV I = Icom+ M (parallel axis theorem)
T 2
Using (i) ML2 ML2 ML2
⇒I= + =
12 4 3
1000 60 60
∆ I= × 6 × 0.01= = = 0.2mA
T T 300 By using principle of conservation of energy
∆K.E = – DP.E
Sol 20: (B) For maximum possible volume of cube 1 2
⇒ Iω – 0 = – Mg(h2 – h1)com
2
2R = 3 a, a is side of the cube.
P hysi cs | 7.97
1 ML2 2 L 3g A is stationary
⇒ .ω = Mg ⇒ ω =
2 3 2 L Since, angular velocity of system would be same through
L VB 5
The tension in the rod at a point from hinge would ω= = rad/s
3 a a
be due to weight below that point and centrifugal force and
of that part.
VC = 2 a.ω = 5 2 m/s perpendicular to AC in vector
form.
VC = +5 î + (– 5) ˆj if co-ordinate system is along AB
r T and BC
Velocity of ‘C’ in original frame
dm 2L → → →
V c = V c + V a =+ 5iˆ – 5ˆj – 5ˆj ∴ (VA =– 5ˆj )
3
→
Mg ⇒ V c = 5iˆ – 10ˆj
→
2L 2M M | Vc | = 52 + 102 = 5 5 m/s
m = ρ.A. = ρ =
3 3 A.L
L Sol 3: Initial
2
Centrifugal force = ∫ rω .dm ω
L/3
L L
r2
= ω ∫ r.ρ.Adr = ω ρ.A
2 2
/4 /4
L/3 2 L/3
3g M 1 2 8 4Mg
= . [L ] = final
L L 2
9
3
ω’
Tension at the point is T = mg + FC
2Mg 4Mg
= + = 2Mg
3 3 /2 /2
5 m/s
7 . 9 8 | Rotational Mechanics
1 2 1 1 2
Sol 6: Given,
I ω = If(ω1)2 + mv × 2
2 1 2 2 A uniform wood door of mass m, height h and width w.
L 0.03 × 30 × (20) h 2h
⇒ (ω – ω1) = V2 ⇒ = V2 Location of hinges are and from the bottom of
2m 0.2 the door. 3 3
⇒ v = 3 m/s Let the hinges be named A and B.
∴ Velocity of ring along rod = 3m/s
w
Sol 4: Given,
(FA)
A (FA)x
A straight rod AB of mass M and length L, a horizontal
force F starts on A h/3 COM h
A F
mg
B
h/3 (FB)x
acm
Given, hinge A is screwed while B is not, So, the upward
component of force by hinge B is absent.
By equilibrium equations,
B acm
L
∑ Fx
2 = 0 ⇒ (FA)x = (FB)x
F = Macm (by newton’s second law)
∑ Fy = 0 ⇒ (F ) A y
= mg
T = Ia
L ML2
∑ MCOM =0
⇒ F. = ×a
2 12 (Moment about center of mass)
6F
⇒α=
ML ⇒ (FA)y w +(FA)x h + (FB)x h = 0
1 2 6 6
Acceleration of end B= acm î – x î
2
ω 3mgω
2F F ⇒ mg . + (FB)x h = 0 ⇒ (FB)x = –
=– î acm = 2 2h
M M 3
→ →
2F and FA = (FA)x î + (FB) ˆj , FB = FB(– î )
∴ Magnitude of acceleration of end B =
M
→
3mgω →
3mgω
FA =– î + mg ˆj , FB = î
2h 2h
Given m = 20 kg, h = 2.2 m, ω = 1m
vcm=3m/s → →
Sol 5: 0.3 0.1 ⇒ FA = (–133.64 î + 196 ˆj )N and FB = 133.64 î
B String
w
Sol 7: Given, A thin rod of length ‘a’ with variable mass
A
Given, the wheel is rolling without slipping per unit length ρ = r0 1 + x where x is distance from A.
∴ a
rAω = Vcm( VA = 0)
x
(pure rolling) 0 1
x a
The velocity of the string should be
(a) Mass of the elemental part is dm = ρ.dx (c) Given, to find the moment of inertia about axis
perpendicular to rod and passing through A.
x
⇒ dm = ρ 1 + .dx
0
a
dx
Mass of the rod
M a A B
x
m= ∫ dm = ∫ ρ0 1 + a .dx
0 0
a
x2 3a
⇒ m = ρ x + m = ρ
0
2a 0
2 M
0
2 ∴
3aρ0
I= ∫ x dm ( dI = x2 dm)
∴ Mass of rod = 0
2
x
(b) Center of mass is situated at distance of C from A but dm = ρ 1 + .dx
where
0
a
M
a
∫ x.dm 2 x3
C= 0
⇒I= ∫ ρ0 x + .dx
a
M 0
∫ dm x3 x 4 7ρ0 a3
a
0 ⇒I= ρ + ⇒I=
M a
x
0
3 4a 0 12
Value of ∫ x.dm = ∫ x(ρ0 ) 1 + a dx
0 0
(d) We know that,
a
x 2 x3 5a2
= ρ + ⇒ ρ Angular momentum L = I.ω
0 6
2 3a 0
0
7ρ0 a2
P.a = .ω
12
12
ω=
7ρ0 a2
a/2
(e) Given, an impulse of ‘P’ is applied at point B, then
Angular impulse about the axis will be
a/2
L = P.a
⇒ (Iω).ω = 2mga
P Pa.12.P
⇒ = 2 mga
7ρ0 a2
for minimum value of P, the angular velocity rod in the
final position should be zero 7 3 7 2 3
⇒ P2 = ρ ga2 2 P0 a = ρ ga
by applying conservation of energy 6 0 4 0
K.E = – DP.E.
Sol 8: Given, two cylinders of mass 1 kg and 4 kg with
⇒ K.Ef – K.Ei = – mg(hf – hi)
radii 10 cm and 20 cm respectively.
1 2
0– Iω = – mg (a) also initial angular velocities as
2
5a2 ω1 = 100 rad/s and ω2 = 200 rad/s
5a
⇒C= 6 ⇒C= final angular velocities will be such that there is no slip
3a2 9 at point of contact
2
7 . 1 0 0 | Rotational Mechanics
1
(Vcm = 3Rω) ⇒ (acm = 3Rα)
w2
w1
1 Solving (i) and (ii) we get,
6
acm = .g
5
r1 w11 Acceleration of the point where force is applied B
3 8
a = acm î + R(α) î = acm î = g î
⇒ Vcontact = 0 ⇒ r1 ω11 – r2 ω12 =0 4 5
r1 ω11 | a | ≅ 16 m/s2
⇒ ω12 =
r2
Angular impulse on one cylinder due to other is Sol 10:
I1( ω11 – ω1) = (DP)(R1)
R+r
where DP = linear impulse while for the other sphere
v
r
R1 P R2 Given, A sphere of mass m and radius r and radius of
P loop as R + r the velocity of the sphere at the top most
point should be such that the centrifugal force balances
I2( ω12 –ω2) = (DP)(R2) the weight of sphere
1 mv 2f
I1 (ω1 – ω1 ) R1 ⇒ = mg
⇒ = R
I2 (ω1 – ω ) R2 ∴
2 2
( Center of mass makes circle of radius R)
⇒ 8( ω12 – ω2) = ω11 – ω1
⇒ vf = Rg
ω1 – 8ω2
⇒ ω11 = – 300 rad/s Since, the sphere is in pure rolling at every point of time,
5
ω1 vcm = rω
while ω12 = – = 150 rad/s
2 By principle of conservation of energy
3 x x
(b) ω = 10 rad/s
v= 2× a× s = 4 m/s
7
mgsin α mg (0.5)(9.8)
⇒ α= a/R = – =– =–
M R(2m + M) 0.2(1 + 2)
R m +
Sol 12: The moment of inertia of a thin hoop about it’s 2
diameter is
5
=–– . 9.8 rad/s2
1 6
M R2
2 =– 8.166 rad/s2
Here M = Lρ Now, ω2 = ω20 + 2αq
Also we have 2πR = L ⇒ 0 = (10)2 + 2(– 8.166) × q
1
⇒R = 100
2π ⇒θ= = 6.123 rad,
2 × 8.166
2
1 1 L L3ρ So distance = θR = 6.123 × 0.2 = 1.224 m
So we have, I =M R 2 =L ρ =
2 2 2π 8π2
Now using parallel axis theorem we have Sol 14:
2 2 v =0
L3ρ 3L ρ v0
L
I xx=
' Icm 2
+ M R= + L ρ = m m
8π2
2π 8π2
x Vcom
Sol 13:
A
T T×R
a
ω
ωL
vA = Vcom – ; so for vA = 0
2
mg sin
ωL
⇒ Vcom =
(a) Now T – mg sina = ma ... (i) 2
Now, mv0 = M.vcom (moment cons.)
MR 2 MRα
TxR = – Iα = – ×α=– ... (ii) mv 0
2 2 ⇒ Vcom =
M
Rα= a ... (iii)
7 . 1 0 2 | Rotational Mechanics
Sol 15:
A B
C
2
mg
C
Before connection B is released
TA + TB = mg (By force equilibrium)
After connection B is released
and mg
TA is still , while TB = 0
TA = TB (for torque equilibrium) 2
Mg mg
TA = TB = g mg –
2 linear acceleration a = 2
2 m
⇒ Just after B is released
A
C 5
2 4 R R/2
C
4 C
2 K.Ei + P.Ei = K.Ef + P.Ef
⇒ 0 + mgR
mg
1 m 2 1 m R
= (v ) 1 + + (g)
Moment of inertia about 24 2 4 2
2
m 2 C
2
C 5 14gR
A= C + + m . ⇒v=
12 2 2 4 3
14gR
mc2 5 5 5 ∴ Velocity of the axis of cylinder =
⇒I= + mc2 ⇒ I = mc2 3
12 4 16 12
P hysi cs | 7.103
1 1 1 m(R)
W=– mv 20 + mv 2 + Iω2
2 2 2
mv 20 3 4
f
W=– + m. v 20 mRα
2 4 9 ⇒ mRα + f = ma1 ⇒ mRα + = a1
2
1 5Rα
W=– mv 20 ⇒ a1 = ∴ M = 3m
6 2
Also for t > to No frictional force exists Given, after time T, the ant reaches same point
1 1 5Rα 2 2
⇒W=– mv 20 for t ≥ to ⇒ T = 2π .R ⇒ T = seconds
6 2 2 5
Also ma = – mmg ⇒ a = – mg 1 2 4π
Also the angle moved by disc = aT = radians
and v = v0 – mgt 2 5
v0
to = Sol 19:
3µg
w
T f.R 2µg
α= = =
I MR 2 R R
m
2
Work done by friction for t < to = K.Ef – K.Ei m v=2wR
1 1 2µgt 1
2
2
⇒ W = m(v 0 – µgt)2 + I – mv 0
2 2 R 2
1 1 Angular momentum of the system is conserved
⇒ W = mµ2g2 t2 + m(2µ2g2 t2 ) – mv 0 µgt
2 2 Li = Lf
1 mR 2 ω mR 2
⇒W= (3mm2g2t2 – 2mv0mgt) ⇒ = + mR 2 ω1
2 2 2
ω
⇒ ω1 =
Sol 18: 3
300cm
Impulse in the direction of velocity
20cm 100cm
= m (vf – vi) = – mv = – 2mωR
7 . 1 0 4 | Rotational Mechanics
2cos θ
Angular acceleration of door = ft/s2
w f f
w is the width of the door 2
z
We know that,
dω dω dθ
=α⇒ . =α y
dt dθ dt
x
⇒ ω.dω = α . dq
π /2 2M(a) – 2f = 2Ma1 (force equation)
ω2 4
⇒
2
–0=
w ∫ cos θ .dq (2f)R = (2T).α (Moment equation)
0
a1 = Rα (pure rolling)
ω2 4
⇒ = [1]
2 w Iα Ma1
f= =
⇒ω=2 R 2
f=
Ma1
= 6N
Exercise 2
2
Single Correct Choice Type
Frictional torque magnitude about rod is
f.R = 0.6 Nm
Sol 1: (D) A
O
B
Friction torque about O is
I2
I1
0.2
= ± 0.6 ( k̂ ) – 0.6(0.1) ˆj = – 0.6 ( ˆj ± k̂ )
P
2
O’
D C
Sol 23: A a
3πa
= Iz Ma2
v0 ⇒ IX = Iy = ⇒ I1 = IX =
2 12
Displacement of point B will be I1
=1
2a 3 ˆ 2a 1 ˆ I2
vcm t î + × i+ . j
3 2 3 2
Sol 2: (C) Given, moment of inertia of rectangular plate
2π a ˆ about transverse axis through P as I then the moment
⇒ + 1 (a) î + j
3 3 I
of inertia of PQR about P will be greater that since
2
mass is distributed away from P unlike in PSR. Since, I
depends on distance ‘r’, the farther the mass, the more
the moment of inertia. The moment of inertia of PQR
7 . 1 0 6 | Rotational Mechanics
A
I1x
I1y
O
a
C B
a
O is the midpoint
Iz = I1x + I1y = 2 I1x
Consider a counterpart with same mass such a square
is formed Iz
I1x =
2
A C1
Ma2
We know that Iz is independent θ since Iz =
O 6
L/2
x
wG
D C COM
ws
P hysi cs | 7.107
Sol 7: (D)
P
w
By the principle of conservation of energy
O
torque acting on the pole due to weight about point K.Ei + P.Ei = K.Ef + P.E.f
O is 1 1
→
⇒ 0 + mg(l) = mv2 + Iω2 + 0
→ L 2 2
T = r × F = W cosq
2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2
⇒ mgl = mr w + . mr ω
T = Ia 2 2 5
L
W cos θ
3mgcos θ 3gcos θ 10 gl
⇒α= 2 = = ⇒ω=
ML 2 2mL 2L 7 r2
3
3gcos θ Angular momentum of the sphere about P is
Acceleration of point P=L.α =
2 L = Iω + m.l.v
2 2
⇒L= mr ω + m. l. r ω
Sol 8: (B) 5
10 2
⇒ L = m. gl . r + l
7 5
6m d
m v
7 . 1 0 8 | Rotational Mechanics
vA = – v and y =
2
A
dv A 2v 2 . 2
⇒ =–
y dt
vA
Angular acceleration =
30° v
C B
x 45°
x2 + y2 = l2 aA
aA
aA
L = length of ladder = constant 2
2
dx dy
⇒ x. + y. =0 a=0
dt dt
⇒ x. v + y.vA = 0 aA
α= 2
x
⇒ vA = – .v = – 3v (L)
y
2v 2
O α=
L2
L/2
3v L ( L sin30°) OC= L
Sol 12: (A)
3 60° 2 2
L /2 Initial Final
ω0
30°
v
Sol 13: (C) Conserving linear momentum Sol 14: (C) When F1 is applied, the body moves right
and angular acceleration is developed accordingly by
2mv – mv = 2m × vcm
friction
v
vcm = when F3 is applied, the angular acceleration developed it
2
the body move left.
Initial angular momentum
When F2 is applied the body can move either left of
b b 3vbm right depending on angle of inclination.
= m × 2v × + mv × =
2 2 2
Final angular momentum Multiple Correct Choice Type
b 2
b
2
mb2 ω
= m + m × ω = Sol 15: (B, C) x
2 2 2
COM
3mvb mb2 ω A B
⇒ =
2 2
FBD of rod
3v
∴ ω2 =
b x
For skater at x = b/2
RA w RB
wb RA + RB = w (force equilibrium)
2 RB.d = w.x (torque equilibrium)
wx w(d – x)
⇒ RB = and RA =
d d
ωb
vx = v + cosq
2
Sol 16: (A, D) mg cos
ωb
vy = – sinq
2
mgsin
θ = ωt
mg cos
v
∴ vx at t =
2
mg
3v 3vt Sliding condition = mg sinθ > mmgcosθ
vx = v + cos
2 b
⇒ tanθ > m
3V 3vt h a
∴ x = ∫ v x dt = ∫ v + cos Toppling condition = mgsinθ. > mgcosθ.
2 b 2 2
a
⇒ tanθ >
3V 3vt h
= vt + × b × sin
2 × 3V b a
If µ >
h
b 3vt
= vt + sin a
2 b tanθ > is met earlier than tanθ > m
h
ωb ∴ Topples before sliding
y= ∫ v y dt = ∫ – 2
sin (ωt)
a
If µ <
+ωb b 3vt h
= cos (ωt) = cos
2×ω 2 b
It will slide before toppling
7 . 1 1 0 | Rotational Mechanics
d mR
Sol 20: (B, C)
Angular momentum = mvd = mgtd m
dL
Torque of gravitational force = = mgd
dt
Kinetic energy of the body
Moment of inertia = m(d2 + h2)
1 1 1
1 = mv2 + mv2 + Iω2
where h = H0 – gt2 2 2 2
2
v gt 1 2 4 ∴
Angular velocity = = = 1 + . mv2 = mv2 ( v = Rω)
d d 2 3 3
→ → → ∴ 2
Sol 18: (A, B, C) T = A × L ( I= mR2 only hollow sphere
3
→ ∴
Non-viscous liquid )
dL → →
⇒ = A×L
dt Angular momentum about any point on ground
→ 2 8
dL → = 2mRv + mR2ω = mRv
∴ ⊥ L 3 3
dt
→ →
Components of L on A remain unchanged because Sol 21: (B, C) A
→ R
if L component changes the L.H.S changes while w
R.H.S remains unchanged which is a contradiction. If
magnitude of L changes with time, thin L.H.S and R.H.S
vary differently with time which is a contradiction. B v
→
→
L
Suppose L = (x.t) Since the cylinder does not slip
→
|L| At point B velocity = 0
→ →
→ → → →
dL xL → →
A× L ⇒ − V + V cm + Rω = 0
Then = while A × L = xt
dt → → →
|L| |L| ⇒ V cm = – (v – Rw) î
At point A, velocity = 0
Sol 19: (B, C) A
⇒ v = Rω
→
⇒ V cm = 0
x
Sol 22: (B, C, D) To the right of B, angular acceleration
will disappear but linear acceleration will increase since
no friction is present angular velocity attained by disc
m
after time T is
Linear momentum is not conserved because of hinge
force angular momentum about A is conserved since ω = aT
torque at A is zero. 1
and 2π = aT2
2
P hysi cs | 7.111
3
Sol 26: (A, B, D)
v
4 h w
I
A f = w = mg
I = I1 + I3 (Perpendicular axes theorem)
L = mvh (Angular momentum)
Also I1 = I3 (by symmetry)
µmg
I acceleration = – = – mg
⇒ = I1 = I3 m
2
Vt = v – mgt
I = I2 + I4 (perpendicular axis theorem)
Lt = m(v – mgt)h
Also I2 = I4 (by symmetry)
dL t
I = T = – mmgh
⇒ = I2 = I4 dt
2
Sol 27: (A, C, D) If Re spreads or curls up his hands,
Sol 25: (B, C) Option A is incorrect, since the statement moment of inertia changes, accordingly angular
indicates a force body system as below. velocity changes too.
If I ω = Constant, it cant keep
1 2
F1 F2 I ω the same, rotational kinetic energy would also
2
change.
F3 F1
u
w
fpseudo=ma
Rw 30°
120° f
P
u In frame of plank,
Fpseudo – f = ma1
Velocity of P is
f
a1 = a – where a is acceleration of plank
→ u 3u ˆ m
V = u î + – ˆi + j
2 2 F–f
a=
M
→
u 3u ˆ
⇒ V = î + j Total K.E. of system = work done by force F
2 2 ∴
( no other external forces is doing work)
⇒V=u
Work done on sphere = work done by friction + work
If CR is horizontal done by pseudo force = change in K.E.
→
V = uiˆ + ujˆ
Sol 33: (A, B, C)
V= 2u A
2v
About O, VA = V + Rω = 2V
→ → → VB = V – Rω = 0
L = m( r × v ) gives angular momentum in direction
perpendicular to length of thread and velocity. The 1 3mRV
L about B = mvR + mR2ω = clockwise
vertical component never changes direction. 2 2
1 mRV
L about A = – mvR + mR2ω = anti-clockwise
Sol 30: (A, C) 2 2
>v P
r v
o o
30 30
A cylinder rolling down with incline may or may not
w
<v
attain pure rolling. It depends on length of the incline
M 4M
Sol 44: (D) fy ρ= =
1 2 2
fx 4
dm(2x)2
dI2 = + dm(y)2
12
L
f
m2
for rod, parallel axis theorem
12
/2
y2 ∴
⇒ ∫ dI2 = ∫ + y 2 (2y)ρ dy ( y = x)
Fx = F (force equilibrium in x-direction ) 3
0
∴ Assertion is false /2 /2
8ρ 3 8ρ y 4
While reason is true since ⇒ ∫ dI1 = I2 =
3 ∫ y .dy = .
3 4
0 0
F
T = Iα = F.x ⇒ α = .x 4
I 2ρ ML2
= =
3 16 6
Sol 45: (B) Statement-I is true, which is the condition
for pure rolling
Sol 48: (A) dIx = (dm)(y2)
Statement-II is also correct by the definition of center of
/2
mass but II is not correct explanation of I. 3
⇒ ∫ dIx = ∫ 2ρy dy
0
Sol 46: (D) Statement-I is false, because a body can roll if /2
y4 8M 4 M2
we throw it with property determined linear and angular ⇒ Ix = 2ρ = . =
velocities. 4 0 2 64 8
Statement-II is true by definition of pure rolling
Sol 49: (C) Moment of inertia about base is
Comprehension Type 2
L
dI = dm – y
Sol 47: (C) 2
y L /2 2
L
45° 45°
⇒ ∫ dI = ∫ – y (2ρy) dy
2
0
M L/2
L
⇒ I = 2ρ ∫ y 2 – y . dy
0 2
45°
x
P hysi cs | 7.115
L y3 y 4
L /2 So 55: (D)
⇒ I = 2ρ . –
2 3 4
0 F
1 1 4 – 3 ML2 C
⇒ I = 2ρL4 48 – 64 = 8ML2 64 × 3 =
24
→ → →
Sol 51: (B) d L = dm ( r × v )
pseudo
force = Fs
dm 1
= ma f
y
By basic FBD’s we can understand that friction acts in
r forward direction
v x
∴ Option B is correct
L
z And the torque is acting horizontally, since the
horizontal component of angular momentum is only
dr changing.
r
dr
F
f
Let dM be the mass small ring as shown
Friction reduces linear acceleration and increases
angular velocity M 2Mrdr
= dM = (2πr)dr
π(4R)2 − π(3R)2 7R 2
Sol 54: (A) Same as previous
G dM
dVP = −
16R 2 + r 2
7 . 1 1 6 | Rotational Mechanics
2GM
∴W =+ (4 2 − 5) Alternate The relation between I AB and ICD should
7R be true for all values of Nθ
At θ = 0, ICD = I AB
2 1 2
Sol 2: (A) =MR 2 Mr + Mr 2 Similarly, at θ = π /2, ICD = I AB
5 2
(By symmetry)
2 3
Or MR 2 = Mr 2 Keeping these things in mind, only option (a) is correct.
5 2
2
∴r = R Sol 6: (D) In case of pure rolling,
15
mgsin θ
f= (Upwards)
Sol 3: (B) Condition of sliding is mR 2
1+
ms sin θ > µ mg cos θ or tan θ > µ I
or tan θ > 3 … (i) ∴ f ∝ sin θ
Condition of toppling is Therefore, as θ decreases force of friction will also
decrease.
N
f Sol 7: (A) On smooth part BC, due to zero torque,
angular velocity and hence the rotational kinetic
O
mg energy remains constant. While moving from B to C
sin
mg cos translational kinetic energy converts into gravitational
potential energy.
Sol 5: (A) A’B’ ⊥ AB and C’D’ ⊥ CD Velocity of any point on the disc,, where r is the distance
of point from O.
From symmetry IAB = IA`B` and ICD = IC`D` From
theorem of perpendicular axes, rQ > rC > rP
P hysi cs | 7.117
Paragraph 2
P 2kx − f fR
∴ =R
M 1 MR 2
O 2
Solving this equation, we get
∴ v Q > v C> v P
a
Paragraph 1
1 1
Sol 11: (C) I(2ω)2 =kx12 …(i) 2kx
2 2
1 1
(2I)(ω)2 =kx22 ….. (ii)
2 2 f
x1 2kx
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), we have = 2 f=
x2 3
2kx 4kx
Sol 12: (A) Let ω' be the common velocity. Then from ∴ | Fnet=| 2kx − f= 2kx − =
3 3
conservation of angular momentum, we have
This is opposite to displacement.
(I + 2I)ω'= I(2ω) + 2I(ω)
4kx
∴ Fnet = −
4 3
ω' = ω
3
From the equation, 4kx
Sol 16: (D) Fnet = − x
Angular impulse = change in angular momentum, for 3
any of the disc, we have F 4k
∴ a = net = − 2
x = −ω x
4 2Iω M 3M
τ.t = I(2ω) − I ω =
3 3
4k
2Iω ∴ ω=
∴ τ= 3M
3t
Sol 17: (C) In case of pure rolling mechanical energy
Sol 13: (B) Loss of kinetic energy = Ki − K f will remains conserved.
2 2
1 1 1 4 1 1 11 v 1 2
= I(2ω)2 + (2I)(ω)2 − (3I) ω = Iω2 ∴ Mv 20 + MR 2 0 =
2 kxmax
2 2 2 3 3 2 22 R 2
2
3v 2 3M
1 2 1 v 1 ∴ xmax = v
Sol 14: (D) mv + I =
mg ∴ I =mR 2 4k 0
2 2 R 4g 2
2kx
∴ Body is disc. As f =
3
2kx 2k 3M
µMg = max =
∴ Fmax = v
3 3 4k 0
3M
∴ v 0 = µg
k
7 . 1 1 8 | Rotational Mechanics
mR 2 5mR 2
v ⇒ 2mR 2 + 4mR 2 − +
x 8 4
x=vt
11 37
⇒ 6mR 2 − mR 2 ⇒ mR 2
I + m vt 2 ω
L( t ) =
( ) 8 8
IP 37 8
dL t = × ≈3
= 2mv 2 t ω IO 8 13
dt
Torque
= τ (2mv ω) t
2
Sol 21: (A)
P
P Q = t
= t
R sin R sin
L‘P LP
R R
R cos R cos
L0= r0 × p 2 ωR sin ( ω t )
So, v r =
At t T=
= / 2, v r 0
L0 is always directed along the axis & its magnitude is
constant. So two half cycles will take place.
O P
2R
t R sin t
Let mass of original disc = m
m m
The mass of disc removed = × πR 2 =
π 4R( ) 2 4 Rt
According to problem particle is to land on disc.
So M.O.I of remaining section about axis passing
If one consider a time ‘t’ then x component of disc is
m ( 2R )
2
m R2 m
through “O” IO = − + R2 Rωt
2 4 ( 2 ) 4 R sin ωt < R ω t
Sol 23: (A) In both the cases, the instantaneous axis 50 0.4 2
50 ( 0.4 ) ( )
2
will be along z-axis i.e. along vertical direction. + 4 ( 6.25 ) ( 0.2 ) ω
2
× 10
=
2 2
Sol 24: (D) w.r.t. centre of mass only pure rotation of
disc will be seen. So in both the cases, angular speed ω =8rad / sec
about instantaneous axis will be " ω " .
ω ω 11 ˆ 3 mg
= 3Rω ˆi + 3 Rkˆ − Riˆ= Rω i + Rω kˆ Solving N2 =
4 4 4 4 1 + µ1 µ2
µ2 mg
N1 =
Sol 26: (D) 1 + µ1 µ2
MR 2
Sol 27: (8) Conservation of angular momentum about I=
2
vertical axis of disc
α =2
ω = ω0 + α t
ω =2 rad / s
Li = L f 3
N = mg
2
0 = I ω+ 2mv (r / 2 ) ; comparing magnitude
∴ω =4 mg 16 16 3
fr
= = =
3 3 3
Sol 31: (7) Kinetic energy of a pure rolling disc having
Torque balance (about A)
1 1 mR 2 v 2 3
velocity of centre of mass v =+mv 2 = mv 2 h L
2 2 2 R 2 4 N× mg × sin30°
=
cos 30° 2
So,
3 2 2h L
(30 ) 34 m ( v 2 ) + mg ( 27 )=
m ( 3 ) + mg= mg × = mg ×
2 2
∴ v2 7 m / s 3 4
4 3
h 3 3
Sol 32: (D) Using conservation of angular momentum =
L 16
mR 2 ω
8 ω m 9R 2 8 ω m 2 8 ω
= mR 2 × + × × + ×x × Sol 35: (A, B, D)
9 8 25 9 8 9
d r (t)
4R
⇒x = dv
v= = 3 α t2 ˆi + 2 β t ˆj ,a = = 6 α t ˆi + 2 β ˆj
5 dt dt
2
Sol 33: I = ∫ ρ 4 πr 2 r 2 dr
At t = 1,=
v (10 ˆi + 10 ˆj) ms −1
3
a 20 ˆi + 10 ˆj ms−2
=
∫ (r ) (r
)(r ) dr
2 2
IA ∝
10 ˆ ˆ
=r i +5 j m
IB ∝ ∫ (r )(r )(r ) dr
5 2 2 3
5 ˆ
IB 6 L0 =
r × mv =
− k N m s
∴ = 3
I A 10
dv
(
F m = 2 ˆi + ˆj N
=
dt
)
Sol 34: (D) Force balance
20 ˆ
τ = r × F = r × ma = − k N m
3
o
N sin 30
N cos 30o
ωa
Sol 36: (A, D) ωz = cos θ = ω /5
30 o
B
30o c
N
mg A
fr
PHYSICS
FOR JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
SECOND
EDITION
Exhaustive Theory
(Now Revised)
Formula Sheet
9000+ Problems
based on latest JEE pattern
1. INTRODUCTION
There are so many examples of oscillatory or vibrational motion in our world. E.g. the vibrations of strings in a
guitar or a sitar, the vibrations in the speakers of a music system, the to and fro motion of a pendulum, vibration
in a suspension bridge as a vehicle passes on it, the oscillations in a tall building during an earthquake etc. Simple
harmonic motion (SHM) is a type of oscillatory or vibrational motion. Every kind of oscillation or vibration of
a particle or a system is not necessarily simple harmonic. The particle executing SHM like any other oscillatory
motion has a variable acceleration, but this variation is different in different kinds of oscillations. The study of
SHM is very useful and forms an important tool in understanding the characteristics of sound and light waves and
alternating currents. Any oscillatory motion which is not simple harmonic can be expressed as a superposition of
several simple harmonic motions of different frequencies.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
All Oscillatory motions are periodic but all Periodic motions need not be oscillatory.
A body experiencing force F = −k(x − a)n is in Oscillatory motion only if n is odd and its mean position is
x=a. As, if n is odd only then we would have restoring force.
Vaibhav Krishan (JEE 2009, AIR 22)
2π 2π
f(t) = sin t and g(t) = cos t
T T
Here T is the time period of the periodic motion. We shall see that if the variable t is changed to t + T, the same
function results.
2π 2πt 2πt
f(t
= + T) sin (t=+ T) sin 2π sin
+= ∴ f(t + T) =
f(t)
T T T
Similarly, g(t + T) =
g(t)
It can be easily verified that: f(t + nT) =
f(t) and g(t + nT) =
g(t)
where n = 1,2,3,……..
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
These functions could be used to represent periodic motion i.e. Periodic functions represent periodic
motion
T is the period of the above function.
To find periodicity of summation of two or more periodic functions the periodicity would be the L.C.M of
the periodicities of the each function
Vaibhav Gupta (JEE 2009, AIR 54)
Illustration 1: Find the period of the function, y= sin ωt + sin2ωt + sin3ωt (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The function with least angular frequency will have highest time period.
The given function can be written as, y = y1 + y 2 + y 3
2π 2π π
Here y=
1 sin ωt , T1 = =
y 2 sin2ωt , =
T2 = , and =
y 3 sin3ωt
ω 2ω ω
2π
T3 = ∴ T1 = 2T2 and T1 = 3T3
3ω
2π
So, the time period of the given function is T1 or .
ω
2π
Because in time T = , first function completes one oscillation, the second function two oscillations and the third,
three. ω
d2 x K d2 x
The differential equation of a simple harmonic motion is given by, 0 or
+ x = + ω2 x = 0
dt2 m
dt 2
K acceleration
Where=
ω =
m displacement
The time period T, to complete one complete cycle by a body undergoing simple harmonic motion is given by
2π acceleration m
T= 2π
= 2π
=
ω displacement K
∴ v = ω a2 − y 2 … (ii)
d2 y
Differentiating (ii), the acceleration = = −aω2 sin ( ωt ± φ )
2
dt
d2 y 2
∴ = −ω y
dt2
8 . 4 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
d2 y acceleration
It represents the equation of simple harmonic motion=
where ω 2 y
=
dt displacement
displacement
Time period, T = 2π ω = 2π
acceleration
y2 A2 − y 2
or v =Aω 1 − or v = Aω or v = ω A2 − y 2
A2 A2 Y’
2 Figure 8.2: Relation between v and w.
V
The centripetal acceleration of the particle at P can be resolved
A
2
Y V cos
A
V2
into two rectangular components − cos θ Perpendicular to YOY’ 2
A N
P V sin
A
V2 V2 y
and sin θ anti-parallel to YOY’ Acceleration of N =
− sin θ
A A X’
O
X
V2
2
or Acceleration = −ω2 y Y’
Figure 8.3: Direction of centripetal
acceleration of particle
4.2 Time Period or Periodic Time of SHM
It is the smallest interval of time at which the details of motion repeat. It is generally represented by T.
t+T 2πt
' x'at (=
t + T ) A cos 2π + φ0 A cos
= + 2π + φ0 ... (i)
T T
It is clear from here that the details of motion repeat after time T. Time period may also be defined as the time
taken by the oscillating particle to complete one oscillation. It is equal to the time taken by the reference particle to
complete one revolution. In one revolution, the angle traversed by the reference particle is 2π radian and T is the
2π 2π
time taken. If ω be the uniform angular velocity of the reference particle, then ω = or T =
T ω
4.3 Frequency
It is the number of oscillations (or vibrations) completed per unit time. It is denoted by f. In time T second, one
vibration is completed.
1 1
In 1 second, vibrations are completed or f = or fT = 1
T T
2π 1
Also, ω = = 2π × = 2πf So, equation (i) may also be written as under
T T
=x A cos ( 2πft + φ0 ) … (ii)
P hysics | 8.5
4.5 Phase
Phase of a vibrating particle at any instant is the state of the vibrating particle regarding its displacement and
direction of vibration at that particular instant.
The argument of the cosine in equation
= x A cos ( ωt + φ0 ) gives the phase of oscillation at time t.
t
It is denoted by φ . ∴ φ = 2π + φ0 or φ = ωt + φ0
T
It is clear that phase φ is a function of time t. The phase of a vibrating particle can be expressed in terms of fraction
of the time period that has elapsed since the vibrating particle left its initial position in the positive direction. Again,
2πt 2πt
φ − φ0 = ωt = . So, the phase change in time t is . The phase change in T second will be 2π which actually
T T
means a ‘no change in phase’. Thus, time period may also be defined as the time interval during which the phase
of the vibrating particle changes by 2π .
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
x
The phase difference between acceleration and
displacement is 180°. In SHM phase difference between +A
velocity and acceleration is π 2 and velocity and
displacement is π 2 . t
ellipse.
+A
Max velocity at y = 0 i.e. at mean position and t
2
Vmax = Aω ; a = −ω y -A
dx
V= A cos t
Graph between acceleration and displacement of a dt
2 dx
- A V= 2
dt - A sin t
(c)
Figure 8.4
Illustration 2: A particle executes simple harmonic motion about the point x = 0 . At time t = 0 it has displacement
x = 2 cm and zero velocity. If the frequency of motion is 0.25 s−1 , find (a) the period, (b) angular frequency, (c) the
amplitude, (d) maximum speed, (e) the displacement at t = 3s and (f) the velocity at t = 3s . (JEE MAIN)
π π
Now, at t = 3s
= x 2sin × 3 += 0
2 2
(f) Velocity at x = 0 is vmax i.e.,3.14 cm/s.
Illustration 3: Two particles move parallel to x-axis about the origin with the same amplitude and frequency. At a
A
certain instant, they are found at distance from the origin on opposite sides but their velocities are found to be
3
in the same direction. What is the phase difference between the two? (JEE ADVANCED)
1 1 1 1
From Eq.(iv), sin ωt cos φ + cos ωt sin φ = − ; cos φ + 1 − sin φ = −
3 3 9 3
7 7
Solving this equation, we get or cos φ = −1, ; φ = π or cos−1
9 9
Differentiating Eqs. (i) and (ii), we obtain; v1 =Aω cos ωt and v 2 = Aω cos ( ωt + φ )
If we put φ = π , we find v1 and v 2 are of opposite signs. Hence, φ = π is not acceptable.
7
φ =cos−1
9
P hysics | 8.7
( )
released? Take g = 9.8m / s2 . (JEE ADVANCED)
Figure 8.5
k
Sol: ω = where M is the total mass attached to the spring. The maximum restoring force on the blocks will be
M
at the extreme position. The limiting friction on mass m should be greater than or equal to the maximum restoring
force required for mass m.
( 0.75) × 600 − 6
2
m+6 m m+6
(a) T = 2π T = 2π ∴ 0.75= 2π= ;m = 2.55kg
600 k 600
( 2π )
2
(b) Maximum acceleration of SHM is amax = ω2 A ( A = amplitude )
i.e., maximum force on mass ‘m’ is mω2 A which is being provided by the force of friction between the mass
2 2
ω2 A 2π A 2π 0.05
and the cart. Therefore, µsmg ≥ mω A or µs ≥
2
or µs ≥ or µs ≥ ( A = 50mm)
g T g 0.75 9.8
or µs ≥ 0.358 . Thus, the minimum value of µs should be 0.358.
5. ENERGY IN SHM
The displacement and the velocity of a particle executing a simple harmonic motion are given by
1 2 1 1
U= kx and k= mω2 Therefore=
U mω2 x2 = mω2 A2 sin2 ( ωt + δ ) , and the kinetic energy at time t
2 2 2
1 1
is K = mv 2 = mA2 ω2 cos2 (ωt + δ)
2 2
=
1
2 ( ) 1 mω2 A2
mω2 A2 sin2 ( ωt + δ ) + cos2 ( ωt + δ )=
2
Average value of P.E. and K.E
1 1
U
=
2
mω2 x=
2
2
mω2 A2 sin2 ( ωt + φ ) {sinceat time=
t, x A sin ( ωt + φ ) }
The average value of P.E. of complete vibration is given by
T T T
1 1 1 mω2 A2 1
Uaverage
=
T0∫
= Udt ∫
T02
mω2 2
A sin2
( ω t + =
φ ) 4T 0 ∫ 2sin2 ( ωt + φ ) dt
=
4
mω2 A2
Because the average value of sine square or cosine square function for the complete cycle is 0.
2 2
1 dx 1 d
Now, KE at x is given
= by K.E. m
=
2 dt
m
2 dt
{
A sin ( ωt + φ ) }= 1
2
mω2 A2 cos2 ( ωt + φ )
8 . 8 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
T
1 1 2 2
mω A cos2 ( ωt + φ ) dt
T ∫0 2
The average value of K.E. for complete cycle K.E.average
=
T
mω2 A2 mω2 A2 1
=
4T ∫ {1 + cos2 ( ωt + φ )} dt
=
4T
.=
T
4
mω2 A2
0
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Thus average values of K.E. and P.E. of harmonic oscillator are equal to half of the total energy.
The total mechanical energy is constant but the kinetic energy and potential energy of the particle are
oscillating
E,U,K
E
U= 1 kx
2
E= 1 kA
2
2 2
Energy
k(t)+U(t)
u(t)
K= 1 k(x -x )
2 2
k(t)
2 t
O (1/2) T T
x Variation of energy w.r.t time
-A +A
Figure 8.6
Graph for Energy of SHM: Figure 8.6 shows the variation of total energy (E), Potential energy (U) and
kinetic energy (K) with Displacement (x).
Chinmay S Purandare (JEE 2012, AIR 698)
At a glance
2.
dx v = −Aω sin ( ωt + φ ) v varies between + Aω and − Aω
Velocity-time V =
dt
3.
Acceleration-time a =
dv a = −Aω2 cos ( ωt + φ ) a varies between + Aω2 and − Aω2
dt
4.
1 1 1
Kinetic energy-time K = mv 2 =K mA2 ω2 sin2 ( ωt + φ ) K varies between 0 and mA2 ω2
2 2 2
5.
1 1 1
Potential energy-time =
U mω2 x2 K
= mω2 A2 cos2 ( ωt + φ ) U varies between mA2 ω2 and 0
2 2 2
6. E is constant
1
(
Total energy-time E= K + U ) E
=
2
mω2 A2
P hysics | 8.9
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
At mean position → K is the maximum and U is the minimum (it may be zero also, but it is not necessarily
zero). At extreme positions → K is zero and U is the maximum.
U(J) U(J) U(J)
Figure 8.7
Here, U is in joules and x in meters. Total mechanical energy of the particle is 36J. (JEE MAIN)
(a) State whether the motion of the particle is simple harmonic or not.
(b) Find the mean position.
(c) Find the maximum kinetic energy of the particle.
Sol: At the mean position the kinetic energy is the maximum and potential energy is the minimum. The sum of
kinetic energy and potential energy is constant throughout the SHM, equal to the total mechanical energy.
dU
(a) F =
− −2 ( x − 2 )
=
dx
8 . 1 0 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
Illustration 6: A block with mass M attached to a horizontal spring with force constant k is moving with simple
harmonic motion having amplitude A1 . At the instant when the block passes through its equilibrium position a
lump of putty with mass m is dropped vertically on the block from a very small height and sticks to it.
(JEE ADVANCED)
(a) Find the new amplitude and period.
(b) Repeat part (a) for the case in which the putty is dropped on the block when it is at one end of its path.
Sol: Sticking of putty constitutes an inelastic collision. Kinetic energy at equilibrium position converts into potential
1 1
energy at extreme position, mv 2 = kA2 .
2 2
1
(a) Before the lump of putty is dropped the total mechanical energy of the block and spring is E1 = kA12 . Since,
2
the block is at the equilibrium position, U = 0 , and the energy is purely kinetic. Let v1 be the speed of the block at
k
the equilibrium position, we have v1 = A
M 1
During the process momentum of the system in horizontal direction is conserved. Let v 2 be the speed of the
M
combined mass, then (M + m ) v 2 =
Mv1 ; v 2 =
M+m 1
v
1 2 1
Now, let A2 be the amplitude afterwards. Then,=
E2 kA
=
2 2 2
(M + m) v 22
M
Substituting the proper values, we have A2 = A1
M+m
M+m
Note: E2 < E1 , as some energy is lost into heating up the block and putty. Further, T2 = 2π
k
(b) When the putty drops on the block, the block is instantaneously at rest. All the mechanical energy is stored in
the spring as potential energy. Again the momentum in horizontal direction is conserved during the process, but
now it is zero just before and after putty is dropped. So, in this case, adding the extra mass of the putty has no
effect on the mechanical energy, i.e.,
1 2 M+m
E=2 E=
1 kA and the amplitude is still A1 . Thus, A2 = A1 and T2 = 2π
2 1 k
a α 2π a α
Step 6: Finally, ω = or or = or
x θ T x θ
x θ
∴ T = 2π or 2π
a α
Energy Method: Repeat step 1 and step 2 as in method 1. Find the total mechanical energy (E) in the displaced
dE
position. Since, mechanical energy in SHM remains constant. = 0 By differentiating the energy equation with
dt
dx dθ dv dω
respect to time and substituting = v, = ω, = a , and = α we come to step 5. The remaining procedure
dt dt dt dt
is same.
2
1 1 1 V
k ( x + x0 ) + mA v 2 + mB + mA ghA − mB ghB
2
E=
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 x
k ( x + x0 ) + mv 2 + mv 2 + mgx sin θ − mg
2
or
= E
2 2 8 2
1 5 x
k ( x + x0 ) + mv 2 + mgx sin θ − mg
2
or
= E
2 8 2
dE dx 5 dv dx mg dx
Since, E is constant, = 0 or 0 =k ( x + x0 ) + mv + mg(sin θ) −
dt dt 4 dt dt 2 dt
dx dv mg
Substituting, = v ; = a and kx0 + mgsin θ = [From Eqs. (i) and (ii)]
dt dt 2
5
We get, ma = −kx Since, a ∝ −x
4
x 5m 2π 4k
Motion is simple harmonic, time period of which is, T =
2π 2π
= ∴ =
ω =
a 4k T 5m
7. SIMPLE PENDULUM
It is an example of angular simple harmonic motion. Let’s calculate its time period. Let us
suppose that a bob of mass m is executing SHM (see Fig. 8.9). The length of the pendulum
is , which is the distant between the point of oscillation and the center of mass of the bob.
Torque acting on the bob about the point O.
=Γ mg sin θ (And for small θ , sin θ θ )
mg mg
Γ mgθ ⇒ Iα = −mgθ ⇒ α = −
⇒= θ
I
mg g Figure 8.9:
where α is angular acceleration =− θ ; α=− θ ... (i) Oscillations of
2
m
The equation of SHM is α = −ω2 θ ... (ii) simple Pendulum
g g 2π g
Comparing (i) and (ii), we get ω2 = ; ω = ⇒ = ; T = 2π
T g
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Pendulum in a lift descending with acceleration “a”, T = 2π
( g − a)
Pendulum in a lift ascending with acceleration “a”, T = 2π
( g + a)
Pendulum suspended in a train accelerated with ‘’a” uniformly in horizontal direction T = 2π
1
(a
2
+ g2 ) 2
P hysi cs | 8.13
Pendulum suspended in car taking turn with velocity v in a circular path of radius r, T = 2π 1
2 2 2
v + g2
r
Note: If the pendulum is suspended in vacuum, then the time period of the pendulum decreases.
Illustration 8: A simple pendulum consists of a small sphere of mass m suspended by a thread of length . The
sphere carries a positive charge q. The pendulum is placed in a uniform electric field of strength E directed vertically
upwards. With what period will pendulum oscillate if the electrostatic force acting on the sphere is less than the
gravitational force? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The electrostatic force is acting opposite to the weight of the block. So the effective value of acceleration due
to gravity will be less than the actual value of g.
Fe=qE
The two forces acting on the bob are shown in Fig 8.10.
w − Fe mg − qE qE
geff in this case will be or geff= = g−
m m m
w=mg
∴ T = 2π = 2π
geff qE
g− Figure 8.10
m
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
In case of a pendulum clock, time is lost if T increase and gained if T decreases. Time lost or gained in
time t is given by.
∆Τ
∆t = t e.g., if Τ= 2s, Τ=' 3s, then ∆Τ= 1s
Τ'
1
∴ Time lost by the clock in 1 hr. ∆t = × 3600 = 1200s
3
Second pendulum is a with its time period precisely 2 seconds
Vaibhav Gupta (JEE 2009, AIR 54)
Illustration 9: A simple pendulum of length l is suspended from the ceiling of a cart which is sliding without friction
on an inclined plane of inclination θ . What will be the time period of the pendulum? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The cart accelerates down the plane with acceleration a = g sinθ.
geff= g − a= g2 + 2g2 sin θ cos(90o + θ) + g2sin2 θ= gcos θ
→ →
Here, point of suspension has acceleration.
= a gsin θ (down the Plane). Further, g can be resolved into two
components g sin θ (along the plane) and g cos θ (perpendicular to plane)
→ → →
g − a = g cos θ
∴ g eff =
in os
(perpendicular to plane) sin
gs gc
g
a=
∴ Τ = 2π = 2π
→ gcos θ
| g eff | Figure 8.11
8 . 1 4 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
Note: If θ = 0° , Τ = 2π which is quiet obvious.
g
8. PHYSICAL PENDULUM
Any rigid body mounted so that it can swing in a vertical plane about some P
axis passing through it is called a physical pendulum (see Fig. 8.12).
A body of irregular shape is pivoted about a horizontal frictionless axis
through P and displaced from the equilibrium position by an angle θ . (The d d
equilibrium position is that in which the center of mass C of the body lies C
vertically below P).
The distance from the pivot to the center of mass is d. The moment of inertia
of the body about an axis through the pivot is I and the mass of the body is
M. The restoring torque about the point P, mg
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
It may be necessary to use parallel axis theorem to find Moment of Inertia about the pivoted axis
=I IG + ml2
Yashwanth Sandupatla (JEE 2012, AIR 821)
9. TORSIONAL PENDULUM
In torsional pendulum, an extended body is suspended by a light thread
or a wire (see Fig. 8.13). The body is rotated through an angle about the
wire as the axis of rotation. The wire remains vertical during this motion
but a twist is produced in the wire. The lower end of the wire is rotated
through an angle with the body but the upper end remains fixed with the
support. Thus, a twist θ is produced. The twisted wire exerts a restoring
torque on the body to bring it back to its original position in which the
twist θ in the wire is zero. This torque has a magnitude proportional to
the angle of twist which is equal to the angle rotated by the body. The
proportionality constant is called the torsional constant of the wire. Thus, Figure 8.13: Torsional pendulum
if the torsional constant of the wire is κ and the body is rotated through
an angle θ , the torque produced is Γ = −κθ . If I be the moment of inertia
Γ κ κ
of the body about the vertical axis, the angular acceleration is α= = − θ = −ω2 θ where ω =
Ι Ι Ι
2π Ι
Thus, the motion of the body is simple harmonic and the time period is Τ = = 2π
ω κ
P hysi cs | 8.15
Sol: This is an example of a physical pendulum. Find moment of inertia about point of
suspension and the distance of the point of suspension from the center of mass.
Ι
It is physical pendulum, the time period of which is, Τ = 2π
mgl
2mr 2 2r 2π g
∴ Τ = 2π = 2π ; ∴ Angular frequency
= ω or ω
=
mgr g t 2r
Illustration 11: Find the period of small oscillations of a uniform rod with length l, pivoted at one O
end. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: This is an example of a physical pendulum. Find moment of inertia about point of suspension
and the distance of the point of suspension from the center of gravity.
I° 1 2 l
T=
2π Here, I° = ml and OG = G
mg(OG) 3 2
1 2
ml
3 2l
∴ 2π
T= or T =
2π
l 3g OG = l
(m)(g) 2
2
Figure 8.15
Illustration 12: A uniform disc of radius 5.0 cm and mass 200 g is fixed at its center to a metal wire, the other end
of which is fixed with a clamp. The hanging disc is rotated about the wire through angle and is released. If the disc
makes torsional oscillations with time period 0.20 s, find the torsional constant of the wire. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: This is an example of a torsional pendulum. Find moment of inertia about the axis passing
through the wire.
The Situation is shown in Fig 8.16. The moment of inertia of the disc about the wire is
Τ = 2π
I
; K=
4 π2 I
=
(
4 π2 2.5 × 10−4 kg − m2 )= 0.25
kg − m2
K Figure 8.16
Τ2 ( 0.20s )
2
s2
8 . 1 6 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
F = −kx where
wherek isk,is
thethe
force constant.
force cons tant. Figure 8.17: Block of mass m
k attached to spring
=> ma = −kx ; a =−x ...(i)
m
=> a ∝ −x, ∴ Motion is SHM
k k m
=> ω2 = or ω= ; T = 2π
m m k
1 1 1 1
constant is = + +
k eff k1 k 2 k 3
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
k1
k k1 k1
m
m
m
k1
m m m
T=
2π T=
2π T=
2π
k k1 + k 2 k1 + k 2
P hysi cs | 8.17
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
k1 k1 k2
k2 m m
m m1m2
T=
2π T=
2π
k1 + k 2 k(m1 + m2 )
k1 k2 k
m m m
m m(k1 + k 2 )
T=
2π T=
2π
(k1 + k 2 ) k1k 2
k1
k1 k1 k
m m
m
k1
m(k1 + k 2 ) m
T=
2π T=
2π
k1k 2 k
Figure 8.20
Illustration 13: For the arrangement shown in Fig 8.21, the spring is initially compressed by 3 cm. When the spring
is released the block collides with the wall and rebounds to compress the spring again. (JEE ADVANCED)
1
(a) If the coefficient of restitution is , find the maximum
2 m=1 kg
compression in the spring after collision. 4
k=10 N/m
Sol: Conserve energy to find the velocity of the block. Use
equation of restitution for collision of block with the wall.
(a) Velocity of the block just before
4 cm
collision,
1
2
1 2 1 2
mv 20 + =
2
kx kx
2 0
or =
ν0 (
k 2
x − x2
m 0
) Figure 8.21
8 . 1 8 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
Here, x=
0 0.03m, x 0.01m,
= k= 10 4 Ν / m, m
= 1kg ∴ ν=
0 2 2m / s
1
After collision, ν = eν0 = 2 2 = 2m / s
2
Maximum compression in the spring
1 (2)
2
1 2 1 2 1 m
( 0.01)
2
kxm= kx + mν2 or xm= x + ν2=
2
+ m = 2.23cm
2 2 2 κ 10 4
Illustration 14: Figure 8.22 shows a system consisting of a massless pulley, a spring of force constant k and a block
of mass m. If the block is slightly displaced vertically down from its equilibrium position and released, find the
period of its vertical oscillation in case (a), (b) and (c). (JEE ADVANCED)
x m
∴ T=
2π or T =
2π
a 4k
Figure 8.25
Illustration 15: A Spring mass system is hanging from the ceiling of an elevator in equilibrium. The elevator
suddenly starts accelerating upwards with acceleration ‘a’ Find: (a) The frequency and (b) The amplitude of the
resulting SHM. (JEE MAIN)
P hysi cs | 8.19
Sol: The time period of spring mass system does not depend on g or acceleration of elevator.
m
(a) Frequency = 2π (Frequency is independent of g in spring) k
k
mg
(b) Extension in spring in equilibrium in initial = m
k
m ( g + a)
Extension in spring in equilibrium in accelerating lift = Figure 8.26
k
m(g + a) mg ma
∴ Amplitude
= − =
k k k
∴ Restoring force, F = −G
( 4 3 πy ρ) m
3
y2
Where ρ is the density of the earth. The negative sign is assigned because the force Figure 8.27: Body moving
is of attraction. along diameter of earth
F 4
Acceleration of the body, a = =− πGρ y … (i)
m 3
Now the quantity (4 / 3)πGρ is constant so that: a ∝ − y
Thus the acceleration of the body is directly proportional to the displacement y and its direction is opposite to the
displacement. Therefore, the motion of the body is simple harmonic.
3 3π 3π … (ii)
∴ Time period, Τ = 2π = or Τ =
4 πGρ Gρ Gρ
1 k
If the frictional forces are absent, b=0 so that: f = (undamped oscillations)
2π m
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Notice that amplitude of motion A0 is directly proportional to the amplitude of driving force.
GV Abhinav (JEE 2012, AIR 329)
Mathematical analysis: Most of the oscillations that occur in systems (e.g. machinery) are forced oscillations;
oscillations that are produced and sustained by an external force. The simplest driving force is one that oscillates
P hysi cs | 8.21
as a sine or a cosine. Suppose such an external force Fext is applied to an oscillator that moves along x axis such as
a block connected to a spring. We can represent the external forces as:= Fext F0 cos ωt Where F0 is the maximum
magnitude of the force and ω( = 2πf) is the angular frequency of the force. Then the equation of motion (with
damping) is ma = −kx − bV + F0 cos ωt . This equation can be written as
d2 x dx d2 x dx
m =−kx − b + F cos ωt or m +b + kx =F0 cos ωt … (i)
dt 2 dt 0 dt 2 dt
F0 m
The solution of eq. (i)=
is x A0 cos(ωt + φ) Where =
A0 … (ii)
2
(ω ) bω
2
2
− ω20 +
m
and ω0 = k / m is the frequency of undamped (b=0) oscillator i.e., natural frequency.
(iii) Resonant oscillations: When a body is maintained in a state of oscillations by a periodic force having the same
frequency as the natural frequency of the body, the oscillations are called resonant oscillations. The phenomenon
of producing resonant oscillations is called resonance.
(b) The amplitude of motion (A0) depends on the difference between the applied frequency ( ω) and natural
frequency ( ω0 ) . The amplitude is the maximum when the frequency of the driving force equals the natural
frequency i.e., when ω = ω0 . It is because the denominator in eq. (ii) is the minimum when ω = ω0 . This condition is
called resonance. When the frequency of the driving force equals ω0 , the oscillator is said to be in resonance with
the driving force.
F0 m F0 / m F0
A0 = At resonance, ω = =
ω0 and A0 =
( bω / m ) bω
2 2
( ) bω
ω2 − ω20 +
m
PROBLEM-SOLVING TACTICS
d2 x
To verify SHM see whether force is directly proportional to y or see if + ω2 x = 0 in cases when the equation is
2
dt
directly given compare with general equation to find the time period and other required answers
FORMULAE SHEET
F = –kxn
n is even - Motion of particle is not oscillatory
n is odd - Motion of particle is oscillatory.
If n = 1, F = -kx or F ∝ -x. The motion is simple harmonic.
x = 0 is called the mean position or the equilibrium position.
d2 x
Condition for SHM ∝ −x
dt2
8 . 2 2 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
F k
Acceleration, a = = − x = −ω2 x -A O A X
m m
Figure 8.30
Displacement
= x A cos ( ωt + φ ) (A is Amplitude)
phase angle
2π m
Time period of SHM T = = 2π
ω k
1 ω 1 k
Frequency ν of SHM ν= = =
T 2π 2π m
dx
Velocity of particle v = = −ωA sin ( ωt + φ )
dt
d2 x
Acceleration of particle a = = −ω2 A cos ( ωt + φ ) = −ω2 x
dt2
2. Energy in SHM:
1
Kinetic energy of particle = mω2 A2=
2
− x2
1
2
(k A2 − x2) ( )
1 2 1
Potential energy=
U kx
= mω2 x2
2 2
1 1 2
Total energy E= P.E + K.E = mω2 A2 = kA
2 2
E is constant throughout the SHM.
3. Simple pendulum: Time period T = 2π
geff
Here, is length of simple pendulum and geff= g − a where g is acceleration due to gravity and a is
acceleration of the box or cabin etc. containing the simple pendulum.
m
4. Spring-block system: Time period T = 2π
k
I
5. Physical pendulum: Time period T = 2π
mg
Here I is the moment of inertia about axis of rotation and is the distance of center of gravity from the point
of suspension.
6. Torsional Pendulum:
I
T = 2π
k
I is the moment of Inertia about axis passing through wire, k is torsional constant of wire.
P hysi cs | 8.23
k1 k1 k2 k1 k
m1 m2
k2
k1
Figure 8.31
1 1 1
Series combination = +
k k1 k 2
Parallel combination =
k k1 + k 2
8. For two blocks of masses m1 and m2 connected by a spring of constant k:
µ
Time period T = 2π
k
m 1m2
where µ = is reduced mass of the two-block system.
m 1 + m2
Solved Examples
L 1 x
T=
2π or T ∝
g g T T
h m
g' g 1 −
At a depth h below the surface,=
R
Sol: The amplitude in case of combination of two or
T'
g 1 R R more SHMs in same direction and same frequency
∴ = = = ∴ T' = T is obtained by vector addition of the amplitudes of
T g' h R −h R −h
1 − individual SHMs. The angle of each of the individual
R amplitude with the x-axis is equal to the phase constant
1 of the respective SHM.
or T' ∝ Hence Proved.
R −h Let the amplitudes of the individual motions be A each.
The resultant amplitude is also A. If the phase difference
R between the two motion is δ,
Further,
= TR /2 2= 2 2 s
R −R / 2
A= A2 + A2 + 2A.A.cos δ
Example 4: Describe the motion of the mass m shown
in figure. The walls and the block are elastic. A A 2 (1 + cos=
or = δ ) A cos δ 2
V δ 1
or cos = or δ = 2π / 3
k 2 2
m
Sol: Use the restoring force method to find the angular Sol: Use the restoring force method to find the angular
frequency. frequency.
Consider a ball of mass m placed at the middle of a Consider a tunnel dug along the diameter of the earth.
string of length l and tension T. The components of A particle of mass m is placed at a distance y from
tension T towards mean position is T cos θ . the center of the earth. There will be a gravitational
attraction of the earth experienced by this particle due
The force acting on the=
ball 2T cos θ to the mass of matter contained in a sphere of radius y.
Force acting on particle at distance y from center
2Tx
∴ ma =
−
((l / 4) + x )
2 2
F=
GM
R3
.y
x
= T F and
= cos θ GMm
((l / 4) + x )
2 2 ⇒ ma =
−
R3
.y
4 3
G× d× πR
As x is small, x2 can be neglected in the denominator. GM 3 4 πG
⇒ a =− .y = − y =− .d. y
R 3
R 3 3
2Tx 4T 2
∴a =− =− x =− ω x
m (l / 2 ) ml As the force is directly proportional to the displacement
and is directed towards the mean position, the motion
The acceleration is directly proportional to negative
is simple harmonic.
displacement x and is directed towards the mean
position. Hence the motion is SHM 4 3
⇒ ω2 = πdG. and T = 2π
2π 2π ml 3 4 πdG
T= = =π
ω ( 4T / ml) T 3π 3x3.14
= =
−11
Substituting the given values, we get dG 3
5.51x10 x6.67x10
= 5062s
= 84.4min
8 . 2 6 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
I
2π + m / ( 4k ) .
T=
k 2
r
dv 4kx
Or, =− Example 11: The moment of inertia of the disc used
dt I
2 + m in torsional pendulum about the suspension wire is
r 0.2 kg − m2 . It oscillates with a period of 2s. Another
disc is played over the first one and the time period of
P hysi cs | 8.27
Using (i),
T − mgcos
= θ 2mg ( cos θ − cos θ0 )
Sol: As another disc is placed on the first disc moment
or
= T 3mgcos θ − 2mgcos θ0 .
of inertia about the axis passing through the wire
increases and thus time period increases. Now cos θ is maximum at θ =0 and decreases as | θ |
(
increases for | θ | < 90o .)
Let the torsional constant of the wire be k. The moment Thus, the tension is maximum when θ =0, i.e., at the
of inertia of the first disc about the wire is 0.2 kg − m2 . mean position and is minimum when θ = ± θ0 , i.e., at
hence, the time period is extreme positions.
I 0.2kg − m2
2s =
2π 2π
= ... (i) …(i)
K k JEE Advanced/Boards
When the second disc having moment of inertia I1
Example 1: A simple pendulum is suspended from the
about. The wire is added, the time period is
ceiling of a car accelerating uniformly on a horizontal
0.2kg − m2 + I1 road. If the acceleration is a0 and the length of the
2.5s= 2π ...(ii) …(ii) pendulum is l, find the time period of small oscillations
0.2kg − m2
about the mean position.
2
6.25 0.2kgm − m + I1 Sol: The car accelerates with acceleration a. In the
From (i) and (ii), = .
4 0.2kg − m2 reference frame of car the effective value of acceleration
due to gravity is
This gives
= I1 0.11kg − m2 .
geff = g − a = g2 + a2
Example 12: A simple pendulum having a bob of
mass m undergoes small oscillations with amplitude
θ0 . Find the tension in the string as a function of the
angle made by the string with the vertical. When is this l
tension maximum, and when is it minimum? T
ma0 l
a0
0 +
mg x
a0
Giving tan θ = (a) What is the period of small oscillation that result
g
when the rod is rotated slightly and released?
a0
Thus, sin θ = …(iii) (b) What will be the maximum speed of the displaced
a20 + g2 end of the rod, if the amplitude of motion is θ0 ?
g
kx − mg =ma =m
3 For pure rolling to take place, v = Rw
x
∴=
4mg
=
( 4 )( 2)(10=) 0.053m ω' =Angular velocity of COM of sphere C about O
3k (3)(500 ) v Rω ω
= = =
or x = 5.3cm 4R 4R 4 ’
O
5R
(c) (i) In equilibrium when the elevator has zero dω' 1 dω α
∴ = or α' =
acceleration, the equation of motion is dt 4 dt 4
c
kx0 = mg or x0
=
mg
=
( 2)(10
=
) 0.04m
a
α = for pure rolling;
v
k 500 R
= 4cm gsin θ 5gsin θ
Where,
= a =
I + mR 2 7
x= +A
x0
2 5gsin θ
As, I = mR 2 ∴ α' =
5 28R
Mean position For small θ, sin θ = θ, being restoring in nature,
5g θ 28R
α' =− θ ∴ T =2π =2π
x= -A 28R α ' 5g
∴ Amplitude A=
x − x0
Example 5: Consider the earth as a uniform sphere of
= 5.3 − 4.0 mass M and radius R. Imagine a straight smooth tunnel
made through the earth which connects any two points
= 1.3 cm
on its surface. Show that the motion of a particle of
8 . 3 0 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
mass in along this tunnel under the action of gravitation (a) Calculate the frequency of oscillation of ball B.
would be simple harmonic. Hence, determine the time
(b) Find the speed of the ball A when A and B are at the
that a particle would take to go from one end to the
two ends of diameter PQ
other through the tunnel.
(c) What is the total energy of the system
Sol: Use the restoring force method to find the angular
frequency. Sol: Here the two balls connected by the springs are
Suppose at some instant the particle is at radial free to oscillate along the length of the springs, so the
distance r from center of earth O. Since, the particle time period will depend on the reduced mass of the
is constrained to move along the tunnel, we define two-ball system.
its position as distance x from C. Hence, equation of (a) Restoring force on A or B = k∆x + k∆x= 2k∆x.
motion of the particle is, max = Fx
Where ∆x is compression in the spring at one end?
The gravitational force on mass m at distance r is, Effective force constant = 2k
GMmr 1 2k
F= (Towards O) Frequency v =
R3 2π µ
GMmr x
Therefore, Fx = −Fsin θ = − Where µ is reduced mass of system.
R3 r
Since Fx ∝ −x , motion is simple harmonic in nature.
mm m
Further, reducedmass.
= µ =
m+m 2
GMm GM
max =
− .x or ax =
− .x
R 3
R3 1 2k 1 0.1 1
=v = = s
2π m / 2 3.14 0.1 3.14
∴ Time period of oscillation is,
(b) P and Q are equilibrium position. Balls A and B at
x R3 P and Q have only kinetic energy and it is equal the
T=
2π 2π
=
ax GM potential energy at extreme positions.
The time taken by particle to go from one end to the Potential energy at extreme position
T 1 1
other is = k(2∆x)2 + k(2∆x)2 = 4k( ∆x)2
2 2 2
T R3
∴ t= = π π
2 GM Where ∆x =Rx
6
π2kR 2 (3.14)2 x0.1x(0.06)2
Example 6: Two identical balls A and B, each of mass ⇒ P.E.= = ≈ 3.94x10 −4 J
36 36
0.1 kg are attached to two identical massless springs.
The spring mass system is constrained to move inside a When the balls A and B are at points P and Q respectively.
rigid smooth pipe bent in the form of a circle as shown
in figure. The pipe is fixed in a horizontal plane. The KE(A) + KE(B) = PE. ; 2KE(A) = P.E.
centers of the balls can move in a circle of radius 0.06 m.
Each spring has a natural length 0.06 π m and spring 1
2x mv 2 = 3.94 x10−4
constant 0.1 N/m. Initially both the balls are displaced 2
by angle π /6 radian with respect to the diameter PQ of 1
the circle and released from rest. 3.94 2
⇒v
= = x10−2 6.28x10
= −2
0.0628ms−1
0.1
JEE Main/Boards
Exercise 1
(b) Potential energy of the oscillating mass.
Q.1 A simple harmonic motion is represented by
y(t)=10 sin (20t+0.5). Write down its amplitude, angular Q.8 A trolley of mass 3.0 kg is connected to two
frequency, time period and initial phase, if displacement identical springs each of force constant 600 Nm−1
is measured in meters and time in seconds. as shown in figure. If the trolley is displaced from its
equilibrium position by 5.0 cm and released, what is the
Q.2 A particle executing SHM along a straight line has total energy stored?
a velocity of 4 ms-1, when at a distance of 3 m from its
mean position and 3 ms−1 , when at a distance of 4 m 3.0 kg
from it. Find the time it takes to travel 2.5 m from the
-1 -1
600 Nm 600 Nm
positive extremity of its oscillation.
Q.6 An 8 kg body performs SHM of amplitude a. At Q.13 What is a simple pendulum? Find an expression for
what distance from the mean position is its K.E. equal the time period and frequency of a simple pendulum.
to its P.E?
Q.14 Explain the oscillations of a loaded spring and find
−1
Q.7 A spring of force constant 1200 Nm is mounted the relations for the time period and frequency in case
on a horizontal table as shown in figure. A mass of of (i) horizontal spring (ii) vertical spring
3.0 kg is attached to the free end of the spring. Pulled
sideways to a distance of 2cm and released, what is Q.15 What is a spring factor? Find its value in case of
two springs connected in (i) series and (ii) parallel.
m
Q.16 Explain phase and phase difference, angular
frequency, displacement in periodic motion with
illustrations.
(a) The speed of the mass when the spring is compressed
by 1.0 cm? Q.17 Explain displacement, velocity, acceleration and
time period in SHMs. Find the relation between them.
8 . 3 2 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
Q.18 From the figure (a) and (b). Obtain the equation Q.26 A system of springs with their spring constants are
of simple harmonic motion of the y-projection of the as shown in figure . What is the frequency of oscillations
radius vector of the revolving particle P in each case. of the mass m?
y
P(t=0) P(t=0)
T=3s
o
k1
o
60 90
x (a) x (b)
2cm 3cm
T=1min
k2
(A) a/8 (B) a/2 2 (C) a/2 (D) a/ 2 Q.12 In the above question, the find amplitude of
oscillation of the block in the reference frame of point
Q.5 The displacement of a body executing SHM is given A of the spring.
by x A sin(2πt + π / 3). The first time from t=0 when
=
1 mv 2 1 mv 2
the velocity is maximum is (A) (B)
4 k 2 k
(A) 0.33 s (B) 0.16 s (C) 0.25 s (D) 0.5 s
mv 2 mv 2
(C) (D) 2
Q.6 A particle executes SHM of period 1.2 s. and k k
amplitude 8 cm. Find the time it takes to travel 3cm
from the positive extremely of its oscillation. Q.13 For a particle acceleration is defined as
(A) 0.28 s (B) 0.32 s (C) 0.17 s (D) 0.42 s −5xi
a= for x ≠ 0 and a =0 for x =0.
x
Q.7 A particle moves along the x-axis according to If the particle is initially at rest (a, 0) what is period of
: x = A[I + sin ωt] . What distance does it travel between? motion of the particle.
t = 0 andt = 2.5π / ω ?
(A) 4A (B) 6A (C) 5A (D) None (A) 4 2a / 5 sec. (B) 8 2a / 5 sec.
1 mv 2 mv 2
(A) (B)
4 k k
8 . 3 4 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
(A) k1 / k 2 (B) k 2 / k1 Q.7 A particle free to move along the x – axis has porential
energy by U(x)= k[1 − exp( −x2 )] for − ∞ ≤ x ≤ + ∞ Where
(C) k 2 / k1 (D) k1 / k 2 k is a positive constant of appropriate dimensions. Then
(1999)
Q.3 A highly rigid cubical block A of small mass M and (A) At points away from the origin, the particle is in
side L is fixed rigidly on to another cubical block B of unstable equilibrium
the same dimensions and of low modulus of rigidity (B) For any finite non-zero value of x, there is a force
η such that the lower face of A completely covers
directed away from the origin
the upper face of B. The lower face of B is rigidly held
on a horizontal surface. A small force F is applied (C) If its total mechanical energy is k/2, it has its
perpendicular to one of the side faces of A. After the minimum kinetic energy at the origin
force is withdrawn. Block A executes small oscillations. (D) For small displacements from x=0, the motion is
The time period of which is given by (1992) simple harmonic
Mη
(A) 2π MηL (B) 2π Q.8 The period of oscillation of simple pendulum of
L
length L suspended from the roof of the vehicle which
moves without friction, down an inclined plane of
ML M inclination α, is given by (2000)
(C) 2π (D) 2π
η ηL
L L
(A) 2π (B) 2π
gcos α gsin α
Q.4 One end of a long metallic wire of length L is tied
to the ceiling. The other end is tied to a massless spring
of spring constant k. A mass m hangs freely from the L L
(C) 2π (D) 2π
free end of the spring. The area of cross-section and the g gtan α
Young’s modulus of the wire are A and Y respectively.
If the mass is slightly pulled down and released, it will
Q.9 A particle executes simple harmonic motion
oscillate with a time period T equal to (1993)
between x= -A and x= + A. The time taken for it to go
from O to A/2 is T1 and to go from A/2 to A is T2, then
m(YA + kL
(A) 2π (m / k)1/2 (B) 2π (2001)
YAk
(C) 2π [(mYA / kL)1/2 (D) 2π [(mL / YA)1/2 (A) T1 < T2 (B) T1 > T2
1 2k 1 k
(A) (B)
k 2π M 2π M
Q a
1 6k 1 24k
P (C) (D)
2π M 2π M
(A) kA (B) kA
Q.15 The mass M shown in the figure oscillates in simple
(C) µs mg (D) Zero
harmonic motion with amplitude A. The amplitude of
the point P is (2009)
Q.12 A simple pendulum has time period T1 . The point
of suspension is now moved upward according to the
k1 P k2
relation ,(k 1m / s2 ) where y is the vertical
2 m
= y kt=
displacement.
k1 A k2A
The
The time
time period
period now
now beomes T22..
beomes T (A) (B)
k2 k1
T12
The ratio of is (Take g = 10m / s2 ) (2005) k1 A k2A
T2 2
(C) (D)
k1 + k 2 k1 + k 2
(A) 6/5 (B) 5/6 (C) 1 (D) 4/5
Q.16 A wooden block performs SHM on a frictionless
Q.13 The x-t graph of a particle undergoing simple surface with frequency v 0 . The block carries a charge
harmonic motion is shown below. The acceleration of +Q on its surface. If now a uniform electric field E is
the particle at t=4/3 s is (2009) switched-on as shown, then the SHM of the block will
x be (2011)
(cm)
1 E
0 +Q
4 8 12 t(s)
-1
(B) Of the same frequency and with the same mean Q.19 The amplitude of a damped oscillator decreases
position to0.9 times its original magnitude is 5s. In another 10s it
will decrease to α times its original magnitude, where
(C) Of changed frequency and with shifted mean
α equals. (2013)
position
(A) 0.81 (B) 0.729 (C) 0.6 (D) 0.7
(D) Of changed frequency and with the same mean
position
Q.20 For a simple pendulum, a graph is plotted
between its kinetic energy (KE) and potential energy
Q.17 A point mass is subjected to two simultaneous
(PE) against its displacement d. Which one of the
sinusoidal 3π displacements in x-direction
2A, following represents these correctly?
4
(Graphs are schematic and not drawn to scale) (2015)
2π .
x=
1 (t) A sin ω t and x=
2 (t) A sin ωt +
3
Adding a third sinusoidal displacement
(t) B sin(ωt + φ) brings the mass to a complete rest.
x3=
The values of B and φ are (2011)
6π 4π
(A) A, (B) A,
3 3
5π π
(C) 3A, (D) A,
6 3
7A A
(C) (D) 41
3 3
mbv
v
mg
0.693
(A) (B) b
b
1 2
(C) (D)
b b
P hysi cs | 8.37
JEE Advanced/Boards
a (c) What is the height above the initial level from which
the mass m was dropped?
- O x Q.8 Two identical balls A and B each of mass 0.1 kg
- are attached to two identical massless springs. The
spring mass system is constrained to move inside a
Q.5 A point particle of mass 0.1kg is executing SHM rigid smooth pipe in the form of a circle as in figure.
with amplitude of 0.1m. When the particle passes The pipe is fixed in a horizontal plane. The centers
through the mean position, its K.E. is 8 × 10−3 J. Obtain of the ball can move in a circle of radius 0.06m. Each
the equation of motion of this particle if the initial spring has a natural length 0.06π m and force constant
phase of oscillation is 45° . 0.1N/m. Initially both the balls are displaced by an
angle of θ = π / 6 radian with respect to diameter PQ of
the circle and released from rest
Q.6 One end of an ideal spring is fixed to a wall at origin
O and the axis of spring is parallel to x-axis. A block
of mass m=1 kg is attached to free end of the spring
and it is performing SHM. Equation of position of block A B
in coordinate system shown is = x 10 + 3sin10t , is in
second and x in cm. Another block of mass M=3kg, /6 /6
moving towards the origin with velocity 30cm/s collides P
O
Q
with the block performing SHM at t=0 and gets stuck
to it, calculate:
1kg 3kg
8 . 3 8 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
(a) Calculate the frequency of oscillation of the ball B. Q.14 The resulting amplitude A’ and the phase of the
vibrations δ
(b) What is the total energy of the system?
A π A
(c) Find the speed of the ball A when A and B are at the =S A cos(ωt) + cos ωt + + cos ( ωt + π )
two ends of the diameter PQ. 2 2 4
A 3π
+ cos ωt += A'cos ( ωt + δ )
Q.9 Two blocks A(2kg) and B(3kg) rest up on a smooth 8 2
horizontal surface are connected by a spring of stiffness
120 N/m. Initially the spring is unreformed. A is imparted are ____________ and ___________ respectively.
a velocity of 2m/s along the line of the spring away
from B. Find the displacement of A, t seconds later.
Q.15 A spring block (force constant k=1000N/m and
mass m=4kg) system is suspended from the ceiling
3kg 2kg
of an elevator such that block is initially at rest. The
2m/s
B A elevator begins to move upwards at t=0. Acceleration
time graph of the elevator is shown in the figure. Draw
the displacement x (from its initial position taking
Q.10 A force= F 10 x + 2 acts on a particle of mass upwards as positive) vs time graph of the block with
0.1 kg, where ‘k’ is in m and F in newton. If it is released respect to the elevator starting from t=0 to t=1 sec.
from rest at x = 0.2m , find : Take π2 = 10.
(a) Amplitude; (b) time period; (c) equation of motion.
a
(m/s ) 5
2
Q.11 Potential Energy (U) of a body of unit mass moving k k=100 n/m
in one-dimension conservative force field is given by, 0.6 a m m=4kg
U = (x2 − 4x + 3) . All units are in S.I. t(sec)
(i) Find the equilibrium position of the body.
(ii) Show that oscillations of the body about this Q.16 A particle of mass m moves in the potential energy
equilibrium position are simple harmonic motion & U shown below. Find the period of the motion when the
find its time period. particle has total energy E.
(iii) Find the amplitude of oscillations if speed of the
body at equilibrium position is 2√6 m/s.
U(X)
3m/s 10m/s Q.24 A spring mass system is hanging from the ceiling
of an elevator in equilibrium Elongation of spring is l .
A 5 2 B The elevator suddenly starts accelerating downwards
with accelerating g / 3 find
(a) Find the maximum extension of the spring. (a) The frequency and
(b) When does the first maximum compression occurs (b) The amplitude of the resulting SHM.
after start.
Q.21 An object of mass 0.2kg executes SHM along Q.3 A particle performs SHM with a period T and
the x-axis with frequency of (25 / π)Hz . At the point amplitude a. The mean velocity of the particle over the
x = 0.04m the object has KE 0.5 J and PE 0.4 J. The time interval during which it travels a distance a/2 from
amplitude of oscillation is ____________. the extreme position is
(A) a/T (B) 2a/T (C) 3a/T (D) a/2T
Q.22 A body of mass 1kg is suspended from a
weightless spring having force constant 600N/m. Q.4 Two particles are in SHM on same straight line with
Another body of mass 0.5 kg moving vertically upwards amplitude A and 2A and with same angular frequency
hits the suspended body with a velocity of 3.0m/s and ω . It is observed that when first particle is at a distance
get embedded in it. Find the frequency of oscillations
A / 2 from origin and going toward mean position,
and amplitude of motion.
other particle is at extreme position on other side of
mean position. Find phase difference between the two
Q.23 A body A of mass m1 = 1kg and a body B of mass particles
m2 = 4kg are attached to the ends of a spring. The
body a performs vertical simple harmonic oscillations (A) 45° (B) 90° (C) 135° (D) 180°
of amplitude a=1.6 cm and angular frequency ω =25
rad/s. Neglecting the mass of the spring determine Q.5 A body performs simple harmonic oscillations
the maximum and minimum values of force the along the straight line ABCDE with C as the midpoint of
system exerts on the surface on which it rests. [Take AE. Its kinetic energies at B and D are each one fourth
g = 10m / s 2 ] of its maximum value. If AE=2R, the distance between
B and D is
8 . 4 0 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
Wall
A B C D E
3R R
(A) (B)
2 2
m
(C) 3R (D) 2R
O T/4 T/2 3/4 T t (B) The block will have maximum velocity 30 5 cm / sec .
(C) The block will have maximum acceleration 15m / s2
(D) The minimum potential energy of the spring will be
zero.
(A) The velocity is maximum at t=T/2
(B) The acceleration is maximum at t=T Q.19 The figure shows a graph between velocity
(C) The force is zero at t= 3T/4 and displacement (from mean position) of a particle
performing SHM:
(D) The potential energy equals the oscillation energy
at t=T/2. v(in cm/s)
10
Q.15 The amplitude of a particle executing SHM about 2.5
O is 10 cm. Then: x
(in cm)
(A) When the K.E. is 0.64 of its max. K.E. its displacement
is 6cm from O. (A) The time period of the particle is 1.57s
(B) When the displacement is 5cm from O its K.E.is 0.75 (B) The maximum acceleration will be 40cm / s2
of its max. P.E.
(C) The velocity of particle is 2 21cm / s when it is at a
(C) Its total energy at any point is equal to its maximum distance 1 cm from the mean position.
K.E.
(D) None of these
(D) Its velocity is half the maximum velocity when its
displacement is half the maximum displacement.
Q.20 Two blocks of masses 3 kg and 6 kg rest on a
horizontal smooth surface. The 3 kg block is attached
Q.16 A particle of mass m performs SHM along a to A Spring with a force constant
straight line with frequency f and amplitude A.
m
(A) The average kinetic energy of the particle is zero.
(B) The average potential energy is mπ2f2A2 .
(C) The frequency of oscillation of kinetic energy is 2f. 2m
3kg 6kg
(D) Velocity function leads acceleration by π / 2
(B) Velocity of the combined masses immediately after Q.25 A mass of 0.2 kg is attached to the lower end of a
the collision is 5ms−1 massless spring of force-constant 200 N/m, the upper
end of which is fixed to a rigid support. Which of the
(C) Amplitude of the resulting oscillations is 2m following statements is/are true?
5 (A) In equilibrium, the spring will be stretched by 1cm.
(D) Amplitude of the resulting oscillation is m.
2
(B) If the mass is raised till the spring is in not stretched
state and then released, it will go down by 2 cm before
Q.21 A particle is executing SHM with amplitude A. moving upwards.
time period T, maximum acceleration a0 and maximum
velocity v 0. . Its starts from mean position at t-0 and at (C) The frequency of oscillation will be nearly 5 Hz.
time t, it has the displacement A/2, acceleration a and (D) If the system is taken to moon, the frequency of
velocity v then oscillation will be the same as on the earth.
(A) t=T/12 (B) a = a0 / 2
(C) v = v 0 / 2 (D) t=T/8 Q.26 The potential energy of particle of mass 0.1kg,
moving along x-axis, is given by U=5x(x-4)J where x is
in meters. It can be concluded that
Q.22 For a particle executing SHM, x=displacement
from equilibrium position, v= velocity at any instant (A) The particle is acted upon by a constant force.
and a = acceleration at any instant, then (B) The speed of the particle is maximum at x=2m
(A) v-x graph is a circle (C) The particle executes simple harmonic motion
(B) v-x graph is an ellipse (D) The period of oscillation of the particle is π /5 s
(C) a-x graph is a straight line
(D) a-v graph is an ellipse Q.27 The displacement of a particle varies according
to the relation x=3 sin 100t + cos2 50t. Which of the
following is/are correct about this motion.
Q.23 A particle starts from a point P at a distance of
A/2 from the mean position O & travels towards left as (A) The motion of the particle is not SHM
shown in the figure. If the time period of SHM, executed (B) The amplitude of the SHM of the particle is 5 units
about O is T and amplitude A then the equation of
motion of particle is: (C) The amplitude of the resultant SHM is 73 units.
O P
Q.28 The equation of motion for an oscillating particle
is given by x=3sin (4πt) + 4cos (4πt), where x is in mm
A
and t is in second
2π π 2π 5π
(A) x A sin t + =
= (B) x A sin t + (A) The motion is simple harmonic
T 6 T 6
(B) The period of oscillation is 0.5 s
2π π 2π π (C) The amplitude of oscillation is 5 mm
=(C) x A cos t += (D) x A cos t +
T 6 T 3
(D) The particle starts its motion from the equilibrium
Q.30 The two blocks shown here rest on a frictionless (B) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true and
surface. If they are pulled apart by a small distance and statement-II is NOT the correct explanation for
released at t=0, the time when statement-I
Q.31 Statement-I: A particle is moving along x-axis. (A) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true and
The resultant force F acting on it at position x is given statement-II is correct explanation for statement-I
by F=-ax-b. Where a and b are both positive constants. (B) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true and
The motion of this particle is not SHM. statement-II is NOT the correct explanation for
Statement-II: In SHM restoring force must be statement-I.
proportional to the displacement from mean position. (C) Statement-I is true, statement-II is false.
(A) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true and (D) Statement-I is false, statement-II is true.
statement-II is correct explanation for statement-I
(B) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true and statement- Q.35 Statement-I: In case of oscillatory motion the
II is NOT the correct explanation for statement-I average speed for any time interval is always greater
(C) Statement-I is true, statement-II is false. than or equal to its average velocity.
(D) Statement-I is false, statement-II is true. Statement-II: Distance travelled by a particle cannot
be less than its displacement.
Q.32 Statement-I: For a particle performing SHM, (A) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true and
its speed decreases as it goes away from the mean statement-II is correct explanation for statement-I
position. (B) Statement-I is true. statement-II is true and statement-
Statement-II: In SHM, the acceleration is always II is NOT the correct explanation for statement-I.
opposite to the velocity of the particle. (C) Statement-I is true, statement-II is false.
(A) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true and (D) Statement-I is false, statement-II is true.
statement-II is correct explanation for statement-I.
(B) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true and Statement- Comprehension Type
II is NOT the correct explanation for statement-I
Paragraph 1: When force acting on the particle is of
(C) Statement-I is true, statement-II is false.
nature F = −kx , motion of particle is SHM, Velocity at
(D) Statement-I is false, statement-II is true. extreme is zero while at mean position it is maximum. In
case of acceleration situation is just reverse. Maximum
Q.33 Statement-I: Motion of a ball bouncing elastically displacement of particle from mean position on both
in vertical direction on a smooth horizontal floor is a sides is same and is known as amplitude. Refer to figure
periodic motion but not an SHM. One kg block performs vertical harmonic oscillations
with amplitude 1.6 cm and frequency 25 rad s−1 .
Statement-II: Motion is SHM when restoring force is
proportional to displacement from mean position.
(A) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true and
statement-II is correct explanation for statement-I
8 . 4 4 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
curve (iii)
y y
O t
(d) Velocity
(C) (D)
versus phase
angle curve
O d O d /2
(iv) t
/2 3/2
Which graphs best represents the relationship obtained
when Y is
(A) (a)-(i), (b)-(ii), (c)-(iii) & (d)-(iv)
Q. 38 The total energy of the system
(B) (a)-(ii), (b)-(i), (c)-(iii) & (d)-(iv)
(A) I (B) II (C) III (D) IV
(C) (a)-(ii), (b)-(i), (c)-(iv) & (d) – (iii)
x
a constant equal to V0 for x ≥ X 0 (see figure below) O
P
(2010) 10m
V(x)
(A) 50 m / s (B) 51 m / s
V0 (C) 52 m / s (D) 53 m / s
Xn
8 . 4 6 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
Q.5 A particle of mass m is attached to one end (A) The amplitude of oscillation in the first case changes
of a mass-less spring of force constant k, lying on a
M
frictionless horizontal plane. The other end of the by a factor of , whereas in the second case it
spring is fixed. The particle starts moving horizontally m+M
from its equilibrium position at time t = 0 with an initial remains unchanged
velocity u0 . When the speed of the particle is 0.5 u0 . It
(B) The final time period of oscillation in both the cases
collides elastically with a rigid wall. After this collision,
is same
(2013)
(C) The total energy decreases in both the cases
(A) The speed of the particle when it returns to its
equilibrium position is u0 (D) The instantaneous speed at x0 of the combined
masses decreases in both the cases
(B) The time at which the particle passes through the
m Q.8 Column I describes some situations in which a small
equilibrium position for the first time is t = π .
k object moves. Column II describes some characteristics
of these motions. Match the situations in column I with
(C) The time at which the maximum compression of the the characteristics in column II. (2007)
4π m
spring occurs is t =
3 k
Column I Column II
(D) The time at which the particle passes through the (A) The object moves on the (p) The object
x-axis under a conservative executes a simple
5π m
equilibrium position for the second time is t = force in such a way that its harmonic motion.
3 k
speed and position satisfy
Q.6 Two independent harmonic oscillators of equal = v c1 c2 − x2 , where c1 and
mass are oscillating about the origin with angular
c2 are positive constants.
frequencies ω1 and ω2 and have total energies E1
and E2 , respectively. The variations of their momenta p (B) The object moves on the (q) The object does
a x-axis in such a way that its not change its
with positions x are shown in the figures. If = n2 and velocity and its displacement direction.
b
a from the origin satisfy v = −kx ,
= n , then the correct equation(s) is(are) (2015)
R where k is a positive constant.
P P (C) The object is attached to (r) The kinetic energy
Energy=E1 Energy=E2 one end of a mass-less spring of the object keeps on
of a given spring constant. decreasing.
b
x x The other end of the spring is
a R attached to the ceiling of an
elevator. Initially everything
is at rest. The elevator starts
ω2 going upwards with a constant
(A) E1 ω1 = E2 ω2 (B) = n2
ω1 acceleration α . The motion of
E1 E2 the object is observed from the
(C) ω1 ω2 =n2 (D) =
ω1 ω2 elevator during the period it
maintain this acceleration.
Q.7 A block with mass M is connected by a massless (D) The object is projected from (s) The object can
spring with stiffness constant k to a rigid wall and moves the earth’s surface vertically change its direction
without friction on a horizontal surface. The block only once.
GMe
oscillates with small amplitude A about an equilibrium upwards with a speed 2 ,
Re
position x0 . Consider two cases: (i) when the block is at
x0 ; and (ii) when the block is at =
x x0 + A . In both the where Me is the mass of the
cases, a particle with mass m (< M) is softly placed on earth and R e is the radius of
the block after which they stick to each other. Which of the earth. Neglect forces from
the following statement(s) is (are) true about the motion objects other than the earth.
after the mass m is placed on the mass M? (2016)
P hysi cs | 8.47
(
(A) The resultant amplitude is 1 + 2 a)
(B) The phase of the resultant motion relative to the
first is 90°
(C) The energy associated with the resulting motion is
(3 + 2 2 ) times the energy associated with any single (A) Restoring torque in case A=Restoring torque in
case B
motion
(B) Restoring torque in case A<Restoring torque in
(D) The resulting motion is not simple harmonic case B
(C) Angular frequency for case A>Angular frequency
Q.11 Function x = A sin2 wt + B cos2 wt + C sin wtcos wt for case B
represent SHM (2006)
(D) Angular frequency for case A<, angular frequency
(A) For any value of A, B and C (except C=0) for case B
PlancEssential Questions
JEE Main/Boards JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1 Exercise 1
Q. 7 Q.8 Q.20 Q.4 Q.6 Q.8
Q.24 Q.25 Q.18 Q.23 Q.24
Exercise 2 Exercise 2
Q.3 Q.9 Q.15 Q.1 Q.2 Q.4
Q.5 Q.9 Q.14
Previous Years' Questions
Q.15 Q.20 Q.25
Q.9 Q.10 Q.11
Q.29 Q.30 Q.42
Q.14 Q.15 Q.16
8 . 4 8 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
Answer Key
JEE Main/Boards
Exercise 1
Q.1 0.5 rad Q.2 1.048 s Q.3 0.61 rad
2πt π π
Q.18 (a) y= 2sin + (b)y= 3cos t Q.19 2π / 3rad
3 3 30
1/2
1 k1k 2 (k 3 + k 4 )
Q.26
{ }
( 2π ) (k1 + k 2 ) × (k3 + k 4 ) + k1k 2 m
Exercise 2
JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1
1 β
Q.4 Q.5 x = 0.1sin(4t + p / 4)
2π α
P hysi cs | 8.49
π
Q.12 25 2N Q.13 (a) sec, (b ) 6cm (c)2.40kgm / s.
10
1
x
−1 0.04
3 5A
Q.14 tan 2 Q.15 0.2 0.4 0.6 1.D
8 0.8 t(sec)
-0.04
1 2 1
Q.16 π m / k + 2 2E / mg2 Q.17 10 6cm, sin−1 − sec
π 3 6
17L
Q.18 (a) 25cm, (b) 3p/56 seconds Q.19 2π
18g
2
Q.20 (a)
( a)2sec,
2sec, ((b)
b) T = sec Q.21 0.06m
1/ 4
5
gg
Q.22 10πHz,
5 37
cm Q.23 60N, 40N ((aa))1T1T ==212π1π LL, ,((b)
Q.24 (a) (bb))L3L3
6
Exercise 2
Comprehension Type
Solutions
JEE Main/Boards t=
θ
×T=
60
× 2π sec
360° 360°
Exercise 1 π
t= sec
3
Sol 1: y(t) = 10 sin (20t + 0.5)
Sol 3: y = 0.4 sin (440 t + 0.61)
A = 10 m
(i) Amplitude = 0.4 m
ω = 20 rad./sec
(ii) ω = 440 rad.sec
φ = 0.5 radians
w 20 10 ω 220
f= = = hz (iii) f = , hz
2π 2π π 2π π
1 π 1 2π π
T= = sec (iv) T = = = sec
f 10 f ω 220
y (v) Initial phase = 0.61 radians
5m
=60
o
Sol 4: A = 25 cm, T = 3s
2.5m y
v
o
=30
25 12.5
o
30
o
V
12.5 30
Sol 2: V = ω A2 − y 2
4 = ω A2 − 9
60° 1
⇒t= × = sec.
3 = ω A2 − 16 360° 2
2π
T= = 2π secω = 1 sec
ω
P hysi cs | 8.51
Sol 6: m = 8 kg
a = 30 cm Kx Kx
60
k × 0.3 = 60 ⇒ k = = 200 n/m
0.3
x
m 8 2π
T = 2π ⇒ T = 2π = = 0.4 p keq = 2k = 1200 Nm-1
k 200 5
1
(a) T = 0.4 π sec. Total energy stored = kA2
2
−k 2
(b) a = x 1 1
m = × 1200 × = 1.5 Joules.
2 2
−200
a= × 0.12 = 3m/sec2
84
Sol 9: T = 2π ; T ∝ 1/2
1 2 1 g
P.E. = kx = × 200 × (0.12)2 = 1.44 J
2 2 → 0.998 l
1
K.E. = k(A2 – x2) → (0.998)1/2 T
2
T → 0.999 T
= 100 x (0.09 – 0.0144) = 7.56 J
Error in a day = 0.001 × (60 × 60 × 24) = 86.4 sec
Sol 7: k = 1200 Nm -1
2.0 cm
Sol 10:
1/3 A y
m=3.0 kg
v
k 1200
(a) w = = = 20 rad/s.
m 3
4 −1 3
v = ω A2 − x2 = 20 =
100 5 Phase Difference = θ = 2 cos-1 (1/3) = 141.05°
v = 0.35 m/s
2
Sol 11: Elevator moving up
1 2 1 1
(b) P.E. = kx = × 1200 × Frequency of seconds pendulum = f0= 0.5 Hz
2 2 100
g 3
1 geff = g + = g
= 600 × 2 2
100 × 100
1 geff 3 3
P.E. = 0.06 J f= = f = × 0.5 Hz; f = 0.61 Hz
2π 2 0 2
8 . 5 2 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
k1k 2
k= k = k1 + k2
k1 + k 2
1
V
Sol 19:
y 5/6 V
pa
A
2
r
tic
cle
le
rti 2
1
pa 3
V
6m x = 2mv = 2 ms–1
v= 3 = ω A2 − 1
o
60
3=ω A2 − 1
2=ω A2 − 4
8 . 5 4 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
9 A2 − 1 x
⇒ = 2 ⇒ 9A2 – 36 = 4 A2 – 4 10 cm
4 A −4
5 cm
32 o
⇒ 5A2 = 32 ⇒ A = = 6.4 30 v
5
⇒ A = 2.53 m
3=ω 6.4 − 1
v = -Aω cos 30°
3 10 3 3
w= = 1.29 rad/s v= ×5 2 × ; v =
5.4 100 2 2
2π v = 0.61 ms-1
Period of motion: T = = 4.86 s
ω
1 1 3
K.E. = × m × v2 = ×1× = 0.1875 J
Length of path = 2A = 5.06 m 2 2 8
1
P.E. = × 50 × (0.05)2 = 0.0625 J
Sol 23: A = 4 cm 2
vmax = Aω 1
Total energy = × 50 × (0.1)2 = 0.25 J
2
vmax Aω
v= = = ω A2 − ω2
2 2 Sol 25:
A2
A –x =
2 2 -1
4 300 Nm
1 kg 3 kg
3
x= A
2
For two mass system.
3
x= × 4 = 2 3 = 3.464 cm We take effective mass instead of mass to calculate
2
frequency.
P.E. = K.E.
m1m2 1×3 3
1 1 µ= = = kg
⇒ P.E. = × kA2 m1 + m2 1+3 4
2 2
k 300
1 2 1 w2 = = = 400
kx = kA2 µ 3/4
2 4
ω = 20 rad/sec.
x = 2 2 = 2.828 m
10
f= Hz ≅ 3.2 Hz
Sol 24: k = 50 Nm -1 π
m = 1kg
Sol 26: k34 = k3 + k4
x=0.1m
1 1 1 1
= + +
k1234 k1 k2 k 34
1 1 1
= + +
k1 k2 (k 3 + k 4 )
k 50 k 2 (k 3 + k 4 ) + k1 (k 3 + k 4 ) + k1k 2
w2 = = = 50 =
m 1 k1k 2 (k 3 + k 4 )
ω = 5 2 rad/s
1 (k1 + k 2 )(k 3 + k 4 ) + k1k 2
=
k1234 k1k 2 (k 3 + k 4 )
P hysi cs | 8.55
θ
1/2 t= × 1.2; t = 0.17 sec
k 360
ω = 1234
m
1/2 Sol 7: (C) x = A + a sin wt
1 k1234
f= 5
2π m t= T
4
1/2
1 k1k 2 (k 3 + k 4 ) x
f=
2π (k1 + k 2 )(k 3 + k 4 ) + (k1k 2 )m
Exercise 2
v
Single Correct Choice Type
T1 k2
vmax. = Aω t ∝ k-1/2 = =2
T2 k1
Double ω; half the amplitude
0.8 π
Sol 3: (C) A = = 0.4 m Sol 9: (C) y1 = sin ωt + y2 = sin wt
2 3
30 1 π π
f= = hz T = 2 sec y1 + y2 2 sin ωt + cos
60 2 6 6
π
Sol 4: (D) = 3 sin ωt +
x 6
a
Sol 10: (B) y = A sin wt + A cos wt
a o
2 45 π
V
= 2A (sin wt + sin + ωt )
2
π π π
= 2A sin ωt + sin = 2 A sin ωt +
4 4 4
π
Sol 5: (A) 2pt + =π 1
( 2A )
2
3 T.E. = × mw2 ×
2π ' 2
2pt =
3
T.E. = mw2A2
t = 1/3 sec
1 1 mv 2
Sol 11: (B) kA2 = mv2 ⇒ A =
Sol 6: (C) T = 1.2 sec 2 2 k
A = 8 cm
5 Sol 12: (C) Amplitude dose not depend on frame of
θ = cos-1 ; θ = 51.31°
8 reference.
8 . 5 6 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
1 2 1 Sol 3: (D)
Sol 13: (A) s = ut + at ⇒ –a = 0 + × (–5) × t2 x
2 2
2a
t=
5
L
2a
T = 4t = 4
5
7 1 displacement x
⇒ kA2 = kA’2 T = 2π = 2π
16 2 acceleration a
7 M
A’ = A = 2π
8 ηL
q24 = 195° k1 =
YA
L
q12 = 75°
q31 = 165° k
m
k2=k
Previous Years’ Questions
AM ωN k2 k
or = = ω =
AN ωM k1 m
P hysi cs | 8.57
∴ Net force on the bob is Fnet = mg cosa At time t = 0, x = A. Hence, PE should be maximum.
Further in graph III, PE is minimum at x = 0 Hence, this
or Net acceleration of the bob is geff = g cosa
is also correct.
L
T = 2π
geff Sol 11: (A) Angular frequency of the system,
L k k
or T = 2π ω= =
gcos α m+m 2m
Note: Whenever point of suspension is accelerating Maximum acceleration of the system will be, w2 A or
kA
in
gs 2m
This acceleration to the lower block is provided by
friction.
90°+
Hence, fmax = mamax
kA kA
= mw2A = m =
2m 2
g
L
Take T = 2π Sol 12: (A) y = kt2
geff
d2 y
→ → → = 2k or ay = 2m/s2(as k = 1 m/s2)
Where g eff = g – a dt2
→ T1 = 2π and T2 = 2π
a = acceleration of point of suspension. g g + ay
→ T12 g + ay 10 + 2 6
In this question a = g sin α (down the plane) ∴ = = =
T22 g 10 5
→ →
∴ | g – a | = geff
2π π
Sol 13: (D) T = 8s, ω = = rads–1
T 4
= g2 + (gsin α )2 + 2(g)(gsin α )cos(90° + α )
x = A sin wt
= g cosa π2 π
∴ a = – w2x = – sin t
16 4
Sol 9: (A) In SHM, velocity of particle also oscillates
simple harmonically. Speed is more near the mean 4
Substituting t = s, we get
position and less near the extreme positions. Therefore, 3
the time taken for the particle to go from O to A/2 will 3 2
be less than the time taken to go it from A/2 to A, or a=– π cms–2
32
T1 < T2
Note From the equation of SHM we can show that Sol 14: (C)
t1 = T0–A/2 = T/12
x
and t2 = TA/2– A = T/6
So, that t1 = t2 = T0–A = T/4
Sol 10: (A) Potential energy is minimum (in this case
zero) at mean position (x = 0) and maximum at extreme x
positions (x = ± A). L
x= q
2
P hysi cs | 8.59
k2 d2 θ g bv
x1 = ∴ =α=− sin θ +
A dt 2
k1 + k 2
for small damping, the solution of the above differential
Sol 16: (A) Frequency or time period of SHM depends equation will be
on variable forces. It does not depend on constant −
bt
external force. Constant external force can only change ∴ θ =θ0 e 2 sin ( wt + φ )
the mean position. For example, in the given question
−bt
mean position is at natural length of spring in the
∴ Angular amplitude will be = θ.e 2
absence of electric field. Whereas in the presence of
electric field mean position will be obtained after a According to question, in τ time (average life–time),
compression of x0. Where x0 is given by
1
Kx0 = QE Angular amplitude drops to value of its original
value ( θ ) e
QE
or x0 =
K 6τ
θ0 −
∴ θ0 e
= 2 ⇒ 6τ = 1
Sol 17: (B) e 2
A 2
∴τ =
A2 = A b
2π
or A sin wt +A sin ωt + + B sin(ωt + φ)
3
8 . 6 0 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
Exercise 1 -
x
1 m
Sol 1: T ∝ ; T = 2π -
k 1/2 k
4k
k1 = 4k ; k2 = a = –w2 x
3
β
By k1l1 = k2l2 = kl – w2 = = slope of a-x graph
α
T T 3
T1 = ; T2 = β
2 2 ω=
α
T1 1
= ω 1 β
T2 3 Frequency = =
2π 2π α
1kg 3kg
30cm/sec
30cm/sec
P hysi cs | 8.61
x = 10 + 3 sin 10 t 1 Mg
2
= k − a + (M + m) ga
At t = 0 s block 1 is at equilibrium position. 2 k
v1 = Aω = 3 × 10 = 30 cm/s 2mg
k (b + a) + b2 − a2 = 2 (M + m)g (a + b)
v2 = 30 cm/s k
Conservation of momentum 2mg
2Mg (b + a) + k (b2 – a2) = 2 (M + m) g (a + b) k =
m1 v1 + m2 v2 = (m1 + m2) v b−a
– 1 × 30 + 3 × 30 = 4 × v 2mg
Constant of force of spring =
v = 15 cm/s b−a
Sol 8:
2
1 Mg
(a) mgh + k
2 k
2
1 Mg /6 /6
= k + b - (M + m) gb
2 k
2
1 Mg
= k − a + (M + m) ga
2 k
Equalising energies in 3 states
2
1 Mg (a) Frequency
k + b - (M + m) gb
2 k Displace by dθ
8 . 6 2 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
k 2Rdθ F = 10 x + 2
dα = –2 ×
m R Only variable force causes SHM
dα = –w dθ 2
(a) F(x) = 10 x + 2
4k k a(x) = 100 x + 20
w2 = ω= 2 =2
m m v(x) = 50 x2 + 20 x + c
2 1 v(0.2) = 0
f= =
2π π
2
50 × 0.04 + 20 × 0.2 + c = 0
1 π
(b) Total energy = 2 × k R c = −6
2 3 x=0.2
1 0.06 × π
2 v = 50 x2 + 20 x − 6
=2× × 0.1 × x=–0.6
2 3
0.2 − ( −0.6)
= 3.94 × 10-4 J/4p2 × 10-5 J A= = 0.4 m
2
1
(c) 2 × mv2 = 4p2 × 10-5 Amplitude = 0.4 m
2
4 π2 × 10−5 10
v2 = (b) ω = = 10 rad/sec
0.1 0.1
v2 = 4p2 × 10-4 2π π
T= = sec.
ω 5
v = 2π × 10-2 = 0.02 π m/sec
(c) x = 0.2 – A cos wt
Sol 9: 5t
x = 0.2 – 0.4 cos
π
3kg 2kg
k=12N/m 2m/s
B A Sol 11: u = (x2 – 4x + 3)
dU
2× 2 + 3× 0 (i) F = –
Vcom = = 0.8 m/s dx
5
F = -2x + 4
xA = vcom t + A sin wt At equilibrium F = 0
At maximum expansion –2x + 4 = 0 ⇒ x = 2 m
1 1 1 (ii) dF = –2dx similar to dF = -w2dx as in SHM
× 5 × (0.8)2 + kx2 = × 2 × 22
2 2 2 ω2
2= = w2
kx2 = 8 – 3.2 = 4.8 m
x = 0.2 ω= 2
3 3 2π
A= x= × 0.2 = 0.12 T= = 2 π sec
5 5 ω
3× 2 (iii) Aω = 2 6
µ= = 1.2
3+2
2 6
A= ⇒ A= 2 3 m
k 120 2
ω= = = 10
µ 1.2
xA = 0.8 t + 0.12 sin 10 t Sol 12: Fmax = mw2A
1
P.E. = K.E.
2
P hysi cs | 8.63
1 2 1 1
⇒ kx = × kA2 m
2 2 2 Sol 15: T = 2π = 0.4 sec
k
A
⇒x= ω = 5π
2
A Fmax For 0 < t < 0.6 sec
F = mw2 =
2 2 mg mg π
x=– + sin (5pt + )
2k 2k 2
F = 25 2 N
µ
Sol 13: (a) T = 2π
k o
3× 6 18 -0.02
µ= = = 2 kg
3+6 9
-0.04
1 π
T = 2π = sec
400 10 mg 4 × 10
= = 0.02 m
(b) A = 6 cm 2k 2 × 1000
A A A
Sol 14: s = A − cos wt - − sin wt U(X)
4 2 8
1 2
3A 3A U= 2 kx ,x<0
s= cos wt - sin wt
4 8 U=mgx, x>0
3A
s= (2 cos wt – sin wt)
15
/6
5×2 10
P.E. = 2 K.E. µ= =
7 7
2 10 2π π
P.E. = T.E. T = 2π = =
3 7 × 1120 28 14
2 Time for first maximum compression
x= A
3
3 π 3π
= × = sec
2 4 14 56
Position: x = × 30
3
I
x = 10 6 cm Sol 19: T = 2π
mgx
2 π
sin−1 − m2 m2
3 6 I= + + m2
=t × 2 sec 12
3
2π
1
mx + mx
1 2 π 2 3 4m2 13 2
t= sin−1 − sec x= = = + m
π 3 6 2m 4 12 12
17
I= m 2
Sol 18: (a) 12
3m/s 10m/s 17 2
m
12 17
T = 2π ;T = 2π
A 5 2 B 3 18g
2mg
4
5 × 3 + 10 × 2
vcm = = 5ms-1
7 Sol 20: (a) Iα = - kθ
1 1 k
5 × 33 + × 2 × 102 α=– θ
2 2 I
1 1 2 k k
= 7 × 52 + kx w2 = ω= =π
2 2 2 I
45 + 200 = 175 + kx2 2π 2π
T= = ;T = 2 sec
kx = 70
2
ω π
70 1
x2 = x= m
1120 4
P hysi cs | 8.65
(b) 1 1
= kh2 – 1.5 × 10 × h −
2 60
1 1 1.5
× 600 × +
2 60 2 2
2 1 1
5m/S = × 600 × h2 – 15 × h −
2 60
2
10m/S 60 h2 – 3h – 7/60 = 0
1.5 37
geff. = 102 + 52 = 125 h= + m
60 120
geff. = 5 5 1.5 37
A=h- = m
0.5 60 120
T = 2π = 2π
g 5 5 × 10 37 5 37
A= × 100 cm = cm
2 120 60
T= sec
1/ 4
5
Sol 23: m1 = 1kg; m2 = 4kg
25 a = 1.6 cm
Sol 21: m = 0.2 kg f = Hz
π
kx = m1 g
4
P.E. = T.E.
9
1 2 4 1 2 x
kx = × kA2; x = A A
2 9 2 3
a
3 3
A= x= × 0.04
2 2 k
A = 0.06 m B
kx N
k=600N/m
eqdb
A B
x=1/60m
k(x+a)
m1=1kg
m1g m2g
1 2 1.5 × 12
kx +
2 2
8 . 6 6 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
a/2 3a
k 9 Sol 3: (C) vmean = =
Sol 24: k = mg; ω= = T/6 T
m
1/2
1 g Sol 4: (C)
f=
2π
2g
A = /3 ; m × =k×x P1
3
2 mg 2
x= = l 135
o
3 k 3
g/3
P2
Natural length
New equilibrium
Sol 5: (C)
3
A B C D E
1
VB2 = V2
4 A
Exercise 2
1 2 2
R w = w2 (R2 – x2) ⇒ R2 = (R2 – x2) 4
Single Correct Choice Type 4
3
x= R
Sol 1: (C) 2
2cm dBD = 2x = 3R
m
Sol 6: (C) TS = 2π T doesn’t depend on g.
k s
Tp = 2π ; Tp ∝ g-1/2
ω 4 −1 = w × 1 2 g
∴ Tp decreases
ω= 3
3 A k
F= Hz Sol 7: (B) vmax = Aω =
2π m
A1 k1 A2 k 2
Sol 2: (D) =
x m m
A1 k2
=
A2 k1
4 v
Sol 8: (C) kA = k/3; kB = 3k
4
TA
TA ∝ k–1/2 ; =3
TB
displacement 2×A
vavg = = m 2π / 3
time T/4 Sol 9: (A) T =2π ×
k 2π
4 2A
vavg = 2π m
T T=
3 k
P hysi cs | 8.67
e m
2
e 3 R z
I mR 2 + 2mz 2
T = 2π ⇒ I=
mgz 2
T
Sol 10: (C) t =
4
2π R2
π µ T= m + 2mz
t= g 2
2 k
1 1 mR 2
t=
π
; t= sec = 2mz for minimum T
2 2 2
π2
R
z=
2
T
A
∫ v dt 8
vmean = 0
= V A
π
T π 2 6
= 10 5 × 30 5 cm/s2 a2
v2 = w2 A2 −
ω4
= 15 m/s2
v=ω A2 − x2 = 4 2.52 − 12
P.E. minimum at x = 2 m Sol 34: (D) Phase remains same and SHMs are
Force is linear function of x with negative slope. perpendicular.
10
w2 = Sol 35: (A) Statement-II is the correct explanation.
m
10
ω= = 10 rad/s Comprehension Type
0.1
2π π Paragraph 1:
T= = sec
10 5
Sol 36: (D) ω = 25 rad/s
Sol 27: (B, D) x = 3 sin 100 t + 8 cos2 50 t k = mw2 = 1 × 625 = 625 Nm-1
= 3 sin 100 t + 4 cos 100 t + 4 16
Fmax =1×9.8+625× + 4.1×9.8
100 × 10
x = 5 sin (100 t + sin-1 4/5) + 4
=59.98 N ≅ 60 N
Sol 28: (A, B, C) x = 5 sin (4pt + sin-1 4/5) mm Fmin = 5.1 × 9.8 – 10 ≅ 40 N
2π
T= = 0.5 s Sol 37: (C) Minimum force on the surface = (50 – 10)
4π
N = 40 N
A = 5 mm
φ = sin-1 (4/5) Sol 38: (A) TE of system is constant
Sol 29: (B, C) k = 2 × 106 Nm-1 Sol 39: (D) d = A sin (wt + φ)
A = 0.01 m
T.E. = 160 J Sol 40: (D) F = –kx + c
when KE = 0 J
Match the Columns
i.e. at equilibrium
1 Sol 41: (B) (a) y = A sin (t)
KEmax = × 2 × 106 × 10-4 = 100 J
2 v = A cos (t)
PEmin = 60 J KE = c × cos2 (t)
T (a) → (ii)
Sol 30: (A, B, C) t = n
2 (b) → (i) PE + KE = const.
m 2 π PE = c × sin2 t
T = 2π = 2π =
k 3 × 24 3 (c) → (iii) TE constant always
(d) → (iv) v = A cos t
Assertion Reasoning Type
Sol 32: (C) When particle moves from extreme to mean v 2 sin2θ
(C) Range =
position velocity and acceleration have same direction. g
2
4 π
(D) T2 =
g
Sol 33: (A) Statement-II is the correct explanation.
8 . 7 0 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
2π m 2π m 7π m
= + =
Sol 5: (A, D) 3 k k k 6 k
eq. position
Sol 6: (B, D)
1 b2 a 1
E1 = mω12a2 = = = n2 … (i)
Rigid wall 2 2m b mω1
m
1 R2 … (ii)
E2= mω22 R 2= mω2= 1
2 2m
ω2
From (i) and (ii) = n2
0.5 uo ω1
2
x E1 ω a 1 ω1 2 ⇒ E1 =
E2
= 2 2 = ⋅ ⋅n
E2 ω1 R 2
n ω2 ω1 ω2
1 2 1 2 1
mu=
0 kx + × m0.25 u20 ….(i)
2 2 2
After elastic collision Sol 7: (A, B, D)
M C
(B) Tf = 2π for both =x sin 2ωt
M+m 2
A = -B and C = 2B
1 1 M
(C) TEcase I = (M + m)v 2f = Mv 2
2 2 M m X = B cos 2wt + B sin 2wt
1 2 1 2 Amplitude = B 2
TE=
case II =KA KA
2 f 2 i For A = B; C = 0
(D) VEP = Afwf : Decreases in both cases. X = A,
Hence this is not correct option.
Sol 8: A → p; B → q, r; C → p; D → r, q
For A = B, C = 2B
Sol 10: (A, C) By principle of superposition y = y1 + y2 + y3 Sol 12: (A, D) Restoring torque is same in both cases
= asin (ω t + 45°) + asin ω t + asin(ω t − 45°)
T
α= = − ω2 θ
= asin (ω t + 45°) + asin(ω t − 45°) + asin ω t I
= 2asin ω t cos 45° + asin ω t
In case A the moment of inertia is more as compared
= (1 + 2 ) asin ω t
2 asin ω t + asin ω t =
to B, so wB > wA
(1 + 2 ) a= (1 + 2 + 2 2 )
2
2
E E
∴ R
= ∴ R
ES a2 ES 1
or E=
R (3 + 2 2 )E S
ELASTICITY
1. INTRODUCTION
We have learnt that the shape and size of a rigid body does not change but this is an ideal concept. Actually a rigid
solid does experience some kind of deformation under the action of external forces and if the magnitude of forces
cross a certain limit, the deformation is so severe that the material of the solid loses its rigidity. We say that the
material has broken-down or failure has happened. In this chapter we learn about the properties of solid bodies
by virtue of which they resist the deformation in their shape and size. These properties constitute the strength of
a material and the knowledge of these is very essential in constructing small and large structures like houses, tall
buildings, bridges, railway tracks etc.
We see that as the distance R decreases, the attractive force first increases
and then decreases to zero at a separation R0 where the potential energy
is the minimum. For smaller distance, force is repulsive. U0
The above picture of interatomic or intermolecular force is an over
Figure 8.32: Potential energy versus
simplification on the actual situation. However, it provides a reasonable
separation
visualisation.
The force between the atoms can be found from the potential energy
using the relation,
dU
F(R) = - F(R)
dR O
R
The resulting force curve is shown in Fig. 8.33. R0
Force is along the line joining the atoms or molecules, and is shown
negative for attraction & positive for repulsion.
Solids: A solid is that state of matter whose atoms and molecules are strongly bound so as to preserve their
original shape and volume. Solids are of two types-crystalline & amorphous.
(a) Crystalline solid: A crystalline solid is one which has regular & periodic arrangement of atoms or molecules
in three dimensions. Examples of crystalline solids are diamond, rock salt, mica, sugar etc.
(b) Amorphous solids or glassy solids: The word ‘amorphous’ literally means ‘without any form’. There is no
‘order’ in arrangement of atoms in such a solid. Example - glass.
P hysi cs | 8.73
In solids, the intermolecular forces are so strong that there is no change in shape and size easily.
Liquids: The intermolecular forces are comparably less than that in solids, so the shape can easily be changed.
But volume of a given mass of a liquid is not easy to change. It needs quite an effort to change the density of
liquids.
Liquids are not able to produce reaction forces to applied forces in arbitrary directions.
Gases: This is the third state of matter which cannot support compressive, tensile, or sharing forces. Densities of
gases change very rapidly with increase in temperature.
Liquids and gases are together classified as fluids: The word ‘’fluid’’ comes from a Latin word meaning ‘’to flow’’.
On an average, the atoms or molecules in a gas are far apart, typically about ten atomic diameters at room
temperature and pressure. They collide much less frequently than those in a liquid. Gases in general are compressible.
3. INTRODUCTION TO ELASTICITY
When external forces are applied to a body which is fixed to a rigid support, there is a change in its length, volume
or shape. When the external forces are removed, the body tends to regain its original shape and size. Such a
property of a body by virtue of which a body tends to regain its original shape or size, when the external forces are
removed, is called elasticity.
If a body completely regains its shape and size, it is called perfectly elastic. If it does not regain its shape and
size completely, it is called inelastic material. Those materials which hardly regain their shape are called plastic
material.
An elastic body is one that returns to its original shape after a deformation. Eg- golf ball, rubber band, soccer
ball.
An inelastic body is one that does not return to its original shape after a deformation. Eg – dough or bread, clay,
inelastic ball.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
One can compare this situation to a spring-mass system. Consider a particle connected to several particles through
spring. If this particle is displaced a little, the spring exerts a resultant force which tries to bring the particle towards
its natural position. In fact, the particle will oscillate about this position. In due course, the oscillations will be
damped out and the particle will regain its original position.
Stress: Elastic bodies regain their original shape due to internal restoring forces. This internal restoring force, acting
per unit area of a deformed body is called a stress.
Restoring force
i.e. Stress =
Area
8 . 7 4 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
A F
F
A F
F
Strain: The fractional or relative change in shape, size or dimensions of body is called the strain.
change in dimension
Strain =
original dimension
There are three types of strains:
∆
(i) Longitudinal strain: It is the ratio of the change in length, ∆ , to the original length, i.e. .
∆V
(ii) Volume strain: It is the ratio of change in volume, DV, to the original volume V i.e.
V
(iii) Shearing strain: The angular deformation, θ, in radians of a face of a F X
rectangular body is called shearing strain.
If a tangential force F is used to displace upper face of rectangular body
through a small angle θ such that the upper face is displaced through distance
∆x
Dx where is height of the body, then shearing strain = θ ≈ tan θ =
Strain is a ratio of two similar quantities and does not have any units.
Figure 8.36: Shearing strain
Illustration 1: A 4.0 m long copper wire of cross sectional area 1.2 cm is 2
Illustration 2: A copper rod 2m long is stretched by 1mm. Strain will be (JEE MAIN)
(A) 10–4, volumetric (B) 5 × 10–4, volumetric (C) 5 × 10–4, longitudinal (D) 5 × 10–3, volumetric
Illustration 3: A lead of 4.0 kg is suspended from a ceiling through a steel wire of radius 2.0 mm. Find the tensile
stress developed in the wire when equilibrium is achieved. Take g = 3.1π ms–2. (JEE MAIN)
Illustration 4: Find the stress on a bone (1 cm in radius and 50 cm long) that supports a mass of 100kg. Find the
strain on the bone if it is compressed 0.15 mm by this weight. Find the proportionality constant C for this bone.
(JEE MAIN)
8 . 7 6 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
Sol: Stress is restoring force per unit area of cross-section. Strain is equal to change in length per unit length. Strain
∝ Stress
Stress = F/A = (100kg) (9.8 m/s2) / π × (0.01 m)2 = 3.1 × 106 N/m2
Strain = ∆L/L0 = (0.15 × 10–3m) / (0.5m) = 3.0 × 10–4
Since strain = C × stress, C = strain / stress = 0.96 × 10–10 m2/N.
Hooke’s Law: It states that for small deformations, stress is directly proportional to strain within elastic limits and
the ratio is a constant called modulus of elasticity.
Stress
= modulus of Elasticity = E
Strain
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
FL
(a) For loaded wire: ∆L =
πr 2 γ
For rigid body ∆L = 0 so Y = ∞ i.e. Elasticity of rigid body is infinite.
L
(b) If same stretching force is applied to different wires of same material, ∆L ∝ [As F and Y are
const.] r2
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
1
(ii) E ∝ (for same stress), i.e., if the same amount of stress is applied on two different
strain
materials, the one having less strain is having more Elasticity. Rather we can say that, the one
which offers more resistance to the external forces is having greater value of E. So, we can see
that modulus of elasticity of steel is more than that of rubber or Esteel > Erubber
∆x
(iii) E = stress for unit strain = 1 or ∆=x x , i.e. suppose the length of a wire is 2m, then the
x
Young’s modulus of elasticity (Y) is the stress applied on the wire to stretch the wire by the
Illustration 5: Two wires of equal cross section but one made of steel and the other of copper, are joined end to
end. When the combination is kept under tension, the elongations in the two wires are found to be equal. Find the
ratio of the lengths of the two wires. Young’s modulus of steel = 2.0 × 1011 Nm–2. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: The wires joined together have same stress and same elongation. Ratio of stress and young’s modulus is strain.
As young’s modulus for steel and copper is different, strains of the wires will be different.
As the cross sections of the wires are equal and same tension exists in both, the stresses developed are equal. Let
the original lengths of the steel wire and the copper wire be LS and LC respectively and the elongation in each wire
be .
stress
= … (i)
LS 2.0 ×1011 Nm−2
stress
And = … (ii)
LC 1.1 ×1011 Nm−2
Illustration 6: A solid cylindrical steel column is 4.0 m long and 9.0 cm in diameter. What will be decrease in length
when carrying a load of 80000 kg? Y = 1.9 × 1011 Nm–2. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The stress will be equal to load per unit cross section. Strain is the ratio of stress and young’s modulus.
Let us first calculate the cross-sectional area of column = pr2 = π(0.045m)2 = 6.36 × 10–3 m2
F/A FL [(8 ×10 4 )(9.8N)](4.0m)
Then, from Y = we have ∆L = = = 2.6 × 10–3 m.
∆L / L AY −3 2
(6.36 ×10 m )(1.9 ×10 Nm )11 −2
Illustration 7: A load of 4.0 kg is suspended from a ceiling through a steel wire of length 20 m and radius 2.0 mm.
It is found that the length of the wire increases by 0.031 mm as equilibrium is achieved. Find Young’s modulus of
steel. Take g = 3.1 π m/s2. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The stress will be equal to load per unit cross section. Strain is the change in length per unit length. Young’s
modulus is the ratio of stress and strain.
(4.0kg)(3.1 πms−2 )
The longitudinal stress = = 3.1 × 106 N/m2
π (2.0 ×10−3 m)2
8 . 7 8 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
0.031 ×10−3 m
The longitudinal strain = = 0.0155 × 10–3
2.0m
Illustration 8: A bar of mass m and length is hanging from point A as shown in Fig. 8.38. Find A
the increase in its length due to its own weight. The Young’s modulus of elasticity of the wire is
Y and area of cross-section of the wire is A. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: Find the elongation for an elementary length dx of the wire due to tension in the wire at
the location of the element. B
Consider a small section dx of the bar at a distance x from B. The weight of the bar for a length Figure 8.38
x is,
mg A
W= x
W mg
Elongation in section dx will=
be d = dx x dx dx
AY AY
x
Total elongation in the bar can be obtained by integrating this expression for x = 0 to x = . B
x = Figure 8.39
mg mg
\ =
∆ ∫ =d ∫ x dx or
AY 0
∆ =
2AY
x =0
Illustration 9: One end of a metal wire is fixed to a ceiling and a load of 2 kg hangs from the other
end. A similar wire is attached to the bottom of the load and another load of 1 kg hangs from this T2
lower wire. Find the longitudinal strain in both the wires. Area of cross section of each wire is 0.005
2kg
cm2 and Young modulus of the metal is 2.0 × 1011 N m–2. Take g = 10 ms–2. (JEE ADVANCED)
T1
Sol: Find the tension in each wire. Stress is tension per unit area of cross section. Strain is the ratio
1kg
of stress and Young’s modulus.
The situation is described in Fig. 8.40. As the 1kg mass is in equilibrium, the tension in the lower Figure 8.40
wire equals the weight of the load.
Thus T1 = 10N; Stress = 10N/0.005 cm2 = 2 × 107 N/m2
stress 2 ×107 N / m2
Longitudinal strain
= = = 10−4
Y 2 ×1011 N / m2
Considering the equilibrium of the upper block, we can write, T2 = 20N + T1 or T2 = 30N
Stress = 30 N/0.005 cm2 = 6 × 107 N/m2
6 ×107 N / m2
Longitudinal strain = = 3 × 10–4 .
2 ×1011 N / m2
A B
Illustration 10: Each of the three blocks P, Q and R shown in Figure Q
P
has a mass of 3 kg. Each of the wires A and B has cross-sectional
area 0.005 cm2 and Young modulus 2 × 1011 N/m2. Neglect friction.
Find the longitudinal strain developed in each of the wires. Take
g = 10 m/s2. (JEE ADVANCED) R
Figure 8.41
P hysi cs | 8.79
Sol: Find the tension in each wire. Stress is tension per unit area of cross section. Strain is the ratio of stress and
Young’s modulus.
The block R will descend vertically and the blocks P and Q will move on the frictionless horizontal table. Let the
common magnitude of the acceleration be a. Let the tensions in the wires A and B be TA and TB respectively.
Writing the equations of motion of the blocks P, Q and R, we get,
TA = (3kg) a …. (i)
TB – TA = (3kg) a …. (ii)
Longitudinal stress
Longitudinal strain =
Young modulus
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
In practical life, we often hear something like elastic band is usually referred to a rubber band because it
is easily stretchable and a steel rod is not.
However, here elasticity has some different meaning. Being more elastic means, the material will resist
more to any external force which tries to change its configuration.
That is why Esteel > Erubber.
Nitin Chandrol (JEE 2012, AIR 134)
Illustration 11: A box shaped piece of gelatin dessert has a top area of 15 cm2 and a height of 3cm. When a
shearing force of 0.50 N is applied to the upper surface, the upper surface displaces 4 mm relative to the bottom
surface. What are the shearing stress, the shearing strain and the shear modulus for the gelatin? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Shearing stress is tangential force per unit area of surface. Shearing Strain is the ratio of displacement of
the surface to the distance of the surface from the fixed surface. Shear modulus is the ratio of shearing stress to
shearing strain.
Displacement 0.4 cm
Shear stress = = = 0.133
height 3cm
stress 333
Shear modulus G = =
strain 0.133
The negative sign is included to make B a positive number since an increase in pressure ( ∆p > 0 ) leads to a
decrease in volume ( ∆V < 0 ) .
1
The inverse of B is called the compressibility factor k =
B
Elastic properties of matter
Sate Shear Modulus Bulk Modulus
Solid Large Large
Liquid Zero Large
Gas Zero Small
P hysi cs | 8.81
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Bulk Modulus has very important applications in case of fluids. Actually, it has various applications in
adiabatic expansion of gases. Also, while calculating speed of sound through air, one would find that
it would come out to be directly proportional to square root of bulk modulus of air. (In general, speed
of sound depends of elastic properties of matter. A more general statement is that mechanical waves’
speed depends on elastic properties of matter)
B Rajiv Reddy (JEE 2012, AIR 11)
Illustration 12: Find the decrease in the volume of a sample of water from the following data. Initial volume = 1000
cm3, initial pressure = 105 Nm–2, final pressure = 106 Nm–2, compressibility of water = 50 × 10–11 m2N–1. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Using the formula for bulk modulus deduce the value for decrease in volume.
The change in pressure = ∆P = 106 Nm–2 – 105 Nm–2 = 9 × 105 Nm–2.
1 ∆V / V
Compressibility = = − or,
Bulk modulus ∆P
∆V
50 × 10–11 m2N–1 = –
(10 m ) × (9 ×105 Nm−2 )
−3 3
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
A solid will have all the three moduli of elasticity Y, B and η. But in case of a liquid or a gas, only B can
be defined because a liquid or a gas cannot be framed into a wire or no shear force can be applied on
−dP
them. For a liquid or a gas, B =
dV / V
So, instead of P, we are more interested in change in pressure dP.
In case of a gas, B = XP
Anand K (JEE 2011, AIR 47)
Elastic
5. THE STRESS-STRAIN CURVE zone Plastic zone
Figure 8.44
8 . 8 2 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
ultimate strength of the material. It is the maximum stress that the material can sustain without failure. After the
point U the curve goes down towards the breaking point B because the calculation of the stress is based on the
original cross-sectional area whereas the cross-sectional area of the sample actually decreases.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
It is generally thought that strain results from stress, or many say that Hooke’s law states wrong statement
that stress is directly proportional to strain.
However, we must not worry because Hooke’s law is correct. Going deeper to a microscopic level will
help us understand better. It appears that external force cause strain in the body on which it is applied.
However, stress is defined as restoring force (at equilibrium) per unit area. There can be no restoring
force if there is no strain. Hence, strain is the cause and not stress. The only glitch here is that restoring
force is equal to the force applied because (again not to forget) body is in equilibrium. So, it creates
confusion but we must not take it for granted and understand the minute concepts.
Yashwanth Sandupatla (JEE 2012, AIR 821)
Metal Wire: The Fig. 8.45 shows the relation between Elastic behavior
stress and strain as the deformation gradually decreases
in a stretched wire.
Up to a strain < 0.01, Hooke’s law is valid and Young’s
Strain
modulus is defined. Point a represents proportional limit 0.01 0.30
up to which stress is proportional to strain. Permanent set
Point b is called the yield point or elastic limit up to which a=Proportional limit
stress is not proportional to strain (a to b) but elasticity still b=Elastic limit
holds true. d=Fracture point
The wire shows plastic behavior after point b where there Figure 8.45: Graph of Stress versus Strain
is a permanent deformation in the wire and it does not
return back to its original dimensions.
The wire breaks at d which is the fracture point if stretched beyond point c. The corresponding stress is called
breaking stress.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
If large deformation takes place between the elastic limit and the fractured point, the material is called
ductile. If it breaks soon after the elastic limit is crossed, it is called brittle.
Yashwanth Sandupatla (JEE 2012, AIR 821)
P hysi cs | 8.83
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
The material which has smaller value of Y is more ductile, i.e., it offers less resistance in framing it into
a wire. Similarly, the material having the smaller value of B is more malleable. Thus, for making wire, we
choose a material having less value of Y.
GV Abhinav (JEE 2012, AIR 329)
7. POISSON’S RATIO
When a longitudinal force is applied on a wire, its length increases but its radius decreases. Thus two strains are
produced by a single force.
∆l ∆R
(a) Longitudinal strain = and (b) Lateral strain =
l R
The ratio of these two strains is called the Poisson’s ratio.
Lateral strain ∆R / R
Thus, the Poisson’s ratio σ = =−
Longitudinal strain ∆l / l
Negative sign in σ indicates that radius of the wire decreases as the length increases.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Relation between Y, B, η and σ : Following are some relations between the four
Y Y 3B − 2η 9 1 3
(a) B = (b) η = (c) σ = (d) = +
3(1 − 3σ) 2(1 + σ) 2η + 6B Y B η
Anurag Saraf (JEE 2011, AIR 226)
1 Y A∆l 1
Also W = ∆l = × force × extension
2 l 2
1 Y∆l ∆l 1 1
Y × ( strain)
2
Work done per unit volume == × × = x stress x strain .
2 l l 2 2
Illustration 13: Spring is stretched by 3 cm when a load of 5.4 × 106 dyne is suspended from it. Work done will be
(A) 8.1 × 106 J (B) 8 × 106 J (C) 8.0 × 106 ergs (D) 8.1 × 106 ergs (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Work done in stretching the spring is equal to the elastic potential energy stored in the spring.
1
(D) W = × load × elongation W = 8.1 × 106 ergs =0.81 J
2
Illustration 14: A steel wire of length 2.0 m is stretched through 2.0 mm. The cross-sectional area of the wire is
4.0 mm2. Calculate the elastic potential energy stored in the wire in the stretched condition. Young modulus of steel
= 2.0 × 1011 N/m2. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: We know the formula to find the elastic potential energy stored per unit volume of the wire. Calculate the
volume of the wire and find the energy stored in the entire wire.
∆l 2.0mm
The strain in the wire = = 10–3.
l 2.0m
The stress in the wire = Y × strain = 2.0 × 1011 N m–2 × 10–3 = 2.0 × 108 N/m2.
The volume of the wire = (4 × 10–6 m2) × (2.0 m) = 8.0 × 10–6 m3.
1
The elastic potential energy stored = × stress × strain × volume
2
1
= × 2.0 × 108 Nm–2 × 10–3 × 8.0 × 10–6 m3 = 0.8 J
2
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
This energy can also be thought of as elastic potential energy of a spring. You just need to calculate
spring constant.
A simple way would be considering ∆l=x and rearranging terms of Hooke’s law in the form of F=-kx.
1
Remember F here is restoring force. Now energy is simply kx2
2
Vijay Senapathi (JEE 2011, AIR 71)
P hysi cs | 8.85
Illustration 16: A wire of cross sectional area 3 mm2 is just stretched between two fixed points at a temperature of
20°C. Determine the tension when the temperature falls to 20°C. Coefficient of linear expansion α = 10–5 / °C and
Y = 2 × 1011 N/m2. (JEE MAIN)
(A) 120 kN (B) 20 N (C) 120 N (D) 12 N
Sol: Thermal stress is equal to product of young’s modulus and thermal strain. Tension is product of area of cross-
section and stress.
(C) F = Y A α Dt = 2 × 1011 × 3 × 10–6 × 10–5 × 20; F = 120 N
PROBLEM-SOLVING TACTICS
•• Be careful while using the Hooke’s law of elasticity. Always remember that this law is not valid for an elastic
material when it is stretched beyond its elastic limit. Stress is proportional to strain only when the material is
stretched up to a certain limit.
•• Always keep the stress-strain graph in mind while solving elasticity problems.
•• The extent of ductility of a material can be calculated using the strain formulae. Greater the elongation, greater
the ductility of the material. This concept can be used in questions where one is asked to arrange the elastic
material in the order of increasing brittleness or ductility.
•• Conservation of energy principle can be used to solved many problems where elastic potential energy gets
converted to other forms of energy in the given problem system.
•• Elongation and compression can be thought as analogous to a spring (refer to Plancess concept to how to do
it) in appropriate limits.
•• Direct questions may be asked on relation between Poisson’s ratio and modulus of elasticity, so it would be
nice if you learn them.
FORMULAE SHEET
Elasticity:
Restoring force
Stress: Stress (σ) =
Area
SI units = N/m2
Fn
Normal/ longitudinal stress sn =
A Ft
Fn is the normal force
Fn
A is the cross-sectional area
Ft
Tangential / shearing stress st =
A
Figure 8.50
Ft is the tangential force
F
Volume stress sV =
A
Note: This is the stress developed when body is immersed in a liquid.
∆l
Strain: Longitudinal strain ε= F x
l A B A A’ B B’
∆V
Volumetric strain ε=
V x
F F
D and DV are change in length and volume
respectively.
D C D C
∆X F
Shearing strain ε=
X Figure 8.51
P hysi cs | 8.87
−Volumestress −F / A −P
Bulk modulus of elasticity (B) B= = =
Volume strain ∆V / V ∆V / V
dp
For a liquid or gas B= −
(dV / V)
1
Compressibility =
β
shearing stress F /A F /A
Modulus of rigidity (η) η = = t = t (See Fig. 8.52)
shearing strain ( ∆x / x) θ
l, , y, A
Elastic potential energy stored per unit volume in a stretched wire A B
1
u = (stress x strain)
2 Figure 8.52
∆l
Thermal stress and strain ∈= = α∆T
l
σ F F
Y= = =
∈ A ∈ Aα∆T
Solved Examples
Example 2: One end of a wire 2 m long and 0.2 cm2 in Example 4: The bulk modulus of water is
cross section is fixed in a ceiling and a load of 4.8 kg is
attached to the free end. Find the extension of the wire. 2.3 × 109 N/m2.
Young’s modulus of steel = 2.0 × 1011 N/m2. (a) Find its compressibility.
Take g = 10 m/s . 2
(b) How much pressure in atmosphere is needed to
compress a sample of water by 0.1%?
Sol: From the formula for Young’s modulus deduce the
extension in wire. Sol: Compressibility is inverse of bulk modulus. From
stress T / A the formula for bulk modulus deduce the change
We have
= Y = in pressure required to produce the given change in
strain l / L
volume.
With symbols having their usual meanings. The
TL Here, B = 2.3 × 109 N/m2
extension is l =
AY 2.3 ×109
= atm = 2.27 × 104 atm
As the load is in equilibrium after the extension, the 1.01 ×105
tension in the wire is equal to the weight of the load 1
= 4.8 kg × 10 ms–2 = 48 N (a) Compressibility =
B
(48N)(2m) 1
Thus, l = = = 4.4 × 10–5 atm–1
−4 2 11 −2
(0.2 ×10 m ) × (2.0 ×10 Nm ) 2.27 ×10 4
∆V
= 2.4 × 10–5 m. (b) Here, = −0.1% = – 0.001
V
∆V = – 0.87 × 10–3.
DP = B × −
V The negative sign indicates that the radius decreases.
= 2.27 × 104 × 0.001= 22.7 atm
Example 7: Find the greatest length of steel wire that
can hang vertically without breaking. Breaking stress of
Example 5: One end of a nylon rope of length 4.5
steel =8.0 × 108 N/m2.
m and diameter 6 mm is fixed to a tree-limb. A
monkey weighing 100 N jumps to catch the free end Density of steel = 8.0 × 103 kg/m3.
and stays there. Find the elongation of the rope and Take g = 10 m/s2.
the corresponding change in the diameter. Young’s
modulus of nylon = 4.8 × 1011 Nm–2 and Poisson ratio Sol: Breaking stress gives the maximum weight per unit
of nylon = 0.2. area of cross-section that the wire can withstand.
Sol: From the formula for Young’s modulus deduce Let l be the length of the wire that can hang vertically
the change in length of the rope. From the formula for without breaking. Then the stretching force on it is
Poisson ratio deduce the change in diameter. equal to its own weight. If therefore, A is the area of
cross-section and ρ is the density, then
As the monkey stays in equilibrium, the tension in the
rope equals the weight of the monkey. Hence, weight
Maximum stress (sm) =
A
stress T / A TL
Y= = or l =
strain l / L AY force (Alρ)g
stress = or σm =
or, elongation area A
(100 N) × (4.5 m) σm
l= \ l= Substituting the values
−6 2 11 −2
( π× 9 ×10 m ) × (4.8 ×10 Nm ) ρg
= 3.32 × 10–5 m 8.0 ×108
l= = 104 m
(8.0 ×103 )(10)
∆d / d ( ∆d)L
Again, Poisson ratio = =
l /L ld
Example 8: A copper wire of negligible mass, length 1
∆d × 4.5 m m and cross-sectional area 10–6 m2 is kept on a smooth
or, 0.2 =
(3.32 × 10−5 m) × (6 × 10−3 m) horizontal table with one end fixed. A ball of mass 1
kg is attached to the other end. The wire and the ball
0.2 × 6 × 3.32 ×10−8 m are rotating with an angular velocity of 20 rad/s. If the
or, Dd = = 8.8 × 10–9 m
4.5 elongation in the wire is 10–3 m, obtain the Young’s
modulus of copper. If on increasing the angular velocity
Example 6: A solid lead sphere of volume 0.5 m3 to 100 rad/s, the wire breaks down, obtain the breaking
is taken in the ocean to a depth where the water stress.
pressure is 2 × 107 N/m2. If the bulk modulus of lead is
7.7 × 109 N/m2. Find the fractional change in the radius Sol: The stress developed in the wire will be due to
of the sphere. the centrifugal force. Ratio of stress and strain is the
Young’s modulus. The breaking stress will be due to the
Sol: From the formula for bulk modulus deduce the centrifugal force at increased angular velocity.
change in volume for the given increase in pressure.
The stretching force developed in the wire due to
4 3 ∆r 1 ∆V rotation of the ball is
V= πr ⇒ =
3 r 3 V
F = mrw2 = 1 × 1 × (20)2 = 400 N
∆P
Bulk modulus K = – F 400
( ∆V / V) Stress in the wire = = N/m2 Strain in the wire
A 10−6
∆V ∆P
or =– 10−3
V K = = 10–3
1
∆r 1 ∆P 1 2 ×107
or = − =– × Stress 400
r 3 K 3 7.7 ×109 Y= = = 4 × 1011 N/m2
Strain 10 ×10−3
−6
8 . 9 0 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
1 × 1 × (100)2 C
Breaking stress = = 1010 N/m2. A B
−6
10
T T
Example 9: (a) A wire 4 m long and 0.3 mm in diameter
is stretched by a force of 100 N. If extension in the wire D
is 0.3 mm, calculate the potential energy stored in the m
wire.
(b) Find the work done in stretching a wire of cross- mg
section 1 mm2 and length 2 m through 0.1 mm, Young’s ∴ AD2 = AC2 + CD2 = (50)2 + (1)2
modulus for the material of wire is 2.0×1011 N/m2.
or AD = 50.01 cm
Sol: Work done in stretching the wire is equal to the Increase in length = 0.01 cm
elastic potential energy stored in the wire. (a) Energy
stored 0.01
Strain = = 2 ×10−4
50
1
U= (stress)(strain)(volume) Stress = 2 × 1012 × 2 × 10–4
2
1 F ∆l 1 ∴ Stress = 4 × 108 dynes/cm2
or U = (Al ) = F ⋅∆l
2 A l 2 Tension T = Stress × Area of cross-section
= 4 × 108 × π × (0.08)2
=
1
2
( ( )
100 ) 0.3 ×10−3 = 0.015 J
Since the mass m is in equilibrium
(b) Work done = potential energy stored 2T cos θ
mg = 2T cos θ or m =
g
1 1 YA YA 2 × 4 ×108 × π(0.08)2 × (1 / 50.01)
( ∆l )
2
= k( ∆l )2 = as k = = = 82 gm.
2 2 l l 980
Substituting the values, we have
C
A B
x (200 x)
P hysi cs | 8.91
Example 2: A rod AD, consisting of three segments AB, Example 3: A steel rod of length 6.0 m and diameter
BC and CD joined together, is hanging vertically from 20 mm is fixed between two rigid supports. Determine
a fixed support at A. The lengths of the segments are the stress in the rod, when the temperature increases
respectively 0.1 m, 0.2 m and 0.15 m. The cross-section by 80° C if
of the rod is uniformly equal to 10–4 m2. A weight of 10
kg is hung from D. Calculate the displacements of the
points B, C and D using the data on Young’s moduli
given below (neglect the weight of the rod). 6.0m
YAB = 2.5 × 10 N/m, 2
(a) The ends do not yield
YBC = 4.0 × 10 N/m and 2
(b) The ends yield by 1 mm.
YCD = 1.0 × 10 N/m 2
Take Y = 2.0 × 106 kg/cm2
Sol: From the formula for Young’s modulus deduce the And α = 12 × 10–6 per °C.
elongation in each segment of the wire.
Sol: Rise in temperature causes thermal strain and
We know that thermal stress. Use the formula for coefficient of
mgl 10 × 9.8 × 0.1 thermal expansion to obtain thermal strain. Thermal
∆
=l = = 3.92 × 10–6 m stress is the product of Young’s modulus and thermal
AY 10 −4 × 2.5 ×1010
strain.
This is the displacement of B.
Given, length of the rod l = 6 m
8 . 9 2 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
Diameter of the rod d = 20 mm = 2 cm Sol: Find the tension in the metal wire due to the masses
connected to it. The stress due to tension should not
Increase in temperature t = 80°C
exceed the breaking stress.
Young’s modulus Y = 2.0 × 106 kg/cm2
The stress in the wire
And thermal coefficient of linear expansion
Tension
=
α = 12 × 10–6 per °C Area of crosssec tion
(a) When the ends do not yield
To avoid breaking, this stress should not exceed the
Let, s1 = stress in the rod breaking stress.
Using the relation σ = atY Let the tension in the wire be T. The equations of motion
of the two blocks are,
∴ s1 = (12 × 10–6) (80) (2 × 106)
T – 10 N = (1kg) a and 20 N – T = (2kg) a
= 1920 kg/cm2 =19.2 × 106 N
Eliminating a from these equations,
(b) When the ends yield by 1 mm
T = (40/3) N
Increase in length due to increase in temperature Dl =
lat (40 / 3) N
The stress =
Of this 1mm or 0.1 cm is allowed to expand. Therefore, πr 2
net compression in the rod If the minimum radius needed to avoid breaking is r,
Dlnet = (lt – 0.1) N (40 / 3) N
2 × 109 =
2
or compressive strain in the rod, m πr 2
0.1
s2 = 2 × 106 12 ×10−6 × 80 −
5000kg
600
Brass
= 1587 kg/cm2 = 15.8 × 106 N Brass Steel 30m 20cm
2 kg Load, F = 5000 kg
Y for steel YS = 2.0×106 kg/cm2 Y
P hysi cs | 8.93
Example 6: A sphere of radius 0.1 m and mass 8π kg Example 7: A thin ring of radius R is made of a material
is attached to the lower end of a steel wire length 5.0 of density ρ and Young’s modulus Y. If the ring is rotated
m and diameter 10–3 m. The wire is suspended from about its center in its own plane with angular velocity
5.22 m high ceiling of a room. When sphere is made ω, find the small increase in its radius.
to swing as a simple pendulum, it just grazes the floor
at its lowest point. Calculate velocity of the sphere at Sol: As the ring rotates each element of the ring of
the lowest position. Young’s modulus of steel is 1.994 infinitesimal length experiences a centrifugal force, due
× 1011 N/m2. to which the ring slightly expands, thus increasing its
radius. The longitudinal strain in the ring produces a
Sol: The elongation in the wire is known, thus the tensile stress or tension in the ring.
corresponding stress can be calculated. The stress in
turn gives the tension in the wire. At the lowest point Consider an element PQ of length dl. Let T be the
the net acceleration of the sphere is centripetal, i.e. tension and A the area of cross-section of the wire.
directed vertically upwards. Apply Newton’s second law Mass of element dm = volume × density = A (dl)ρ
at the lowest point to find the speed of the sphere.
The component of T, towards the center provides the
Let Dl be the extension of wire when the sphere is at necessary centripetal force
mean position. Then, we have
θ 2
\ (dm)Rω
2T sin= … (i)
2
θ θ (dl / R)
For small angles sin ≈ =
2 2 2
5.22m T Substituting in eq. (i), we have
dl
T. = A(dl )ρRω2 or T = Arw2R2
R
8 . 9 4 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
JEE Main/Boards
Q.7 A spherical ball contracts in volume by 0.01%, Q.3 The work done in increasing the length of a one
when subjected to a normal uniform pressure of 100 meter long wire of cross-sectional area 1mm2 through
atmosphere. Calculate the bulk modulus of the material. 1mm will be (Y = 2 × 1011 N/m2)
(A) 250 J (B) 10 J (C) 5 J (D) 0.1 J
Q.8 A sphere contracts in volume by 0.02% when taken
to the bottom of sea 1 km deep. Find bulk modulus
of the material of sphere. Density of sea water is
1000 kg/m3.
8 . 9 6 | Simple Harmonic Motion and Elasticity
Q.4 The lengths and radii of two wires of same material (C) Length=200cm, diameter= 2 mm
are respectively L, 2L, and 2R, R. Equal weights are (D) Length=300 cm, diameter=3 mm
applied on them. If the elongations produced in them
are l1 and l2 respectively, then their ratio will be
Q.2 A given quantity of an ideal gas is at pressure p and
(A) 2 : 1 (B) 4: 1 (C) 8 : 1 (D) 1 : 8 absolute temperature T. The isothermal bulk modulus
of the gas (1998)
Q.5 What is the density of lead under a pressure of 2 3
(A) p (B) p (C) p (D) 2p
2.0×108 N/m2, if the bulk modulus of lead is 8.0×109 N/m2 3 2
and initially the density of lead is 11.4g/cm3 ?
Q.3 The pressure of a medium is changed from 1.01 ×
(A) 11.69g/cm3 (B) 11.92g/cm3
105 Pa to 1.165 ×105 Pa and change in volume is 10%
(C) 11.55g/cm3 (D) 11.862g/cm3 keeping temperature constant. The bulk modulus of
the medium is (2005)
Q.6 A rubber rod of density 1.3 ×103 kg / m3 and (A) 204.8 ×105 Pa (B) 102.4 ×105 Pa
Young’s modulus 6 ×106 N / m2 hangs from the ceiling (C) 51.2 ×105 Pa (D) 1.55 ×105 Pa
of a room. Calculate the deviation in the value of its
length from the original value 10m.
Q.4 A pendulum made of a uniform wire of cross
(A) 10.9 cm (B) 5.8 cm (C) 9.3 cm (D) 10.6 cm sectional area A has time period T. When an additional
mass M is added to its bob, the time period changes to
Q.7 A metal rod is trapped horizontally between two TM . If the Young’s modulus of the material of the wire
vertical walls. The coefficient of linear expansion of the 1
is Y then is equal to: (g = gravitational acceleration
rod is equal to 1.2 ×10−5 / C and its Young’s modulus Y
2 ×1011 N / m2 . If the temperature of the rod is increased (2015)
by 5°C, calculate the stress developed in it. T 2 T 2
Mg A
(A) 2.2×10 N/m
7 2
(B) 3.1 × 10 N/m
7 2 (A) M − 1 (B) 1 − M
T A T Mg
(C) 1.2 × 107 N/m2 (D) 1.2 × 104 N/m2
2 T 2
T A A
(C) 1 − (D) M − 1
TM Mg T Mg
Previous Years’ Questions
JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 2
4
Q.2 A metallic wire is suspended by suspending weight (A) 2 × 1011 N/m2 (B) 2 × 10–11 N/m2
to it. If S is longitudinal strain and Y its young’s modulus
(C) 2 × 1012 N/m2 (D) 2 × 1013 N/m2
of elasticity. Potential energy per unit volume will be
1 2 2 1 2 1 2 Q.3 In Searle’s experiment, which is used to find Young’s
(A) Y S (B) Y S (C) YS (D) 2YS2
2 2 2 modulus of elasticity, the diameter of experimental
wire is D = 0.05 cm (measured by a scale of least count
Q.3 The compressibility of water is 5 ×10−10 m2 / N . 0.001 cm) and length is L = 110 cm (measured by a
Find the decrease in volume of 100 ml of water when scale of least count 0.1 cm). A weight of 50N causes an
subjected to a pressure of 15 mPa. extension of l = 0.125 cm (measured by a micrometer
(A) 0.75 ml (B) 0.75 mm of least count 0.001 cm). Find maximum possible error
in the values of Young’s modulus. Screw gauge and
(C) 0.75 mm (D) 7.5 mm meter scale are free from error. (2004)
Q.4 The upper end of a wire 1 meter long and 2mm Q.13 In plotting stress versus strain curves for two
radius is clamped. The lower end is twisted through an materials P and Q, a student by mistake puts strain
angle of 45º. The angle of shear is on the y-axis and stress on the x-axis as shown in the
(A) 0.09° (B) 0.9° (C) 9° (D) 90° figure. Then the correct statement(s) is(are) (2015)
PlancEssential Questions
JEE Main/Boards JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1 Exercise 2
Q. 1 Q.3 Q.7 Q.1 Q.4
Q.10
Answer Key
Q.5 (a) 3.18 × 108 N m–2 (b) 1.59 mm (c) 0.16% Q.6 1.02 × 109 cm
Exercise 2
Q.6 D Q.7 C
JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1
Q.1 20 m/s Q.2 1.728 × 108 N/m2 Q3 2.4 × 10–5 J
Exercise 2
Q.1 B Q.2 C Q.3 A Q.4 A
Solutions
L2 stress × length
Sol 2: L1 = (b) Elongation = ∆L =
2 y
d1 = 2d2 ; A1 = 4A2 3.18 × 108 × 1
= = 1.59 × 10–3 m = 1.59 mm
F 1 = F2 2 × 1011
FL ∆L 1.59 × 10−3 × 100
∆L = (c) % Strain = × 100 = = 0.159%
Ay L 1
∆L1 L A 1 1 1
= 1 2 = =
∆L2 A1L2 2 4 8
∆V stress
Sol 7: = –10–4 (iii) Young’s modulus =
V strain
P = 100 × 105 N/m2 2.45 ×107
= 1.5 × 1011 N/m2
−P 1.013 × 107 1.633 ×10−4
B= = = 1.013 × 1011 Nm–2
∆V / V 10 − 4
l L R2 1
∴ 1
= =
l2 2L 4R 2 8
P hysi cs | 8.101
ρ dp p
Sol 5: (A) The changed density, ρ ' = ∴ pdV + Vdp = 0 or = −
dp
1− dV V
B
Substituting the value, we have ∴ Bulk modulus,
11.4 dp dp
ρ' = B=– = − V
2.0 ×10 8
dV / V dV
1−
8.0 ×109 p
∴ B =− − V =p
ρ ' =11.69 g / cm ≈ 11.7g/cm
3 3
V
∴B=p
AL
Sol 6: (D) Mass of the rod = if A is its cross sectional Note: Adiabatic bulk modulus is given by B = gp.
area ρ
Weight acts at the mid-point Sol 3: (D) From the definition of bulk modulus,
mg (L / 2) −dp
Y
∴= × B=
A ∆L (dV / V)
If L is the original length Substituting the values, we have
Sol 7: (C) If L = initial length of the rod, increase in Time period, T= 2 π
g
length caused by temperature increase
When additional mass M is added to its bob
=Lαθ
+ ∆
If this expansion is prevented by a compressive force, TM= 2 π
then g
Mg
Lαθ +
Strain = αθ = 6 ×10−5 Mg AY
L ∆ = ⇒ TM =2π
AY g
∴ Stress developed in the rod
2
TM Mg
= Y × strain = 12 × 106 N/m2 = 1 +
T AY
= 1.2 × 107 N/m2
2
1 A TM
= − 1
Y Mg T
= Kinetic energy of missile Where A is the area of cross-section of the bar and L is
the initial length
1 1
∴ k( ∆l )2 =mv 2
2 2 FL
∴ l=
k 5.0 ×103 AY
∴ v
= ∆l = (12.0 − 10.0 ) ×10−2
Hence from equation (i), we have
m 5.0 ×10−3
F2L
= 20 m/s W=
2AY
Note: Following assumptions have been made in this
Here F = 5kg, wt=5 × 9.8 N, L=0.2 m
problem:
A = 1.0 cm2 = 1.0 × 10–6 m2 and
(i) k has been assumed constant, even though it
depends on the length (l). Y = 1.0 × 10–5 N/m2
(ii) The whole of the elastic potential energy is (5 × 9.8)2 × 0.2
converting into kinetic energy of missile. ∴ W=
2 × (1.0 ×10−4 ) × (1.0 ×1011 )
Sol 2: Let the initial volume of the block be V and v the = 2.4 ×10−5 J
increase in volume when it is heated t1 to t2. Then This is the increase in energy of the bar.
v= V × γ × (t2 − t1 )
Where γ is the coefficient of volume expansion. The Exercise 2
volume strain is therefore,
v
=γ(t2 − t1 ) Sol 1: (B)
V
F = Y α DtA; A = 2 × 10–6 m2
The bulk modulus is
change in pressure Y = 2 × 11 N/m2 ; α = 1.1 × 10–5
B=
volume strain T = 50 – 30 = 20°C
P F = 2 × 1011×1.1×10–5×20 × 2 × 10–6 = 88 N
B=
γ(t2 − t1 )
Sol 2: (C) Potential energy per unit volume = u
P =Bγ(t2 − t1 )
1 stress
= × stress × strain ; But Y =
Given B = 3.6 × 10 N/m
11 2 2 strain
γ = 3α = 3 × 8.0 × 10–6 ∴ stress = Y × strain = Y × S
l
Sol 2: (A) ∆l = .W
YA
i.e., graph is a straight line passing through origin (as
l
shown in question also), the slope of which is .
YA
l
\Slope =
YA
l 1
∴Y =
YA slope
Stress F / A FL FL
Y
= = = =
Strain l / L l A π d2
l
4
Substituting the values, we get
50 ×1.1 × 4
Y=
(1.25 ×10−3 ) × π× (5.0 ×10−4 )2
= 2.24 ×1011 N / m2
∆Y ∆L ∆l ∆d
Now, = + + 2
Y L l d
0.1 0.001 0.001
= + + 2 = 0.0489
110 0.125 0.05
DY = (0.0489) Y
= (0.0489) × (2.24 × 1011) N/m2 = 1.09 × 1010 N/m2
2017-18 100 &
op kers
Class 11 T
By E ran culty
-JE Fa r
IIT enior emie .
S fP r es
o titut
Ins
PHYSICS
FOR JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
SECOND
EDITION
Exhaustive Theory
(Now Revised)
Formula Sheet
9000+ Problems
based on latest JEE pattern
PlancEssential
Questions recommended for revision
9. FLUID MECHANICS
1. INTRODUCTION
Fluid is a collective term for liquid and gas. A fluid cannot sustain shear stress when at rest. We will study the
dynamics of non-viscous, incompressible fluid. We will be learning about pressure variation, Archemides principle,
equation of continity, Bernoulli’s Theorem and its applications and surface tension, Stoke’s Law and Terminal
velocity of a spherical body.
2. DEFINITION OF A FLUID
A fluid is a substance that deforms continuously under the application of a shear (tangential) stress no matter how
small the shear stress may be.
F F
3. FLUID STATICS
It refers to the state when there is no relative velocity between fluid elements. In this section we will learn some of
the properties of fluid statics.
3.1 Density
The density ρ of a substance is defined as the mass per unit volume of a sample of the substance. If a small mass
∆m
element ∆m occupies a volume ∆V, the density is given by ρ =
∆V
In general, the density of an object depends on position, so that ρ =f(x, y, z)
9 . 2 | Fluid Mechanics
If the object is homogeneous, its physical parameters do not change with position throughout its volume. Thus for
M
a homogeneous object of mass M and volume V, the density is defined as ρ =
V
Thus SI units of density are kg m–3.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Note: As pressure is increased, volume decreases and hence density will increase.
As the temperature of a liquid is increased, mass remains the same while the volume is increased.
Vaibhav Krishnan (JEE 2009, AIR 22)
Illustration 1: Find the density and specific gravity of gasoline if 51 g occupies 75 cm3? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Density is mass per unit volume, and specific gravity is the ratio of density of substance and density of water.
mass 0.051kg
Density = = = 680 kg/m3
volume 75 × 10−6 m3
Illustration 2: The mass of a liter of milk is 1.032 kg. The butterfat that it contains has a density of 865 kg/m3 when
pure, and it constitutes 4 percent of the milk by volume. What is the density of the fat-free skimmed milk?
(JEE MAIN)
Sol: Find the mass of butterfat present in the milk. Subtract this from total mass to get mass of fat-free milk. The
density of fat-free milk is equal to its mass divided by its volume.
Volume of fat in 1000 cm3 of milk = 4% × 1000 cm3 = 40 cm3
Mass of 40 cm3 fat = Vρ = (40 × 10–6 m3)(865 kg/m3) = 0.0346 kg
mass (1.032 − 0.0346)kg
Density of skimmed milk = =
volume (1000 − 40) × 10−6 m3
3.3 Pressure
The pressure exerted by a fluid is defined as the force per unit area at a point within the F
fluid. Consider an element of area ∆A as shown in the figure and an external force ∆F
is acting normal to the surface. The average pressure in the fluid at the position of the
∆F
element is given by Pav = [A normal force ∆F acts on a small cylindrical element of A
∆A
cross-section area ∆A.] Figure 9.2
P hysics | 9.3
Illustration 3: Atmospheric pressure is about 1.01 × 105 Pa. How large a force does the atmosphere exert on a 2
cm2 area on the top of your head? (JEE MAIN)
where ρ is the density of the fluid, and p0 is the atmospheric pressure at the
free surface of the liquid. Figure 9.5: A point A is located in
Note: Further, the pressure is the same at any two points at the same level in a fluid at a height from the bottom
the fluid. The shape of the container does not matter. and at a deth h from the free
surface
P0 P0
h
A B
Illustration 4: Find the absolute pressure and gauge pressure at point A, B and C as shown in the Fig. 9.6 (1 atm =
105 Pa) (JEE MAIN)
C->
= pc p1g(2) + ρ2g(2) + ρ3g(0.5)
ρC′ = pC + patm = 204kPa
= (800)(10)(2) + (10)3(10)(2) + 1(13.6 × 103)(10)(0.5) = 204 kPa
Gauge Pressure = 104 kPa.
Illustration 5: A glass full of water of a height of 10 cm has a bottom of area 10 cm2, top of area 30 cm2 and volume
1 litre. (JEE ADVANCED)
(a) Find the force exerted by the water on the bottom.
(b) Find the resultant force exerted by the side of the glass on the water.
(c) If the glass is covered by a jar and the air inside the jar is completely pumped out, what will be the answer to
parts (a) and (b).
(d) If a glass of different shape is used provided the height, the bottom area and the volume are unchanged, will
the answers to parts (a) and (b) change.
Take g = 10m/s2, density of water = 103 kg/m3 and atmospheric pressure = 1.01 × 105 N/m2.
Sol: Pressure at the bottom depends on the height of water in the container. Force = Pressure × Area. The force
on water surface due to atmospheric pressure plus the weight of water are balanced by the force on water by the
container bottom and its walls.
(a) Force exerted by the water on the bottom F1 = (P0 + rgh)A1 … (i)
Here, P0 = atmospheric pressure = 1.01 × 105 N/m2; ρ = density of water = 103 kg/m3
g = 10 m/s2, h = 10 cm = 0.1 m and A1 = area of base 10 cm2 = 10–3 m2 . Substituting in Eq. (i), we get F1=
(1.01 × 10 + 10 × 10 × 0.1) ×10 or F1 = 102 N (downwards)
5 3 –3
Illustration 6: Two vessels have the same base area but different shapes. The first vessel takes twice the volume
of water that the second vessel requires to fill up to a particular common height. Is the force exerted by water on
the base of the vessel the same in the two cases? If so, why do the vessels filled with water to the same height give
different reading on a weighing scale? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Force on the base of the vessel depends on the pressure on it, and pressure depends on the height of the
liquid in the vessel. On the other hand the normal reaction from the surface on which the vessel is kept, depends
on both the pressure at the base as well as the weight of the liquid in the vessel.
9 . 6 | Fluid Mechanics
Pressure (and therefore force) on the two equal base areas are identical. But force is exerted by water on the sides
of the vessels also, which has non-zero vertical component when the sides of the vessel are not perfectly normal to
the base. This net vertical component of force by water on the side of the vessel is greater for the first vessel than
the second. Hence, the vessels weigh different when the force on the base is the same in the two cases.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Since energy is always conserved, F1x1 = F2x2 where x1 and x2 are the distances moved by the pistons.
Nitin Chandrol (JEE 2012, AIR 134)
3
Patm + r wg(5) =pa + rkg(1.73) ; Pa = 138 kPa
2
Pascal’s principle tells us about the pressure applied to the fluid by the piston and atmosphere. This added pressure
is applied at all points within the fluid. Therefore the total pressure at B is composed of three parts: Pressure of
atmosphere = 1.0 × 105 Pa
W 200N
Pressure due to piston and weight = = = 2.5 × 105 Pa
A −4 2
8 × 10 m
Pressure due to height h of fluid = hrg = 0.33 × 105 Pa
In this case, the pressure of the fluid itself is relatively small. We have
Total pressure at B = 3.8 × 105 Pa = 383 kPa. The gauge pressure does not include atmospheric pressure. Therefore,
Gauge pressure at B = 280 kPa
Illustration 9: For the system shown in the figure, the cylinder on the left, at L,
has a mass of 600 kg and a cross-sectional area of 800 cm2. The piston on the F
right at S, has cross-sectional area 25 cm2 and negligible weight. If the apparatus
is filled with oil (ρ=0.78 g/cm3), find the force F required to hold the system in S
equilibrium as shown in figure. (JEE ADVANCED)
600 kg 8m
Sol: Apply Pascal’s law at two points at different heights from a common datum. L
H1 H2
The pressures at point H1 and H2 are equal because they are at the same level in
the single connected fluid. Therefore, Pressure at H1 = pressure at H2 = (pressure
due to F plus pressure due to liquid column above H2)
Illustration 10: As shown in the figure, as column of water 40 cm high supports 31 cm of an unknown fluid. What
is the density of the unknown fluid? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Find the hydrostatic pressure at the bottom most point A due
to both the water column and the unknown fluid column.
The pressure at point A due to the two fluids must be equal (or
the one with the higher pressure would push lower pressure fluid
away). Therefore, pressure due to water = pressure due to known 40 cm
h 40
fluid; h1r1g = h2r2g, from which r2 = 1 p1 = (1000 kg/m2) = 1290 31 cm
h 31
kg/m3 2
−p0
ρ gh
p p
After integrating, we get ln = – 0 gh or p = p0 0
p0 p0
Note: Instead of a linear decrease in pressure with increasing height as in the case of an incompressible fluid, in
this case pressure decreases exponentially.
4.1 Manometer P0
A manometer is a tube open at both ends and bent into the
shape of a “U” and is partially filled with mercury. When one
end of the tube is subjected to an unknown pressure p, the
mercury level drops on that side of the tube and rises on the h
other so that the difference in mercury level is h as shown in P =?
the figure. P0 h0
When we move down in a fluid, pressure increases with B
A
depth and when we move up the pressure decreases with
height. When we move horizontally in a fluid, pressure
remains constant. Therefore, p + r0gh0 – rmgh = p0 where p0 is
atmospheric pressure, and rm is the density of the fluid inside
the vessel. Figure 9.12: An U-shaped manometer tube
connected to a vessel
Po=
4.2 The Mercury Barometer
O
Pm
It is a straight glass tube (closed at one end) completely filled with mercury
and inserted into a dish which is also filled with mercury as shown in the Po Po
h
figure. Atmospheric pressure supports the column of mercury in the tube to A B
a height h. The pressure between the closed end of the tube and the column
of mercury is zero, p = 0. Therefore, pressure at points A and B are equal and
thus p0 = 0 + rmgh. Hence, p0 = (13.6 × 103)(9.8)(0.76) = 1.01 × 105 Nm-2 for Pa. A mercury barometer
Figure 9.13
Illustration 11: What must be the length of a barometer tube used to measure atmospheric pressure if we are to
use water instead of mercury? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The length of the barometer tube will be inversely proportional to the density of fluid used in it.
We know that p0 = rmghm = r wghw where r w and hw are the density and height of the water column supporting the
atmospheric pressure p0.
ρm ρm
\ hw = hw ; Since = 13.6 ; hw = 0.76 m = (13.6)(0.76) = 10.33 m.
ρw ρw
P + dP (P + dP)A
A dy A ay
P
x PA
Figure 9.14
Similarly, if the beaker moves along positive x-direction with acceleration ax, the equation of motion for the fluid
element shown in the figure is, PA – (P + dP) A
= (mass)(ax) y
dP
or (dP)A = (Aρ dx)ax Or = −ρax
dx
But suppose the beaker is accelerated and it (P + dP)A
has components of acceleration ax and ay in x ax PA
P + dP
and y directions respectively, then the pressure P A
decreases along both x and y directions. The A
above equation ax
dx
in that case reduces to, x
dP dP Figure 9.15
= −ρax and = −ρ(g + ay ) ….. (i)
dx dy
For surface of a Liquid Accelerated in Horizontal Direction.
Consider a liquid placed in a beaker which is accelerating horizontally with an y
acceleration ‘a’. Let A and B be two points in the liquid at a separation x in the
same horizontal line. As we have seen in this case.
dP
= −ρa or dP = -ra dx. Integrating this with proper limits, we get
dx h1 a
PA – PB = pax ….. (ii)
h2
A B
Further, PA = P0 + rgh1 And PB = P0 + rgh2
h1 − h2
Substituting in Eq. (ii), we get pg(h1 – h2) = pax \ x
x
x
a a Figure 9.16
= = tan θ \ tan θ =
g g
Note: When ay is not equal to zero then the angle of inclination is given by
dy (dp) ax
tan=
θ = =
dx dp g + ay
dy
9 . 1 0 | Fluid Mechanics
Illustration 12: A liquid of density ρ is in a bucket that spins with angular velocity ω as shown is
the figure. Show that the pressure at a radial distance r from the axis is
ρω2r 2
P
= P0 + where P0 is the atmospheric pressure. (JEE ADVANCED)
2
Sol: The net force on the liquid surface in equilibrium is always perpendicular to it as the liquid
surface cannot sustain shear stress.
Consider a fluid particle P of mass m at coordinates (x, y). From a non-inertial rotating frame of
reference, two forces are acting on it.
Figure 9.17
(i) Pseudo force (mxω2 ) y
(ii) Weight (mg) in the direction shown in figure.
Net force on it should be perpendicular to the free
P mx²
surface (in equilibrium). Hence,
P
mxω2 xω2 dy xω2 x
tan θ
= = or = mg F net
mg g dx g
y x
xω2 x2 ω2
∫ dy
∴= ∫ g ⋅ dx ∴ y =
2g P(x,y)
0 0
Figure 9.18
This is the equation of the free surface of the liquid, which is a parabola.
P y
r 2 ω2 ρω2r 2
As x = r, y = ∴ P(r)= P0 + ρgy or P(r)
= P0 +
2g 2 x=r P(r)
Figure 9.19
Hence proved.
a Front
Rear
Illustration 13: An open rectangular tank 5 m × 4 m × 3 m high containing
water up to a height of 2 m is accelerated horizontally along the longer side. 3m
Water 2m
(a) Determine the maximum acceleration that can be given without spilling
the water.
(b) Calculate the percentage of water split over, if this acceleration is 5m
increased by 20%. Figure 9.20
(c) If initially, the tank is closed at the top and is accelerated horizontally
by 9 m/s2, find the gauge pressure at the bottom of the front and rear 0
walls of the tank. (Take g = 10 m/s2) (JEE MAIN)
3m a0
Sol: As the water column is accelerated towards right in horizontal direction, 2m
the free surface will not be horizontal but will be inclined at an angle with y0
the θ horizontal, such that the left edge of the surface is at a higher level
than the right edge. This is because the pressure at the left of water column 5m
will be more than the pressure at the right of it. Figure 9.21
(a) Volume of water inside the tank remains constant
3 + y0 3 −1
5 × 4 = 5 × 2 × 4 or y0 = 1m \tan q0 = 5 = 0.4 3m
2
a v
Since, tan q0 = 0 , therefore a0 = 0.4 g = 4 m/s2
g
5m
(b) When acceleration is increased by 20% Figure 9.22
P hysi cs | 9.11
a x
a = 1.2 a0 = 0.48 g ∴ tan θ = = 0.48
g Air
Now, y = 3 – 5 tan θ = 3 – 5 (0.48) = 0.6 m y
(3 + 0.6) 3m
4 × 2×5 − ×5× 4
Fraction of water split over = 2 = 0.1 Water W
2×5× 4
Illustration 14: A vertical U-tube with the two limbs 0.75 m apart with water and rotated
about a vertical axis 0.5 m from the left limb, as shown in the figure. Determine the difference
in elevation of the water levels in the two limbs, when the speed of rotation is 60 rpm.
(JEE MAIN)
0.5m
Sol: Each element of water in the tube is accelerated towards the axis. Along the horizontal 0.75m
part of the tube, the pressure will increase gradually as one moves radially away Figure 9.24
from the axis. The extra pressure provides the required centripetal acceleation.
Consider a small element of length dr at a distance r from the axis of rotation.
Considering the equilibrium of this element.
(p + dp) – p = rw2 r dr or dp = rw2 r dr
On integrating between 1 and 2
r1
2 ρω2 2 2
p1 – p2 = ρω ∫ r dr = (r − r )
r2
2 1 2
ω2 2 2 (2π)2
or h1 – h2 = [r1 − r2 ] = [(0.5)2 – (0.25)2] = 0.37 m.
2g 2(10)
Figure 9.25
6. BUOYANCY
If a body is partially or wholly immersed in a fluid, it experiences an upward force due to the fluid surrounding it.
The phenomenon of force exerted by fluid on the body is called buoyancy and the force is called buoyant force. A
body experiences buoyant force whether it floats or sinks, under its own weight or due to other forces applied on it.
Note: The buoyant force is due to the fact that the hydrostatic pressure at different depths is not the same.
Buoyant force is independent of:
(a) Total volume and shape of the body.
(b) Density of the body.
9 . 1 2 | Fluid Mechanics
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
The fluid exerts force on the immersed part of the body from all directions.
The net force experienced by every vertical element of the body is in the upward direction.
A uniform body floats in a liquid if density of the body is less than or equal to the density of the liquid
and sinks if density of the uniform body is greater than that of the liquid.
B Rajiv Reddy (JEE 2012, AIR 11)
V ρ w − ρI
or =
V0 ρw
V 1025 − 920
Since, r w = 1025 kg m-3 and ri = 920 kg m3, therefore, = = 0.10
V0 1025
Hence 10% of the total volume is visible.
Illustration 16: When a 2.5 kg crown is immersed in water, it has an apparent weight of 22 N. What is the density
of the crown? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Apply Archemides principle.
Let W = actual weight of the crown and W’ = apparent weight of the crown
ρ = density of crown, r0 = density of water. The buoyant force is given by FE = W – W’ or
W
r0Vg = W – W’. Since W = rVg, therefore, V = . Eliminating V from the above equation, we get
ρg
ρ0 W (10)3 (25)
ρ= . Here W = 25 N; W’ = 22 N; r0 = 103 kg m-3 ; ρ = = 9.3 × 103 kg m-3.
W − W' 25 − 22
Illustration 17: The tension in a string holding a solid block below the surface of a liquid (of
density greater than that of solid) as shown in figure is T0 when the system is at rest. What
will be the tension in the string if the system has an upward acceleration a? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The weight and tension force on the block are balanced by the buoyant force on it.
When the system is accelerated upwards, the effective value of g is increased.
Let m be the mass of block.
Initially for the equilibrium of block, F = T0 + mg ….(i)
Figure 9.27
Here, F is the up thrust on the block.
g+a
Hence F' = F ...(ii)
g
From Newton’s second law, F’ – T – mg = ma ...(iii)
a
Solving equations (i), (ii) and (iii), we get
= T T0 1 +
g
Figure 9.28
Fa
M
Fb
W
W
W
(a) (b)
Figure 9.30
(a) The buoyant force acts at the centre of gravity of the displaced fluid.
(b) When the boat tilts, the line of action of the buoyant force intersects the axis of the boat at the metacentre M. In
a stable boat, M is above the centre of gravity of the boat. When the body tilts to one side, the centre of buoyancy
shifts relative to the centre of gravity as shown in the figure (b). The two forces act along different vertical lines.
As a result, the buoyant force exerts a torque about the centre of gravity. The line of action of the buoyant force
crosses the axis of the body at the point M, called metacentre. If G is below M, the torque will tend to restore the
body to its equilibrium position. If G is above M, the torque will tend to rotate the body away from its equilibrium
position and the body will be unstable.
Illustration 19: A wooden plank of length 1 m and uniform cross section is hinged at
one end to the bottom of a tank as shown in the figure. The tank is filled with water
up to a height of 0.5 m. The specific gravity of the plank is 0.5. Find the angle θ that mg
the plank makes with the vertical in the equilibrium position. (Exclude the case θ = 0)
(JEE ADVANCED) Figure 9.31
Sol: The net torque about the hinge due the weight of the plank and due to the buoyant force acting on the plank
should be zero.
The forces acting on the plank are shown in the figure. The height of water level is 0.5m. The length of the plank
is 1.0 = 2 . We have OB = . The buoyant force F acts through the mid-point of the dipped part OC of the plank.
OC
We have OA = = ; Let the mass per unit length of the plank be ρ.
2 2cos θ
P hysi cs | 9.15
Its weight mg = 2 rg; The mass of the part OC of the plank = ρ .
cos θ
1 1 2ρ 2ρg
The mass of water displaced = ρ= ; The buoyant force F is, therefore, F = .
0.5 cos θ cos θ cos θ
Now, for equilibrium, the torque of mg about O should balance the torque of F about O.
2ρ 1 1
So, mg (OB) sin θ = F(OA) sin θ or (2 ρ) = or cos θ = or cos θ =
2
, or θ = 45º
cos θ 2cos θ 2 2
H
Where ∫ h dF is the moment of force about the free surface.
0
H H H
1
Here ∫ h dF = ρgb ∫ h2dh =
∫ h(ρ gbh dh) = ρgH3 ;
0 0 0
3
1 2
Since F = rgbH2 , therefore, hc = H
2 3
Illustration 20: Find the force acting per unit width on a plane wall
inclined at an angle θ with the horizontal as shown in the figure.
(JEE MAIN) h=y sin
dF y
Sol: The pressure at each point on the wall will be different, H
depending on the height. Find pressure on a small element, and use dy
the method of integration.
Consider a small element of thickness dy at a distance y measured Figure 9.33
along the wall from the free surface. There pressure at the position
of the element is p = rgh = rgy sin θ. The force given by dF = p(b dy) = rgb(y dy) sin q
H/sin θ H/sin θ
F y2
The total force per unit width b is given by =ρgsin θ . ∫ y dy =
ρg sin θ
b 0 2 0
9 . 1 6 | Fluid Mechanics
F 1 H2
Or = ρg
b 2 sin θ
1
Note: That the above formula reduces to rgH2 for a vertical wall (θ = 90º)
2
suppose, m is the mass of the liquid in the tube. Then, ma = −ρgA ( sin θ1 + sin θ2 ) x Figure 9.34
Since, F or a is proportional to –x, the motion of the liquid column is simple harmonic
in nature, time period of which is given by,
x m
Τ = 2π or Τ = 2π
a ρgA ( sin θ1 + sin θ2 )
F − (ρ A y ) g g
Acceleration a of the cylinder is given by a = = = − y ...(i) … (i)
m ρ Ah h
Since g/h is constant, a α − y Thus the acceleration a of the body (wooden cylinder) is directly proportional to
the displacement y and its direction is opposite to the displacement. Therefore, motion of the cylinder is simple
harmonic.
h
∴ Time period T = 2π … (ii)
g
1 1 g
∴ Frequency =
f = … (iii)
T 2π h
These very interesting results show that time period and frequency have the same form as that of simple pendulum.
The submerged depth at equilibrium takes the place of the length of the pendulum.
P hysi cs | 9.17
7. FLUID DYNAMICS
In the order to describe the motion of a fluid, in principle, one might apply Newton’s laws to a particle (a small
volume element of fluid) and follow its progress in time. This is a difficult approach. Instead, we consider the
properties of the fluid, such as velocity, pressure, at fixed points in space. In order to simplify the discussion we
take several assumptions:
(i) The fluid is non viscous (ii) The flow is steady
(iii) The flow is non rotational (iv) The fluid is incompressible.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Illustration 21: Water is flowing through a horizontal tube of non-uniform cross-section. At a place, the radius of
the tube is 1.0 cm and the velocity of water is 2 m/s. What will be the velocity of water, where the radius of the pipe
is 2.0 cm? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Apply the equation of continuity. Where area of cross-section is larger, the velocity of water is lesser and vice-
versa.
2
A πr 2 r
Using equation of continuity, A1v1 = A2v2 ; v 2 = 1 v1=
or v 2 = 1
v1 1 v1
A2 πr 2 r2
2
1.0 × 10−2
Substituting the value, we get v 2 = or v2 = 0.5 m/s
2.0 × 10−2
Sol: Apply the equation of continuity. Where area of cross-section is larger, the velocity of liquid is lesser and vice-versa.
From the equation of continuity A1v1 = A2v2
or (1.0 cm2) (2 cm s-1) = (20 mm2) v2
1.0 cm2
or v2 = × 2 cm s−1
20 mm2
100 mm2
= × 2 cm s−1 =
10 cm s−1
20 mm2
8. BERNOULLI’S THEOREM
When a non-viscous and an incompressible fluid flows in a streamlined motion from one place to another in a
container, then the total energy of the fluid per unit volume is constant at every point of its path. Total energy =
pressure energy + Kinetic energy + Potential energy
1
= PV + Mv2 + Mgh
2
Where P is pressure, V is volume, M is mass and h is height from a
reference level.
1
∴ The total energy per unit volume = P + rv2 + rgh
2
Where ρ is density. Thus if a liquid of density ρ, pressure P1 at a height
h1 which flows with velocity v1 to another point in streamline motion Figure 9.39
where the liquid has pressure P2, at height h2 which flows with velocity
v 2,
1 1
then P1 + ρv12 + ρgh1= P2 + ρv 22 + ρgh2
2 2
8.1 Derivations
1m 2 1 2
∴ Kinetic energy per unit volume of liquid. = v = ρv . Here, ρ is the density of liquid.
2 V 2
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
P v2
is called the ‘pressure head’, the velocity head and h the gravitational head.
ρg 2g
GV Abhinav JEE 2012, AIR 329
Illustration 23: Calculate the rate of flow of glycerin of density 1.25×103 kg/m3 through the conical section of a
pipe, if the radii of its ends are 0.1 m and 0.04 m and the pressure drop across its length is 10 N/m2. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Apply the equation of continuity. Where area of cross-section is larger, the velocity
of fluid is lesser and vice-versa.
From continuity equation, A1v1 = A2v2
2
v1 A2 πr22 r2 0.04 4
or = = = r =
= ... (i)
v 2 A1 πr 2 1 0.1 25
1 Figure 9.40
1 1
From Bernoulli’s equation , P1 + ρv12 = P2 + ρv 22
2 2
2 × 10
or v 22 − v12 = = 1.6 × 10−2 m2 / s2 ... (ii)
3
1.25 × 10
Solving equations (i) and (ii), we get v2 = 0.128 m/s
\ Rate of volume flow through the tube
Q = A2v2 = (pr22) v2= π (0.04)2(0.128) = 6.43 × 10–4 m3/s
Illustration 24: Figure shows a liquid of density 1200 kg m–3 flowing steadily in
a tube of varying cross section. The cross section at a point A is 1.0 cm2 and that
at B is 20 mm2, the points A and B are in the same horizontal plane. The speed
of the liquid at A is 10 cm s-1. Calculate the difference in pressure at A and B.
(JEE ADVANCED) Figure 9.41
Sol: Apply the equation of continuity. Where area of cross-section is larger, the velocity of fluid is lesser and vice-
versa.
9 . 2 0 | Fluid Mechanics
1.0cm2
or (1.0 cm2) (10 cm s-1) = (20 mm2)v2 or v2 = ×10cm s−1 =50 cm s−1
20mm2
1 1
By Bernoulli equation, P1 + ρgh1 + ρv12= P2 + ρgh2 + ρv 22
2 2
1 2 1 2 1
Here h1 = h2. Thus P1 – P2 = ρv − ρv = × (1200 kg m−2 )(2500 cm2 s−2 − 100 cm2 s−2 )
2 2 2 1 2
= 600 kg m-3 × 2400 cm2 s-2 = 144 Pa
8.2.1 Venturimeter
Figure shows a venturimeter used to measure
flow speed in a pipe of non-uniform cross-
section. We apply Bernoulli’s equation to the h
wide (point 1) and narrow (point 2) parts of
the pipe, with h1 = h2
1 1
P1 + ρv12 = P2 + ρv 22 p1
2 2
p2
A1 v1
From the continuity equation v 2 = v1 v2
A2
A2
Venturimeter
1 A2
we get P1 − P2 = ρv12 1 − 1 …(i) Figure 9.42
2 A2
2
The pressure difference is also equal to rgh, where h is the difference in liquid level in the two tubes.
2gh
Substituting in equation (i), we get v1 =
2
A1
− 1
A2
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Because A1 is greater than A2, v2 is greater than v1 and hence the pressure P2 is less than P1.
dV 2gh
The discharge or volume flow rate can be obtained as, = A=
1 v1 A1
dt A1
2
A − 1
2
Anurag Saraf (JEE 2011, AIR 226)
P hysi cs | 9.21
9. TORRICELLI’S THEOREM
It states that the velocity of efflux of a liquid through an orifice is
equal to that velocity which a body would attain in falling from a
height from the free surface of a liquid to the orifice. If h is the height
of the orifice below the free surface of a liquid and g is acceleration
due to gravity, the velocity of efflux of liquid = v= 2gh . Total energy
per unit volume of the liquid at the surface = KE + PE + Pressure
energy = 0 + rgh + P0 ...(i)
1 2 2(H − h)
Now, H–h= gt ⇒ t = . From equation (i),
2 g
2(H − h)
R= 2gh × = 2h × 2(H − h) × h(H − h)2
g
\ =R 2 h(H − h)
dR H − 2h H
Range is max. if = 0 ⇒2× 0 ⇒ H – 2h = 0 ⇒ h =
=
dh 2 h(H − h) 2
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
R h = RH – h
Rh = 2 h(H − h)
RH–h = 2 h(H − h)
i.e. Range would be the same when the hole is at a
height h
or at a height H – h from the ground or from the top
of the beaker.
H Figure 9.44
R is maximum at h = and Rmax =H.
2
Vijay Senapathi (JEE 2011, AIR 71)
9 . 2 2 | Fluid Mechanics
dV
At this instant volume of liquid coming out of the hole per second is 1 .
dt
dV
Volume of liquid coming down in the tank per second is 2 .
dt
t 0
dV1 dV2 dy dy A −1/2
dt
=
dt
; \ av
dt
= A − Or
= A − ∴ a 2gy
dt
∫ dt = − ∫y
a 2g H
dy
0
2A A 2H
∴t = [ y ]H0 =
a 2g a g
Illustration 25: A tank is filled with a liquid up to a height H. A small hole is made at the bottom of this tank. Let t1
be the time taken to empty first half of the tank and t2 the time taken to empty rest half of the tank.
t1
Then find . (JEE MAIN)
t2
A H
Or t1
= ( 2 − 1) …(ii)
a g
t2 A 0 A H
Similarly ∫0 dt = − ∫ y
−1/2
dy Or t2 = ... (iii)
a 2g H/2 a g
t1 t1
From equations (ii) and (iii), we get = 2 − 1 Or = 0.414
t2 t2
P hysi cs | 9.23
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
From here we see that t1< t2. This is because inititally the pressure is high and the liquid comes out with
greater speed.
Ankit Rathore (JEE Advanced 2013, AIR 158)
10. VISCOSITY
When a liquid moves slowly and steadily on a horizontal surface, its layer in contact with the fixed surface is
stationary and the velocity of the layers increase with the distance from the fixed surface.
Consider two layers CD and MN of a liquid at distances x and x + dx from the fixed surface AB having velocities v
dv
and v + dv respectively as shown in the figure. Here denotes the rate of change of velocity with distance and
dx
is known as velocity gradient. The tendency of the upper layer is to accelerate the motion and the lower layer tries
to retard the motion of upper layer. The two layers together tend to destroy their relative motion as if there is some
backward dragging force acting tangentially on the layers. To maintain the motion, an external force is applied to
overcome this backward drag.
Hence the property of a liquid virtue of which it opposes the relative motion between its different layers is
known as viscosity.
dv
The viscous force is given by F = −ηA
dx
Where η is a constant, called the coefficient of viscosity.
The SI unit of η is N-s/m2. It is also called decapoise or Pascal second. Thus,
1 decapoise = N-s/m2 = 1 Pa-s = 10 poise.
Dimensions of h are [ML-1T-1]
Figure 9.45
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
The negative sign in the above equation shows that the direction of viscous force F is opposite to the
direction of relative velocity of the layer.
Viscous force depends upon the velocity gradient whereas the mechanical frictional force is independent
of the velocity gradient.
Vaibhav Gupta (JEE 2009, AIR 54)
Illustration 26: A plate of area 2 m2 is made to move horizontally with a speed of 2 m/s by applying a horizontal
tangential force over the free surface of a liquid. The depth of the liquid is 1 m and the liquid in contact with the
bed is stationary. Coefficient of viscosity of liquid is 0.01 poise. Find the tangential force needed to move the plate.
(JEE MAIN)
9 . 2 4 | Fluid Mechanics
Sol: Apply the Newton’s formula for the frictional force between two layers v=2 m/s
of a liquid. F
∆v 2−0 m/s
Velocity gradient = = =2 1m
∆y 1−0 m
From Newton’s law of viscous force,
∆v
|F| = ηA = (0.01 × 10-1)(2)(2) = 4 × 10-3 N. Figure 9.46
∆y
So, to keep the plate moving, a force of 4 × 10-3 N must be applied.
Mg
Figure 9.47
4 2 r 2 (ρ − σ)g
6πηrV= πpr3 (ρ − σ)g ⇒ V =
3 9 η
Note: From the above expression we can see that terminal velocity of a spherical body is directly proportional to
the densities of the body and the fluid (ρ – σ). If the density of the fluid is greater than that of the body (.i.e. σ>ρ),
the terminal velocity is negative. This means that the body instead of falling, moves upward. This is why air bubbles
rise up in water.
Illustration 28: Two spherical raindrops of equal size are falling vertically through air with a terminal velocity of
1 m/s. What would be the terminal speed if these two drops were to coalesce to form a large spherical drop?
(JEE MAIN)
Sol: Use the formula for terminal velocity for spherical body.
vT ∝ r2. Let r be the radius of small rain drops and R the radius of large drop.
4 4
Equating the volume, we have πR 2 = 2 πr 3
3 3
2
R vT 'R
\ R = (2) . r
1/3
or = (2)1/3 \ = = (2)2/3
r vT r
Illustration 29: An air bubble of diameter 2 mm rises steadily through a solution of density 1750 kg m-3 at the rate
of 0.35 cm s-1. Calculate the coefficient of viscosity of the solution. The density of air is negligible. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: As the air bubble rises with constant velocity, the net force on it is zero.
4 3
The force of buoyancy B is equal to the weight of the displaced liquid. Thus B = pr sg.
3
This force is upward. The viscous force acting downward is F = 6 π hrv.
The weight of the air bubble may be neglected as the density of air is small. For uniform velocity
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Surface tension acts over the free surface of a liquid only and not within the interior of the liquid.
Due to surface tension the insects can walk on liquid surface.
Vaibhav Krishnan (JEE 2009, AIR 22)
Illustration 30: Calculate the force required to take away a flat circular plate of radius 4 cm from the surface of
water, surface tension of water being 75 dyne cm-1. (JEE MAIN)
Now, suppose the wire is moved through a small distance dx, the work done by the force is,
dW = F dx = (2T )dx
But (2 )(dx) is the total increase in the area of both the surfaces of the film. Let it be dA. Then,
dW
dW = T da or T =
dA
Thus, the surface tension T can also be defined as the work done in increasing the surface area by unity. Further,
since there is no change in kinetic energy, the work done by the external force is stored as the potential energy of
the new surface.
dU
∴T= (as dW = dU)
dA
Thus, the surface tension of a liquid is equal to the surface energy per unit surface area.
Illustration 31: How much work will be done in increasing the diameter of a soap bubble from 2 cm to 5 cm?
Surface tension of soap solution is 3.0 × 10-2 N/m. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Work done will be equal to the increase in the surface porential energy, which is surface tension multiplied by
increase in area of surface of liquid.
Soap bubble has two surfaces. Hence, W = T ∆A
Here, ∆A = 2[4p{(2.5×10–2)2 – (1.0×10–2)2}] = 1.32 × 10-2 m2
W = (3.0×10–2)(1.32×10–2)J = 3.96×10–4J
Illustration 32: Calculate the energy released when 1000 small water drops each of same radius 10–7m coalesce to
form one large drop. The surface tension of water is 7.0×10-2 N/m. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Energy released will be equal to the loss in surface potential energy.
Let r be the radius of smaller drops and R of bigger one.
4 3 4
Equating the initial and final volumes, we have πR = (1000) πr 3
3 3
R = 10r = (10)(10–7) m = 10-6 m. Further, the water drops have only one free surface. Therefore,
∆A = 4pR2 – (1000)(4pr2) = 4p[(10–6)2 – (103)(10–7)2] = –36π(10–12)m2
Here, negative sign implies that surface area is decreasing. Hence, energy is released in the process.
U = T[∆A] = (7×10–2)(36p×10–12)J = 7.9×10–12J
Figure 9.52
To obtain a relation between the excess of pressure and the surface tension, consider a water drop of radius r and
surface tension T. Divide the drop into two halves by a horizontal passing through its centre as shown in figure and
consider the equilibrium of one-half, say, the upper half. The force acting on it are:
(a) Force due to surface tension distributed along the circumference of the section.
(b) Outward thrust on elementary areas of it due to excess pressure.
Obviously, both the types of forces are distributed. The first type of distributed forces combine into a force of
magnitude 2pr×T. To find the resultant of the other type of distributed forces, consider an elementary area DS of
the surface. The outward thrust on DS = pDS where p is the excess of the pressure inside the bubble. If this thrust
makes an angle θ with the vertical, then it is equivalent to DSp cos θ along the vertical and DSp sin θ along the
horizontal. The resolved component DSp sin θ is infective as it is perpendicular to the resultant force due to surface
tension. The resolved component DSp cos θ is equal to balancing the force due to surface tension
The resultant outward thrust = ΣDSp cos θ = pΣDS cos θ = pΣDS cos q = pΣDS’
where DS’ = DS cos θ = area of the projection of DS on the horizontal dividing plane
= p × pr2 ( DS’ = pr2)
2T
For equilibrium of the bubble we have pr2 p = 2pr T or p =
r
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
As the thickness of the bubble is small on a macroscopic scale, the difference in the radii P1
of the two surfaces will be negligible.
P’
Similarly, looking at the inner surface, the air is on the concave side of the surface, hence
P2 − P' = 2S / R . Adding the two equations, P2 − P1 = 4S / R P2
Illustration 33: What should be the pressure inside a small air bubble of 0.1 mm radius
situated just below the water surface? Surface tension of water = 7.2×10 –2 N/m and
atmospheric pressure = 1.013 ×105 N/m2.
(JEE MAIN) Figure 9.54
Sol: Pressure inside the air bubble is larger than that outside it by amount 2T/R, where T is surface tension and R
is its radius.
Surface tension of water T = 7.2×10–2 N/m; Radius of air bubble R = 0.1 mm = 10–4 m
2T
The excess pressure inside the air bubble is given by, P2 – P1 =
R
2T
∴ Pressure inside the air bubble, P2 = P1 + ; Substituting the values, we have,
R
(2 × 7.2 × 10−2 )
P2 = (1.013×105) + = 1.027 × 105 N/m2
10−4
Illustration 34: A 0.02 cm liquid column balances the excess pressure inside a soap bubble of radius 7.5 mm.
Determine the density of the liquid. Surface tension of soap solution = 0.03 Nm–1. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Pressure inside the soap bubble is larger than that outside it by amount 4T/R, where T is surface tension and
R is its radius. Gauge pressure of liquid column is ρgh where symbols have the usual meaning.
4 × 0.03Nm−1
The excess pressure inside a soap bubble is DP = 4S/R = = 16 Nm–2
7.5 × 10−3 m
The pressure due to 0.02 cm of the liquid column is P = hrg = (0.02 × 10–2 m) ρ (9.8 ms–2)
Thus, 16 N m–2 = (0.02 × 10–2 m) ρ (9.8 ms–2); ρ = 9.2 × 103 kg m–3.
2T cos θ
If value of the liquid in meniscus is negligible then, 2prT cos θ = (pr2h )rg; h =
rρg
The small volume of the liquid above the horizontal plane through the lowest point of the meniscus can be
calculated if θ is given or known. For pure water and glass θ = 0º and hence the meniscus is hemispherical.
\ V = volume of the cylinder of height r – volume of hemisphere.
1 4π 3 2 1
πr3 −
= r = πr3 − πr3 = πr3
2 3 3 3
3
πr
\ For water and glass 2πrT = πr 2h + ρg
3
r 2T r
2T = r h + ρg ⇒ = h −
3 rρg 3
For a given liquid and solid at a given place as ρ, T, θ and g are constant, \ hr = constant
i.e. lesser t the radius of capillary greater will be the rise and vice-versa.
Illustration 36: A capillary tube of radius 0.20 mm is dipped vertically in water. Find the height of the water
column raised in the tube. Surface tension of water = 0.075 N m –1 and density of water = 1000 kg m–3. Take
g = 10 m s–2. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Use the formula for height of the liquid in the capillary.
2S cos θ 2 × 0.075 N m−1 × 1
We have, h= = = 0.075 m = 7.5 cm.
rρg (0.20 × 10−3 m) × (1000 kg m−3 )(10 m s−2 )
(a) Suppose two liquids of densities r1 and r2 having masses m1 and m2 are mixed together.
(m1 + m2 )
Then the density of the mixture will be =
m1 m2
+
ρ1 ρ2
If two liquids of densities r1 and r2 having volume V1 and V2 are mixed, then the density of the mixture will be
ρ1 V1 + ρ2 V2
.
V1 + V2
(b) When solving questions on Bernoulli’s always assume a reference level and calculate the heights from the
reference level.
P hysi cs | 9.31
FORMULAE SHEET
Fluid Statics:
mass
1. Density = , S.I. units: kg/m3
volume
Ratio of its density
2. Specific gravity / Relative density / Specific density = ,
Ratio of density of water at 4º C
S.I. units: No units
3. If two liquids of volume V1 and V2 and densities d1 and d2 respectively are mixed then the density d of the
V d + V2d2 d + d2
mixture is d = 1 1 ; If V1 = V2 then d = 1
V1 + V2 2
4. If two liquids of densities d1 and d2 and masses m1 and m2 respectively are mixed together,
m1 + m2 2d1d2
then the density d of the mixture is d = ; if m1 = m2 then d =
m1 m2 d1 + d2
+
d1 d2
Normal component of force f
5. Pressure = = , S.I. units: N/m2, Pa
Area on which force acts A
6. Pressure P acting at the bottom of an open fluid column of height h and density d is
= 1.013 × 105 Pa = 1.013 × 105 Pa = 1.013 × 106 dynes/cm2= 76 cm of Hg = 760 torr = 1.013 bars.
Pa P = Pa + hdg dp
=sg
dh
(As h increases
Pv h Absolute Atmospheric
P increases)
pressure pressure
Figure 9.56
P – Pa = hdg
gauge pressure = absolute – atmospheric pressure.
7.
Figure 9.57
Area of smaller piston, a; area of larger piston, A, f is applied on the smaller piston
F f
Force F developed on the larger piston =
A a
9 . 3 2 | Fluid Mechanics
fA
\ F=
a
8. Beaker is accelerated in horizontal direction
Figure 9.58
9. Beaker is accelerated and it has components of acceleration ax, and ay in x and y directions respectively.
ay
y ay
Figure 9.59
dP
P increases with depth → = p(g + ay)
dy
P is the density of the fluid.
dP
ρ is the density of the fluid. = −pax
dx
10. Buoyant force F = V1ρ1 (g − a)
11. Body floats when Buoyant force balances the weight of the body.
Viρ2g = Vb ρb g
Buoyant Weight
force of body
Figure 9.60
r2 = density of liquid.
Vi ρb
Fraction of volume immersed =
ρ2 Vb
Vi ρ
% of volume immersed × 100 = b ×100.
Vb ρ2
i.e.,
dV
15. Volumetric flow Q = Aν = A – Area of cross section; ν – Velocity; V– Volume
dt
m3
S.I. unit =
S
V = 2gh
height
velocity of
efflux
Figure 9.62
9 . 3 4 | Fluid Mechanics
Range
= R 2 h(H − h)
H
Range is maximum at h = and Rmax = H
2
Ab – Area of orifice
A – Area of cross-section of the container.
A 2
Time taken to fall from H1 to H2 = t ×
A0 g
dv
17. Viscous Force F = ηA
dy
↓
coefficient of viscosity
L – Length of pipe
P1 and P2 are pressure at two ends of pipe.
R – Radius of pipe.
When liquid is flowing through a tube, velocity of flow of a liquid at distance from the axis.
=V
4
P
η L
( )
r 2 − x2 . Velocity distribution curve is a parabola.
18. Stoke’s Law: Formula for the viscous force on a sphere
Figure 9.63
4T
P – P0 =
R
P hysi cs | 9.35
Figure 9.64
R – radius of bubble
T – surface tension force
Solved Examples
JEE Main/Boards
Example 1: For the arrangement shown in the figure. Sol: Level of liquid will rise or fall depending on the
What is the density of oil? density of the solid.
Let M = Mass of the floating solid.
C r1 = density of liquid formed by the melting of the solid.
d=12.3 mm
d=12.3mm
Oil r2= density of the liquid in which the solid is floating.
The mass of liquid displaced by the solid is M. Hence,
M
the volume of liquid displaced is . When the solid
= 135 mm ρ2
M
B melts, the volume occupied by it is . Hence, the level
ρ1
Water of liquid in container will rise or fall according as
M M
− is less than or greater than zero.
ρ2 ρ1
Sol: Pressure will be same at all points at the same
⇒ rises for ρ1 < ρ2
height in the same liquid.
⇒ falls for ρ1 > ρ2
P0 + rw gl = P0 + roil ( + d)g
There will be no change in the level if the level if r1 =
ρw 1000.(135) r2. In case of ice floating in water r1 = r2 and hence, the
⇒ ρoil
= = = 916 kg / m3
+ d (135 + 12.3) level of water remains unchanged when ice melts.
Example 2: A solid floats in a liquid of different material. Example 3: An iron casting containing a number of
Carry out an analysis to see whether the level of liquid cavities weighs 6000 N in air and 4000 N in water. What
in the container will rise or fall when the solid melts.
9 . 3 6 | Fluid Mechanics
is the volume of the cavities in the casting? Density of Sol: Use the formula for height of the liquid in the
iron is 7.87 g/cm3. capillary.
Take g = 9.8 m/s2 and density of water = 103 kg/m3. Let r1 and r2 be radii of upper and lower ends of the
conical capillary tube. The radius r at the meniscus is
Sol: Apply Archemides principal. The volume of iron given by
without the cavity is easily found. The total volume is
found from the upthrust. The difference in volumes is A
the volume of cavity.
t h
Let ν be the volume of cavities and V the volume of
solid iron. Then, B
r2
mass 6000 / 9.8 3
=V = = 0.078m
density 7.87 × 103
Further, decrease in weight = upthrust
∴ (6000 – 4000) = (V + ν)ρ wg
or 2000 = (0.078 + ν) × 103 × 9.8 −h
r =r1 + (r2 − r1 )
or 0.078 + ν ≈ 0.2
\ v = 0.12 m3
0.1 − 0.08
= (2.5 × 10−4 ) + (2.5 × 10−4 )
0.1
Example 4: A boat floating in a water tank is carrying
a number of stones. If the stones were unloaded into = 3.0×10–4 m
water, what will happen to the water level?
The surface tension at 0ºC is given by
Sol: When the stones are in boat they will displace rhρg
more water as compared to the case when they are out T0 =
2
of the boat and inside water.
Let weight of boat = W and weight of stone = w. (3.0 × 10−4 )(8 × 10−2 )(1 / 4 × 10 4 ) × 9.8
= =0.084
2
Assuming density of water = 1 g/cc
T0 h0 6 × 10−2 12
Volume of water displaced initially= (w + W)/ρw For tube B, N/m = = =
T50 h50 5.5 × 10 −2 11
W w
Later, Volume displaced = +
11 11
ρw ρ ⇒ T0 = × T0 = × 0.084 = 0.077 N/m
(ρ = density of stones) 12 12
⇒ Water level comes down. Considering the change in the surface tension as linear,
the change in surface tension with temp is given by
Example 5: A conical glass capillary tube A of length 0.1 T50 − T0 0.077 − 0.084 1
m has diameters 10–3m and 5×10–4m at the ends. When α= = =− k.
T0 − T50 0.084 × 0.077 60
it is just immersed in a liquid at 0ºC with larger radius
in constant contact with it, the liquid rises to 8×10–2m Negative sign shows that with rise in temp surface
in the tube. In another cylindrical glass capillary tube tension decreases.
B, when immersed in the same liquid at 0ºC, the liquid
rises to 6×10–2m height. The rise of liquid in tube B is
only 5.5×10–2m when the liquid is at 50ºC. Find the rate Example 6: A piece of copper having an internal cavity
at which the surface tension changes with temperature weighs 264 gm in air and 221 gm when it is completely
considering the change to be linear. The density of immersed in water. Find the volume of the cavity. The
liquid is (1/4) × 104 kg/m3 and the angle of contact is density of copper is 9.8 gm/cc.
zero. Effect of temp on the density of liquid and glass
is negligible. Sol: Apply Archemides principal. The volume of copper
without the cavity is easily found. The total volume is
found from the upthrust. The difference in volumes is
P hysi cs | 9.37
∴ Mass of water displaced by copper piece when (b) Let 2 be the height of water column above mercury
completely immersed in water is equal to 43 gm. surface so that water just covers the top of the steel
block. The upward thrust due to mercury and water
mass of displaced
Volume of water displaced= displaced is equal to the weight of the body
density of water
∴ weight of block = wt. of water displaced + wt. of
43
= = 43.0 cc mercury displaced
1.0
∴ Volume of copper piece including volume of cavity = ∴ 7800 g = 2 × 1000 × 1 × g
43.0 cc. Volume of copper block only + (10 – 2) × 100 × 13.6 × g
mass 264 7800 = 100 2 + 13600 – 1360 2
= = = 30.0cc
density 8.8
1260 2 = 13600 – 7800 = 5800
Volume of cavity = 43.0 – 30.0 = 13.0 cc
∴ Height of water column above mercury=
Example 7: A cubical block of each side equal to 10 5800
l2 = = 4.6 cm
cm is made of steel of density 7.8 gm/cm3. It floats on 1260
mercury surface in a vessel with its sides vertical. The
density of mercury is 13.6 gm/cm3. Example 8: A cubical block of wood of each side 10 cm
(a) Find the length of the block above mercury surface. long floats at the interface between oil and water with
its lower surface 2 cm below the interface. The height
(b) If water is poured on the surface of mercury, find the of oil and water column is 10 cm each. The density of
height of the water column when water just covers the oil is 0.8 g cm–3.
top of the steel block.
(a) What is the mass of the block?
Sol: Apply Archemides principal. The weight of the (b) What is the pressure at the lower side of surface of
block will be equal to the weight of the liquid displaced. block?
(a) Volume of steel block
= (10)3 = 1000 cm3 Sol: Apply Archemides principle. The weight of the
block will be equal to the weight of the liquid displaced.
Mass of steel block = 1000 × 7.8 = 7800 gm
(a) Buoyant force = (mass of liquid displaced) × g
Let 1 be the height of steel block above the surface
= [10 × 10 × 8 × 0.8 + 10 × 10 × 1]g= 840 g
of mercury. Height of block under mercury = 10 – 1.
Weight of mercury displaced by block If m is mass of block
=(10 – 1) × 100 × 13.6 × g gm mg = 840 g or m = 840 gm
Archimedes’ principle shows that upward thrust is
equal to the weight of mercury displaced by block is Oil
equal to the weight of the block. 10 cm
8 cm
10 cm Water
(a) Let F be the force applied horizontally such that v1 Sol: Apply Bernoulli’s Theorem and equation of
is the velocity of water in tube A of radius 4.0 cm and continuity.
v2 equal to 8 m/s is the velocity of water out of tube B
of radius 1.0 cm. From Bernoulli’s principle:
2gh
B p0 These equations give v1 = A2
(A12 − A22 )
A
Rate of flow of volume
F
∴ At A, v1 = ?, r1 = 4.0 cm, p1 = p0 + Where a is area 2gh
a V = A1v1 = A1A2
of cross-section of piston or tube A. At B, v2 = 8 m/s, r2 (A12 − A22 )
= 1.0 cm, p2 = p0
2 × 9.8 × 8 × 10−2
Bernoulli’s theorem sat A and B gives, = π2 (4 × 10 −4 )(1 × 10 −2 )
(4 π × 10−4 ) − ( π × 10 4 )2
1 1
p1 + ρv1 + hρg= p2 + ρv 22 + hρga
2 2 = 4.06 × 10–4 m3/s
where ρ is density of water and h is height of axis of
both tubes from ground level
1 1
JEE Advanced/Boards
∴ p1 + ρv12 = p2 + ρv 22
2 2
Example 1: Under isothermal condition two soap
bubbles of radii a and b coalesce to form a single
F 1 bubble of radius c. If the external pressure is p0
+ p0 = p0 + ρ(v 22 − v12 )
a 2
F ρ 2 p0 (c3 − a3 − b3 )
= (v − v12 ) ...(i) show that surface tension T =
a 2 2 4(a2 + b2 + c2 )
Equation of continuity at A and B gives
Sol: Pressure inside the soap bubble is larger than that
v1a1 = v2a2 outside it by amount 4T/R, where T is surface tension
2 and R is its radius.
πr22 1
or v1 =v2 × 8 =
=× 0.5 m / s
2
πr1 4
P hysi cs | 9.39
As we know that for a soap bubble, the excess pressure Total P.E. when they are not connected
4T
is = . External pressure is p0 h h h2 h2
r Ah1ρg 1 + Ah2ρg 2 = Aρg 1 + 2
∴ p= p0 +
4T
∴ p= p0 +
4T
and 2 2 2 2
a b
a b
When the levels are equal, the potential energy is given
4T as
p=
c p0 +
c
4 4 4 3 h + h2 h1 + h2 h1 + h2 h1 + h2
and v a =πa3 , v b =πb3 & v c= πc ….(i) = A 1 ρg
+ A
ρg
3 3 3 2 4 2 4
Applying conservation of mass
(h1 + h2 )2 (h1 + h2 )2
na + nb =
nc = 2Aρg = Aρg
2× 4 4
pa v a pb v b pc v c Pv The change in potential energy
⇒ + = [ pv= nRT ⇒ n= ]
RTa RTb RTc RT
Aρg (h1 + h2 )
2
h1
h2
9 . 4 0 | Fluid Mechanics
Determine: 1 H H 3H
= Adg + A(2d)g = dg
(i) The density D of the solid. A 2 2 2
(ii) The total pressure at the bottom of the container.
Pressure due to buoyancy reaction
(b) The cylinder is removed and the original arrangement
is restored. A tiny hole of area S(S<<A) is punched on Buoyancy reaction force A LDg
the vertical side of the container at a height h(h<H/2). = =
area 5 A
Determine:
A 5d l Lgd
= ×L × × × g =
(i) The initial speed of efflux of liquid at the hole. 5 4 A 4
(ii) The horizontal distance x travelled by the liquid 3H Ldg
initially. ∴ Total pressure = P0 + dg +
2 4
(iii) The height hm at which the hole should be punched
so that the liquid travels the maximum distance xm 3H L
P0 + dg +
=
initially. Also calculate xm: (Neglect the air-resistance in 2 4
these calculations)
(b) (i) Let vA and vB be velocity of fluids at points A and
Sol: Apply the principles of hydrostatic pressure, B.
Archemedes and Bernoulli’s Theorem.
(A) (i) As per Archimedes’ principle, the buoyant force
on a body is equal to the weight of the fluid displaced
by the body.
AvA = svB
∴ v = s v 0 ( A>>H/2)
A B
A
1
Bernoulli’s Equation: p + ρv 2 + ρgh = constant
2
A
Weight of solid cylinder =
×D × g = F ↓L×
5 1 H H
At A, P0 + dv 2A + dg + 2d(g) =
constant or
F ↑= Buoyant force = weight of liquid displaced 2 2 2
L Α 3L A
= × × 2dg + × × d × g 3
4 5 4 5 P0 + dgH = constant ( VA = 0)
2
A
Equating: L × ×D × g At point B,
5 1 1
P0 + dv 2A + (2d)vB2 + 2dgh =
cosntant
L A 3L A 2 2
= × × 2dg + × × d × g
4 5 4 5
or P0 + dvB2 + 2dgh =
constant
d 3d 2d + 3d 5d
D= + = = 3
2 4 4 4 Equating: P0 + dvB2 + 2dgh =P0 + dgH
2
(ii) Pressure at the bottom of the cylinder
3
= Patmosphere + Pdense liquid + Plight liquid dvB2 + 2dgh = dgH
2
Force 3 3
Pressure due to liquid = vB2 g H − 2h
= = ; vB g H − 2h
Area 2 2
P hysi cs | 9.41
(ii) Time t taken by liquid to fall through height h under Sol: The cross section of tube can be thought of made-
2h up of elementary rings of infinitesimal thickeness. Find
g with zero initial velocity. t = the volume flow rate and kinetic energy of one ring.
g
Use the method of integration to find the flow rate and
Horizontal distance
energy for the tube.
2h 3
x = vB t = × g H − 2h
g 2 (a) Let us consider a cylindrical section at a distance of
r and having thickness dr. The volume of fluid flowing
3H r2
h(3H − 4h) = 2 × h × −h through this section per second. dv = (2πrdr)v 0 1 −
4 R 2
dx So, the volume of fluid flowing across the section of the
(iii) To find height h at which x is max, =0.
dh tube in unit time.
d 1/2 d 1/2
3Hh − 4h2 0;
= h(3H − 4h) 0
=
dh dh
d 3H
2 × h − h =0.
dh 4
1/2 −1/2
1 3H 1 3H
2× − h +2 h× − h (–1)=0 R r2
R
r2
2h 4 2 4 ∫
v= (2 πrdr)v
0 1 −
R 2
= 2 πv 0∫
r 1 − dr
R 2
0 0
1/2
1 3H h R
− h = r2 r4 R2
h 4 3H
1/2
= 2πv 0 − = 2πv 0
4
2 4R 0
2
4 − h
3H 3 (b) The kinetic energy of the fluid within the volume
or −h =h or h = H element of thickness dr
4 8
2
1 1 r2
3H 3H 3H
1/2
(dm)v 2 = (2πrdr )ρv 20 1 −
\ xm =
2× − 2 2 R2
8 4 8
So, the K.E. of fluid within the tube
3H 3H 3H 2
=
2× × = 1
R
r2
8 8 4 = (2π )ρv 20 ∫ 1 − rdr
2 R2
0
Where P1 = O and P2 = P Example 6: The U-tube acts as a water siphon. The bend
Force(F) in the tube is 1m above the water surface. The tube outlet
As we know that P= is 7 m below the water surface. The water issues from
area of section of tube
the bottom of the siphon as a free jet at atmospheric
F 4 πηv 0 pressure. Determine the speed of the free jet and the
P= =
πR 2
πR 2 minimum absolute pressure of the water in the bend.
Given atmospheric pressure = 1.01 × 105 N/m2.
4 η v 0
P= g = 9.8 m/s2 and density of water = 103 kg/m3.
R2
r2
P
P2
P1
r1
Sol: The height of water level will increase till the rate of
P
inflow is greater than the rate of outflow. Use method P1 P2
of integration to find the time taken by water level to
+ =
reach height h.
r1 r2 r
(a) Level will be maximum level when
Rate of inflow of water = rate of outflow of water
Although not given in the question, but we will have to
assume that temperature of A and B are the same.
9 . 4 4 | Fluid Mechanics
L L
Restoring torque
= τ Fx sin θ =
SL(d2 − d1 )g sin θ
2 2
sin θ ≈ θ (θ is small)
1 2
=
∴τ SL (d2 − d1 )g θ
nB pB VB / RT pB VB 2
= =
nA pA VA / RT pA VA ML2 d2 θ SLd1 xL2 d2 θ
τ = Iα = 2 =
3 dt 3 dt2
(p + 4s / rA ) × 4 / 3π(rA )3
=
(p + 4s / rB ) × 4 / 3π(rB )3 d2 θ 3 1
=
∴ x SL2 (d2 − d1 )gθ
dt SL d1 2
3
(s = surface tension)
nB d2 θ 3g d2 − d1
Substituting the values, we get =6
= or θ ;so motion is S.H.M;
nA dt 2L d1
comparing with differential equation of S.H.M.
Example 10: A thin rod of length L and area of cross
section S is pivoted at its lowest point P inside a
d2 θ 3g d2 − d1
stationary, homogeneous and non-viscous liquid as + ω2 θ= 0; ω = ;
shown in the figure. The rod is free to rotate in a vertical dt 2 2L d1
plane about a horizontal axis passing through P. The
density d1 of the material of the rod is smaller than the 2π 2Ld1
Timeperiod, T = = 2π
density d2 of the liquid. The rod is displaced by a small ω 3g(d2 − d1 )
angle. From its equilibrium position and then released,
show that the motion of the rod is simple harmonic and
determine its angular frequency in terms of the given Example 11: Two non-viscous, incompressible and
parameters. immiscible liquids of density ρ and 1.5 ρ are poured
into two limbs of a circular tube of radius R and small
cross-section kept fixed in a vertical plane as shown in
the figure.
d1
Each liquid occupies one fourth the circumference of
the tube.
d2
(a) Find the angle that the radius vector to the interface
makes with the vertical in the equilibrium position.
P
(b) If the whole liquid is given a small displacement
Sol: Use the restoring torque method to find the from its equilibrium position, show that the resulting
angular frequency. oscillations are simple harmonic. Find the time period
of these oscillations.
Consider the rod be displaced through an angle θ . The
different forces on the rod are shown in the figure. Sol:Use the restoring torque method to find the angular
Weight of rod acting downward=S L d1 g=mg frequency.
G D
G L O
R
B
F C
mg E
P
y
A
P hysi cs | 9.45
JEE Main/Boards
Exercise 1
Q.1 If water in one flask and castor oil in other are Q.4 How does the viscosity of gases depend upon
violently shaken and kept on a table, then which one will temperature?
come to rest earlier?
Q.5 Explain the effect of (i) density (ii) temperature and
Q.2 What is the acceleration of a body falling through a (iii) pressure on the viscosity of liquids and gases.
viscous medium after terminal velocity is reached?
Q.6 Two equal drops of water falling through air with
Q.3 The liquid is flowing steadily through a tube of a steady velocity ν. If the drops coalesced, what will be
varying diameter. How are the velocity of liquid flow (V) the new steady velocity?
in any portion and the diameter (D) of the tube in that
portion related?
9 . 4 6 | Fluid Mechanics
Q.7 What is the viscous force on a drop of liquid of Q.17 Calculate the force required to take away a flat
radius 0.2 mm moving with a constant velocity 4 cm s–1 plate of radius 5 cm from the surface of water. Given
through a medium of viscosity 1.8×10–1 Nm–2 s. surface tension of water = 72 × 10–3 Nm–1.
Q.8 Eight rain drops of radius 1 mm each falling Q.18 A square wire frame of side 10 cm is dipped in a
downwards with a terminal velocity of 5 cm s–1 coalesce liquid of surface tension 28×10–3 Nm–1. On taking out,
to form a bigger drop. Find the terminal velocity of a membrane is formed. What is the force acting on the
bigger drop. surface of wire frame?
Q.9 The flow rate of water from a tap of diameter 1.25 Q.19 The air pressure inside a soap bubble of diameter
cm is 0.48 L/min. The coefficient of viscosity of water is 3.5 mm is 8 mm of water above the atmosphere.
10–3 Pa-s. After sometime, the flow rate is increased to Calculate the surface tension of soap solution.
3 L/min. The coefficient of viscosity of water is 10–3 Pa-s.
Characterize the flow. Q.20 What should be the radius of the capillary tube
so that water will rise to a height of 8 cm in it? Surface
Q.10 A block of wood is floating in a lake? What is tension of water 70 × 10–3 Nm–1.
apparent weight of the floating block?
Exercise 2
Q.11 A block of wood is floating in a lake. What is apparent
weight of the floating block? Single Correct Choice Type
Q.12 A body floats in a liquid contained in a beaker. Q.1 The area of cross-section of the wider tube shown
The whole system shown in the figure falls freely under in figure is 800 cm2. If a mass of 12 kg is placed on the
gravity. What is the up thrust on the body due to the massless piston, the difference in heights h in the level
liquid? of water in the two tubes is:
Q.4 The frequency of a sonometer wire is f, but when Q.9 Fountains usually seen in gardens are generated
the weights producing the tensions are completely by a wide pipe with an enclosure at one end having
immersed in water the frequency becomes f/2 and on many small holes. Consider one such fountain which is
immersing the weights in a certain liquid the frequency produced by a pipe of internal diameter 2 cm in which
becomes f/3. The specific gravity of the liquid is: water flows at a rate 3 ms–1. The enclosure has 100 holes
4 16 15 32
each of diameter 0.05 cm. The velocity of water coming
(A) (B) (C) (D) out of the holes is (in ms–1):
3 9 12 27
(A) 0.48 (B) 96 (C) 24 (D) 48
Q.5 A small ball of relative density 0.8 falls into water
from a height of 2m. The depth to which the ball will Q.10 A vertical tank open at the top, is filled with a
sink is (neglect viscous forces): liquid and rests on a smooth horizontal surface. A small
(A) 8 m (B) 2 m (C) 6 m (D) 4 m hole is opened at the centre of one side of the tank.
The area of cross-section of the tank is N times the area
of the hole, where N is a large number. Neglect mass
Q.6 A hollow sphere of mass M and radius r is immersed of the tank itself. The initial acceleration of the tank is:
in a tank of water (density rw). The sphere would float
if it were set free. The sphere is tied to the bottom of g g
(A) (B)
the tank by two wires which makes angle 45º with the 2N 2N
horizontal as shown in figure. The tension T1 in the wire g g
(C) (D)
is: N 2 N
Q.14 Which of the following is not an assumption for (A) Siphon works when h3> 0
an ideal fluid flow for which Bernoulli’s principle is valid:
(B) Pressure at point 2 is P2 = p0 – rgh3
(A) Steady flow (B) Incompressible
(C) Pressure at point 3 is P0
(C) Viscous (D) Irrotational
(D) None of the above
Q.3 A body floats in a liquid contained in a beaker. Q.7 A large open tank has two holes in the wall. One is
The whole system as shown in figure falls freely under a square hole of side L at a depth y from the top and
gravity. The upthrust on the body due to the liquid is: the other is a circular hole of radius R at a depth 4y
(1982) from the top. When the tank is completely filled with
water the quantities of water flowing out per second
from both the holes are the same. Then R is equal to
(2000)
(A) L / 2π (B) 2πL
(A) Zero (C) L (D) L/2p
(B) Equal to the weight of the liquid displaced
(C) Equal to the weight of the body in air Q.8 A wooden block, with a coin placed on its top,
floats in water as shown in fig. The distance l and h
(D) Equal to the weight of the immersed position of the are shown there. After some time the coin falls into the
body water. Then: (2002)
5 4 d
(A) d (B) d (C) 4d (D)
4 5 5
(A) 50 m2/s2 (B) 50.5 m2/s2
Q.6 Water from a tap emerges vertically downwards (C) 51 m2/s2 (D) 52 m2/s2
with an initial speed of 1.0 m/s. The cross-section
area of the tap is 10–4m2. Assume that the pressure is
constant throughout the steam of water and that the Q.10 A glass tube of uniform internal radius (r) has
flow is steady, the cross-sectional area of stream 0.15 m a valve separating the two identical ends. Initially,
below the tap is: (1998) the valve is in a tightly closed position. End 1 has a
hemispherical soap bubble of radius r. End 2 has sub-
(A) 5.0×10-4 m2 (B) 1.0×10-4 m2 hemispherical soap bubble as shown in figure. (2008)
(C) 5.0×10-5 m2 (D) 2.0×10-4 m2
9 . 5 0 | Fluid Mechanics
Mg LAσ Mg LAσ
Just after opening the valve: (A) 1 − (B) 1 −
k M k 2M
(A) air from end 1 flow towards end 2. No change in the
volume of the soap bubbles. Mg LAσ Mg
(C) 1 + (D)
(B) air from end 1 flows towards end 2. Volume of the k M k
soap bubble at end 1 decreases
(Here k is spring constant)
(C) no change occurs
(D) air from end 2 flows towards end 1. Volume of the Q.14 Assume that a drop of liquid evaporates by decrease
soap bubble at end 1 increases in its surface energy, so that its temperatureremains
unchanged. What should be the minimum radius of
Q.11 A uniform cylinder of length L and mass M thedrop for this to be possible? The surface tensionis
having cross-sectional area A is suspended, with its T, density of liquid is ρ and L is its latent heat of
length vertical, from a fixed point by a massless spring, vaporization. (2013)
such that it is half-submerged in a liquid of density p
(A) T / ρL (B) T / ρL
at equilibrium position. When the cylinder is given a
small downward push and released it starts oscillating
(C) 2 T / ρL (D) ρL / T
vertically with a small amplitude. If the force constant
of the spring is k1the frequency of oscillation of the
cylinder is (1990) Q.15 An open glass tube is immersed in mercury in
such a way that a length of 8 cm extends above the
1 −2 1/2
1 k − Aρg 1 k + Aρg mercury level. The open end of the tube is then closed
(A) (B)
2π M 2π M and sealed and the tube is raised vertically up by
additional 46cm. What will be length of the air column
1/2 1/2 above mercury in the tube now? (Atmospheric pressure
1 k + ρgL2 (D) 1 k + Aρg
(C) = 76 cm of Hg) (2014)
2π M
2π Aρg
(A) 38 cm (B) 6 cm (C) 16 cm (D) 22 cm
Q.12 A thin liquid film formed between a U-shaped
wire and a light slider supports a weight of 1.5 × 10−2 N Q.16 On heating water, bubbles being formed at the
(see figure). The length of the slider is 30 cm and its bottom of the vessel detach and rise. Take the bubbles
weight negligible. The surface tension of the liquid film to be spheres of radius R and making a circular contact
is (2012) of radius r with the bottom of the vessel. If r < < R, and
the surface tension of water is T, value of r just before
bubbles detach is: (density of water is ρw ) (2014)
Film
W 2r
ρw g
(C) R 2 (D) None of these
3T
P hysi cs | 9.51
JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1 Q.5 A test tube of thin walls has lead shots in it at its
bottom and the system floats vertically in water, sinking
by a length l = 10 cm. A liquid of density less than that
Q.1 A piston of mass M = 3 kg and radius R=4 cm of water, is poured into the tube till the levels inside
has a hole into which a thin pipe of radius r = 1 cm and outside the tube are even. If the tube now sinks to
is inserted. The piston can enter a cylinder tightly and a length l = 40 cm, the specific gravity of the liquid is
without friction, and initially it is at the bottom of the …………..
cylinder. 750 gm of water is now poured into the pipe
so that the piston and pipe are lifted up as shown. Find
Q.6 A large tank is filled with two liquids of specific
the height H of water in the cylinder and height h of
gravities 2σ and σ. Two holes are made on the wall of
water in pipe.
the tank as shown. Find the ratio of distances from O
of the points on the ground where the jets from holes
A and B strike.
the terminal velocity just before striking at the bottom rises to its rim. What is the density of the material of
of the container. Draw graph between velocity of the which the beaker is made?
ball and distance moved by the ball before getting
terminal velocity. Q.17 A level controller is shown in the figure. It
consists of a thin circular plug of diameter 10 cm and a
cylindrical float of diameter 20 cm tied together with a
light rigid rod of length 10 cm. The plug fits in snugly in
a drain hole at the bottom of the tank which opens into
the atmosphere. As water fills up and the level reaches
height h, the plug opens. Find h. Determine the level
of water in the tank when the plug closes again. The
float has a mass 3kg and the plug may be assumed as
massless.
Q.12 A spherical ball of radius 1 × 10–4m and density
104 kg/m3 falls freely under gravity through a distance
h before entering a tank of water. If after entering the
water the velocity of the ball does not change, find h.
The viscosity of water is 9.8×10–6 N-s/m2.
B B
A A
(a) (b)
Q.14 A soap bubble has radius R and thickness d(<<R) (a) Show that it performs SHM when pulled slightly up
as shown. It collapses into a spherical drop. Find the & released & find its time period. Neglect change in
ratio of excess pressure in the drop to the excess liquid level.
pressure inside the bubble. (b) Find the time taken by the rod to completely
immerse when released from position shown in figure
(b). Assume that it remains vertical throughout its
motion.
(take g = p2m/s2)
A1
d1 60° 60°
30°
d2
A A
P
Q.20 A hollow cone floats with its axis vertical up to Q.25 A siphon has a uniform circular base of diameter
one-third liquid of its height in a liquid of relative 8
density ρ is filled in it up to one-third of its height, the cm with its crest A 1.8 m above water level as in
π
cone floats up to half its vertical height. The height of
figure. Find
the cone is 0.10 m and the radius of the circular base is
0.05m. Find the specific gravity ρ. (a) Velocity of flow.
(b) Discharge rate of the flow in m3/sec.
Q.21 In the figure shown, the heavy cylinder (radius
(c) Absolute pressure at the crest level A.
R) resting on a smooth surface separates two liquids
of densities 2ρ and 3ρ. Find the height ‘h’ for the [Use P0=105 N/m2& g=10m/s2]
equilibrium of cylinder.
R 3
2
h R
Exercise 2 the top apex of the cone has a small hole. Neglecting
atmospheric pressure, the total upward force exerted
Single Correct Choice Type by water on the cone is:
(A) (2/3)pR2hrg (B) (1/3)pR2hrg
Q.1 A bucket contains water filled up to a height = (C) pR2hrg (D) None
15cm. The bucket is tied to a rope which is passed on
a frictionless light pulley and the other end of the rope
Q.6 A slender homogeneous rod of length 2L floats
is tied to a weight of mass which is half of that of the
partly immersed in water, being supported by a string
(bucket + water). The water pressure above atmosphere
fastened to one of its ends, as shown. The specific
at the bottom is:
gravity of the rod is 0.75. The length of rod that extends
(A) 0.5 kPa (B) 1 kPa out of water is:
(C) 5 kPa (D) None of these
Q.4 Some liquid is filled in a cylindrical vessel of radius d(Vρ − 3M) d(Vρ − 2M)
R. Let F1be the force applied by the liquid on the bottom (A) (B)
2(Vρ − 2M) 2(Vρ − 3M)
of the cylinder. Now the same liquid is poured into a
vessel of uniform square cross-section of side R. Let F2
d(Vρ + 2M) d(Vρ − 2M)
be the force applied by the liquid on the bottom of this (C) (D)
new vessel. (Neglect atmosphere pressure). Then: 2(Vρ − 3M) 2(Vρ + 3M)
Q.9 A sphere of radius R and made of material of Q.13 A cubical block of side ‘a’ and density ‘ρ’ slides
relative density σ has a concentric cavity of radius r. It over a fixed inclined plane with constant velocity
just floats when placed in a tank full of water. The value ‘v’. There is a thin film of viscous fluid of thickness ‘t’
of the ratio R/r will be: between the plane and the block. Then the coefficient
1/3 1/3 of viscosity of the thin film will be:
σ σ −1
(A) (B)
σ −1 σ
1/3 1/3
σ +1 σ −1
(C) (D)
σ σ +1
µM v v
(C) (D) None
ρH (C) (D)
t t
Q.12 A Newtonian fluid fills the clearance between a
shaft and a sleeve. When a force of 800N is applied to Q.16 A container, whose bottom has round holes with
shift, parallel to the sleeve, the shaft attains of 1.5 cm/ diameter 0.1 mm is filled with water. The maximum
sec. If a force of 2.4 kN is applied instead, the shaft height in cm up to which water can be filled without
would move with a speed of leakage will be what?
(A) 1.5 cm/sec (B) 13.5 cm/sec Surface tension=75×10–3N/m and g=10 m/s2:
(C) 4.5 cm/sec (D) None (A) 20 cm (B) 40 cm (C) 30 cm (D) 60 cm
9 . 5 6 | Fluid Mechanics
Q.17 A liquid is filled in a spherical container of radius (B) 5 cm of it will be under water.
R till a height h. At this position the liquid surface at the
(C) 2 cm of it will be above the common surface of oil
edges is also horizontal. The contact angle is:
and water.
(D) 8 cm of it will be under water.
Q.18 The vessel shown in the figure has two sections. (D) the energy lost per second by water striking the wall
The lower part is a rectangular vessel with area of cross- be increased eight times.
section A and height h. The upper part is a conical
vessel of height h with base area ‘A’ and top area ‘a’ and Q.21 A beaker filled with water is accelerated a m/
the walls of the vessel are inclined at an angle 30º with s2 in +x direction. The surface of water shall make on
the vertical. A liquid of density ρ fills both the sections angle:
up to a height 2h. Neglecting atmospheric pressure,
(A) tan–1(a/g) backwards
a (B) tan–s draw of (g/a)1
h
30° (C) cot–1(g/a) backwards
(D) cot–1 (a/g) backwards
h
Q.22 The spring balance A read 2 kg with a block m
suspended from it. A balance B reads 5 kg when a
beaker with liquid is put on the pan of the balance. The
A two balances are now so arranged that the hanging
mass is inside the liquid in the beaker as shown in the
(A) The force F exerted by the liquid on the base of the
figure in this situation:
(A + a)
vessel is 2hrg
2 A
(B) The pressure P at the base of the vessel is 2hrg
a
(C) The weight of the liquid W is greater than the force
exerted by the liquid on the base.
(D) The walls of the vessel exert a downward force (F-
W) on the liquid.
(C) The balance A will read less than 2 kg and B will read
more than 5 kg.
(D) The balance A and B will read 2 kg and 5 kg
respectively
(A) Mg (B) Mg – Vrg Q.4 Now level of the liquid starts decreasing slowly.
When the level of liquid is at a height h1 above the
(C) Mg + rR2hrR (D) rg(V + pR2h)
cylinder the block starts moving up. At what value of h1,
will the block rise? (2005)
Q.2 When a block of iron floats in mercury at 0°C,
fraction k1 of its volume is submerged, while at the (A) 4h/9 (B) 5h/9
temperature 60°C, a fraction k2 is seen to be submerged. (C) 5h/3 (D) Remains same
If the coefficient of volume expansion of iron is γFe and
that of mercury is γHg , then the ratio k1 / k 2 can be
Q.5 The block in the above question is maintained at
expressed as (2001)
the position by external means and the level of liquid is
1 + 60 γ Fe 1 − 60 γ Fe lowered. The height h2 when this external force reduces
(A) (B) to zero is: (2006)
1 + 60 γ Hg 1 + 60 γ Hg
1 + 60 γ Fe 1 + 60 γHg
(C) (D)
1 − 60 γ Hg 1 + 60 γ Fe
Q.8 If r = 5×10–4m, r = 103 kg m–3, g= 10ms–2, T =0.11 Q.12 A thin uniform cylindrical shell, closed at both
Nm–1, the radius of the drop when it detaches from the ends, is partially filled with water. It is floating vertically
dropper is approximately: in water in half-submerged state. If ρc is the relative
density of the material of the shell with respect to water,
(A) 1.4×10–3 m (B) 3.3×10–3 m
then the correct statement is that the shell is – (2012)
(C) 2.0×10–3 m (D) 4.1×10–3 m
(A) More than half-filled if ρc is les sthan 0.5
Q.9 After the drop detaches, its surface energy is: (B) More than half-filled if ρc is less than 0.5
(C) 5.4×10–6 J (D) 9.1×10–9 J (D) Less than half – filled if ρc is less than 0.5
Q.10 The spring A reads 2 kg with a block m suspended Q.13 A solid sphere of radius R and density ρ is attached
from it. A balance reads 5 kg when a beaker with liquid to one end of a mass-less spring of force constant k.
is put on the pan of the balance. The two balances The other end of the spring is connected to another
are now so arranged that the hanging mass is inside solid sphere of radius R and density 3 ρ . The complete
the liquid in the beaker as shown in the figure. In this arrangement is placed in a liquid of density 2ρ and is
situation: (1985) allowed to reach equilibrium. The correct statement(s)
is (are) (2013)
4 π R3 ρ g
(A) the net elongation of the spring is
3k
8 π R3 ρ g
(B) the net elongation of the spring is
3k
(C) the light sphere is partially submerged.
(D) the light sphere is completely submerged.
Q.15 If the density of air is ρa and that of the liquid ρ , Q.17 Two spheres P and Q of equal radii have densities
for a given piston speed the rate (volume per unit time) ρ1 and ρ2 , respectively. The spheres are connected
at which the liquid is sprayed will be proportional to by a massless string and placed in liquids L1 and L2
(2014) of densities σ1 and σ2 and viscosities η1 and η2 ,
respectively. They float in equilibrium with the sphere
ρa P in L1 and L2 has terminal
(A) (B) ρa ρ velocity VP and Q alone in
ρ L1 has terminal velocity VQ , then (2015)
ρ
(C) (D) ρ L1
ρa P
PlancEssential Questions
JEE Main/Boards JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1 Exercise 1
Q. 7 Q.9 Q.15 Q.3 Q.6 Q.9
Q.16 Q.20 Q.17
Exercise 2 Exercise 2
Q. 1 Q.7 Q.9 Q.1 Q.4 Q.10
Q.13 Q.17 Q.11 Q.19 Q.22
Answer Key
JEE Main/Boards
Exercise 1
Q.2 Zero Q.6 (2)2/3 vT Q.7 2.714×10–9 m/s
Q.9 Streamline, turbulent Q.10 Turbulent Q.13 60×108 Pa
Q.14 27.6 m Q.15 9.56 N Q.16 60 kg
Q.17 72π × 10−4 N Q.18 0.0224 Q.19 3.5 × 10−2 Nm−1
Q.20 1.785×10–4 m
Exercise 2
JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1
2m 11
Q.1
= h = ,H m Q.2 19.6m, 4 sec. Q.3 37.5 N
π 32π
1
R 3
Q.12 20 m Q.13 2.5 cm Q.14
24d
r1r2
Q.15 r = Q.16 2.79 gm/cc
r1 − r2
2(3 + π) 3+π
Q.17
= h1 = 0.26; h1 = 0.195
= Q.18 2 sec., 1 sec
15π 10π
3g d2 − d1 3
Q.19 w = Q.20 1.9 Q.21 R
2L d1 2
8h
Q.22
7
Q.23 mmin = πr 2
buoyancy.
( )
ρσ − ρ ; if tilted then it’s axis should become vertical, C.M. should be lower than centre of
Q.24 2 : 1 Q.25 (a) 6 2 m/s, (b) 9.6 2 × 10−3 M3 / sec, (c) 4.6×104
mg + 4Sa
Q.26 h2 = 3h1 Q.27 h =
ρw a2g
Exercise 2
Solutions
2
9 . 6 4 | Fluid Mechanics
Q 8 × 10−6 6
Velocity = = m = 1000 × = 60 kg
A 1.222 × 10−4 100
Q' 1 × 10−3 1
V2 = = =2×4× × 28 × 10–3
A 20 × 1.227 × 10−4 10
= 8 × 28 × 10–4
1
= = 0.40 m/s = 0.0224
2 × 1.227
V2 > Vc ⇒ turbulent flow
Sol 19: Pressure inside above atmospheric pressure
Sol 10: Refer Q – 9 Exercise–I JEE Main 4T
ρgh =
r
Sol 11: Apparent weight of the floating block is zero. 4T × 2
104 × 8 × 10–3 =
3.5 × 10−3
Sol 12: Up thrust will be zero as body is not exerting T = 3.5 × 10–2 Nm–1
any force on water during free fall and there is no
buoyant force 2T
Sol 20: h =
rρg
F 60
Sol 13: Pressure = = = 60 × 108 Pa
A 10−8 2 × 70 × 10−3
r=
8 × 10−2 × 10 4
Sol 14: 370×103 = ρgh + 105
70
= × 10–5 = 1.785 × 10–4 m
ρgh = (3.7–1) × 105 4
2.7 × 105
h= = 27.6 m
9.8 × 103
Exercise 2
Sol 15:
Single Correct Choice Type
120
⇒ ρgh =
T = mg – ρwvg 800 × 10−4
3
T
s1=600kg/m
h SVg
3
s=1000kg/m mg
2
v1=1 .h=h 3mg
For water ρVg =
3 4
s2=1150kg/m
8
for liquid dρVg = mg
9
8 32
Downward force on the cubes = (m1 + m2) g ⇒d= ×4=
27 27
= ρ1 Vg + ρ2 Vg
(1750) × 10 Sol 5: (A) By work energy theorem
Upward force on the cubes = ρ(V1 + V) g Wwater + Wgravity = ∆KE = 0
= 1000 (h + 1) × 10 Wwater = (ρVg) h
Since cubes are in equilibrium
Wgravity = –(0.8 ρ Vg) (h + 2)
So 17500 = 10000 (h + 1)
⇒ ρVgh – 0.8 ρVg (h + 2) = 0
1.75–1 = h
5h
⇒ h = 0.75 m h - 0.8 (h + 2) = 0 ⇒ =h+2
4
h
Sol 3: (D) = 2 ⇒ h = 8m
4
Sol 6: (A) The vertical component of tension balances
out the net of weight & buoyancy.
In equilibrium Pushed down Sol 7: (C) We know that time taken for the vessel to
by y distance
2H
empty is to = , H = height of water
Initially in equilibrium g
When pushed down by y distance, an extra upward H
Time taken to empty vessel of height is t2
force will act on the cube η
ρ (ybc) g = d ρ abc A 2H
=
[A = acceleration of the cube] gη
da g g g t1 = t0 – t2 and t1 = t2
y= A⇒A= y ⇒ ω2 = ⇒ω= ⇒T=
g da da da
2H 2H 2H 2H 2H
2π da ⇒ – = ⇒ = 2 ⇒η=4
= 2π g gη gη g gη
w g
2 Q = A1 v1 = A2 v2
0.05 × 10−2
= 100 × π ×V
2 Q 2 × 10−2
v2 = = = 4 m/s
A2 1 / 2 × 10−2
π × 10–4 × 3
By Bernoulli equation
= 100 × π × ¼ × 25 × 10–8 × V
4×3 P1 + ½ ρv12 = P2 + ½ ρv22
V= × 100 = 48
25 8000 + ½ × 1000 × 4 = P2 + ½ × 1000 × 16
10000 = P2 + 8000
Sol 10: (C) We know that force exerted by fluid coming
out on the container is ρAv2 P2 = 2000 Pa
v = velocity of fluid
Sol 14: (C) Viscosity is not an assumption
H
v= 2g
2 Sol 15: (D) Frictional resistance f ∝ Av2
A = area of the hole f = kAv2 = kpr2v2
2
ρAv k = constant
Acceleration of the tank =
ρ(NAH)
When ball acquires terminal velocity
ρ(AgH) g
= = f = mg
ρNAH N
kπ r2 v2 = mg
Sol 11: (A) A1V1 = A2 V2 k π r2 v2 = (4/3 π r3) ρ g
π (10–2)2 VP = π (2 × 10–2)2 VQ v2 ∝ r ⇒ v ∝ r1/2
VP = 4VQ
Sol 16: (C)
Sol 12: (A)
D
P2=P0+4T/R
h P1=P0+4/R
H-D as P1 > P2 so air will flow out of the small bubble.
2(H − D) h
t=
g
Sol 18: (D) By Bernoulli equation Force on a water particle P on the free surfaces have
been shown in the figure. In the figure ma is the pseudo
P0 + ρgh3 = P0 + ½ ρv2
force.
½ ρv2 = ρgh3
P0 = P2 + ½ ρv2 Sol 3: (A) In a freely falling system geff = 0 and since,
Upthrust = V1ρLgeff
P2 = P0 – ρgh3
(V1 = immersed volume, ρL = density of liquid)
Sol 19: (D) By continuity Upthrust = 0.
Ax Vx = Ay Vy
Sol 4: (B)
Ax > Ay
⇒ vx < vy
By Bernoulli equation
Px + ½ ρvx2 = Py + ½ ρvy2 h
vx < vy 1 2
⇒ Px > Py
KE per m3 of water = ½ ρv2
KEx= = ½ ρvx2
KEy = ½ ρvy2 p1 = p2 ⇒ p0 + ρIgh = p0 + ρIIgh
Sol 5: (A)
A1 v1 = A2 v 2 1
A
h
v 2 = 1 v1 …..(ii)
A2
2
Substituting value of v2 from Eq. (ii) in Eq. (i)
A12 2
.v= v12 + 2gh
A22
1 Solving eq. (i) and (ii), we have
or (L2 ) 2g(y) = pR2 2g(4y) Sol 11: (B) When cylinder is displaced by an amount x
from its mean position, spring force and upthrust both
L
or R= will increase. Hence, Net restoring fore = extra spring
2π force + extra upthrust
⇒ 2T ( 0.3) =
4
1.5 × 10−2 2 R ρw g
r2 =
⇒ T = 2.5 × 10−2 N / m
F = 2Tl 3 T
2 ρw g
r = R2
3T
w
Sol 13: (B)
kx0 Buoyant force
At equilibrium ∑ F =0
AL
kx0 + σ g − Mg =
0
2
LAσ Mg
x0 Mg 1 −
=
2M
JEE Advanced/Boards
Sol 14: (C) Exercise 1
= T4 π R 2 − (R − ∆R )
2 2
ρ4 πR ∆RL
Mg
Sol 1: Pressure at A = P0 + = P0 + ρgh
A
ρR 2 ∆
=RL T R 2 − R 2 + 2R ∆R − ∆R 2
A = π (0.04)2 – (0.01)2 = π × 15 × 10–4
R
ρR 2 ∆RL = T2R ∆R ( ∆ R is very small) M
= ρh
A
2T M 3 2
R= h= = = m
ρL Aρ −4 π
π × 15 × 10 × 1000
19.6m
h
Sol 16: (D)
4
( 2 π r T ) sin θ= 3
π R3 ρw .g Let us assume that ball will go up to depth h in water.
By work energy theorem
r 4
T × × 2 πr = πR3 ρw g -mg (19.6) + mg h = 0 ⇒ h = 19.6 m
R 3
9 . 7 0 | Fluid Mechanics
gh 3g
= ×
2 2g
h
Distance = 3
2
At point B
h
a P0 = σg = P0 + (+2σ g (–h/4)) + ½ 2σ v’2
(a) tan θ = =1 2
g
gh gh
θ = 45° =- + v’2
2 2
Maximum gang pressure = ρ a2 + g2 r
V’ = gh
P hysi cs | 9.71
Sol 9:
2(h / 4) h
Time t’ = =
g 2g
3
2=100cm /S
h h
Distance travelled = vt’ = gh =
2g 2 h
200cn
h
h 3 3
Ratio of distance travelled = =
h 2
2
2 2=100cm /S
3
v 22
gh = [1–1/4] = 3/8 v22
2 r2=0.04m
Q
8gh 2gh 2
v2 = ⇒ v1 = =
3 3 3 By Bernoulli’s equation
2 P1 + ½ ρV12 = P2 + ½ ρV22
Volume flow rate = × 10–4 m3/s
3 – P2 + P1 = 10 N/m2
2 1 A1v1 = A2v2
= 60 × litre/min
3 10 π (0.1)2 v1 = π (0.04)2 v2
V0 P2 R
= 3
P1 24d
Velocity
4T 4T 4T
Sol 15: P0 + + = P0 +
VT r1 r r2
A
Sol 17: Plug will open when float is lifted upwards due
h1 B to buoyant force
2T
PA = P0 – h’
r1
Sol 18: d1 α
=
( d1 − d2 ) gθ
3 2
y 3/2x2Ag
3(d1 − d2 )g
α= θ
2d1
3(d1 − d2 )g
(SxAg) ω=
2d1
(a) By Newton’s second law
a = Upward acceleration Sol 20:
−ρ
× 2 Ag + ρ(1 – y) Ag = (ρ/2) 2Aa 0.05m
2
–ρAg + ρ(1–y) Ag = ρAa
r r
–g + g – gy = a =
3h
h/3 0.05 h/2
a = –gy h/3
Net torque = Iα
Sol 21:
Iα = (d1 – d2) s g θ
2
(d1s ) 2
I= 2S-h 3-S
3 R
d1s3 2
α = (d1 – d2) ρgθ
3 2 Balancing force on both sides
9 . 7 4 | Fluid Mechanics
3
h= R
2 h
h/2
Sol 22:
h1 + h2 ρπR 2 ×
h= 2
2 ⇒ h/2 = …..(ii)
m + ρπR 2
P0 + ρgh1 + ρa (h – h1) + 2ρa (h + h1) – 2ρg (h – h1) –
ρgh = P0
ρ2 ρ
⇒ h2 = ⇒h= …. (iii)
gh1 + ah – ah1 + 2ah + 2ah1 – 2gh + 2gh1 – gh = 0 σ 6
h1 (g – a + 2a + 2g) + h (a + 2a – 2g – g) = 0
By (i) and (iii)
3(g − a)h
h1 =
3g + a m = ( σ − ρ) pR2 l
a = g/2
Sol 24: Volume of water collected = A.V
3h
A = cross sectional area perpendicular to the rain.
3h
⇒ h1 = 2 =
1 7 v = velocity of rain
3+
2 in 1st beaker A2 = A1 cos 30°
h2 = h + h – h1 in 2nd beaker A’3 = A cos 60°
h2 = 2h – h1
>
n
Difference in height = h2 – h1
8h o
30
= 2h – h1 – h1 = 2(h – h1) =
o
60
7
o o
30 30
P hysi cs | 9.75
v = 6 2 m/s
(b) Discharge rate = pr2 v
T
16 a
=π× × 10–4 × 6 2 m3/s
π T m/2
FB = Fs + Fb Sol 6: (A) A
FB = (1/3) pR2 Hρg
Fb = pR2 ρgH l1
2L-L1
⇒ Fs = (–2/3) pR2 ρgH
2
Sol 3: (B) mg
a -L 1
Ltan 2L
L L Let the length of rod that extends out of water is l1
since the rod is in equilibrium
So balancing net torque about point A
A = area of the base
A = area of the base 2L + L1
we get (ρA(2L–L1)g) cos q
tan θ = a/g 2
Finally 1/3 rd of the water spilled out = 0.75 ρAL g L cos θ
So volume of water spilled out finally 4L2 − L21 3 2
3 = L
2 tan θ × A L tan θ 2 4
= Vf = =
2 2
this is 1/3 volume of L3 Sol 7: (B)
tan θ 1
⇒ = ⇒ tan θ = 2/3 = a/g d d/2
2 3
a = 2g/3 By force equilibrium we get
ρVg ρVg
–Mg – 2Mg – mg + + =0
Sol 4: (D) Force applied by the liquid will be same on 2 2
both the vessels as the mass of liquid is same in both ⇒ m = ρv – 3M …..(i)
the vessels
By torque equilibrium about mass M we get
Sol 5: (A) Total force exerted on the base by water and dρVg
–mg (d – ) – 2 Mgd + =0
cane’s slant surface = mg 2
= 1/3 pR2 Hρg downwards ρV
m – d (m + 2M – )=0
2
Force exerted by the water =
ρv
d 2M + m −
(ρgH) (pR2) downwards 2
= …(ii)
So force exerted by the slant surface = m
2/3 ρgH pR2 upwards d(ρV − 2M)
By (i) and (ii) we get =
2(ρV − 3M)
So force exerted by water on slant surface = 2/3 ρgH
pR2
Sol 8: (B) By work energy theorem
Wwater + Wgravity = ∆KE = 0
(σ v g h) – ρ v g (h + H) = 0
σ h = ρ (h + H)
(σ − ρ)h σ
H= = − 1 h
ρ ρ
P hysi cs | 9.77
Sol 9: (A) Buoyant force = ρw × 4/3 πR3 g Sol 14: (C) Graph (c) best represents the motion of
raindrop because velocity of rain approaches the
Gravitational force = (σρw) (4/3 π(R3 – r3)) g
terminal velocity.
Sphere is in equilibrium so
Sol 15: (C) Graph (D) incorrect because at t = 0; x = 0
ρw 4/3 π R3 g = (σρw) (4/3 π(R3 – r3) g)
and graph will not be straight time
R3 = σ(R3 – r3)
Sol 16: (C)
1 r3
=1– P0
σ R3
r3 1 σ −1
=1– =
R 3 σ σ h
1/3
R σ
=
r σ −1
2T 2 × 75 × 10−3
h= = = 0.30 m
rρg 10−4
mvjˆ − mviˆ × 1000 × 10
= = ρLvjˆ − ρLviˆ = 2 ρvL 2
t
h = 30 cm
Sol 11: (A) Force exerted by water = ρAV 2
R −h
Sol 12: (C) We know that force applied is proportional cos (90 – θ) = sin θ =
R
to velocity of shaft. So if the force is increased three
times, velocity will also increase three times. R −h
Angle of contact = 90 – θ = cos–1
R
dv
Sol 13: (A) Viscous force F = – η A
dx Sol 18: (D) Force exerted by liquid = ρg (2h).A = F
v weight of liquid is W
F = –η A
t
Force exerted by liquid on walls = F – W
3mg
F = mg sin 37° = (upwards)
5
So force exerted by the walls on the liquid
3mgt 3ρa3gt 3ρagt
η= = =
5AV 2
5a V 5V = (F – W) downwards
9 . 7 8 | Fluid Mechanics
a
0.1-h1-h2 h
h2
10cm B
0.92kg C
Oil L
h1
Water
PA = P0
PB = P0
PB = PA + ρgh – ρa = P0
Balancing net force on the block we get
gh = a
–0.92×10 + (1000)×h1×(0.01)×10
h a
+ (600)h2×(0.01) × 10 = 0 tan θ = =
L g
10 h1 + 6h2 = 0.92
Sol 22: (B, C)
if h2 = 4 cm
then 10h1 + 6 × 0.04 = 0.92
10h1 = 0.68
0.68 5av
h1 = = 0.068 m = 6.8 cm
10
mg
h1 + h2 should be less than 10 cm so
Balance A will read less than 2 kg as an upward buoyant
h2 < 4 cm
force is acting on the block. Balance B will read more
and h1 + h2 = 10 cm than 5 kg as downward reaction of the block due to
buoyant force is acting on beaker.
⇒ 10 h1 + 6 (0.1 – h1) = 0.92
4h1 + 0.6 = 0.92
Sol 23: (A, D)
4h1 = 0.32
h1 = 0.08 m
⇒ h1 = 8 cm
h
h2 = 2 cm
Bubble at
Sol 20: (B, D) Thrust exerted by the water is ρAV2 if
velocity is doubled then thrust will increase 4 times. the bottom
2(h + h − y)
t=
g
range = vt Force exerted by liquid – 1 = (ρgH + P0) A downwards
2(h + h − y) So statement-I is false
= 2gy .
g
dR Sol 29: (D) Coefficient of viscosity of gases increase
R= 4y(2h − y) . For maximum R, =0
dy with increasing temperature
1
⇒ (2h – 2y) = 0
4y(2h − y) Sol 30: (A) Free surface is always perpendicular to the
geff. Liquids at rest can have only normal forces.
⇒y=h
Rmax = 4h2 = 2h
Previous Years’ Questions
Assertion Reasoning Type
Sol 1: (D) F2 – F1 = upthrust
Sol 25: (B) Pressure of air decreases with increase in F1
height so when pressure outside the balloon is equal to
balloon pressure, it will not size up.
Upthrust
h
Sol 26: (D)
Pressure=6
h 2R
∴ F2 = F1 + upthrust
F2= (p0 + rgh) pR2 + Vrg
Pressure inside the tube is P = P0 + ρgh
=p0pR2+rg(pR2h+V)
When pressure changes height will also change.
∴ Most appropriate option is (D).
So Statement-I is true.
ρ ρ
Buoyant force is independent of atmospheric pressure. Sol 2: (A) k1 = Fe and k 2 = Fe .
ρHg ρHg
0° C 60°C
Sol 27: (A) Suppose submarine is resting on the floor,
then water is exerting only net downward force on Here, ρ = Density
the submarine as lower surface is not available for the
upward force. k1 (ρ ) ρHg (1 + 60 γFe )
∴ = Fe 0°C × =
k 2 (ρHg )0°C (1 + 60 γHg )
ρFe 60°C
(i) When a solid floats in a liquid, then Equating the net downward forces and net upward
ρsolid 5
Fraction of volume submerged (k) = forces, we get, h1 = h .
ρliquid 3
This result comes from the fact that Sol 5: (A) Again equating the forces, we get
Weight = Upthrust
h2=4h/9
Vρsolid
= g Vsubmerged ρliquidg ρ0A1
1 1
Sol 12: (A) Sol 15: (A) ρa Va2 = ρ V2
2 2
Inside volume = V For given Va
Container material
ρa
volume = VC V ∝
ρ
Vw
2 ρ1 − σ2 2 ρ2 − σ1
VP = g and VQ g
9 η2 9 η1
VP η
So, = 1 and VP . VQ < 0
VQ η2
2
(r ) K 1 − r 2
Sol 18: (B, C) P=
R
2 r2
Sol 19: Terminal velocity=
vT
9 η
( ρ − σ ) g , where ρ
is the density of the solid sphere and σ is the density
of the liquid
2
vP
( 8 − 0.8 ) × 12 × 2
=∴ = 3
vQ 1
2
( 8 − 1.6 ) × 4 × 3
2017-18 100 &
op kers
Class 11 T
By E ran culty
-JE Fa r
IIT enior emie .
S fP r es
o titut
Ins
PHYSICS
FOR JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
SECOND
EDITION
Exhaustive Theory
(Now Revised)
Formula Sheet
9000+ Problems
based on latest JEE pattern
PlancEssential
Questions recommended for revision
10. G R AV I TAT I O N
1. INTRODUCTION
Have you ever wondered whether we would still be studying about with Gravitation if a
stone had fallen on Newton’s head instead of an apple? Anyways, the real question is,
why does an apple fall down rather than go upward?
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
The direction of force F is independent of the medium, not affected by the presence of the other bodies
and acts along the line joining the two particles.
If two persons come very close to each other such that the distance between them is almost 0, the two
persons should experience a high force of attraction. Observe keenly the value of G. It’s of order -11.
The Universal gravitational constant G is an experimental value calculated by Cavendish 71 years after
the law was formulated.
Always remember Gravitational Force is conservative in nature i.e. work done doesn’t depend on the
path taken and depends only on the end points.
Vaibhav Gupta (JEE 2009, AIR 54)
1 0 . 2 | Gravitation
Illustration 1: Two particles of masses 1.0 kg and 2.0 kg are placed at a separation of 50 cm. Assuming that the
only forces acting on the particles are their mutual gravitation, find the initial accelerations of the two particles.
(JEE MAIN)
Gm1m2
Sol: The force of mutual gravitation acting on particles is F = . As the particle are accelerating under the
r2
force of gravitation, the acceleration is obtained using Newton’s laws of motion.
The force of gravitation exerted by one particle on the other is
N − m2
6.67 × 10−11 × (1.0kg) × (2.0kg)
Gm1m2 kg2
F= = = 5.3 × 10−10 N.
r2 (0.5m) 2
F 5.3 × 10−10 N
The acceleration of 1.0 kg particle is a=
1 = = 5.3 × 10−10 ms−2
m1 1.0kg
This acceleration is towards the 2.0 kg particles. The acceleration of the 2.0 kg particle is
F 5.3 × 10−10 N
a2
= = = 2.65 × 10−10 ms−2
m2 2.0kg
Illustration 2: Spheres of the same material and same radius r are touching each other.
Show that gravitational force between them is directly proportional to r 4 . (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The force of gravitation is directly proportional to the masses of the spheres. As the
spheres are having the same masses, and mass m ∝ V ⇒ m ∝ r 3 thus the proportionality
between the force and distance is easily established.
As the spheres are made of same material, and density so the mass of each sphere is
2r
m1=m2= (volume) (destiny) Figure 10.3
4 3
= 3 πr ρ
4 4
G πr 3 πr 3 ρ2
Gm1m2 3 3
=F = or F ∝ r4
(2r)2 4r 2
Illustration 3: Three particles each of mass m, are located at the vertices of an equilateral a/2
Am
triangle of side a. At what speed will they move if they all revolve under the influence of
their gravitational force of attraction in a circular orbit circumscribing the triangle while
30 o
m
still preserving the equilateral triangle? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The net force of gravitation on any one particle is due to other two particles. This r
O
gravitational force provides the necessary centripetal force to the particles to move in the
Cm Bm
circular orbit around the equilateral triangle.
GM2 GM2
F=A FAB + FAC
= 2 cos30=
° 3 Figure 10.4
2 2
a a
a mv 2 mv 2 3 GM2 GM
r= , Now = F ; Or = 3;
= ∴v
3 r a a2 a
P hysi cs | 10.3
3. GRAVITATIONAL FIELD
How would a particle interact with the surrounding or with other particles?
Every particle creates a field and when the other particle comes in to this particle’s field, there would be an
interaction between the particles.
The intensity of the field i.e. how intensely
would it attract another particle in its field is called Gravitational field
intensity or Gravitational field strength E . It is defined as the force experienced by a unit mass placed at a distance
F
r due to mass M, i.e. E =
M
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Always remember, it is a vector quantity and should be added vectorially when calculating Gravitational
field intensity at a point by one or more masses.
Vaibhav Krishnan (JEE 2009, AIR 22)
Consider any particle of mass dm on the ring, say at point A. The distance of this particle from P is
Gdm
AP= z= a2 + r 2 .The gravitational field at P is dm is along PA and its magnitude is dE =
z2
Gdm
The component along PO is dEcos = α cos α
z2 A
2 2
The net gravitational field at P due to the ring is Z = a +r
a
Gdm Gcos α GMcos α GMr
=
E ∫ z2= cos α
z2
= ∫ dm =
z2 2 2 2
3
O r P
(a + r )
The field is directed towards the center of the ring.
Figure 10.6
(c) Due to uniform disc of mass M and radius a on its axis.
Let us draw a circle of radius x with the center at O. We draw
another concentric circle of radius x+dx. The part of the disc a
enclosed between these two circles can be treated as a uniform
ring of radius x. The point P is on its axis at a distance r from
the center. The area of this ring is 2πxdx .The area of the whole o P
r
disc is πa2 . As the disc is uniform, the mass of this ring is x
M 2Mxdx
dm= 2πxdx = dx
2
πa a2
The gravitational field at P due to the ring is, by equation, Figure 10.7
2Mxdx
G r
a2 2GMr xdx
= dE =
( ) )
32 2
r 2 + x2 a r 2 + x2 32
1 0 . 4 | Gravitation
As x varies from 0 to a, the rings cover up the whole disc. The field due to each of these is in the same direction
PO. Thus, the net field due to the whole disc is along PO and its magnitude is
a a
2GMr xdx 2GMr xdx
= E ∫= 2 2 2 32 ∫
a 0 (r + x2 )3 2
2 2
...(i) …(i)
o a (r + x )
2 2 2
z then 2x dx=2z dz and
Let r + x =
xdx zdz 1 1 1
∫ (r2 + x2 )3 2 =∫ =∫ dz =− =−
z 3
z 2 z r − x2
2
a
2GMr 1 2GMr 1 1
From
= (i) E − = −
2
a r + x 0
2 2 a r
2
r + a2
2
Equation may be expressed in terms of the angle θ subtended by a radius of the disc at P as,
2GM
E
= (1 − cos θ). ad
a2
(d) Due to uniform thin spherical shell of mass M A
B z
and radius a from the triangle OAP, d
z 2 = a2 + r 2 − 2ar cos θ or
0 P
a sin
2z=
dz 2ar sin θdθ
zdz
or sin θdθ = . …(ii)
ar
Figure 10.8
Also from the triangle OAP,
z 2 + r 2 − a2
a2 = z 2 + r 2 − 2zr cos α or cos α = . … (iii)
2zr
GM a2 − r 2 GM a2 − r 2
Putting from (ii) and (iii) in (i),
= dE
4ar 2
1−
z 2
dz or
= ∫ dE
4ar 2
z +
z
Towards PO. The field due to the whole sphere may be obtained by summing the fields of all the shells
making the solid sphere.
Gdm G GM
∫=
dE ∫
2 ∫
Thus, =E = dm
=
2
r r r2
Thus, a uniform sphere may be treated as a single particle of equal mass placed at its center for calculating
the gravitational field at an external point.
(ii) At an internal point r (<a):
r
Suppose the point P is inside the solid sphere (See Fig 10.10). In this case r<a. a
The sphere may be divided into thin spherical shells all centered at O.
o A
Suppose the mass of such a shell is dm. If the radius of the shell is less than r, the P
Gdm
point is outside the shell. The field due to the shell is dE = along PO.
r2
If the radius of the shell considered is greater than r, the point P is internal and Figure 10.10
the field due to such a shell is zero. The total field due to the whole sphere is
obtained by summing the fields due to all the shells. As all these fields are along
the same direction, the net field is
GdM G
=E ∫=
dE ∫ =
r2 r2
∫ dm ...(i) … (i)
Only the masses of the shells with radii less than r should be added to get
= z a2 + r 2 . These shells form
4 3 4
πr .The volume of the whole sphere is πa3 . As
a solid sphere of radius r. The volume of this sphere is
3 3
M 4 3 Mr3
the given sphere is uniform, the mass of the sphere of radius r is πr =3
4 33 a
πa
Mr 3 G Mr3 GM 3
Thus, ∫ dm = 3 and by =(i) E = r.
a r 2 a3 a3
The gravitational field due to a uniform sphere at an internal point is proportional to the distance of the
point from the center of the sphere.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
One could assume the whole mass is concentrated at the center of mass (now assume it as point mass)
for calculating the gravitation field at an external point for spherical shell, sphere nevertheless of mass
distribution (uniformly/non-uniformly)
Mass distribution should be a function of radial distance only.
Remember the Gauss theorem in Electricity?
Equivalent Gauss theorem for gravitational field is ∫ E.dS =−4πG(m) , m=enclosed mass I guess now you
could deduce the note above. Can you?
Nivvedan (JEE 2009, AIR 113)
Illustration 4: Three concentric shells of homogenous mass distribution of masses M1 , M2 and M3 having radii a,
b and c respectively are situated as shown in Fig. 10.11. Find the force on a particle of mass m (JEE MAIN)
(a) When the particle is located at Q.
(b) When the particle is located at P.
1 0 . 6 | Gravitation
Sol: For a particle of mass m, lying at a distance r from the center of the spherical M3
GMm
shell of mass M and radius r, the gravitational force of attraction is . If
M2
2
r
M1
the particle is lying inside the spherical shell then the force of gravitation on it x
is zero. C
y
GMm
Attraction at an external point due to spherical shell of mass M is while
r2
at an internal point is zero.
(a) Point is external to shell M1 , M2 and M3 , Figure 10.11
Illustration 5: A uniform ring of mass m and radius a is placed directly above a uniform sphere of mass M and of
equal radius. The center of the ring is at a distance 3a from the center of the sphere. Find the gravitational force
exerted by the sphere on the ring. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: The field due to ring at the center of the sphere can be found easily, as the center of m a
the sphere is lying at the axis of the ring. From Newton’s third law of motion the force on
the sphere due to the ring will be equal in magnitude to the force exerted by the sphere on
the ring. 3a
The gravitational field at any point on the ring due to the sphere is equal to the field due to a
a single particle of mass M placed at the center of the sphere. Thus, the force on the ring due
M
to the sphere is also equal to the force on it by a particle of mass M placed at this point. By
Newton’s third law, it is equal to the force on the particle by the ring.
Figure 10.12
Now the gravitational field due to the ring at a distance d = 3a on its axis is
G md 3 Gm
=E =
(a + d2 )3 2
2
8 a2
3 GMm
The force on a particle of mass M placed here is F=ME = . Thus we have used the formula for field due
to a ring. 8 a2
Variation in the value of g: The value of g varies from place to place on the surface of earth. It also varies as we
go above or below the surface of the earth. Thus, value of g depends on the following factors:-
P hysi cs | 10.7
(a) Shape of the earth: The earth is not a perfect sphere. It is somewhat flat at the two poles. The equatorial
radius is approximately 21 km more than the polar radius. And since
GM 1
g = Or g∝
2
R R2
The value of g is minimum at the equator and maximum at the poles.
(b) Height above the surface of the earth: The gravitational force on mass m due to Earth of mass M at height
h above the surface of earth is
m
GMm
F= h
(R + h )
2
F GM
So the acceleration due to gravity is g=
′ =
m (R + h)2
GM g GM R
This can also be written as, g′ = Or g′ = as =g
h
2
h
2
R2 M
R 2 1 + 1 +
R R Figure 10.13
Thus, g′ < g i.e., the value of acceleration due to gravity g goes on decreasing as we go
above the surface of earth. Further,
−2
h 2h
g′ g 1 +
= or g′ ≈ g 1 − if h<<R
R R
So on going above the surface of the earth, acceleration due to gravity decreases. Note that mass is always
constant.
(c) Depth below the surface of the earth: Let an object of mass m is situated at a
h
depth h below the earth’s surface. Its distance from the center of earth is (R - h). m
This mass is situated at the surface of the inner solid sphere and lies inside the outer
spherical shell. The gravitational force of attraction on a mass inside a spherical
shell is always zero. Therefore, the object experiences gravitational attraction only O
due to inner solid sphere.
R
M 4 (R − h)3
The mass of this sphere
= is M′ π(R − h)3 or M′ = M
4 3 πR 3 3 R3
Figure 10.14
GM′ m GMm(R − h) F
= F = and g′ =
(R − h)2
R 3 m
h
Substituting the values, we get =
g′ g 1 − i.e., g′ < g
R
(d) Axial rotation of the earth: Let us consider a particle P at rest on the surface of y
the earth, in latitude φ . Then the pseudo force acting on the particles is mrω2
in outward direction. The true acceleration g is acting towards the center O of r P
the earth. Thus, the effective accelerating g′ is the resultant of g and rω2 or
g’
g′
= g2 + (rω2 )2 + 2g(rω2 )cos(180 − φ) O X
R
or ′
g= g2 + r 2 ω4 − 2grω2 cos φ ... (i)
Figure 10.15
2 4 2π 2π
Here, the term r ω comes out to be too small as =
ω =
T 24 × 3600
1 0 . 8 | Gravitation
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
They is always a decrease in the value of acceleration due to gravity from that of g at the surface
irrespective of the condition.
If earth were to rotate faster ‘g’ would decrease at all points except at the poles. Guessed it? φ is 90 at
poles. Also remember φ is 0 at equator.
Chinmay S Purandare (JEE 2012, AIR 698)
Illustration 6: Suppose the earth increases its speed of rotation. At what new time period will the weight of a body
on the equator become zero? Take g = 10 m/s2 and radius of earth R = 6400km. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: When rotational speed of earth is increased, the centrifugal force acting on the particle at rest at equator also
increases. At the equator, the centrifugal force is opposite to the force of gravity. Thus the apparent value of g is
g 2π
g' = g − Rω2 . For mass of body to be zero at the equator, g’ = 0 i.e. ω = . The time period of rotation is T = .
R ω
The weight will become zero, when g′ = 0 or g − Rω2 =0 (on the equator g′ = g − Rω2 )
g 2π g R
or
= ω ; ∴
= or T=2π
R T R g
6400 × 103
2π
Substituting the values, T= 10 h or T=1.4 h
3600
Thus, the new time period should be 1.4 h instead of 24 h for the weight of a body to be zero on the equator.
Illustration 7: A simple pendulum has a time period exactly 2 s when used in a laboratory at North Pole. What will
be the time period if the same pendulum is used in a laboratory at equator? Account for the earth’s rotation only.
GM
Take= g = 9.8m / s2 and radius of earth=6400 km. (JEE ADVANCED)
R2
Sol: The time period of simple pendulum is given by t = 2π where is the length of pendulum. At the equator
g
value of acceleration due to gravity ‘g’ is different than at the pole. The apparent value of g is g' = g − Rω2 . Thus
the time periods will be different.
Consider the pendulum in its mean position at the North Pole. As the pole is on the axis of rotation, the bob is
GMm
in equilibrium. Hence in the mean position, the tension T is balanced by earth’s attraction. Thus,
= T = mg.
R2
The time period t is t =2π =2π ... (i) … (i)
T /m g
P hysi cs | 10.9
2π radian
At equator, the lab and the pendulum rotate with the earth at angular velocity ω = in a circle of radius
equal to 6400 km. Using Newton’s second law, 24 hour
GMm
− T′ =ω2R or, =
T′ m(g − ω2R)
2
R
Where T′ is the tension in the string.
The time period will be
l l
t′ =
2π 2π
= ...(ii) … (ii)
(T′ / m) g − ω2R
By (i) and (ii)
−1 2
t′ g ω 2R ω2R
= = 1 − or, =
t′ t 1 +
t g − ω 2R g 2g
Putting the values, t ' = 2.004 seconds.
This is the change in potential energy of the particles when moved from B to C.
Suppose the same particles which are of mass m 1 and m 2 are very far from each other and we need to calculate
the change in potential energy when the distance between them becomes r. Then using above formulae,
1 1 Gm1m2
we get U(r) − U(∞ ) =Gm1m2 − =−
∞ r r
1 0 . 1 0 | Gravitation
We make a standard assumption that the potential energy of the two-particle system to be zero when the distance
between them is infinity. This means that we choose U(∞ ) =0.
Note: Just as one assumed current to be in opposite direction with the flow of electrons, the potential at infinity is
assumed to be zero.
8. GRAVITATIONAL POTENTIAL
The potential at a point may also be defined as the work done per unit mass by an external agent in bringing a
particle slowly from the reference point to the given point. Generally the reference point is chosen at infinity so
that the potential at infinity is zero.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
By slowly I mean, the particle is moved in such a way that there is no increase in Kinetic energy.
Since the Kinetic energy of the particle is zero, from the work energy theorem, the total work done
is change in potential energy. So, what is the difference between the Potential and Potential energy?
Observe it is the work done per unit mass.
Nitin Chandrol (JEE 2012, AIR 134)
UB − UA
We define the “change in potential” VB − VA between the two points as VB − VA =
m
Calculation of some Gravitational potentials:
(a) Potential due to point mass M at a point P which is at a distance r
(b) (ii) Potential due to Uniform ring of radius “a” and mass M at a point P on its axis.
r
U(r) − U( ∞ )
(c) V(r) =
m M
A P
GMm GM
But U (r) – U (∞) = − so that V= − Figure 10.17
r r
GM
The gravitational potential due to a point mass M at a distance r is −
r
(d) Consider any small part of the ring of mass dm. The point P is at a distance=z a2 + r 2 from dm.
GdM Gdm
dV =
− =
− ; a z
r a2 + r 2
O r P
Gdm G GM
V = ∫ dV = ∫− = − ∫ dm = −
a2 + r 2 a 2+ r 2 a2 + r 2
Figure 10.18
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Remember that potential is a scalar quantity and one can directly add the contributions due to each of
the point masses.
Potential due to Uniform Thin spherical shell and due to Uniform sphere can be derived similarly and
here is the table of all the results.
P hysi cs | 10.11
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
GMr
(a )
32
2
−GM + r2
Uniform Ring at a point on its axis
a2 + r 2
towards center of ring
−GM 0 (inside)
(inside)
a
Uniform Thin spherical shell
−GM GM
(outside) (outside)
r r2
GMr
−GMr 2 (inside)
(Inside) a3
a3
Uniform Solid Sphere
GM
(outside)
−GM
2a3
(3a 2
−r 2
) (outside) r2
Only the magnitudes of gravitational field are written. As the gravitational force is attractive in nature,
the direction could be easily found out.
Gravitational force, potential and potential energy all are taken with negative sign because the
gravitational force is always attractive in nature.
∂V ∂V ∂V
Ex = − , Ey = − and Ez = −
∂x ∂y ∂z
r2
( ) ()
Potential using the field for various cases V r2 − V r1 =
− ∫ E .dr.
r1
Illustration 8: A particle of mass 1 kg is kept on the surface of a uniform sphere of mass 20 kg and radius 1.0 m.
Find the work to be done against the gravitational force between them to take the particle away from the sphere.
(JEE MAIN)
Sol: The work done in moving a particle away from the sphere will be equal to the change in gravitational potential
energy of the particle in the gravitational field of the sphere.
GM (6.67 × 10−11 )(20)
Potential at the surface of sphere, V=
− =
− −1.334 × 10−9 J kg
J kg =
R 1
1 0 . 1 2 | Gravitation
i.e., 1.334 × 10−9 J work is obtained to bring a mass of 1 kg from infinity to the surface of sphere. Hence, the same
amount of work will have to be done to take the particle away from the surface of sphere. Thus,= W 1.334 × 10−9 J
Illustration 9: A particle is fired vertically upward with a speed of 9.8 km/s. Find the maximum height attained by
the particle. Radius of earth = 6400 km and g at the surface=9.8 m/s2. Consider only earth’s gravitation.
(JEE MAIN)
Sol: Particle initially moves with kinetic energy only in upwards direction opposite to the gravitation pull of earth.
The loss in its kinetic energy is equal to the gain in the potential energy. At the highest point of its vertical motion,
kinetic energy is converted completely into potential energy.
GMm
At the surface of the earth, the potential energy of the earth-particle system is − with usual symbols. The
R
1 2
kinetic energy is mv 0 where v0 = 9.8 km/s. At the maximum height the kinetic energy is zero. If the maximum
2
GMm
height reached is H, the potential energy of the earth-particle system at this instant is − . Using conservation
R +H
GMm 1 2 GMm
of energy, − + mv 0 = −
R 2 R +H
v 2 −gR 2 R2 v2 R2
Writing GM = gR 2 and dividing by m, −gR + 0 = or = R − 0 or R + H = Putting the
2 R +H R +H 2g v 20
values of R, v 0 and g on the right side, R−
2g
( 6400km=
) ( 6400km )
2 2
R +H
= = 27300km or H =(27300 − 6400)km =20900km.
(9.8kms ) 1500km
2
−1
6400km −
2 × 9.8ms−2
Illustration 10: Two particles of equal masses go round a circle of radius R under the action of their mutual
gravitational attraction. Find the speed of each particle. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: As the particles go around the circle they always remain diametrically opposite to each other. To sustain their
respective circular motion the necessary centripetal acceleration is provided by the gravitation force of attraction
between them.
The particles will always remain diametrically opposite so that the force on each particle will be directed along the
Gm2
radius. Consider the motion of one of the particles. The force on the particle is F = . If Thus, by Newton’s law,
4R 2
Gm2 mv 2 Gm
= or v=
4R 2 R 4R
9. BINDING ENERGY m
It is the energy due to which a system is bound. Suppose the mass m is placed on the surface
of earth. The radius of the earth is R and its mass M. Then, the kinetic energy of the particle K=0 R
M
GMm
and potential energy of the particle is UU == − .
R
GMm GMm Figure 10.19
Therefore, the total mechanical energy of the particle is, E = K + U = 0 − or E = −
R R
It is due to this energy, the particle is attached to the earth. If this amount of energy is supplied
to the particle in any form (normally kinetic), the particle no longer remains bound to the earth. It goes out of the
gravitational field of earth.
P hysi cs | 10.13
Illustration 11: Assuming the earth to be a sphere of uniform mass destiny, calculate the energy needed to
completely disassemble it against the gravitational pull amongst its constituent particles. Given the product of
2
2.5 × 1031 kgm, g =.
mass and radius of the earth = 10m s (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The work done to completely disassemble the earth will be equal to change in potential energy of the earth.
Initial potential energy is negative and final will be zero.
3M
If M and R are the mass and radius of the earth, then the density ρ of the earth is ρ =
4 πR 3
The earth may be supposed to be made up of a large number of thin concentric spherical shells. It can be
disassembled by removing such shells one by one. When a sphere of radius x is left, the energy needed to remove
Gm1m2
a shell of thickness lying between x and x + dx is dU =
x
4 3
Where m 1 = mass of the sphere of radius x= πx p,
3
4 x2dxρ
and m 2 = mass of the spherical shell of radius x and thickness dx =π
4
3
(
G πx3ρ 4 πx2dxρ )
16 2 2 4
∴ dw = dU = = Gπ ρ x dx
x 3
2
16Gπ2ρ2 R5 16 2
R
16Gπ2ρ2 4 M 3 GM2
R5 =
∫
Total energy required U = dU =
3 ∫ x dx = =
3 5 15
Gπ
( 4 3 ) πR 3 5 R
0
3 3
= gMR = × 10 × 2.5 × 1031 =1.5 × 1032 J.
5 5
1 GMm 2GM GM
mv 2e = or ve = or v e = 2gR as g =
2 R R R2
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Illustration 12: Calculate the escape velocity from the surface of moon. The mass of the moon is 7.4 × 1022 kg and
= 1.74 × 106 m
radius (JEE MAIN)
2GMm
Sol: Escape velocity of any object placed on moon is given by v e =
Rm
1 0 . 1 4 | Gravitation
2GMm
Escape velocity from the surface of moon is v e =
Rm
11. SATELLITES
Satellites are generally of two types:
Natural Satellites: Moon is a natural satellite of the earth.
Artificial Satellite: These are launched in to space by humans and they help us in weather forecasting,
telecommunications etc. The path of these satellites is elliptical with the center of earth at a focus.
2πr 2πr r3
Period of Revolution: The period of revolution (T) is given by T = or T = or T = 2π
vo GM GM
r
r3
Or T = 2π (as GM= gR 2 )
gR 2
GMm
Energy of Satellite: The potential energy of the system is U= −
r
1 1 GM
The kinetic energy of the satellite=
is, K = mv 20 m
2 2 r
1 GMm K
or K =
2 r
GMm GMm r
The total energy is, E =K +U =− or E= − E
2r 2r E=K+U
U
This energy is constant and negative, i.e., the system is closed. The farther the
satellite from the earth the greater its total energy.
Figure 10.21
P hysi cs | 10.15
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
The velocity of a satellite is independent of its mass. It only depends upon the mass of the planet around
which it revolves.
What if the time period of rotation of satellite is exactly 24 hours just as the time period of rotation of
earth? Its position w.r.t earth is fixed right! Try calculating the distance from the earth’s surface. By the
way, these satellites are called Geo-stationary (stationary w.r.t earth) satellites.
Yashwanth Sandupatla (JEE 2012, AIR 821)
Illustration 13: Consider an earth’s satellite so positioned that it appears stationary to an observer on earth and
serves the purpose of a fixed relay station for international transmission of TV and other communications. What
would be the height at which the satellite should be positioned and what would be the direction of its motion?
Given that the radius of the earth is 6400 km and acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the earth is
9.8 m/s2. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: For any artificial satellite to appear stationary with respect to a point on earth, it must rotate with the same
angular speed as that of the earth and in the direction of motion as of the earth. The angular velocity of the satellite
at height h above earth surface is given by ω = GM / r 3 where r=R+h.
For a satellite to remain above a given point on the earth’s surface, it must rotate with the same angular velocity
as the point on earth’s surface. Therefore the satellite must rotate in the equatorial plane from west to east with a
time period of 24 hours.
Now as for a satellite orbital velocity is v 0 = GM / r
1
2πr r r 2
2 3
T == 2πr 2πr
= (as g = GM R ) or r =gR =4.23 × 107m =42300km
vo GM gR 2 4 π2
So the height of the satellite above the surface of earth, h =r − R = 42300 − 6400 ≈ 36000km
Illustration 14: Two satellites S1 and S2 revolve round a planet in coplanar circular orbits in the same sense. Their
periods of revolution are 1 h and 8 h respectively. The radius of the orbit of S1 is 10 4 km. When S2 is closest to S1
find (a) the speed of S2 relative to S1 and (b) the angular speed of S2 as observed by an astronaut in S1.
(JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: According to Kepler’s laws of planetary motion, T2 ∝ R 3 . The orbital velocity of V1
2πR
the satellite v 0 = = Rω where ω is the angular velocity of revolution of satellite. R2
T
Let the mass of the planet be M, that of S1 be m1 and of S2 be m2 .
Let the radius of the orbit of S1 be R1( = 10 4 km) and so S2 be R 2 . R1 S1 S2
Let v1 and v 2 be the linear speeds of S1 and S2 with respect to the planet. The given
Fig 10.22 shows the situation.
As the square of the time period is proportional to the cube of the radius,
Figure 10.22
3 2 2
R2 T2 8h R2
= = = 64 or = 4 or R 2= 4R1= 4 × 10 4 km
R1 T
1 1h
R1
1 0 . 1 6 | Gravitation
(b) As seen from S1 , the satellite S2 is at a distance R 2 − R1 =3 × 10 4 km at the closest separation. Also, it is moving
at π × 10 4 kmh−1 in a direction perpendicular to the line joining them.
π × 10 4 kmh−1 π
Thus, the angular speed of S2 as observed=
by S1 is ω = radh−1
4
3 × 10 km 3
Illustration 15: A spaceship is launched into a circular orbit close to the earth’s surface. What additional
velocity is now to be added to the spaceship in the orbit to overcome the gravitational pull? Radius of earth
= 6400
= km, g 9.8 m s2 . (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The potential energy of the spaceship close to the earth is negative (- mgR). The orbital speed close to the
earth is v = gR , so the kinetic energy is mgR/2. The total energy is - mgR/2. We need to provide the additional
kinetic energy = mgR/2 such that the spaceship escapes the gravitational pull of the earth.
mv 2 mgR
The extra kinetic energy to be given is = , so that the extra velocity given is v ' = gR .
2 2
Illustration 16: An artificial satellite is moving in a circular orbit around the earth with a speed equal to one fourth
the magnitude of escape velocity from the earth.
(i) Determine the height of the satellite above the earth’s surface.
(ii) If the satellite is stopped suddenly in its orbit and allowed to fall freely towards the earth, find the speed with
which it hits the surface of the earth. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: For satellite the escape velocity is v e = 2Rg . According to given data the satellite is moving in the orbit with
one fourth the magnitude of this velocity. When satellite stops revolving, it falls freely under action of gravity from
the height h above the surface of the earth. The loss in the gravitational potential energy in falling height h is equal
to gain in the kinetic energy of the satellite.
(i) Let M and R be the mass and radius of the earth respectively. Let m be the mass of satellite. Here escape velocity
from earth v e = (2Rg)
ve
Velocity of satellite v=
g = (2Rg) / 4 ...(i) …(i)
4
GM R 2g R 2g
Further
= vc =
∴ v 2g = ...(ii) …(ii)
r
R +h R +h
From equation (i) and (ii), we get H=7R=44800km
(ii) Now, the total energy at height h=total energy on earth’s surface (principle of conservation of energy). Let it
reach earth’s surface with velocity v.
m 1 m 1 2 GMm GMm
∴ 0 − GM =mv 2 − GM Or =mv − ( h = 7R )
R +h 2 R 2 R 7R
P hysi cs | 10.17
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Observe the time period of rotation of satellite. Got it? (It follows Kepler’s third law too)
When the planet is farthest from Sun, it is said to be at the Apogee of Aphelion.
When the planet is at nearest to the Sun, it is said to be at Perigee or Perhilion.
GV Abhinav (JEE 2012, AIR 329)
Illustration 17: The minimum and maximum distance of a satellite from the center of the earth are 2R and 4R
respectively, where R is the radius of earth and M is the mass of the earth. Find:
(a) Its minimum and maximum speeds,
(b) Radius of curvature at the point of minimum distance. (JEE ADVANCED)
1 0 . 1 8 | Gravitation
Sol: The speed of the satellite is minimum when is at the maximum distance from the earth and vice versa. At the
point of minimum or maximum distance from earth the velocity vector is perpendicular to the radius vector from
the earth. Apply law of conservation of angular momentum and energy at the two points.
(a) Applying conservation of angular momentum
GM 2GM
v2 = , v1 =
6R 3R
Illustration 18: The planet Neptune travels around the Sun with a period of 165 year. Show that the radius of its
orbit is approximately thirty times that of Earth’s orbit, both being considered as circular. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: According to the Kepler’s laws of planetary motion T2 ∝ R 3 where T is the time period of revolution and R is
the radius of the orbit of revolution of planet. Taking the ratio of time periods of revolution of Earth and Neptune,
we get the ratio of radius of their orbits.
T1 = TEarth =1 year;T2 = TNeptune =165 year=165 T1
Let R1 and R 2 be the radii of the circular orbits of Earth and Neptune respectively.
GMm r M
= mω2r
(r + R )
2
The revised law of periods in
Two bodies moving in circular
4 π2 3 R 2 orbits under the influences of each
=T2 r 1+
GM r other’s gravitational attraction
Figure 10.25
P hysi cs | 10.19
Illustration 19: A pair of stars rotate about their common center of mass. One of them has mass m and the other
2m. Their centers are a distance d apart, d being large compared to the size of either star.
(a) Derive an expression for the period or rotation of the stars about their common center of mass in terms of d,
m and G
(b) Compare the angular moments of the two stars about their common center of mass.
(c) Compare the kinetic energies of the two stars. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The gravitational pull between two stars provides the necessary centripetal acceleration to make them revolve
2π
in a circular orbit. The time period of revolution of each star is T = . The angular momentum of the revolving
ω 2
Iω
body is given by L=I ω = m r2 ω. And the kinetic energy is given by E = .
2
The center of mass O is at a distance 2d/3 from the star of mass m and d/3 from the star of mass 2m. Both the stars
rotate with the same angular velocity ω .
(a) Since the gravitational force provides the centripetal force, then
2d 2 Gm.2m 2π
m = ω ⇒ ω = 3Gm d3 or T = = 2π d3 3Gm
3 d2 ω
O
m 2m
(b) Ratio of angular momenta
2d/3 d/3
Lsmall m ( 2d 3) ω
2
= = 2
Llarge 2m d 3 2 ω
( )
(c) Ratio of kinetic energies Figure 10.26
1 2
Esmall 2 ismallω
= = 2
Elarge 1
ibigω2
2
PROBLEM-SOLVING TACTICS
1. Most of the problems are easy, as gravitation and electrostatics are analogous to each other. Just be careful
that gravitational force is always attractive, whereas electrostatic force can be attractive as well as repulsive
and make changes as necessary.
2. Assumptions are appreciated in real cases of satellites and planetary motion.
3. Ideas and concepts of circular motion must be strong because they are generally applied here.
4. While dealing practical cases on Earth, be careful about Earth’s rotation on its own axis.
5. Most questions are solved with ease by using work-energy theorem and laws of motion
1 0 . 2 0 | Gravitation
FORMULAE SHEET
GM
′ Fm
Acceleration due to gravity= g= =
(R + h )
2
2h
g′ g 1 −
If h << R =
R M R
4
h
R g′ g 1 −
At a certain, Depth H, acceleration due to gravity g′ is=
R
g is acceleration due to gravity at surface of earth.
7 Point Mass GM
GM −
r2 r
Outside
GM Outside −
GM
2
2a
(3a2
− r2 )
2
r
Here, a is the radius and r is the
location of point mass.
11 Gravitational potential Note: It is a scalar; SI unit is J kg .
12 ∂y ∂V ˆ ∂V ˆ
E=− ˆi + j+ k
∂x ∂y ∂z
Note: It is partial derivative dV = −E.dr .
4 ( 4 − 1)
They are = 6 Pairs
2
14 For an n particle system, no. of pairs would
n (n − 1)
be Pairs
2
15 Binding Energy
GMm It is due to this energy particle is bound to earth.
m E=
R
R
M
16 Escape Velocity
v e = 2gR
18 Kepler’s Laws
1st Law:- Law of elliptical orbits
2nd Law:- Law of conservation of angular momentum
V2
A B (
3rd Law:- Harmonic law T2 ∝ r 3 )
r2 S r1
V1 v1r1 = v 2r2
v1 a (1 + e ) =
= r2 a (1 − e )
GM 1 − e
Vmin
= V=
1
a 1+ e
GM 1 + e
Vmax
= V=
2
a 1− e
Solved Examples
M
GM1m Gm dx
At P, F = 0 At Q, F =
⇒ dU =
− l
b2 x
G(M1 + M2 )m
At R, F = GmM a+l dx GmM a +l
c2 ⇒U=∫ dU =− l ∫a x
=−
l
Inx
a
Example 3: If the radius of the earth contracts to half of Sol: The gravitational force acting on the particle P due
its present value without change in its mass, what will
Gm2
be the new duration of the day? to each of other particles is given by F = where
(r )
2
Sol: The angular momentum of the earth is given by r is the separation between P and the other particle.
2 2 As the force is vector quantity the resultant force on
L = I ω = MR ω since earth is considered to be sphere
5 particle P has to be found by vector addition.
of uniform mass density. As there is no external force
The force at P due to A is
is acting on the earth, the angular momentum of the
earth must remain constant after the radius of earth = Gm2 Gm2
FA = along PA. The force at P due to C is
reduces to half of its original size. The time period of
( AP ) 2d
2 2
2π
revolution is T = . P
ω 2
Present angular momentum of earth L1 = Iω = MR ω 2
5 FA
New angular momentum because of change in radius FB
FC
2 d
2 R
=L2 M ω′
5 2 A d B d C
If external torque is zero then angular momentum must
Gm2 Gm2
be conserved =FC = along PC. The force at P due to B is
( CP ) 2d
2 2
L1 = L2
Gm2
2 1 2 FB = along PB
MR 2 ω= × MR 2 ω ' i.e., ω ' = 4ω d2
5 4 5
The resultant of FA , FB and FC will be along PB. Clearly
1 1
T′ = T = × 24 =6h ∠APB =
∠BPC =
45°
4 4
Gm2
Example 4: Two particles of equal mass go round a Components of FA along
= PB FA cos
= 45°
2 2d2
circle of radius R under the action of their mutual
gravitational attraction. Find the speed of each particle.
Gm2
Component of Fc along
= PB Fc cos
= 45°
Sol: As the particles go around the circle they always 2 2d2
remain diametrically opposite to each other. To
Gm2
sustain their respective circular motion the necessary Component of FB along PB =
centripetal acceleration is provided by the gravitation d2
force of attraction between them. Hence, the resultant of the three forces is
The particles will always remain diametrically opposite Gm2 1 1 Gm2 1
so that the force on each particle will be directed along 2 + 1
+=
2
1+ along PB.
d 2 2 2 2 d 2
the radius. Consider the motion of one of the particles.
Gm2
The force on the particle is F = . If the speed is v, Example 6: What is the fractional decrease in the value
its acceleration is v 2 / R . 4R 2
of free-fall acceleration g for a particle when it is lifted
Thus, by Newton’s law, from the surface to an elevation h? (h<<R)
Gm2 mv 2 Gm
= Or, v = Sol: The gravitational acceleration g at height h is
4R 2 R 4R
GM GM
given by g = . As here R>>h then g ≈ . The
(R + h)2
R2
Example 5: Three particles A, B and C, each of mass m, fractional decrease in g at height h above the surface of
are placed in a line with AB=BC=d. Find the gravitational ∆g
force on a fourth particle P of same mass, placed at the earth is given by .
g
a distance d from the particle B on the perpendicular
bisector of the line AC.
1 0 . 2 4 | Gravitation
The situation is shown in the above figure These fields are in opposite directions. For the resultant
field to be zero E1 = E2 ,
Here =
m1r m2 (d − r)
6 × 1024 kg 7.4 × 1022 kg
∴ (m1 + m2 ) r =
m2d Or, =
x2
( 4.0 × 10 km − x )
2
5
m2d
r=
(m1 + m2 ) Or, =
x 6 × 1024
= 9
4.0 × 105 km − x 7.4 × 1022
Also =
M (m1 + m2 )
As gravitational force provides the necessary centripetal x 3.6 × 105 km
Or, =
force for rotation, we have
Example 9: A planet of mass m1 revolves around the
m1m2 m1v12 m1v1 (m1 + m2 )
2
G = = sun of mass m2. The distance between the sun and the
d2 r m2d planet is r. Taking into consideration the motion of the
12 sun, find the total energy of the system assuming the
12
Gm2 G orbits to be circular.
2
=∴ v1 = m2
(m1 + m2 ) d Md
Sol: The gravitational pull between sun and planet
provides the necessary centripetal acceleration to
2π 2πr 2πr 2πd3 2 m2d
make them revolve in circular orbits with same angular
Now=
T =
= = as r =
ω v1 m2 G Md GM M velocities. The center of each circular orbit will be at the
combined center of mass but their radii will be different.
2
T d3 2 T Both the planet and the sun revolve around their center
∴ = or d = 3 GM.
of mass with same angular velocity (say ω)
2π GM 2π
m1 r1 r2 m2
COM
P hysi cs | 10.25
r= r1 + r2 … (i)
−13.34 × 10−11 J + 0
2 2 Gm1m2
m1r1ω= m2r2 ω= … (ii) 13.34 × 10−11 J − m 1
( )
2
r2 =
− + ( 2 kg) 10−5 m / s
d 2
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
1
( )
2
m
+
2
(1 kg) 2 × 10−5 m / s
r1 = r m22
r1 = r m1m + m2 Solving this, d = 0.31m.
r1 = r m1 +2m2
m m +m
r2 = r 1 m11 2
r2 = r m1m + m2 Example 11: The gravitational field in a region is given
r2 = r m1 +1m2
ω22 =G (m
Gm(m1 +1 ++mm
13
2 2 )
m
2)
( )( )
by E 10Nkg−1 i + j . Find the work done by an
=
ω =G (m r + m )
ω2 =
13
r 2 external agent to slowly shift a particle of mass of 2 kg
r3 from the point (0,0) to a point (5m, 4m).
And now, total energy of the system is E= P.E. + K.E. Y B(5m,4m)
Gm1m2 1 1
or E =− + m1r12 ω2 + m2r22 ω2
r 2 2
Substituting the values of r1 , r2 and ω2 , we get
Gm1m2 O (0,0) A X
E= − .
2r Sol: As the particle is moving slowly, the kinetic energy
of the particle remains zero during its motion. The work
Example 10: Two particles A and B of masses 1 kg and done by the external agent to move the particle is given
2 kg respectively are kept 1 m apart and are released f
to move under mutual attraction. Find the speed of A by W = −∆U =
when that of B is 3.6 cm/hour. What is the separation
∫ F.dr
i
between the particles at this instant? As the particle is slowly shifted, its kinetic energy
remains zero. The total work done on the particle is
Sol: As the particles A and B are initially at rest, the thus zero. The work done by the external agent should
system has potential energy only, but as they move be negative of the work done by the gravitational field.
towards each other the loss in potential energy is equal f
to gain in kinetic energy. As particle is moving under The work done by the field is dW =
their mutual interaction, the linear momentum system
∫ F.dr
− dU =
i
must be conserved. Consider the figure. Suppose the particle is taken from
O to A and then from A to B. The force on the particle is
The linear momentum of the pair A+B is initially zero.
As only mutual attraction is taken into account – which
is internal when A+B is taken as the system – the linear
F mE
= = ( 2kg) 10Nkg−1 = ( )( )
i + j ( 20N) i + j ( )
momentum will remain zero. The particles move in
The work done by the field during the displacement
opposite directions. If the speed of A is v when the
OA is
speed of B is 3.6 cm / hour = 10−5 m / s ,
5m 5m
(1kg)v = (2kg)(10 −5 ms−1 )
−5 −1
W1 = ∫ Fx dx = ∫ ( 20N)dx = 20N × 5m = 100J.
or, v= 2 × 10 ms 0 0
GmAmB Similarly, the work done in displacement AB is
The potential energy of the pair is − with usual
symbols. Initial potential energy R
4m 4m
6.67 × 10 −11 2 2
N − m kg × 2kg × 1kg
W2
= ∫ Fy dy
= ( 20N) dy (=
∫= 20N)( 4m) 80J
= − 0 0
1m
Thus, the total work done by the field, as the particle is
−13.34 × 10−11 J.
=
shifted from O to B, is 180 J.
If the separation at the given instant is d, using The work done by the external agent is -180 J.
conservation of energy,
Note that the work is independent of the path so that
we can choose any path convenient to us from O to B.
1 0 . 2 6 | Gravitation
Example 12: A uniform solid sphere of mass M and Using conservation of angular momentum
radius ‘a’ is surrounded symmetrically by a uniform thin mv prp = mv ara
and spherical shell of equal mass and radius 2a. Find
As velocities are perpendicular to the radius, vectors at
the gravitational field at a distance
apogee and perigee, v prp = v ara
3 5
((a)
a)
2
a from the center, ((b)
b ) a from the center.
2
Using conservation of energy,
GMm 1 −GMm 1
Sol: If the particle is inside the spherical shell then the − + mv p2 = + mv 2a
rp 2 ra 2
gravitation field due to the shell is zero. The gravitational
field at distance r from the center of the sphere is given By solving, the above equations,
GM
by E = .
r2 2GMra 2GMrpra
vp
= = ; L mv
= prp m
2a
(
rp rp + ra ) rp + ra ( )
a
P1 P2
JEE Advanced/Boards
Given figure shows the situation. The point p1 is at a Example 1: The distance between the centers of two
3 5 stars is 10 a. The masses of these stars are M and 16 M
distance a from the center and p2 is at a distance
2 2 and their radii, `a’ and `2a’ respectively. A body of mass
a from the center. As p1 is inside the cavity of the thin m is fired straight from the surface of the larger star
towards the smaller star. What should be its minimum
spherical shell, the field here due to the shell is zero. initial speed to reach the surface of the smaller star?
The field due to the solid sphere is Obtain the expression in terms of G, M and a.
GM 4GM
=E = Sol: At a certain distance from the centers of the stars,
2
3 9a2
a the gravitational fields due to the stars are equal in
2 magnitude but opposite in direction. As the body of
mass m is projected from the surface of larger star
This is also the resultant field. The direction is towards
towards the surface of smaller star, the kinetic energy
the center. The point p2 is outside the sphere as well
lost by the body is equal to gain of its potential energy
as the shell. Both may be replaced by single particles
when it reaches at the point of zero field.
of the same mass at the center. The field due to each
of them is Let O be the point along O1O2 where gravitational
intensities due to both the stars balance each other.
GM 4GM
=E′ =
2
5 25a2 M1=16M Threshold
a
2
M2=M
8GM 2a O m
The resultant field is=
E 2E
=′ towards the center.
2
25a O1 O2
X
Example 13: A planet of mass m revolves in an
10a
elliptical orbit around the sun so that its maximum and
minimum distance from the sun are equal to ra and rp Let O1O = x
respectively. Find the angular momentum of this planet
relative to the sun. GM1 GM2
∴ 2
=
2
x
(10a − x )
Sol: At the apogee and perigee the radius vector is
perpendicular to the velocity vector of the plane. Use Or 16 (10 − x ) =
2
x2 or x = 8a
the law of conservation of angular momentum and
energy at these two points.
P hysi cs | 10.27
Gm (16M) GmM 65GMm minimum and maximum distance from earth’s center
U1 =
− − =
−
2a 8a 8a during subsequent motion of the particle.
Potential energy at Sol: As the particle is projected from the satellite while
the satellite is still in circular motion, the net velocity of
GMm G (16M) m 5GMm the particle is sum of velocity relative to satellite and
O=
− − =
− UO
=
2a 8a 2a the velocity of the satellite. As the particle is still bound
to the gravitational attraction of the earth, the orbit
1 2
As U1 + mv min UO
= of the particle will be ellipse. The point of projection
2
is perigee. Conserve the angular momentum at the
65GMm 1 2 5GMm apogee and perigee.
∴− + mv min = −
8a 2 2a The orbital speed of satellite is
1 2 65GMm 5GMm 45 GMm GM
or mv min = − = vo = … (i)
2 8a 2a 8 a r
2 45 GM 9 × 5 GM Where M=mass of earth
v min = ×
4 a 4 a
Absolute velocity of particle would be:
3 5GM 5
v min= × v p =v + v o = v = 1.25 v o … (ii)
2 a 4 o
Since, v p lies between orbital velocity and escape
Example 2: Two masses m1 and m2 , at an infinite velocity, path of the particle would be an ellipse with r
distance from each other are initially at rest, start being the minimum distance.
interacting gravitationally. Find their velocity of
approach when they are at a distance r apart.
r1 r2
P r
V0
a 2
For the position of COM
r1 r2 r1 + r2 r
1 2 v o GMm 1
2
GMm
= = =
m2 m1 m1 + m2 m1 + m2
(r= r1 + r2 )
m vo + − = mv 2 −
2 4 a 2 r
Gm m Gm 2π
2 Also, m1r1ω2 = 1 2 or ω2 = 2 ω =
5 2 GM v GMm r 2
r1r 2
T
or v − = −
8 o a 2 r
m2r
But, r1 =
Substituting values of v and v o from Eqs. (i) and (ii), m1 + m2
we get
G (m1 + m2 )
5 GM GM a2 GM GM ∴ ω2 =
− = − r3
8 a a r 2 2a r
13
G (m1 + m2 )
3 a 1 Or r = …(i)
or − = − or −3r 2 = 4a2 − 8ar
8a 2r 2 r ω2
or 3r 2 − 8ar + 4a2 =
0 Applying conservation of mechanical energy we have
Gm1m2 Gm1m2 1
8a ± 64a2 − 48a2 − =− + µvr2 …(ii)
or r =
6
r (R1 + R2 ) 2
P hysi cs | 10.29
m1m2 ro 2
Here, µ reduced
= = mass and rmax
= 1 + 1 − K ( 2 − K ) sin φ
m1 + m2 2 −K
vr = relative velocity between the two stars. ro 2
and r= 1 − 1 − K ( 2 − K ) sin φ
From Eq. (ii), we find that min
2 −K
2Gm1m2 1 1 r02 v 02
vr2 − Here, K =
µ R1 + R 2 r GM
Sol: As the planet revolves around the sun, the The mass M may be calculated as follows: Consider a
mechanical energy of the system is conserved. Conserve concentric shell of radius r and thickness dr. Its volume
the angular momentum between the given point and is
apogee. dV=( 4π ) dr and its mass is
2
Example 8: Two satellites of same mass are launched in When there are two satellites, the total energy would
the same orbit round the earth so as to rotate opposite be
to each other. They collide solidly and stick together as GMm GMm GMm
wreckage. Obtain the total energy of the system before − + − = −
2r 2r r
and just after the collision. Describe the subsequent
motion of the wreckage. Let after collision, v ′ be the velocity of wreckage by the
law of conservation of momentum mv − mv = (m + m) v ′
Sol: Both the satellites are moving in the same orbit
∴ v′ =
0
so their orbital velocity will be same. As the masses
of the satellites are equal, and they are moving in the
opposite direction their total momentum before and v v
after the collision is zero. m M m
The two satellites round the earth are shown in figure E
Potential energy of the satellite in its orbit = −GMm r
Kinetic energy of satellite in its orbit is
The wreckage of mass (2m) has no kinetic energy, but it
K = GMm 2r has only potential energy,
Where m is mass of satellite, M is the mass of the earth GM ( 2m)
and r is the orbital radius. So, energy after collision = −
r
GMm GMm GMm Now the combined mass has zero velocity just after
Total energy = − =
−
2r r 2r collision and therefore, the wreckage stops rotating
and falls down under gravity.
JEE Main/Boards
Exercise 1 Q.6 Where will the true weight of the body be zero?
Q.33 What is the minimum energy required to launch a Q.3 If the radius of the earth be increased by a factor
satellite of mass m from the surface of earth of mass M, of 5, by what factor its density be changed to keep the
radius R in a circular orbit at an attitude 2 R. value of g the same?
(A) 1/25 (B) 1/5 (C) 1 5 (D) 5
Q.34 A rocket is launched vertically from the surface
of the earth with an initial velocity 10kms−1 . How far
Q.4 The mass and diameter of a planet are twice those
above the surface of the earth would it go? Radius of
of earth. What will be the period of oscillation of a
= 9.8ms−2 .
the earth 6400km;g
=
pendulum on this planet if it is a second’s pendulum
on earth?
Q.35 A remote sensing satellite of the earth revolves in
a circular orbit at a height of 250km above the earth’s (A) 2 second (B) 2 2 second
surface. What is the (a) orbital speed, and (b) period of
= 6.38 × 106
revolution of satellite? Radius of the earth 1 1
(C) second (D) second
m, and acceleration due to gravity at the surface of 2 2 2
earth = 9.8ms−2
Q.5 A particle of mass M is at a distance a form surface
Q.36 A satellite revolves round a planet in an of a thin spherical shell of equal mass and having
orbit just above the surface of planet. Taking radius a.
a
Q.37 Find the speed of escape at the moon given that
its radius 1.7 × 106 m and the value of g at its surface is (A) Gravitational field and potential both are zero at
1.63ms−2 . center of the shell.
(B) Gravitational field is zero not only inside the shell
Q.38 If the earth has a mass nine times and radius twice
but at a point outside the shell also.
that of the planet Mars, calculate the maximum speed
required by a rocket to pull out of the gravitational (C) Inside the shell, gravitational field alone is zero.
force of Mars. Given escape speed on the surface of (D) Neither gravitational field nor gravitational potential
earth is 11.2kms−1 is zero inside the shell.
Q.8. The escape velocity for a planet is ve. A tunnel is Q.12 A satellite of the earth is revolving in circular
dug along a diameter of the planet and a small body is orbit with a uniform velocity V. If the gravitational force
dropped into it at the surface. When the body reaches suddenly disappears, the satellite will
the center of the planet, its speed will be
(A) Continue to move with the same velocity in the
ve ve same orbit.
(A) v e (B) (C) (D) Zero
2 2 (B) Move tangentially to the original orbit with velocity V.
Q.9 A hollow spherical shell is compressed to half its (C) Fall down with increasing velocity.
radius. The gravitational potential at the center (D) Come to a stop somewhere in its original orbit.
(A) Increases
Q.13 A satellite revolves in the geostationary orbit but
(B) Decreases
in a direction east to west. The time interval between
(C) Remains same its successive passing about a point on the equator is:
(D) During the compression increases then returns at (A) 48 hrs (B) 24 hrs
the previous value.
(C) 12 hrs (D) Never
Rank the choices according to the magnitude of the (D) Earth’s satellite must be in equatorial plane.
gravitational force on the center mass.
Q.16 A satellite of mass m, initially at rest on the earth,
5M 3M 2M 3M
is launched into a circular orbit at a height equal to the
radius of the earth. The minimum energy required is.
(A) M (B) M
M 5M M 2M 3 1
(A) mgR (B) mgR
4 2
5M 3M 2M 3M
1 3
(C) mgR (D) mgR
(C) 2M (D) M 4 4
M 5M M 2M
Q.17 The following figure shows the variation of energy
with the orbit radius of a circular planetary motion. Find
(A) FA = FB < FC = FD (B) FA > FB < FD < FC the correct statement about the curves A, B and C
Energy C
r (A) 1:2 (B) 1:4 (C) 1:8 (D) 1:16
Q.21 A planet of mass m is in an elliptical orbit around Q.3 Imagine a light planet revolving around a very
massive star in a circular orbit of radius R with a period
the sun (m << Msun ) with an orbital period T. If A be the
of revolution T. If the gravitational force of attraction
area of orbit, then its angular momentum would be: between the planet and the star is proportional to R −5 2 ,
2mA mA then (1989)
(A) (B) mAT (C) (D) 2mAT
T 2T (A) T2 is proportional to R 2
P hysi cs | 10.35
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 2 (B) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true; statement-II
is correct explanation for statement-I.
Q.6 A geostationary satellite orbits around the earth in a (C) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true; statement-II
circular orbit of radius 36,000km. Then, the time period is not a correct explanation for statement-I.
of a spy satellite orbiting a few hundred km above the (D) Statement-I is true, statement-II is false.
earth’s surface (R e = 6400km) will approximately be
(2002)
Q.11 The height at which the acceleration due to gravity
(A) 1 2h (B) 1 h (C) 2 h (D) 4 h
g
becomes (where g = the acceleration due to gravity
9
Q.7 A double star system consists of two stars A and
on the surface of the earth) in terms of R, the radius of
B which have time periods TA and TB . Radius R A and
the earth is (2009)
RB and mass MA and MB . Choose the correct option.
(2006) R R
(A) 2R (B) (C) (D) 2R
2 2
(A) TA > TB then R A > RB
(B) if TA > TB then MA > MB Q.12 Two bodies of masses m and 4 m are placed at a
distance r. The gravitational potential at a point on the
T
2
RA
3 line joining them where the gravitational field is zero is:
(C) A = (2011)
TB RB
4Gm 6Gm
(A) − (B) −
(D) TA = TB r r
9Gm
(C) − (D) Zero
Q.8 A satellite is moving with a constant speed v in a r
circular orbit about the earth. An object of mass m is
ejected from the satellite such that it just escapes from Q.13 The mass of a spaceship is 1000 kg. It is to be
the gravitational pull of the earth. At the time of its launched from the earth’s surface out into free space.
ejection, the kinetic energy of the object is (2011) The value of ‘g’ and ‘R’ (radius of earth) are 10 m/s2 and
6400km respectively. The required energy for this work
1 2 3
(A) mv (B) mv 2 (C) mv 2 (D) 2mv 2 will be: (2012)
2 2
(A) 6.4 x 1011 Joules (B) 6.4 x 108 Joules
Q.9 A planet in a distant solar system is 10 times (C) 6.4 x 109 Joules (D) 6.4 x 1010 Joules
more massive than the earth and its radius is 10 times
smaller. Given that the escape velocity from the earth
is 11 kms−1, the escape velocity from the surface of the
planet would be (2008)
1 0 . 3 6 | Gravitation
JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1 Q.4 Calculate the distance from the surface of the earth
at which above and below the surface acceleration due
to gravity is the same.
Q.1 A small mass and a thin uniform rod each of mass
‘m’ are positioned along the same straight line as
Q.5 An object is projected vertically upward from the
shown. Find the force of gravitational attraction exerted
surface of the earth of mass M with a velocity such that
by the rod on the small mass.
the maximum height reached is eight times the radius
2L R of the earth. Calculate:
L
m (i) The initial speed of projection
m
(ii) The speed at half the maximum height.
Q.2 A particle is forced vertically form the surface of the
earth with a velocity kve where ve is the escape velocity Q.6 A sphere of radius R has it center at the origin.
and k<1. Neglecting air resistance and assuming It has a uniform mass density ρ0 except that there is
earth’s radius as R e , calculate the height to which it will
rise from the surface of the earth. a spherical hole of radius r = R 2 whose center is at
x = R 2 as in the given figure. (a) Find gravitational
field at points on the axis for x>R
Q.3 A point P lies on the axis of a fixed ring of mass M
and radius a, at a distance a from its center C. A small
particle starts from P and reaches C under gravitational
attraction only. Its speed at C will be_______. O
X
P hysi cs | 10.37
(b) Show that the gravitational field inside the hole is Q.12 A thin spherical shell of total mass M and radius R
uniform. Find its magnitude and direction. is held fixed. There is a small hole in the shell. A mass m
is released from rest at a distance R from the hole along
Q.7 A small body of mass is projected with a velocity a line that passes through the hole and also through
just sufficient to make it reach from the surface of a the center of the shell. This mass subsequently moves
planet (of radius 2R and mass 3M) to the surface of under the gravitational force of the shell. How long
another planet (of radius R and mass M). The distance does the mass take to travel from the hole to the point
between the centers of the two spherical planet is 6R. diametrically opposite?
The distance of the body from the center of bigger
planet is ‘x’ at any moment. During the journey, find the Q.13 A satellite close to the earth is in orbit above the
distance x where the speed of the body is (a) maximum equator with a period of rotation of 1.5 hours. If it is
(b) minimum. Assume motion of body along the line above a point P on the equator at some time, it will be
joining centers of planets. above P again after time______.
Q.8 A man can jump over b=4m wide trench on earth. Q.14 A satellite is moving in a circular orbit around the
If mean density of an imaginary planet is twice that earth. The total energy of the satellite is E =−2 × 105 J .
of the earth, calculate its maximum possible radius so The amount of energy to be imparted to the satellite to
that he may escape from it by jumping. Given radius of transfer it to a circular orbit where its potential energy
earth=6400km. is equal to________.
Q.9 A satellite P is revolving around the earth at a height Q.15 A satellite of mass m is orbiting the earth in a
h = radius of earth (R) above equator. Another satellite circular orbit radius r. It starts losing energy due to
Q is at a height 2h revolving in opposite direction. At an small air resistance at the rate of C J/s. Then the time
instant the two are at same vertical line passing through taken for the satellite to reach the earth is_____.
center of sphere. Find the least time after which again
they are in this situation. Q.16 A satellite is orbiting the Earth of mass M in
equatorial plane in a circular orbit having radius 2R and
same sense of rotation as that of the Earth. Find duration
of time for which a man standing on the equator will be
able to see the satellite continuously. Assume that the
Earth P Q
man can see the satellite when it is above horizon. Take
M
Earth’s angular velocity = ω
Q.11 Four masses (each of m) are placed at the vertices Q.18 A body moving radially away from a planet of mass M,
of a regular pyramid (triangular base) of side ‘a’. Find when at distance r from planet, explodes in such a way that
the work done by the system while taking them apart two of its many fragments move in mutually perpendicular
so that they form the pyramid of side ‘2a’ circular orbits around the planet. What will be
m (a) Their velocity in circular orbits
(b) Maximum distance between the two fragments
before collision and
m m
(c) Magnitude of their relative velocity just before they
a collide.
m
1 0 . 3 8 | Gravitation
Q.19 A cord of length 64 m is used to connect a 100 kg Q.25 The fastest possible rate of rotation of a planet such
astronaut to spaceship whose mass is much larger than that for which the gravitational force on material at the
that of the astronaut. Estimate the value of the tension equator barely provides the centripetal force needed
in the cord. Assume that the spaceship is orbiting near for the rotation. Show that the corresponding shortest
earth’s surface. Assume that the spaceship and the
3π
astronaut fall on a straight line from the earth’s center. period of rotation is given by T = , where ρ is the
The radius of the earth is 6400km. Gρ
density of the planet, assumed to be homogeneous.
Q.20 Imagine a planet of mass M with a small moon of m
mass m and radius a orbiting it and keeping the same
face toward it. If the moon now approaches the planet,
there will be a critical distance from the planet’s center
at which loose material lying on the moon’s surface R
will be lifted off. Show that this distance is given by m m
re = a ( 3M m)
13
. This critical distance is called Roche’s
limit.
Exercise 2
Q.21 A hypothetical planet of mass M has three moons
each of equal mass ‘m’ revolving in the same circular Multiple Correct Choice Type
orbit of radius R. The masses are equally spaced and
thus form an equilateral triangle. Find:
Q.1 Assuming the earth to be a sphere of uniform
(i) The total P.E. of the system density the acceleration due to gravity
(ii) The orbital speed of each moon such that they (A) At a point outside the earth is inversely proportional
maintain this configuration. to the square of its distance from the center.
(B) At a point outside the earth in inversely proportional
Q.22 A remote sensing satellite is revolving in an orbit to its distance from the center.
of radius x over the equator of earth. Find the area on
earth’s surface in which satellite cannot send message. (C) At a point inside is zero.
(D) At a point inside is proportional to its distance from
Q.23 A pair of stars rotate about a common center of the center.
mass. One of the stars has a mass M which is twice as
large as the mass m of the other. Their centers are a Q.2 Two masses m1 and m2 (m1 < m2 ) are released
distance d apart, d being large compared to the size of from rest from a finite distance. They start under their
either star. mutual gravitational attraction.
(a) Derive an expression for the period of rotation of (A) Acceleration of m1 is more than that of m2.
the star about their common center of mass in terms
of d, m, G. (B) Acceleration of m1 is more than that of m1.
(b) Compare the angular momentum of the two stars (C) Center of mass of system will remain at rest in all
about their common center of mass by calculating the reference frames.
ratio Lm LM . (D) Total energy of system remains constant.
(c) Compare the kinetic energies of the two stars by
calculating the ratio Km KM . Q.3 Inside a hollow isolated spherical shell
(A) Everywhere gravitational potential is zero.
Q.24 Assume that a geosynchronous communications
(B) Everywhere gravitational field is zero.
satellite is in orbit at the longitude of Mumbai. You
are in Mumbai and want to pick up its signals. In what (C) Everywhere gravitational potential is same.
direction should you point the axis of your parabolic
(D) Everywhere gravitational field is same.
antenna? The latitude of Mumbai 30° N.
P hysi cs | 10.39
Q.4 When a satellite in a circular orbit around the earth Q.9 For a satellite to orbit around the earth, which of
centers the atmospheric region, it encounters small air the following must be true?
resistance to its motion. Then
(A) It must be above the equator at some time.
(A) Its kinetic energy increases.
(B) Its cannot pass over the poles at any time
(B) Its kinetic energy decreases.
(C) Its height above the surface cannot exceed 36,000 km
(C) Its angular momentum about the earth decreases.
(D) Its period of rotation must be > 2π R g where R is
(D) Its period of revolution around the earth increases. radius of earth
Q.5 A communications Earth satellite Q.10 Two satellites s1 & s2 of equal masses revolve
in the same sense around a heavy planet in coplanar
(A) Goes round the earth from east to west.
circular orbit of radii R & 4R.
(B) Can be in the equatorial plane only.
(A) The ratio of period of revolution s1 & s2 is 1:8
(C) Can be vertically above any place on the earth.
(B) Their velocities are in the ratio 2:1
(D) Goes round the earth from west to east.
(C) Their angular momentum about the planet are in
the ratio 2:1
Q.6 An earth satellite is moved from one stable circular
orbit to another larger and stable circular orbit. The (D) The ratio of angular velocities of s1 w.r.t. s2 when all
following quantities increase for the satellite as a result three are in same line is 9:5
of this change:-
Assertion Reasoning Type
(A) Gravitational potential energy
(A) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true and
(B) Angular velocity
statement-II is correct explanation for statement-I.
(C) Linear orbital velocity
(B) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true and
(D) Centripetal acceleration statement-II is NOT the correct the explanation for
statement-I.
Q.7 A satellite S is moving in an elliptical orbit around (C) Statement-I is true, statement-II is false.
the earth. The mass of the satellite is very small
compared to the mass of the earth. (D) Statement-I false, statement-II is true.
can always be replaced by particles of same mass Q.19 If U is the potential energy and K kinetic energy
placed at respective centers. then U > K at
Statement-II: Gravitational field of a uniform spherical (A) Only D (B) Only C
shell out side it is the same as that of particle of same
(C) Both D & C (D) Neither D nor C
mass placed at its center of mass.
Paragraph 3:
Q.15 Statement-I: It takes more fuel for a spacecraft to
travel from the earth to moon than for the return trip. During the formation of stars from clouds of hydrogen
gas in space, due to gravitational force of attraction,
Statement-II: Potential energy of spacecraft at moon’s
volume of gas decreases, which in turn heats the gas.
surface is greater than that at earth surface.
Specific heat capacity of gas is S, universal gravitational
constant is G and mass in a hydrogen cloud is M.
Comprehension Type
Q.20 If radius of gas cloud decreases from R to R 2 ,
Paragraph 1:
the increment in temperature of gas is (assume No loss
Two uniform spherical stars made of same material of energy outside due to radiations, and clouds are
have radii R and 2R. Mass of the smaller planet is m. spherical in shape)
They start moving from rest towards each other from
a large distance under mutual force of gravity. The GM 3GM 3GS 3GM
(A) (B) (C) (D) −
collision between the stars is inelastic with coefficient RS 5RS 5MR RS
of restitution ½.
Q.21 Assume the initial temperature of gas is 0 K and
Q.16 Kinetic energy of the system just after the collision thermonuclear reactions will start at T0 K temperature,
is: the minimum mass of gas required so that thermonuclear
reactions start when radius of cloud becomes half of
8Gm2 2Gm2
(A) (B) initial radius (R). Assume uniform temperature in entire
3R 3R volume of gas.
4Gm2
(C) (D) Cannot be determined
3R 5 SRT0 3 SRT0
(A) (B)
3 G 5 G
Q.17 The maximum separation between their centers SRT0
after their first collision (C) (D) None
G
(A) 4 R (B) 6 R (C) 8 R (D) 12 R
Paragraph 4:
Paragraph 2: In some parts of universe, it is found that acceleration
The given figure shows the orbit of a planet P round produced in a body is inversely proportional to the
the sun S, AB and CD are the minor and major axes of square of its mass and directly proportional to the net
the ellipse. F
force (F) according to equation a = c where c is
A m2
P
constant, whose magnitude is 1, if m is measured in kg,
a is measured in m/s2 and F is in Bose. Also action and
D C reaction force are equal and opposite and on different
S
interacting bodies.
B
Q.22 In the given figure shown, two blocks of mass m1
Q.18 If t1 is the time taken by the planet to travel along = 2 kg and m2 = 4 kg are attached via an ideal massless
ACB and t2 the time along BDA, then string over frictionless mass less pulley. If acceleration
due to gravity g = 5 m/s2.The tension in the string is
(A) t1 = t2 (B) t1 > t2
(C) t1 < t2 (D) Nothing can be concluded
P hysi cs | 10.41
Then
y
m x
A O B
m1 m2
F1 r1
(A) = if r1 < R and r2 < R
(A) Zero, Newton (B) 10 Bose F2 r2
(C) 20 Bose (D) 10 Newton
F1 r22
(B) => if r1 R and r2 > R
F2 r 2
1
Q.2 A solid sphere of uniform density and radius 4 units Q.5 Three particles, each of mass m, are situated at
is located with its center at the origin O of coordinates. the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side length a.
Two spheres of equal radii 1 unit, with their centers at A The only forces acting on the particles are their mutual
(-2, 0, 0) and B (2, 0, 0) respectively, are taken out of the gravitational forces. It is desired that each particle
solid leaving behind spherical cavities as shown in the moves in a circle while maintaining the original mutual
given figure. (1993)
1 0 . 4 2 | Gravitation
Q.10 A spherically symmetric gravitational system of of R and r are measured to be (60 ± 1) mm and (10 ±
1) mm, respectively. In five successive measurements,
for r ≤ R
ρ the time period is found to be 0.52 s, 0.56 s, 0.57 s,
particles has a mass density ρ = 0
0 for r > R 0.54 s and 0.59 s. The least count of the watch used for
where ρ0 is a constant. A test mass can undergo circular the measurement of time period is 0.01 s. Which of the
motion under the influence of the gravitational field of following statement(s) is (are) true? (2016)
particles. Its speed v as a function of distance r from the (A) The error in the measurement of r is 10%
center of the system is represented by (2008)
(B) The error in the measurement of T is 3.57%
(C) The error in the measurement of T is 2%
(D) The error in the determined value of g is 11%
P hysi cs | 10.43
PlancEssential Questions
JEE Main/Boards JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1 Exercise 1
Q.23 Q.31 Q.33 Q.1 Q.5 Q.6
Q.35 Q.11 Q.16 Q.21
Exercise 2 Exercise 2
Q. 2 Q.13 Q.17 Q.1 Q.2 Q.5
Q.20 Q.6 Q.7 Q.8
Q.10 Q.11 Q.12
Q.16
Answer Key
Q.23 v A vP = rP rA ; No, time for path BAC is greater Q.35 (a) 7756.6m s ; (b) 5373 s
than time for path CPB
Q.36 5064 s
Q.24 4 R
Q.37 2.354 × 103 ms−1
Q.25 129 days
Q.38 5.28kms−1
1 0 . 4 4 | Gravitation
Exercise 2
JEE Advanced/Boards
Q.10 R
Exercise 1
GM2 6GM2
Q.1 Q.11
2a
3L2
R ek 2 Q.12 2 × R 3 GM
Q.2
1 − k2
Q.14 1× 105 J
3 −1
Q.4 h = R
2
GMm 1 1
Q.15 t
= −
4 GM 2 2GM 2C R e r
Q.5 (i) (ii)
3 R 3 5R 2π
Q.16
Gm
3 – ω
8R3 e
πGρ0R3 1 8 ˆ GM
=Q.6 (a) E − ,i,(b) E =
3
6
( )
2 2
x − (R / 2 ) x 2R 2 Q.17 cos θ =
10
Q.7 2R, 3R 3 − 3 GM 2GM
Q.18 (a) ; (b) r 2 ; (c)
r R
Q.20 re = a ( 3M m)
13
Q.9
( )
2πR 3 2 6 6
(
GM 2 2 + 3 3 ) Q.21 (i) −
3GM m
+ m , (ii)
GM (2 3 + R)
R 3 R 2 3
P hysi cs | 10.45
Q.22 2pR2 1 + R −1
Q.24 cot 3 −
32
to vertical
x 105
2πd3 2 3π
Q.23 (a) T = (b) 2 (c) 2 Q.25 T =
3GM Gρ
Exercise 2
Comprehension Type
Paragraph 1: Q.16 B Q.17 A
Paragraph 2: Q.18 B Q.19 C
Paragraph 3: Q.20 B Q.21 A
Paragraph 4: Q.22 D Q.23 B
Gm a3
Q.5 v = , T = 2π Q.6 (a) 6400 km (b) 7.9 km/s
a 3Gm
3 5 GM
Q.7 Q.8 99.5 R Q.9 3 Q.10 C
2 a
Solutions
JEE Main/Boards W=
U
r
Exercise 1 Hence weight =
U
r
Sol 1: Newton’s law of gravitation is called a universal
Sol 9: T ∝ r3/2
law because it is applicable anywhere in the universe.
3 3
T1 r 2 1011 2
= 1 = = 10 10
Sol 2: The value is same on moon. G is called universal 1010
T2 r2
gravitational constant, which is constant anywhere in
the universe
Sol 10: Escape speed is still 11 km s–1 because escape
speed is irrespective of angle of launch (of course not
Sol 3: The packet doesn’t reach the earth (theoretically).
towards ground). We calculate escape velocity by
Because in a satellite, centrifugal force balances the
gravitational force on it. The same will happen with 1 GMm
m V2 =
the packet, which has same initial velocity as that of 2 r
satellite. (Kinetic energy + Potential energy)
= it Irrespective of angle of each.
Sol 4: Its reading will be zero. A spring balance shows
the net force the hanging body exerts on it net force by
body = Mass × Acceleration Sol 11: Acceleration due to gravity
f2 = f1 . 1
GMm r2
Sol 7: Gravitational force (f) =
r2 r1 1
∴f∝m =
r2 2
f
∴ Acceleration due to gravity g =
m f1 1
∴ f2 = = N
GM 4 4
g=
r2 ∴ Gravitational force 0.25 N
It is independent of m.
Here both fall at same time Sol 13: If he goes to a height r, his distance from center
is 2r
GMm r1 1
Sol 8: U = i.e., =
r r2 2
weight W = mg 1
w∝ (w = Weight)
GM 1 GMm r2
= m. =
r2 r r
P hysi cs | 10.47
2
w2 r GMm
= 1 Sol 16: No. gravitational force f =
r2
w1 r2
1
2 ⇒f∝
w2 1 1 r2
⇒ = = ’
w1 2 4 1
will never become zero.
r2
i.e., his weight quadrates
So force doesn’t become zero.
GM
Sol 14: g = for r ≥ r0 (r0 is radius of earth)
r2 Sol 17: Gravity is the force with which a body pulls
dg GM another body towards its center.
=–
dr 2r 3 Acceleration due to gravity is the acceleration which it
produces in the body due to force of gravity
GM
⇒ Dg = – .Dr GM
2r 3 g=
r2
GM
⇒ Dg = – .h GM
2r03 Sol 18: g =
r2
GM m = Mass of earth
g= r1 r1 ≤ r0
r03
r = Radius of earth
GM r 2g
Dg = (r1 – r0) m=
r03 G
r1 – r0 = – x = We can calculate g by physical means, r is known,
hence M can be calculated
GM
⇒ Dg = . (– x) M
r03 Mean density of earth =
4 3
GM GM πr
⇒ (–x) = (–2h) 3
r03 r03 ∴
M can be calculated, mean density can also be
⇒ x = 2h calculated.
2
f1 r
Sol 15: = 2 Sol 19: Escape velocity is the velocity with which when
f2 r1 a body is projected from the surface of a celestial body,
it crosses its potential barrier and escapes into out
r1 = r0, r2 = Distance of rocket from center of earth
space for bodies to escape total energy ≥ 0
f2 1 i.e. K. E + P.E ≥ 0
=
f1 3
At escape velocity
2
r r K.E + P.E = 0
⇒ 3 = 2 ⇒ 2 = 3
r1 r1 1 GMm
⇒ mv2 – =0
Height of rocket n = r2 – r1 2 r
r2 2GM
= 3 ⇒v=
r1 r
r2
–1= 3–1
r1 Sol 20: Gravity field is a field in which a body produces
r2 – r1 a force on another body.
⇒ = 3 –1
r1 Intensity of gravitational force is the force which a body
h attracts a body of unit mass
⇒ = 0.732
r1
1 0 . 4 8 | Gravitation
= 2 ; ⇒ r2 = r1 g1
= 1.972 × 1030 kg
g2 r1 g2
g1
= 2 ; ⇒ r2 = r1 2
(2π)2 r 3 (2π)2 r 3 g2
Sol 27: M = ;⇒G=
2GT2 2MT2
Height = r2 – r1 = r1 . ( 2 –1)
r = 1.5 × 1011 m
= 2649.6 km
T = 365.3 days = 365.3 × 24 × 3600 seconds
M = 2 × 1030 Kg 1
Sol 31: wt ∝
r2
2 11 3
4( π) .(1.5 × 10 ) 2
⇒G= r
2 × 2 × 10 30
× (365.3 × 24 × 3600) 2
w2 = w1 . 1
r2
= 6.69× 10–11 m2/Kg–2
r1 = 6000 km
Note: For calculation purpose, you may take p2 = 10
r2 = 6600, 18000, 2400 (r2 = r1 + h)
GM w1 = 80 kg wt.
Sol 28: g =
r2
for r2 = 6600
gr 2 6000
2
M= w2 = 80
G = 66.12 kg wt
6600
9.8 × (6.37 × 106 )2
= = 6.025 × 1024 kg for r2 = 18000
(6.66 × 10 –11 )
2
M gr 2 1 6000
Mean density = = . w2 = 80 = 8.89 kg wt
4 3
πr
G 4 3
πr 18000
3 3
for r2 = 24000
3 g 3 9.8
= = × 2
4 Gr 4 6.66 × 10 × 6.37 × 106
–11 6000
w2 = 80 = 5 kg.wt
24000
Mean density (e) = 5.56 × 103 kg/m3
GM
Sol 32: g at a depth x, gx = (r0 – x)
GM dg 2GM r03
Sol 29: g = ; =–
r2 dr r3 GM
g at a height h, gh =
–2GM (r0 + h)2
2GM ∆g r3 Dr gx = gh
⇒ Dg = – Dr ; =
r 3 g GM By substituting we get solution
2
r But for some intelligent manipulation
∆g ∆r ∆g ∆r
= – 2 ; × 100 = – 2 × 100
g r g r
1 0 . 5 0 | Gravitation
gm –GMx
gx = (r0 – x) ⇒ Dg = 1 1 1 v2
r03 r03 = –
r R 2 gR 2
GM
g= 1 1 1 102
r03 = – ×
r 6400 2 9.8 × 10 –3 × (6400)2
2GM
Dg = – Dr (Differentiation) r = 2.56 × 104 km
x2
∴ g is equal ⇒ Dg is equal GM
Sol 35: Orbital velocity v =
r
2GM GM x
⇒– Dr = – x ; ⇒ Dr =
r03 r03 2 GM gR 2
= =
R +H R +H
Dr = n
160 g = 9.8 ms–1
x = 160km ; ⇒ h = = 80 km
2 R = 6.38 × 10–6
⇒ It is same at a height 80 km H = 250 km = 2.5 × 105
Note: h<<r0 is assumed hence we could apply this method v = 7756.6 ms–1
of differentiation
2πr 2π(R + H)
T= =
v v
Sol 33: Energy required = Total change in energy Initial
T = 5373 s
GMm
energy = –
R
Sol 36: Let orbital velocity = v
Find energy = P. E + K. E
GM
GMm 1 ⇒v= where m = Mass, R = Radius of point
=– + mv2 R
3R 2
(r = 3R because altitude = 2R) 2πR R3
T= = 2π .... (i)
For orbital motion, centrifugal force = Gravitational for v GM
mv 2 GMm 4 3
= M= pR ρ
r r2 3
1 GMm R3
mv2 = ⇒ T = 2π
2 2r 4
G. πR3ρ
GMm 3
= (substitute r = 3R)
6R
3
GMm GMm GMm =2π = 5064 s
⇒ Final energy = – =– 4 πGρ
6R 3R 6R
GMm GMm
⇒ Energy required = – – Sol 37: For escape velocity
6R R
1 GMm
mv 2e =
5GMm 2 R
=
6R
2GM
ve =
Sol 34: Kinetic energy = Change in potential energy R
rρ = constant
M
Sol 38: ve ∝
R r2 ρ1 1 ρ2
∴ = = = 5 given
r1 ρ2 5 ρ1
vm Mm Re
= × 1
ve Rm Me ∴ Radius to be changed by a factor of
5
M D
vm = ve m × e
M R
e m Sol 4: (B) T = 2π
g
Mm 1
given = =
Me 9 1 GM
T∝ ;g=
Re g r2
=2
Rm
1 r T1 r1 M2
2 2 = ; =
⇒ vm = ve =2 = 5.28 kms–1 g M T2 r2 M1
9 9
⇒ r2 = 2R ; ⇒ altitude h = r2 – R v2 g v2 g
Sol 6: (A) g – = ;⇒ =
h=R R 2 R 2
2GM 1 GM
Sol 2: (A) Net acceleration at equator ve = = (4R)
R 2 R2
g’ = g – Rω2
(Rω2 is radial acceleration) g v2
= (4R) = (4R)
∴ Weight at equator mg’ = mg – mRω2 2 R
acceleration at a depth d ve = 2v
g(R– d) g
⇒ gd = =g– d
R R M
Sol 7: (A) v ∝
given mgd = mg’ R
4
mgd R 2 ω2 π.R 3ρ
⇒ mg – mRω = mg –
2
⇒d= M 3
R g = ∝ R2 ; ⇒ v ∝ R
R R
GM vA RA
Sol 3: (B) g =
r2 ⇒ = =2
vB RB
4 3 4
m= pr ρ ; ⇒ g = prr
3 3
1 0 . 5 2 | Gravitation
24
2GM ∴ Time for successful interval interval = = 12 Hrs
Sol 8: (B) ve = 2
R
1 1 dA
Sol 17: (D) K.E ∝ V∝ ;∴ ∝ r
r r dt
∴ A is K.E.
∴ ratio of their area velocity
Total energy > Potential energy,
r1 1
1 = = =1:2
total energy, potential energy ∝ - r2 4
r
∴ C is total energy GM
Sol 23: (A) Field due to gravity E1 =
B is potential energy R2
4 3 4
m= pR ; ∴ E1 = πGrR
Sol 18: (C) Kepler’s 2nd law, areal velocity is constant. 3 3
Field due to infinite plate E2 = 2prtG
Sol 19: (B) Let final velocity of 4 M be V1 (t =H) = 2pρHG
5MV = 4MV1 – MV E1 = E2
(Conservation of linear momentum) 4 2R
∴ πGrR = 2pρHG ; ⇒ H =
3 3 3
⇒ V1 = V
2
Sol 24: (C) Maximum speed occurs at least distance
GM
now V = dA 1
r = rmin vmax.
dt 2
2GM 1
Ve = = 2 V= V1 > 2V 4 × 1016 = × 2 × 1012 × v
r 2
v = 4 × 104 ms–1
i.e., V1 > Ve
∴ v = 40 kms–1
⇒ Body gets unbound
Sol 15: (B) Potential at point P due to complete solid JEE Advanced/Boards
sphere
Exercise 1
GM 2 R
2
=
− 3R −
2R 3 2 Sol 1:
GM 2 R
2
P
=
− 3R − d
2R 3 4
consider a small strip of rod of length d at a distance
GM 11R
2
=
11GM from the small mass. Let the mass of strip be dm
=
− −
3 4 8R
2R GM
df = dm (df= force of attraction between the strip
2
Potential at point P due to cavity part and small mass)
M
G dm = σ dl
3 8 −3GM
= − = −
2 R 8R where σ is linear density of rod
2 M
σ=
So potential due to remaining part at point P 2L
GM
−11GM −3GM ⇒ df = . sdl
= − 2
−11GM
8R −3GM
8R
= − integrating from L to 3L
8R + 3GM
−11GM 8R −GM
=
−11GM8R+ 3GM −GM R f 3L
GM
=
8R R ∫ df = ∫ 2
σ d
0 L
32
GmM GMm 1
Sol 16: (C) = f = GMσ. –
(R + h)2 R L2
v GM
v= 2
f = GMσ.
R 3L
1 h 2 GMm
mv − 0
= M 2
2 1 R = GM . .
2GM 2L 3L
v1 =R
R
GM2
GM F=
∆V
= ( =
2 − 1) gR( 2 − 1) 3L2
R
GmM GMm Note: Try understanding the boundary conditions. It is
GmM = GMm
2 = R
(RGmM
+ h) most important aspect of physics. Here it is integrated
(R + h)2 = GMm R
from L to 3L because the rod starts from distance L till
(RGmM
+ h)GM
2 GMm
= R
v = GM distance 3L from the small mass.
2
v(R=+ h)GMR R
v1 = R GMm
2GM
= 12 R
v1 mv
mv
− GMm =
− GMm
0
0
2
1 2R R = 2GM
2 1
mv1 2GM− R = 0 Sol 2: vc =
1 2 GMm R
v21mv − R =
= 1 2GM 0
v21 = 2GM R R
v1 = R Kinetic energy = Change in potential energy
GM
2GM
R ( =
v V=
=
∆ GM 2 − 1) gR( 2 − 1)
∆1V
= RR ( =
GM 2 − 1) gR( 2 − 1) 1 GMm GMm
∆V
= R ( =
2 − 1) gR( 2 − 1) mv2 = – – –
GMR ( = 2 r R
∆V
= 2 − 1) gR( 2 − 1)
R
1 GMm GMm
m.(k . ve)2 = –
2 R r
1 0 . 5 6 | Gravitation
1 1 1 GM 1 1 GMm GMm
⇒ – = . m . k2 . 2 . mv2 = –
R r 2 R GMm 2 a a2 + L2
1 1 k2
⇒ – =
R r R 1 GMm
mv2 = ( a2 + L2 –a)
R 2 2 2
a (a + )
⇒r=
1– k 2
2GM
height = r – R v= ( a2 + 2 – a)
2 2
a a +
R k 2R
= –R=
1– R 2 1– k 2 Here given = a
k 2R
Hence it will rise to a height of
1– k 2 2GM ( 2 – 1)
⇒v=
a 2
Sol 3: Consider a small path on the ring of length d ,
which subtends an angle dθ at the center. Let its mass 2GM 1
be dM v= 1–
a 2
16GM 4 GM GM2 R
v= ;v= – x–
9R 3 R R3 2
⇒ r = 4R + R = 5R E = E1 – E2
GM GM
1 GMm GMm =– +
⇒ mv2 = – – – x 2
R
2
2 9R 5R 8 x –
2
8GM 2 2GM
⇒v= ;v= GM 1 8
45R 3 5R = –
8 R
2
x2
k –
2
Sol 6: We use principal of superposition gravitation
field due to sphere I 4 3
M= pR ρ0
GM 3
E1 = – ; x > R,
x2 3
πGρ0R 1 8
⇒E= –
6 R
2
x2
x – 2
for x < R
E = E1 – E2
GM GM R
=– x+ x–
GM 3 3 2
=– .x ; x < R R R
R3
GM
E=
Let M2 mass of sphere II 2R 2
R If is independent of x, hence uniform
Here the center is at hence distance function is
2
R
R– . Sol 7: Potential energy due to planet, at a distance r
2
from its cents
Assume sphere is uniform
G(3M)m
4 P.E1 = – ; 2R < r < 5R
⇒ M = pR3 r
3
3
Potential due to plant 2
4 R 1 4 3 M
m2 = π = πR = GMm
3 2 8 3 8 P.E2 = – ; R < r < 4R
(6R – r)
GM2
E2 = – 2
x < 0, x > R
R
x –
2
dE 3 1 4 πbG reρ
= – GMm – 2 – (–1) v=
dr r (6R – r) 3
For particle to reach other side it is sufficient if its 4 π bG reρ 16πρ rP2
velocity is zero at ⇒ =
3 3
6 3R
r0 = bre
3 +1 ⇒ rP =
2
i.e., K.E = 0 at this point
4 × 10 –3 × 6400
6 3R =
∴ Speed is minimum at r0 = 2
3 +1
rP = 6.4 km
= 3R(3 – 3 )
Potential energy at x = 2R Maximum radius of planet is 6.4 km
∴ PE1 + PE2
GM
Sol 9: V = where V = Orbital velocity
G.3M GMm 17GMm r
= – =–
2R 6R – R 10R
GM GM
Potential energy at x = 5 R V1 = , V2= (r = R + height)
2R 3R
⇒ PE1 + PE2
V
Angular velocity w=
G(3M)m GMm R
=– –
5R 6R – R
V GM 1 GM
8 GMm ω1 = ;ω2 =
=– PE(2r) < PE(5R) 2R 2R 3R 3R
5 R
Relative angular velocity ωR = ω1 + ω2
PE(r0) – PE(2r) > PE(r0) – PE(5R)
Hence it has maximum speed at x = 2R GM 1 1
= +
3
R 2 2 3 3
v2
Sol 8: Maximum range = 2π 2π
g t= =
wR GM 2 2 + 3 3
v2
b= R3 6 6
g
3
bGM 2πR 2 (6 6)
v= bg = ∴t=
re2 GM(2 2 + 3 3)
4 3
M= pr ρ
3 Sol 10: Let d be distance between them. Distance of
centre of mass from m
bG 4 3
⇒v= . πre ρ Md 2d
r2 3
e
r1 = ; r1 =
m+M 3
P hysi cs | 10.59
GMm 2GM2 2π
F= = Sol 13: ω1 =
d2 2
d T
Angular velocity of earth
Gravitational force = Centrifugal force
2π
mv12 ωe = (T0 = 24 Hz)
2GM2 4GM T0
= ; ⇒ v1 =
d2 2d 3d ωr = ω1 + ωe or ω1 – ωe
3 –1
2π 2π T ±T
2d 3 T= = = 0
2π
T=
2π
r1 = 3 = 2 πd 2 ωr 2π 2π
± T0 T
v1 4GM 3GM T T0
–1 –1 –1
3d 24 ± 1.5 17 5
Ms = = hrs, hrs
m= (Ms = Mass of surfs) 24 × 1.5 24 8
3
3
2πd2 Sol 14: For a satellite
∴T=
GMs 1
3 |K.E| = |P.E.| = |total energy|
2
2πd2
Time period of earth Te = E1 = – 2 × 105 J
GMs
⇒ U1 = – 4 × 10–5, K1 = 2 × 105
given T = Te ; ⇒ d = R
U2 = – 2 × 10–5
–G.MM
i j
Sol 11: Total energy = ∑ ⇒ E1 = – 1 × 10–5 J
i< j rij
∆E = 1 × 105 J
M2 6GM2 ∴ Energy required is 105 J
= – G × (S3) = –
a a
GMm
Sol 15: Total energy = – , r = Radius
6GM2 2r
Final energy = –
2a
GMm 1 1
6GM2 6GM2 ∴ Change is energy = –
Change in energy = – +
2a a
2 Re r
t = Change in energy
6GM2
=
2a GMm 1 1
⇒t= –
6GM2 2C
∴ Work done is Re r
2a
GM Sol 16:
Sol 12: Potential =
r
1 1
∴ Change in potential = GMm –
R 2R
GMm
=
2R
K.E. = Charge in P.E
Angle of view = 2q
1 GMm GM
mv2 = ;v= R 2π
2 2R R = 2cos–1 2R = 2(60°) = 120° =
3
Inside sphere v is constant 2π
Angular velocity of earth ωe =
T0
2R R3
∴ Time = =2 (T0 = 24 Hrs)
v GM
1 0 . 6 0 | Gravitation
GM GMm GMm
⇒ = v 20 ; ⇒ v2 = x2 + 4 v 20 Sol 21: (i) P.E = –
3Rm 3 + 3–
R 3R
2v 0 2
x= ;⇒v= 10 vx 3GM m
3 3 =– + m
R 3
vx 2v 0
cosθ = ; ⇒ θ = cos–1 (ii) Centrifugal force = Force towards center
v 2 10
v0
3 mv 2 GMm GMm 3
3 = + . R
3 R R 2 ( 3R)2 2
⇒ cos θ = ⇒ θ = cos–1
10 10
GM (2 3 + R)
⇒v=
GM R 2 3
Sol 18: (a) Orbital velocity V =
R
P hysi cs | 10.61
2d
2π × Sol 25: Angular velocity be ω
3 = 4π 3d3 2πd3/2
= =
4GM 3 4GM 3GM mrω2 = mg
3d 2π (2π)2
ω= ; mR. = mg
vm vM T T2
(b) =
rm rM
R
2 T = 2π
Lm 1 r
mv mrm 1 g
= – m = (2)2
LM 2mv mrm 2 rM 2
GM
g=
R2
1 0 . 6 2 | Gravitation
G 4 3 ∆v ∆r
= . pR r ∆L = mvr +
R 2 3 v r
R
∴ T = 2π GMm GMm
4 U=– ; Du = Dr
GR. πρ r r2
3
1
3π k= mv2
T= 2
Gρ
Dk = mv Du
Du = – 2Dk
Exercise 2 GMm
Dr = – 2mvDu
r2
Multiple Correct Choice Type
GMm 1
∆r = 2 mv 2
Sol 1: (A, D) r 2
2
GM ∆r 2∆v ∆r
g= ; r > R =– ; ⇒ ∆L = mvr
r 2 r v 2r
GM Dr < 0
r; r<R
2
R ⇒ ∆L < 0
Comprehension type
R
> 2π
g Paragraph 1:
2
∴ r
r > R, > 1 Sol 16: (B) Let P.E at ∞ = 0
R
GM1M2
Final P.E =
d
Sol 10: (A, B, D) T ∝ R3/2
final distance between center of masses
∴ S1 : S2 = 13/2 : 43/2 = 1 : 8
d = R + 2R = 3R
1
v∝ ⇒ v1 : v2 = 4 : 1 = 2 : 1
1/2 1/2
mass of small sphere is m
r
Angular momentum L ∝ r1/2 mass of smaller sphere
3 3
L1 : L2 = 1 : 41/2 = 1 : 2 R 2R
= m 2 = m
Let velocities be 2k, k R
R
Relative velocities are 3k, k =8m
i.e. v1 : v2 =3 : 1 GM.8m 8GM2
Final energy = =
Relative radii = 4R + R, 4R – R 3R 3R
Let initial velocities be v1, v2
= 5R, 3R
Let final velocities be v3, v4
i.e. R1 : R2 =4 : 3.
v since centre of mass is at rest
ω=
R v3 = – e v1
3 1
∴ ω1 : ω2 = :
5 3 (e = Coefficient of restitution)
ω1 : ω2 = 9 : 5 1
|V3| = |V |
2 1
2
Assertion Reasoning Type 1 1 1
⇒ mv 32 = m v
2 2 2
Sol 11: (C) There is no such real radial force. It only
appears in moon’s frame of reference as centrifugal 1 1 2
= mv
force. 4 2 1
1 2 1 1 2
Sol 12: (B) Statement-I is true because there is no net Similarly mv 4 = mv
acceleration downward in it. 2 4 2 2
1 2 1
Sol 13: (D) Geostationary satellites have fixed orbital ∴ Final energy = mv + mv 24
radius and do have 24 hours of time period of revolution. 2 3 2
1 1 2 1 2
Sol 14: (D) Statement-I is only true long distances = mv + mv
4 2 1 2 2
between them.
1 8Gm2
Sol 15: (A) For travel, energy required =
4 3R
= maximum P.E – P.E at surface
2Gm2
=
3R
1 0 . 6 4 | Gravitation
Sol 17: (A) Change in P.E = kinetic energy Note: Study the self-energy of objects here is a
derivation.
2GM2 8GM2
= P.E – – Consider a sphere of density ρ and initial radius r initial
3R 3R
4 3
mass m = pr ρ
6GM2 GM(8M) 3
⇒ PE = =
3R 4R Let additional mass added
dm = 4pr2.drρ
\Maximum distance between them is 4R
GMdm
Note:- Try deriving the result Increase is energy dE =
r
→ → 4
V 3 = – e V1 used in the problem. Here centre of mass G. πr3ρ . 4 πr 2drρ
dE = 3
is at rest.
r
Paragraph 2: (4 π)2 2
dE = r . G. r4 . dr
3
Sol 18: (B) Area of ASBC > ASBD R
(4 π)2 2 r5
∴ t1 > t2
E= ∫ dE = 3
r .G.
5
0
Kepler’s 2 law
nd
M
ρ= (M is final mass)
4 3
Sol 19: (C) |u| > |k| always πR
3
R5 ( 4 π )
2
Because if |k| ≥ |u| body escapes from the suns m2
⇒E= . ×
gravitational force 2 5 3
4π 6
R
3
Paragraph 3:
3GM2
E=
Sol 20: (B) Self energy of a uniform sphere of radius R 5R
and mass M is given by
3GM2 Paragraph 4:
E=–
5R
1
∴ Change in energy Sol 22: (D) 1 Bose = Newton
c
3GM2 1 1 Let T be tension in the string.
=– –
5 R / 2 R
Let a1, a2 be acceleration of m1, m2 downward
2
3GM
= gm2
5R 1
–T
energy a= c c
Increase in temperature = m2
M.S 1
3GM2 1
= . gm12
5R M.S where is downward r gravitational force on m1
3GM c
= gm2
5RS 2
–T
Similarly a2 = c c
3GM m2
Sol 21: (A) T0 =
5RS
5SRT0 a1 + a2 = 0 by constrain equation
M=
3G
P hysi cs | 10.65
gm2 – T gm2 – T F1 r1
1 c + 2 =0
= for r1 < R and r2 < R
m2 m2 F2 r2
1 2 GM 1
And for r ≤ R, F = or F ∝
2
m2m2 1 r r2
⇒ T = 2g 1 2 . F1 r22
m2 + m2 c i.e., = for r1 > R and r2 > R
1 2 F2 r12
2 × 5 × 22 × 42 1
= . Sol 4: T ∝ r3/2 v2
2 2 c
2 +4 T2
2/3
or r ∝ T
32 v1 T1
T= 2/3
c r2 T
= 2 r1
r2
T = 32 Bose r1 T1
Note: If you do not know bose, try guessing what it could 2/3 2/3
be. 1 newton is the force which is produced when an T 8
r2= 2 r1= (10 4 =
) 4 × 10 4 km
object of mass 1 kg moves with an acceleration of 1 ms–2. T1 1
Similarly define bose. This is the best assumption you can
do with the given amount of information. 2 π r1 (2 π)(10 4 )
Now, v1 = = = 2 π × 10 4 km / h
T1 1
gm2
Sol 23: (B) Force due to gravity F = =gm2 bose
c 2 π r2 (2 π)(4 × 10 4 )
v2
= = = ( π×10 4 ) km/ h
force along slope f1 = f sin q T2 8
f = f1 (a) Speed of S2 relative to S1
= f sin q
= v 2 − v1 = −π× 10 4 km / h
= gm2sin θ bose
(b) Angular speed of S2 as observed by S1
1
= 5 × (2)2.
2 5
π×10 4 × m / s
= 10 bose | v 2 − v1 | 18
=ωr =
| r2 − r1 | (3 × 107 m)
Sol 1: (A) Force acting on astronaut is utilized in Sol 5: Centre should be at O and radius r. We can
providing necessary centripetal force, thus he fells calculate r from figure (b).
weightlessness, as he is in a state of free fall.
=Fnet 2F cos 30° Now, the body of mass m is projected from the surface
of larger star towards the smaller one. Between C2 and
3
P it is attracted towards 2 and between C1 and P it will
Gm2 3 Gm2
=2 = be attracted towards 1
a2 2 a2
M M
mv 2
This net force should be equal to
r C1 r1 P r2 C2
a
2a
3 Gm2 mv 2 Gm
∴ = ∴ v=
a2 a/ 3 a 1 2
Time period of circular motion Therefore, the body should be projected to just cross
point P because beyond that the particle is attracted
2 π r 2 π (a/ 3) a3 towards the smaller star itself.
=T = = 2π
v Gm / a 3 Gm 1
From conservation of mechanical energy mv 2min
2
Sol 6: (a) Orbital speed of a satellite at distance r from = Potential energy of the body at P – Potential energy
centre of earth, at the surface of larger star.
GM G (16M) r2
= or =4
r12 r22 r1
4
r1 + r2 =
10 a ∴ r2 =
= (10 a) 8 a At highest point B, vB = 0
4 +1
Applying conservation of mechanical energy, decrease
and r1 = 2 a in kinetic energy = increase in gravitational potential
energy
P hysi cs | 10.67
Sol 10: (C) For r ≤ R Sol 13: (A) Measured value of r = (10 ± 1) mm
mv 2 GmM ∆r = 1 mm
= …… (i)
r r2 ∆r 1
Relative error
= = = 100%
r 10
4
Here, M = πr 3 ρ0 Average value of
3 n=5
Substituting in Eq. (i), we get ∑ Ti (0.52 + 0.56 + 0.57 + 0.54 + 0.59)
i=l
v∝r =T = s
n 5
i.e., v-r graph is a straight line passing though origin
⇒T=
0.556s 0.56s
For r > R
4 0.01
Gm πR 3 ρ0 Relative error in time period = 1.79%
mv 2
3 1 0.56
= or v ∝
r r 2
r Reported value of (R - r) = (50 ± 2) mm
2
The corresponding v-r graph will be as shown in option (c) Relative error in (R - r) = =4%
50
4 7(R − r) ∆g ∆T ∆(R − r)
2.Gρ πR 3 T=
2π ⇒ 2
= +
2GM 3 4Gρ 5g g T (R − r)
Sol 11: (B, D)
= Ves = = R
R R 3 ∆g
Ves ∝ R ⇒ 7.57%
=
g
2017-18 100 &
op kers
Class 11 T
By E ran culty
-JE Fa r
IIT enior emie .
S fP r es
o titut
Ins
PHYSICS
FOR JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
SECOND
EDITION
Exhaustive Theory
(Now Revised)
Formula Sheet
9000+ Problems
based on latest JEE pattern
PlancEssential
Questions recommended for revision
11. WAV E S O N A S T R I N G
1. INTRODUCTION
We come across numerous phenomena in nature based on the properties of wave motion. This chapter describes
the equations and properties of wave motion. The study of waves on a string forms the basis of understanding the
phenomena associated with sound waves and other mechanical and non-mechanical waves. Wave transmits both
energy and momentum from one region to other. Mechanical waves require a medium to travel, whereas non-
mechanical waves don’t. Wave on a string is a mechanical wave but the properties and concepts studied here will
be useful in studying non-mechanical waves as well.
2. WAVE MOTION
A wave is a disturbance or variation traveling through space and matter. It is the undulating movement of energy
from one point to another. The medium through which the wave passes may experience some oscillations, but
the particles in the medium do not travel with the wave. The wave equation, which is a differential equation,
expresses the properties of motion in waves. Waves come in all shapes and sizes, and accordingly, the mathematical
expression of the wave equation also varies.
particle to its adjacent particles from one end of the medium to the other. Now, when a disturbance-producing
source active for a short time, a wave pulse passes through the medium. Conversely, when the source remains
active for an extended time, creating a series of motions, it results in a wave train or a wave packet. Thus, a wave
train is a group of waves traveling in the same direction.
For example, if the person in figure decides to move his hand up and down 10 times and then stop, a wave train
consisting of 10 loops will move on the string.
(x2 − v 2 t2 )
In contrast, the equation y = A sin does not represent the movement of the wave in the direction x at
L2
a constant speed . If a wave travels in the negative direction at a speed , its general equation may be written as
y = f(t + x/v) ... (ii)
vt − x
y f
Equation (i) can also be written as = or y g(x − v t),
= ....(iii)
v
where g is some other function having the following meaning: Let us assume that t = 0 in the wave
equation. Then, we get the displacement of various particle at t = 0, i.e., y= (x,t= 0)= g(x) . Thus, the function
g(x) represents the shape of the string at t = 0. Assuming that the displacement of the different particles at
t = 0 is represented by the function g(x), the displacement of the particle at x at time t will be
y = g(x - vt). Similarly, if the wave is traveling along the negative direction x and the displacement of a different
particle at t = 0 is g(x), the displacement of the particle at x at time t will be y = g(x + t) …(iv)
Illustration 1: The wave equation of a wave propagating on a stretched string along its length taken as the positive
t x 2
x axis is given as=y y 0 exp − − where y0 = 4 mm, T = 1.0 s and λ = 4 cm.
T λ
P hysi cs | 11.3
Sol: The wave moves having natural frequency of ν and wavelength λ has velocity V = νλ .
1 λ
As the frequency is ν = the velocity of the wave is then V = .
T T
2
1 x
− t −
(a) The wave equation can be written as y = y 0 e T2 λ /T
λ 4 cm
On comparison with the general equation y = f (t – x/), we can infer that, υ = = = 4 cms−1
T 1.0 s
2
(b) Putting x =0 in the given equation f(t) = y 0 e − (t/T) … (i)
2
(c) Putting t = 0 in the given equation g(t) = y 0 e − (x/ λ ) … (ii)
(d)
x=0
(e)
x=0 x=0 cm
Figure 11.2
v = 1/T = ω /2π. The wave produced by such an oscillation source is called a sine wave or sinusoidal wave.
The displacement of the particle at x at time t will be
y =f(t − x/ υ) or y =Asinw(t − x/ υ) … (ii)
∂y
The velocity of the particle at x at time t is given by =A ω cos(t − x/ υ) … (iii)
∂t
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
•• While differentiating with respect to t, we should treat x as constant – it is the same particle whose
∂
displacement should be considered as a function of time. Therefore, the symbol is used in place
∂t
d
of .
dt
•• In the event that the waves travel along negative x direction, the direction of Vp will change.
Particle velocity is the same as wave velocity. The two are totally different. While the wave moves
on the string at a constant velocity along the x axis, the particle moves up and down with velocity
∂
y , which changes with x and t.
∂t
P W
R Q
t
t+T/4
t+T/2
t+3T/4
t+T
(b) Wavelength: The distance between any two points with the same phase, such as between crests or troughs
is referred to as the wavelength λ. It is generally measured in meters.
(c) Wave Number: Wave number is a measurement of a certain number of wavelengths for some given distance.
In a sense, the wave number is like a spatial analogue of frequency. Typically, wave number is taken to be 2π
times the number of wavelengths per unit of distance, which is the number of radians for each unit of distance
2π
as well. k =
λ
(d) Time Period: A period T is the time needed for one complete cycle of vibration of a wave to pass a given
point.
(e) Frequency: Frequency describes the number of waves that pass a fixed place in a given amount of time and
1
is typically measured in hertz. These are related by f =
T
(f) Angular Frequency: The angular frequency ω gives the frequency with which phase changes. It is expressed
2π
in radians per second. It is related to the frequency or period by ω = 2πf = ….(i)
T
Illustration 2: Consider the wave y = (5 mm) sin [(1 cm -1) x – (60s -1) t]. Find (a) the amplitude, (b) the wave number,
(c) the wavelength, (d) the frequency, (e) the time period and (f) the wave velocity. (JEE MAIN)
T
v=
µ
’ where the linear density μ is the mass per unit length of the string ….(i)
t x
y= A sin2π − … (ii)
T λ
= y A sin[k (vt − x)] … (iii)
Please bear in mind our choice of t = 0 in writing equation (v) from which the wave equation has been derived. Also,
the point at which the left end x = 0 crosses its mean position y = 0 and goes up has been chosen as the origin of
time. For a general choice of the origin of time, a phase constant will have to be added to give the equation
y=A sin [ω (t-x/v) + φ] … (iv)
The constant ϕ will be π/2 If we choose t = 0 at an instant when the left end reaches its extreme position y=A, then
the constant ϕ will be π/2. The equation will then be
y A cos ω(t − x / v),
= … (v)
If on the other hand, t = 0 is taken at the point when the left end is crossing the mean position from an upward to
downward direction, ϕ will be π and the equation will be
x
y = A sin ω − t or y = A sin (kx - ωt) … (vi)
v
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Both sin(kx – ωt) and sin(ωt – kx) differ just by a phase of “π”. If a particle at t = 0, x = 0 in its mean
position is moving upwards (in first wave), then the same particle would be in mean position and the
particle would be moving down!
B Rajiv Reddy (JEE 2012, AIR 11)
Illustration 3: Fig 11.6 shows a string of linear mass density 1.0 Kg m-1 and a length of 50 cm. Find the time taken
by a wave pulse to travel through the length of the string. Take g = 10 ms-2. (JEE MAIN)
Therefore, to travel through 50 cm, the wave pulse will take 0.05 s.
P hysi cs | 11.7
Illustration 4: A rubber tube that is 12.0 m long and that has a total mass of 0.9 kg is fastened to
fixed base. At the other end of the tube, a cord is attached that passes over a pulley and supports
an object with a mass of 5.0 kg. If the tube is struck at one end, find the time required for the
transverse pulse to reach the other end. (g = 9.8 m/s2) (JEE MAIN)
Sol: For the string under the tension T =mg where m is mass of the block. When the rod is struck B
T
at lower rod, the wave thus originated travels at speed v = where µ is the mass per unit length
of the string. µ
A
Tension in the rubber tube AB, T = mg or T = (5.0) (9.8) = 49 N
0.9 Figure 11.7
Mass per unit length of rubber tube, =
µ = 0.075kg / m
12
T 49
∴ Speed of wave on the tube,=
v = = 25.56m / s
µ 0.075
AB 12
∴ The required time is=
t = = 0.47s .
v 25.56
∂2 y ∂2 y
Illustration 5: Prove that the equation y = a sin (ωt – kx) satisfies the wave equation = ν2 and find speed
∂ t2 ∂ x2
of the wave and the direction in which it is traveling. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: To prove the above relation, we need to take the ratio of second order time derivative of wave equation and
second order displacement derivative of wave equation.
∂2 y ∂2 y
= − ω2asin(ωt − kx) and = k 2asin(ωt − kx). We can write these two equation as,
∂ t2 ∂ x2
∂2 y ω2 ∂ 2 y ∂2 y ∂2 y
= . . Comparing this with, = ν2
∂ t2 k 2 ∂ x2 ∂ t2 ∂ x2
ω
We get, wave speed ν =
k
The negative sign between ωt and kx implies that wave is traveling along positive direction.
Illustration 6: The Fig 11.8 shows a snapshot of a sinusoidal traveling wave which Y
was taken at t = 0.3 s. The wavelength is 7.5 cm and the amplitude is 2 cm. Assuming
the crest was at x = 0 at t = 0, write the equation of traveling wave. t=0.3s
(JEE ADVANCED) 2 cm
x
}
Y(x, t) = A cos (kx - ωt) or y(x, t) = A cos (ωt - kx) as cos(-θ) = cos θ
Therefore, the equation of the traveling wave is
y(x, t) = (2 cm) cos [(0.84 cm-1)x – (3.36 rad/s)t]
Illustration 7: The mass and length of a rope hanging from the ceiling are 0.1 kg and 2.45 m,
respectively. The rope has a uniform width.
(a) Determine the speed of transverse wave in the rope at a point 0.5 m away from the lower
end.
l
(b) Also, calculate the time taken by the wave to travel the full length of the rope.
(JEE ADVANCED)
x
Sol: As the rope hangs under it’s own weight, the tension in string at a distance x from
x
hanging end is T = mg where is the length of the string and m is mass of the string.
When a transverse waves are generated to travel along length of rope, they travel with speed Figure 11.9
T
v= where µ is mass per unit length of string.
µ
The tension in the string will be different at different points owing to the mass of the string and the fact that it is
suspended vertically from a ceiling.. The tension at a point which is at a distance x free end will be due to the weight
x
of the string below it. Given that m is the mass of string of length l, the mass of length x of the string will be m
0.1 x 0.5 T
=
µ = 0.04kg / m; Tension = mg = mg = 0.20N ⇒ = v = 2.236m / s
2.45
2.45 µ
(b) From the above equation, we see that velocity of the wave is different at different points. Therefore, if at point
dx dx
x the wave travels a distance dx in time dt, then dt
= =
v gx
1 1 dx 2.45
∴ ∫0 gx ; =t
∫0 dt = 2= 2 = 1.0s
g 9.8
Illustration 8: The mass and length of a rope hanging vertically from a rigid support are 12 m and 6 kg, respectively.
A stone of mass 2 kg is attached to the free end of the rope. The rope has a uniform width. If a transverse pulse
of wavelength 0.06 m is produced at the lower end of the rope, what will be the wavelength of the pulse when it
reaches the top of the rope? (JEE ADVANCED)
F
Sol: The wave velocity will be V = νλ = where F is the tension in rope at a point and µ is mass
µ
per unit length of the string. As F is varying along the length of the rope so the velocity will vary 6 kg
along the length of the rope. As source frequency is constant λ will vary.
Owing to the fact that a stone is attached to the lower end of the rope, the tension in the rope will
be different at the different points. The tension at the lower end will be 20 N and at the upper end 2 kg
it will be 80 N.
Figure 11.10
F F
We have, V = νλ or, = νλ or, =ν µ.
µ λ
P hysi cs | 11.9
The frequency of the wave pulse is affected only by the frequency of the source, and hence the wave pulse
frequency will be the same across the length of the rope as it depends only on the frequency of the source. As the
rope has a uniform width, the mass per unit length will also be consistent across the length of the rope.
F
Thus, by (i) is constant.
λ
(2kg)g (8kg)g
Hence, = where λ1 is the wavelength at the top of the rope. This gives λ1 = 0.12m
0.06m λ1
This is the rate at which energy is being transferred from left portion of the string to the right portion across the
point at x. The cos2 term oscillates between 0 and 1 during cycle and its average value is 1/2, therefore, the average
power transmitted across any point is
1 ω2 A2F
Pav = = 2π2 µ c A2 v 2 … (ii)
2 v
The power passing along the length of the string is proportional to the square of the amplitude and square of the
frequency of the wave.
Illustration 9: For a sine wave with an amplitude of 2.0 mm, the average power transmitted through a given point
on a string is 0.20 W. What will be the power that will be transmitted through this point were the amplitude to be
increased to 3.0 mm?. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: The power transmitted by the sine wave is P ∝ A2 where A is the amplitude of the wave.
Other things being equal, the power transmitted is proportional to the square of the amplitude.
P2 A22 P2 9
Thus, = or = 2.25
= P2 =×
2.25 0.20 W =
0.45 W
P1 A12 0.20 W 4
1 1 . 1 0 | Waves on a String
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
power P 1 2 2
Thus, I= = or I= ρω A V
area of cross − sec tion s 2
This is, however, the average intensity transmitted through the string. The instantaneous intensity
ρ ω2 A2 v sin2 (kx − ωt) or ρ ω2 A2 v cos2 (kx − ωt) depends on x and t.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
•• The relation for power and intensity discussed above are for transverse waves on a string. However,
they hold good for other waves also.
•• Intensity due to a point source: Assuming that waves are propagated uniformly in all directions, the
energy at a distance r from a point source is distributed uniformly on a spherical surface of radius
r and area S= 4πr2. If P is the power per unit area that is incident perpendicular to the direction of
P P
propagation, then intensity I = or I ∝
4π r 2
r2
Since amplitude A ∝ √I, a spherical harmonic wave emanating from a point source can therefore,
A
be written as = y(r,t) sin (kr − ωt)
r
T P Varun (JEE 2012, AIR 64)
Illustration 10: An oscillator attached to stretched string with a diameter of 4 mm transmits transverse waves
through the length of the string. The amplitude and frequency of the oscillation are 10−4 m and 10 Hz, respectively.
Tension in the string is 100 N, mass density of wire is 4.2 × 103 kg/m3.
Find: (a) The wave equation along the string
(b) The energy per unit volume of the wave
1 1 . 1 2 | Waves on a String
(c) The average energy flow per unit time across any section of the string
(d) The power required to drive the oscillator. (JEE ADVANCED)
2π
Sol: The wave equation of string= is y A sin(kx − ω t) where the wave number k = , the angular frequency
λ
2π
ω= 2πν= . λ is the wavelength and T is the time period of wave. As the string is under tension of 100 N, the
T
T
wave velocity on string is given by V = νλ = . Use the formula for wave energy in the string .
µ
T
(a) Speed of transverse wave on the string is, V = (∵ µ = ρS)
ρS
Substituting the values, we have
8. INTERFERENCE
Interference is a phenomenon that occurs
when two waves superimpose while Resultant wave
traveling in the same medium. This results
in the formation of a wave of greater or
Wave 1
lower amplitude. Interference happens
with waves that emerge from the same Wave 2
source or have the similar frequencies. Constructive interference Destructive interference
Figure 11.13
8.1 Principle of Superposition
The principle of superposition of waves states that when two or more waves of same type come together at a
single point in space, the total displacement at that point is equal to the sum of the displacements of the individual
waves. Constructive interference is the meeting of two waves of equal frequency and phase, i.e., if the crest of a
wave meets a crest of another wave of the same frequency at the same point, then the total displacement is the
sum of the individual displacements. Destructive interference is the meeting of two waves of equal frequency and
opposite phase, i.e., if the crest of one wave meets a trough of another wave then the total displacement is equal
to the difference in the individual displacements.
P hysi cs | 11.13
In constructive interference, the phase difference between the waves is a multiple of 2π, whereas in a destructive
interference the difference is an odd multiple of π. If the phase difference is between these two extremes, then
the total displacement of the summed waves lies between the minimum and maximum values. If the first wave
alone were traveling, the displacement of particles may be written as y1=f1 (t – x / v). If the second wave alone were
traveling, the displacement may be written as y2=f2 (t + x / v)
If both the waves are traveling on the string, the displacement of its different particles will be given by
y = y1 + y2 = f1 (t – x / v) + f2 (t + x / v).
If the two individual displacements are in opposite directions, the magnitude of the resulting displacement may be
smaller than the magnitudes of the individual displacements. In a nutshell, when two or more waves pass through
a point at the same time, the disturbance at the point is the sum of the disturbances each wave would produce in
absence of the other wave(s).
A sin ε A2 sin δ
Also =
tan ε = … (iv)
A cos ε A 1 + A2 cos δ
These relations may be remembered by using the following geometrical model can be used to remember these
relations: draw a vector of length A1 to represent y1 = A1sin (kx - ωt) and another vector of length A2 at an angle δ
with the first one to represent y2 = A2 sin (kx – ωt + δ). The resultant vector then represents the resultant wave y=A
sin (kx – ωt + ε). The given Fig 11.14 shows the construction.
Illustration 11: The equations of two waves passing simultaneously through a string are given by y1 = A1sin k
(x – vt) and y2 = A2 sin k (x – vt + x0), where the wave number k = 6.28 cm-1 and x0 = 1.50 cm. The amplitudes for
A1 and A2 are 5.0 mm and 4.0 mm, respectively. Find the phase difference between the waves and the amplitude of
the resulting wave. (JEE ADVANCED)
1 1 . 1 4 | Waves on a String
Sol: As there are two waves passing through the string simultaneously, the phase difference between the two
waves will be δ = kx0. And the resulting amplitude of the waves will be A = A12 + A22 + 2A1A2 cos δ .
The phase of the first wave is k (x -vt) and of the second is k (x- vt + x0).
The phase difference is, therefore, δ = kx0 = (6.28cm-1) (1.50 cm) = 2π × 1.5 = 3π
We can thus infer that this is a destructive interference. The amplitude of the resulting wave is given by |A1 – A2| =
(5.0 − 4.0) mm = 1.0mm.
9. BOUNDARY BEHAVIOUR
When a propagating wave reaches the end of the medium it encounters an obstacle or, maybe, another medium
through which it could travel. Here, the interface of the two media is referred to as the boundary and the behavior
of a wave/pulse at that boundary is described as its boundary behavior.
the pole and, therefore, the string and Incident Pulse Reflection Pulse
the pole will slide past each other. There
will be no interaction between the string
particle and the pole particle. In other
words, when the last particle in the string
is displaced upwards, there will be no
adjoining pole particle to pull it down. As
a result, the upward displacement of the
Figure 11.18
incident pulse is not reversed the in the
reflected pulse. Similarly, if the incident
pulse has a downward displacement the reflected pulse will also demonstrate a downward displacement. . Inversion
is not observed in free end reflection.
10.1 Reflection and Transmission of a Pulse across a Boundary from Less to More
Dense
A pulse exhibits two behaviors upon reaching the boundary.
(a) A part of the energy transmitted by the incident More dense
pulse is reflected and returns towards the hand-
held end of a thin string. The pulse that returns
to the hand-held end after bouncing off the
boundary is known as the reflected pulse.
Less dense
(b) A part of the energy transmitted by the incident More dense
pulse is transmitted into the thick string. The
disturbance that continues moving to the right
is known as the transmitted pulse. Reflected pulse Transmitted pulse
In a wave traveling from a less dense to a Figure 11.19
denser medium a part of the incident pulse
will be reflected off the boundary of the less dense string while another part will be transmitted across the
boundary of the thin string into the new medium (thick string). The pulse that moves into the new medium is
the transmitted pulse and is not inverted. The pulse that is reflected off the boundary of the thinner string is
called the reflected pulse is inverted.
10.2 Reflection and Transmission of a Pulse across a Boundary from More to Less
Dense
Here, the transmitted pulse moves through the less A wave travelling from a more dense to a less dense medium
dense string/medium, while the reflected pulse travels
More dense
through the denser string/medium. The transmitted Less dense
pulse travels faster and has larger wavelength than the
reflected pulse. However, the speed and wavelength
of the reflected pulse are same as the that of the Incident pulse
incident pulse.
Here, a part of the incident pulse will be reflected Less dense
More dense
off the boundary of the denser string/medium and a
part will transmitted across the boundary of the denser
string/medium into the less dense string/medium. Reflected pulse Transmitted pulse
There is no inversion, whatsoever. Figure 11.20
1 1 . 1 6 | Waves on a String
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
•• The wave speed and the wavelength are always greatest in the least dense string/medium.
•• The wave frequency remains constant even when crosses the boundary.
•• When moving from less dense string/medium to denser string/medium, the reflected pulse gets
inverted.
•• The amplitude of the incident pulse is always greater than that of the reflected pulse.
Anand K (JEE 2011, AIR 47)
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Nodes and antinodes are quite different from crests and troughs. In a traveling wave, there points of
large upward and downward displacements, referred to as the crest and trough of the wave. However, an
antinode refers to a point of the string that remains stationary or appear to be stationary.
GV Abhinav (JEE 2012, AIR 329)
The particles at node always remain at rest There is no particle which always remains at rest
All particles cross their mean positions together At no point all the particles are at mean positions together
All the particles between two successive nodes reach their ex- The phases of nearby particles are always different
treme positions together, thus moving in phase.
The energy of one region is always confined to that region Energy is transmitted from one region of space to other
Node
t=0
t=T/8
t=T/4
t=3T/8
t=T/2
t=5T/8
t=3T/4
t=7T/8
t=T
Antinode
Figure 11.23
Illustration 12: The interference of two waves with equal amplitudes and frequencies traveling in opposite
directions produces a standing wave having the equation Y = A cos kx sin ωt in which
A = 1.0 mm, k = 1.57 cm-1 and ω = 78.5 s-1
(a) Find the velocity of the component traveling waves.
(b) Find the node closest to the origin in the region x > 0.
(c) Find the antinode closest to the origin in the region x > 0.
(d) Find the amplitude of the particle at x = 2.33 cm. (JEE ADVANCED)
1 1 . 1 8 | Waves on a String
Sol: Here the two waves of same amplitude and frequency interfere with each other to form the standing waves,
ω
the velocity of the resultant wave will be V
v = where ω is the angular frequency of the wave and k is the wave
k
nπ
number. The distance of the node from the origin is given by kx = . And distance of antinode from origin is
given by kx = nπ. 2
Figure (b)
11.24
3
Thus, the amplitude will be (1.0 mm) | cos( π + =
π / 6) | = mm 0.86mm
2
Let us take the example of string fixed at both the ends –- one
end to a wall and the other end tied to a tuning fork. The tuning
fork vibrates longitudinally with a small amplitude producing sine
waves of amplitude A which travel along the string towards the
wall. The said wave then gets reflected and travels toward the fork.
Figure 11.25
This wave, being reflected from a fixed end, will be an inverted
wave.. These waves are again hit the fork back and as the fork is
heavy and vibrates longitudinally with a small amplitude, it acts like a fixed end and the waves reflected from the
fork get inverted again. Therefore, the wave produced directly by the fork initially and the twice-reflected wave
have same shape, though the twice-reflected wave has already travelled a length 2L.
Let us assume that the length of the string is 2L=λ. The wave moving from the tuning fork to the wall and the
wave reflected back from the wall to the tuning fork interfere constructively and the resultant wave that proceeds
P hysi cs | 11.19
towards the wall has an amplitude 2A. This wave of amplitude 2A is again reflected back by the wall and then again
reflected by the fork. Now, this twice-reflected wave again interfaces constructively with the new incident wave
and a wave of amplitude 3A is produced. Thus, the amplitude keeps progressing. The string gets energy from the
vibrating and the amplitude builds up. Same arguments hold if 2L is any integral multiple of λ that is L=n λ/2, where
n is an integer.
However, in the above discussion, we have not factored in any loss of energy due to air viscosity or due to the
inflexibility of the string. In the steady state, waves of invariable amplitude will be present on the string from left
to right as well as from right to left. These opposing waves will produce standing waves on the string. Nodes and
antinodes will be formed along the string and there will be large amplitudes of vibration at the antinodes. We can
then say that the string is in resonance with the fork. The condition, L=n λ/2, for such a resonance may be stated
in a different way. We have from equation (9), υ = ν λ or λ = υ / ν
The condition for resonance is, therefore,
λ nυ nυ n
L n
= or L
= or =
ν = F / µ … (i)
2 2ν 2L 2L
The lowest frequency with which a standing wave can be set up in a string fixed at both the ends is thus
1
=
νο F / µ … (ii)
2L
This is called the fundamental frequency of the string. All other possible frequencies of standing waves are integral
multiples of this fundamental frequency. Equation (xx) gives the natural frequencies, normal frequencies, or
resonant frequencies.
1 F 1 16N
The fundamental frequency is ν ο = = ==25hz
25 Hz
2L µ 2 × (0.4m) 0.04kgm−1
δ δ
= 2A sin(kx − ) cos( ωt + ) … (i)
2 2
If standing waves are formed, the ends x = 0 and x = L must be nodes because they are kept fixed. Thus, we have
the boundary conditions y= 0 at x=0 for all t and y=0 at x=l for all t.
δ
The first boundary condition is satisfied by equation (i) if sin =0, or δ = 0.
2
Equation (i) then becomes
= y 2A sinkx cos ωt … (ii)
The second boundary condition will be satisfied if
sinkL =
0 or kL =
nπ, where n =
1, 2, 3, 4, 5,.......
2π L nλ
or nπ
= or L= … (iii)
λ 2
If the length of the string is an integral multiple of λ /2, standing waves are produced.
υ nυ n
Again writing λ = υT = , equation (xxv) becomes =
ν = F/µ
v 2L 2L
υ 1
Which is same as equation (xx). The lowest possible frequency is ν ο = = F/µ … (iv)
2L 2L
This is the fundamental frequency of the string. The other natural frequencies with which standing wave can be
formed on the string are
Length-Wavelength
No. of
Harmonic Pattern relationship
Loops
1st 1 L = 1/2
2nd 2 L = 2/2
3rd 3 L = 3/2
4rd 4 L = 4/2
5th 5 L = 5/2
6th 6 L = 6/2
Figure 11.27
2
ν1 = 2 ν0 = F/µ 1st overtone, or 2rd harmonic,
2L
3
ν2 = 3 ν0 = F/µ 2nd overtone, or 3rd harmonic,
2L
4
ν3 = 4 ν 0 = F/µ 3rd overtone, or 4rd harmonic,etc.
2L
In general, any integral multiple of the fundamental frequency is a valid frequency. These higher frequencies are
called overtones. Thus, ν1 = 2 ν0 is the first overtone, ν2 = 3 ν0 is the second overtone, etc. An integral multiple of
a frequency is called its harmonic. Thus, for a string fixed at both the ends, all the overtones are harmonics of the
fundamental frequency and vice-versa.
P hysi cs | 11.21
Illustration 14: A string is vibrating up and down as the fifth harmonic and completes 8.2 m
21 vibrational cycles in 5 seconds. The length of the string is 8.2 meters. Determine the
frequency, period, wavelength and speed for this wave. (JEE MAIN)
number of cycles produced
Sol: The frequency of the wave is f = . The time period of
total time
1
wave T = . When string is vibrating in fifth harmonics, then 2L = 5λ. The wave velocity Figure 11.29
f
is v = f λ.
Given: L = 8.2 m and 21 cycles in 5 seconds. The frequency here refers to the number of back-and-forth movements
of a point on the string and is measured as the number of cycles per unit of time. In this case, it is f = (21 cycles)/
(5 seconds) = 4.2 Hz
The period is the reciprocal of the frequency. T = 1/ (4.2 Hz) = 0.238 s.
The wavelength of the wave is correlated to the length of the rope. For the fifth harmonic as shown in the picture,
5
the length of the rope is equivalent to five halves of a wavelength. That is, L= λ where λ is the wavelength.
Rearranging and substituting the equation gives the following results: 2
=λ (=
2 / 5 ) × L ( 2 / 5 ) × (8.2 m) =
3.28 m
The wavelength and frequency wave can be used to calculate the speed of a wave using the wave equation
V = f λ = (4.2Hz).(3.28m) = 13.8m / s
1 1 . 2 2 | Waves on a String
12.4 Sonometer
A sonometer is an apparatus that is used to study
the transverse vibrations of strings. It is also called A C1 C C2 B
the monochord because it often has only one
string. It consists of a rectangular wooden box
with two fixed bridges near the ends, with a pulley D1 D D2
fixed at one end. A string is fixed at one end, which
is then run over the bridges and the pulley, and
then attached to a weight holder hanging below
the pulley. Additional weights can be added to the
holder to increase the tension in the wire. A third,
movable bridge, can be placed under the string to
change the length of the vibrating section of the H
string. This device demonstrates the relationship
between the frequency of the sound produced
when a string is plucked and the tension, length, Figure 11.30
and mass per unit length of the string. These
relationships are referred to as Mersenne’s law after Marin Mersenne (1588–1648), who studied and formulated
them. For small amplitude vibration, the frequency is proportional to:
(a) The square root of the tension of the string
(b) The reciprocal of the square root of the linear density of the string,
(c) The reciprocal of the length of wire of sonometer
P hysi cs | 11.23
Illustration 15: Resonance is obtained in a sonometer experiment when the experimental wire with a length of
21 cm between the bridges is excited by a tuning fork of frequency 256 Hz. If a tuning fork of frequency 384 Hz is
used, what should be the length of the experimental wire to get the resonance? (JEE MAIN)
1 ν2
Sol: For sonometer wire the ratio of lengths of vibrating string is = .
2 ν1
ν 256
By the law of length, 1ν1 = 2 ν2 or 2 = 1 1 = × 21cm =14 cm
ν2 384
Figure 11.31
Illustration 16: A sonometer wire has a length of 100 cm and a fundamental frequency of 330 Hz. Find
(a) The velocity of propagation of transverse waves along the wire and
(b) The wavelength of the resulting sound in air if velocity of sound in air is 330 m/s. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: When sonometer wire is set to vibrate in its fundamental frequency, then wavelength is λ=2L, the wave velocity
is v = f λ where f is the frequency of oscillation.
(a) In case of transverse vibration of string for fundamental mode:
L = (λ / 2), i.e., λ = 2L = 2 × l = 2m
i.e., the wavelength of transverse wave propagation on string is 2 m. Since the frequency of the wire is given to be
330 Hz, so from υ = f λ , the velocity of transverse waves along the wire will be
Vwire= 330 × 2= 660m / s
i.e., for transverse mechanical waves propagation along the wire, Hz,m and m/s
(b) Here vibration wire will act as source and produce sound, i.e., longitudinal waves in air. Now as frequency
does not change with change in medium so Hz and as velocity in air is given to be = 330 m/s so from υ = f λ ;
1 1 . 2 4 | Waves on a String
λair (Vair=
= / f ) (330 / =
330) 1m
i. e., for sound (longitudinal mechanical waves) in air produced by vibration of wire (body),
f = 330Hz, λ=2m and v =330m/s
Figure 11.33
P hysi cs | 11.25
PROBLEM-SOLVING TACTICS
1. Understanding and remembering all formulae is the key to solving problems in these sections. If the relation
between the given quantities and the questions asked is known, it will be easy to solve most of the problems.
All the quantities discussed in this topic are in some sense related to each other.
2. The concept of reflection (of waves) can be encapsulated in a single point: “Inversion- Reflected wave will
invert only when it encounters a denser medium. And transmitted wave will never invert.” If this much is clear,
one can easily identify the case in every question.
3. Waves must always be understood in the context of transfer of energy rather than as just some function of x
and t for better understanding of physics.
4. For questions pertaining to the derivation of the wave equation, one can begin easily with only the x part and
subsequently add or subtract vt from x depending on the direction of velocity.
5. Most questions related to velocity and energy appear complicated due to the introduction of the usual
Newton mechanics. This should, however, be treated just as some additional information to calculate tension
in the string (e.g., Pulley systems).
FORMULAE SHEET
S. No Term Description
2 Mechanical waves Waves that are propagated through a material medium are called MECHANICAL
WAVES. These are governed by Newton’s Law of Motion. Sound waves are
mechanical waves propagated through the atmosphere from a source to the
listener and it requires a medium for its propagation.
3 Non mechanical Waves which are not propagated through a material medium. Eg: light waves,
waves EM waves.
4 Transverse wave These are waves in which the displacements or oscillations are perpendicular
to the direction of propagation of the wave.
5 Longitudinal wave Longitudinal wave waves in which the displacement or oscillations in medium
are parallel to the direction of propagation of wave. Example: sound waves
6 Equation of harmonic At any time t, displacement y of the particle from its equilibrium position as
wave a function of the coordinate x of the particle is y(x,=
t) A sin(ωt − kx) where,
A is the amplitude of the wave, K- is the wave number
ω is angular frequency of the wave and (ωt-kx) is the phase
7 Wave number Wavelength λ and wave number k are related by the relation k = 2 π / λ
1 1 . 2 6 | Waves on a String
8 Frequency Time period T and frequency f of the wave are related to ω by ω/2 π = f = 1/T
10 Speed of a transverse The tension and the linear mass density of a stretched string, and not the
wave T
frequency, determines the speed of a transverse wave i.e., v=
µ
T = Tension in the string
μ = Linear mass density of the string.
γP
v= P = Pressure of the gas,
ρ
ρ = Density of the gas and γ = CP / CV
12 Principle of It states that when two or more waves of same type come together at a single
superposition point in space, the total displacement at that point is equal to the sum of the
displacements of the individual waves. It is given by y = ∑ y i (x,t)
13 Interference of waves Two sinusoidal waves traveling in the same direction interfere to produce a
resultant sinusoidal wave traveling in that direction if they have the same
amplitude and frequency, with resultant wave given by the relation
=y '(x,t) [2 A m cos(u / 2)]sin(ωt − kx + u / 2) where u is the phase difference
between two waves.
If u = 0, then interference would be fully constructive.
If u = π , then waves would be out of phase and the interference would be
destructive.
14 Reflection of waves An incident wave encountering a boundary gets reflected. If an incident wave
is represented by
= A sin(ωt − kx) then reflected wave at rigid boundary is
y i (x,t)
yr (x,t) = A sin(ωt + kx + π) =− A sin (ωt + kx)
And for reflections at open boundary, the reflected wave is given by yr (x,t)
= A sin(ωt + kx)
15 Standing waves When two identical waves moving in opposite directions meet, the interference
produces standing waves. The particle displacement in standing wave is given
by y(x,t) [2 A sin(kx)]sin(ωt) . The amplitude of standing waves is different
=
at different point i.e., at nodes amplitude is zero and at antinodes amplitude
is maximum or equal to sum of amplitudes of constituting waves.
P hysi cs | 11.27
16 Normal modes of Frequency of transverse waves in a stretched string of length L and fixed at
stretched string both the ends is given by
f = nv /2L where n = 1, 2, 3……..
The above relation gives a set of frequencies called normal modes of oscillation
of the system. Mode n=1 is called the fundamental mode with frequency
f1= v/2L. Second harmonic is the oscillation mode with n = 2 and so on.
Thus the string has infinite number of possible frequency of vibration which
are harmonics of fundamental frequency f1 such that f n =nf1.
Solved Examples
across the length of the rope. The mass per unit length pattern disappears but another stationary wave pattern
will also be consistent for the entire rope as the rope is reappears at a frequency of 1600 Hz. Calculate
uniform. Thus,
(i) The speed of sound in air.
F
By (i) is constant. (ii) The distance between adjacent nodes at a frequency
λ of 1600 Hz,
(2k g)g (8k g)g
Hence, = (iii) The distance between diaphragm and the closed
0.06 λ1
end
where λ1 is the wavelength at the top of the rope. This
gives λ1 = 0.12m. (iv) The next lower frequencies at which stationary wave
patterns will be obtained.
Example 3: A traveling wave pulse is given by Sol: The standing waves generated inside the tube
10 closed at one end, have the wavelength n λ =2L
y = . What is the direction, velocity and
5 + (x + 2t)2 where L is length of the tube. The velocity of the wave
amplitude of the pulse? in air is given by v = fλ, where n is the frequency of the
sound wave.
Sol: The wave equation given above is of form Since the node-to node distance is λ/2, λ / 2 = 0.08
a or λ = 0.16m
y = where ‘a’ is the amplitude of the
b + (x υt)2
(i) c = n λ; ∴ c= 2000 × 0.16 = 320ms-1
disturbance.
(ii) 320 = 1600 × λ / 2 or λ = 0.2m
A wave pulse is a disturbance confined to only in a
small part of the medium at a given instant [see figure] ∴ Distance between nodes = 0.2/2 = 0.1 m = 10cm.
and its shape does not change during propagation. It is (iii) Since there are nodes at the ends, the distance
a between the closed end and the membrane must be
usually expressed by the form y =
b + (x υt)2 exact integrals of λ/2.
n 5
Comparing the above with the given pulse we find that ∴ 0.4 = n λ / 2 = n’ × 0.2/2 ⇒ =
n' 4
f(x υt) = (x + 2t)2
When n = 5, n’ = 4 l = n × 0.16/2 = 0.4m = 40cm
y (iv) For the next lower frequency n = 3, 2, 1
t=0
a ∴ 0.4 = 3 λ / 2 or λ = 0.8/3
a= V
b 320
Since c=n λ, =
n = 1200Hz
0.8 / 3
Again 0.4 = 1. λ / 2 or λ = 0.4M
x ∴ n = 320/0.4 = 800 Hz
i.e, the pulse is traveling along negative x axis with Again 0.4 = 1. λ / 2 or λ = 0.8M
velocity 2 m/s.
∴ n = 320/0.8 = 400 Hz
Further, amplitude is the maximum value of wave
function which will be when (x + 2t)2 =
0
Example 5: Consider a tuning fork of frequency 256 Hz
10 and an open organ pipe of slightly lower frequency. Both
So, =
A ymax
= = 2
5 are at 17°C temperature. When sounded together, they
produce 4 beats per second. When the temperature of
Example 4: Consider a tube that is closed at one air in the pipe is altered, the number of beats per second
end and has a vibrating diaphragm at the other first diminishes to zero and then increases again to 4.
end. The diaphragm, which may be assumed to be Determine the quantum of temperature change in the
the displacement node, produces a stationary wave pipe? Also, in what direction has the temperature of the
pattern at the frequency of 2000 Hz, in which the air in the pipe been altered?
distance between adjacent nodes is 8 cm. When the
frequency is gradually reduced, the stationary wave
P hysi cs | 11.29
Sol: In an open organ pipe the frequency of the wave is So, the required frequency are 1100, 2200, 3300, 4400,
V and 5500 Hz
n = t where Vt is the velocity of wave at temperature
λ The frequency of the nth overtone is (n +1) n0.
t and λ=2L is the wavelength of the vibrating wave. If
∴ (n +1) n0 =20000 or (n+1)100 = 20000
temperature of air inside the organ pipe changes, the
Or n = 17.18
velocity of wave also changes, since V ∝ T .
V17 The acceptable value is 17.
=n = where l =lengthof
length ofthe
thepipe
pipe;
2l
V V17 Example 7: The displacement of a particle of a string
∴ = 256 − 17 4 = or 252 carrying a traveling wave is given by
2l 2l
=
Since beats decreases first and then increases to 4, the y (3.0 cm)sin6.28(0.50x − 50t),
frequency of the pipe increases. This can happen only if where x is in centimeter and t in second. Find (a) the
the temperature increases. amplitude, (b) the wavelength, (c) the frequency and
Let t be the final temperature, in Celsius, (d) the speed of the wave.
Vt Vt
Now =256 + 4 or = 260 Sol: In a open organ pipe the frequency of the wave is
2l 2l
V
V 260 273 + t 260 n = t where Vt is the velocity of wave at temperature
Dividing t
= = or λ
V17 252 273 + 17 252 t and λ=2L is the wavelength of the vibrating wave. If
(∴ V < T ) or
= t 308.7
= – 273 35.70 C. temperature of air inside the organ pipe changes, the
velocity of wave also changes, since V ∝ T .
∴ Rise in temperature =35.7 – 17 = 18.7 0C.
Example 6: Determine the fundamental frequency and On comparing with the standard wave equation
the first four overtones of a 15 cm pipe
x t
= y A sin(kx − ωt) = A sin2π ( − )
(a) If the pipe is closed at one ends, λ T
(b) If the pipe is open at both ends
we see that, Amplitude = A = 3.0 cm,
(c) How many overtones are within the human auditory 1
range in each of the above cases? Velocity of sound in Wavelength = λ= cm = 2.0 cm, and the frequency
0.50
air = 330 ms-1.
1
=v= = 50Hz
Sol: For the organ pipe closed at one end, the T
fundamental frequency of the wave of wavelength λ The speed of the wave is V = ν λ
v
is given by, n0 = .The frequency of ith over tone is = (50 s-1) (2.0cm) = 100 cm s-1
4L
given by ni = ( i + 1) × n0 where i=1,2,3…. etc.
Example 8: The equation for a wave traveling in the
V direction x on a string is
(a) n0 =
4l
y = (3.0 cm) sin [(3.14 cm-1) x – (314 s-1) t].
Wher n0 = frequency of the fundamental node
(a) Find the maximum velocity of a particle of the string.
330
⇒=n0 = 550Hz (b) Find the acceleration of a particle at x = 6.0 cm at
4 × 0.15
time t = 0.11 s
The first four overtones are 3n0, 5n0, 7n0 and 9n0
∂y
∴ So, the required frequencies are 550, 1650, 2750, Sol: The maximum velocity is v = While the
∂t
3850, and 4950 Hz. ∂v
acceleration a =
V 330 ∂t
(b) n= = = 1100Hz ∂y
0
2l 2 × 0.15 (a) The velocity of the particle at x at time t is v =
∂t
The first overtones are 2n0, 3n0, 4n0 and 5n0
1 1 . 3 0 | Waves on a String
The equation of the wave traveling on the string along the FL (64N)(0.50m)
∆L= = = 0.02mm
position X – axis is obtained by replacing t with t – x / v in AY (1.0 ×10 6 m2 ) × (16 × 1011Nm−2 )
−
(b) Find s the node closest to the origin in the region Sol: The fork is the source to generate the transverse
x > 0. wave on string whose frequency is also 500 Hz. The
(c) Find the antinode closest to the origin in the region equation of this wave is given= by y A sin (kx − ωt)
x>0 where k is the wave number and x is the displacement
of particle. The wave velocity is given by V = νλ where
(d) Find the amplitude of the particle at x= 2.33 cm. υ is the frequency of source
Sol: Here the two waves of same amplitude and Since the wave is traveling along positive direction x
frequency interfere with each other to form the and the displacement of the end x = 0 is at time t = 0,
standing waves, the velocity of the resultant wave will the general equation of this wave is
ω
be V = where ω is the angular frequency of the wave 2π
K y(x,t) A sin ( υt − x)
= … (i)
λ
and K is the wave number. At the node the waves are
90o opposite in phase, so that the amplitude of resulting Where A = 0.01 m. When x = 0.1m, Y = -0.005m
wave is zero at the node.
2π
(a) The standing wave is formed by the superposition ∴ −0.005 0.01sin ( υt − x1 )
=
λ
of the waves
A A 2π 1
y1
= sin(ωt − kt) and=
y2 sin(ωt + kt) Where x1 = 0.1m or sin ( υt − x1 ) =−
2 2 λ 2
the rope so the velocity will vary along the length of the −0.5cm
y =+
y1 y 2 = − 0.35cm.
=
rope. As source frequency is constant λ will vary. 2
As the rope is stretched using a slab, its tension will
be different at different points along the length of the Example 7: The vibrations of a string fixed at both ends
rope. The tension at the free end will be (2 kg) g while are described by the equation
at the upper end it will be (8kg) g. y = (5.00mm) sin[(1.57cm−1 )x]sin[(314 s−1 )t]
λ ⇒ F / µ = vλ or
We have, vυ== vvλ F / λ= v µ … (i) (a) What is the maximum displacement of the particle
at x =5.66cm?
Since the frequency of the wave pulse is dependent (b) What are the wavelengths and the wave speeds
only on the frequency of the source, it will be consistent of the two transverse waves that combine to give the
across the length of the rope. The mass per unit length above vibration?
will also be consistent for the entire rope as the rope is
uniform. Thus, by (c) What is the velocity of the particle at x = 5.66 cm at
time t = 2.00s?
F (2kg)g (8kg)g
(i) is cons tant . Hence, = , (d) If the length of the string is 10.0 cm, locate the
λ 0.06m λ1
nodes and the antinodes. How many loops are formed
Where λ1 is the wavelength at the top of the rope, this in the vibration?
gives λ1 =0.12m.
= (157 m s−1 ) in (1.57 cm−1 ) x cos(314 s−1 )t So that ν 1L1 = ν 2L2 = ν 3L3. ... (i)
As ν 1: ν 2: ν 3 = 1: 2: 3 we have
(d) The nodes occur where the amplitude is zero, i.e.,
π ν 2 = 2 ν 1 and ν 3 = 3 ν 1 so that by (i)
sin (1.57cm-1) x = 0 or cm−1 x = nπ
2 ν1 L1 ν1 L1
L2
= L1
= and =
ν3 L1
= and
Where n is an integer. Thus, x = 2n cm. ν2 2 ν3 3
The nodes, therefore, occur at x = 0, 2 cm, 4 cm, 6 cm, L1+L2+L3 = 1m
8cm and 10 cm. Antinodes occur in between them, i.e.,
at x = 1 cm, 3 cm, 5cm, 7 cm and 9 cm. The string 1 1
vibrates in 5 loops. We get L1 1 + + =
1m
2 3
6 L1 6
Example 8: A guitar of 90 cm length has a fundamental L=
1 m Thus, L=
2 = m
frequency of 124 Hz. Where should it be pressed to 11 2 11
produce a fundamental frequency of 186 Hz? ν1 2
L=
3 = m
3 11
Sol: As wires of guitar resemble the sonometer wire,
6
thus the fundamental frequency of the guitar wire fixed One bridge should be placed at m from one end
11
1 F 2
at both ends is ν = . And for two vibrating and the other should be placed at m from other end.
2L µ 11
ν
strings, the ratio of their vibrating lengths is 1 = 2 .
2 ν2 Example 10: A wire having a linear mass density 5.0
×10-3 kg m-1 resonates at a frequency of 420 Hz when it
The fundamental frequency of a string fixed at both
is stretched between two rigid supports with a tension
1 F of 450 N.. The next higher frequency at which the same
ends is given by ν =
2L µ wire resonates is 490 Hz. Find the length of the wire.
As F and μ are fixed,
Sol: For vibrating string the nth harmonic of fundamental
=ν11 LL=
ν 2
2 or LL2
ν
ν11 L
= = or L1 n F
ν L
ν22 L11 2 ν
ν2 1 frequency is f = . Here L is the length of vibrating
2 2L µ
124Hz
124Hz
=
= (90
(90 cm)
cm) 60
60 cm
cm string and F is the tension in the string. The two given
186
186 Hz
Hz frequencies correspond to two consecutive values n
Thus, the string should be pressed at 60 cm from an and (n+1).
end. Suppose the wire vibrates at 420 Hz in its nth harmonic
and at 490 Hz in its (n + 1)th harmonic.
Example 9: The total length of a sonometer wire is 1 m
−1 n
between the fixed ends. Where the two bridges should 420s
= F / µ … (i)
2L
be placed in the sonometer so that the three segments
of the wire have their fundamental frequencies in the (n + 1)
490s−1
and= F / µ … (ii)
ratio 1:2:3? 2L
1 490 (n + 1)
Sol: For sonometer the ratio of length of wires =
is L ∝ This gives = or n 6
ν 420 n
where v is the frequency of the wave and L is length of
Putting the value in (i),
vibrating string.
Suppose the lengths of the three segments are L1, L2, 6 450N 900
=
and L3, respectively. The fundamental frequencies are 420s−1 = ms−1
2L 5.0 ×10−3 kgm−1 L
1
=
ν1 F/µ
2L1 900
Or
= L = m 2.1m
1 1 420
=
ν2 F/µ = ; ν3 F/µ
2L2 2L3
P hysi cs | 11.35
JEE Main/Boards
Exercise 2
1m
Single Correct Choice Type
(A) 0.2 sec (B) 0.1 sec
Q.1 A wave is propagating along x–axis. The
displacement of particle of the medium in z – direction (C) 0.02 sec (D) 0.01 sec
at t = 0 is given by: z = exp [- (x +2)2], where ‘x’ is in
meters. At t = 1s, the same wave disturbance is given Q. 5 A uniform rope having some mass hangs vertically
by: z = exp [-2 ( 2-x ) 2]. Then, the wave propagation from a rigid support. A transvers wave pulse is produced
velocity is at the lower end. The speed (v) of the wave pulse varies
with height (h) from the lower end as:
(A) 4 m/s in + x direction
(B) 4 m/s in - x direction v v
Q.7 Consider a function y = 10 sin2 (100πt + 5 πz) where A transverse wave pulse: Y = (6 mm) sin (5t + 40x),
y, z are in cm and t is in second. where ‘t’ is in seconds and ‘x’ in meters, is sent along
the lighter string towards the joint. The joint is at x =
(A) The function represents a traveling, periodic wave
0. The equation of the wave pulse reflected from the
propagating in (-z) direction with speed 20m/s.
joint is
(B) The function does not represent a traveling wave.
(A) (2 mm) sin (5t – 40x)
(C) The amplitude of the wave is 5 cm.
(B) (4 mm) sin (40t – 5x)
(D) The amplitude of the wave is 10 cm.
(C) - (2 mm) sin (5t – 40x)
Q. 8 The displacement from the position of equilibrium (D) (2 mm) sin (5t – 10x)
of a point 4 cm from a source of sinusoidal oscillations
is half the amplitude at the moment t = T/ 6 (T is the Q. 13 In the previous question, the percentage of power
time period). Assume that the source was at mean transmitted to the heavier string through the joint is
position at t = 0. The wavelength of the running wave is approximately
(A) 0.96m (B) 0.48m (C) 0.24m (D) 0.12m (A) 33% (B) 89% (C) 67% (D) 75%
Q. 9 The period of oscillations of a point is 0.04 sec. Q.14 A wave pulse on a string has the dimension shown
and the velocity of propagation of oscillation is 300m/ in figure. The waves speed is V= 1 cm/s. If point O is a
sec. The difference of phases between the oscillations free end. The shape of wave at time t = 3 s is:
of two points at distance 10 and 16m respectively from
the source of oscillations is V=1cm/s
1 cm
(A) 2π (B) π/ 2 (C) π/ 4 (D) π O
1 cm 1 cm 2 cm
3
Q.10 A motion is described by y = where O
a + (x + 3t)2
2
(C) (D)
B A B A
1 1 . 3 8 | Waves on a String
Q.17 A wave represented by the equation Q.23 A wave travels uniformly in all directions from a
= y A cos(kx − ω t) is superimposed with another wave point source in an isotropic medium. The displacement
to from a stationary wave such that the point x = 0 is a of the medium at any point at a distance r from
node. The equation of the other wave is: the source may be represented by (A is a constant
representing strength of source)
(A) − A sin (kx + ω t) (B) − A cos (kx + ω t)
(C) A sin (kx + ω t) (D) A cos (kx + ω t)
(A) [A / r ]sin(kr − ω t) (B) [A / r]sin(kr − ω t)
Q.18 A taut string at both ends vibrates in its nth (C) [Ar]sin(kr − ω t) (D) [A / r 2 ]sin(kr − ω t)
overtone. The distance between adjacent Node and
Antinode is found to be ‘d’. If the length of the string Q.24 A sinusoidal progressive wave is
is L, then generated in a string. Its equation is given by
(A)
= L 2d(n + 1) (B)=L d (n + 1) =Y (2mm)sin(2πx −100π t + π / 3) . The time when
particle at x = 4 m first passes through mean position,
(C) L = 2dn (D)
= L 2d(n − 1)
will be
1 1
Q.19 A metallic wire of length L is fixed between (A) sec (B) sec
two rigid supports. If the wire is cooled through a 150 12
temperature difference ΔT (Y = young’s modulus, ρ = 1 1
(C) sec (D) sec
density, α = coefficient of linear expansion) then the 300 100
frequency of transverse vibration is proportional to:
Q.25 A transverse wave is described by the equation
α Yα ρ ρα =Y A sin[2πx (ft − x / λ )] . The maximum particle velocity
(A) (B) (C) (D) is equal to four times the wave velocity if:
ρY ρ Yα Y
(A) λ =π A / 4 (B) λ =π A / 2
(C) λ =π A (D) λ = 2π A
20
Q.20 A standing wave Y = A sin π x cos(1000 π t) is
3
maintained in a taut string where y and x are expressed
in meters. The distance between the successive points Previous Years’ Questions
oscillating with the amplitude A/2 across a node is
equal to
Q. 1 A transverse wave is described by the equation
(A) 25 cm (B) 2.5 cm (C) 5 cm (D) 10 cm x
y = y 0 sin2π ft − . The maximum particle velocity
λ
Q.21 A string of length 0.4m & mass 10-2kg is tightly is equal to four time the wave velocity if (1984)
clamped at its ends. The tension in the string is 1.6 N.
(A) λ =π (B) λ =π y 0 / 2
Identical wave pulses are produced at one end at equal
intervals of time, Δt. The minimum value of Δt which ( C ) λ = 2π ( D ) λ = 2π y 0
allows constructive interference between successive
pulses is: Q.2 A wave represented by the equation
(A) 0.05s (B) 0.10s (C) 0.20s (D) 0.40s y = acos (kx − ωt ) is superimposed with another wave
to from a stationary wave such that point x = 0 is a
node. The equation for the other wave is (1988)
Q. 22 Fig 11.46, show a stationary wave between two
fixed points P and Q. which points (s) of 1, 2 and 3 are
in phase with the point X? Q.3 The displacement y of a particle executing periodic
1
motion is given by y = 4 cos2 t sin(1000 t) . This
P X 1 23 Q 2
expression may be considered to be a result of the
(A) 1, 2 and 3 (B) 1 and 2 only superposition of ………………….. Independent harmonic
(C) 2 and 3 only (D) 3 only motions. (1992)
(A) Two (B) Three (C) Four (D) Five
P hysi cs | 11.39
Q.4 The extension in a string, obeying Hooke’s law, is the wire. When this mass is replaced by mass M. The
x. The speed of transverse wave in the stretched string wire resonates with the same tuning fork forming three
is. If the extension in the string is increased to 1.5 x, the antinodes for the same positions of the bridges. The
speed of transverse wave will be (1996) value of M is (2002)
(A) 1.22 (B) 0.61 (C) 1.50 (D) 0.75 (A) 25 kg (B) 5kg
(C) 12.5 kg (D) 1/25 kg
Q. 5 A traveling wave in a stretched string is described
by the equation; Y = A sin (kx – ωt)
Q.10 A massless rod BD is suspended by two identical
The maximum particle velocity is (1997) massless strings AB and CD of equal lengths. A block
of mass m is suspended from point P such that BP is
(A) Aω (B) ω/k (C) dω/dk (D) x/ω
equal to x. If the fundamental frequency of the left wire
is twice the fundamental frequency of right wire, then
Q.6 Two vibrating strings of the same material but of the value of x is (2006)
lengths L and 2L have radii 2r and r respectively. They
are stretched under the same tension. Both the strings A C
vibrate in their fundamental modes. The one of length L
with frequency V1 and the other with frequency V2. The
ratio V1/V2 is given by (2000)
(A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 8 (D) 1
x
P
Q.7 The ends of a stretched wire of length L are B D
fixed at x = 0 and x = L. In one experiment the
πx m
displacement of the= wire is y1 A sin sin ωt and
L (A) l/5 (B) l/4 (C) 4l/5 (D) 3l/4
energy is E1 and in other experiment its displacement is
2π x Q.11 A hollow pipe of length 0.8 m is closed at one
=y 2 A sin sin2ωt and energy is E2. Then (2011) end. At its open end, a 0.5 m long uniform string is
L
vibrating in its second harmonic and it resonates with
(A) E2 = E1 (B) E2 = 2E1 the fundamental frequency of the pipe. If the tension in
(C) E2 = 4E1 (D) E2 = 16E1 the wire is 50 N and the speed of sound is 320ms-1, the
mass of the string is (2010)
Q.8 Two pulses in a stretched string, whose centers are (A) 5 kg (B) 10kg (C) 20 kg (D) 40 kg
initially 8 cm apart, are moving towards each other as
shown in the figure. The speed of each pulse is 2 cm/s. Q.12 The displacement of particles in a string stretched
After 2 s the total energy of the pulses will be (2001) in the x – direction is represented by y. Among the
following expressions for y, those describing wave
motion is (are) (1987)
(A) cos kx sin ωt (B) k 2 x2 − ω2 t2
8 cm (C) cos2 (kx + ωt) (
(D) cos k 2 x2 − ω2 t2 )
(A) Zero
Q.13 A wave is represented by the equation;
(B) Purely kinetic y = A sin (10 π x +15π t + π / 3 )
(C) Purely potential Where x is in meter and t is in second. The expression
(D) Partly kinetic and partly potential represents (1990)
(A) A wave traveling in the position x – direction with a
Q.9 A sonometer wire resonates with a given tuning fork velocity 1.5 m/s
forming standing waves with five antinodes between (B) A wave traveling in the negative x – direction with a
the two bridges when a mass of 9 kg is suspended from velocity 1.5 m/s
1 1 . 4 0 | Waves on a String
(C) A wave traveling in the negative x – direction with a Q.18 In a wave motion, y = a sin(kx – wt), y can represent
wavelength 0.2 m (1999)
(D) A wave traveling in the position x – direction with a (A) Electric field (B) Magnetic field
wavelength 0.2 m
(C) Displacement (D) Pressure
(A) acos( π x / 2L)cos( π y / 2L) Q.22 The transverse displacement y (x,t) of a wave
2 +bt2 + 2 abxt)
(B) asin( π x / L)sin( π y / L) on a string is given by y(a,t) = e−(ax .This
represents a (2011)
(C) asin( π x /L)sin(2π y / L)
(D) acos(2π x /L)cos( π y / L) b
(A) Wave moving in – x direction with speed
a
Q.17 A transverse sinusoidal wave of amplitude a, (B) Standing wave of frequency b
wavelength λ and frequency is traveling on a stretched 1
string. The maximum speed of any point on the string is (C) Standing wave of frequency
b
ν/10, where is the speed of propagation of the wave. If
a = 10-3m and ν = 10m/s, then λ and f are given by a
(D) Wave moving in + x direction with
(1998) b
Q.23 Two particles are executing simple harmonic Q.27 A pendulum made of a uniform wire of cross
motion of the same amplitude A and frequency ω along sectional area A has time period T. When an additional
the x-axis. Their mean position is separated by distance mass M is added to its bob, the time period changes to
X0 (X0 > A). If the maximum separation between them is TM. If the Young’s modulus of the material of the wire
(X0 + A), the phase difference between their motion is: 1
(2011) is Y then is equal to : (g = gravitational acceleration)
Y (2015)
X0+A
T 2 T 2
A Mg
M
(A) − 1 (B) M − 1
T Mg T A
X0 A
T 2 2
A T A
(C) 1 − M (D) 1 −
T Mg TM Mg
π π π π
(A) (B) (C) (D)
3 4 6 2
Q.28 For a simple pendulum, a graph is plotted between
Q.24 A mass M, attached to a horizontal spring, its kinetic energy (KE) and potential energy (PE)
executes S.H.M. with amplitude A1. When the mass M against its displacement d. Which one of the following
passes through its mean position then a smaller mass represents these correctly? (Graphs are schematic and
m is placed over it and both of them move together not drawn to scale) (2015)
A
with amplitude A2. The ratio of 1 is: (2011) E E
A2
1/2 KE PE
M+m
(A)
M+m
(B)
(A) (B)
M M
PE
d
KE
d
1/2
M M
(C) (D)
M+m M+m E KE
E
PE
(D)
Q.25 A sonometer wire of length 1.5 m is made of steel.
(C) d
KE
The tension in it produces an elastic strain of 1%.What d
elasticity of steel are 7.7 × 103 kg/m3 and 2.2 × 1011 N/m2
Q.29 A uniform string of length 20 m is suspended
respectively? (2013)
from a rigid support. A short wave pulse is introduced
(A) 188.5 Hz (B) 178.2 Hz at its lowest end. It starts moving up the string. The
(C) 200.5 Hz (D) 770 Hz time taken to reach the support is: (take g = 10 ms–2)
(2016)
Q.26 The period of oscillation of a simple pendulum (A) 2s (B) 2 2 s (C) 2 s (D) 2 π 2 s
L
is T = 2π . Measured value of L is 20.0 cm known Q.30 A particle performs simple harmonic motion with
g
amplitude A. Its speed is trebled at the instant that it
to 1 mm accuracy and time for 100 oscillations of the 2A
pendulum is found to be 90s using a wrist watch of 1s is at distance from equilibrium position. The new
3
resolution. The accuracy in the determination of g is:
amplitude of the motion is. (2016)
(2015)
7A A
(A) 2% (B) 3% (C) 1% (D) 5% (A) 3A (B) A 3 (C) (D) 41
3 3
1 1 . 4 2 | Waves on a String
JEE Advanced/Boards
C
B D 1 cm
A
E 2 cm 1 cm 1 cm
F H
(a) Draw the pulse at t = 2sec.
G
(b) The particle speed on the leading edge at the instant
Q.2 A sinusoidal wave propagates along a string. In depicted is_______.
figure (a) and (b). ‘y’ represents displacement of particle
from the mean position. ‘x’ & ‘t’ have usual meanings.
Q.6 Two strings A and B with μ =2 kg/m and μ = 8
Find:
kg/m respectively are joined in series and kept on a
(a) Wavelength, frequency and speed of the wave. horizontal table with both the ends fixed. The tension in
(b) Maximum velocity and maximum acceleration of the string is 200 N. If a pulse of amplitude 1 cm travels
the particles in A towards the junction, then find the amplitude of
reflected and transmitted pulse.
(c) The magnitude of slope of the string at x = 2 at
t = 4 sec.
Q.7 A parabolic pulse given by equation y (in cm) =
0.3 – 0.1 (x – 5t) 2 (y > 0) x in meter and t in second
y (in mm)
for x=2m traveling in a uniform string. The pulse passes through
+3 a boundary beyond which its velocity becomes 2.5 m/s.
2 4 6 What will be the amplitude of pulse in this medium
0 t (in sec.)
after transmission?
-3
(a)
Q.8 A 40 cm long wire having a mass 3.2 gm and area
y (in mm) of c.s 1 mm2 is stretched between the support 40.05
for x=2m
cm apart. In its fundamental mode, it vibrates with a
0
1 3 7 frequency 1000/64 Hz. Find the young’s modulus of the
x (in m)
wire.
Q.10 A rope, under tension of 200N and fixed at both Q.2 A string of length 1 m and linear mass density 0.01
ends, oscillates in a second – harmonic standing wave kgm-1 is stretched to a tension of 100N. When both ends
pattern. The displacement of the rope is given by: of the string are fixed, the three lowest frequencies for
standing wave are f1, f2 and f3. When only one end of the
Y = ( 0.10m) (sin πx / 2)sin12πt string is fixed, the three lowest frequencies for standing
Where x = 0 at one end of the rope, x is in meters and t wave are n1, n2 and n3. Then
is in seconds. What are
(A) n3 = 5n1 = f3 = 125 Hz
(a) The length of the rope
(B) f3 = 5f1 = n3 = 125 Hz
(b) The speed of the progressive waves on the rope,
(C) f3 = n2 = 3f1 = 150 Hz
and
f1 + f2
(c) The mass of the rope (D)=
n2 = 75Hz
2
(d) If the rope oscillates in a third – harmonic standing
wave pattern, what will be the period of oscillation? Q.3 A chord attached to a vibrating string from divides
it into 6 loops, when its tension is 36N. the tension at
Q.11 A stretched uniform wire of a sonometer between which it will vibrate in 4 loops is
two fixed knife edges, when vibrates in its second
(A) 24N (B) 36N (C) 64N (D) 81N
harmonic gives 1 beat per second with a vibrating
tuning fork of frequency 200 Hz. Find the percentage
change in the tension of the wire to be in unison with Q.4 A wave equation is given as y = cos (500t – 70x),
the tuning fork. where y in mm and t is in sec.
(A) The wave is not a transverse propagating wave.
Q.12 A string fixed at both ends has consecutive (B) The speed of wave is 50/7 m/s
standing wave modes for which the distances between
adjacent nodes are 18 cm and 16 cm respectively. (C) The frequency of oscillation 1000π Hz
(a) What is the length of the string? (D) Two closest points which are in same phase have
separation 45 π/7 cm.
(b) If the tension is 10 N and the linear mass density is
4kg/m, what is the fundamental frequency?
Q.5 A wave pulse passing on a string with a speed of
40 cm s–1 in the negative x – direction has its maximum
Q.13 In a mixture of gases, the average number of at x = 0 at t = 0. Where will this maximum be located
degree of freedom per molecules is 6. The rms speed at t = 5s?
of the molecules of the gas is c. find the velocity of
sound in the gas. (A) 2 m (B) 3 m (C) 1 m (D) 2.5 m
(C) 30 units and 20 units (A) 80 m/s, 63 m/s (B) 75 m/s, 54 m/s
(D) 25 units and 20 units (C) 82 m/s, 33 m/s (D) 87 m/s , 60 m/s
1 1 . 4 4 | Waves on a String
25 cm
2.0 cm
(A) VP is up wards (B) VQ = − VR
2 kg (C) | VP | > | VQ | =
| VR | (D) VQ = VR
(A) 0.03 s (B) 0.02 s (C) 0.01 s (D) 0.04 s Comprehension Type
The figure represents the instantaneous picture of a
Assertion Reasoning Type transverse harmonic wave traveling along the negative
X – axis. Choose the correct alternative (s) related to the
Q.9 Statement-I: In a sinusoidal traveling wave on a movement of the mine points shown in the figure.
string potential energy of deformation of string element
at extreme position is maximum y
b
Statement-II: The particle in sinusoidal traveling wave
a c
perform SHM. h
o x
d
(A) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true, statement-II
e g
is a correct explanation for statement-I
f
(B) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true, statement-II
is NOT correct explanation for statement-I Q.12 The point/s moving upward is/are
(C) Statement-I is true, statement-II is false (A) a (B) c (C) f (D) g
(D) Statement-I is false, statement-II is true
Q.13 The point/s moving downwards is/are
Q. 10 Statement-I: When a pulse on string reflects (A) o (B) b (C) d (D) h
from free end, the resultant pulse is formed in such a
way that slope of string at free end is zero.
Q.14 The stationary points is/ are
Statement-II: Zero resultant slope ensures that there is
(A) o (B) b (C) f (D) h
no force components perpendicular to string.
(A) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true, statement-II Q.15 The point/s moving with maximum velocity is/are
is a correct explanation for Statement-I
(A) b (B) c (C) d (D) h
(B) Statement-I is true, statement-II is true, statement-II
is NOT correct explanation for Statement-I
(C) Statement-I is true, statement-II is false
Previous Years’ Questions
(D) Statement-I is false, statement-II is true
3π 3π
(C) î m / s (D) − î m / s Q.9 As a wave propagates (1999)
50 50
(A) The wave intensity remains constant for a plane wave
Q.4 A vibrating string of certain length l under a tension (B) The wave intensity decreases as the inverse of the
T resonates with a mode corresponding to the first distance from the source for a spherical wave
overtone (third harmonic) of an air column of length (C) The wave intensity decreases as the inverse square
75 cm inside a tube closed at one end. The string also of the distance from the source for a spherical wave
generates 4 beats/s when excited along with a tuning
fork of frequency n. Now when the tension of the string (D) Total intensity of the spherical wave over the
is slightly increased the number of beats reduces to 2 spherical surface centered at the source remains
per second. Assuming the velocity of sound in air to constant at all times
be 340 m/s, the frequency n of the tuning fork in Hz is
0.8
(2008) Q.10 Y (x,t) = represents a moving pulse
[(4x + 5t)2 + 5]
(A) 344 (B) 336 (C) 117.3 (D) 109.3 where x and y are in meter and t is in second. Then,(1999)
(A) Pulse is moving in positive x – direction
(B) In 2 s it will travel a distance of 2.5 m
(C) Its maximum displacement is 0.16 m
(D) It is a symmetric pulse
1 1 . 4 6 | Waves on a String
Q.11 A copper wire is held at the two ends by rigid (C) The maximum displacement of the midpoint of the
supports. At 300C, the wire is just taut, with negligible string, from its equilibrium position is 0.01m.
tension. Find the speed of transverse waves in this wire
(D) The fundamental frequency is 100 Hz.
at 100C. (1998)
Given: Young modulus of copper = 1.3 ×1011 N/m2 Q.17 One end of a taut string of length 3m along the x
Coefficient of linear expansion of copper = 1.7 ×10-5 o C-1 axis is fixed at x = 0. The speed of the waves in the string
is 100 ms-1. The other end of the string is vibrating in
Density of copper = 9 ×103 kg/m2
the y direction so that stationary waves are set up in
the string. The possible waveform(s) of these stationary
Q.12 A string 25 cm long and having a mass of 2.5 g is waves is (are): (2014)
under tension. A pipe closed at one end is 40 cm long.
πx 50πt
When the string is set vibrating in its first overtone and (A) y(t) = A sin cos
the air in the pipe in its fundamental frequency, 8 beats/ s 6 3
are heard. It is observed that decreasing the tension in πx 100πt
(B) y(t) = A sin cos
the string decreases the beat frequency. If the speed of 3 3
sound in air is 320 m/s find the tension in the string. 5πx 250πt
(1999) (C) y(t) = A sin cos
6 3
5πx
Q.13 A uniform rope of length 12 m and mass 6= kg (D) y(t) A sin cos250πt
6
hangs vertically from a rigid support. A block of mass
2 kg is attached to the free end of the rope. A transverse
Q.18 A metal rod AB of length 10x has its one end A
pulse of wavelength 0.06 m is produced at the lower
in ice at 0°C and the other end B in water at 100°C. If
end of the rope. What is the wavelength of the pulse
a point P on the rod is maintained at 400°C, then it is
when it reaches the top of the rope? (1984)
found that equal amounts of water and ice evaporate
and melt per unit time. The latent heat of evaporation
Q.14 A steel wire of length 1 m, mass 0.1 kg and uniform of water is 540 cal/g and latent heat of melting of ice is
cross-sectional area 10-6 m2 is rigidly fixed at both ends. 80 cal/g. If the point P is at a distance of λ x from the
The temperature of the wire is lowered by 200C. If ice end A, find the value of λ . [Neglect any heat loss to
transverse waves are set – up by plucking the string in the surrounding.] (2009)
the middle, calculate the frequency of the fundamental
mode of vibration. (2009)
Q.19. Column I shows four systems, each of the same
11
Given : Y steel = 2 ×10 N / m2
and length L, for producing standing waves. The lowest
possible natural frequency of a system is called its
αsteel = 1.21×10−5 / ο C. fundamental frequency, whose wavelength is denoted
as λ f . Match each system with statements given in
Q.15 When two progressive waves y1 = 4 sin (2x - 6t) column II describing the nature and wavelength of the
π standing waves. (2011)
and y2 = 3 sin 2x − 6t − are superimposed, the
2
amplitude of the resultant wave is: (2010) Column I Column II
(A) Pipe closed at one end (p) Longitudinal waves
(t) λ f =4L
PlancEssential Questions
JEE Main/Boards JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1 Exercise 1
Q. 5 Q. 17 Q. 22 Q. 2 Q.10 Q.12
Exercise 2 Exercise 2
Q.1 Q.4 Q.5 Q.1 Q.2 Q.4
Q.6 Q.10 Q.14 Q.9 Q.10
Q.21
Answer Key
Q. 7 250 Hz
1 1 . 4 8 | Waves on a String
Exercise 2
Single Correct Choice Type
Q.1 A Q.2 D Q. 3 A Q. 4 D Q. 5 C Q. 6 C
Q.7 C Q.8 B Q. 9 D Q. 10 A Q. 11 A Q. 12 C
Q.13 B Q.14 D Q.15 B Q.16 A Q. 17 B Q. 18 B
Q.19 B Q.20 C Q.21 B Q.22 C Q. 23 B Q.24 C
Q.25 B
JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1
1
Q. 1 (a) D,E,F, (b) A,B,H, (c) C,G, (d) A,E Q. 2 (a) λ=4m, f = Hz , 1 m/s
4
3π 3π2 3π
(b) mm / s, mm / s2 , (c) Q. 3 1.22 v
2 4 2
Q. 4 106.59 kW Q. 5 (a)
(b) 2 cm/s
1 2
Q.6 A1 =
− cm, A1 = cm Q. 7 0.2 cm
3 3
Q. 8 1 ×109 Nm–2 Q. 9 50Hz, 50π cm/sec
Q. 10 4 m, 24 m/s, 25/18 kg, 1/9 sec Q. 11 1.007%
Q. 12 (a) 144 cm; (b) 17.36 Hz Q. 13 2/3c
Exercise 2
Single Correct choice type
Q. 1 B Q. 2 D Q. 3 D Q. 4 B Q. 5 A Q. 6 C
Q. 7 A Q. 8 B
Comprehension Type
Q. 12 A, D Q.13 C Q.14 B, C Q.15 C, D
Solutions
Exercise 1 Sol 5:
1
1 1 f∝
Sol 1: (i) s≤T≤
30,000 40
f → 1 : 2: 3
350 350 1 1
(ii) m/s ≤ λ ≤ m/s →1: :
30000 40 2 3
(iii) 80π rads–1 ≤ ω ≤ 60000π rads–1 →6:3:2
Bridges must be placed at 60 cm from one end and 20
Sol 2: f = 15 × 106 Hz cm from another end
V 3 × 108 V V 20 0.04 20
l= = = 20 m Sol 6: – = ;V
f 15 × 106 =
2.04 2.08 6 2.04 × 2.05 6
V = 353. 6 ms–1
4 4
Sol 3: V’ = V= × 331 = 382.2 ms–1
3 3
Sol 7: On loading with wax frequency decreases
f – 256 = ± 6
Sol 4: (i) A = 0.25 × 10–3 cm
f = 256 ± 6 Hz
2π π
(ii) T = = s
500 250 f = 262 Hz
5 × 10 –3 1
Sol 18: m = =
0.72 144
Sol 12:
T = 60 N
t 60
V= = = 24 15 = 92.95 ms–1
µ 1/ 144
Sol 16:
Sol 21: ω, = 50 rads–1 CO2 = 5000 rads–1
a = 3 × 10–5 × (50)2 cms–2
a1 = 7.5 × 10–2 cms–2
a2 = 3 × 10–5 × (5000)2 cms–2
2 × 78.4 a2 = 750 cms–2
Time to reach water = = 45
9.8 a2 = 7.5 ms–2
78.4
Time for sound to reach top = = 0.23 s
332 Sol 22: y = (3.0 cm) sin [(3.14 cm–1)x – (314 s–1)t]
Total time = 4.23 s (a) Vmax. = 3.0 cm × 314 s–1 = 942 cm s–1
= 9.42 ms–1
P hysi cs | 11.51
a=0
T 10
Sol 4: (D) V = = = 100 ms–1
µ 0.001
Sol 23: f = 250 Hz
λ 1m
T= = 0.01 sec
(31+ h) = 100ms–1
2
3λ λ
(97 + h) = ⇒ 66 =
4 2 Sol 5: (C) V ∝ T1/2
λ = 132 cm T decreases linearly with height
V = fλ = 250 × 1.32 ms–1 ⇒ V = 330 ms–1 ∴ Parabolic curve
132
H= – 31 = 2 cm = 0.02 m
4
End Cross section
Radius of tube =
0.6
0.02 0.2 0.1
= = = = 0.033 m
0.6 6 3 Sol 6: (C)
V
Sol 24: –F=5
2
V
F– =5
2.1 T = V2M = 100 N; T = mg sin q
V V 1
– = 10 Mg = 100 N ; 100 = m × 10 ×
2 2.1 2
V = 420 ms–1 M = 10 kg, m = 20 kg
420 m
F=5+ = 205 Hz =2
2.1 M
Exercise 2 Amplitude = 5 cm
2 π A π π
Sol 1: (A) z = e–(x– vt + c) A sin 4k + = ⇒ 4k + =
3 2 3 6
c–V×0=2
2π π
c–V×1=–2 ⇒K= =
λ 24
V = + 4 m/s λ = 48 cm ; λ = 0.48 m
π 2π 2π
Sol 2: (D) y = – sin kx – ωt + Sol 9: (D) T = 0.04 sec; ω = = = 50p
6 T 0.04
ω 50π π
π V = 300 m/s, k = = =
⇒ y = sin ωt – kx – V 300 6
6
π
Dφ = ×6=p
6
1 1 . 5 2 | Waves on a String
V = – 3 m/s φ φ
y1+y2=2A cos 20 kx + cos ωt +
2 2
Sol 11: (A) Phase change of π due to reflection from φ
rigid wall. cos =0;φ=p
2
y2 = – A cos (kx + ωt)
Sol 12: (C) V1 → speed in light string
V2 → speed in heavy string L
Sol 18: (B) (n + 1) =
2d
V1
V2 = L = (n + 1)d
2
1
V2 2
Ar = A= 6 mm = 2 mm
V1 + V2 1
1+
2
y= (2mm) sin (kx – wt)
y = (2mm) sin(40x – 5t)
Sol 19: (B)
Sol 13: (B) For a given string Power ∝ A2
T = Y αDTA
2
1
Power reflected = P = P/9 v v 1 T
3 f∝ ; =
22 µ
8P
Power transmitted = 1/2
9 1 T
f∝
∴ 89% power transmitted r2 µ
1/2
1/2
Sol 14: (D) By superposition 1 yα∆TA 1 yα∆T
∝ ; ∝
2 m 2 ρ
A
20
Sol 20: (C) y = A sin πx cos(1000 pt)
3
Sol 15: (B) = 1m f = 300 Hz 20π 1
sin x =
3 v 2 3 2
λ = ; f = ; λ = ; v = fl
2 3
20x π 1
2 = ; x= m
v = 300 × × 1 = 200 m/s 3 6 40
3
1
Distance = 2x = m = 5 cm
20
Sol 16: (A) y1 = 5 sin (ωt – kx)
y2 = – 5 cos(ωt – kx – 150°) Sol 21: (B) = 0.4 m, m = 10–2 kg, T = 1.6 N
y1+ y2 = 5(sin(ωt – kx) – sin(ωt – kx – 60°)) 10 –2
µ= = 2.5 × 10–2 kg/m
= 10 (sin30° cos(ωt – kx – 30°)) 0.4
T = 0.1 s
P hysi cs | 11.53
Vwave =
2πf
= fl Sol 6: (D) Fundamental frequency is given by
2π / λ
1 T
V= (with both the ends fixed)
2pfA = 4fl 2 µ
πA ∴Fundamental frequency
λ=
2 1
V∝ (for same tension in both strings)
µ
Where µ = mass per unit length of wire
Previous Years’ Questions = ρ.A (ρ = density)
coefficient of t 1
Sol 1: (B) We velocity v = =
2πf =ρ(pr2) or µ ∝r∴v∝
coefficient of x 2π / λ r
= lf V1 r 2 r 2L
∴ = 2 = = 1
Maximum particle velocity vpm = ωA = 2pfy0 V2
r1 1 2r L
Given, Vpm = 4V or 2pf y0 = 4lf
πy 0 Sol 7: (C) Energy E ∝ (amplitude)2 (frequency)2
\λ =
2 Amplitude (A) is same in both the cases, but frequency
2ω in the second case is two times the frequency (ω) in
Sol 2: (C) For a stationary wave to form, two indentical the first case
waves should travel in opposite direction. Further at x Therefore, E2 = 4E1
= 0, resultant y (from both the waves) should be zero
at all instant.
Sol 8: (B) After two seconds both the pulses will move
4 cm towards each other. So by their superposition,
Sol 3: (B) The given equation can be written as the resultant displacement at every point will be zero.
t Therefore total energy will be purely in the form of
y = 2(2cos2 2 )sin (1000 t)
kinetic. Half of the particles will be moving upwards
and half downwards.
y = 2 (cos t + 1)sin (1000 t)
= 2cos t sin 1000 t + 2 sin (1000 t)
1 1 . 5 4 | Waves on a String
Where νp =320m/s is the velocity of sound in the pipe 10px = π, 2π, 3π etc.
and Lp=0.8m is length of the pipe. For string of mass m, ⇒ x = 0.1m, 0.2, 0.3 m option (b)
length Ls and having tension T, velocity of the string is Speed of the wave is given by,
given by, ω 50π
v= = = 5 m/s option (c)
k 10π
νs T / (m / LS ) T 50 10
v=
s = = = = Wavelength is given by,
λs Ls mLs m(0.5 m
2π 2π 1
λ= = = m = 0.2 m
At resonance νp = νs substitute νp and νs from first
k 10π 5
and second equation to get m= 0.01kg=10 gram.
Sol 16: (B, C) Since, the edges are clamped,
displacement of the edges u(x, y) = 0 for
Sol 12: (A, C) options satisfy the condition;
∂2 y ∂2 y
= (constant)
∂x2 ∂t2
P hysi cs | 11.55
x t
=y A cos − 2π
λ T
2π/λ = α and 2π/T = β
α = 2π/0.08 = 25.00 π
β=π
Line, OA i.e., y = 0; 0 ≤ x ≤ L
ω2 (2π / 0.004)2
AB i.e., x = L; 0 ≤ y ≤ L Sol 21: (D) T =µv 2 =µ =0.04 =6.25N
k2 (2π / 0.50)2
BC i.e., y = L; 0 ≤ x ≤ L
OC i.e., x = 0; 0 ≤ y ≤ L b
Sol 22: (A) y (x,t) = e− ( ax + bt)2 V =
a
The above conditions are satisfied only in alternatives
(B) and (C). Wave moving in − ve x –direction.
Note that u (x, y) = 0, for all four values eg, in alternative φ1 =0
(D), u(x, y) = 0 for y = 0, y = L but it is not zero for x = π
0 or x = L. Similarly, in option (A) u (x, y) = 0 at x = L, y Sol 23: (D) φ1 =0 ; φ2 =
2
= L but it is not zero for x = 0 or y = 0 while in option φ2 =
π
(B) and (C), u (x, y) = 0 for x = 0, y = 0, x = L and y = L. 2
Sol 24: (C) Energy of simple harmonic oscillator is
Sol 17: (A) Maximum speed of any point on the string constant.
= aω = a(2pf)
1 1
⇒ 1 Mω22 A122= 1 (m + M)ω22 A22
v 10
∴= = = 1 (Given: v = 10 m/s) ⇒ 2 Mω A1= 2 (m + M)ω A2
2 2
10 10 A122 M + m
A12 = M + m
1 A2 = M
\2paf = 1 ; f= A2 M
2πa
A1 M+m
a = 10–3 m (Given) ∴ A1 = M+m
∴ A2 = M
1 103 A2 M
\f = = Hz
2π × 10 –3 2π
v 1 T 1 T
Speed of wave v = f l Sol 25: (B)=
f = =
2 2 µ 2 Ad
103 –1
∴(10 m/s) = S λ ; λ = 2π × 10–2m T T Y∆ 1 y∆
2π Also,
= Y =
⇒ ⇒f
=
A∆ A 2 d
∆
Sol 18: (A, B) In case of sound wave, y can represent 1.5m, = 0.01,d
= = 7.7 × 103 kg / m3
pressure and displacement, while in case of an
electromagnetic wave it represents electric and y 2.2 × 1011N / m2
=
magnetic fields. After solving
Note: In general, y is general physical quantity which is
made to oscillate at one place and these oscillations are 2 1033
=f 2 × 10 Hz
propagated to other places also. =f 7 × 3 Hz
7
f ≈ 178.2Hz3
f ≈ 178.2Hz
Sol 19: (A) Standing waves can be produced only when
two similar type of waves (same frequency and speed,
∆L 0.1
but amplitude may be different) travel in oposite Sol 26: (B) Given =
L 20
directions.
1 1 . 5 6 | Waves on a String
90 1
=T 90 sec. = ∆T 1 sec. T
=T 100 sec. = ∆T 100 sec. T= λgx v= T = gx
T= λgx v= T =
λ gx
100
90 100
1 T= λgx v= λ = gx
=T∆T =901 sec. = ∆T 1 sec. 2
v 2 = gx λ
= ∆ T
TT = 100
90 1
90 sec.
= ∆T 100 1 sec. v 2 = gx
=T∆TT 100 90
1 sec.
= ∆T 100 sec. v =vdvgx g
10011 L 100 =a vdv= g
g∆TT= = 90 1 =a vdv= g
∆ T = 1 2 L2 =a = dx 2
gT= = 490 π T dx 2
41 π2 TL2 ∆L 1g 2 2
dx 4
gT=∆g90 1 L 2∆T = 1 g t2 ⇒= t 4= 2 2 sec
⇒
g =∆g4×1 2 2 = ∆L × 100 + 2∆T × 100
100% = 2 1g t ⇒ t
= 4g=
2 2 sec
g=g
π
L
T = 22 2
2 t ⇒= t g= 2 2 sec
⇒ 4×π100% T = L × 100 + T × 100
2 2
∆g g4 π2 T2 ∆LL 2∆TT 22 g
⇒
∆g ∆g × 100% =0.1 ∆L100× 100 + 21∆T × 100
⇒∆gg ∆×gg100% = =0.1
× 100%
20
+ 2+ 21∆
∆LL × 100 T T100=
× 100 2.72%
⇒ ×g100% = = L100
× 100% + 2+ 90
× 100 T 100 =
× 100 2.72%
∆gg g 20L
0.1 90
1T Sol 30: (C)
∆g × 100% = 0.1 100 + 2 1 100
100
= 2.72%
∆gg × 100% = 0.120 100 + 2 90 1 = 2.72%
g × 100% = 20 100 + 2 90 100 = 2.72%
g 20 90 2
2A 2
v ω A22
= − 2A 2
So, nearest option is 3%. v ω A2
= − 2A 3
v= ω A − 3
Aω 3
v = 5 Aω
Sol 27: (A) v = 5 A3ω
v= 5 3
v new
= 3v
=3 5Aω
v new
= 3v
= 5Aω
T = 2π v new
= 3v
= 5Aω
T = 2π g
g So the new amplitude is given by
+ ∆ Mg
TM = 2π + ∆ ∆ = Mg 2
TM = 2π g ∆ = AY 2A
g AY v new =ω Anew 2 − x2 ⇒ 5Aω =
ω Anew 2 −
3
7A
TM + ∆ Anew =
= 3
T
2
TM 2 ∆
T T
M 2 = 1 + ∆
= 1 + ∆ JEE Advanced/Boards
T
T = 1 +
M
T 2
T 2
TM
TM 2 == 1 1+
Mg
Mg
+ Mg
Exercise 1
T M
T = 1 + AY
AY
T 2 AY
TM 2 A
= 1 T
1
M 2 − 1 A Sol 1: (a) D, E, F
= 1
y TTM
− 1 Mg
A
y
= − 1 T Mg
y
T
Mg (b) A, B, H
(c) C, G
Sol 28: (B) K.E. is maximum at mean position, whereas (d) A, E
P.E. is minimum.
At extreme position, K.E. is minimum and P.E. is
maximum.
3 80 3
f= = × 20 = 50 Hz
2 × 0.6 0.2 1.2
Sol 5: Vmax = 2pfA
= 2π × 50 × 0.5 cms–1 = 50π cms–1
Vp = – 2 cm/s π 2π 2π
k= λ= = =4m
2 k π/2
–ve sign represents particle moving down
(a) Second harmonic
T = 200 N 12π
(b) V = = 24 ms–1
π/2
200 200 T200
VA= =10m/s VB= =5m/s (c) µ = =
2 8 V 24
2 × 24
VB VA
200
mass = µ × = × 4 = 1.39 kg
Ar = – A; AT = A 24 × 24
VA + VB VA + VB
3
(d) f = × 24 = 9 Hz
8
1 1 . 5 8 | Waves on a String
T=
1
;T=
1
sec Exercise 2
f 9
Single Correct Choice Type
T' 200
Sol 11: f=
T 199 Sol 1: (B) y = 20 sin 2π(100t) cos(2π(0.02x))
2
T' 200 Amax. = 20 units
=
T 199 2π
= 2π(0.02)
T’ = 1.01007 λ
DT = T’ – T = 0.01007 λ = 50 units
T
V=
µ
1000
V= 8 × 64 × × 5 = 32 m / s
100
1 Aρg
\v = …(i)
2
µ
When the object is half immersed in water
V
T’ = mg – upthrust = Vrg – ρw g
2
1 1 . 6 0 | Waves on a String
(a) (b)
Value of y is again 0.16 m, i.e., pulse has traveled a
1 distance of 1.25 m in 1 s in negative x-direction or we
Note: for a line source I ∝
r can say that the speed of pulse is 1.25 m/s and it is
P traveling in negative x-direction. Therefore, it will travel
Because, I = a distance of 2.5 m in 2 s. The above statement can be
πr
better understood from figure (b)
Sol 10: (A) The shape of pulse at x = 0 t = 0 would be
as shown, in figure(a). Sol 11: Tension due to thermal stresses,
T = YA α . Dq
T
v=
µ
T YAα.∆θ Yα ∆θ
\v = = =
ρA ρA ρ
T
Now, v1 =
µ
1 1 . 6 2 | Waves on a String
m 2.5 × 10 –3 Sol 16: (B, C) y = 0.01 m sin (20 π x) cos 200 π t
\T = µv12 = v12 = (52)2 =27. 04 N
0.25
48.4
\v = = 22 m/s Sol 18:
0.1
x P (10 - )x
v 22
Fundamental frequency f0 = = = 11 Hz
2 2 × 1 o
0 C (ice)
o
400 C
o
100 C (steam)
Sol 15:
dmice dmvapour
=
Aeq = A12 + A22 + 2A1A2 cos φ dt dt
π 400kS 300kS
=
Aeq = 42 + 32 + 2(4)(3)cos λxLice (100 − λ )xL vapour
2
Aeq = 5 λ =9
Sol 19: A → p, t; B → p, s; C → q, s; D → q, r
2017-18 100 &
op kers
Class 11 T
By E ran culty
-JE Fa r
IIT enior emie .
S fP r es
o titut
Ins
PHYSICS
FOR JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
SECOND
EDITION
Exhaustive Theory
(Now Revised)
Formula Sheet
9000+ Problems
based on latest JEE pattern
PlancEssential
Questions recommended for revision
12. S O U N D WAV E S
1. INTRODUCTION
This chapter discusses the nature of sound waves. We will apply concepts learned in the chapter on waves on a
string are applied to understand the phenomena related to sound waves. We will learn about what all parameters
the speed of sound in a medium depends. Reflection, transmission and interference are important phenomena
associated with sound. The study of sound waves enables us to design musical instruments and auditoriums. We
will understand the properties of sound waves in air columns and the phenomena of echo. Phenomena of beats
and doppler effect have been discussed.
Pressure
pressure in a medium due to the passage of a sound 0
Time
wave.
Note: "C" stands for compression and "R" stands for rarefaction
Figure 12.2
2.2 Wavelength
The wavelength of a wave is just the distance that a disturbance is carried Wavelength
along the medium when one wave cycle is completed. A longitudinal
wave typically consists of a repeating pattern of compressions and Crest Crest
rarefactions.
Hence, the wavelength is commonly measured either as the distance
from one compression point to the next adjacent compression or the
distance from one rarefaction point to the next adjacent rarefaction. Trough
Illustration 1: A wave of wavelength of 0.60 cm is produced in air and it travels at a speed of 300 ms–1. Will it be
audible? (JEE MAIN)
V
Sol: The frequency of the sound wave is given as nν =
= . The audible range is 20 Hz to 20 KHz.
λ
V
From the relation V = νλ , we calculate the frequency of the wave as nν =
=
λ
300 ms−1
= = 50000 Hz
0.60 × 10−2 m
This is clearly very much above the audible range. Therefore, it is an ultrasonic wave and hence will not be audible.
P hysi cs | 12.3
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
The human ear or an electronic detector responds to the pressure change and not the displacement in
a straightforward way.
Vaibhav Krishnan (JEE 2009, AIR 22)
Illustration 2: Suppose that a sound wave of wavelength 40 cm travels in air. If the difference between the maximum
and minimum pressures at a given a point is 1.0 × 10−3 Nm−2 , then find the amplitude of vibration of the particles of
the medium. The bulk modulus of air is 1.4 × 105 Nm−2 . (JEE MAIN)
Pmax − Pmin
Sol: The amplitude of pressure at a point is given by Po = . As the bulk modulus of the air is given, the
2
P0
amplitude of the vibration is given by S0 = where k is wave number.
Bk
1.0 × 10−3 Nm−2
The pressure amplitude is P0 = = 0.5 × 1.0 × 10−3 Nm−2
2
or =
s0
P0
= 0
Pλ
=
(
0.5 × 1.0 × 10−3 Nm−2 × 40 × 10−2 m ) 2.2 × 10−10 m.
Bk 2πB 2 × 3.14 × 1.4 × 105 Nm−2
Illustration 3: Assume that a wave is propagating on a long stretched string along its length taken as the positive
2
t x
x-axis. The wave equation is given
= as y y 0 exp − where y0 = 4 mm, T =1 s, and λ =4 cm. Now, (a) Find the
velocity of the wave. T λ
Sol: The wave moves having natural frequency of ν and wavelength λ has velocity V = νλ . As the frequency is
1 λ
ν = the velocity of the wave is then V = .
T T
1 x
2
(a) The wave equation may be written
= as y y 0 exp t −
T λ/T
λ 4cm
Comparing with the general equation, = y f ( t − x / v ) we see that ν= = / sec
T 1.0 s
2
(b) Substituting x = 0 in the given equation, we have f ( t ) = y 0 e ( )
− t/T
… (i)
2
(c) Substituting t = 0 in the given equation, we have g ( x ) = y 0 e ( )
− x/ λ
… (ii)
P hysi cs | 12.5
(d) (e)
Eadiabatic γP Cp
=v = ; because Eadiabatic = γ P and γ =
ρ ρ Cv
By substituting γ = 1.41 for air, density of air = 1.293 kg/m3, atmospheric pressure = 1.013 ×105 N / m2 , the velocity
of sound in air, v = 332 m/s. However, in general, the velocity of sound in solid is greater than the velocity of sound
in liquids and the velocity of sound in liquids is greater than the velocity of sound in gases.
Let us now suppose that air of density ρ is filled inside a tube of cross- vt
sectional area A under a pressure P. Initially, the air is at rest.
ut (I)
At t = 0, the piston at the left end of the tube (as shown in the Fig. 12.7) is
set to motion toward the right with a speed µ . After a time interval ∆t , all
(P+P)A PA
portions of the air to the left of section 1 are moving with speed u, whereas all
portions to the right of the section are at rest. Further, the boundary between
the moving and the stationary portion travels to the right with v, the speed
of the elastic wave (or sound wave). In the time interval ∆t , the piston has Figure 12.7
moved u ∆t and the elastic disturbance has moved across a distance of v t .
B
The mass of air that has attained a velocity u in time ∆t is taken as v = P ( ∆x ) A. Therefore, now the momentum
imparted is Pv ( ∆t ) A u and the net impulse = ( ∆PA ) .∆t . ρ
B
From (xv) and (xvi) v = .
P
Using the above result, the speed of sound in the gas is given by
= v P/ρ .
Laplace, however, suggested that the compression or rarefaction takes place too rapidly and the gas element
being compressed or rarefied is hardly left with enough time to exchange heat with the surroundings. It is hence
an adiabatic process and therefore one should use the equation PV γ = constant. Taking logarithms, in P+in V =
constant.
∆P ∆V ∆P
Now, by taking differentials, +γ =0 or B = − = γP
P V ∆V / V
γP
Thus, the speed of sound is v = .
ρ
Thus, the velocity of sound is directly proportional to the square root of the absolute temperature. If vt and v0
Vt Tt 273 + t
are velocities of sound at t0C and 0 0C, respectively, then = =
V0 T0 273
6. INTENSITY OF SOUND
Normally, the intensity of sound I at any point is the quantum of energy transmitted per second across a unit area
normal to the direction of propagation of sound waves. The intensity follows the pattern of an inverse square law
of distance, i.e., I ∝ 1 2 and I is proportional to the square of amplitude. Further, the level of intensity of sound
R
as perceived by humans is called loudness. Thus, the intensity level or loudness L is quantitatively measured as
compared to a minimum intensity of sound audible to human ear. Hence, the intensity level or loudness, measured
=s s0 sin ω (t − x/ v) and=
P P0 cos ω (t − x/ v) … (i)
Bωs0
where P0 =
v
1 2 . 8 | Sound Waves
Now, consider a cross section of area ‘A’ perpendicular to x-direction. The power W, transmitted by the wave across
δs Aω2s02B
the section considered is W = (PA ) = ; W AP0 cos ω ( t − x / v ) ωs0 cos ω ( t=
− x / v) cos2 ω ( t − x / v )
δt n
2 2
1 ω s0B 2π2B 2 2 P02u
The intensity ‘I’ is=thus I = s V .; I=
2 u u 0 2B
v P02
As B = Pv −2 , the intensity can also be written
= as I = P02 .
2pv 2 2pv
Loudness: Our ear is sensitive for an extremely large range of intensity. Therefore, a logarithmic rather than a linear
scale in this regard is convenient. Accordingly, the intensity level β of t = a sound wave is defined by the equation
I
β =10log Decibel , where I0 = 10 −12 W / m2 is the reference or threshold intensity level to which any intensity
I
0
I is compared.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Illustration 4: Assume that the pressure amplitude in a sound wave from a radio receiver is 2.0 × 10−2 Nm−2 and
the intensity at a point is 5.0 × 10−7 Wm−2 . If by turning the “volume” knob the pressure amplitude is increased to
2.5 × 10 −2 Nm−2 , then evaluate the intensity. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The intensity of the wave is proportional to square of the pressure amplitude of wave. If we increase the
pressure amplitude then the intensity of sound will accordingly.
The intensity is proportional to the square of the pressure amplitude.
2 2 2
I' P'0 P' 2.5 −7 −2 −7 −2
Thus, = I' 0
or = =I × 5.0 × 10 Wm = 7.8 × 10 Wm
I P P 2.0
0 0
7.2 Loudness
Loudness is that characteristic of a sound that is primarily a psychological correlate of physical strength (amplitude).
However, more formally it is defined as “that attribute of auditory sensation in terms of which sounds can be
ordered on a scale extending from quiet to loud.” Further, loudness is also affected by parameters other than sound
pressure, including frequency, bandwidth and duration.
Illustration 5: Suppose that a source emitting sound of frequency 180 Hz is placed in front of a wall at a distance
of 2 m from it. Further, a detector is also placed in front of the wall at the same distance from it. Find the minimum
distance between the source and the detector for which the detector detects a maximum loudness. Speed of sound
in air = 360 m/s. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: As there is a wall at a distance of 2 m from the source, the wave will reflect from the wall and interfere with the
wave directly from the source. If constructive interference takes place between the reflected wave and original wave
then the maximum loudness is heard. The condition of constrictive interference is ∆ = nλ .
The situation is visualized in the Fig. 12.8. Now, suppose that the detector is placed at a distance of x meter from
the sources. Then, the wave received from the source after reflection from the wall has travelled a distance of
1/2 1/2
x2
2 ( 2 ) + x 2 / 4
2
is ∆ 2 ( 2 ) + − x m.
2
m. Therefore, the difference between the two waves =
4
However, constructive interference will take place when ∆ = λ ,2λ . Thus, the minimum distance x for a maximum
loudness corresponds to ∆ = λ … (i)
u 360m / s −1
The wavelength is λ= = s = 2m S
ν 180
1/2
1/2 x2 x
Thus, by (i), 2 ( 2 ) + x2 / 4
2
−x =2 or, 4 + =1+ x
4 2
x2 x2
Or, 4 + =1 + +x or 3 = x.
4 4
Figure 12.8
Thus, condition here is that the detector should be placed at a distance of 3 m from the source.
Note, however, that there is no abrupt phase change.
a1 sin φ
where the resultant amplitude, R = a12 + a22 + 2a1a2 cos φ and phase angle θ =tan−1
a1 + a2 cos φ
When φ = 2πn where n = 0, 1, 2… it produces constructive interference which gives R = Rmax = a1+ a2 .
φ (2n + 1)π where n = 0, 1, 2…, R = Rmin = a1– a2 or amplitude is minimum due to destructive
However, when =
interference.
As intensity is proportional to the square of amplitude, the ratio of maximum intensity, Imax , to minimum intensity ,
( a1 + a2 )
2
Imax
Imin , is given by = .
Imin
( a1 − a2 )
2
2πx
where δ = k∆x = … (i)
λ
is the phase difference between two waves reaching P.
p02 sin δ
And tan ε =
p01 + p02 cos δ
The resultant amplitude is maximum when δ= 2nπ and minimum when = δ ( 2n + 1) π where n is an integer. These
are correspondingly the conditions for constructive and destructive interference:
δ= 2nπ constructive interference
=
δ ( 2n + 1) π destructive interference … (ii)
2π
Using Eq. (i), i.e., δ = ∆x , these conditions may be written in terms of the path difference as ∆x = nλ (constructive)
λ
or ∆x = (n + 1/ 2 ) λ (destructive) … (iii)
2π∆x
The phase difference between these waves, therefore, is δ =δ0 + k∆x =δ0 + .
λ
Illustration 6: Two sound waves, originating from the same source, travel along different paths in air and then
meet at a point. Now, if the source vibrates at frequency of 1.0 KHz and one path is 83 cm longer than the other,
what will be the nature of interference? The speed of sound in air is 33 ms–1 (JEE ADVANCED)
2π
Sol: The phase difference between the sound waves, is given by =
δ ∆x where λ is the wavelength of the wave
and ∆x is the path difference between the waves λ
u 332 ms−1
The wavelength of sound wave
= is λ = ; = 0.332 m
ν 1.0 × 103 Hz
The phase difference between the waves arriving at the point of observation is
2π 0.83m
δ= ∆x = 2π × = 2π × 2.5 = 5π
λ 0.332m
As this is an odd multiple of π, the waves interfere destructively.
9. REFLECTION OF SOUND
When there is discontinuity in the medium, sound waves obviously gets reflected. Therefore, when a sound wave
gets reflected from a rigid boundary, then the particles at the boundary are unable to vibrate. Thus, a reflected
wave is generated which interferes with the incoming wave to produce zero displacement at the boundary. At
these points, however, the pressure variation is maximum. Thus, a reflected pressure wave has the same phase as
the indicated wave.
Alternatively, a sound wave can also get reflected if it encounters a low pressure region. The reflected pressure
wave interferes destructively with the incoming waves in this case. Thus, there is a phase change of ∏ in this case.
along the string where the amplitude is zero is called a node and where the amplitude is maximum is called an
antinode.
2πvt 2πvt
For nodes: A =
2asin =0; ⇒ nπ where n = 0, 1, 2, 3,
=
λ λ
nλ λ
The relation x = gives the position of the nth node and the distance between successive nodes is .
2 2
2πvt 2πvt π
For antinodes, A = 2asin = 2a, = ( 2n − 1) where n = 1, 2, 3…
λ λ 2
λ 3λ 5λ
x
= ( 2n − 1) λ4 i.e., , , ,................
4 4 4
,
Such points are called antinodes with maximum amplitude of 2a .
λ
The distance between the successive nodes and antinodes is .
4
λ1 v
(a) =l ; λ=
1 2l ; n=
1
2 2l
A N A
1
2
Figure 12.10
For the first overtone or the second harmonic in the Fig. 12.11
v
(b) l = λ2 ; n2
n2 =
2
A N A N A
2
For the second overtone or the third harmonic mode in Fig. 12.12 Figure 12.11
3λ3 21 3v pv
=l ;=
λ3 ; or λ3 = ; for path harmonic, np =
2 3 2l 2l
A N A N A N A
33
2
Figure 12.12
P hysi cs | 12.13
However, since each loop corresponds to one-half wavelength, resonance occurs when the tube is nearly equal to
an odd number of quarter wavelength, i.e., L = λ / 4,L =
3λ / 4, L =
5λ / 4, etc
or in general, L = ( 2n + 1) λ / 4 ; =
λ 4L / ( 2n + 1) ; f=
n ( 2n + 1) v / 4L
Hence, an air column (tube) of length L has particular resonance frequencies and therefore will be in resonance with
the corresponding odd harmonic driving frequencies.
As we can observe from the above equation, the three experimental parameters involved in the resonance condition
of an air column are f, V, and L. However, to study the resonance in this experiment, the length L of an air column
will be varied for a given driven frequency. The length of the air column achieved by changing the position of the
movable piston in the tube is as seen in the Fig. 12.17.
Resonance tube
Movable piston
Further, as the piston is removed, increasing the length of the air column, more wavelength segments will fit into
the tube, consistent with the node–antinode requirements at the ends. Thus, the difference in the tube lengths
when successive antinodes are at the open end of the tube and resonance occurs is equal to a half wavelength; for
example: ∆L = L2 − L1 = 3λ / 4 − λ / 4 = λ / 2
Further, when an antinode is at the open end of the tube, a loud resonance tone is heard. Hence, the tube length
for antinodes to be at the open end of the tube can be determined by moving the piston away from the open
end of the tube and “listening” for resonances. However, no end correction is needed for the antinode occurring
slightly above the end of the tube since in this case, difference in tube lengths for successive antinodes is equal
to λ/2. Further, if we know the frequency of the driving source, then the wavelength is determined by measuring
difference in tube length between successive antinodes, ∆L =λ / 2 or λ = 2∆L , the speed of sound in air, vs = λf .
However, it should be noted that the length of the column is adjusted by moving the piston such that the gas
resonates and wavelength λ is obtained.
The speed of sound is given by ν = λv = 2∆l * v .
Further, if the frequency of the longitudinal vibration in the rod is not known, then the experiment is repeated with
air filled in the tube. Now, the length between the heaps of the powder, ∆l ′ is measured. The speed of sound in air
is then ν = 2∆l' v . … (i)
ν ∆l ∆l
Now, = or ν = ν'
ν ∆l' ∆l'
By calculating the speed of ν ’ of sound in air, we can find the speed of sound in the gas.
13. BEATS
It two sources of slightly different frequencies produce sound waves in the same direction at the same point, these
waves then superpose to produce alternate loud and feeble sounds. Such variations in loudness are called beats.
The number of times such a fluctuation in loudness from maxima to minima takes place per second is called the
beat frequency.
If two waves y1 = asin(2πn2 t) of respective frequencies n1 and n2 superpose at the same place
asin(2πn1t) and y 2 =
x = 0, then y = y1 + y=
2 a[sin(2πn1t) + (sin2πn2 t)]
2π (n1 − n2 ) t 2π (n1 + n2 ) t
∴y 2 acos × sin = 2 acos 2π (n1 − n2 ) t × sin 2π (n1 + n2 ) t
2 2
y A sin π (n1 + n2 ) t ;=
= A 2acos π (n1 − n2 ) t
n +n
The resultant wave is a harmonic wave with a frequency 1 2 but its amplitudes vary harmonically as a function
2
of the difference in the frequency n1 − n2 . The beat frequency nB is nB= n1 − n2 .
If n1 − n2 is small, i.e., the number of times the intensity of sound fluctuates between maxima and minima per
second is small, i.e., less than about 10 to 15, then the beats can be heard distinctly.
Illustration 7: Suppose that a string of length 25 cm and 2.5 g is under tension. A pipe closed at one end is 40 cm
long. When the string is set vibrating in its first overtone and the air in the pipe in its fundamental frequency, then
8 beats per second are heard. It is observed that decreasing the tension in the string decreases the beat frequency.
If the speed of sound in air is 320 m/s, then find the tension in the string (JEE ADVANCED)
1 T v
Sol: The fundamental frequency of the string and the closed organ pipe are νs = and νp = . When two
2 m 4
waves of equal amplitude and slightly different frequencies superimpose with each other, phenomenon called
beats take place. Number of beats n = ∆ν where ∆ν is the difference in the frequencies of superimposed waves.
1 T 1 T
Fundamental of the string=
νs = = 20 T
2 m 2 × 0.25 10−2
v 320
The fundamental frequency of a closed pipe νp= = = 200 Hz
4 4 × 0.40
Since on decreasing the tension, the beat frequency decreases, 2νs is definitely greater than νp
∴ 40 T − 200
= 8 or =
T 27.04N
Illustration 8: A sonometer wire of 100 cm in length has a fundamental frequency of 330 Hz. Find
(a) The velocity of propagation of transverse waves along the wire and
(b) The wavelength of the resulting sound in air if velocity of sound in air is 330 ms–1. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: As the wave travelling on the sonometer wire is the standing wave, the wavelength of the wire is λ =2L . And
the velocity of the wave is given by v = f λ = 2f L .
(a) In the case of transverse vibration of a string for fundamental mode: L =( λ / 2 ) ⇒ λ =2 L =2 × 1 ==2m
i.e., the wavelength of transverse wave propagating on the string is 2 m. Now, as the frequency of the wire is given
to be 330 Hz, so from v = f λ , the velocity of transverse wave along the wire will be v= 330 × 2= 660m / s
(b) Here, the vibrating wire will act as a source and produce sound, i.e., longitudinal waves in air: Now, as the
frequency does not change with change in medium so f = 330Hz, and as velocity in air is given to be = 330 m/s
v 330
so from relation v =f λ we get λair = air = =1m
f 330
i.e., for sound (longitudinal mechanical waves) in air produced by vibration of wire (body),
f = 330 s−1 , λair = 1 m and v = f × λ = 330m / s
v + v0
(d) When the observer is approaching a receding source, n' = n If the wind is
v + vs vS v0
blowing with a velocity ω in the direction of sound, then ω is added to ν and if the
Figure 12.23
wind is blowing with velocity ω opposite to direction of wind, then ω is subtracted
ν ± ω ν0
from ν . The general formula for the apparent frequency n′ due to Doppler effect is, n' = n
ν ± ω νs
Illustration 9: Assume that a siren emitting a sound of frequency 2000 Hz moves away from you toward a cliff at
a speed of 8 m/s.
(a) What is the frequency of the sound you hear coming directly from the siren?
(b) What is the frequency of sound you hear reflected off the cliff? Speed of sound in air is 330 m/s. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: As the siren being source is moving away from you the observer on cliff, the apparent frequency is given by
v
v + v . Where f0 is natural frequency of the sound wave. The intensity of the sound wave appears to be
f ' = f0
s
decreasing. When sound reflects from cliff it moves towards observer (cliff) and hence the frequency of the sound
v
wave is f ' = fo . When source moves towards the observer, the intensity of sound wave appears to be
v − vs
increasing.
(a) The frequency of sound heard directly is given by
v 330
=f1 f0
v+v
; v s 8m / s; ∴
= = f1 × 2000
s 330 + 8
(b) The frequency of the reflected sound is given by
v 330 330
f2 = f1 ; ∴ f2 = × 2000 ; f2 = × 2000 = 2050Hz.
v − vs 330 − 8 322
Illustration 10: Let us suppose that a sound detector is placed on a railway platform. A train, approaching the
platform at a speed of 36 km h–1, sounds its horn. The detector detects 12.0 kHz as the most dominant frequency
in the horn. If the train stops at the platform and sounds the horn, what would be the most dominant frequency
detected? The speed of sound in air is 340 ms–1. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: In the first case, when train is moving towards the stationary observer on the platform, the intensity of the
v
wave appears to be increasing. And the frequency is given by f ' = fo . In the second case both the train
v − vs
and the observer are stationary so we hear the natural frequency f0 of the sound wave.
Here, the observer (detector) is at rest with respect to the medium (air). Suppose that dominant frequency as
emitted by the train is v0. When the train is at rest at the platform, the detector will select the dominant frequency
as v0. When this same train was approaching the observer, then frequency detected would be
ν ν − us u
v=' v ; or v 0= v=' 1 − s v '
ν − us 0 ν ν
−1 36 × 103 m
The speed of the source
= is us 36kmh
= = 10ms−1
3600s
10
Thus v 0 =−
1 × 12.0kHz = 11.6kHz
340
1 2 . 1 8 | Sound Waves
Good concert halls: Good concert halls are so designed to eliminate unwanted reflection and echoes and
to optimize the quality of the sound perceived by the audience. This is accomplished by suitably engineering
the shape of the room and the walls, as well as to include sound-absorbing materials in areas that may cause
echoes.
Lecture hall: Similar consideration such as the one made in the above must be made particularly in a college
lecture hall, so that the professor can be heard by all of the students in the session. Although the sound quality
need not be as good as in a concert hall where music is being played, it still must be good enough to prevent
echoes and other things that will distort the audio quality of the speech delivered by the professor.
Work buildings: In an office building where there are cubicles with a divider in a large work area, there is often the
problem of noise from conversation and activities. However, in this case the quality of the sound is not an issue as
much as suppressing unwanted noise.
17.1 Echo
An echo (plural echoes) is a reflection of sound, arriving back at the listener particularly sometime after the direct
sound.
P hysi cs | 12.19
PROBLEM-SOLVING TACTICS
1. Most of the questions are naturally related with the concepts of wave on a string. Therefore, one must
be thorough with the concept of that particular topic. (E.g., standing waves formed in open pipe here are
analogous to string tied at both ends. Further, many of the cases can be related in the same way.)
2. Questions dealing with physical experiments form another set of questions. Therefore, one must be familiar
with usual as well as unusual (or specific) terminology of each experiment. Mostly, it happens that if we do not
know the term, then we are usually stuck (E.g., end correction is one term used with the resonance column
method, which is directly related with the radius of the tube.)
3. Path difference between two sources form another set of questions and this is the only place where some
mathematical complexity can be involved. Hence, one must take care of them.
4. Questions related to Doppler effect and beats are generally formulae specific; therefore, one must carefully
use the formulae. (It is, however, also advised that one must know about the derivation of these formulae.)
1 2 . 2 0 | Sound Waves
FORMULAE SHEET
Examples include sound waves travelling through an intervening medium, water waves,
light waves, etc.
2. Mechanical waves Waves requiring material medium for their propagation. These are basically governed by
Newton’s laws of motion.
Sound waves are mechanical waves in the atmosphere between source and the listener
and hence require medium for their propagation.
3. Non-mechanical These waves do not require material medium for their propagation.
waves
Examples include waves associated with light or light waves, radio waves, X-rays, micro
waves, UV light, visible light and many more.
4. Transverse These are waves in which the displacements or oscillations are perpendicular to the
direction of propagation of wave.
waves
5. Longitudinal These are those waves in which displacement or oscillations in medium are parallel to the
direction of propagation of wave, for example, sound waves.
waves
6. Equation of At any time t, displacement y of the particle from its equilibrium position as a function of
harmonic wave ( )
the coordinate x of the particle is y(x,y) = A sin ωt − kx where A is the amplitude of the
wave,
( )
And ωt − kx is the phase.
7. Wave number Wave length λ and wave number k are related by the relation k = 2n/λ.
8. Frequency
Wavelength λ and wave number k are related by the relation v = ω / k = λ / T = λf.
mass density of the string but not on frequency of the wave, i.e.,
= v T/µ .
11. Speed of a Speed of longitudinal waves in a medium is given by v =
longitudinal wave
B = bulk modulus; ρ = density of medium;
If u = π , then waves would be out of phase and their interference would be destructive.
14. Reflection of waves When a pulse or travelling wave encounters any boundary, it gets reflected. However, if
( )
an incident wave is represented by y i x,t ( )
= A sin ωt − kx , then the reflected wave at
( )
rigid boundary is yr x,t ( ) ( )
= A sin ωt + kx + n =−A sin ωt + kx and for reflection at
( )
open boundary, reflected waves is given by yr x,t
= A sin ωt + kx .( )
15. Standing wavesThe interference of two identical waves moving in opposite directions produces
standing waves. The particle displacement in a standing wave is given by
= y x,t ( ) ( ) ( )
2A cos kx sin ωt . In standing waves, amplitude of waves is different at
different points, i.e., at nodes, amplitude is zero and at antinodes, amplitude is maximum
which is equal to sum of amplitudes of constituting waves.
16. Normal modes of Frequency of transverse motion of stretched string of length L fixed at both the ends is
stretched string given by f = nv/2L where n = 1, 2, 3, 4. The set of frequencies given by the above relation
is called normal modes of oscillation of the system. Mode n = 1 is called the fundamental
mode with the frequency f1 = v/2L. Second harmonic is the oscillation mode with n = 2
and so on.
Thus, a string has infinite number of possible frequencies of vibration which are harmonics
of fundamental frequency f1 such that fn = nf1.
17. Beats Beats arise when two waves having slightly differing frequency V1 and V2 and comparable
amplitudes are superposed.
18. Doppler effect Doppler effect is a change in the observed frequency of the wave when the source S and
the observer O move relative to the medium.
There are three different ways where we can analyze this change in frequency as listed
hereunder.
V0 = source frequency
(2) observer is moving with a velocity V0 toward a source and the source is at rest is
V = V0(1+V0/V)
(3) both the source and observer are moving, then frequency observed by observer is
V = V0 (V+V0)/(V+VS) and all the symbols have respective meanings as discussed
earlier
1 2 . 2 2 | Sound Waves
Solved Examples
Sol: For the organ pipe closed at one end, the Speed of source, Vs = rω = 3 × 10 = 30 m/s
fundamental frequency of the wave of wavelength λ
Maximum velocity of detector v0 =Aω’
v
is given by, n0 = .The frequency of ith over tone is ν0 = A × 2πf ' = 6 × 2π × (5 / π ) = 60m / s
4L
given by ni = ( i + 1) × n0 where i=1,2,3…. etc. Actual frequency of source n = 340Hz
v The frequency recorded by the detector is maximum
=((a)
a) n0 =
4L
where n0 frequency of the
when both the source and detector travel along the
330 same direction.
fundamental ⇒
= n0 = 550Hz
4 × 0.15 6m 6m
(b) The first four overtones are 2n0, 3n0, 4n0 ,and 5 n0. So,
3m
the required frequencies are 1100, 2200, 3300, 4400, A B C D
and 5500 Hz.
v + v0 330 + 60
(c) the frequency of the nth overtone is (2n + 1)r nmax
= = n × 340
= 442Hz
v + vs 330 − 30
∴ ( 2n
= + 1) n0 20000;or ( 2n =
+ 1) 550 20000
The frequency recorded will be minimum when both
or n = 17.68 the source and detector are travelling in opposite
Or n = 17.18 the acceptable value is 17. directions.
v + v0 330 − 60
nmax
= = n × 340
= 255Hz
Example 4: The wavelength of the note emitted by a v + vs 330 + 30
tuning fork of frequency 512 Hz in air at 170 C is 66.6
cm. If the density of air at STP is 1.293 gram per liter,
calculate γ for air.
JEE Advanced/Boards
V 2p
Sol: The bulk modulus of gas γ is given by γ = .
Po Example 1: Two sources S1 and S2 separated by 2.0 m,
Here V is velocity of wave, and p is the pressure at a vibrate according to equation
point. And Po is the atmospheric pressure. = y1 0.03sin ( πt ) and
= y 2 0.02sin ( πt )
n= 512 Hz, = 66.6 cm ; ν = nλ Where y1, y2 and t are in M.K.S. units. They send out
ν2p waves of velocity 1.5m/s.
= 512 × 66.6
= 340.48 m / s ; =
γ
Po Calculate the amplitude of the resultant motion of the
1.013 105 Nm−2 ; p =
Po =× 1.293 kg / m3 .; particle collinear with S1 and S2 and located at a point.
(a) To the right of s2
(330 ) × 1.293
2
The frequency of first over tone of closed organ pipe is Let V1 and V2 be the speed of sound in the mixture and
hydrogen, respectively.
3v
n2 =
4l2 γP γP v ρ1
v1 = and v 2 = ;∴ 1 =
Fundamental frequency of closed organ pipe ρ1 ρ2 v2 ρ2
v v 330 v 2 1270
n
= ;=
∴ = = 110 = 4 2 or v=
= 1 = = 635 m / sec
4l2 4l2 4l2 2 2
330
=l2 = 0.75m Example 5: The difference between the apparent
4 × 110
frequency of a source as perceived by an observer
As beat frequency = 2.2 Hz during its approaching and recession is 2% of the
natural frequency of the source. Find the velocity of the
v 3v 330 3 × 330 source. Take the velocity of sound as 350 m/s.
= − ⇒ − 2.2
=
l1 4l2 l1 4 × 0.75
Sol: By the Doppler’s method use the formula for
330 apparent frequency in terms of source velocity to
∴ l=
1 = 0.993m ;
332.2 express the difference in two frequencies of approach
3v v and recession of the source in terms of its velocity.
Beat frequency = − = 2.2
4l2 l1
For the source approaching a stationary observer,
3 × 330 330 330 v
or − = 2.2 ; = 327.8 n' n
4 × 0.75 l1 l1 = ; As v >> v s ,
v − v s
l1 = 1.006 m. −1
1 v
n' n
= = n 1 − s
Example 4: The speed of sound in hydrogen is 1270 m/s. 1 − ( v s / v ) v
Calculate the speed of sound in the mixture of oxygen Vs
∴ n' n 1 + .....(i) …(i)
and hydrogen in which they are mixed in 1:4 ratio. V
V1ρ1 + V2ρ2 When the source is receding, then
Sol: The density of the mixture is given as ρ =
V1 + V2
V
1 n" ≅ n 1 − s ...........(ii) …(ii)
here V1:V2 =1:4. The speed of sound in gas is v ∝ . V
ρ
From Eqs. (i) and (ii)
Let V1 and V2 be respective volume of oxygen and
hydrogen. V V 2nv s
n′–n″= 1 + s − 1 − s =
Let d1, m1 be density and mass of oxygen in the mixture V V v
and d2 m2 be density and mass of hydrogen in the
mixture, respectively. n'− n" 2νs
Or =
n ν
Total mass V ρ + V2ρ2 2ν
=∴ ρ = 1 1 Percentage change in frequency = s × 100 =
2
total volume V1 + V2 ν
2nνs
V2ρ2 ( V1ρ1 / V2ρ2 + 1 ) d2 ( V1ρ1 / V2ρ2 + 1 ) Or νs =3.5 m / s ; × 100 =
2
= ν
V2 ( V1 / V2 + 1 ) ( V1 / V2 + 1)
1 2 . 2 6 | Sound Waves
Example 6: A whistle emitting a sound of frequency (b) The distance from the hill at which the echo from
440 Hz is tied to a string of 1.5 m length and rotates the hill is heard by the driver and its frequency (velocity
with an angular velocity of 20 rad/s in the horizontal of sound in air 1,200 km/hr.)
plane. Calculate the range of frequency heard by an Hill
observer stationed at a large distance from the whistle.
(1-x) x
A
v
B B’
r 1km
Sol: As train is moving towards the stationary observer
v on the hill. And the wind is in direction of the motion
B of train, the frequency of the sound waves from horn
v'
Sol: As the whistle is moved in the circle in horizontal heard to the observer on hill is given by n' = n
plane, it sometimes moves away and sometimes v '− v s
towards the stationary observer. Thus the observer will where v’ = v+w (sum of velocities of train and train).
v When this sound wave reflects from the hill, and travels
hear the minimum frequency of nmin = n when towards the moving train, the frequency heard by the
v + vs
v − w + v
whistle is moving away from him. The observer will driver is n' = n s
.
( v − w )
v
hear maximum frequency of nmax = n when
v − vs (a) The apparent frequency is given by
the whistle is moving towards him.
v+w
Velocity of source = v s = rω =1.5 × 20=30 m/s n' = n
( v + w ) − v s
Frequency n= 440 Hz..
V = 1200 km/hr., w = 40 km/hr., v s = 40 km/hr. and n
And speed of sound, v = 330 m/s, the maximum = 580 Hz.
frequency nmax will correspond to a position when
source is approaching the observer 1200 + 40
= ∴ n' 580 = 599.3Hz
v (1200 + 40 ) − 40
330
nmax n=
= 440
v − v s 330 − 30 (b) As shown in the figure, let the driver hear the echo
when he is at a distance x km from the hill. Time taken
440 × 330 by the train to reach the point B′
= = 484
300
The minimum frequency nmax will correspond = to a t =
(1 − x ) 1− x
hr;
position when source is receding the observer. velocity of train 40
Time taken by the train to reach the point B′
v 330
=
=n n=
nmin n=
min v 440 330
440 330 + 30 x x
vv + vs 330 + 30 t= = hr
+ v s velocity of sound − velocity of w ind 1200 − 40
440
440 × × 330
330
=
= = = 403Hz
403Hz 1− x x
360
360 = ; x = 0.966 km
40 1200 − 40
The range of frequency is from 403 Hz to 484 Hz. Frequency heard by driver.
1200 − 40 + 40
Example 7: A train approaching a hill at = a speed of 40 n' 580
= 600 Hz
km/hr. sounds its horn of frequency 580 Hz when it is (1200 − 40 )
at a distance of 1 km from the hill. A wind with a speed
of 40 km/hr is blowing in the direction of motion of the Example 8: A band playing music at frequency f is
train. Find moving toward a wall with velocity Vs. A motorist is
following the band with a speed of Vm. If V is speed
(a) The frequency of the horn as heard by the observer
of sound, obtain an expression for the beat frequency
on the hill,
heard by the motorist.
P hysi cs | 12.27
Sol: In this case, both the source and the observer v+0 v
moving with different speeds towards the wall so = fw f= f
the frequency of sound heard by motorist is given as v + v s v − v b
v + vm The frequency f″ reaching the motorist is given by
f ' = f0 .
v + v
s
While the sound reflected from the wall is moving v + vm v v + vm
= f '' fw = f
towards the motorist. Hence the frequency heard by v − v b v
v+0
v + vm
the motorist will be f '' = fw . These two waves v + vm
v =f ∴ Beat frequency = f "− f ' =f
v − v b
superimpose with each other to create beats and
number of beats heard is given by n= f " − f ' .
v + vm v + vm
The frequency, f, of band heard by the motorist directly = ∴ f f −f ;
v − v b v + vb
is given by
v+v
v + vm =f ( m )( v + v b ) − ( v + v m )( v + v b )
f' = f
v + v s
( )
v 2 − v b2
v+v
The frequency fw reaching the wall is
= f
( m )( 2vb )
( )
v 2 − v b2
JEE Main/Boards
Q.2 A sonometer wire has a total length of 1 m between (A) 25 lb (B) 5 lb (C) 20 db (D) 40 lb
the fixed ends. Two wooden bridges are placed below
the wire at a distance 1/7m from one end and 4/7m Q.9 A source of sound S and a detector D are placed
from the other end. The three segments of the wire at some distance from one another. A big cardboard is
have their fundamental frequencies in the ratio: placed near the detector and perpendicular to the line
(A) 1: 2: 3 (B) 4: 2: 1 SD as shown in figure. It is gradually moved away and it
is shown that the intensity change from a maximum to
(C) 1: 1/2: 1/3 (D) 1: 1: 1 a minimum as the board is moved through a distance of
20cm. What will be the frequency of the sound emitted.
Q.3 A person can hear frequencies only up to 10 kHz. Velocity of sound in air is 336 ms-1.
A steel piano wire 50 cm long of mass 5 g is stretched
with a tension of 400 N. The number of the highest
overtone of the sound produced by this piano wire that S D
the person can hear is
(A) 420 Hz (B) 422 Hz (C) 450 Hz (D) 410 Hz
(A) 4 (B) 50 (C) 49 (D) 51
Q.12 The first overtone frequency of a closed organ overtone (third harmonic) of an air column of length
pipe p1 is equal to the fundamental frequency of an 75 cm inside a tube closed at one end. The string also
open organ pipe p2. If the length of the pipe p1 is 30cm. generates 4 beats/s when excited along with a tuning
What will be the length of p2? fork of frequency n. Now when the tension of the string
is slightly increased, the number of beats reduces to 2
(A) 12 cm (B) 24 cm (C) 20 cm (D) 38 cm
per second. Assuming the velocity of sound in air to
be 340 m/s, the frequency n of the tuning fork in Hz is
(2008)
Previous Years’ Questions (A) 344 (B) 336
(C) 117.3 (D) 109.3
Q.1 A siren placed at a railway platform is emitting
sound of frequency 5 kHz. A passenger sitting in a Q.6 A police car with a siren of frequency 8 kHz is
moving train A records a frequency of 5.5kHz, while the moving with uniform velocity 36 km/h toward a tall
train approaches the siren. During his return journey building which reflects the sound waves. The speed of
in a different train B, he records a frequency of 6.0 kHz sound in air is 320m/s. The frequency of the siren by
while approaching the same siren. The ratio of the train the car driver is (2011)
B to that of train A is (2002)
(A) 8.50 kHz (B) 8.25 kHz
(A) 242/252 (B) 2
(C) 7.75 kHz (D) 7.50 kHz
(C) 5/6 (D) 11/6
Q.4 A source of sound of frequency 600Hz is placed Q.10 A plane wave of sound travelling in air is incident
inside water. The speed of sound in water is 1500m/s upon a plane water surface. The angle of incidence is
and in air it is 300m/s. the frequency of sound recorded 600. Assuming Snell’s law to be valid for sound waves,
by an observer who is standing in air is (2004) it follows that the sound wave will be refracted into
water away from the normal. State whether true or false
(A) 200Hz (B) 3000Hz (1984)
(C) 120 Hz (D) 600 Hz
Q.11 A source of sound wave with frequency 256 Hz
Q.5 A vibrating string of certain length l under a tension is moving with a velocity ν towards a wall and an
T resonates with a mode corresponding to the first observer is stationary between the source and the wall.
1 2 . 3 0 | Sound Waves
When the observer is between the source and the wall, Q15. A cylindrical tube, open at both ends, has a
he will hear beats. State whether true or false (1985) fundamental frequency, f, in air. The tube is dipped
vertically in water so that half of it is in water. The
Q.12. While measuring the speed of sound by fundamental frequency of the air-column is now
performing a resonance column experiment, a student (2012)
gets the first resonance condition at a column length f 3f
(A) f (B) (C) (D) 2f
of 18 cm during winter. Repeating the same experiment 2 4
during summer, she measures the column length to be
x cm for the second resonance. Then (2008)
Q.16. An open glass tube is immersed in mercury in
(A) 18 > x (B) x >54 such a way that a length of 8 cm extends above the
mercury level. The open end of the tube is then closed
(C) 54 > x > 36 (D) 36 > x > 18
and sealed and the tube is raised vertically up by
additional 46 cm. What will be length of the air column
Q.13 A motor cycle starts from rest and accelerates above mercury in the tube now? (Atmospheric pressure
along a straight path at 2 m/s2. At the starting point of = 76 cm of Hg) (2014)
the motor cycle there is a stationary electric sire. How
(A) 16 cm (B) 22 cm
far has the motor cycle gone when the driver hears
the frequency of the siren at 94% of its value when the (C) 38 cm (D) 6 cm
motor cycle was at rest? (speed of sound = 330 ms-1).
(2009)
Q.17. A train is moving on a straight track with speed
(A) 49 m (B) 98 m 20 ms–1. It is blowing its whistle at the frequency of 1000
Hz. The percentage change in the frequency heard by a
(C) 147 m (D) 196 m
person standing near the track as the train passes him
is (speed of sound = 320 ms–1) close to : (2015)
Q14. Three sound waves of equal amplitudes have
(A) 6% (B) 12% (C) 18% (D) 24%
frequencies (v – 1), v, (v + 1). They superpose to give
beats. The number of beats produced per second will
be (2009) Q.18 A pipe open at both ends has fundamental
frequency f in air. The pipe is dipped vertically in water
(A) 4 (B) 3 (C) 2 (D) 1
so that half of it is in water. The fundamental frequency
of the air column is now : (2016)
3f f
(A) (B) 2f (C) f (D)
4 2
JEE Advanced/Boards
Intensity
constant.
Statement-II: In a stationary-wave system, displacement
nodes are pressure antinodes, and displacement
f1 f2 Frequency
antinodes are pressure nodes.
Q.4 The speed of sound of the whistle is
Q.8 Statement-I: The pitch of wind instruments rises (A) 340m/s for passengers in A and 310 m/s for
and that of string instruments falls as an orchestra passengers in B
warms up.
(B) 360m/s for passengers in A and 310 m/s for
Statement-II: When temperature rises, speed of sound passengers in B
increases but speed of wave in a string fixed at both
(C) 310 m/s for passengers in A and 360 m/s for
ends decreases.
passengers in B
(D) 340 m/s for passenger in both the trains.
Previous Years’ Questions Q.5 The distribution of the sound intensity of the
whistle as observed by the passenger in train A is best
Paragraph 1: represented by
Two plane harmonic sound waves are expressed by the
equations y1 ( =
x,t ) A cos ( πx − 100πt ) ;
Intensity
Intensity
(A) (B)
Intensity
f1 f2 Frequency f1 f2 Frequency
Q.2 What is the speed of the sound?
Q.6 The spread of frequency as observed by the
(A) 200 m/s (B) 180 m/s passenger in train B is
(C) 192 m/s (D) 96m/s (A) 310 Hz (B) 330 Hz (C) 350 Hz (D) 290 Hz
Q.3 At x=0, how many times is the amplitude of y1+y2 Q.7 Velocity of sound in air is 320m/s. A pipe closed at
zero in one second? one end has a length of 1m. Neglecting end corrections,
(A) 192 (B) 48 (C) 100 (D) 96 the air column in the pipe can resonate for sound of
frequency (1989)
(A) 80 Hz (B) 240 Hz (C) 320 Hz (D) 400 Hz
P hysi cs | 12.33
0.4 m
the right and is reflected from a large vertical plane
1.2 m
1.2 m
2.8 m
surface moving to left with a speed ν . The speed of
sound in medium is c. (1995)
(A) The number of waves striking the surface per
3.2 m
(c+ v)
2.4 m
second is f
1.6 m
c
0.8 m
c(c− v)
(B) The wavelength of reflected wave is
f(c+ v)
Q.9 A source of sound of frequency 256 Hz is moving Q.13 A stationary source is emitting sound at a fixed
rapidly towards a wall with a velocity of 5m/s. How frequency f0, which is reflected by two cars approaching
many beats per second will be heard by the observer the source. The difference between the frequencies of
on source itself if sound travels at a speed of 330 m/s? sound reflected from the cars is 1.2% of f0. What is the
(1981) difference in the speed of the cars (in km per hour) to
the nearest? The cars are moving at constant speeds
much smaller than the speed of sound which is 330ms-1.
Q.10 A source of sound is moving along a circular
(2010)
path of radius 3m with an angular velocity of 10 rad/s.
A sound detector located far away from the source is
executing linear simple harmonic motion along the Q.14 A police car with a siren of frequency 8 kHz is
line BD (see figure) with an amplitude BCD=6m. The moving with uniform velocity 36 km/hr towards a tall
frequency of an oscillation of the detector is 5/ π per building which reflects the sound waves. The speed
second. The source is at the point A when the detector of sound in air is 320 m/s. The frequency of the siren
is at the point B. If the source emits a continuous sound heard by the car driver is (2011)
wave of frequency 340 Hz, find the maximum and the (A) 8.50 kHz (B) 8.25 kHz
minimum frequencies recorded by the detector. (Speed
of sound=340 m/s) (1990) (C) 7.75 kHz (D) 7.50 kHZ
A B C D
the pipe. When this pulse reaches the other end of the
pipe, (2012)
Q.11 A 3.6 m long pipe resonates with a frequency (A) A high-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe,
212.5 Hz when water level is at a certain height in the if the other end of the pipe is open.
pipe. Find the heights of water level (from the bottom (B) A low-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, if
of the pipe) at which resonances occur. Neglect end the other end of the pipe is open.
correction. Now the pipe is filled to a height H(≈ 3.6
m). A small hole is drilled very close to its bottom and (C) A low-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe, if
water is allowed to leak. Obtain an expression for the the other end of the pipe is closed.
rate of fall of water level in the pipe as a function of H. (D) A high-pressure pulse starts travelling up the pipe,
If the radii of the pipe and the hole are 2 × 10–2 m and if the other end of the pipe is closed.
1 × 10–3 m respectively, calculate the time interval
between the occurrence of first two resonances. Speed
of sound in air is 340 m/s and g=10m/s2 (2000)
1 2 . 3 4 | Sound Waves
Q.16 A student is performing an experiment using a (C) The plot below represents schematically the
resonance column and a tuning fork of frequency 244 s-1. variation of beat frequency with time
He is told that the air in the tube has been replaced
by another gas (assume that the column remains filled v(t)
with the gas). If the minimum height at which resonance P
occurs is (0.350 ± 0.005)m, the gas in the tube is
Q
vQ
(Useful information: 167RT = 640 J mole
1/ 2
;
-1/ 2
Q.21 Two vehicles, each moving with speed u on the (C) If the wind blows from observer to the source, f2 <
same horizontal straight road, are approaching each f1.
other. Wind blows along the road with velocity w. One
(D) If the wind blows from the source to the observer
of these vehicles blows a whistle of frequency f1 . An
f2 < f1.
observer in the other vehicle hears the frequency of the
whistle to be f2 . The speed of sound in still air is V. The
correct statement(s) is (are) (2013) Q.22 Four harmonic waves of equal frequencies and
equal intensities I0 have phase angles 0, π /3, 2 π /3
(A) If the wind blows from the observer to the source, and π . When they are superposed, the intensity of the
f2 > f1. resulting wave is nI0. The value of n is (2015)
(B) If the wind blows from the source to the observer,
f2 > f1.
PlancEssential Questions
JEE Main/Boards JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1 Exercise 1
Q. 6 Q.7 Q.8 Q. 1 Q.6 Q.8
Q.12
Exercise 2 Exercise 2
Q. 1 Q.2 Q.3 Q.1 Q.2 Q.3
Q.12 Q.13 Q.14 Q.8 Q.14 Q.15
Q.19 Q.21 Q.16 Q.24 Q.26
Answer Key
JEE Main/Boards
Exercise 1
Q.1 382.2 ms-1 Q.2 (i) 0.25 ×10−3 cm (ii) π / 250 s (iii)500rad (iv)80π m (v) 0.125 cm/ s (iv)62.5cm / sec2
Q.3 353.6 ms-1
Q.4 (a) No wave (b) longitudinal waves (c) longitudinal (d) transverse or longitudinal or both (separately) (e)
combined longitudinal and transverse (ripples)
Q.5 The speed of sound in a perfectly rigid rod will be infinite
1 2 . 3 6 | Sound Waves
Q.6 4.2 s Q.7 1.32 km Q.8 330 ms-1, 0.02 m; 0.033 m Q.9 205 Hz
Exercise 2
JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1
π2 × 10−9
Q.1 W / m2 Q.2 2C/3 Q.3 30 dB, 10 10 µm
4
Q.4 6 Q.5 λ / 8 Q.6 1:1
Q.7 33 cm and 13.2 cm Q.8 345, 341 or 349 Hz Q.9 485 Hz
fr + fa
Q.10 11f/9 Q.11 Q.12 2.5 ms-1
2
Exercise 2
Q.7 D Q.8 A
Solutions
V
F– =5
2.1
1 2 . 3 8 | Sound Waves
10(
βA /10 )
10(
βB /10 )
⇒ IA / I=
0 ⇒ IB / I=
0
λ 2l 4l 2
IA rB2 50 102
= ⇒ 10( A B )
β β =
7λ ⇒ =
= IB rA 5
2
2
2 βA − βB
λ= ⇒ 2 ⇒ β=
= B 40 − 20
= 20dβ
7 10
λ ratio : 1 : 2 : 4
ν ratio : 4 : 2 : 1 Sol 9 (A) According to the given data
V=336m/s,
5 × 10 –3
Sol 3: (C) µ = = 0.01 λ / 4 =distance between maximum and minimum
0.5
intensity
T = 400 N
I
Sol 4: (D) 10 log 2 = 50
I1
Sol 10: (A) According to the data
I2 = I1 × 105
=λ 20cm,S
= 1S2 20cm,BD
= 20cm
Sol 5: (D) Here given S=80m x 2=160m. Let the detector is shifted to left for a distance x for
hearing the minimum sound.
V=320m/s
P hysi cs | 12.39
=
( 2n + 1) λ= λ 20
= = 10cm Sol 2: (A) Let f0 = frequency of tuning fork
2 2 2
5 9g
Then, f0 = (µ = mass per unit length of wire)
( 20 ) + (10 + x ) ( 20 ) + (10 − x )
2 2 2 2
⇒ − 10
= 2 µ
v 340
= 3 + 4 = 3 + 4 = 344 Hz
Previous Years’ Questions 4 4 × 0.75
v + v0 5
Sol 1: (B) Using the formula f’ = f Sol 6: (A) 36 km/h = 36× = 10 m/s
v 18
v + vA
we get, 5.5 = 5 ….. (i)
v
v + vB
and 6.0 = 5 ….. (ii)
v
Hence, v = speed of sound
vA = speed of train A
1 2 . 4 0 | Sound Waves
Apparent frequency of sound heard by car driver from a denser medium to rarer medium it refracts away
(observer) reflected from the building will be from the normal
v + v0 320 + 10
f’ = f = 8 = 8.5 kHz Sol 11: For reflected wave an image of source S’ can
v – vs 320 – 10 assumed as shown. Since, both S and S’ are approaching
towards observer, no beats will be heard
Sol 7: Wall will be a node (displacement). Therefore,
shortest distance from the wall at which air particles
have maximum amplitude of vibration (displacement
antinode) should be λ/4 S O S’
v 330
Here, λ = = = 0.5 m
f 660
0.5
∴ Desired distance is = 0.125 m
4
Wall
v T µ
Sol 8: Fundamental frequency f = =
2 2
Sol 12: (B)
or f ∝ T
1 γRT 1 γRT
f' w –F =n ⇒
= xn
= 4x M 4 M
f w ⇒x∝ T
Here, w = weight of mass and
F = upthrust Sol 13: (B) Motor cycle, u = 0, a = 2 m/s2
Observer is in motion and source is at rest.
w –F
f’ = f
w v − v0 94 330 − v 0
⇒
= n' n ⇒ = n n ⇒ 330 − v 0
Substituting the values, we have v + vs 100 330
330 × 94
(50.7)g – (0.0075)(103 )g =
f’ = 260 = 240 Hz 100
(50.7)g
94 × 33 33 × 6
⇒ v 0 = 330 − = m/s
10 10
γRT v 2 − u2 9 × 33 × 33 9 × 1089
Sol 9: vsound = =s = = 98m
M 2a 100 100
vH γH / MH (7 / 5) / 2 42
2
= 2 2
= = Sol 14: (C) Maximum number of beats = ν + 1− (ν −1)
vHe γHe / MHe (5 / 3) / 4 25 =2
v v
Sol 10: Sound wave Sol 15: (A)
= f0 = , fC
2 2
γRT
(54-x) Sol 2: V =
P M
54 cm
8 cm
x RT C
=
M 3
2 4
γ=1+ =
6 3
C 4 C
ν= γ× = ×
3 3 3
Sol 17: (B)
2
ν= C
c 320 3
fbefore
= cros sing f0= 1000
c − vs 320 − 20 1
c Sol 3: For linear source, Intensity ∝
320 R
fafter
= f0= 1000
cros sing 1
c + vs 320 + 20 A∝
1/2
2cv R
s
∆f =f0
c2 − v 2 ∴ At 10R
s
∆f 2 × 320 × 20 I / 10
× 100% = × 100
= 12.54% ≈ 12% Loudness =10 log = 40 dB –10 dB
f 300 × 340 I0
Loudness = 30 dB
Sol 18: (C) Open organ pipe
0.01
Amplitude = cm = 10 10 mm
V 10
f= ...(i) …(i)
2
For closed organ pipe Sol 4: I’ = 4I
V V 4I
f'
= = = f Loudness = 10 log = 10(log 4 + L0)
2 I0
4
2 = 20 log 2 + L0= 6.010 + L0
= 6.010 + L0 = L0 + 6.01 dB
n = 6.01 dB
JEE Advanced/Boards
Sol 5: I = I1 + I2 + 2 I I cosf
12
Exercise 1
Here I1 = I2
B I = 2I1(1+ cos φ)
Sol 1: f = 250 Hz V = = 20 ms–1A = 10–8m
ρ
I0 = 4I1
ρ = 1 kg/m 3
I0/2 = 2I1 = 2I1(1 + cos φ)
B = 400 N/m2 π
cos φ = 0 ⇒ φ =
2
B ωS 0 400 × 2π × 250 × 10 –8
p0 = = (2∆x)
V 20 ⇒ φ = 2π
λ
p0 = 3.14 × 10–4 N/m2 π
×λ
λ
p20 ⇒ Dx = 2 =
I= = 2.467 × 10–9 W/m2 2π × 2 8
2ρV
Intensity = 2.467 × 10–9 W/m2
1 2 . 4 2 | Sound Waves
Vp ∴ fA > fB
Sol 6: =2
Vs fA = 485 Hz
3 3
V = V Sol 10:
4 p p 2 p s
p Vp
⇒ = =1
s 2Vs
(C + C / 10)
⇒ lp : ls = 1 : 1 fw = × f0
(C + C / 10) – C / 10
νA
Sol 7: 500 = fw = 11 f0
λ0
10
C C
Closed pipe: l0 =
330
= 2l1 C – +
10 10
500 fd = fw ×
C
l1 =
330
m = 0.33m C –
10
1000
10
l1 = 0.33 m = f
9 w
264
Open pipe: 4l2 = 10 11
500 = × f
9 10 0
l2 = 0.132 m
11
⇒ fd = f
9 0
Sol 8: fA = 350 Hz
C+ν
|fA – fB| = 5 Hz Sol 11: fa = f
C
|fB – fC| = 4 Hz
fr = C – ν f
After waxing C
| fA1 – fB| = 2Hz fa + fr
⇒f=
| fA1 – fc| = 6 Hz 2
fA > fB initially as on waxing fA decreases.
C + u C – u
fA – fB 5Hz ⇒ fB = 345 Hz Sol 12: f – = 10
C C
Case-I : FB > FC FB – FC = 4 Hz ⇒ fC = 341 Hz 2fu
= 10
fA1 = 347 Hz or 343 Hz C
5C 5 × 340
fC = 341 Hz u= ⇒u=
f 680
fA' = 347 Hz
⇒ u = 2.5 ms–1
fB = 345 Hz
fC = 341 Hz
Case-II : fC > fB Exercise 2
fC = 349 Hz
Single Correct Choice Type
fA' = 343 Hz
fB = 345 Hz Sol 1: (B) Let the length of the resonating column will
be=1
Sol 9: fB = 480 Hz Here V=320 m/s
|fB – fA| decreases on waxing Then the two successive resonance frequencies are
P hysi cs | 12.43
(n+ 1) v nv
and Sol 6: (A) Here given f=
s 16 × 103 Hz
4I 4I
(n+ 1) v nv
Here given = 2592; =
λ = 1944 f ' 20 × 103 Hz (greater than that
Apparent frequency =
4I 4I value)
(n+ 1) v nv
⇒ − = 2592 − 1944 Let the velocity of the observer =v0
4I 4I
= 548cm
= 25cm. Given vs=0. So,
330 + v 0 3
Sol 2: (A) Let, the piston resonates at length l1 and l2 20 × 10
= × 16 × 10
330 + 0
Here, l=32cm; v=?,n=512 Hz
Now ⇒ 512
= v/λ⇒=
v 512 × 0.64
= 328m / s 20 × 330 − 16 × 330 330
⇒
= v0 = m
= / s 297km / h
4 4
Sol 3: (C) We know that the frequency = f, T = temperatures
I1
f∝ T
I2
f1 T1 293 293 (I2-I1)
So = ; ⇒ =
f2 T2 f2 295
293 × 295
⇒ f2
= = 294 Hz
293 Assertion Reasoning Type
Sol 4: (A) A tuning fork produces 4 beats with a known Sol 7: (D) Closed end is displacement node. So, it must
tuning fork whose frequency =256 Hz be pressure antinode.
So the frequency of unknown tuning fork=either 256-
4=252 or 256+4=260 Hz Sol 8: (A) Statement-II explains statement-I
ω
Group I Group II Sol 2: (A) Speed of wave v =
k
Given V=350 V=350
100π 92π
or v = or = 200 m/s
0.5π 0.46π
= 32 × 10−2 m
λ1 =32cm λ2 = = 32.2 × 10−2 m
32.2cm
Sol 3: (C) At x = 0, y = y1 + y2 = 2A cos 96pt cos 4 pt
So η2 350 / 32 × 10−2=
= −2
= η2 350 / 32.2 × 10 = 1086
Frequency of cos (96 pt) function is 45 Hz and that of
1093 Hz Hz
cos (4pt) function is 2Hz.
So beat frequency =1093-1086=7 Hz. In one second, cos function becomes zero at 2f times,
where f is the frequency. Therefore, first function will
become zero at 96 times and the second at 4 times.
But second will not overlap with first. Hence, net y will
become zero 100 times in 1 s.
1 2 . 4 4 | Sound Waves
Sol 4: (B) vSA = 340 + 20 = 360 m/s Sol 9: Frequency heard by the observer due to S’
(reflected wave)
vSB = 340 – 30 = 310 m/s
v + v0
f’ = f
v – vs
330 + 5
= 256 = 263.87 Hz
330 – 5
Sol 5: (A) For the passengers in train A. There is no
relative motion between source and observer, as both
are moving with velocity 20 m/s. Therefore, there is no
S S’
change in observed frequencies and correspondingly 5 m/s
there is no change in their intensities. 5 m/s
v
Sol 7: (A, B, D) For closed pipe, f = n ; n = 1, 3,
5 …. 4
v 320
For n = 1, f1 = = = 80 Hz
4 4 ×1 Maximum frequency will be heard in the position
shown in figure. Since, the detector is far away from the
For n = 3, f3 = 3f1 = 240 Hz
source, we can use,
For n = 5, f5 = 5f1 = 400 Hz
v + v0
fmax = f
Sol 8: (A, B, C) Moving plane is like a moving observer. v – vs
Therefore, number of waves encountered by moving Here, v = speed of sound = 340 m/s
plane.
(given) vs = Rω = 30 m/s
v + v0 c+ v vo = ωA = 60 m/s
f1 = f = f
v c (340 + 60)
∴ fmax = 340 = 438.7 Hz
Frequency of reflected wave, (340 − 30)
f2 = f1 v = f c+ v
v–v
s c– v
v − v0 (340 − 60)
fmin = f = 340 =257.3 Hz
v + v s (340 + 30)
P hysi cs | 12.45
v –dH
= 212. 5 a 2gH = A
4 0 dt
v 340 ∴ Rate of fall of water level in the pipe,
or l0 = = = 0.4 m
4(212.5) 4(212.5)
–dH a
In closed pipe only odd harmonics are obtained. Now = 2gH
dt A
let l1, l2, l3, 4, etc., be the lengths corresponding to the
3rd harmonic, 4th harmonic, 7th harmonic etc. Then Substituting the values, we get
–dH 3.14 × 10 –6
0.4 m
= 2 × 10 × H
dt 1.26 × 10 –3
1.2 m
1.2 m
2.8 m
dH
or – = (1.11 × 10–2) H
dt
3.2 m
1.6 m
3.2 m to 2.4 m.
0.8 m
dH
∴ = – (1.11 × 10–2) dt
H
v
3 = 212. 5 ⇒ l1 = 1.2 m 2.4 1
dH
4 1 or ∫ = – (1.11 × 10–2) ∫ dt
3.2 H 0
v
5 = 212. 5 ⇒ l2 = 2.0 m
4 2 or 2[ 2.4 – 3.2 ] = – (1.11 × 10–2)t
v
and 7 = 212. 5 ⇒ l3 = 2.8 m or t = 43 s
4 3
Note: Rate of fall of level at a height h is
v
9 = 212. 5 ⇒ 4 = 3.6 m –dh a
4 4 = 2gh ∝ h
dt A
or heights of water level are (3.6 – 0.4) m, (3.6 – 1.2) m, i.e., rate decreases as the height of water (or any other
(3.6 – 2.0)m and (3.6 – 2.8)m. liquid) decreases in the tank. That is why, the time
∴ Heights of water level are 3.2 m, 2.4 m, 1.6 m and required to empty the first half of the tank is less than
0.8 m the time required to empty the rest half of the tank.
Let A and a be the area of cross-sections of the pipe v
and hole respectively. Then Sol 12: From the relation, f’ = f ,
v ± vs
A = π(2 × 10–2)2 = 1.26 × 10–3 m2
300
and a = π(10–3)2 = 3.14 × 10–6 m2 we have 2.2 = f …. (i)
300 – v T
300
and 1.8 = f ….. (ii)
300 + v T
Here, vT = vs = velocity of source/train
Solving Eqs. (i) and (ii), we get
vT = 30 m/s
1 2 . 4 6 | Sound Waves
Sol 13: Firstly, car will be treated as an observer which Sol 17: (A, B, D) Frequency of M received by car
is approaching the source. Then, it will be treated as a
source, which is moving in the direction of sound. V + V0 cos θ
f1 = 118
V
V + V0 cos θ
f2 = 121
V
v + v1
Hence, f1 = f0
v – v1 M (118 Hz)
v + v2
f2 = f0 v0=60 km
v – v2
1.2 v + v1 v + v 2
∴ f1 – f2 = f0 = f0 –
P Q R
100 v – v1 v – v 2
1800m 1800m
1.2 2v(v1 – v 2 )
or f0 = f
100 (v – v1 )(v – v 2 ) 0
M (118 Hz)
As v1 and v2 are very very less than v.
We can write, (v – v1) or (v – v2) ≈ v
No. of beats n = ∆f=f2 − f1
1.2 2(v1 – v 2 )
∴ f0 = f0 V + V0 cos θ
100 v n = 3
V
v × 1.2 330 × 1.2
or (v1 – v2) = = = 1.98 ms–1 V0
200 200 n= 3 1 + cos θ
V
= 7.128 kmh–1
As θ ↑, cos θ ↓, n ↓
∴ The nearest integer is 7
dn V
Rate of change of beat frequency = 3 0 ( − sin θ)
dθ V
320 320 + 10
Sol 14: =
(A) f × 8 × 103 × = 8.5kHz dn
320 − 10 320 is maximum when sinθ = 1; θ=90°
dθ
i.e. car is at point Q.
So 15: (B, D) At the open end, the phase of a pressure
wave changes by π radian due to reflection. At the V
νp= 3 1 + 0 cos θ
closed end, there is no change in the phase of a pressure V
wave due to reflection.
V0
νR= 3 1 − cos θ
V
1 γRT
Sol 16: (D) =
4v M At Q
No. of beats νQ =121-118 = 3
1 γRT
Calculations for for gases mentioned in ν + νR
4v M νQ =P
2
options A, B, C and D, work out to be 0.459 m, 0.363 m
0.340 m & 0.348 m respectively. As = (0.350 ± 0.005)
m; Hence correct option is D. Sol 18: (A, D) Larger the length of air column, feebler
is the intensity.
P hysi cs | 12.47
T
2
vS µ
=
4LP 2 S
10 gm
µ S =
V
=f
4( + e)
V V
⇒ + e= ⇒ = −e
4f 4f
336 × 102
So
= − 1.2 15.2cm
=
4 × 512
V + w +u
f2 = f1
V + w −u
When wind blows from observer towards source
V − w +u
f2 = f1
V − w −u
In both cases, f2 > f1.
PHYSICS
FOR JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
SECOND
EDITION
Exhaustive Theory
(Now Revised)
Formula Sheet
9000+ Problems
based on latest JEE pattern
1. INTRODUCTION
The kinetic theory of gases describes a gas as a large number of small particles (atoms or molecules), all of which
are in constant, random motion. The rapidly moving particles constantly collide with each other and with the walls
of the container. Kinetic theory explains macroscopic properties of gases, such as pressure, temperature, viscosity,
thermal conductivity and volume, by considering their molecular composition and motion. The theory postulates
that gas pressure is due to the impact of molecules or atoms moving at different velocities on the walls of a
container.
But here we will only find the dependency of pressure on velocity and of velocity on temperature.
2. ASSUMPTIONS OF KTG
(a) The collisions b/w gas molecules or between a molecule and the container are completely elastic.
(b) Mass of gas molecules is negligible. So, the effect of gravity and gravitational force on each other can be
neglected.
(c) Volume of molecules is considered to be negligible.
(d) Collision b/w molecules is governed by Newton’s Law of Motion (i.e. Net force = Change in momentum per
unit time)
(e) Interaction force b/w particles is negligible. (That is, they exert no forces on one another.)
(f) Molecules are considered to be in constant, random, and rapid motion. So, average velocity of particles in all
the 3-directions will be zero i.e. <vx> = <vy>=<vz>=0.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Figure 13.1
An overbar indicates an average quantity. In the expression for the average force per molecule
m v1x
2 2
+ v 2x 2
+ v 3x 2
+ vNx
for N molecules. F =
L
v2 + v2 + v2 + v2
but this can be related to the average: v 2x =
1x 2x 3x Nx
It is important to note that it is the average of the square of the velocity which is used, and that this is distinctly
different from the square of the average velocity. The average of the square of the velocity is referred as square of
root mean square speed.
mNv 2x
i.e. Vrms = v 2 ; and for N molecules: F =
L
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Why are the RMS velocities the same in all the directions? Practically, if we use some pressure measuring
device and use it from all directions, we would get the same value of pressure which indicates that RMS
velocities must be same in all directions because it is directly proportional to RMS velocity.
Chinmay S Purandare (JEE 2012 AIR 698)
Thus, v 2 = v 2x + v 2y + v 2z = 3v 2x ;
mNv 2
Now, average force from N molecules can be re-written as Faverage =
3L
Favg mNv 2 mNv 2 N
Then the pressure in a container can be expressed=
as P= = = mv 2
A 3LA 3V 3V
P hysi cs | 13.3
1 2 P
P= ρv ρ: density of gas molecules in the container; Therefore,Vrms
Vrms = 3
3 ρ
2N 1 2
Expressed in terms of average molecular kinetic energy: P = mv
3V 2
1 2 3
Thus, Average molecular kinetic energy is:
= KEavg = mv kT
2 2
3RT
Therefore, Vrms = ; Where Mm is the molecular weight of the gas.
Mm
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
3RT
In Vrms = , M is the molecular weight in Kg.
M
The temperature at which molecular speed becomes zero is called absolute zero i.e. 0 kelvin
Vaibhav Krishnan (JEE 2009 AIR 22)
Illustration 1: A tank used for filling helium balloons has a volume of 0.3m³ and contains 2.0 mol of helium gas at
20.0°C. Assuming that the helium behaves like an ideal gas.
(a) What is the total translational kinetic energy of the molecules of the gas?
(b) What is the average kinetic energy per molecule? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Formula for total kinetic energy and kinetic energy per molecule is used.
3
(a) Using (KE)Trans = nRT
2
3
With n = 2.0 mol and T = 293 K, we find that (KE)Trans = (2.0)(8.31)(293) = 7.3 x 10³ J
2
3
(b) The average kinetic energy per molecule is kT.
2
1 3 . 4 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
1 2
or=
2
mv
1 2
=
2
mv rms
3
2
3
2
( )
kT = 1.38x10−23 (293) = 6.07x10−21 J
Illustration 2: In a circle model of a rotation diatomic molecule of chlorine (Cl2), the two Cl atoms are 2.0 x 10-10 m
apart and rotate about their centre of mass with angular speed ω = 2.0 x 1012 rad/s. What is the rotational kinetic
energy of one molecule of Cl2, which has a molar mass of 70.0 g/mol? (JEE ADVANCED)
1 2
Sol: Rotational kinetic energy of each molecule= Iω
2 m m
Movement of inertia, I = 2 (mr²) = 2mr²
Cl Cl
70x10−3 2.0x10−10
Here m = 5.81x10−26 kg and
= = r = 1.0x10 −10 m
2x6.02x1023 2 r r
Figure 13.2
∴ I = 2(5.81) x10−26 (1.0 x10−10 )2 =1.16 x 10-45 kg-m²
1 2 1
∴ KR= Iω = x(1.16 x10−45 ) x(2.0 x1012 )2 = 2.32x10−21 J
2 2
1 1
Note: At T = 300 K, rotational K.E, should
= be equal to kT = x(1.38 x10−23 ) x(300) 2.07 x10−21 J
2 2
5. TYPES OF SPEED
There are generally three types of speed defined which are physically important:
It is the square root of the average of the square of velocities v 2 i.e. v rms = v 2
As has been derived in the previous section, the value of vrms can be derived from the following formula:
3kT 3RT 3P
v rms
= = =
m M ρ
8kT 8RT 8P
From the Maxwellian speed distribution law, we can show that
= v av = =
πm πm πρ
2kT 2RT 2P
v mp
= = =
m M ρ
P hysi cs | 13.5
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
The above quantities are easy to derive by some basic knowledge of calculus. However, only knowing
them is also fine and observe that
1. Vmps: Vrms: Vav:: 1: 1.224: 1.28
2. Vmps =<Vrms =< Vavg
Nivvedan (JEE 2009 AIR 113)
Illustration 3: Consider an 1100 particles gas system with speeds distribution as follows:
1000 particles each with speed 100 m/s; 2000 particles each with speed 200 m/s
4000 particles each with speed 300 m/s; 3000 particles each with speed 400 m/s and 1000 particles each with
speed 500 m/s Find the average speed, and rms speed. (JEE MAIN)
v rms 3
Note: Here ≠ as values and gas molecules are arbitrarily taken.
v av 8/π
Illustration 4: Find the rms speed of hydrogen molecules at room temperature (=300 K). (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Formula based
3RT 3x8.31x300
Mass of 1 mole of hydrogen gas = 2g = 2 x 10-3kg ⇒ v rms = = =1.93x10³m/s
M 2x10 −3
Illustration 5: Find the temperature at which oxygen molecules would have the same rms speed as of hydrogen
molecules at 300 K. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: Compare the Vrms of oxygen and hydrogen.
3RT 3R(300) Mo
If T be the corresponding temperature = = ⇒ T (300)
= 4800K
Mo MH MH
1 3 . 6 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
THERMODYNAMICS
1. INTRODUCTION
You would have certainly noticed the whistle of the process cooker in the kitchen. Have you ever thought of reason
for that? How small amount of water form large volume of vapours. Think of James Watt and his observation that
red to invention of steam engine !
2. GAS LAWS
The combined gas law: The volume of a given amount of gas is proportional to the ratio of its Kelvin temperature
and its pressure.
T
V∝ ; i.e. PV/T = C Therefore, P1 / V=
1 T=
1 P2 V2 / T2
P
P hysi cs | 13.7
As the pressure goes up, the temperature also goes up, and vice-versa.
The ideal gas law: On combining all the previous laws we get: PV = nRT
Where n: the number of moles and R: constant called the universal gas constant≈ 0.0821 L-atm / mol-K.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
For solving problems, it is not advisable to individually think over each and every case. Just remember
this overall equation. PV = nRT
Nitin Chandrol (JEE 2012 AIR 134)
Illustration 6: An air bubble starts rising from the bottom of a lake. Its diameter is 3.6 mm at the bottom and 4 mm
at the surface. The depth of the lake is 250 cm and the temperature at the surface is 40°C. What is the temperature
at the bottom of the lake? Given atmospheric pressure = 76 cm of Hg and g = 980 cm/s². (JEE MAIN)
P1V1 P2 V2
Sol: Amount of air is constant, hence = applicable.
T1 T2
4 3 4
At the bottom of the lake, volume of the bubble V1 = πr = π(0.18)3 cm3
3 1 3
Pressure on the bubble; P1 = atmospheric pressure + pressure due to a column on 250 cm of water = 76 x 13.6 x
980 + 250 x 1 x 980 = (76 x 13.6 +250) 980 dyne/cm²
4 3 4
At the surface of the lake, volume of the bubble V2 = πr = π(0.2)3 cm3
3 2 3
Pressure on the bubble; P2 = atmospheric pressure = (76 x 13.6 x 980) dyne/cm²
T2 = 273 + 40°C = 313° K
4 4
(76 x13.6 + 250)980 x π(0.18)3 (76 x13.6) x 980 π(0.2)3
PV P V
Now 1 1 = 2 2 or 3 = 3
T1 T2 T1 313
Illustration 7: P-V diagram of n moles of an ideal gas is as shown in figure. Find the maximum temperature
between A and B. (JEE ADVANCED)
dT d2 T
Sol: Find
= 0, < 0 for Tmax in T/V relation.
dV dV 2
Procedure: For given number of moles of a gas, T ∝ PV
Although (PV)A = (PV)B or TA = TB, still it is not an isothermal process. Because in isothermal process P-V graph is a
rectangular hyperbola while it is a straight line. So, to see the behaviour of temperature first we will find either T-V
equation or T-P equation and from that equation we can judge how the temperature varies. From the graph first
we will write P-V equation, then we will convert it either in T-V equation or in T-P equation.
From the graph the P-V equation can be written as,
P P
− 0 V + 3P0 (y = -mx + c) or
P= − 0 V 2 + 3P0 V
PV =
V V
0 0
1 3 . 8 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
P
P 2 1 P 2
= 3P0 V − 0
or nRT V (as PV = nRT) or
= T 3P0 V − 0 V
V nR V0
A
0 2P0
This is the required T-V equation. This is quadratic in V. Hence T-V graph is a parabola.
P0 B
Now, to find maximum or minimum value of T we can substitute.
V
dT 2P 3 V0 2V0
= 0 or 3P0 − 0 0 ; or V = V0
V =
dV V 2 Figure 13.3
0
d2 T 3
Further is negative at V = V
dV 2 2 0
3
Hence, T is maximum at V = V and this maximum value is,
2 0
3V P 3V
2
9P V
1
=Tmax (3P0 ) 0 − 0 0 ; or Tmax = 0 0
nR 2 V 2 4nR
0 Tmax
3. DEGREE OF FREEDOM (f )
Each independent mode by which a system can absorb energy (Kinetic + Potential) is called a degree of freedom.
It is the number of independent motions possible or number of independent coordinates to specify the dynamic
position of a body. A molecule can have translational K.E, rotational K.E and vibrational energy (potential, kinetic).
(a) Monatomic Gas: It has 3 degrees of freedom, since it can have translational motion in any direction in space.
It can rotate but due to its small moment of inertia, rotational energy is neglected. f = 3
(b) Diatomic gas and linear polyatomic gas: It has 5 degrees of freedom (3 translational + 2 Rotational). Since,
the moment of inertia about the axis joining the atoms is negligible, thus, it only has two rotational degrees
of freedom. In all, f = 5.
At high temperature, its degree of freedom increases by 2 due to the vibrational energy (1 kinetic + 1 potential
vibrational energy). Thus f = 7 at high temperature.
(c) Non-linear Polyatomic gas: It has 6 degrees of freedom (3 translational + 3 rotational). The one rotational
degree of freedom which was neglected above, can’t be neglected over here. Since, the moment of inertia
about any of the three axes is not tending to zero i.e. f = 6.
At high temperature, its degree of freedom increases by 2 due to Vibrational energy
(1 kinetic + 1 potential) Thus, f = 8.
(d) Solid: Solids don’t have any translational or rotational degrees of freedom. But at high temperature, it can
vibrate along 3 axes. Thus it has 2 degrees of freedom per axis (i.e. potential + kinetic vibrational energy).
Thus, at high temperature, solids have 6 degrees of freedom. i.e. f = 6
P hysi cs | 13.9
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
fmix = (n1f1 + n2f2+……………) / (n1+n2+……………) is the equation for effective ‘f’ for a mixture of gases.
•• Degrees of freedom of a diatomic and polyatomic gas depend on temperature and there is no
clear cut demarcation line above which vibrational energy becomes significant. Moreover, this
temperature varies from gas to gas. On the other hand for a monatomic gas, there is no such
confusion. Degree of freedom here is 3 at all temperatures. Unless and until stated in the question
you can take f = 3 for a monatomic gas, f = 5 for a diatomic gas and f = 6 for a non-linear
polyatomic gas.
•• When a diatomic or polyatomic gas dissociates into atoms it behaves as a monatomic gas, whose
degrees of freedom are changed accordingly.
B Rajiv Reddy (JEE 2012 AIR 11)
(b) Molar heat Capacity at constant Pressure CP : The amount of heat needed to raise the temperature of one
mole of a substance by one degree Celsius at constant pressure.
(c) Molar heat Capacity at constant Volume CV : The amount of heat needed to raise the temperature of one
mole of a substance by one degree Celsius at constant volume.
CP
=(i) γ Ratio
= of CP to C v ; γ is also referred to as the adiabatic constant.
Cv
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Illustration 8: Calculate the change in internal energy of 3.0 mol of helium gas when its temperature is increased
by 2.0 K. (JEE MAIN)
Illustration 9: A certain amount of an ideal gas passes from state A to B first by means of process 1, then by means
of process 2. In which of the process is the amount of heat absorbed by the gas greater? (JEE MAIN)
3 5 3
Monatomic 3 RT R R 1.67
2 2 2
Diatomic 5
5 7 5 1.4
RT R R
2 2 2
Polyatomic( ≥ 3 ) 6 3RT 4R 3R 1.33
P hysi cs | 13.13
Illustration 10: A cylindrical vessel of 28cm diameter contains 20g of nitrogen compressed by a piston supporting
a weight of 75kg. The temperature of the gas is 17°C. What work will the gas do, if it is heated to a temperature of
250°C? What amount of heat should be supplied? To what distance will the weight be raised? The process should
be assumed to be isobaric; the heating of the vessel and the external pressure are negligible. (JEE ADVANCED)
∆V nR∆T 1
h
= = ×
A P A
mg
P P0 +
=
A
Illustration 11: Three moles of an ideal gas being initially at a temperature T0 = 273K were isothermally expanded
η =5.0 time its initial volume and then isochorically heated so that the pressure in the final state became equal to
that in the initial state. The total amount of heat transferred to the gas during the process equals Q = 80 kJ. Find
the ratio γ =CP / CV for this gas. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: Try draw the process on P/V graph, during isothermal process, the change in internal energy is zero while in
R
isochoric process work dne is zero. Take C v = and proceed to find y.
y −1
Procedure:
(1) Find heat expression (Q1) given in isothermal process
(2) Find heat expression (Q2) given in isochoric process
1 3 . 1 4 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
2 / V1 ) nRT0 ln η
Q1 nRT0 ln(V=
= … (i)
=∴ η (V
=2 / V1 ) (P1 / P2 )
In isochoric process, Q2 =∆ U (W=0)
∴ Q=
2 T n{R / ( γ − 1)}∆T
nC v ∆= … (ii)
P2 T0 P
Now = or T = T0 1 = ηT0 … (iii)
P1 T P2
∴ ∆ T = η T0 − T0 = (η − l)T0
Substituting the value of ∆T from equation (iii) in equation (ii), we get
R R
=Q2 n (η − 1) T0 ; ∴
= Q nRT0 ln η + n (n − 1) T0
γ − 1 γ − 1
Q η − 1 η −1 η −1
or − ln η = ; or γ − 1 = ∴ γ=1 +
nRT0 γ −1 Q Q
− ln η − ln η
nRT0 nRT0
(5 − 1)
Substituting given values, we get γ = 1 + ; Solving, we get γ =1.4
80x102
− ln5
3x8.3x273
dv P dp V P
⇒ γ∫ ∫ = −Pf ∫ ; ⇒ γ ln f =ln i
V i P Vi Pf
γ
Pi Vf
⇒ = ; (say)
Pf Vi
∴ PV γ =
Const
P hysi cs | 13.15
The relation found above can be written in many different ways using ideal gas equation (PV=nRT)
TV γ−1 = constant ; T γP1−γ = constant
Vf Vf
k k
; ∴= ∫=
Pdv ∫ dv
γ
PV = Const = K ⇒ P = ∆W
V γ
Vi Vγ Vi
Pf Vf − PV
i i nR
∆W
⇒= = (T − T )
1− γ 1− γ f i
Illustration 12: An ideal monatomic gas at 300K expands adiabatically to twice its volume. What is the final
temperature? (JEE MAIN)
Illustration 13: An ideal gas having initial pressure P, volume V and temperature T is allowed to expand adiabatically
until its volume becomes 5.66 V while its temperature falls to T/2.
(a) How many degrees of freedom do the gas molecules have?
(b) Obtain the work done by the gas during the expansion as a function of the initial pressure P and volume V.
(JEE ADVANCED)
γ−1
T1 V
Sol: Apply T1V1γ−1 = T2 V2 γ−1 and hence = 2
T2 V1
nR T nRT nRT PV
=ω = − T = =
1− γ 2 2( γ − 1) 2 × 0.4 0.8
1 3 . 1 6 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
R R R
∆W = (Pf Vf − PV
i i ) / 1 − x = nR ∆ T/ 1 − x ; C =Cv + = +
1− x γ − 1 1− x
dP P
Slope of P-V diagram (also known as Indicator diagram) at any point is = −x
dV V
Illustration 14: An insulated container is divided into two equal portions. One portion contains an ideal gas at
pressure P and temperature T, while the other portion is a perfect vacuum. If a hole is opened between the two
portions, find the change in internal energy and temperature of the gas? (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: No opposing force, hence work done is zero. As the system is thermally insulated, ∆Q =
0
Further as here the gas is expanding against vacuum (surroundings) the process is called free expansion and for it,
∆W= ∫ Pdv = 0 [as for vacuum P = 0]
So in accordance with first law of thermodynamics, i.e. ∆Q = ∆U + ∆W , we have 0 =∆U + 0,
i.e. ∆U =0 or U = constant
P hysi cs | 13.17
So in this problem internal energy of the gas remains constant, i.e. ∆U = 0 . Now as for an ideal gas=
U 3 / 2 µRT ,
i.e. U ∝ T ; so temperature of the gas will also remain constant, i.e. ∆T =0
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
(a) A non-conducting container with no external source of heat energy will always undergo any change
adiabatically.
(b) A conducting (finitely conducting) container with no external source of heat energy will undergo
change:
(i) Isothermally if the process is slow
(ii) Adiabatically if the process is fast
(c) An infinitely conducting container with no external source of heat energy will always undergo any
change isothermally.
Yashwanth Sandupatla (JEE 2012 AIR 821)
1
Illustration 15: A gas undergoes a process such that P ∝ If the molar heat capacity for this process is
T
C= 33.24 J/mol-K, find the degree of freedom of the molecules of the gas. (JEE ADVANCED)
Q
Sol: Heat capacity = amount of heat required for per unit change of temperature. C =
∆T
1
As P ∝ or PT = constant .… (i)
T
We have for one mole an ideal gas PV=RT .… (ii)
From Eqs. (i) and (iii)
P²V = constant or PV1/2 = K (say) … (iii)
From first law of thermodynamics, ∆Q =∆U + W or C∆T = CV ∆T + W
W
or =
C CV + … (iv)
∆T
Vf
1/2 Pf Vf − PV R(Tf − Ti ) RT W
Here, ∆W
= ∫ PdV
= K ∫ V −= dv ; = i i
= ;∴ 2R
=
Vf
1 − (1/ 2) 1/ 2 1/ 2 ∆T
R
Substituting in Eq. (iv), we have C = C v + 2R = + 2R
γ −1
1 1
Substituting the values, 33.24
= R 2 8.31
+= + 2
γ − 1 γ − 1
2 2 2
Solving this we get γ =1.5 ; Now, γ = 1 + or degree of freedom =F = = 4
F γ − 1 1.5 − 1
R R
Alternate Solution: In process PVx =constant, molar heat capacity is given by=C +
γ − 1 1− x
1 R R R
The given process is PV1/2 = constant or x = ; ∴ C = + = + 2R
2 γ −1 1 γ −1
1−
2
Now, we may proceed in the similar manner.
1 3 . 1 8 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
Illustration 16: An ideal gas expands isothermally along AB and does 700 J of work. P
A
(a) How much heat does the gas exchange along AB?
B
(b) The gas then expands adiabatically along BC and does 400 J of work. When the gas
returns to A along CA, it exhausts 100J of heat to its surroundings. How much work is done C
on the gas along this path? (JEE MAIN)
V
Sol: Apply Q =∆U + W for the forces AB, BC & then CA separately. Remember ∆U is a state Figure 13.13
function.
(a) AB is an isothermal process. Hence, 0 and
∆UAB = Q
= AB W
=AB 700J
(b) BC is an adiabatic process. Hence, QBC = 0 ; WBC = 400J (given)
∴ ∆UBC = − WBC =
−400J
ABC is a cyclic process and internal energy is a state function. Therefore, ( ∆U)whole cycle = 0 = ∆UAB + ∆UBC + ∆UCA
and from first law of thermodynamics, Q AB + QBC + Q CA = WAB + WBC + WCA
Substituting the values, 700 + 0 − 100
= 700 + 400 + ∆WCA
∴ ∆WCA =
−500J
Negative sign implies that work is done on the gas.
W Q1 − Q 2 Q Heat released
η= = = 1 − 2 ; Thus, ∴ Efficiency(η) = 1 −
Q1 Q1 Q1 Heat absorbed
Illustration 17: The P-V diagram of 0.2 mol of a diatomic ideal gas is shown in figure. Process BC is adiabatic. The
value of γ for this gas is 1.4. (JEE ADVANCED)
(a) Find the pressure and volume at points A, B and C.
(b) Calculate ∆Q , ∆W and ∆U for each of the three processes.
P hysi cs | 13.19
TB 600
∴ PB =
= PA (1atm) 2atm = 2.02 x 10 N/m²
5
T
A 300
nRT
From ideal gas equation V =
P
nRTA (0.2)(8.31)(300)
∴ V=
=
A V=
B ≈ 5.0x10−3 m3 ; = 5 litre
PA (1.01x105 )
nRTC (0.2)(8.31)(455)
VC
= = = 7.6x10−3 m3 ≈ 7.6 litre
PC 5
(1.01x10 )
A 1 atm 5 lt
B 2 atm 5 lt
C 1 atm 7.6 lt
two isothermal and two adiabatic processes. It absorbs heat Q1 by expanding
isothermally at T1 along AB and then expands adiabatically along BC to Isothermal (T )
1
temperature T2. It is compressed isothermally at T2 rejecting heat Q2 along B
adiabatic
Pressure
CD and is compressed adiabatically along DA. Its efficiency η is given by:
T2 adiabatic
η = 1−
T1
(T2) D
C (T2)
Isothermal
Q2
Volume
Derivation of efficiency in Carnot engine: Figure 13.16
qin
I isothermal
P IV adiabatic T1=T2=T3 (High temperature)
II adiabatic
III isothermal
T3=T4=T1 (Low temperature)
qout
V
Figure 13.17: P-V diagram of the carnot cycle
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Try to prove that carnot engine is the most efficient one among all engines working in the same
temperature range. You will come across a nice use of the second law of thermodynamics!
GV Abhinav (JEE 2012 AIR 329)
Work, heat, ∆ U. and, ∆ H(ncp∆T) in the P-V diagram of the Carnot Cycle.
Process w q ∆U ∆H
V V
I −nRTh ln 2 nRTh ln 2 0 0
V1 V1
V V
III −nRTl ln 4 nRTl ln 4 0 0
V V
3 3
P hysi cs | 13.21
Process w q ∆U ∆H
V V V V
Cycle −nRTh ln 2 − nRTl ln 4 nRTh ln 2 + nRTl ln 4 0 0
V V
V1 3 V1 3
The efficiency of the Carnot engine is defined as the ratio of the energy output to the energy input.
V V
nRTh ln 2 + nRTl 4
V V
Net work done by heat engine − Wsys 1 3
Efficiency = = =
Heat absorbed by heat engine qh V2
nRTh ln
V1
C /R C /R
T2 V V3 T V V4
Since processes II (2-3) and IV (4-1) are adiabatic.
= = ,and 1
T3 V2 T4 V1
V3 V2
and since T1 = T2 and T3 = T4. =
V4 V1
V V2
nRThln 2 − nRTln
l
V
V1 1; Th − Tl
Therefore Efficiency = Efficiency= = 1 − Tl / Th
V2 Th
nRThln
V1
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
•• By the second law of thermodynamics we can say that, it is impossible to construct an engine,
operating in a cycle, which will extract heat from a source and convert the whole of it into work. It
implies that it is impossible to make heat flow from a colder body to a hotter body without the help
of an external agency or an engine from outside.
•• That efficiency of Carnot engine is maximum (not 100%) for given temperatures T1 and T2. But still
Carnot is not a practical engine because many ideal situations have been assumed while designing
this engine which can practically not be obtained.
Anurag Saraf (JEE 2011 AIR 226)
Illustration 18: Carnot’s engine takes in a thousand kilo calories of heat from a reservoir at 827°C and exhausts it
to a sink at 27°C. How much work does it perform? What is the efficiency of the engine? (JEE MAIN)
Q1 − Q 2 Q2 T2 Q2 T2
Sol: η = = 1− and for cannot cycle η = 1 − , hence =
Q1 Q1 T1 Q1 T1
Given, Q1 = 106 Cal T1 = (827 + 273) = 1100K and T2 =(27 + 273) =300K
Q2 T2 T2 300 6
as, = Q2
∴ = = Q (10 ) = 2.72 x 10 cal
5
Q1 T1 T1 1 1100
1 3 . 2 2 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
T 300
Efficiency of the cycle, η= 1 − 2 x100 or η= 1 − x100 = 72.72%
T1 1100
PROBLEM-SOLVING TACTICS
(a) Most of the problems of Tmax, Pmax and Vmax are solved by differentiating. Sometimes the graph will be given
and sometimes, the equation will be given. For problems of finding Pmax , you will require either the P-V or
P-T equation.
(b) From the sections of thermodynamic, graphical questions are usually asked so one must have a thorough
understanding of PV diagrams at least. It is generally advised to convert other graphs namely TV and PT graph
to PV graph before solving to visualize it easily. Also in many cases we can directly get asked quantities like
work done because it involves integration of area under the PV graph.
(c) Silly mistakes must be avoided because there is not much variety in problems and not so much to think.
Remember the following points:-
(i) Be very careful in signs of Q and W while solving questions of thermodynamics.
(ii) Be careful in noting the type of gas used in question whether it is monatomic or diatomic.
(iii) Be careful with units of given quantities and asked quantities.
(iv) You can list more from your personal experience.
(d) It would be helpful to note keywords in a question (like noting down slow and fast changes because slow
changes imply reversible change whereas fast change imply irreversible change).
(e) It is always helpful to make a separate list of known quantities and asked quantities and then think of a way,
a link between them.
(f) Questions are mostly based on various reversible or irreversible processes which have their own set of
formulae. And no more processes can be found other than these. Hence, these concepts must be strong and
you should know the algorithm of each one thoroughly.
FORMULAE SHEET
1
=PV = nMm Vrms2 nRT
3
1 3
=
Kinetic energy per mole of gas = E = Mm Vrms2 RT
2 2
3kT 3RT 3P
Vrms
= = =
m M ρ
P hysi cs | 13.23
8kT 8RT 8P
Vav
= = = M is the molar mass in kilogram per mole.
πm πM πρ
2kT 2RT 2P
Vmp
= = =
m M ρ
8
Vrms : Vav : Vmps :: 3 : : 2 ; Vmps : Vrms : Vav ::1 : 1.224 : 1.28
π
The mean free path of a gas molecule is the average distance between two successive collisions. It is represented by λ.
kT σ =Diameter of themolecule
λ= Here,
2πd ρ 2 k = Boltzmann'scons tant
Thermodynamics
(a) Boyle’s law: According to this law, for a given mas of a gas the volume P
of a gas at constant temperature (called isothermal process) is inversely
proportional to its pressure, i.e., T=constant
1
V∝ (T= constant) or PV = constant
P
V
Figure 13.18
(b) Charle’s law: According to this law, for a given mass of a gas, the volume of V
a gas at constant pressure (called isobaric process) is directly proportional P=constant
to its absolute temperature, i.e.,
V
V ∝ T (P= constant) or = cons tant
T
T(in K)
Figure 13.19
(c) Gay Lussac’s law or Pressure law: According to this law, for a given P
mass of a gas the pressure of a gas at constant volume (called isochoric
process) is directly proportional to its absolute temperature, i.e.,
P V=constant
P∝T (V= constant) or = cons tant
T
T(in K)
Figure 13.20
(d) Avogadro’s law: According to this law, at same temperature and pressure
equal volumes of all gases contain equal number of molecules.
∆Q
C= or ∆Q = nC∆T
n∆T
For a gas the value of C depends on the process through which its temperature is raised.
3 5 3
Monoatomic 3 RT R R 1.67
2 2 2
5 7 5
Diatomic 5 RT R R 1.4
2 2 2
Note: C of a gas depends on the process of that gas, which can be infinite in types.
2 R γR
and f= ; Cv = ; CP =
γ −1 γ −1 γ −1
Often the first law must be used in its differential form, which is dU = dQ – dW
This can also be written as dQ = dU + dW
∆ Q is +ve for heat supplied
∆ Q is -ve for heat rejected
Isothermal Q=W 0 V Pi
nRT ln f = nRT ln
Vi Pf
PV
i i − Pf Vf nR∆T
Adiabatic 0 nCV ∆T = −∆U=
γ −1 γ −1
Q = ∆U
Isochoric nCV ∆T 0
= nCV ∆T
P P
(Slope)isothermal = − (Slope)adiabatic = −γ
V V
Solved Examples
N R
Sol:=
PV = RT N= T NkT Example 2: One gram-mole of oxygen at 27°C and one
A A
atmospheric pressure is enclosed in a vessel.
Let N be the number of air molecules in the bulb.
(a) Assuming the molecules to be moving with Vrms , find
V1 =250cm³, P1 = 10-3mm of Hg,
the number of collisions per second which molecules
T1 = 273 + 27 = 300°K make with one square meter area of the vessel wall.
As P1V1 = Nk T where k is constant, then (b) The vessel is next thermally insulated and moved
with a constant speed ν0 . It is then suddenly stopped.
10-3x 250 = N.k.300 … (i)
The process results in a rise of the temperature of the
At N.T.P., one mole of air occupies a volume of 22.4 litre,
gas by 1°C. Calculate the speed ν0 .
=V0 22400
= cm3 ,P0 = 760mmof
760 mm ofHg,
Hg,
P 3NAkT
T = 273° K and N0 = 6 × 1023 molecules Sol: Formula based: n = & Vrms = . Recall
kT Mn
∴760 × 22400 = 6x1023 × k × 273 … (ii)
the assumption of KTG. Kinetic energy changed to
Dividing equation (i) by equation (ii), we get internal energy.
1 3 . 2 6 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
(a) n = P/kT f
+1 2
where k = Boltzmann constant = Sol: (a) y = 2 or y = 1 +
f f
1.38 x 10-23 J/mol/K 2
nR
P = 1 atmosphere = 1.01 x 105 n/m², (b)
= W (T − T )
1− γ f i
T = 27°C = 300°K
(a) For adiabatic process
1.01x105
n = 2.44x1025 m−3 TV γ−1 = T1V1γ−1 ; V1 5.66
= = V and T1 T / 2
1.38x10−23 x300
T
The root mean square velocity Vrms is given by ∴ TV γ−1 = x (5.66 V)γ−1 ; (5.66)γ−1 = 2
2
3RT 3NAkT ( γ − 1)log5.66 =log2
Vrms
=
= = (R NAk)
M Mm
m log2 0.3010
γ −1 = ; γ − 1 = 0.4
=
NA= Avogadro number = 6.02 × 1023 molecule/mole log5.66 0.7528
(b) Obtain the work done by the gas during the (a) The sketch of P-V diagram is shown in the figure.
expansion as a function of the initial pressure P and
volume V.
P hysi cs | 13.27
2.5 x 10
5 P1V1T1 P2V2T2 Example 5: Two moles of helium gas undergo a cyclic
A B process as shown in the figure.
Assuming the gas to be ideal, calculate the following
C quantities in this process.
-2
P(Nm ) P3V3T3 (a) The net change in the heat energy
20 x 10
-3
40 x 10
-3 (b) The net work done
(c) The net change in internal energy
-3
V(m)
For an ideal gas, PV = nRT. (a) AB is isobaric process. The work done during this
process from A to B:
nRT1 2x8.31x300
=P1 = = 2.5 x105 Nm−2 WAB = P(V2 − V1 ) = nR (T2 − T1 )
V1 20x10 −3
or=
WAB 2 x 8.3x(400 =
− 300) 1160 joule
At B, P2= P1= 2.5 x105 Nm−2 , V2 = 40 x10−3 m3
Work done during isothermal process from B to C:
For isobaric process,
P
A B
T2 V2 40 x10−3 2 atm
= = T2 2=
= 2= T1 2 x300
= 600K
T1 V1 20 x10−3
Example 6: An ideal gas is taken a cyclic thermodynamic (b) Is there any way of telling afterwards which sample
process through four steps. The amount of heat involved of Helium went through the process ABC and which
in these steps are Q1 =
5960 J,Q 2 = − 5585 J,Q 3 =
− 2980 J went through the process ADC? Write Yes or No.
and Q 4 = 3645 J respectively. The corresponding works (c) How much is the heat involved in each of the
involved are W1 = 2200 J, W2 = −825 J, respectively. processes ABC and ADC?
(a) Find the value of W4
Sol: Work = Area under P–V curve hence, work done
(b) What is the efficiency of the cycle? in ABC is more than in ADC so is the heat (Q). At C,
system’s thermodynamic states are same, it can’t be
Sol: QTotal =WTotal as ∆U =0 in cyclic process, determined how they are achieved.
WT
η= only 2 x103
(a) n = 500
( Q absorbed) =
4
As the process is cyclic, ∆U =0 At A, PA VA = nRTA or TA = (PA VA / nR)
Net heat absorbed by the system (5x10 4 )x10
∴ T=
A = 120.33K
Q = Q1 + Q 2 + Q 3 + Q 4 500x831
= 5960 – 5585 – 2980 + 3645 = 1040 J (10x10 4 )x10
Similarly,
= TB = 240.66K
Net work performed 500x831
W = W1 + W2 + W3 + W4 (10x10 4 )x20
=TC = 481.32K
= 2200 – 825 – 1100 + W4 = 275 + W4 500x831
5 = 2.75 x 106 J
D
A
Example 8: Pressure versus temperature graph of an
0 10 20 3
V(m ) ideal gas is as shown in figure. Density of the gas at
point A is ρ0 . Density at B would be
Given molecular mass of Helium = 4
(a) What is the temperature of Helium in each of the Sol: Use relation between density and temperature,
states A, B, C and D? given below.
P hysi cs | 13.29
JEE Advanced/Boards 13 3 5
(1x10−3 + nB ) R = (1x10−3 ) R + nB R
6 2 6
Example 1: A gaseous mixture enclosed in a vessel of 13x10−3 + 13nB= 9x10−3 + nB (15)
volume V consists of one gram mole of a gas A with
5 / 3 and another has B with γ =7 / 5 at a
γ(CP / CV ) = 2nB = 4x10−3
certain temperature T. The gram molecular weights of
1 3 . 3 0 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
1 1 13 V 1 −3
P
=
∆β 1 − = 1 − = 2.487 x10 .
γP (5) 3x19 RT (5)γ
γ
P3 C
P2 AB=Adiabatic compression
B
Example 2: At 27°C, two moles of an ideal monoatomic BC= Isobaric heating
gas occupy a volume V. The gas expands adiabatically
to a volume 2V. Calculate
P1 A
(a) The final temperature of the gas
V
(b) Change in its internal erergy V2 V1
...(l)
(c) The workdone by the gas during this process
(b) Let T1 and T2 be the initial temperature and the
Sol: Formula TV = constant, ∆=
γ
U n C v ∆T W = −∆U temperature after adiabatic compression respectively.
used.
P hysi cs | 13.31
For adiabatic compression The pressure and temperature at A, B etc., are denoted
V1γ−1T1 = V2γ−1T2 by PA , TA ;PB , TB etc. respectively.
p1V1 5
T1
= = ,γ for monoatomic gas Given
= TA 1000K,P
= B (2 / 3)PA & PC = (1/ 3)PA . Calculate
2R 3
(a) The work done by the gas in the process A → B
p V
p V 5/3
∴ V12/3 1 1
V
=2
2/3
T2 ∴ T 1 1
2
….(i) (b) The heat lost by the gas in the process B → C and
2R 2/3
2RV2
(c) Temperature TD given (2/3) = 0.85 and R-8.31 J/mol K.
For isochoric process at temperature T3, heat supplied
is Q. Sol: Use the relation for the respective processes. Such
as T/P relation in adiabatic process.
∴Q= V dT ; Q 2.3 / 2R(T3 − T2 )
nC=
(a) As for adiabatic change
Q Q Q p1V15/3 PV γ = constant
= T3 − T2 ;∴ T3 = + T2 = + …. (ii)
3R 3R 3R 2RV 2/3
2 nRT
γ
The total work done by the gas is equal to the work i.e. P = cons tant [as PV = nRT ]
P
done in adiabatic process plus the work done in
isochoric process when WBC = 0 Tγ
i.e. = cons tant
∴ WTotal = WAB + WBC = WAB P γ−1
nR(T1 − T2 ) 5
WTotal
= = where γ =
γ −1 3
1
V 2/3 1− 2/5
2R p1V1 p1v1 3
5/3
2 γ 2
= − = p V 1 − 1 i.e. TB T=
= A 1000
= 850K
2 / 3 2R 2RV 2/3 2 1 1 V2 3 3
2
nR[Ti − Tf ] 1x8.3[1000 − 850]
Change in internal energy =
∆ U nCV (T3 − T1 ) so
= WAB =
γ −1 [(5 / 3) − 1]
3 Q p V pV
5/3
∴ ∆U 2x R + 1 1 − 1 1
= i.e. WAB (3
= = / 2)x 8.31x150 1869.75J
2 3R 2RV22/3 2R
(b) For B → C, V = constant so ∆ W =
0
5/3 V 2/3
3 p1V1 3 3 so from first law of thermodynamics
Q+
= Q + p1V1 1 − 1
− p1V1 =
2 V 2/3 2 2 V2
2 ∆ Q =∆U + ∆ W =µCV ∆T + 0
γ γ−1 γ−1
TD PD PA TD η − 1
=
= V= V0 … (ii)
TC PC PC TA η + 1
η − 1 2
2
1 2 2/3 3 2/5
i.e. −P0 V0 ln V02 −
= V0 − lnV0
2
TD3/5 = x1000 η + 1
2 3 1000
i.e. TD = 500K (η + 1)2
= −P0 V0 [ln{4η / (η + 1)2 }] = P0 V0 ln .
4η
Example 5: A piston can freely move inside a
horizontal cylinder closed from both ends. Initially, the
Example 6: An ideal gas has a density of 1.78 kg / m³ is
piston separates the inside space of the cylinder into
contained in a volume of 44.8 x 10-3 m³. The temperature
two equal part of volume V0, in which an ideal gas is
of the gas is 273 K. The pressure of the gas is
contained under the same pressure P0 and at the same
0.01 x 105 Pa. The gas constant R = 8.31 J-K-1 mole -1.
temperature.
(a) What is the root mean square velocity of the air
x molecules?
(b) How many moles of gas are present?
P1A
(c) What is the gas?
P2A
Fagent
(d) What is the internal energy of the gas?
What work has to be performed in order to increase
Sol: Use relation Vrms and P given. m = ρ V = nM also.
isothermally the volume of one of gas η times
compared to that of the other by slowly moving piston? 1 2
(a) P = ρV ⇒
3
Sol: Apply isothermal condition on both compartments. 1/2 1/2
3P (3)(1.01x105 N/ m2 )
Then, proceed to find Vf (left)/Vf (right). =Vrms =
ρ 1.78kg / m3
Let the agent move as shown.
In equilibrium position, P1A + Fagent = = 4.13 x 10² m/s
P2 A
F = (P − P )A (b) PV nmRT ⇒
=
agent 2 1
Example 7: Plot P-V, V-T and ρ -T graph corresponding P-V graph: As P is constant. Therefore, P-V graph is a
to the P-T graph for an ideal gas shown in the figure. straight line parallel to V-axis with VC > VB (because V
∝ T in an isobaric process)
P
V-T graph: In an isobaric process V ∝ T, i.e., V-T graph
B C is a straight line passing through the origin, with TC> TB
and VC> VB.
JEE Main/Boards
Q.3 Explain (i) Boyle’s law (ii) Charle’s law. Why they are Q.9 Explain what is meant by Brownian Motion?
not applicable to real gases at all states?
Q.10 The density of water is 1000kg/m³. The density of
Q.4 State and explain (i) Guy Isac’s law and (ii) Gas water vapour at 100°C and 2 atmospheric pressure is
equation. Distinguish clearly between R and r for a gas. 0.6kg m³. The volume of a molecule multiplied by the
1 3 . 3 4 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
total number gives what is called, molecular volume. Q.23 State the sign conventions used in all
Estimate the ratio (or fraction) of the molecular volume thermodynamic processes.
to the total volume occupied by the water vapour under
the above conditions of temperature and pressure. Q.24 What do you learn by applying first law of
thermodynamics to isothermal and adiabatic processes?
Q.11 A 3000cm³ tank contains oxygen at 20°C and a
gauge pressure of 2.5 x 106Pa. Find the mass of the Q.25 Explain what is meant by isothermal operations.
oxygen in the tank. Take 1 atm = 105 Pa. Give some examples.
Q.12 Calculate the r.m.s. velocity of air molecules at Q.26 What are adiabatic operations? Enumerate
N.T.P. Given that 22400 c.c. of gas at N.T.P. weight 64 gm. some examples. State equations representing these
operations.
Q.13 How many collisions per second does each
molecule of a gas make, when average speed of the Q.27 Obtain an expression for work done by a gas in
molecule is 500ms-1 and mean free path is 2.66 x 10-7 m? isothermal expansion.
Q.14 Calculate the mean free path of gas molecules, if Q.28 Derive an expression for work done in an adiabatic
number of molecules per cm³ is 3 x 1019 and diameter process.
of each molecule is 2Å.
Q.36 If 1 gram oxygen at 760mm pressure and 0°C has Q.7 A barometer tube, containing mercury, is lowered
it volume doubled in an adiabatic change, calculate in a vessel containing mercury until only 50 cm of the
the change in internal energy. Take R=2 cal. mole-1 K-1, tube is above the level of mercury in the vessel. If the
J=4.2 J cal-1 and γ =1.4. atmospheric pressure is 75 cm of mercury, what is the
pressure at the top of the tube?
(A) 33.3 kPa (B) 66.7 kPa
Exercise 2
(C) 3.33 MPa (D) 6.67 MPa
Single Correct Choice Type
Q.8 A vessel contains 1 mole of O2 gas (molar mass
Q.1 Find the approx. number of molecules contained in
32) at a temperature T. The pressure of the gas is P. An
a vessel of volume 7 litres at 0°C at 1.3 x 105Pascal
identical vessel containing one mole of He gas (molar
(A) 2.4 x 1023 (B) 3 x 1023 mass 4) at a temperature 3T has a pressure of
(C) 6 x 1023 (D) 4.8 x 1023 (A) P/8 (B) P (C) 2P (D) 8P
Q.2 An ideal gas mixture filled inside a balloon Q.9 The ratio of average translational kinetic energy
expands according to the relation PV2/3 = constant. The to rotational kinetic energy of a diatomic molecule
temperature inside the balloon is temperature T is
(A) Increasing (B) Decreasing (A) 3 (B) 7/5 (C) 5/3 (D) 3/2
(C) Constant (D) Can’t be said
Q.10 One mole of an ideal gas at STP is heated in an
Q.3 A rigid tank contains 35 kg of nitrogen at 6 atm. insulated closed container until the average speed of
Sufficient quality of oxygen is supplied to increase its molecules is doubled. Its pressure would therefore
the pressure to 9 atm, while the temperature remains increase by factor.
constant. Amount of oxygen supplied to the tank is:
(A) 1.5 (B) 2 (C) 2 (D) 4
(A) 5 kg (B) 10 kg (C) 20 kg (D) 40 kg
Q.14 An ideal gas undergoes an adiabatic process Q.3 70 cal of heat are required to raise the temperature
obeying the relation PV4/3 = constant. If its initial of 2 moles of an ideal diatomic gas at constant pressure
temperature is 300 K and then its pressure is increased from 30°C to 35°C. The amount of heat required
upto four times its initial value, then the final (in calorie) to raise the temperature of the same gas
temperature is (in Kelvin)? through the same range (30°C to 35°C) at constant
volume is (1985)
(A) 300 2 (B) 300 3 2
(A) 30 (B) 50 (C) 70 (D) 90
(C) 600 (D) 1200
Q.15 1 kg of a gas does 20kJ of work and receives 16kJ
Q.4 If one mole of a monatomic gas ( γ =5 / 3) is mixed
of heat when it its expanded between two states. A
with one mole of a diatomic gas ( γ =7/5), the value of
second kind of expansion can be found between the
γ for the mixture is (1988)
initial and final state which requires a heat input of 9 kj.
The work done by the gas in the second expansion is: (A) 1.40 (B) 150 (C) 1.53 (D) 3.07
(A) 32 kJ (B) 5 kJ
Q.5 The temperature of an ideal gas is increased from
(C) -4 kJ (D) 13 kJ 120 K to 480 K. If at 120 K the root mean square velocity
of the gas molecules is v, at 480 K it becomes (1996)
Q.16 A mixture of ideal gases 7 kg of nitrogen and 11
(A) 4 v (B) 2 v (C) v/2 (D) v/4
kg of CO2. Then (Take γ for nitrogen and CO2 as 1.4 and
1.3 respectively)
Q.6 The average translational energy and the rms
(A) Equivalent molecular weight of the mixture is 36. speeds of molecules in a sample of oxygen gas at
(B) Equivalent molecular weight of the mixture is 18. 300 K are 6.21 x 10-21J and 484 m/s respectively. The
corresponding values at 600 K are nearly (assuming
(C) γ for the mixture is 5/2
ideal gas behaviour) (1997)
(D) γ for the mixture is 4/3
(A) 12.42x10-21 J, 968 m/s
(B) 8.78x10-21 J, 684 m/s
(C) 6.21x10-21 J, 968 m/s
Previous Years’ Questions
(D) 12.42x10-21 J, 684 m/s
Q.11 An ideal gas is expanding such that pT² = (t) Work is done on the gas
constant. The coefficient of volume expansion of the
gas is (2008)
Q.14 For an ideal gas
1 2 3 4
(A) (B) (C) (D) (A) The change in internal energy in a constant
T T T T
pressure process from temperature T1 to T2 is equal to
nCV (T2 − T1 ) , where CV is the molar heat capacity at
Q.12 Match the following for the given process (2006)
constant volume and n the number of moles of the gas
P
(B) The change in internal energy of the gas and the
30
J work done by the gas are equal in magnitude in an
M adiabatic process
20
(C) The internal energy does not change in an isothermal
10 K L process
3 (D) No heat is added or removed in an adiabatic
10 20 V (m )
process. (1989)
Column I Column II
Q.15 One mole an ideal gas in initial state A undergoes
(p) Q>0
(A) Process J → K a cyclic process ABCA, as shown in figure. Its pressure at
A is P0. Choose the correct option(s) from the following
(q) W<0
(B) Process K → L (2010)
V
(r) W>0 B
(C) Process L → K 4V0
(s) Q<0
(D) Process M → J
V0 C A
Q.16 The speed of sound in oxygen (O2) at a certain Q.23 The potential energy function for the force
temperature is 460 ms−1. The speed of sound in helium between two atoms in a diatomic molecule is
(He) at the same temperature will be (assumed both a b
gases to be ideal) (2008) approximately given by U(x) = − , where a and b
12
x x6
(A) 460 ms−1 (B) 500 ms−1 are constants and x is the distance between the atoms.
If the dissociation energy of the molecule is D = [U(x =
(C) 650 ms−1 (D) 1420 ms−1
∞) – Uat equilibrium], D is (2010)
Q.22 A diatomic ideal gas is used in a Car engine as the (D) 600 K
working substance. If during the adiabatic expansion
part of the cycle, volume of the gas increases from V to Q.27 An ideal gas enclosed in a vertical cylindrical
32V the efficiency of the engine is (2010) container supports a freely moving piston of mass M.
(A) 0.5 (B) 0.75 (C) 0.99 (D) 0.25 The piston and the cylinder have equal cross sectional
area A. When the piston is in equilibrium, the volume of
P hysi cs | 13.39
the gas is V0 and its pressure is P0. The piston is slightly (i) Sequentially keeping in contact with 2 reservoirs
displaced from the equilibrium position and released. such that each reservoir supplies same amount of heat.
Assuming that the system is completely isolated from
(ii) Sequentially keeping in contact with 8 reservoirs
its surrounding, the piston executes a simple harmonic
such that each reservoir supplies same amount of heat.
motion with frequency: (2013)
In both the cases body is brought from initial
1 AγP0 1 V0MP0
(A) (B) temperature 100°C to final temperature 200°C. Entropy
2π V0M 2π A 2 γ changes of the body in the two cases respectively is
2 (2015)
1 A γP0 1 MV0
(C) (D) (A) ln 2, 4 ln2 (B) ln 2, ln 2
2π MV0 2π AγP0
(C) ln 2, 2 ln 2 (D) 2 ln 2, 8 ln 2
JEE Advanced/Boards
and the upper end at a temperature T2 which is less than Q.19 At a temperature of T0 = 273°K, two moles of
the temperature of the melting point of cast iron. It is an ideal gas undergoes a process as shown. The total
given that the conductivity of liquid cast iron is equal to amount of heat imparted to the gas equals Q = 27.7 kJ.
k times the conductivity solid cast iron. Determine the Determine the ratio of molar specific heat capacities.
fraction of the duct filled with molten metal.
T
C
k A
273 K B
V 4V
h
V
Q.18 An ideal gas at NTP is enclosed in an adiabatic VA VC VD
vertical cylinder having area of cross section A = 27 cm²,
(a) Find the work performed by the system along path AD.
between two light movable pistons as shown in the
figure. Spring with force constant k = 3700 N/m is in (b) If the total work done by the system along the path
a relaxed state initially. Now the lower piston is moved ADC is 85J find the volume at point C.
upwards a height h/2, h being the initial length of gas
(c) How much work is performed by the system along
column. It is observed that the upper piston moves up
the path CDA?
by a distance h/16. Find h taking γ for the gas to be 1.5.
Also find the final temperature of the gas.
1 3 . 4 2 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
Q.3 A container X has volume double that of container (A) 3cm (B) 5cm (C) 2cm (D) 1cm
Y and both are connected by a thin tube. Both contains
same ideal gas. The temperature of X is 200K and that Q.9 A vessel contains an ideal monoatomic gas which
of Y is 400 K. If mass of gas in X is m then Y it will be: expands at constant pressure, when heat Q is given to
(A) m/8 (B) m/6 (C) m/4 (D) m/2 it. Then the work done in expansion is:
3 2 2
(A) Q (B) Q (C) Q (D) Q
Q.4 An ideal gas of Molar mass M is contained in a 5 5 3
vertical tube of height H, closed at both ends. The tube
is accelerating vertically upwards with acceleration g. Multiple Correct Choice Type
Then, the ratio of pressure at the bottom and the mid
point of the tube will be Q.10 Two bodies A and B have thermal emissivities of
0.81 respectively. The outer surface areas of the two
(A) exp[2MgH/RT] (B) exp[-2MgH/RT]
bodies are the same. The two bodies radiate energy at
(C) exp[MgH/RT] (D) MgH/RT the same rate. The wavelength λB , corresponding to
the maximum spectral radiancy in the radiation from
Q.5 Two monoatomic ideal gas at temperature T1 and B, is shifted from the wavelength corresponding to the
T2 are mixed. There is no loss of energy. If the masses maximum spectral radiancy in the radiation from A by
of molecules of the two gases are m1 and m2 and 1.00 µm . If the temperature of A is 5802 K,
number of their molecules are n1 and n2 respectively. (A) The temperature of B is 1934K
The temperature of the mixture will be?
(B) λB= 1.5 µm
T1 + T2 T1 T2
(A) n + n (B) s + (C) The temperature of B is 11604 K
1 2 n1 n2
(D) The temperature of B is 2901 K
n2 T1 + n1T2 n1T1 + n2 T2
(C) (D)
n1 + n2 n1 + n2 Q.11 During an experiment, an ideal gas is found to
obey a condition VP² = constant. The gas is initially
Q.6 At temperature T, N molecules of gas A each having at a temperature T, pressure P and volume V. The gas
mass m and at the same temperature 2N molecules of expands to volume 4V.
gas B each having mass 2m are filled in a container. The
P hysi cs | 13.43
(C) The work done by the gas is greater for the (A) The temperature of the gas remains constant
isothermal process. throughout.
(D) All the above options are incorrect (B) The temperature of the gas first increases and then
decreases.
1 3 . 4 4 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
(C) The temperature of the gas first decreases and then Q.21 If the temperature of the body is raised to higher
increases. temperature T’, then choose the correct statement(s)
(D) The straight line has a negative slopes (A) The intensity of radiation for every wavelength
increases
Q.19 A cyclic process ABCD is shown in the P-V (B) The maximum intensity occurs at a shorter
diagram. Which of the following curves represents the wavelength
same process if BC & DA are isothermal processes.
(C) The area under the graph increases
A B
(D) The area under the graph is proportional to the
fourth power of temperature
P
C
Paragraph 2:
D
V Two rods A and B of same cross-sectional area A
and length / connected in series between a source
A B D C (T1 =100°C) and a sink (T2 = 0°C) as shown in figure. The
rod is laterally insulated
(A) (B)
P C V T1 T2
B
D A o 3K K o
100 C 0C
T T
O m
Q.24 If GA and GB are the temperature gradients across
the rod A and B, then
Q.20 The figure shows a radiant energy spectrum graph
for a black body at a temperature T. GA 3 G 1
(A) = (B) A =
Choose the correct statement (s) GB 1 GB 3
as convection, when we require heat transfer with fast Q.29 The work done in the complete cycle ABCA is
phase, we use some mechanism to make the flow of fluid
on the body fast. The rate of loss of heat is proportional (A) 90 J (B) 60 J (C) 0 J (D) 30 J
to velocity of fluid (v), and temperature difference ( ∆ T)
between the body any fluid, of course more the surface
area of body more the rate of loss of heat. We can write Paragraph 5:
dQ Five moles of helium are mixed with two moles of
the rate of loss of heat as = KAv∆T
dt hydrogen to form a mixture. Take molar mass of helium
M1 = 4g and that of hydrogen M2 = 2g
Where K is positive constant.
Now answer the following questions
Q.30 The equivalent molar mass of the mixture is
13g
Q.25 A body is being cooled with fluid. When we (A) 6g (B)
increase the velocity of fluid 4 times and decrease the 7
temperature difference 1/2 time, the rate of loss of heat 18g
(C) (D) None
increases. 7
(A) Four times (B) Two times
Q.31 The equivalent degree of freedom f of the mixture
(C) Six times (D) No change is
(A) 3.57 (B) 1.14 (C) 4.4 (D) None
Q.26 In the above question if mass of the body
increased two times, without change in any of the other
parameters, the rate of cooling Q.32 The equivalent value of γ is
(A) Decreases (A) 1.59 (B) 1.53 (C) 1.56 (D) None
(B) Increases
Q.33 If the internal energy of He sample of 100J and
(C) No effect of change of mass that of the hydrogen sample is 200J, then the internal
(D) None of these energy of the mixture is
(A) 900J (B) 128.5J
Paragraph 4: (C) 171.4J (D) 300J
When a thermo-dynamic process is shown on P-V
diagram, area under curve represents work done Match the Column
during process. During cyclic process work done is
area enclosed. The P-V graph for a thermodynamically Q.34 An ideal gas at pressure P and volume V is
system is shown in figure. expanded to volume 2V. Column I represents the
thermodynamic processes used during expansion.
20 A column II represents the work during these processes
Pressure P (in Nm )
-2
10
B Column I Column II
C
(A) 90 J (B) 60 J (C) 0 J (D) 30J The correct matching of column I and column II is given
by:
Q.28 The work done in the process B to C is
(A) p-y, q-z, r-x (B) p-y, q-x, r-z
(A) -90 J (B) -60 J (C) 0 J (D) -30J
(C) p-x, q-y, r-z (D) p-z, q-y, r-x
1 3 . 4 6 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
(A) (2 / 7) (B) (1/ 7) Q.8 An ideal gas is taken through the cycle
A → B → C → A, as shown in the figure. If the net heat
(C) ( 3) / 5 (D) ( 6) / 5 supplied to the gas in the cycle is 5J, the work done by
the gas in the process C → A is (2002)
Q.5 Starting with the same initial conditions, and ideal 3
V(m )
gas expands from volume V1 to V2 in three different
ways. The work done by the gas is W1 if the process 2 C B
is purely isothermal, W2 if purely isobaric and W3 if
purely adiabatic, then (2000)
(A) W2 > W1 > W3 ; (B) W2 > W3 > W1 1 A
Temp
Temp Temp
Temp Q.12 The piston is now pulled out slowly and held at a
distance 2L from the top. The pressure in the cylinder
between its top and the piston will then be (2007)
(A) (B)
(A) (B)
Time P0
Time
Time Time (A) P0 (B)
2
P0 Mg P0 Mg
Temp Temp (C) + (D) −
Temp Temp 2 πR 2 2 πR 2
0 1 2 3 V P
I II A
Ideal gas Vacuum V0 C
T
T0
Q.20 5.6 liter of helium gas at STP is adiabatically Q.25 A water cooler of storage capacity 120 litres can
compressed to 0.7 liter. Taking the initial temperature cool water at a constant rate of P watts. In a closed
to be T1, the work done in the process is (2011) circulation system (as shown schematically in the
figure), the water from the cooler is used to cool an
9 3 15 9
(A) RT (B) RT (C) RT (D) RT external device that generates constantly 3 kW of heat
8 1 2 1 8 1 2 1 (thermal load). The temperature of water fed into the
device cannot exceed 30°C and the entire stored 120
Q.21 A mixture of 2 moles of helium gas (atomic litres of water is initially cooled to 10°C. The entire
mass = 4 amu) and 1 mole of argon gas (atomic mass system is thermally insulated. The minimum value of
= 40 amu) is kept at 300 K in a container. The ratio of P (in watts) for which the device can be operated for 3
V (helium) hours is
the rms speeds rms is (2012) Cooler Device
Vrms (argon) Hot
Q.23 A thermodynamic system is taken from an initial Q.26 A cylindrical vessel of height 500 mm has an orifice
state i with internal energy Ui = 100 J to the final state (small hole) at its bottom. The orifice is initially closed
and water is filled in it upto height H. Now the top is
f along two different paths iaf and ibf, as schematically
completely sealed with a cap and the orifice at the bottom
shown in the figure. The work done by the system along is opened. Some water comes out from the orifice and
the paths af, ib and bf are Waf = 200 J, Wib = 50 J and Wbf = the water level in the vessel becomes steady with height
100 J respectively. The heat supplied to the system along of water column being 200 mm. Find the fall in height (in
the path iaf, ib and bf are Qiaf, Qib and Qbf respectively. mm) of water level due to opening of the orifice.
If the internal energy of the system in the state b is [Take atmospheric pressure = 1.0 × 105 N/m2, density of
Ub = 200 J and Qiaf = 500 J, the ratio Qbf / Qib is (2014) water = 1000 kg/m3 and g = 10 m/s2. Neglect any effect
of surface tension.] (2009)
a
f
Q.27 A diatomic ideal gas is compressed adiabatically
P
1
to of its initial volume. If the initial temperature of
32
i b the gas is Ti (in Kelvin) and the final temperature is aTi,
v the value of a is (2010)
Q.24 A container of fixed volume has a mixture of Q.28 One mole of a monatomic gas is taken through
one mole of hydrogen and one mole of helium in a cycle ABCDA as shown in the P-V diagram. column
equilibrium at temperature T. Assuming the gases are II give the characteristics involved in the cycle. Match
ideal, the correct statement(s) is(are) (2015)
them with each of the processes given in column I.
(A) The average energy per mole of the gas mixture is 2RT. (2011)
P
(B) The ratio of speed of sound in the gas mixture to B A
3P
that in helium gas is.
(C) The ratio of the rms speed of helium atoms to that
of hydrogen molecules is 1/2. 1P C D
(D) The ratio of the rms speed of helium atoms to that
of hydrogen molecules is. 0 1V 3V 9V V
1 3 . 5 0 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
C
The gas is then heated very slowly to temperature
T2, pressure P2 and volume V2. During this process
the piston moves out by a distance x. Ignoring the
friction between the piston and the cylinder, the correct
100 200 300 400 500 statement(s) is(are) (2015)
T(K)
(A) The rate at which heat is absorbed in the range (A) If V2 = 2V1 and T2 = 3T1, then the energy stored in
0-100 K varies linearly with temperature T. 1
the spring is P1 V1
(B) Heat absorbed in increasing the temperature from 4
0-100 K is less than the heat required for increasing the (B) If V2 = 2V1 and T2 = 3T1, then the change in internal
temperature from 400 – 500 K. energy is 3P1V1
(C) There is no change in the rate of heat absorption in
(C) If V2 = 3V1 and T2 = 4T1, then the work done by the
range 400 – 500 K.
7
(D) The rate of heat absorption increases in the range gas is P V
3 1 1
200 – 300 K.
(D) If V2 = 3V1 and T2 = 4T1, then the heat supplied to
17
Paragraph 1: the gas is P V
6 1 1
A spray gun is shown in the figure where a piston
pushes air out of a nozzle. A thin tube of uniform cross Q.33 A gas is enclosed in a cylinder with a movable
section is connected to the nozzle. The other end of the frictionless piston. Its initial thermodynamic state at
tube is in a small liquid container. As the piston pushes pressure Pi = 105 Pa and volume Vi = 10-3 m3 changes
air through the nozzle, the liquid from the container to a final state at Pf = (1/32) × 105 Pa and Vf = 8 × 10-3
rises into the nozzle and is sprayed out. For the spray m3 in an adiabatic quasi-static process, such that P3V5
gun shown, the radii of the piston and the nozzle are = constant. Consider another thermodynamic process
20 mm and 1 mm respectively. The upper end of the that brings the system from the same initial state to the
container is open to the atmosphere. (2014) same final state in two steps: an isobaric expansion at
Pi followed by an isochoric (isovolumetric) process at
volume Vf. The amount of heat supplied to the system
in the two-step process is approximately (2016)
(A) 112 J (B) 294 J (C) 588 J (D) 813 J
P hysi cs | 13.51
PlancEssential Questions
JEE Main/Boards JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1 Exercise 1
Q. 11 Q.20 Q.32 Q.12 Q.15 Q.18
Q.33 Q.34 Q.35 Q.19 Q.22
Q.36
Exercise 2 Exercise 2
Q.4 Q.5 Q.15 Q.8 Q.10 Q.11
Q.16 Q.17 Q.20
Q.28 Q.29 Q.30
Answer Key
JEE Main/Boards
Exercise 1
2x(273 − 173)
Q.2 P1 / T1 P2=
= / T2 or T2 P2 T1 / P1 = 200K =
= − 73°C
1
Q.10 6 x 10-4 Q.11 0.103 kg Q.13 1.88 x 109 s-1
Q.17 No, because internal energy of an ideal gas depends only on temperature of the gas
∆V1
Q.18 Translational motion of molecules. Q.19 =γ. As γ > 1, ∴( ∆ V1 ) > ( ∆ V2 )
∆V2
Q.20 Internal energy increasing by 200 J. Heat absorbed is zero.
Exercise 2
Single Correct Choice Type
Q.1 A Q.2 A Q.3 C Q.4 B Q.5 A Q.6 B
Q.7 A Q.8 C Q.9 D Q.10 D Q.11 C Q.12 A
Q.13 B Q.14 A Q.15 D Q.16 A
Q.33 A
JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1
mRT0 T0m
Q.3 1 + R Q.4 The molar mass of the gas is 40 gm,
V0 V0
Q.5 100J Q.6 3600 R
Q.7 400 K Q.8 5R
R R
Q.9 CV + Q.10
αV 2
P 1
Isobatic
3 1 − 1/3
γ + 1 γ + 1 R 2
Q.12 1 −
Adiabatic 2
Q.11 (i) 4aV0 , (ii)
γ − 1 γ − 1 2
ln2
Isotherm
V
Exercise 2
Comprehension Type
Q.34 A
Solutions
JEE Main/Boards aren’t. So, the molecules are not going in straight line.
Thus, it takes time for the smell to spread in the room.
Exercise 1
Sol 2: Initial
Sol 1: The speed of molecules follows directly from Pi = 1 atm
measuring the pressure and density-you don’t need to
know the size of molecules. In standard kinetic theory, T0 = -173°C = 100 k
collisions with other molecules have always been Vi = V
ignored, because the molecules were tiny. Though, they
1 3 . 5 4 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
DW = ∫ PdV Pf Vf − PV
i i nR
Vi
⇒W= = (T – Ti)
1− γ 1− γ f
1 3 . 5 8 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
Hot Q1 Q2 Cold
A Working
P (source) substance (sink)
V ∴ Qgiven = Q1
W = Q1 - Q2 Pi = 1 atm; Pf = ?
W Vi = V; Vf = V/2
Efficiency: η =
Q given (i) PV γ = constant
γ
V
∴ Pf = i Pi = (2)1.42 × 1 _ 2.675 atm
Vf
P hysi cs | 13.59
(ii) PV γ = constant 1
1.4 −1
= × 273 = 206.89 K
nRT γ 2
⇒ V = constant
V
nR
⇒ TV γ−1 = constant ∴ DU = (T – Ti)
1− γ f
γ−1
V
∴ Tf = i Ti 1
− × (2 × 4.2)
Vf 32
= (206.89 - 273)
= (2)0.42 × 300 1 − 1.4
Sol 34: n = 1
Ti = T; Tf = (T + 70) K
Exercise 2
nR 1× 2
W= [T – Ti] = [70] = -280 Cal
1− γ f 1 − 1.5
Sol 1: (A) V = 7L = 7 × 10-3 m3
∴ Work done = -1176 joules
T = 273 K
DQ = DU + DW ⇒ DU = 280 Cal
P = 1.3 × 105 Pa
Work done on gas can be seen by increase in
temperature of the gas, which accounts for 280 calories PV 1.3 × 105 × 7 × 10−3
∴m= = _ 0.4 moles
of energy. RT 8.314 × 273
∴ No. of molecules = 0.4 × 6.02 × 1023
Sol 35: n = 1
= 2.4 × 1023 molecules
Vi = V; DQ = 0
−nR Sol 2: (A) PV2/3 =const.
Vf = 2Vi; DU = -DW = [T – Ti]
1− γ f nRT 2/3
⇒ V = const.
Ti = 273K V
TV γ−1 = constant ⇒ TV-1/3 = const.
V
γ−1 ⇒ T = conts. × V1/3
∴ Tf = i × Ti
∴ On increasing volume, temperature increase
Vf
⇒ Tf = (0.5)0.4 × 273 = 206.89 K
Sol 3: (C) T = constant, V = constant,
1× 8.314
∴ DU = - [206.89-273] 35
1 − 1.4 ni = = 1.25 Kmoles
28
⇒ DU −1374 Joule
P RT
∴ = = const.
Sol 36: Vi = V; Vf = 2V n V
Pi = 760 mm of Hg= 1 atm _ 105 Pascal Pf Pi
∴ =
1 nf ni
Ti = 273 K, n =
32 Pf 9 35
⇒ nf = × ni = × ≈ 1.875 kmoles
∵ DQ = 0 Pi 6 28
For adiabatic process:- ∴ Moles of O2 supplied
γ−1
TV = constant = 1.875 – 1.25 = 0.625 kmoles
V
γ−1
∴ Amount of oxygen = 20 kg
∴ Tf = i Ti
Vf
1 3 . 6 0 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
4 ∴ PV = 1×RT \P’V=1×R×(2T)
Sol 4: (B) PV = RT .....(i)
M ⇒ PV = RT ⇒ P’ = 2P
(4 − 0.8) 3.2R
PV = R (T + 50) = (T + 50) .....(ii)
M M Sol 9: (D) For diatomic molecule
By (i) and (ii) we get, Translational degree of freedoms = 3
nRT Ti = T
Sol 6: (B) P =
V P = const.
2 2
nRT T Vi = V Vf = 2V
∴ V = constant ⇒ = constant
V V Initially:- PV = RT
1
V 2 Work done = PDV = P(2V – V)=PV=RT
∴ Tf = f × Ti = 2T
Vi
Sol 12: (A) f = 6
Sol 7: (A) Pat top of tube + Pdue to 50 cm of Hg= Patmospheric DW = 25 ⇒ PDV = 25 ⇒ nRDT = 25 J
[By using gas equation]
⇒ Pat top of tube = (75 – 50) cm of Hg
∴ P = constant
= 25 cm of Hg
DQ = DU + DW [By 1st law of thermodynamics]
105
= 25 × Pa = 33.3 k Pa nf 6
75 and DU = RDT = × 25 = 75 J
2 2
DW = PDV = 25 J 11kg
nCO = = 0.25 k moles
f
2 44
f = 6; CP = 1 + R = 4R 2 2 20
2 fCO = = =
2 1.3 − 1 0.3 3
25
∴ DQ = (4R) = 100 J
R ∴ Equivalent molecular weight
n1M1 + n2M2 m1 + m2
= =
Sol 13: (B) DQ = -30 J n1 + n2 n1 + n2
DW = -18 J 7 + 11
= = 36 gm
By 1st law of thermodynamics 0.25 + 0.25
DQ = DU + DW n1γ1 + n2 γ 2 + .....
γmix ≠
⇒ DU = -30 – (-18) = -12 J n1 + n2 + .....
⇒ UB – Ui = -12 n1f1 + n2 f2 + .....
fmix =
∴ UB = -12 + 60 = 48 Joules n1 + n2
20
Sol 14: (A) Ti = 300 K Tf = ? 0.25 × 5 + 0.25 ×
3 35
= _
Pi = P Pf = 4P 0.25 + 0.25 6
2 2 47
nRT ∴ γmix = 1 + =1+ = = 1.34
By gas equation we know: - V = fmix 35 / 6 35
P
∴ PV4/3 = constant
4 4
nRT 3
⇒P
T3
=constant ⇒ 1 = constant
Previous Years’ Questions
P
P3
1 4
÷ 1 Sol 1: (A) Work done in a cyclic process = area between
P 3 3 4P 4 the cycle
∴ Tf = f × T i = × 300 K
Pi P = AB × BC = (2P – P) × (2V – V) = PV
⇒ Tf = 300 2 K Note if cycle is clockwise (p on y-axis and V on x-axis)
work done is positive and if it is anticlockwise work
Sol 15: (D) For first kind of expansion:- done is negative.
DW = 20 KJ
3RT
DQ = 16 KJ Sol 2: (A) vrms =
M
∴ DU = DQ – DW = -4 KJ
Room temperature T = 300 K
Since, U is a state function. Therefore, value of DU in
both expansions remain same. 3 × 8.31× 103 × 300
∴ 1930 =
Thus, for second expansion:- M
DU = -4KJ, DQ = 9 KJ ∴ M = 2.0 g/mol or the gas is H2.
∴ By first law of the thermodynamics:-
Q2 CV 1
DW = DQ – DU =13 KJ Sol 3: (B) Q1 = nCP DT, Q2 = nCv DT, = =
Q1 CP γ
7kg Q1 70
Sol 16: (A) nN = = 0.25 k moles or Q2 = = = 50 cal
2 28 γ 1.4
2 2
fN = = =5
2 γ −1 1.4 − 1
1 3 . 6 2 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
5 3 nART nART
Sol 4: (B) g1 = means gas is monatomic or CV = R – DP = (pA)i – (pA)f = –
3 1 2 V 2V
nART
7 5 = .…. (i)
g2 = means gas is diatomic or CV = R 2V
5 2 2
In chamber B →
CV (of the mixture) nBRT nBRT
– 1.5DP = (pB)i - (pB)f = –
3 5 V 2V
n1CV + n2CV (1) R + (1) R
2 2 = 2R nBRT
= 1 2
= = ……. (ii)
n1 + n2 1+ 1 2V
3RT
Sol 5: (B) vrms = Sol 9: (D) Internal energy of n moles of an ideal gas at
M
temperature T is given by
i.e., Vrms ∝ T f
U = n RT
When temperature is increased from 120 K to 480 K (i.e., 2
four times), the root mean square speed will become where, f = degrees of freedom
In chamber A → 3T2 T3
.dT – dV = 0
V V2
P hysi cs | 13.63
Q = W + DU Density = 8 kg/m3
Work done is area under p–V graph. If volume increases mass 1 3
⇒ Volume
= = m
work done by gas is positive and if volume decrease density 8
work done by gas is negative. Further DU is positive
if product of PV is increasing and DU is negative if Pressure = 8 × 104 N/m2
product of PV is decreasing. 5
∴ Internal Energy = P × V =5 × 10 4 J
If heat is taken by the gas, Q is positive and if heat is 2
lost by the gas, Q is negative.
Keeping the above points in mind the answer to this Sol 19: (C) WAB = ΔQ - ΔU = nCpdT – nCvdT (at constant
question is as under. pressure)
P a b
5 A B Sol 23: (C) U(x)
= −
12
2 x 10 Pa x x6
dU 12a 6b
as, F =
− =
− +
5
1 x 10 Pa
D C dx x
13
x7
At equilibrium, F = 0
300 K 500 K T
2a
= n(Cp – Cv)dt ∴ x6 =
b
= nRdT = 2 × R × (500 – 300) = 400 R a b −b2
∴ Uat equilibrium = − =
2a
2 2a 4a
Sol 20: (A) At constant temperature (isothermal process)
b b
P 105 b2
WDA= nRTln 1 = 2.303 × 2R × 300log ∴ D = [U( x = ∞ ) – Uat equilibrium ] =
5
P2 2 × 10 4a
1
= 2.303 × 600log T − T2 1
2 Sol=
24: T η− T2 1 =1
η1 (D)1 =
= 1
T 6
0.693 600lR =
=× −414R T1 61
T − (T2 − 62) 1
= T1η− (T2 −1 62)
= 1 T −T 62 1
and η2
= =2
T1 ⇒ 13 2 + =
T1 3 T1 T1 3
Sol 21: (B) Net work done in a cycle = WAB + WBC + WCB
+ WBA 1 62 1 62 1
+ =⇒ =
= 400 R + 2 × 2.303 × 500 R ln 2 – 400R – 414 R
6 T1 3 T1T−1 T2 6 1
=
T1T1 − T26 1
= 1000R x ln 2 – 600R x ln 2 = 400R x ln 2 = 276R T
∴T1 = −
1 62×T 2 61 =
= = 372KT T1 1 6
T1 61− 2 =
T1 − T2T 1 T T6 1
Sol 22: (B) The efficiency of cycle is 2= 1 ⇒ 11− 2 =
1 −
T1 T 6 6 T2= T5 6
T2 1 = 1
η = 1− TT2 1 372 T2 6 5
T1 1 − 2= 5 =
⇒ T =6 ⇒ T3722 = 310K
6
372 6
1
for adiabatic process T2⇒ T5 =310K
⇒ T2 = 310K
=2
TV γ−1 = cons tant 372 6
Sol 25: (A) Work done in complete cycle = Area under
7 ⇒ T2 = 310K
For diatomic gas γ = P–V graph = P0V0
5
From A to B, heat given to the gas
T1 V1γ−1 = T2 V2γ−1
3 3 3
= n C v ∆T= n R∆T= V0 ∆P= PV
V
γ−1
2 2 2 0 0
T1 = T2 2
From B to C, heat given to the system
V1
7 −1 5 5
T= T2 (32)5 = T2 (25 )2/5
= T2 × 4 = n C v ∆T= n R ∆T= ( 2P ) ∆V= 5P0 V0
2 0
1
2
T1 = 4T2
From C to D and D to A, heat is rejected.
1 3
η= 1 − = = 0.75 Work done by gas
4 4 Efficiency, η
= × 100
Heat given to the gas
P0 V0
=η = 15.4%
3
P0 V0 + 5P0 V0
2
P hysi cs | 13.65
40 500 − TS 1
Sol 26:
= (C) = , TS 300K Sol 31: (C) Since τ =
100 500 nπ 2v rms d2
600 T − 300 1
= ⇒ T 750K
= n∝ and v rms ∝ T
100 T V
V
⇒τ∝
Sol 27: (C) T
Mg =n C1V −1 =
< v > C2 T1/2
P=
0 P0 V0γ PV γ
A γ+1
Mg P0 A..............(1)
= (i) P0=AX 0γ PA(x0 − x)γ Since TV γ−1 = constant ⇒ τ ∝ V 2
P0 Ax0γ
Let piston is displaced by x P= P0 P − P = P
(x0 − x)γ Sol
P − P32:=(D)
− P (V − 02V −) 0 (V − 2V0 )
P − P00 = − V00 (V − 2V00 ) V0
P xγ V0
P= x0γ Mg = 0 0 A Frestoring P0= P0
=Mg = 0 A Frestoring
γ =P 3P0 − P0 V P 3P − V ....(1) ....(1) …(i)
(x − γx)γ 0 − x)
(x
=P 3P0 − V0 V
0
V0 ....(1)
P 0 x V0
=Mg = P00 x00γγ γ A Frestoring
x0γ nRT P
=Mg = (x0 −x0x)γ A P0FArestoring
=1− F [x0 − x ≈nRT
x= P0 0
P0 A = 1− F (x − x)[xγ 0 − xrestoring
≈ x0 ] nRT0 ] 3P0 − P = V 3P0 − V
V V
(x(x0 −−γx)x)γ restoring
0
0 V= 3P0 − V0 V 0
0 x0 V V0
P0 A = 1− x0γ γ Frestoring
γP Ax [x0 − x ≈ x0 ] P0 23P V − P0 V 2
P0 A =γP Ax = 0
10− (x0 − x) FFrestoring [x0 − x ≈ x0 ] = 3P0 V −nRT
nRT = P V 0
F = (x − x)γ x0 = 3P0 V − V00 V 2
nRT V0
γPx0Ax 0 V0
F = γP00 Ax 1 γP0 A
F =f =x10 γP0 A ∴f =
∴ x20π x M 2π x0M Differentiate w.r.t. Volume
1 γP00 A
∴ f =1 γP20 A 1 γP0 A
2
∴ f 1=2π γP0 Ax0M = 2P0 3V0
= 2π x M 2π MV0 3P0 − V =0 ⇒ V =
2π MV020 V0 2
1 γP0 A2
= 1 γP0 A
= 2π MV0 5R
Sol2π28: MV (D)0 ∆U = n CV ∆T = 1× ∆T Putting in equ (i)
2
P0 3V0 3P0
For BC, ΔT = –200 K P=
3P0 − =
V0 2 2
⇒ ΔU = –500R
Now, PV = xRT 9P0 V0 = nRT
4
1U
Sol 29: (C) p = 9P0 V0 9 P0 V0
3V = nRT ⇒ T =
4 4 xR
nRT 1 4 9 P0 V0
∝ T T=
V 3 4 xR R R
Sol
C 33:
= CV +(A) = C CV +
VT3 = const 1− n 1− n
CP =
−CC−vC CP −CC v− C CP − C v
C − CV
= = ; 1v− n
; V1 − n 1 − nP =
4 3 3 C − Cv
πR T =
const 1− n C − Cv
3 CP − C v C − CP
C − Cnv = 1C− − C =
1 n= 1− P = P
TR
= const ⇒ T ∝ C − Cv C −CC−v C v C − Cv
R
PV = n RT At constant pressure
m PV DQ = nCP DT
⇒ T= = constant
M R P∆V
= CP ×
mO mHe R
∴ 2
TO = THe
MO 2 MHe [PV = nRT ⇒ P DV = nR DT at constant pressure]
2
CP
mO mHe mO = × DW
⇒ 2
× T0 = × T0/2 ⇒ 2
=4 R
32 4 mHe
f
CP = 1 + R = 4R
nR 2
Sol 2: We have, V = T and we know that V – T
P And DW = 25 J
curve is a straight line. 4R
DQ = × 25 = 100 J
nR R
∴ Pressure is constant and its slope = = tan 53o
P
2 × 8.314 × 103 Pa L / moleK 4 Sol 6: He N2
⇒ =
P 3 m = 4 gm mN = 28 gm
2
⇒ P ≈ 1.25 × 10 Pa 4
4 28
∴ nHe= =1 mole nN2= =1 mole
4 28
Sol 3: PV γ = constant
⇒ TV γ−1 = constant f = 3 f=5
∴ DQ = n CV DT [At constant volume] Sol 10: From graph, it is clear that V and 1/T have a
linear relationship
= (nHe + nN )CV ∆T
2 mix
m
= 2 × 2R × 900 = 3600 R ∴V=
T
m is the slope of straight line
Sol 7: T = constant
⇒ VT = constant
∴ DU = 0
⇒ PV2 = constant = k (say)
Thus DW = –23.04 × 102 J
Vf Vf
Vf DW = −2
⇒ nRT ln
Vi
= –23.04 × 10 2
∫ PdV = ∫ kV dV
Vi Vi
0.25 Vf
⇒ 8.31 × T ln = –23.04 × 102 = −kV −1 = – [k Vf-1 – kVi-1]
0.50 Vi
Pf 2 Pi 2
Sol 9: C → Molar heat capacity of the process V Vf − Vi
2 f 2
aV aVf − aVi2 V Vi
By 1st law of thermodynamics:- = = = f
2 2 2
Vi
dQ = dU + dW
⇒ nC dT = nCv dT + dW …..(i) Pf Pi
(a = = )
Vf Vi
dW = PdV
Te αV Pf Vf − PV nR∆T
nRT ⇒ DW = i i
=
= dV = nR 0 dV 2 2
V V
nR
T = T0 eaV DU = nCV DT = DT
γ −1
∴ dT = aT0 eaV dV
DQ = DW + DU
dT
⇒ dV =
αT0 eαV nR∆T nR 1 1
= + DT = nRDT +
nR
2 γ −1 2 γ − 1
⇒ dW = dT
αV
nR∆T γ + 1
Substituting value of dW in (i) we get = ....(i)
2 γ − 1
nR
nCdT = nCV dT + dT We know P = aV
αV
R nRT aV 2
∴ C = CV + ⇒ = aV ⇒ T =
αV V nR
aV02 9aV02
∴ Ti = ad Tf =
R R
1 3 . 6 8 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
VA = V0 , TA = 400 K d
b
400nR
∴ PA =
V0
At B
400nR
VB = 2V0 , TB = 400 K, PB = T0
2V0
At C
400nR
VC = ?, TC = ?, PC =
2V0
∵ AC is adiabatic process
∴ PV γ = constant
1 On integrating with respect to dx we get
P γ 1
VA = ( 2 )1.5 V0 ⇒ VC =
22/3 V0 b −a b −a
⇒ VC = A dQ 1 dT
P
C ⇒ ∫ ×
dt 2π(b − x)
dx= ∫ −k
dx
× dx
0 a
PC VC
⇒ TC = =400 × (2)-1/3 dQ − ln
b −a
nR ⇒ × (b − x) =- kDT
dt 2π 0
For process AB
dQ b
DU = 0 .ln =−2πkl(T − T0 )
dt a
2V
DQ = DW = nR × (400) × ln 0
V0 ( )
2 dT b
πa l 3 ln =−2πkl(T − T0 )
dx a
= 400 nR ln 2
For process BC ⇒ On integrating w.r.t. t we get
nR b
DU = nCV DT = × [400 (2)-1/3 – 400] −πa2 ls ln T2
γ −1 t
a dT
= -2 × 400 n R [1-2-1/3]
⇒
2πkl ∫ T − T0
= ∫ dt
T⊥ 0
nγR
DQ = nCPDT = - × 400 [1-2-1/3]
γ −1 a2s b T −T
⇒ ln ln 0 1 = t
= -3 × 400 n R [1-2 ]
-1/3
2K a T0 − T2
P hysi cs | 13.69
T2 k=10/m-k
=0.4cm
Solid cast
iron (ks)
Tm
Liquid cast
This metalic
x iron (kks) T0=300K
disk s=60 J/kRk
T1 m=0.1kg
dQ dQ On integrating we get
=
dt solid cast iron dt liquid cast iron 350 t
ms dT
⇒-
kA ∫ T − 400 = ∫ dt
−k s A[T2 − Tm ] −kk s [Tm − T1 ] 300 0
⇒ =
−x x
−0.4 × 600 × 0.4 350 − 400
⇒t= ln
x k[Tm − T1 ] 10 × 0.04 300 − 400
⇒ =
−x T2 − Tm
≈ 166.3 sec
x k[Tm − T1 ] k(T1 − Tm )
⇒ = = Sol 17: (T – T0) = (T1 – T0) e-kt
(T2 − Tm ) + k(Tm − T1 ) k(T1 − Tm ) + (Tm − T2 )
1 T −T
⇒t= ln 1 0
dT k T − T0
Sol 15: (a) Temperature gradient =
dx
T0 : Surrounding temp
(0 − 100) o C
= = -100°C/m T1 : Initial temp of object
(1 − 0)m
T : Final temp of object
dT T − 100
(b) = = -100°C/m
dx x−0 1 80 − 20 1
∴5= ln = ln (2)
k 50 − 20 R
⇒ T = 100 (1 - x) °C
Total heat absorbed 1 60 − 20 1 1
=and t =ln ln(2)2 = 2 × ln2
k 30 − 20 k k
= ∫ mass × specific heat × change of temp
∴ t = 10 min
1 1
= ∫ (2dx)(10)(T − 0) = 20 ∫ 100(1 − x)dx Sol 18: A = 27 cm2 = 27 × 10-4 m2
0 0
k = 3700 N/m
1
x 2
= 2000 x − = 1000 J Pi = 1 atm = 105 Pa
2 0
Ti = 273 K
Vi = Ah.
dQ −kA(T − 400)
Sol 16: = Initial contraction in spring
dt
dT −kA(T − 400) Pi × A 105 × 27 × 10−4 27
⇒ ms = = = = m
dt k 3700 370
ms dT Pf = ?
⇒ = -dt
kA T − 400
1 3 . 7 0 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
Tf = ? ⇒ TC = 4TA
9hA DQAB = DU + DW
Vf =
16 = nRTA ln 4
Since, spring contract by h/16 length
DQBC = DU + DW
h 27
∴ Force exerted by spring = k + = nCV [TC – TA] = 3n CV TA
16 370
Avg. pressure due to spring (P0) ∴DQAB + DQBC = 27.7× 103 J
273k A V = V1
B
∴ P = P1
4 4V
VC 4V
∴ TC = TA = × TA
VA V
P hysi cs | 13.71
Exercise 2
P
P2
Single Correct Choice Type
Isobaric
Adiabatic Sol 1: (D)
P3
P1
Isothemal
n moles
n moles
V1 V1
V
Small vessel
DQprocess = 100 × 80 = 8000 cal P
DUprocess =0 cal Large vessel
∴ DW + DU = DQ T
∴ DW =8000 cal V = constant
and PV = nRT
Sol 21: Number of molecules hitting 1m2 of wall per
molecules nR
second (N)== nv cos θ ⇒P= T
m2 sec V
∴ P = mT where m is a constant
∴ P-T curve for both vessels will be linear but with
different slopes, since the constant volumes have
different values in both cases.
1
= × 1.6 × 105 × 1.1 × 10-3 = 88 J
2
x
(b) DWADC = DWAD + DWDC ⇒ DWDC = -3J
1
∴ - [ [PD + PB] × [VD – VC]] = -3
2 48-x
⇒ 0.9 × 10 (1.3 – Vc) × 10 = 6
5 -3
⇒ VC ≈ 1.23 L
(c) WCDA = –WADC = –85 J
1 3 . 7 2 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
Sol 4: (C) Pressure gradient will develop due to the Sol 7: (C) P = 0.7 × 105 N/m2
upward acceleration so V = 0.0049 m3
dP
= 2ρg CP
dh γ= = 1.4 = ratio of specific heats
CV
dP PM CV
= 2g ≠ 1.4 since, we know CP > CV
dh RT CP
Sol 8: (C) Equal mass of same gas ⇒ Equal moles Multiple Correct Choice Type
Initially
Sol 10: (A, B) eA = 0.01 and eB = 0.81
X n moles n moles Y AA = AB
T = 300 k T = 300 k
P = 1 atm P = 1 atm EA = EB
V = 42 A V = 42 A ⇒ eAσ AA TA4 = eB σ AB TB4
42cm 42cm ⇒ 0.01 TA4 = 0.81 TB4
Area of 1
cross-sextion = A ⇒ TB = × TA
3
Using gas equation we get 1
⇒ TB = × 5802 = 1934 K
3
PV = nRT
By Wien’s displacement law
⇒ 42 A = nR 300
lm T = constant = 2.93 × 10-3 mK
nR 42
⇒ = ……(i) ∴ λm = 0.5 mm
A 300 A
Pressure exerted = (change in momentum) × no. of Work done = ∫ P dV = area under P-V diag
molecules putting wall per unit area per sec Vi
= (3 × 10-27 kg/molecules) × (2 × 2000 m/s) × 3.33 × Thus, (work done)isothermal > (work done)adiabatic
1028 molecules/m2 sec)
≈ 4 × 105 Pa Sol 15: (A, B) Area under the curve gives the rate at
which heat per unit surface is radiated by the body.
Sol 14: (A, B, C) Isothermal process Adiabatic process i.e. total rate of heat radiation = (Area under the curve)
× (Surface area of the body)
PV = constant PV γ = constant
T m
⇒ = constant ⇒ TVr-1 =constant Sol 16: (A, C) ρ =
V V
V V
γ−1 4 3
⇒ρ× pr = m
∴ Tf = f × Ti ⇒ Tf = i Ti 3
Vi Vf
⇒ r ∝ (m)1/3
(Since there is expansion)
Vf Vi And area of sphere (A) ∝ r2
∴ > 1 ⇒ <1
Vi Vf ∴ A ∝ (m)2/3
γ−1
V AA
Thus i <1 ∴ = (4)2/3 = (2)4/3
Vf AB
eA A σ(T − T0 )4
Since γ-1 is +ve ∴ Ratio of heat loss =
eAB σ(T − T0 )4
(∴ Isothermal temp. > adiabatic temp.)
AA
γ = = (2)4/3
Vi V AB
Pf = × Pi Pf = i × Pi
Vf Vf By Newton’s law of cooling:
Vi dQ
(Since γ > 1 and < 1) = ms(COOH)2 = -k (T – T0)
Vf dt
γ dT −k
Vi V ⇒ = (T – T0)
∴ > i dt ms
Vf Vf
∴ Isothermal pressure > Adiabatic pressure
P hysi cs | 13.75
Where k = 4e A σ T03 nR
∴ V is a linear function of T with slope and passing
dT A through origin in V-T curve. P
∴ ∝
dt m Secondly for process CD: P-T will be a linear curve
dT AA passing through origin.
dt
A m (2)4/3
∴ = A = = 2-2/3
dT AB 4 Comprehension Type
dt B mB
Paragraph 1:
Sol 17: (A, C) Sol 20: (A, B) Area under the curve gives the rate at
o o o o
which heat per unit surface is radiated by the body.
-10 C 0C 0C 100 C
50 gm 250cal 50 gm 4000cal 50 gm 5000cal 50 gm i.e. total rate of heat radiation = (Area under the curve)
ice ice water water × (Surface area of the body)
o o
0C 100 C
Calorimeter 150cal 1.5 gm
Sol 21: (A, B, C, D) lm T = constant [By Wien’s
1.5 gm
water
Displacement Law]
water
T1
dE
∴ Heat absorbed by ice and calorimeter to reach 100° T2
T1>T2>T3
d
C water
= 250 + 4000 + 5000 + 150 = 9400 cal T3
St. line Sol 23: (B) Rate at which heat flows from A
= Rate at which heat flows from B
Thus, from graph it can be seen, that temperature first
increases and then decrease. dQ dQ
⇒ =
dt A dt B
Sol 19: (A, B) Process AB is isochoric: - i.e. P = constant
TA TB TA RA 1
PV = nRT ⇒ = ⇒ = =
RA RB TB RB 3
nR
⇒V= T
P
1 3 . 7 6 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
2×5 + 5×3 25
= = = 3.57
Paragraph 3: 2+5 7
dQ 2 2
Sol 25: (B) = kAV DT Sol 32: (C)∴ rmix = 1 + = 1+ = 1.56
dt initially fmix 25 / 7
PV(1 − 21−γ )
Sol 29: (D) wCA = 0 since volume is constant ⇒W=
γ −1
∴ wABCA = wAB + wBC + wCA = (90) + (-60) + 0 = 30 J
∆U nCV ∆T C 1
nHeMHe + nH MH f= = = V =
∆Q nCp ∆T Cp γ
Sol 30: (D) Equivalent molar mass = 2 2
nHe + nH
2
5 7
5× 4 + 2× 2 24 or f = as γ =
= = gm 7 5
5+2 7
P hysi cs | 13.77
Sol 2: (A) Average kinetic energy per molecule per Area under the graph gives the work done by the gas
1
degree of freedom = kT. Since, both the gases are
2 P
diatomic and at same temperature (300 K), both will A 2
have the same number of rotational degree of freedom
i.e., two. Therefore, both the gases will have the same
average rotational kinetic energy per molecule 1
1 3
=2× kT or kT
2
V
Thus, ratio will be 1: 1. V1 V2
Sol 3: (D) A is free to move, therefore, heat will be (Area)2 > (Area) > (Area)3
supplied at constant pressure
∴ W2 > W1 > W3
∴ dQA = nCP dTA …… (i)
B is held fixed, therefore, heat will be supplied at Sol 6: (C) For an ideal gas : PV = nRT
constant volume. For P = constant
∴ dQB = nCVdTB …… (ii) PDV = nRDT
But dQA = dQB (given)
∆V nR nR V
∴ = = =
Cp ∆T p nRT T
nCpDTA = nCVDTB ∴ dTB = dTA
V
CV
∆V 1 1
∴ = or δ =
= γ(dTA) [γ = 1.4 (diatomic)] V∆T T T
(dTA = 30 K)
= (1.4)(30 K)
∴ dTB = 42 K
γRT T
v=
M
Therefore, δ is inversely proportional to temperature T.
γ i.e., when T increases, δ decreases and vice-versa.
∴v∝ (T is same for both the gases)
M
Hence, δ-T graph will be a rectangular hyperbola as
vN γN shown in the above figure.
MHe 7 /5 4
∴ 2
= 2
. = = 3 /5
vHe γHe MN 5 / 3 28
2 Sol 7: (B) In adiabatic process
7 dP P
γN = (Diatomic) Slope of P-V graph, =–γ
2 5 dV V
5 Slope ∝ γ (with negative sign)
γHe = (Monoatomic)
3 From the given graph,
(slope)2 > (slope)1
Sol 5: (A) The corresponding p–V graphs (also called
indicator diagram) in three different processes will be ∴ g2 > g1
as shown:
Therefore, 1 should correspond to O2 (γ = 1.4) and 2
should correspond to He (γ = 1.67).
1 3 . 7 8 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
Sol 8: (A) DWAB = PDV = (10)(2 – 1) = 10 J Sol 12: (A) Since it is open from top. Pressure will be P0.
DWBC = 0 (as V = constant)
Sol 13: (D) Let p be the pressure in equilibrium.
From first law of thermodynamics PA
DQ = DW + DU
DU = 0 (process ABCA is cyclic)
∴ DQ = DWAB + DWBC + DWCA Mg P0A
∴ DWCA = DQ – DWAB – DWBC
Then, PA = P0A – Mg
= 5 – 10 – 0 = – 5 J
Mg Mg
P = P0 – = p0 –
Sol 9: (C) Temperature of liquid oxygen will first increase A πR 2
in the same phase. Then, phase change (liquid to gas)
Applying, P1V1 = P2V2
will take place. During which temperature will remain
constant. After that temperature of oxygen in gaseous ∴ P0 (2AL) = (P)(AL’)
state will further increase.
2P0L P0
Sol 10: (C) Slope of adiabatic process at a given state ∴ L’ = = (2L)
(P, V, T) is more than the slope of isothermal process. P Mg
The corresponding P-V graph for the two processes is P0 − 2
πR
as shown in figure.
P πR 2
= 0 (2L)
πR 2P − Mg
P 0
C
P3
p
V
V1 V2 1 2
Sol 15: (B, D) In case of free expansion under adiabatic Sol 16: (B, D) For monoatomic gas
conditions, change in internal energy DU = 0 3 5
Cv
= =R, Cp R
∴ Internal energy and temperature will remain constant. 2 2
5 7
1 For diatomic gas,
= Cv =R, Cp R
(B) P ∝ 2 5
V2
∴ PV2 = constant ……… (i) Sol 17: A → q; B → p, r; C → p, s; D → q, s
nRT 2
or V = constant (A) P-V graph is not rectangular hyperbola. Therefore,
V process A – B is not isothermal.
1
∴ T ∝ ……… (ii) (B) In process BCD, product of PV (therefore temperature
V
and internal energy) is decreasing. Further, volume is
If volume is doubled, temperature will decrease as per decreasing. Hence, work done is also negative. Hence,
equation (ii). Q will be negative or heat will flow out of the gas.
Further, molar heat capacity in process PVx = constant is (C) WABC = positive
R (D) For clockwise cycle on p- v diagram with P on y-axis,
C = Cv +
1– x net work done is positive.
From equation (i) , x = 2
Sol 18: (D) At low pressure and high temperature inter
3 R R
∴C= R+ =+ molecular forces become ineffective. So a real gas
2 1– 2 2 behaves like an ideal gas.
Since, molar heat capacity is positive, according to
Q = nCDT, Q will be negative if DT is negative. Or gas
Sol 19: (A, B) V
loses heat if temperature is decreasing. 4V0 B
1
(C) P ∝
4/3
V V0 A
C
PV4/3 = constant
T0 T
nRT 4/3 f
∴ V = constant U = nRT
V 2
1
∴T∝ Where f, n, R are constants. Also temperature T is same
1/3
V at A and B.
Further, with increase in volume temperature will
decrease. ∴ UA =UB
4 Also,
Here, x =
3 Vf 4V0
Also, ∆W=
AB nRT0 ln = nRT0 ln = nRT0 ln4
= P0 V0 ln4
3 R Vi V0
∴C= R+ = – 1.5 R
2 4
1–
3 Sol 20: (A) TV λ -1 = C
As molar heat capacity is negative, Q will be positive T1(5.6)2/3 = T2 (0.7)2/3 ⇒ T2 = T1(8)2/3 = 4T1
if DT is negative. Or gas gains heat with decrease in
nR∆T 9
temperature. ∴∆w(work done on the system)
= = RT
γ −1 8 1
(D) T ∝ PV
3RT
In expansion from V1 to 2V1, product of PV is increasing. Sol 21: (D) Vrms =
M
Therefore, temperature will increase. Or DU = +ve.
Further, in expansion work done is also positive.
MAr 40
Hence, Q = W + DU = +ve or, gas gains heat. Required ratio
= = = 10 3.16
=
MHe 4
1 3 . 8 0 | Kinetic Theor y of Gases and Thermodynamics
m m (3kW − P) × 3 × 3600
Sol 22: (D) PV
PV = nRT = =RTnRT = M RT 30 − 10 =
M 120 × 4.2 × 103
⇒ PM = ρRT⇒ PM = ρRT
20 × 120 × 42 2800
ρ1 P1M1 ρ1P1= P1M 1M1= P14 × 2 M18 = 4 × 2 = 8 3kW − P
= =
3 × 36 3
= =ρ P×M
= × M =
ρ2 P2M2 2P2 2 M 2 P23 3 2 9 3 3 9
2
Here ρ1 and ρ2 are the densities of gases in the vessel P = 3000 - 933 = 2067 W
containing the mixture.
Sol 26: (6) P = P0 − ρgh = 98 × 103 N/m2
Sol 23: (2) Ub = 200 J, Ui =100 J
Process iaf 500 cm
Process W (in Joule) ∆U (in Joule) Q (in Joule)
500 mm
ia 0 H
af 200 200 mm
Net 300 200 500
5 3 5 3
Sol 28: A → p, r, t; B → p, r; C → q, s; D → r, t
= 1× RT + 1× RT==1×4RT
2
RT + 1× RT = 4RT
2
2 2
⇒ 2C T = 4RT Process A → B → Isobaric compression
⇒ 2C T= 4RT
Vmix
V mix
Process B → C → Isochoric process
Average energy per mole =2RT ⇒ CV =2R Process C → D → Isobaric expansion
mix
1 1
Sol 31: (A) ρ V2 = ρ V2
2 a a 2
For given Va
ρa
V ∝
ρ
kx
Sol 32: (B or A, B, C) P (pressure of gas)= P1 +
A
kx2 (P − P )(V − V1 )
W= ∫ PdV = P1(V2 − V1 ) +
2
= P1(V2 − V1 ) + 2 1 2
2
3
∆U= nCV ∆T= (P V − P V )
2 2 2 1 1
Q= W + ∆U
PHYSICS
FOR JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
SECOND
EDITION
Exhaustive Theory
(Now Revised)
Formula Sheet
9000+ Problems
based on latest JEE pattern
PlancEssential
Questions recommended for revision
14. H E AT T R A N S F E R
1. INTRODUCTION
Heat can be transformed from one place to another place by the three processes - conduction, convection and
radiation. In conduction, the heat flows from a place of higher temperature to a place of lower temperature through
a stationary medium. The molecules of the medium oscillate about their equilibrium positions more violently at
a place of higher temperature and collide with the molecules of adjacent position, thus transferring a part of
their energy to these molecules which now vibrate more violently. Thus heat can be transmitted by collision of
molecules. In metals, the conduction of heat takes place by the movement of free electrons. In the cases of liquids
and gases, the heat is transferred not only by collision but also by motion of heated molecules which carry the heat
in such media. This process is called convection. When a liquid in a vessel is heated, the lighter molecules present
in the lower layer of the liquid get heated which rise to the surface of the liquid and cold molecules at the surface
go towards the bottom of vessel. These are convection currents and are the major means of heat transport in fluids.
Radiation is mode of transfer of heat in which the heat travels directly from one place to another without the role
of any intervening medium. The heat from the sun propagates mostly through vacuum to reach the earth by the
process of radiation.
2. CONDUCTION
The figure shows a rod whose ends are in thermal contact with a hot reservoir at T1 > T2
temperature T1 and a cold reservoir at temperatureT2 . The sides of the rod are insulated, T1 T2
hence heat transfer is only along the rod and not through its sides. The molecules at the 0
hot reservoir have greater vibrational energy. This energy is transferred by collisions to
the atoms at the end face of the rod. These atoms in turn transfer the energy to their
neighbors further along the rod. Such transfer of heat through a substance in which (Hot) (Cold)
heat is transported without direct mass transport is called conduction.
Figure 14.1
The quantity of heat conducted Q in time t across a slab of length L, area of cross-
section A and steady state temperature θ1 and θ2 at respective hot and cold ends is
kA(θ1 − θ1 )t
given by Q = , where k is the coefficient of thermal conductivity which is equal to the quantity of heat
L
flowing per unit time through unit area of cross-section of a material per unit length along the direction of flow of
heat.
Units of k are kilocalorie/meter second degree centigrade or J.m-1sec-1 K-1. In C.G.S. units,
k is expressed in calcm-1 (℃)-1 sec-1 1 2
dθ L
The temperature Gradient ⁄ (unit distance) = −
dx Figure 14.2
1 4 . 2 | Heat Transfer
dθ ∆Q dT
∴ Q = −kA t ; = − kA
dx
∆ t dx
The quantity dT/dx is called the temperature gradient. The minus sign indicates that dT/dx is negative along the
direction of the heat flow, i.e., heat flows from a higher temperature to a lower one.
dT ∆t ∆T
= H= =
dx L / kA R
L
Here ∆T = temperature difference (TD) and R= = Thermal resistance of the rod.
kA
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
This relation is mathematically equivalent to Ohm’s Law and can be used very effectively in solving
problems effectively by considering temperature analogous to potential and heat transferred per unit
time as current.
Nivvedan (JEE 2009, AIR 113)
dQ dq
Heat current H =
=Rate of heat flow = Rate of charge flow
Electric current i =
dt dt
∆T T(temp diff) ∆V PD(potential diff) i
H =
= =i = ; R=
R R R R σA
L
where R= and k = Thermal conductivity σ = Electrical conductivity.
kA
dQ dm TD d
Using = L ; = L {Aρy} (A = Area of pond)
dt dt R dt
00−−((−−TT)) dy
dy dy kT 1
∴
∴ =
LA
=LAρρ.. ∴− = . where L -> Latent heat of fusion
((yy kA
kA)) dt
dt dt ρ Ly
ρL y 1 ρL 2
And hence time taken by ice to grow a thickness y t =
kT ∫0
ydy or t = y
2 kT
Time does not depend on the area of pond.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Time taken by ice to grow on ponds is independent of area of the pond and it is only dependent only
the thickness of ice sheet.
Vaibhav Krishnan (JEE 2009, AIR 22)
P hysi cs | 14.3
2
r
r1 r+dr
1
2
Figure 14.5
∴ Total heat flowing per second,
2πk ( θ1 − θ2 ) 2πk ( θ1 − θ2 )
Q= ; Q =
r2 r
dr ln 2
∫ r r1
r1
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Illustration 1: One face of a copper cube of edge 10 cm is maintained at 100℃ and the opposite face is maintained
at 0℃. All other surfaces are covered with an insulating material. Find the amount of heat flowing per second
through the cube. Thermal conductivity of copper is 385 Wm-1 ℃-1. (JEE MAIN)
T − T2 (100°C − 0°C )
The amount of heat flowing per second is
∆Q
∆t
= KA 1 =
X
(385Wm−1
)
°C−1 × ( 0.1m) ×
2
0.1m
= 3850W.
Illustration 2: A cylindrical block of length 0.4 m and area of cross-section 0.04m2 is placed coaxially on a thin
metallic disc of mass 0.4 kg and of the same cross-section. The upper face of the cylinder is maintained at the
constant temperature of 400 K and initial temperature of the disc is 300 K. If the thermal conductivity of the
material of the cylinder is 100 watt/m-K and the specific heat of the material of the disc is 600 J/kg-K, how long
will it take for the temperature of the disc to increase to 350 K? Assume, for the purpose of calculation, the thermal
P hysi cs | 14.5
conductivity of the disc to be very high and the system to be thermally insulated except for the upper face of the
cylinder.
(JEE ADVANCED)
400 K
0.4n
300 K
Figure 14.7
Sol: Write the equation rate of heat transfer at any temperature ‘T’ for the disc. Rate of heat transfer proportional
to rate of change in temperature.
As heat is conducted from the cylinder to the disc, the temperature of the disc increases. If the temperature of the
dQ KA ( 400 − T )
disc at some instant is T, then rate of flow of heat through the cylinder at that instant is = … (i)
dt L
If dT is the further increase in the temperature of the disc in the infinitesimal time interval dt,
dQ dT
then = ms … (ii)
dt dt
Where m is the mass of the disc and c is its specific heat.
From equations (i) and (ii)
KA ( 400 − T ) dT msL dT
= ms ; dt =
L dt KA 400 − T
350
msL dT msL 400 − 300
Integrating we get, =t ∫ = × 2.303log10
KA 300 400 − T KA 400 − 350
6. CONVECTION
In this process, actual motion of heated material results in transfer of heat from one place to another. For example,
in a hot air blower, air is heated by a heating element and is blown by a fan. The air carries the heat wherever it
goes. When water is kept in a vessel and heated on a stove, the water at the bottom gets heated due to conduction
through the vessel’s bottom. Its density decreases and consequently it rises. Thus, the heat is carried from bottom
to the top by the actual movement of the parts of the water. If the heated material is forced to move, say by
a blower or by a pump, the process of heat transfer is called forced convection. If the material moves due to
difference in density, it is called natural or free convection.
1 4 . 6 | Heat Transfer
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
The convection currents created in a room by a radiator means that the warm air is circulated around and
the warming is more uniform than just being the air around the radiator. When heating water on a stove,
the convection currents created by the rising hot water means that all the water gets heated instead of
just the water at the very bottom of the pan. Some rainfall is also caused by moist air being heated and
rising, then cooling quickly and allowing the water vapor to condense into rain.
Anand K (JEE 2011, AIR 47)
7. RADIATION
The third means of energy transfer is radiation which does not require a medium. The best known example of this
process is the radiation from Sun. All objects radiate energy continuously in the form of electromagnetic waves.
The rate at which an object radiates energy is proportional to the fourth power of its absolute temperature. This is
known as the Stefan’s law and is expressed in equation form as P = σAeT 4
Here P is the power in watts(J/s) radiated by object, A is the surface area in m2 ,e lies between 0 and 1 and
is called emissivity of the object and σ is universal constant called Stefan’s constant, which has the value,
=σ 5.67 × 10−8 W / m2 − K 4 .
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Always remember that black body is a perfect absorber and emitter of light. At temperatures higher than
the surrounding, it is the most shining thing and at lower temperatures it is the darkest thing.
There is no perfect black body. Materials like black velvet or lamp black come close to being ideal black
bodies, but the best practical realization of an ideal black body is a small hole leading into a cavity, as
this absorbs 98% of the radiation incident on them.
GV Abhinav (JEE 2012, AIR 329)
Illustration 3: A solid copper sphere of density ρ, specific heat c and radius r is at temperature T1. It is suspended
inside a chamber whose walls are at temperature 0K. What is the time required for the temperature of sphere to
drop to T2? Take the emissivity of the sphere to be equal to e. (JEE MAIN)
dT dT
The rate of loss of energy due to radiation, P = σAeT 4 . This rate must be equal to mc Hence, −mc σAeT 4
=
dt dt
Negative sign is used as temperature decreases with time. In this equation,
T
ρcr 1 1
1
4 3 2 dT 3eσ 4 ρcr 2 dT
m = πr ρ and A= 4 πr ∴ − = T or − ∫ dt = ∫= ; t −
3 dt ρcr 3eσ T T 4 9eσ T3 T3
0 1 2 1
As a perfectly black body absorbs all radiations incident on it, the absorptive power of perfectly black body is
maximum and unity.
Kirchhoff’s law tells that if a body has high emissive power, it should also have high absorptive power to have the
ratio e/a same. Similarly, a body having low emissive power should have low absorptive power. Kirchhoff’s law may
be easily proved by a simple argument as described below.
Consider two bodies A and B of similar geometrical shapes placed in an enclosure. Suppose A is any random body
and B is a blackbody. In thermal equilibrium, both the bodies will have the same temperature as the temperature
of the enclosure. Suppose an amount ∆U of radiation falls on the body A in a given time ∆t. As A and B have the
same geometrical shapes, the radiation falling on the blackbody B is also ∆U. The blackbody absorbs all of this ∆U.
As the temperature of the blackbody remains constant, it also emits an amount ∆U of radiation in that time. If the
emissive power of the blackbody is e0, we have ∆U ∝ E0 or ∆U = kE0 ... (i)
where k is constant.
Let the absorptive power of A be a. Thus, it absorbs an energy of a ∆U of the radiation falling on it in time ∆t. As
its temperature remains constant, it must also emit the same energy a ∆U in that time. If the emissive power of the
body A is e, we have a ∆U=ke ... (ii)
The same proportionality constant k is used in (i) and (ii) because the two bodies have identical geometrical shapes
and radiation emitted in the same time ∆t is considered.
From ( i ) and ( ii ),
E E E(body)
a= or = E0 or = E(blackbody)
E0 a a(body)
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
It can be thought like, good absorber is a good emitter because at some point of time, it might have
stored energy because it is a good absorber. Now as soon as the temperature of the surrounding
becomes low than that of the body, this energy starts decreasing until the steady state is reached. Hence,
it must be a good emitter too.
Good absorbers for a particular wavelength are also good emitters of the same wavelength.
Anurag Saraf (JEE 2011, AIR 226)
A body which is not a blackbody, emits less radiation than given by equation (i). It is, however, proportional to T 4 .
The energy emitted by such a body per unit time is written as u= eσAT 4 … (ii)
Where e is a constant for the given surface having a value between 0 and 1. This constant is called the emissivity
of the surface. It is zero for completely reflecting surface and is unity for a blackbody.
E(body)
Using Kirchhoff’s law =a … (i)
E(blackbody)
Where a is the absorptive power of the body. The emissive power E is proportional to the energy radiated per unit
eσAT 4
time, that is, proportional to u. Using above equations, = a or e=a.
σAT 4
P hysi cs | 14.9
Illustration 4: A blackbody of surface area 10cm2 is heated to 127℃ and is suspended in a room at temperature
27℃. Calculate the initial rate of loss of heat from the body to the room. (JEE MAIN)
Thus, u − u0= (5.67 × 10−8 Wm−2K −4 )(10 × 10−4 m2 )(400 4 − 300 4 )K 4 = 0.99W
Illustration 5: Energy falling on 1.0 area placed at right angles to a sun beam just outside the earth’s atmosphere
is 1.35 K joule in one second. Find sun’s surface temperature. Mean distance of earth from sun is 1.50 × 108 km ,
mean distance of sun= 1.39 × 106 km and Stefan’s constant= 5.67 × 10−8 watt m−2K −4 . (JEE MAIN)
Sol: σ Asun T 4 =
S × Aearth
The temperature of the sun is given by
2
4 S R
T =
σ r
R 1.50 × 108 km
= = 215.8
r 0.695 × 106 km
dQ
Newton’s law of cooling gives = −k ( θ1 − θ2 ) where k is constant.
dt
dQ dθ
If a body of mass m and specific heat s loses a temperature dθ in time dt, then = ms = −k(θ1 − θ2 )
dt dt
Illustration 6: A liquid cools from 70℃ to 60℃ in 5 minutes. Calculate the time taken by the liquid to cool from
60℃ to 50℃, if the temperature of the surrounding is constant at 30℃. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Use newton’s law cooling and taking temperature of the body is average of initial and final value.
70°C + 60°C
The average temperature of the liquid in the first case is θ1 = = 65°C
2
The average temperature difference from the surrounding is θ1 − θ0= 65°C − 30°C= 35°C .
dθ1 70°C − 60°C
The rate of fall of temperature is − = 2°Cmin−1 .
=
dt 5mins
2
From Newton’s law of cooling, 2°Cmin−1 =bA(35°C) Or bA = … (i)
35min
60°C + 50°C
In the second case, the average temperature of the liquid is θ2 = = 55°C
2
So that, θ2 − θ0= 55°C − 30°C= 25°C
dθ 60°C − 50°C 10°C
If it takes a time t to cool down from 60℃ to 50℃, the rate of fall in temperature is =
− 2 = .
dt t t
10°C 2
From Newton’s law of cooling and (i), = × 25°C Or t = 7min.
t 35min
Illustration 7: At midnight, with the temperature inside your house at 70℉ and the temperature outside at 20℉,
your furnace breaks down. Two hours later, the temperature in your house has fallen to 50℉. Assume that the
outside temperature remains constant at 20℉. At what time will the inside temperature of your house reach 40℉?
(JEE ADVANCED)
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Newton’s law of cooling can also be thought in the context of Stefan-Boltzmann law by considering
the temperature difference between the body and the surroundings very close to zero, i.e. it can be
considered as a special case of the latter.
Vijay Senapathi (JEE 2011, AIR 71)
λmaxT=b . Here b is a constant called Wien’s constant. The value of this constant in SI unit is 2.898 × 10−3 m-K. Thus,
λmax α1/ T
Here λmax is the wavelength corresponding to the maximum spectral emissive power eλ.
The second effect is that the total amount of energy the black body emits per unit area per unit time (=σT4)
increases with fourth power of absolute temperature T.
This is also known as emissive power. We know
∞
=e ∫0 e=
λ dλ Area under graph, eλ Vs λ = σT 4
Area ∝ T 4 =
A2 (2)
= 4
16A1
Thus, if the temperature of the black body is made two fold, λmax remains half while the area becomes 16 times.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Have you ever wondered how do scientists calculate the temperature of sun and other stars? It is through
this law.
Ankit Rathore (JEE Advanced 2013, AIR 158)
Illustration 8: The light from the sun is found to have a maximum intensity near the wavelength of 470 nm.
Assuming that the surface of the sun emits as a blackbody, calculate the temperature of the surface of the sun.
(JEE MAIN)
Sol: Formula of Wien’s displacement law.
0.288 cmK
For a blackbody, λm T=0.288 cmK. =
Thus, T = 6130K
470nm
Illustration 9: What is the wavelength of the brightest part of the light from our next closest star, Proxima Centauri?
Proxima Centauri is a red dwarf star about 4.2 light years away from us with an average surface temperature of
3,042 Kelvin? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: λmax T =
b
1 4 . 1 2 | Heat Transfer
We don’t really need the distance to solve this. All we need is the surface temperature to plug into our Wien’s law
equation
0.0029meters − K
Wavelength λmax in meters = which is 0.000000953 meters.
3.042K
We can convert this to nanometers and we get a peak wavelength of 953 nm.
Illustration 10: Two bodies A and B have thermal emissivity of 0.1 and 0.81 respectively. The outer surface areas
of the two bodies are identical. These two bodies emit total radiative power at the same rate. The wavelength λB
corresponding to the maximum spectral radiancy in the radiation from B is 1.0 µm larger than the wavelength λ A
corresponding to the maximum spectral radiancy in the radiation from A. If the temperature of body A is 5802 K,
find (a) temperature of (B) and (b) λB . (JEE MAIN)
e e
A2
T 2T
A1
m m
2
Figure 14.9
Sol: By equating their emissive power, ratio of temperatures (a) could be calculated.
(a) Power radiated from A= PA= EA A= eA σTA4 A
= PB= EA A= eB σTB4 A
Power radiated from B
Where A is surface area of both the bodies as P1 = P2 , eA TA4 = eB TB4
4
T 0.01 1 TB 1 1 1
∴ 0.01TA4 = 0.81TB4 ∴ B = = ; = or TB = × TA = × 5802 =1934K
TA 0.81 81 TA 3 3 3
PROBLEM-SOLVING TACTICS
1. Problems of conduction can be easily solved by making analogy with current electricity (Problems like
calculation of net conductance of series and parallel connection. Actually, the way in which steady state is
achieved in heat transfer and current electricity is very similar. At steady state considering a cylindrical rod,
potential at each point becomes constant in current electricity and so does temperature in heat transfer.
The amount of charge transferred per unit time is related in same way to potential as that of heat energy
transferred relates to temperature difference and the constant of proportionality have similar properties.)
2. Most of the problems involve concepts of integration, so be careful with infinitesimal elements. Basically, try
to be physically involved in the problem and understand it event by event so that you learn more. Toughness
in most of the questions is involved only in its mathematical analysis.
3. Problems from radiation and law of cooling also generally involve integration which becomes necessary to
do at times. However an approximate approach is also available in case of law of cooling useful in solving
problems without involving integration.
4. Laws must be carefully known because many questions directly focus on understanding of laws rather than
involving calculations (Example - If temperature of a body is doubled, find the ratio of maximum wavelength
for final and initial state.)
5. Noting down the known and asked quantities and thinking of a link between them will always prove to be a
good way.
6. Questions from this topic usually come in a hybrid involving concepts of other topics like thermodynamics,
gaseous state and calorimetry. So one must be strong in their concepts too!!
FORMULAE SHEET
Note: If specific heat of any substance is zero, it can be considered always to be in steady
state.
4. Ohm’s law for thermal Let the two ends of rod of length L is maintained T1 T2
Conduction in Steady
state (
At temp T1 and T2 T1 > T2 ) L
dQ T1 − T2 L
Thermal Current = . Where R Th =
dT R Th KA
(L is length of material, K is coefficient of thermal conductivity, A is area of cross- section)
5. Differential form of T T-dT
dQ dT
Ohm’s law = KA
dT dx
dT
= Temperature gradient
dx dx
6. Convection Heat transfer due to movement of medium particles.
1 4 . 1 4 | Heat Transfer
7. Radiation Every body radiates electromagnetic radiation of all possible wavelength at all temp>0 K
8. Stefan’s Law
Rate of heat emitted by a body at temp T K from per unit area E = σT 4 J / sec/ m2
dQ
Radiation power = P = σAT 4 watt
dT dQ
If body is placed in a surrounding of temperature Ts σA(T 4 − Ts 4 ) valid only for
=
black body
dT
heat from general body
Emissivity or emmisive power e =
heat from black body
If temp of body falls by dT in time dt
=
dT eAσ 4
dt ms
( )
T − Ts 4 (dT/dt=Rate of cooling)
T=Temperature of body T2
m3
m2
m3
Solved Examples
(d) Let be θ°C the temperature at 25 cm from hot end conductivity of copper is 401 W/m-K and that of
then aluminium is 237 W/m-K
o
100 C oC 0oC
o o
100 C 20 C
0.25 m
2.0 m
(θ – 100)=(Temperature gradient) × (Distance)
θ − 100 = ( −50)(0.25) Sol: This is parallel combination and thermal current
θ 87.5°C
= would be sum of both cubes.
(a) Thermal resistance of aluminum cube
Example 2: In a murder investigation, a corpse was 1 (3 × 10 −2 )
found by a detective at exactly 8 P.M. Being alert, the = R1 = or R1 = 0.14K / W
kA (237)(3 × 10−2 )2
detective also measured the body temperature and
found it to be 70℉. Two hours later, the detective and Thermal resistance of aluminum cube
measured the body temperature again and it found to
be 60℉. If the room temperature is 50℉, and assuming (3 × 10 −2 )
= R2 = 0.08K / W
that the body temperature of the person before death (401)(3 × 10 −2 )2
was 98.6℉, at what time did the murder occur?
As these two resistances are in parallel, their equivalent
resistance will be
Sol: Newton’s law of cooling is used.
With time 0 taken to be 8 P.M., we have the boundary= R1R 2 (0.14)(0.08)
R = = 0.05K / W
value problem R1 + R 2 (0.14) + (0.08)
Temperature difference
T(0) = 70 Thermal Current H =
dT Thermal resistance
= k(50 − T);
dt T(2) = 60
(100 − 20)
t2 = = 1.6 × 103 W
1 0.05
Whose solution is = T 50 + 20
2 (b) In parallel thermal current distributes in the inverse
ratio of resistance.
We would like to find the value of t for which T(t)=98.6.
Solving the equation H R Al R1 0.14
Hence, Cu = = = = 1.75
t 2 HAl R Cu R 2 0.08
1
50 + 20 = 98.6
2 Example 4: One end of a copper rod of length 1 m
ln(48.6 20) and area of cross section 4.0 × 10−4 m2 is maintained at
Given us t 2
= ≈ −2.56. 100℃. At the end of rod ice is kept at 0℃. Neglecting
ln(1 2)
the loss of heat from the surroundings, find the mass
It appears that this person was murdered at about 530 of ice melted in 1 h. Given= k cu 401W m − K and
P.M. or so. 5
L f 3.35 × 10 J kg .
=
t2
1
From the function =
T 50 + 20 Sol: Find total heat transfer in 1 hr time through rod
2
and hence, melted ice can be found.
Over the time interval −2.56. ≤ t ≤ 2.56.
Thermal resistance of the rod,
Example 3: Two metal cubes with 3 cm edges of copper o
100 C 0oC
and aluminium are arranged as shown in fig. find H
(a) The total thermal current from one reservoir to the 1 1.0
R
= = = 6.23K W
other kA (401)(4 × 10−4 )
(b) The ratio of the thermal current carried by the Temperature difference
copper cube to that of the aluminium cube. Thermal Heat Current H =
Thermal resistance
1 4 . 1 6 | Heat Transfer
θ1 − θ2 θ1 + θ2
= α − θ0
t 2 Heat
Flow
For the given conditions, K1 K2 T2
T1
60 − 40 60 + 40
=
α − 10 … (i) L1 L2
10 2
(a) Rate of flow of heat
Let be the temperature after next 10 minutes.
40 − θ 40 + θ (b) Temperature of interface
Then =
α − 10 … (ii)
10 2 (c) Equivalent thermal conductivity
Solving Eqs. ( i ) and ( ii ), we get θ= 28°C Sol: Consider as thermal current where thermal resistors
in series.
Example 6: Two bodies A and B have thermal emissivity
(a) If the thermal resistances of the two plates are R1
of 0.01 and 0.81 respectively. The outer surface areas
and R2 respectively then as plates are in series.
of the two bodies are same. The two bodies emit
total radiant power at the same rate. The wavelength L1 L2
RS = R1 + R 2 = +
corresponding to maximum spectral radiancy from AK1 AK 2
B is shifted from the wavelength corresponding to L
maximum spectral radiancy in the radiation from A by As R = and so
AK
1.0 µm. If the temperature of A is 5802 K. calculate (a)
The temperature of B, dQ ∆Q (T1 − T2 ) A(T1 − T2 )
H
= = = =
(b) Wavelength λB dt R (R1 + R 2 ) L1 L2
+
K1 K 2
Sol: Compare the emissive power of both and then
temperature and λm of B can be calculated, Use (b) If T is the common temperature of interface then
λB − λ A = 1µm . as in series, rate of flow of heat remains same. i.e.
H H=
= 1 ( H2 )
(a) PA = PB ∴ eA σA A TA4 = eB σAB TB4
T1 − T2 T1 − T T1R 2 + T2R1
1 = i.e. T =
eA 4 R1 + R 2 R1 (R1 + R 2 )
∴ TB =
TA … (A A = AB )
eB
P hysi cs | 14.17
R= R1 + R 2 or
(L1 + L2=) R1 + R 2 The amount of heat transferred through the slab to the
S
AK eq ice in one hour is
=K eq =
(L1 + L2 ) L1 + L2 As R = L Q =(4.8 × 10−3 kg) × (3.36 × 105 Jkg−1 )
A(R1 + R 2 ) L1 L2 AK = 4.8 × 336J.
+
K1 K 2 Using the equation Q =
KA(θ1 − θ2 )t
x
Example 8: One end of a rod of length 20cm is 2
K(3600 cm) (100° C)(3600 s)
inserted in a furnace at 800K. The sides of the rod are 4.8 × 336J =
10cm
covered with an insulating material and the other end
emits radiation like a black body. The temperature of 1.24 × 10−3 Wm−1° C−1
or K =
this end is 750K in the steady state. The temperature
of the surrounding air is 300K. Assuming radiation is
Example 10: An icebox made of 1.5 cm thick
the only important mode of energy transfer between
Styrofoam has dimensions 60cm × 60cm × 30cm . It
the surrounding and the open end of the rod. Find the
contains ice at 0℃ and kept in a room at 40℃. Find
thermal conductivity of the rod. Stefan constant
the rate at which ice is melting. Latent heat of fusion of
= 6.0 × 10−3 W / m2 − K 4
σ ice = 3.36 × 105 Jkg−1 and thermal conductivity of
Styrofoam = 0.04Wm−1°C−1 .
750 K
Furnace
air temp Sol: Heat transfer through Styrofoam will melt the ice.
800 K
20 cm 300 K The total surface area of the walls
= 2(60cm × 60cm + 60cm × 30cm + 60cm × 30cm)
Sol: Rate of heat through radiation would be equal to = 1.44m2
rate of heat transfer through rod. The rate of heat flow into the box is
Quantity of heat flowing though the rod per second in ∆Q KA(θ1 − θ2 )
steady state =
∆t x
dQ K.A.dθ
= … (i) (0.04 Wm−1 ° C−1 )(1.44m2 )(40° C)
dt x = = 154W
0.015m
Quantity of heat radiated from the end of the rod per
The rate at which the ice melts is
second in steady state
154W
dQ = = 0.46gs−1
=Aσ(T 4 − T04 ) … (ii) 3.36 × 105 Jkg−1
dt
From Eqs. (i) and (ii),
K.dθ
=σ(T 4 − T04 )
x JEE Advanced/Boards
K × 50
=6.0 × 10−8 (7.5)4 − (3)4 × 108
0.2 Example 1: Three rods of the material x and three rods
K = 74 W mK of material y are connected as shown in figure. All the
rods are of identical length and cross sectional area. If
the end A is maintained at 60℃ and the junction E is
1 4 . 1 8 | Heat Transfer
1 1 1 4 (K1 + 3K 2 )
∴
∴ = + or RBE = R = K1 + 3K 2 i.e. K =
4K
RBE R + R 2R + 2R 3 4
The total resistance between A and E will be, Example 3: A point source of heat of power P is
4 10 placed at the center of a spherical shell of mean radius
R AE =R AB + RBE =2R + R= R R. the material of the shell has thermal conductivity
3 3
k. calculate the thickness of the shell if temperature
∴ Heat current between A and E is difference between the outer and inner surfaces of the
shell in steady state is T.
( ∆ T) (60 − 10) 15
=H = =
R AE (10 3)R R
15 60 − TB
( ∆ T)AB r1 P
HAB = or
= or TB= 30°C
R AB R 2R
d
15 30 − Tc 30 − TD
Further, H=AB or
HBC + HBD = + r
R R 2R
r2
(Say T=
C T=
D T)
P hysi cs | 14.19
dr l 1 7×10−2 m dr 1 7
Sol: Total thermal resistance ∫ k 4 π r2 . Power
2πk ∫5×10 m r
= = −2 = ln
KA 2πk 5
of source equal to rate of heat transfer at steady state.
1
= ln (1.4 ) = 0.765K / W
Consider a concentric spherical shell of radius r and 2π(0.07)
thickness dr as shown in figure. In steady state, the rate
Temperature difference
of heat flow (heat current) through this shell will be, Heat current H =
Thermal resis tance
∆T ( − d θ) 1
H
= = R = (100 − 20)
R dr kA = = 104.6W
0.765
(k)(4 π r 2 )
∴ Heat lost in one hour =
Heat current × time
dθ
or H =−(4 π kr 2 ) =
= (104.6)(3600) J 3.76 × 105 J
dr
Here, negative sign is used because with increase in r,
decreases. Example 5: A closed cubical box is made of perfectly
insulating material and the only way for heat to enter
r2 dr 4 πk θ2
∴ ∫r1 = − ∫θ1 dθ or leave the box is through two solid cylindrical metal
r 2 H plugs, each of cross sectional area 12 cm2 and length
4 πkr1r2 (θ1 − θ2 ) 8 cm fixed in the opposite walls of the box. The outer
This equation gives, H =
(r2 − r1 ) surface of the plug is kept at a temperature of 100℃
while the outer surface of the other plug is maintained
In steady state,
= H P,r
= 1r2 R2 and θ2 T
θ1 −= at a temperature of 4℃. The thermal conductivity of the
4 πkR 2 T material of the plug is 2.0Wm-1 ℃-1. A source of energy
∴Thickness of shell, r2 − r1 = generating 13 W is enclosed inside the box. Find the
P
equilibrium temperature of the inner surface of the box
assuming that it is the same at all points on the inner
Example 4: A steam pipe of radius 5cm carries steam
surface.
at 100℃. The pipe is covered by a jacket of insulating
material 2cm thick having a thermal conductivity 0.07
Sol: At steady state, rate of heat transfer through both
W/m-K. If the temperature at the outer wall of the pipe
plugs would be same.
jacket is 20℃, how much heat is lost through the jacket
per meter length in an hour?
Thermal resistance per meter length of an element at The situation is shown in figure. Let the temperature
distance r of thickness dr is inside the box be θ. The rate at which heat enters the
∆Q1 KA(θ1 − θ)
box through the left plug is =
k=0.07W/m-k ∆t x
The rate of heat generation in the box=13 W. The rate
at which heat flows out of the box through the right
7cm plug is
r dr
∆Q 2 KA(θ − θ2 )
=
5cm ∆t x
∆Q1 ∆Q 2
In the steady state + 13W =
∆t ∆t
dr 1 KA KA
dR = (R = ) or, (θ − θ) + 13 =
W (θ − θ2 )
k(2π r) kA x 1 x
2 r =7cm
∫
∴ Total resistance R = dR
r1=5cm
1 4 . 2 0 | Heat Transfer
o
0C
1 X
Q mL
= = (Adx ρ)L
r1
This quantity of heat is conducted upwards through the
r2 layer in time dt when the temperature of air is −θ .
KA(0 − ( −θ)) dx Kθ ρLxdx
∴ A ρLdx = dt; = ; dt =
Sol: Heat flowing radially outward through spherical x dt ρLx Kθ
shells. Both connected in series. Time taken t for the thickness to increase from x1 and x2
to is obtained by integrating
Let us draw two spherical shells of radii x and x+dx
concentric with the given system. Let the temperatures t x
ρL 2
at these shells be θ and θ + dθ respectively. The amount =t ∫=
dt
Kθ x∫
xdx Or
of heat flowing radially inward through the material 0 1
between x and x+dx is ρL 0.92 × 80
= t (x22 − x12 ) ∴ t
= (42 − 22 )
2Kθ 2 × 0.004 × 10
∆Q K4 πx2 = 11040
= s 3.07hr
= . dQ
∆t dx
dT
=
3σ
(600 4 − 300 4 )......(ii)
…(ii) So (θ1 − θ2 ) = 32 (
24 × ln 38 )
dt 327°C (2r)ρ× s
2 × 2.3026 log10 38 − log10 32
Dividing equation (ii) by equation (i), we get
1 4 . 2 2 | Heat Transfer
55 × 1.57 − 1.50 L
1
or (θ1 − θ2 ) = = 2°C. 0
2
Example 11: A rod CD of thermal resistance 5.0KW-1 is Sol: Rate of heat transfer is variable as temperature of
joined at the middle of an identical rod AB as shown in small vessel will be changing.
figure. The ends A, B and D are maintained at 100℃, Suppose, the temperature of the water in the smaller
0℃, and 25℃ respectively. Find the heat current in CD. vessel is at time t. In the next time interval dt, a heat dQ
is transferred to it where
A o o
B
100 C C 0C KA
Q
∆= (θ − θ)dt. … (i)
L 0
25 C
o This heat increases the temperature of the water of
D
mass m to θ + dθ where
Sol: At point C, total thermal current inflow equal to
∆ Q= msdθ … (ii)
total thermal current out flow.
From (i) and (ii),
The thermal resistance of AC is equal to that of CB and
is equal to 2.5KW-1. Suppose, the temperature at C is θ. KA
(θ − θ)dt
= msdθ
The heat current through AC, CB, and CD are L 0
T θ
Lms dθ Lms 2 dθ
∆Q1
=
100°C − θ
;
or, dt =
KA θ0 − θ
or, ∫ dt =
KA θ∫ θ0 − θ
0
∆t 2.5KW −1 1
∆Q1 ∆Q 2 ∆Q 3
= + Example 13: The earth receives solar radiation at a rate
∆t ∆t ∆t of. 8.2 J cm−2 min−1 . Assuming that the sun radiates
like a blackbody, calculate surface temperature of the
100°C − θ θ − 0°C θ − 25°C
or, = + sun. The angle subtended by the sun on the earth is
2.5 2.5 5.0 0.530 and Stefan constant=σ 5.67 × 10−8 Wm−3K −4 .
or, 225°C = 5θ
Sol: Think of intensity of thermal heat out a distance R
or, θ= 45°C from the source.
∆Q 3 45°C − 25°C 20K Let the diameter of the sun be D and its distance from
Thus,
= = = 4.0W. the earth be R. From the question,
∆t 5.0KW −1
5.0KW −1
D π
= 0.53 × = 9.25 × 10−3 ...(i)
R 180
Example 12: Figure shows a large tank of water at a
constant temperature θ0 and a small vessel containing The radiation emitted by the surface of the sun per unit
a mass m of water at an initial temperature θ1 (<θ0). A time is
metal rod of length L, area cross section A and thermal
conductivity K connects the two vessels. Find the time
taken for the temperature of the water in the smaller D
vessel become θ2 (θ1<θ2 <θ0). Specific heat capacity of
water is s and all other heat capacities are negligible.
R
Sun
2
D
4 π σT 4 =πD2 σT 4
2
P hysi cs | 14.23
At distance R, this radiation falls on an area of 4πR2 in Example 15: A thermometer is taken from a room that
unit time. The radiation received at the earth’s surface is 20℃ to the outdoors where the temperature is 5℃.
per unit time per unit area is, therefore, After one minute, the thermometer reads 12℃. Use
2
Newton’s law of cooling to answer following questions.
πD2 σT 4 σT 4 D (a) What will the reading on the thermometer be after
=
4 πR 2 4 R one more minute?
2 (b)When will the thermometer read 6℃.?
σT 4 D −2 −1
Thus, = 8.2Jcm min
4 R Sol: Get the ‘k’ for Newton’s law of cooling by given
1 condition, then the all desired value.
or, 1 × (5.67 × 10−−88 Wm−−22K −−44 ) T 44 ×
or, 4 × (5.67 × 10 Wm K ) T × If T is the thermometer temperature, then Newton’s law
4
(9.25 × 10−−33 )22 x T 44 of cooling tells us that
(9.25 × 10 ) x T
dT
= k(5 − T) ; T(0) = 20.
8.2 −2 dt
= Wm
10−4 × 60 The solution of this initial value problem is
or, =T 5794K ≈ 5800K T= 5 + 15e−kt .
We still need to find the value of k. We can do this by
Example 14: On a cold winter day, the atmospheric using the given information that T(1)=12. In fact, let us
temperature is θ (on Celsius scale) which is below 0℃. pause here to consider the general problem of finding
A cylindrical drum of height h made of a bad conductor the value of k. We will obtain some facts that can be
is completely filled with water at 0℃ and is kept outside used in the rest of the problems involving Newton’s law
without any lid. Calculate the time taken for the whole of cooling.
mass of water to freeze. Thermal conductivity of ice is K -
and its latent heat of fusion is L. Neglect expansion of
water on freezing. x
e−kt that appears in the solution of Newton’s Law of To find what the thermometer will read two minutes
−kt − kt t t after being taken outside, we compute
cooling can be written as e = (e 1 ) 1
2
We really just need (in most situations) to know the 7
T(2) =
5 + 15 ≈ 8.3.
− kt
value of e 1 , and this value has been obtained in the 15
work done above. In particular, the solution of Newton’s This tells us that the thermometer will read about 8.3℃
Law of Cooling, two minutes after being taken outside.
T = Ts + (T0 − TS )e−kt , Finally, to determine when the thermometer will read
6℃, we solve the equation
Can be written as t
− kt1 t t1 7
T = Ts + (T0 − TS )(e ) 5 + 15 = 6
15
t t1
T −T The step-by-step solution of this equation is
or as T = Ts + (T0 − TS ) 1 s
T −T
0 s t t
7 7 1
t t1 15 = 1 =
T −T 15 15 15
T = Ts + (T0 − TS ) 1 s
T −T
0 s 7 t 1 7 1
ln = ln ; tln = ln
Returning now to the problem at hand (with the 15 15 15 15
thermometer), we see that temperature function for
t ln(1 15)
7 = t ≈ 3.5.
the thermometer is T= 5 + 15 . ln(7 15)
15
Note that this makes sense because this formula gives Thus, the thermometer will reach 6℃ after being
0 outside for about 3.5 minutes.
7
us T(0) =5 + 15 = 20.
15
1
7
And T(1) =
5 + 15 = 12.
15
JEE Main/Boards
water inside the lake be 20000 cal min-1 through each the temperature and distance are doubled, the power
square meter surface, find K of ice? received by the foil will be
(A) 16 P (B) 4 P (C) 2 P (D) P
Q.11 A metal plate 4 mm thick has a temp difference of
32℃ between its faces. It transmits 200kcal h-1 through
Q.4 The rate of emission of radiation of a black body at
an area of 5 cm2. Calculate thermal conductivity of the
273℃ is E, then the rate of emission of radiation of this
material of the plate.
body at 0℃ will be
E E E
Q.12 Estimate the rate at which ice would melt in a (A) (B) (C) (D)0
wooden box 2.5 cm thick and of inside measurements 16 4 8
100×60×40 cm, assuming that the external temperature
is 32℃ and coefficient of thermal conductivity of wood Q.5 The power radiated by a black body is P and it
is 0.168 Wm-1 K-1. Given L=80cal/g. radiates maximum energy around the wavelength λ0 .
If the temperature of the black body is now changed
so that it radiates maximum energy around wavelength
Q.13 A pan filled with hot food cools from 94℃ to
3/4 λ0 , the power radiated by it will increase by a factor
86℃ in 2 minutes when the room temperature is at
of
20℃. How long will it take to cool from 71℃ to 69℃?
Here cooling takes place according to Newton’s law of (A) 4/3 (B) 16/9 (C) 64/27 (D) 256/81
cooling.
Q.6 Star S1 emits maximum radiation of wavelength
Q.14 A liquid initially at 70℃ cools to 55℃ in 5 minutes 420 nm and the star S2 emits maximum radiation of
and 45℃ in 10 minutes. What is the temperature of the wavelength 560 nm, what is the ratio of the temperature
surroundings? of S1 and S2
(B) ( 4 3) (D) ( 3 4 )
1/ 4 1/2
(A) 4 3 (C)3 4
Exercise 2
Q.7 Spheres P and Q are uniformly constructed from
the same material which is a good conductor of heat
Single Correct Choice Type
and the radius of Q is thrice the radius of P. the rate of
fall of temperature of P is x times that of Q when both
Q.1 Four rods of same material with different radii r and are at the same surface temperature. The value of x is
length l are used to connect two reservoirs of heat at
different temperatures. Which one will conduct most (A) 1/4 (B) 1/3 (C) 3 (D) 4
heat?
Q.8 A black body calorimeter filled with hot water cools
(A) r=2cm, l=0.5 cm (B) r=2cm, l=2m
from 60℃ to 50℃ in 4 min and 40℃ to 30℃ in 8 min.
(C) r=0.5cm,l=0.5m (D)r=1cm, l=1m The approximate temperature of surrounding is
(A) 10℃ (B) 15℃ (C) 20℃ (D) 25℃
Q.2 A wall has two layers A and B each made of different
materials, both the layers have same thickness. The
Q.9 A system S receives heat continuously from an
thermal conductivity of the material A is twice of that
electrical heater of power 10W. The temperature of
of B. Under thermal equilibrium, the temperature
S becomes constant at 50℃. When the surrounding
difference across the wall B is 36℃. The temperature
temperature is 20℃. After the heater is switched off,
difference across wall A is
S cools from 35.1℃ to 34.9℃ in 1 minute. The heat
(A) 6℃ (B) 12℃ (C) 18℃ (D) 72℃ capacity of S is
(A) 100 J/℃ (B) 300 J/℃
Q.3 A black metal foil is warmed by radiation from a
small sphere at temperature ‘T’ and at a distance‘d’. It (C) 750 J/℃ (D) 1500 J/℃
is found that the power received by the foil is P. If both
1 4 . 2 6 | Heat Transfer
Q. 2 Two metallic spheres S1 and S2 are made of the
same material and have got identical surface finish. The (A) (B)
mass of S1 is thrice that of S2 . Both the spheres are
heated to the same high temperature and placed in the x x
same room having lower temperature but are thermally
insulated from each other. The ratio of the initial rate of
cooling of S1 to that S2 is________. (1995)
(C) (D)
loge (-0)
loge (-0)
O t O t
P hysi cs | 14.27
O t O t
T T
(A) (B)
o
O t O t
(C)
T
(D)
JEE Advanced/Boards
T
o o
Exercise
O
1 t O t
B
L
C
k 2k k 2k
Q.6 An empty pressure cooker of Whistle
volume 10 liters contains air at
k=thermal conductivity atmospheric pressure 105 Pa and
temperature of 27℃. It contains a
Q.3 Three conducting rods of same material and cross- whistle which has area of 0.1 cm2 and weight of 100 gm.
section are shown in figure. Temperature of A,D and C What should be temperature of air inside so that the
are maintained at 20℃, 90℃ and 0℃. Find the ratio of whistle is just lifted up?
length BD and BC if there is no heat flow in AB
A B C
o
20 C
o
0C Exercise 2
o
90 C D Multiple Correct Choice Type
Q.4 In the square frame of side L of metallic rods, the Q.1 Two metallic spheres A and B are made of same
corners A and C are maintained at T1 and T2 respectively. material and have got identical surface finish. The mass
The rate of heat flow from A to C is W. If A and D are of sphere A is four times that of B. Both the spheres are
instead maintained at T1 and T2 respectively, find the heated to the same temperature and placed in a room
total rate of heat flow.
1 4 . 2 8 | Heat Transfer
having lower temperature but thermally insulated from (B) The maximum intensity occurs at a shorter
each other. wavelength
(A) The ratio of heat loss of A to that of B is 24/3 (C) The area under the graph increases
2/3
(B) The ratio of heat loss of A to that of B is 2 (D) The area under the graph is proportional to the
fourth power of temperature
(C) The ratio of the initial rate of cooling of A to that of
B is 2−2/3
Paragraph 2:
(D) The ratio of the initial rate of cooling of A to that of
B is 2−4/3 Two rods A and B of same cross-sectional area A
and length l connected in series between a source
Q.2 Two bodies A and B have thermal emissivity of 0.01
(T1 = 100 °C) and a sink (T2 = 0 °C) as shown in figure.
and 0.81 respectively. The outer surface areas of the two
bodies are the same. The two bodies radiate energy at The rod is laterally insulated
the same rate. The wavelength λB , corresponding to
the maximum special radiancy in the radiation from B,
is shifted from the wavelength corresponding to the T1
3K K
T2
maximum spectral radiancy in the radiation from A by o
100 C
o
0C
1.00 µm. If the temperature of A is 5802 K,
L L
(A) The temperature of B is 1934 K
(B) λB= 1.5 µm Q.5 The ratio of the thermal resistance of the rod is
(C) The temperature of B is 11604 K R 1 R R 3 4
(A) A
= = (B) A 3=
(C) A (D)
(D) The temperature of B is 2901 K RB 3 RB RB 4 3
Q.8 A body is being cooled with fluid. When we Q.4 A double-pane window used for insulating a room
increase the velocity of fluid 4 times and decrease the thermally from outside consists of two glass sheets
temperature difference ½ time, the rate of loss of heat each of area 1 m2 and thickness 0.01 m separated
increases by a 0.05 m thick stagnant air space. In the steady
state, the room glass interface and glass-outdoor
(A) Four times (B) Two times
interface are at constant temperatures of 27℃ and 0℃
(C) Six times (D) No change respectively. Calculate the rate of heat of flow through
window pane. Also find the temperatures of other
Q.9 In the above question, if mass of the body interfaces. Given thermal conductivities of glass and air
increased two times, without change in any of the other as 0.8 and 0.08 Wm−1K −1 respectively. (1997)
parameters, the rate of cooling
(A) Decreases Q.5 A solid body X of heat capacity C is kept in an
(B) Increases atmosphere whose temperature is TA = 300 K. At
(C) No effect of change of mass time t=0, the temperature of X is T0 = 400 K. It cools
(D) None of these according to Newton’s law of cooling. At time t1 its
temperature is found to be 350 K.
At this time (t1), the body X is connected to a large body
Previous Years’ Questions Y at atmospheric temperature TA through a conducting
rod of length L, cross-sectional area A and thermal
conductivity K. The heat capacity of Y is so large that
Q.1 A solid sphere of copper of radius R and a hollow
any variation in its temperature may be neglected. The
sphere of the same material of inner radius r and outer
cross-sectional area A of the connecting rod is small
radius R are heated to the same temperature and
compared to the surface area of X. Find the temperature
allowed to cool in the same environment. Which of
of X at time t = 3t1 . (1998)
them cools faster? (1982)
conductivity of the material of the rod is K and emissivity of the middle (i.e. second) plate under steady state
of the rod is e. condition is (2012)
TS 1/ 4 1/ 4
65 97
(A) T (B) T
Insulated 2 4
Furnace 1/ 4
97
(D) ( 97 )
Rod 1/ 4
T1 T2 (C) T T
L 2
Insulated
Q.11 Two rectangular blocks, having identical
dimensions, can be arranged either in configuration I
It is given that T2= TS + ∆T , where ∆T<< TS , TS being or in configuration II as shown in the figure. One of the
the temperature of the surroundings. If ∆T ∝ ( T1 − TS ) , blocks has thermal conductivity κ and the other 2 κ .
find he proportionality constant. Consider that heat is The temperature difference between the ends along the
lost only by radiation at the end where the temperature x-axis is the same in both the configurations. It takes 9
of the rod is T2 . (2004)
s to transport a certain amount of heat from the hot
end to the cold end in the configuration I. The time to
Q.8 Two spherical bodies A (radius 6 cm) and B (radius transport the same amount of heat in the configuration
18 cm) are at temperatures T1 and T2 , respectively. The II is (2013)
maximum intensity in the emission spectrum of A is at
Configuration II
500 nm and in that of B is at 1500 nm. Considering Configuration I
them to be black bodies, what will be the ratio of the
rate of total energy radiated by A to that of B? (2010) 2
2
Q.9 A composite block is made of slabs A, B, C, D and x
E of different thermal conductivities (given in terms of
a constant K) and sizes (given in terms of length, L) as (A) 2.0 s (B) 3.0 s (C) 4.5 s (D) 6.0
shown in the figure. All slabs are of same width. Heat
‘Q’ flows only from left to right through the blocks. Q.12 Two spherical stars A and B emit blackbody
Then in steady state radiation. The radius of A is 400 times that of B and A
emits 104 times the power emitted from B. The ratio
0 1L 5L 6L
(λ A / λB ) of their wavelengths λ A and λB at which
Heat A B 3K E the peaks occur in their respective radiation curves is
1L (2015)
6K
2K C 4K Q.13. A metal is heated in a furnace where a sensor
3L is kept above the metal surface to read the power
radiated (P) by the metal. The sensor has scale that
D 5K displays log2(P/P0), whre P0 is a constant. When the
4L
metal surface is at a temperature of 487°C, the sensor
(A) Heat flow through A and E slabs are same. shows a value 1. Assume that the emissivity of the
metallic surface remains constant. What is the value
(B) Heat flow through slab E is maximum. displayed by the sensor when the temperature of the
(C) Temperature difference across slab E is smallest. metal surface is raised to 2767°C? (2016)
Q.15 One mole of mono-atomic ideal gas is taken allowing no heat transfer between outside and inside
along two cyclic processes E → F → G → E and E → F → the container. The container is divided into two
H → E as shown in the PV diagram. compartments by a rigid partition made of a thermally
conducting material that allows slow transfer of heat.
The processes involved are purely isochoric, isobaric,
The lower compartment of the container is filled with
isothermal or adiabatic.
2 moles of an ideal monatomic gas at 700 K and the
Match the paths in list I with the magnitudes of the upper compartment is filled with 2 moles of an ideal
work done in list II and select the correct answer using diatomic gas at 400 K. The heat capacities per mole
the codes given below the lists. (2013) 3 5
of an ideal monatomic gas are= CV =R,CP R , and
2 2
List I List II 5 7
those for an ideal diatomic gas are
= CV = R,CP R.
2 2
P. G→ E 1. 160 P0V0 ln2
Q. G→ H 2. 36P0 V0
R. F→ H 3. 24P0 V0
S. F→ G 4. 31P0 V0
Codes:
Q.16 Consider the partition to be rigidly fixed so that it
P Q R S
does not move. When equilibrium is achieved, the final
(A) 4 3 2 1 temperature of the gases will be (2014)
(B) 4 3 1 2
(A) 550 K (B) 525 K (C) 513K (D) 490 K
(C) 3 1 2 4
(D) 1 3 2 4
Q.17 Now consider the partition to be free to move
without friction so that the pressure of gases in both
Paragraph 1: compartments is the same. Then total work done by
In the figure a container is shown to have a movable the gases till the time they achieve equilibrium will be
(without friction) piston on top. The container and the (2014)
piston are all made of perfectly insulating material (A) 250 R (B) 200 R (C) 100 R (D) –100 R
PlancEssential Questions
JEE Main/Boards JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1 Exercise 1
Q.10 Q.11 Q.12 Q.13 Q.2 Q.3 Q.4 Q.6
Exercise 2 Exercise 2
Q.1 Q.2 Q.5 Q.6 Q. 1 Q.2 Q.5 Q.6
Q.9 Q.7 Q.12 Q.15
1 4 . 3 2 | Heat Transfer
Answer Key
JEE Main/Boards
Exercise 1
Q.1 Silver is the best conductor of heat
Q.3 The fall in temperature in a body per unit distance is called temperature gradient.
Q.14 25℃
Exercise 2
Single Correct Choice Type
JEE Advanced/Boards
Exercise 1
Q.1 65℃ Q.2 5℃ Q.3 7/2 Q.4 (4/3) W Q.5 10.34 cm Q.6 327 oC
Exercise 2
Multiple Correct Choice Type
Q.1 A, C Q.2 A, B
Comprehension Type
Solutions
of flow of heat.
KA∆T
S.I. Units: - J.m-1 sec-1 K-1 ⇒ = 233.33 J/sec
C.G.S. Units: - cal. cm-1 (°C)-1 233.33 × 4 × 10−3
⇒K= = 58.33 J/m °C sec
32 × 5 × 10 −4
Sol 9: The rate of cooling of a body is directly
proportional to the difference of temperature of the Sol 12: Area of surface perpendicular to direction of
body over its surrounding. flow of heat _ surface area of inner rectangle
Body temperature at any time ’t’ → θ Text=32 C
o
⇒ T0 = 25° C eAσ(2T)4
∴ P’ = Afoil × = 4P
4 π(2d)2
4
4 On substituting value of e-4k from (i) into (iii) we get:
∴ P’ = eAσ T
3 30 − Ta 40 − Ta 50 − Ta
= ×
256
⇒ P’ = P 50 − Ta 60 − Ta 60 − Ta
81
⇒ (30 – Ta) (60 – Ta)2 = (40 – Ta) (50 – Ta)2
Sol 6: (A) By Wien’s displacement law:- ⇒ (Ta - 60) (Ta – 60) (Ta – 30)
lm T = constant = C = (Ta – 50) (Ta – 50) (Ta – 40)
∴ lm1 T1 =lm2 T2
⇒ Ta3 – [60 + 60 + 30] Ta2 + [60 × 60 + 60 × 30 + 60 ×
⇒ 420 T1 = 560 T2 30] Ta - 60× 60× 30 = Ta3 – [50 + 50 +40] Ta2+ [50 × 50
T1 560 4
+ 50 × 40 + 50 × 40]Ta –50 × 50 × 40
⇒ = =
T2 420 3 ⇒ – 10T a2+700 Ta – 8000 = 0
⇒ Ta2 – 70 Ta + 800 = 0
Sol 7: (C) rθ = 3rp
⇒ Ta = 55.61 or 14.38
P = eAσ T4
dT dQ dθ
⇒ mc = eAsT4 Sol 9: (D) P = = S× = k(θ1 − θ0 )
dt dt dt
Sol 2: The rate at which energy radiates from the object is Energy distribution with wavelength will be as follows:
∆Q
= eσAT4 E
∆t
Since, DQ = mcDT, we get
∆T eσAT 4
=
∆t mc U1 U2 U3
(nm)
4
499
500
999
1000
1499
1500
Also, since m = pr3ρ for a sphere, we get
3
2/3 m=1000
3m
A = 4pr = 4π
2
From the graph it is clear that
4 πρ
U2 > U1 (In fact U2 is maximum)
eσT 4 3m
2/3 1/3
∆T 1
Hence, = 4π = K
∆t mc 4 πρ m
dm 1
Sol 6: q = ∝
For the given two bodies dt Thermal Resis tance
1/3 1/3 In the first case rods are in parallel and thermal
( ∆T / ∆t)1 m 1
= 2 = R
resistance is while in second case rods are in series
( ∆T / ∆t)2 m1 3 2
and thermal resistance is 2R.
Sol 3: From Wien’s displacement law q1 2R 4
= =
lmT = constant q2 R/2 1
1
or T=
λm Sol 7: Q ∝ AT4 and lmT = constant.
Tsun (λm )north star 350 A r2
∴ = = ≈ 0.69 Hence, Q ∝ or Q ∝
Tnorthstar (λm )sun 510 ( λm ) 4 ( λm ) 4
Sol 10: (A) According to Newtons law of cooling. kA(TB − TD ) −kA (TC − TB )
⇒– =
DB BC
dθ
∝ (θ − θ0 )
dx
(20 − 90) (0 − 20) −70
⇒ = ; ⇒ BD = = 3.5
dθ DB BC BC −20
⇒ dθ = −k(θ − θ0 )
⇒d dtθ = −k(θ − θ0 )
⇒ dtd=θ −k(θ − θ0 )
∫∫dtθ dd−θθθ == ∫∫ −−kdt
kdt Sol 4:
θ − θ00 = −kdt
∫
⇒ ln( ∫
θ θ− −θ θ ) = −kt + c T2
⇒ ln(θ − 0θ00 ) = −kt + c B C
⇒ ln(θ − θ0 ) = −kt + c 2L
T1 B T2
Hence the plot of ln(θ – θ0) vs t should be a straight line A C
with negative slope. 2L
T1 A D
Sol 11: (C) According to Newtons cooling law, option C
is the correct option. dQ dQ dQ
∴ = +
dt AC dt ABC dt ADC
JEE Advanced/Boards ⇒ W=
−kA(T2 − T1 )
+
−kA(T2 − T1 )
2L 2L
Exercise 1 −kA(T2 − T1 )
⇒ W=
L
Sol 1: Continuously 1 kW of heat is being dissipated
from 25°C tank. B C
3L
dQ −KA[25 − T]
∴ = 103 = B C
dt T2
T1 D
A L
dQ −0.2 × 5 × [25 − T] A D
⇒ = 103 =
dt 4 × 10−2
T1 T2
⇒ 25 – T = –40 ; ⇒ T = 65°C
dQ −kA(T2 − T1 ) −kA(T2 − T1 )
∴ = +
Sol 2: For 1st layer dt AD 3L L
o
Rate for both layers must be equal
o
T1=0 C I II T=100 C
kA × 10 −2kA x 1.5x
∴ = (θ – 10) ; ⇒ θ = 5°C
1.5m
Then rate of heat flow from D to B must be equal to rate −kA(0 − 200) −kA(100 − 200)
of heat flow from B to C. ⇒ x = 1.5 − x
80 540
dQ dQ
i.e. =
dt DB dt BC
P hysi cs | 14.39
Exercise 2
Comprehension Type
Multiple Correct Choice Type
Paragraph 1
m
Sol 1: (A, C) ρ =
V Sol 3: (A, B) Area under the curve gives the rate at
4 3 which heat per unit surface is radiated by the body i.e.
⇒ρ× pr = m ; ⇒ r ∝ (m)1/3 total rate of heat radiation = (Area under the curve) ×
3
(surface area of the body)
1 4 . 4 0 | Heat Transfer
Sol 4: (A, B, C, D) lm T = const. [By Wien’s displacement Sol 9: (A) If all the parameters are kept constant then
law]
dQ dT
= ms = kA v DT
Area under graph = Eλ = e σ T ∝ T 4 4
dt dt
dT kAv∆T
T1 ∴ =
dt ms
dE T1 > T2 > T3
T2
d
T3
Previous Years’ Questions
m1 m m x
2 3 dQ
Sol 1: Net rate of heat radiation will be same in
dt
both the cases, as temperature and area are same.
Paragraph 2 Therefore, from equation
dθ dQ dθ 1
Sol 5: (A) AA = A ; AB = A ms – = or – ∝
dt dt dt m
A = l ; B = l The hollow sphere will cool faster as its mass is less.
kA = 3k ; kB = k
A Sol 2: Let R1, R2 and R3 be the thermal resistances of
∴ RA = = ; RB= B = wood, cement and brick. All the resistances are in
k A AA 3kA kB AB k A
series. Hence,
RA 1
∴ =
RB 3
o
20 C
o
R1 R2 R3 -10 C
Sol 6: (B) Rate at which heat flows from A
= Rate at which heat flows from B R = R 1 + R2 + R3
dQ dQ 2.5 × 10 –2 1.0 × 10 –2 25 × 10 –2
⇒ = = + +
dt A dt B 0.125 × 137 1.5 × 137 1.0 × 137
TA TB TA RA 1
⇒ = ⇒ = = = 0.33 × 10–2 °C/W as R =
RA RB TB RB 3 KA
∴ Rate of heat transfer,
TA TA TB TB
Sol 7: (B) GA = = and GB = = dQ Temperature difference 30
LA L LB L = =
dt thermal resis tance 0.33 × 10 –2
G T 1
∴ = A = ≈ 9091 W
GB TB 3
∴ Power of heater should be 9091 W.
dQ 27 – θ1
and =
dt 0.0125
ms θ0 – 300
∴t= ln dQ (27 – 26.48)
KA = = 41.6 W
θ0 – 350 dt 0.0125
Substituting the values, we have
Sol 5: In the first part of the question (t ≤ t1)
(0.4)(600)(0.4) 400 – 300
T= ln At t = 0, TX = T0 = 400 K and at t = t1,
(10)(0.04) 400 – 350
TX = T1 = 350 K
T = 166.32 s
Temperature of atmosphere,
R1 R2 R3
Room Outdoor
atmosphere
T –T Sol 6: (a) Rate of heat loss per unit area due to radiation
⇒ ln 1 A = – kt1
T0 – TA I = eσ(T4 – T04 )
Here, T = 127 + 273 = 400 K
350 – 300
⇒ kt1 = – ln and T0 = 27 + 273 = 300 K
400 – 300
17
⇒ kt1 = ln (2) ∴ I = 0.6 × × 10–8[(400)4 – (300)4]
3
In the second part (t > t1), body X cools by radiation = 595 W/m2
(according to Newton’s law) as well as by conduction.
(b) Let θ be the temperature of the oil. Then, rate of
T = TA heat flow through conduction = rate of heat loss due
TA
to radiation
Y
X temperature difference
∴ = (595)A
thermal resis tance
(θ – 127)
= (595)A
Therefore, rate of cooling
= (cooling by radiation) + (cooling by conduction) KA
Here, A = area of disc; K = Thermal conductivity and
dT KA
∴ – = k(T – TA) + (T – TA) …. (ii) = thickness (or length) of disc
dt CL
K
KA(T – TA ) ∴ (θ – 127) = 595
dQ dT
In conduction, = = C–
dt L dt
∴ θ = 595 + 127
dT KA K
∴– = (T– TA)
dt LC
595 × 10 –2
= + 127 = 162.6°C
where, C = heat capacity of body X 0.167
dT KA
– = k + (T – TA) ….. (iii) Sol 7: Rate of heat conduction through rod
dt CL
= rate of the heat lost from right end of the rod.
Let at t = 3t1 temperature of X becomes T2 KA(T1 – T2 )
∴ = eAσ( T24 – Ts4 ) …… (i)
Then from eq. (iii) L
T2 3t1 Given that T2 = Ts + DT
dT KA
∫ T – T = – k + LC ∫ dt ∆T
4
T1 A tl \ T24 = (Ts + DT) =4
Ts4 1 +
Ts
T – TA KA
ln 2 = – k + (2t ) Using binomial expansion, we have
T1 – TA LC 1
2KA ∆T
= – 2kt1 + t T24 = Ts4 1 + 4 (as DT << Ts)
LC 1 Ts
Let width of each rod is d Sol 13: (9) At (T1 = 487+ 273 = 760K) P1 ∝ (760)4
F n=1
32P0 f=3
Isothermal
Adiabatic
P0
E H G
V0 8V0 32V0 V
PHVH − PF VF
Work done
= in FH = 36P0 V0
( −2 / f)
VG
Work done
= in FG RTln
= 160P0 V0 ln2
VF
PHYSICS
FOR JEE MAIN & ADVANCED
SECOND
EDITION
Exhaustive Theory
(Now Revised)
Formula Sheet
9000+ Problems
based on latest JEE pattern
1. INTRODUCTION
Have not been we dealing with the temperature and thermal energy in our daily life? Such as, we store our
perishable food in refrigerator, switch on the heater of the car if we ever feel cold, and always handle hot utensils
with thermal glove. To make a cup of cold coffee, ice cubes are used by our mother and how can of coke kept out
of refrigerate comes to the room temperature.
2. DEFINITION OF HEAT
Heat is energy in transient. Heat energy flows from one body to another body due to their temperature difference.
It is measured in units of calories. The SI unit is Joule. 1 calorie = 4.2J
Illustration 1: What is the difference between heat and temperature? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Temperature is associated with kinetic energy of atoms/molecule while heat is energy in transit. Temperature
is a measure of the motion of the molecules or atoms within a substance; more specifically, it is the measure of
the average kinetic energy of the molecules or atoms in a substance. Heat is the flow of energy from one body to
another as a result of a temperature difference. It is important to point out that matter does not contain heat; it
contains molecular kinetic energy and not heat. Heat flows and it is the energy that is being transferred. Once heat
has been transferred to an object, it ceases to be heat. It becomes internal energy.
3. DEFINITION OF CALORIE
The amount of heat needed to increase the temperature of 1 g of water from 14.5°C to 15.5°C at a pressure of
1 atm is called 1 calorie.
1 kilo calorie =103 calories; 1 calorie = 4.186 Joule
If the temperature of a body a mass m is raised through a temperature ∆ T, then the heat, ∆ Q, given to the body is
∆ Q = m.s. ∆ T where s is the specific heat of the body which is defined as the amount of the heat required to raise
the temperature of a unit mass of the body through 1°C. Its unit is cal/gm/°C or J/kg/K.
1 5 . 2 | Calorimetr y and Thermal Expansion
Thermal capacity of a body is the quantity of heat required to raise its temperature through 1°C and is equal to
T2
the product of mass and specific heat of the body. Q=m ∫ sdt (be careful about unit of temperature, use units
T1
according to the given units of s)
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Historically, first calorie was defined and hence such a weird unit conversion is used between calorie and
Joule.
Chinmay Spurandare (JEE 2012, AIR 698)
4. PRINCIPLE OF CALORIMETRY
When two bodies at different temperatures are mixed, heat will pass from the body at a higher temperature to the
body at a lower temperature until the temperature of the mixture becomes constant. The principle of calorimetry
implies that heat lost by the body at a higher temperature is equal to the heat gained by the other body at a lower
temperature assuming that there is no loss of heat in the surroundings.
5. TEMPERATURE SCALES
o o
K C F
Water boils 373.15 100 212
Body temperature 31015 37 98.6
Water freezes 373.15 0 32
Figure 15.1
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Illustration 2: Express a temperature of 60° F in degree Celsius and in Kelvin. (JEE MAIN)
9 9
TC = TC = T − 273.15
T(i)− 273.15 .......(i); (ii).......(i);
TF = 32 + TF T=32 + TC ..........(ii) ..........(ii)
5 C 5
Sol: (Using above formulas) Find the temp in Celsius first, then in Kelvin as kelvin and Celsius have more simple
5 5
relation. Substituting TF =60°C in Eq. (ii); T
=C
9
( TF − 32
= ) 9
( 60°C − 32°C=) 15.55°C
From Eq. (i) T=Tc +273.15=15.55°C+273.15=288.7K
Illustration 3: Calculate the temperature which has the same value on (i) the Celsius and Fahrenheit (ii) Fahrenheit
and Kelvin scales. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: The value of temp which shows same reading on the Celsius as well as on the Fahrenheit (i part) and on the
Kelvin and Fahrenheit (ii part).
9
(i) Let the required temperature be x°, now=
TF T + 32
5 C
160
or 5T
= F 9TC + 160 or 5X=9X+160 ∴ X = =−40° ⇒ -40°C =-40°F
−4
TF − 32 Tk − 273.15
(ii) Let the required temperature be x° =
180 100
X − 32 Tk − 273.15
∴ =
180 100
On solving we get, X = 574.6
1 5 . 4 | Calorimetr y and Thermal Expansion
Illustration 4: When in thermal equilibrium at the triple point of water, the pressure of Hg in a constant volume
gas thermometer is 1020 Pa. The pressure of He is 288 pa when the thermometer is in thermal equilibrium with
liquid nitrogen at its normal boiling point. What is the normal boiling point of nitrogen as measured using this
thermometer? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: As we consider volume of the fluid to be constant, and hence T/P ratio remains constant, Normal boiling point
p
of nitrogen
= is T 273.16 × ; Here P=288 Pa; ptp =1020 Pa
ptp
288
T 273.16 ×
∴= = 77.1 K
1020
6. HEAT CAPACITY
The heat capacity of a body is defined as the amount of heat required to raise its temperature by 1°C. It is also
known as the thermal capacity of the body. Suppose a body has mass m and specific heat c. Heat capacity = Heat
required to raise the temperature of the body by 1°C = mc × 1 =mc
∴ Heat capacity =mc
Hence heat capacity of a body (solid or liquid) is equal to the product of its mass and specific heat. Clearly, the SI
unit of heat capacity is J/°C or J/K. The greater the mass of a body, the greater is its heat capacity.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Don’t get confused here with the terminology of heat capacity and specific heat capacity. Always
remember that Specific heat capacity is the property of material and heat capacity is property of a given
body.
B Rajiv Reddy (JEE 2012, AIR 11)
Illustration 5: A geyser heats water flowing at the rate of 3.0 liters per minute from 27°C to 77°C. If the geyser
operates on a gas burner, what is the rate of combustion of the fuel if its heat of combustion is 4.0 × 104 J g-1?
(JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: The total heat required to increase the temperature of the water is equal to the heat supplied by the combustion
of gas per minute. Mass of 3 liters of water =3kg ∴ Mass of water flowing per minute, m= 3 kg=3000 g min -1
Rise of temperature, Δ θ=77-27=50°C; Heat absorbed by water per minute= mc ∆ θ =3000 × 1 × 50cal
= 3000 × 1 × 50 × 4.2 J min -1 = 630000 J min-1
∴ Heat supply by gas burner= 630000 J min-1 and heat of combustion of fuel = 4.0 × 104 J g-1
630000
∴ Rate of combustion of fuel = = 15.75 g min-1
4.0 × 10 4
Illustration 6: A copper block of mass 60 g is heated till its temperature is increased by 20°C. Find the heat
supplied to the block. Specific heat capacity of copper= 0.09 cal g-1 °C -1. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Here the heat is utilized to increase the temperature of the block only.
The heat supplied is Q=ms ∆ θ = (60 g) (0.09 cal g-1 ° C-1) (20°C) = 108 cal.
The quantity ms is called the heat capacity of the body. Its unit is J K-1. The mass of water having the same heat
capacity as given body is called the water equivalent of the body.
Illustration 7: How much heat is required to raise the temperature of an ideal monoatomic gas by 10 K if the gas
is maintained at constant pressure? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: The process is at constant pressure here. Formula for heat capacity of gas at constant pressure is used.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Without calculation, one can tell that Cp is always greater that Cv. Think of a situation in which we need
to raise the temperature of same amount of gas in constant pressure conditions and constant volume
conditions. It is quite obvious that in constant volume conditions all the heat will be used up to raise
internal energy of gas. We see that the rise in internal energy of gas is same in both cases as increase in
temperature is same. However, we see that for constant pressure conditions, more heat is required as
some of it will also be used to expand the volume. This condition requires that Cp must be greater than Cv.
Anand K (JEE 2011, AIR 47)
Illustration 8: Calculate the amount of heat necessary to raise the temperature of 2 moles of He gas from 20°C to
50°C using (i) constant –volume process and (ii) constant-pressure process.
For He CV =1.5 R and Cp = 2.49 R. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: Heat capacity at constant volume and constant pressure are applicable here.
(i) The amount of heat required for constant –volume process is Q =
v C v ∆T ; Here n=2 moles;
C=
V R 1.5 × 8.314J mol−1 0 C−1 ; ∆T =50-20=30°C; Q v =2 × (1.5 × 8.314) × 30 =748 (ii) The amount of heat
1.5 =
required for constant –pressure process is Q=
p nCp ∆T
Here n=2 moles; =
Cp 2.49
= R 2.49 × 8.314J mol−1 0 C−1 ; ∆T = 30 °C
∴ Q p= ( 2.49 × 8.314 ) × 30= 1242J
P hysi cs | 15.7
Since the temperature rise is the same in the two cases, the change in internal energy is same i.e, 748 J. however, in
constant-pressure excess heat supplied =1242-748=494 J. This extra heat of 494 J went into the work of expansion
of the gas.
(b) Latent heat of vaporization. We know that a liquid changes into gaseous state at a constant temperature
which called the boiling point. The amount of heat required to change the unit mass of a liquid into its
gaseous state at constant temperature is called latent heat of vaporization of the liquid.
Illustration 9: A piece of ice of mass 100 g and at temperature 0°C is put in 200 g of water at 25°C. How much
ice will melt as the temperature of the water reaches 0°C? The specific heat capacity of water =4200 JK -1 and the
specific latent heat of fusion of ice= 3.4 × 105 JK -1. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Total heat lost by the water equal to the total heat gained by the ice.
The heat released as the water cools down from 25°C to 0°C is
Q
= ms∆θ
= ( 0.2 kg) ( 4200 Jk −1 K −1 ) ( 25K=) 21000 J.
Q 21000 J
The amount of ice melted by this much heat is given by m
= = = 62g
L 3.4 × 105 Jkg−1
Illustration 10: A calorimeter of water equivalent 15g contains 165 g of water at 25°C. Steam at 100° is passed
through the water for some time. The temperature is increased to 30°C and the mass of calorimeter and its contents
are increased by 1.5 g. Calculate the specific latent heat of vaporization of water. Specific heat capacity of water is
1 cal g -1 °C-1. (JEE ADVANCED)
Sol: The change in mass of the content of calorimeter is due to formation of more water from condensation of
steam and all comes to the same temperature.
let L be the specific latent heat of vaporization of water. The mass of the steam condensed is 1.5 g. Heat lost in
condensation of steam is Q1 = (1.5g) L . The condensed water cools from 100°C to 30 °C. Heat lost in the process is
Q2 (1.5g) (=
1 calg−1 0 C−1 ) ( 70°C ) 105cal.
Heat supplied to the calorimeter and to the cold water during the rise in temperature from 25°C to 30°C is
Q3= (15g + 165g) (1 calg −1 0
)
C −1 (5°C=
) 900cal.
If no heat is lost to the surrounding.
−1
(1.5g) L + 105cal =
900 cal or L= 530 cal g
Illustration 11: The water equivalent of a body is 10 kg. What does it mean? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: It means that if a body is heated through say 5°C, it will absorb the same amount of heat as absorbed by 10
kg of water when heated through 5°C.
Illustration 12: Assuming that the density of air at N.T.P=0.0013 g/cc, CP = 0.239 cal g-1K-1 and the ratio
CP/CV = 1.40, calculate the mechanical equivalent of heat. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Compare the value of Gas Constant (R) by calculating in different unit (Calorie and Joule). =
R Cp − CV . And
R=PV/T, then find the ratio (in joule/in calorie).
Cp 0.239
Now, Cp = 0.239 cal g-1 K −1 ; Cp / CV =1.40; ∴ CV = = = 0.171cal g−1 K-1
1.40 1.40
1 10−6
Volume of 1 g of air at N.T.P. = cc = m3
0.0013 0.0013
10−6 10−3
Volume of 1 kg ( = 1000g) of air at N.T.P., V= × 1000 m3
0.0013 0.0013
THERMAL EXPANSION
1. DEFINITION OF THERMAL EXPANSION
It is the expansion due to increase in temperature. Most substances expand
when they are heated. Thermal expansion is a consequence of the change
in average separation between the constituent atoms of an object. Atoms of
an object can be imagined to be connected to one another by stiff springs
as shown in figure. At ordinary temperatures, the atoms in a solid oscillate
about their equilibrium positions with an amplitude of approximately 10-11 m.
The average spacing between the atoms is about 10-1°m. As the temperature
of the solid increases, the atoms oscillate with greater amplitudes, as a result
the average separation between them increases, and consequently the object Figure 15.2
expands. More precisely, thermal expansion arises from the asymmetrical
nature of the potential energy curve.
The SI unit of α is /°C or /K. Its value is different for different solid materials. For example α for aluminum is
2.4 × 10−5 / 0 C whereas for brass, its value is 2.0 × 10 -5/oC. Note that the change in temperature ∆T will be the same
whether it is measured in Celsius scale or on the Kelvin scale: ∆T 0 C = ∆T K.
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
T2
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
•• If a solid object has a hole in it, what happens to size of the hole, when
the temperature of the object increases? A common misconception is that
if the object expands, the hole will shrink because material expands into
aa
the hole. But the, truth is that if the Object expands the hole will expand Ti
too, because every linear dimension of an object change in the same way
when the temperature changes.
b
•• Effect of temperature on the time period of a pendulum:
The time Period of a simple pendulum is given by. Figure 15.4
T=
2π ; or T∝
g
1 5 . 1 2 | Calorimetr y and Thermal Expansion
PLANCESS CONCEPTS
Illustration 13: A steel ruler exactly 20 cm long is graduated to give correct measurements at 20°C.
(a) What happens to the reading if the temperature decreases below 20°C?
(b) What is the actual length of the ruler at 40°C? (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Lowering the temperature, shorten the scale from 1 m of original length. It’ll show length of 1m lengthier than
its length. And hence will show 1m to be more than 1m. It will now measure more. And reverse, in case of increasing
the temperature.
(a) If the temperature decreases, the length of the ruler also decreases through thermal contraction. Below 20°C,
each centimeter division is actually somewhat shorter than 1.0 cm, so the steel ruler gives reading that are too long.
(b) At 40°C, the increase in length of the ruler is
Illustration 14: A second pendulum clock has a steel wire. The clock is calibrated at 20°C. How much time does the
clock lose or gain in one week when the temperature is increased to 30° C?
( C)
−1
αsteel =1.2 × 10−5 0
(JEE ADVANCED)
∆T 1.2 × 10−4
∴ Time lost in one week= ∆t = t ( 7 × 24 × 3600
= ) 36.28s
T'
2.0012
P hysi cs | 15.13
The coefficient of apparent expansion, γ a of a liquid is defined as the ratio of the observed increase in volume of
the liquid with respect to the original level before heating per degree rise of temperature to the original volume
of the liquid.
Observed increased in volume
γa =
Orignal volume × rise in temperature
Where γ is the coefficient of real expansion of the liquid and T is the increase in temperature.
It is clear that γr > γ a and both are measured unit °C-1. It can be shown that: γr = γ a + γ g
Where γ g is the coefficient of cubical expansion of glass (or material of the container).
Illustration 15: Find the coefficient of volume expansion for an ideal gas at constant pressure. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Recall the formula for coefficient of volume expansion for ideal gas.
For an ideal gas PV = nRT
dV nR 1 dV nR nR 1 1
As P is constant, we have P.dV= nRdt ∴ = or γ = . = = = ∴ γ=
dT P v dT PV nRT T T
Vt V0 t
= ; Vt= V0 1 + V0= 1 + α v t
273 + t 273 273
Where α V is the volume coefficient of a gas and is equal to 1/273.
∴ A0 (1 + αt ) = A0 (1 + βt ) or ∴ 1 + α2 t2 + 2αt = 1 + βt
2
The result is altogether general because any flat surface can be regarded as a collection of small squares.
(b) Relation between γ and α . Consider a cube of side 0 at °C and 1 at t °C.
∴ 3αt = γt or γ = 3α
Again, result is general because any solid can be regarded as a collection of small cubes.
Illustration 16: A glass flask of volume 200 cm3 is just filled with mercury at 20° C. How much mercury will over
flow when the temperature of the system is raised to 100°C? The coefficient of volume expansion of glass is 1.2 ×
10-5/°C and that of mercury is 18 × 10-5/°C. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Increase in temperature, increase the volume of both, mercury as well as flask but mercury expands more than
flask because the coefficient of volume expansion of mercury is more than of flask.
( )
The increase in the volume of the flask is ∆V =γR V∆T = 1.2 × 10−5 × ( 200 ) × (100 − 20 ) =0.19cm3
( )
The increase in the volume of the mercury is ∆V' =γm V∆T = 18 × 10−5 × ( 200 ) × (100 − 20 ) =2.88cm3
Illustration 17: A sheet of brass is 40 cm long and 8 cm broad at 0 °C. If the surface area at 100°C is 320.1 cm2, find
the coefficient of linear expansion of brass. (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Calculate the coefficient of area expansion, coefficient of linear exp. Equal to half of coeff. of area expansion.
Surface area of sheet at 0°C, A0 = 40 × 8 =320cm2
Surface area of sheet at 100°C, A100=320.1cm2
Rise in temperature, ∆T= 100 − 0= 100°C
Increase in surface are ∆A
= A100 − A=
0 = 0.1 cm2
320.1 − 320
β 31 × 10 −7
∴ Coefficient of linear expansion, α= = = 15.5 × 10 −7 / °C
2 2
8. THERMAL STRESS
If the ends of rods of length L0 are rigidly fixed and it is heated, its length L0 tends to increase due to increase in
temperature ∆T , but it is prevented from expansion. It results in setting up compressive or tensile stress in the rod
which is called the thermal stress.
Stress Y∆L YαL0 ∆T
As Y= , Stress=Y × Strain = = = Yα∆T The force, F, on rigid support is given by.
Strain L0 L0
Where A is area of cross-section of the rod.
If ∆T represent a decrease in temperature, then F/A and F are tensile stress and tensile force respectively.
Note: When the temperature of a gas enclosed in a vessel of rigid material is increased, then thermal stress is equal
to the increase in pressure ( ∆P ) and is given by: ∆P = Kγ∆T
Where K= bulk modulus of gas; γ =coefficient of cubical expansion; ∆T =increase in temperature
V∆P V∆P
V V (1 + γ∆T ) or V − V= Vγ∆T
Proof.= or ∆V= Vγ∆T now K = = ∴ ∆P =γK∆T
∆V γV∆T
Illustration 18: A steel wire of 2.0mm cross-section is held straight (but under no tension) by attaching it firmly to
two rigid walls at a distance 1.50 m apart, at 30o C. If the temperature now decreases to -10oC, and if the end points
remain fixed, what will be the tension in the wire? For steel, Y = 200 000M Pa (JEE MAIN)
Sol: Here the concept of strain is applicable with linear expansion. Decreased temp. tends to decrease the length
of wire but strain keep it intact.
Conceptualize: If free to do so, the wire would contract but since we have tied its ends, it will not contract and
maintain its original length.
Classify: Until now we have seen when the length of a wire is changed, it produces strain and hence stress. This
situation is different as strain will be produced because of wire maintaining its length. At a lower temperature
the wire would have an unstrained length smaller than the original length. However since its ends are tied, it will
maintain its length but develop strain. Or in other words it has longer length than what it would have had at this
temperature if not tied at its ends.
Compute: If free to do so, the wire would contract a distance ∆L as it cooled, where
( ) ( )
∆L =αL, ∆T = 1.2 × 10−5 0 C−1 (1.5m) 400 C =7.2 × 10−4 m
But the ends are fixed. As a result, forces at the ends must, in effect, stretch the wire this same length, ∆L . Therefore,
PROBLEM-SOLVING TACTICS
While solving a problem of heat transfer in these cases, do look for state changes because that’s where students
generally make a mistake. State changes cause some of the energy to be used up as latent heat and hence must
be taken care of always.
P hysi cs | 15.17
FORMULAE SHEET
1. Type of thermal expansion
Coefficient of expansion For temperature change ∆t change in
1 ∆
(i) Linear α =Lim Length ∆= 0 α∆t
∆t →0 0 ∆t
1 ∆A
(ii) Superficial β =Lim Area ∆A= A0β∆t
∆t →0 A 0 ∆t
1 ∆V
(iii) Volume γ =Lim Volume ∆V= V0 γ∆t
∆t →0 V0 ∆t
Variation in density: With increase of temperature volume increases so density decreases and vice-versa.
ρ0
= ρ ≈ ρ0 (1 − r ∆ T)
(1 + γ∆t )
Thermal Stress: A rod of length 0 is clamped between two fixed walls with distance 0 .
F
If temperature is changed by amount ∆t then stress= (area assumed to be constant)
A
∆ F/A F 0 F
Strain= ; so,=Y = − or F=YA α∆t
0 ∆ / 0 A∆ Aα∆t F F
• ∆Q = mc∆T where c: Specific heat capacity l0
• ∆Q = nC∆T C: Molar heat capacity Figure 15.6
• mL L: latent heat of substance
Heat transfer in phase change : ∆Q =
• 1 Calorie= 4.18 joules of mechanical work
• Law of Calorimetry: heat released by one of the substances = Heat absorbed by other substances.
Solved Examples
( 0.0kg) ( 4200JKg−1 °
C−1 ) (30°C ) =
1260 J
(
= m × 3.75 × 10 4 JKg−1 )
Heat required to melt the bullet
The heat required to bring the ice to 0°C is
Sol: Some water evaporates and Heat of vaporization Mass of water = 0.2kg;
comes from water itself and hence remaining water Mass of iron = 0.2kg
freezes by giving the heat for vaporization.
Temp. of aluminum and water = 20°C = 293K
Total mass of water=M=100g. Latent heat of vaporization
Temperature of iron = 100°C = 373K
of water at 0°C=L1=21.0×105Jkg-1 latent heat of fusion
of ice= L2= 3.36 ×105 JKg−1 . Suppose, the mass of the Specific heat aluminum = 910J/kg-K
ice formed = m. Then the mass of water evaporated Specific heat of iron = 470J/kg-K
= M – m. Heat taken by the water to evaporate = (M
– m)L1 and heat given by the water in freezing=mL2. Specific heat of water = 4200J/kg-K
Thus, mL2= (M-m) L1 Heat gain = Heat lost;
ML1 (100g) ( 2.10 ×10 6
JKg −1
) = 86g. ⇒ (T − 293)(0.5 × 910 + 0.2 × 4200)
or, m = =
L1 + L2 ( 21.0 + 3.36 )105 −1
JKg =0.2 × 470 × (373 − T)
JEE Advanced/Boards Sol: Here the amount air remains while P, V and T all
parameters changes. Hence PV/T =constant.
Example 1: An open glass tube is immersed in mercury Volume of the bubble of lake
in such a way that a length of 8cm extends above the
4 3 4
πr1 = π ( 0.18 ) cm3
3
mercury level. The open end of the tube is then closed = V1 =
and raised further by 44 cm. What will be the length of 3 3
the air column above mercury in the tube? Atmospheric Pressure on the bubble P1
pressure= 76 cm of mercury. = Atmospheric pressure + Pressure due to a column of
250 cm of water
Sol: Air column will get trapped and follow PV=constant.
= 76 × 13.6 × 980 + 250 × 1× 980
Let A be the area of cross section of the tube.
= ( 76 × 13.6 + 250 ) 980dyne / cm2 ; T1 = ?
x cm Volume of the bubble at the surface of lake
4 3 4
πr2 = π ( 0.2 ) cm3
3
52cm V2 =
3 3
8 cm (52-x) Pressure on the bubble P2
cm =Atmospheric pressure = 76 × 13.6 × 980 dyne / cm2
= x2 + 24x
or 608 ∴ T1 = 1283.35 -273=10.35°C
or x2 + 24x − 608
Example 3: A mixture of 250 gm of water and 200
gm of ice at 0°C is kept in a calorimeter which has a
( 24 )
2
−24 ± − 4 × 608
= 0,=
x water equivalent of 50 gm. If 200 gm of a steam at
2 100°C is passed through this mixture, calculate the
∴x=15.2cm or x =−39.4 cm final temperature and weight of the content of the
calorimeter. Latent heat of fusion of ice=80 Cal/gm.
Which is negative
latent heat of vaporization of water of steam=540cal/
∴ The length of air column =15.4cm gm., Specific heat of water=1cal/gm./°C.
Example 2: An air bubble starts rising from bottom Sol: Latent heat of vaporization of water is approx. 7
of a lake. Its diameter is 3.6 mm at the bottom and 4 times of latent heat of fusion. So 1g steam can melt
mm at the surface. The depth of the lake is 250 cm about 7g of ice. The mass of steam equals to mass of
and the temperature at the surface is 40°C. What is ice, so part of steam is condensed to melt the ice.
the temperature at the bottom of the lake? Given Heat lost by 200 gm. of steam before it is condensed to
atmospheric pressure=76 cm of Hg and g=980cm/sec2. water at 100°C
P hysi cs | 15.21
Sol: Total amount of heat lost by the steam will bring = 1000 cm3 – x cm3
the water and calorimeter to 50 degree temp. remaining At any Temperature ‘T’ –
heat would have been used to melt the ice.
Volume of flask = 1000 + 1000 x 3 αg ∆ T. …(i)
Heat is lost by steam in getting condensed and heat
is gained by the water, ice and the calorimeter. Let and Volume of Hg = x + x × γm × ∆T …(ii)
1 5 . 2 2 | Calorimetr y and Thermal Expansion
∴ Loss of the weight of the piece of metal in liquid = Length of second rod at 25°C, l2=70cm
46-30 = 16gm = Weight of liquid displaced If α1 and α2 are respective linear expansion coefficients,
Volume of liquid Displaced the total expansion of the composite rod when the